Xpri Ns v5.3 User's Guide

NONLINEAR EDITING SOFTWARE

NS-N2100 PROXY NONLINEAR EDITING SOFTWARE

NS-N1000P TOUCH PANEL OPTION

NS-CAT1

XPRI DIGITAL CONTENT CREATION SYSTEM

OPERATION MANUAL [English] 1st Edition (Revised 10) Software Version 5.3 and Later (for Windows 7)

NOTICE TO USERS Documentation © 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2012 Sony Corporation. All rights reserved. This manual or the software described herein, in whole or in part, may not be reproduced, translated or reduced to any machine readable form without prior written approval from Sony Corporation. SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON TORT, CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF. Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any modification to this manual or the information contained herein at any time without notice. The software described herein may also be governed by the terms of a separate user license agreement. About Trademarks • XPRI and the XPRI logo are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation. • XDCAM and XDCAM EX are trademarks of Sony Corporation. • Adobe, Acrobat and After Effects are registered trademarks, and Acrobat Reader is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. • QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks used under license. The QuickTime logo is registered in the USA and other countries. • Windows, Windows Media and DirectX are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries. • P2, DVCPRO, and DVCPRO50 are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation. • Canon and Canon products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Canon, Inc. • Matrox is a registered trademark, and Matrox MXO2 is a trademark of Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd. • Android is a trademark of Google, Inc. • Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Other system names, product names, and company names appearing in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. In this manual such names are not indicated by ® or TM marks.

MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2 PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206 “PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage media storing MPEG-2 video information such as DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for their own business from MPEG LA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206 http://www.mpegla.com MPEG-4 License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/sales of any storage media storing MPEG-4 Visual video information (ii) distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4 Visual video information in any manner (such as online video distribution service, internet broadcasting, TV broadcasting). Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206, http://www.mpegla.com

Table of Contents Chapter 1 Overview Overview.....................................................................22 About XPRI NS/XPRI NS Proxy.................................. 22 XPRI NS Editing Software Features............................. 22 XPRI NS Proxy Limitations ......................................... 23 Precautions for Using XPRI NS.................................... 23 Data Sources, Vaults, Projects, and Clips ..............24 Data Sources and Vaults ............................................... 24 Projects.......................................................................... 25 Clips .............................................................................. 25 Common Window Controls ......................................29 Custom Window Layouts..........................................30 Changing Window Sizes ............................................... 30 Converting Windows to Tabs ....................................... 32 Changing the Date Display Format............................... 32

Chapter 2 Starting and Exiting Starting XPRI NS........................................................34 Exiting XPRI NS........................................................... 34 Fast Login Window....................................................35 Configuration List Dialog..........................................36 Taskbar.......................................................................38 Overview ....................................................................... 38 Names and Functions of Parts....................................... 39 Taskbar Menu ............................................................40 Taskbar Settings Dialog............................................41 Names and Functions of Parts....................................... 42

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer Project Explorer.........................................................43 To Start Project Explorer .............................................. 43 Names and Functions of Parts....................................... 44 Project Explorer Tool Buttons..................................46 Project Explorer Main Menu .....................................48 List View Pane Display Modes .................................51 Picture View Mode ....................................................... 51 Text View Mode ........................................................... 53 Picture and Text View Mode ........................................ 55 Metadata Window ......................................................56 Names and Functions of Parts....................................... 57

Table of Contents

3

Modifying Metadata...................................................... 57 New Project Dialog ....................................................58 Overview ....................................................................... 58 To Open the New Project Dialog.................................. 58 Names and Functions of Parts....................................... 59 Format Tab .................................................................... 60 Media Vaults Tab.......................................................... 61 Stream Defaults Tab...................................................... 62 Creating Clips ............................................................63 Operations in the Tree View Pane............................64 Displaying the Contents of Container Items ................. 64 Selecting Items .............................................................. 64 Creating New Project Groups ....................................... 64 Creating New Bins ........................................................ 65 Opening a New Project Explorer Window to Manage Selected Items...................................................... 65 Changing the Project Explorer Window View ............. 65 Copying Bins................................................................. 65 Moving Projects or Bins to Other Locations ................ 66 Putting Bins Into the Trash ........................................... 66 Retrieving Bins From the Trash.................................... 66 Emptying the Trash ....................................................... 67 Renaming Items ............................................................ 67 Searching for Bins Using the First Letter of the Name ............................................................................. 67 Operations in the List View Pane.............................68 Selecting Items .............................................................. 68 Copying Items ............................................................... 69 Moving Items to Other Locations ................................. 70 Putting Items Into the Trash.......................................... 70 Retrieving Items From the Trash .................................. 70 Modifying Items............................................................ 71 Color Marking Items ..................................................... 71 Picture Icon Play - Checking Video on the Icon........... 71 Search Dialog.............................................................74 Overview ....................................................................... 74 To Open the Search Dialog........................................... 74 Names and Functions of Parts....................................... 75 Searching With the Search Dialog ...........................79 Searching for Items with the Search Dialog ................. 79 Searching for Clips in Sequences with the Search Dialog ............................................................................. 79 Searching for Clips on XDCAM with the Search Dialog ............................................................................. 79

4

Table of Contents

Narrowing Down a Search ............................................ 79 Working With XDCAM Material.................................81

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing Overview (Creating Clips).........................................82 Logging Tool..............................................................83 Overview....................................................................... 83 To Start the Logging Tool............................................. 83 Names and Functions of Parts....................................... 84 Logging Tool tool buttons............................................. 87 Logging Tool Main Menu............................................. 91 Reel Database Dialog ................................................93 Names and Functions of Parts....................................... 94 Reel Database Dialog Main Menu ................................ 95 Reel Information Dialog ............................................... 96 Handling Reels...........................................................97 Selecting Reels .............................................................. 97 Creating New Reels ...................................................... 97 Renaming Reels ............................................................ 97 Deleting Reels ............................................................... 97 Creating Clips ............................................................99 Creating Reel Clips ....................................................... 99 Technical Monitor....................................................103 Overview..................................................................... 103 To Start the Technical Monitor................................... 103 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 104 Batch Digitize Tool ..................................................106 Overview ..................................................................... 106 To Start the Batch Digitize Tool ................................. 106 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 107 Batch Digitize Tool Command Buttons...................... 108 Batch Digitize Tool Main Menu ................................. 109 Batch Digitizing of Multiple Clips...........................110 Generate SG Clip Tool ............................................111 Overview ..................................................................... 111 To Start the Generate SG Clip Tool............................ 111 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 112 Generate SG Clip Tool Main Menu............................ 113 Creating SG Clips ....................................................114 Creating Color Clips................................................115 Creating Color Clips ................................................... 115 Editing Color Matte Clips ........................................... 115

Table of Contents

5

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files Import File Tool........................................................116 Overview ..................................................................... 116 To Start the Import File Tool ...................................... 116 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 117 Import File Tool Command Button Area.................... 120 Import File Tool Main Menu ...................................... 121 Open File Dialog......................................................... 122 Picture Adjust Tool..................................................125 Overview ..................................................................... 125 To Start the Picture Adjust Tool ................................. 125 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 126 Import DVD Tool ......................................................128 Overview ..................................................................... 128 To Start the Import DVD Tool.................................... 128 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 129 Import DVD Tool Command Button Area ................. 131 Import CD Audio Tool .............................................132 Overview ..................................................................... 132 To Start the Import CD Audio Tool............................ 132 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 133 Import CD Audio Tool Command Button Area ......... 135 Import CD Audio Tool Main Menu ............................ 135 Audio CD Database Dialog......................................... 137 Creating Clips by Importing Files and Audio Material ..............................................................139 Importing External Media Files .................................. 139 To adjust imported images and audio ......................... 139 Importing DVD Video Material.................................. 140 Importing CD Audio Material..................................... 140

Chapter 6 Editing Tools Overview (Editing Tools) ........................................142 Customizing the Operating Screens ............................ 142 Source Viewer..........................................................144 Overview ..................................................................... 144 To Start the Source Viewer......................................... 144 Switching the Source Viewer Operating Mode .......... 144 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 145 Source Viewer Command Button Area (Normal Mode) ........................................................................... 148 Source Viewer Command Button Area (Digitize Mode) ........................................................................... 155

6

Table of Contents

Source Viewer Main Menu (Normal Mode)............... 157 Source Viewer Main Menu (Digitize Mode) .............. 158 Master Viewer ..........................................................160 Overview ..................................................................... 160 To Start the Master Viewer......................................... 160 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 161 Master Viewer Command Button Area ...................... 162 Master Viewer Main Menu ......................................... 169 Timeline Editor.........................................................171 Overview ..................................................................... 171 To Start the Timeline Editor ....................................... 171 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 172 Storyboard................................................................... 174 Timeline ...................................................................... 175 Track Panel ................................................................. 177 Timeline Operations.................................................... 178 Context Menu for Timeline Clips ............................... 180 Timeline Editor Command Button Area..................... 182 Timeline Editor Main Menu ....................................... 189 Timeline View Main Menu......................................... 193 Timeline Settings Dialog ............................................ 195 Sequence Settings Dialog............................................ 195 Sequence Template Settings Dialog ........................... 197 Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool .................................. 198 Clip Composite Dialog................................................ 199 Multiple Camera Editor ...........................................201 Overview ..................................................................... 201 To Start the Multiple Camera Editor........................... 201 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 202 Timeline (Multiple Camera Editor) ............................ 204 Multiple Camera Editor Command Button Area ........ 205 Multiple Camera Editor Main Menu........................... 208 Transition Setting Dialog ............................................ 210 Multi Camera Recording Modes................................. 211 Trim Viewer ..............................................................212 Overview ..................................................................... 212 To Start the Trim Viewer ............................................ 212 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 213 Exiting the Trim Viewer ............................................. 213 Trim Viewer Trim Modes .........................................215 Overview ..................................................................... 215 Single Trim ................................................................. 216 Dual Trim (AB-Side Trim) ......................................... 216 Slip Trim ..................................................................... 216

Table of Contents

7

Slide Trim ................................................................... 216 Selecting a Trim Mode................................................ 216 Trim Viewer Command Button Area ......................218 Trim Viewer Main Menu...........................................223 Render To Bin Dialog ..............................................224 Overview ..................................................................... 224 To Open the Render To Bin Dialog ............................ 224 Marker List Dialog ...................................................227 Timecode Window ...................................................229 Speed Control Dialogs ............................................231 Overview ..................................................................... 231 Simple Speed Control Dialogs.................................... 231 Basic Speed Control Dialog........................................ 232 Detailed Speed Control Dialog ................................... 235

Chapter 7 Editing Operations Sequence Editing Operations ................................243 Setting Edit Points....................................................... 243 Overwrite Editing........................................................ 247 Splice-In Editing ......................................................... 250 Replace Editing ........................................................... 252 Switching the Timecode Display Mode...................... 253 Key Track Operations ................................................. 253 Sequence-in-Sequence Function ................................. 253 Sequence Cut, Copy, and Paste Operations ................ 255 Edit While Digitizing ................................................256 Linear-Like Editing ..................................................258 Flow of Operations...................................................... 258 Switching the Source Viewer Operating Mode .......... 260 Creating Reel Clips ..................................................... 260 Mixing Clips of Different Frame Sizes ...................262 Storyboard Editing ..................................................265 Selecting an Editing Mode .......................................... 265 Exchanging Storyboard Clips ..................................... 265 Editing Storyboard Clips............................................. 266 Creating Speed Clips ..............................................270 Creating Speed Clips From Clips on the Timeline ..... 270 Creating Speed Clips using Command Buttons .......... 270 Creating a Speed Clip That Fits Into a Specified Duration ............................................................. 271 Creating Still Images................................................... 271 Editing Speed Clips..................................................... 272

8

Table of Contents

Creating Composite Clips.......................................273 Creating Composite Clips From Clips on the Timeline ........................................................................... 273 Creating Composite Clips From XDCAM Explorer... 274 Combining Tracks or Clips on the Timeline .........275 Collapsing Tracks ....................................................... 275 Grouping Tracks or Clips on Tracks........................... 275 Trimming Operations ..............................................277 Adjusting Transition Start and End Points.................. 277 Adding, Deleting, and Adjusting Transition Effects... 278 Previewing Transitions ............................................... 279 Quick Trim................................................................280 Overview ..................................................................... 280 Trimming in Composer Mode..................................... 280 Trimming in Segment Mode ....................................... 281 Adjusting the Clip Level..........................................283 Audio Rubber Band Function.................................284 Adjusting Track Fader Levels..................................... 284 Operating on Track Fader Level Rubber Bands Whenever You Operate on Clips ........................................ 287 Audio Automation....................................................... 287 Mixing Down Audio Tracks.....................................288 Timeline Searching..................................................289 Reverse Match Frame ................................................. 289 Detection of Duplicate Clips and Frames ................... 290 Detection of Flash Frames .......................................... 290 Detection of Media Offline Clips................................ 291 Detection of Sections Containing Only Proxy Media ........................................................................... 292 Rendering.................................................................293 Adjusting White Balance Automatically ................294 Working With After Effects .....................................295 Starting After Effects .................................................. 295

Chapter 8 Effect Tools FX Explorer ..............................................................296 Overview ..................................................................... 296 To Start FX Explorer................................................... 296 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 297 FX Explorer Tree View Pane ...................................298 Overview ..................................................................... 298 Items in the Tree View Pane ....................................... 298 Tree View Pane Operations ........................................ 298

Table of Contents

9

FX Explorer Effect View Pane.................................300 Overview ..................................................................... 300 Effect View Pane Operations ...................................... 300 Picture View Mode (FX Explorer).............................. 300 Text View Mode (FX Explorer).................................. 301 Applying Effects to Clips on the Timeline.............302 Transition Options Dialog........................................... 302 Keyframe Application Adjustments............................ 303 FX Explorer Tool Buttons .......................................304 FX Explorer Main Menu...........................................305 FX Properties Dialog ...............................................306 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 306 Operating on Effects on the Timeline....................307 Operating on Transition Effects .................................. 307 Video Effect Editor ..................................................308 Simple Effect Editor.................................................... 308 Effect List.................................................................... 311 Full Effect Editor ........................................................ 311 Effect Editor Basic Operations...............................318 Editing Effects............................................................. 318 Previewing Effects ...................................................... 318 Parameter Adjustments in the Effect Viewer ........319 Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels ..........320 Adjusting Parameters With the Media Bar Control Panel .................................................................. 320 Keyframe Operations ..............................................321 Enabling and Disabling Keyframe Mode.................... 321 Creating Keyframes .................................................... 321 Selecting the Target Keyframe of an Operation ......... 322 Changing Keyframe Positions .................................... 322 Changing Keyframe Content ...................................... 323 Effect Editor Command Button Area .....................324 Effect Editor Main Menu..........................................330 Rotospline Masks ....................................................331 Operating Procedure ................................................... 331 Rotospline Mask Parameters....................................... 332 Using the Rotospline Mask Tools............................... 332 Rotospline Tracks ....................................................... 335 Importing and Exporting Keyframes .......................... 336 Motion Tracking.......................................................338 Tracking Methods ....................................................... 338 Example Operating Procedures................................... 339 Tracking Plate Settings ............................................... 349 Using Tracking Data ................................................... 350

10

Table of Contents

Chromakey Operations ...........................................353 Flow of Operations...................................................... 353 Advanced Chromakey Parameters .............................. 353 Secondary Color Corrector ....................................355 Setting Parameters....................................................... 356 Changing Colors With the Secondary Color Corrector ........................................................................... 358 Color Palette Dialog ................................................359 Gradient Color Tab ..................................................... 361 Color Selection Tab .................................................... 362 Gradient Template Tab ............................................... 364 Texture Tab ................................................................. 365 Advanced Color Corrector......................................366 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 367 Color Corrector Viewers ............................................. 369 Color Corrector Properties Dialog .............................. 371 Advanced Color Corrector Main Menu ...................... 372 Correcting Colors Using the HSL Group.................... 372 Correcting Colors Using the Curves Group................ 375 Correcting Colors Using the Secondary Group .......... 376 After Making Color Corrections ................................. 377 Audio Effect Editor ..................................................379 Overview ..................................................................... 379 VST Plug-Ins............................................................... 379 DX Plug-Ins ................................................................ 379 Simple Effect Editor (for Audio Effects).................... 379 Audio Effect List......................................................... 383 Full Effect Editor (for Audio Effects)......................... 383 Effect Editor Basic Operations (for Audio Effects) ............................................................................390 Editing Effects............................................................. 390 Previewing Effects ...................................................... 390 Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels (for Audio Effects)...............................................................391 Adjusting Parameters With the Media Bar Control Panel .................................................................. 391 Keyframe Operations (for Audio Effects)..............392 Enabling and Disabling Keyframe Mode.................... 392 Creating Keyframes .................................................... 392 Selecting the Target Keyframe of an Operation ......... 393 Changing Keyframe Positions .................................... 393 Changing Keyframe Content ...................................... 394 Effect Editor Command Button Area (for Audio Effects)...............................................................395 Effect Editor Main Menu (for Audio Effects) .........399

Table of Contents

11

Voice Disguise Function.........................................400

Chapter 9 CG Clips Creating CG Clips....................................................403 Specifying the Track and Mode for CG Clips ............ 403 CG Editor..................................................................405 To start the CG Editor ................................................. 405 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 406 CG Editor Command Button Area..........................407 CG Editor Main Menu ..............................................411 Plates ........................................................................412 Animation Plate........................................................... 412 Art Word Plate ............................................................ 412 Circle Plate.................................................................. 412 Clock Plate .................................................................. 413 Curve Plate.................................................................. 413 Image Plate.................................................................. 413 Material Plate .............................................................. 413 Polygon Plate .............................................................. 413 Scroll Screen Plate ...................................................... 414 Subtitle Plate ............................................................... 414 Text Plate .................................................................... 414 Font Plate .................................................................... 414 Color Selection Plate................................................... 415 CG Filter Dialog .......................................................416 Scroll Speed Dialog.................................................418 To open the Scroll Speed dialog ................................. 418 Subtitle Editor ..........................................................419 To start the Subtitle Editor .......................................... 419 CG Templates ..........................................................420 Creating CG Templates............................................... 420 Copying CG Templates............................................... 420 Trimming CG Templates ............................................ 420 Simple CG Editor .....................................................421 To start the Simple CG Editor..................................... 421 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 422 Working With TitleMotion .......................................423

Chapter 10 Audio Tools Audio Input Tool ......................................................424 Overview ..................................................................... 424 To Start the Audio Input Tool..................................... 424 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 425

12

Table of Contents

Audio Input Tool Main Menu..................................... 426 Audio Input Tool Operations ..................................428 Changing Audio Levels .............................................. 428 Setting Fader Groupings ............................................. 428 Changing the Meter Display ....................................... 428 Audio Equalizer .......................................................429 Overview ..................................................................... 429 To Start the Audio Equalizer ...................................... 429 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 430 Equalizer Operation Section of the Audio Equalizer ........................................................................... 431 Audio Equalizer Main Menu....................................... 431 Audio Equalizer Operations ...................................433 Displaying the Equalizer Curve .................................. 433 Making Equalizer Settings .......................................... 433 Applying Equalizer Settings ....................................... 433 Audio Mixer ..............................................................434 Overview ..................................................................... 434 To Start the Audio Mixer ............................................ 434 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 435 Track Display Section of the Audio Mixer................. 435 Track Name Display of the Audio Mixer ................... 437 Clip Level Adjustment Section of the Audio Mixer ... 437 Track Fader of the Audio Mixer ................................. 438 Wave Pipe Displays of the Audio Mixer .................... 438 PAN Slider of the Audio Mixer .................................. 439 Audio Meter of the Audio Mixer ................................ 439 Audio Mixer Main Menu ............................................ 439 Audio Mixer Operations ..........................................441 Using the Audio Rubber Band Function..................... 441 Turning the Track Solo Function On and Off............. 441 Routing Tracks to the PGM Busses ............................ 441 Clip Audio Control Tool ..........................................442 To Start the Clip Audio Control Tool ......................... 442 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 443 Clip Audio Control Tool Main Menu ......................... 445 Fader of the Clip Audio Control Tool......................... 445 Audio Meter of the Clip Audio Control Tool ............. 446 Audio Group Bus Routing Tool..............................447 Overview ..................................................................... 447 To Start the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool .............. 447 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 448 Audio Group Bus Routing Tool Main Menu .............. 448

Table of Contents

13

Audio Group Bus Fader ..........................................450 Overview ..................................................................... 450 To Start the Audio Group Bus Fader .......................... 450 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 451 PGM Bus Name of the Audio Group Bus Fader ........ 452 PGM Bus Fader of the Audio Group Bus Fader......... 452 Meter of the Audio Group Bus Fader ......................... 453 Audio Group Bus Fader Main Menu .......................... 453 Audio Output Tool ...................................................454 Overview ..................................................................... 454 To Start the Audio Output Tool .................................. 454 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 454 Audio Output Tool Main Menu .................................. 456 Audio Voice Over Tool ............................................457 Overview ..................................................................... 457 To Start the Audio Voice Over Tool........................... 457 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 458 Audio Voice Over Tool Main Menu........................... 459 Audio Voice Over Tool Operations ........................460 Preparing for Voice Over Operations on the Timeline ........................................................................... 460 Starting the Audio Voice Over Tool ........................... 460 Preparing for Voice Over Operations in the Audio Voice Over Tool........................................................... 460 Executing Voice Over Operations .............................. 460 Auto Dissolve of Voice Over Clips ............................ 461 Prompter...................................................................462 To Start the Prompter .................................................. 462 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 463 Prompter Main Menu .................................................. 463

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions Overview (Dolby E)..................................................465 XPRI NS Functions Supporting Dolby E ................... 465 Logging Tool............................................................467 Logging Properties Dialog......................................468 Import File Tool/Export Dialog/Export MXF Dialog ............................................................................469 Exporting Dolby E Stream Media Files ...................... 469 Importing Dolby E Stream Media Files ...................... 469 Project Explorer.......................................................470 Metadata Window ....................................................... 471 Clip Properties Dialog................................................. 472

14

Table of Contents

Timeline Editor.........................................................473 Audio Stream Track .................................................... 474 Source Viewer..........................................................475 Timeline Editor Properties Dialog..........................476 Audio Group Bus Routing Tool..............................477 Audio Group Bus Fader ..........................................478 Audio Output Tool ...................................................479 Record to VTR Tool .................................................480 XDCAM Explorer......................................................481 Importing Dolby E Stream Media Files by using XDCAM Import Tool........................................ 481 Exporting Dolby E Stream Media Files by using XDCAM Export Tool........................................ 481 Render to Bin Dialog ...............................................482

Chapter 12 Output DVD Export Tool ......................................................483 Overview ..................................................................... 483 To Start the DVD Export Tool.................................... 483 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 484 DVD Export Tool Command Button Area ................. 485 Recording to Disc....................................................486 Record to VTR Tool .................................................487 Overview ..................................................................... 487 To Start the Record to VTR Tool................................ 487 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 488 Record to VTR Tool Command Button Area ............. 491 Record to VTR Tool Main Menu................................ 492 Recording to Tape ...................................................494 Recording in Crash Rec Mode .................................... 494 Recording in Assemble Edit Mode ............................. 494 Recording in First Edit + Assemble Mode.................. 494 Recording in Insert Edit Mode.................................... 495 Export Dialog ...........................................................496 Overview ..................................................................... 496 To Open the Export Dialog......................................... 496 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 497 Export Options Dialog ................................................ 500 Export MXF Dialog...................................................505 Overview ..................................................................... 505 To Open the Export MXF Dialog ............................... 505 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 506 Exporting Clips ........................................................508

Table of Contents

15

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM XDCAM Explorer......................................................509 Overview ..................................................................... 509 To Start XDCAM Explorer......................................... 510 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 511 XDCAM Explorer Tool Buttons................................. 514 XDCAM Explorer Command Button Area ................ 516 XDCAM Explorer Main Menu ................................... 517 Link to Virtual Media Dialog ...................................519 Overview ..................................................................... 519 To Link to Virtual Media ............................................ 519 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 520 XDCAM Import Tool.................................................521 Overview ..................................................................... 521 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 522 To Load Clips from XDCAM Explorer...................... 523 Import Timeline Clip Tool .......................................525 Overview ..................................................................... 525 To start the Import Timeline Clip Tool....................... 525 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 526 XDCAM Export Tool ................................................527 Overview..................................................................... 527 To Start the XDCAM Export Tool ............................. 527 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 528 Clip Tab....................................................................... 529 Combination Tab......................................................... 532 PD-EDL Tab ............................................................... 534 Sequence Tab .............................................................. 536 P2 Export Tool .........................................................538 Overview..................................................................... 538 To Start the P2 Export Tool ........................................ 538 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 539 Clip Tab....................................................................... 540 Combination Tab......................................................... 542 XDCAM Archive (XDA) ............................................544 Overview ..................................................................... 544 Supported Formats ...................................................... 545 Setup Configuration .................................................... 545 To Open the Export to XDA Dialog ........................... 545 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 546 Archiving Clips to XDCAM Archive ......................... 547 Retrieving Clips from XDCAM Archive.................... 548

16

Table of Contents

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF EDL Overview ..........................................................549 Usable Formats ........................................................... 549 Import EDL Tool.......................................................550 Overview ..................................................................... 550 To Start the Import EDL Tool..................................... 550 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 551 Import EDL Options Dialog ....................................... 553 Importing EDL Files.................................................554 Export EDL Tool ......................................................555 Overview ..................................................................... 555 To Start the Export EDL Tool..................................... 555 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 556 Export EDL Options Dialog ....................................... 558 Exporting EDL Files ................................................559 AAF Overview ..........................................................560 Import AAF Tool ......................................................561 To Start the Import AAF Tool .................................... 561 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 562 Importing AAF Files ................................................564 Export AAF Tool ......................................................565 Overview ..................................................................... 565 To Start the Export AAF Tool .................................... 565 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 566 Export AAF Options Dialog ....................................... 568 Exporting AAF Files ................................................569

Chapter 15 Customization Customization Functions........................................570 Command Button Customize window ........................ 570 Keyboard Customize window..................................... 572 Control Panel Customize window............................... 574

Chapter 16 System Settings Overview...................................................................577 Configuration Dialog ...............................................578 Overview ..................................................................... 578 To Open the Configuration Dialog ............................. 578 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 578 System Properties Dialog .......................................581 Overview ..................................................................... 581 To Open the System Properties Dialog....................... 581 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 582

Table of Contents

17

Device Properties Dialog ........................................584 Overview..................................................................... 584 To Open the Device Properties Dialog ....................... 584 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 585 Download Editing Settings Dialog .........................591 Overview ..................................................................... 591 To Open the Download Editing Settings Dialog ........ 591 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 592 Project Explorer Properties Dialog ........................593 Overview ..................................................................... 593 To Open the Project Explorer Properties Dialog ........ 593 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 594 Metadata Window Properties Dialog .....................598 Overview ..................................................................... 598 To Open the Metadata Window Properties Dialog..... 598 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 599 Logging Properties Dialog......................................601 Overview ..................................................................... 601 To Open the Logging Properties Dialog ..................... 601 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 602 Pre-Edit Properties Dialog ......................................605 Overview ..................................................................... 605 To Open the Pre-Edit Properties Dialog ..................... 605 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 606 Timeline Editor Properties Dialog..........................607 Overview ..................................................................... 607 To Open the Timeline Editor Properties Dialog ......... 607 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 608 Batch Properties Dialog..........................................621 Overview ..................................................................... 621 To Open the Batch Properties Dialog ......................... 621 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 622 Effect Editor Properties Dialog ..............................624 Overview ..................................................................... 624 To Open the Effect Editor Properties Dialog.............. 624 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 625 CG Editor Properties Dialog ...................................628 Overview ..................................................................... 628 To Open the CG Editor Properties Dialog .................. 628 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 629 Import File Settings Dialog .....................................632 Overview..................................................................... 632 To Open the Import File Settings Dialog.................... 632 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 633

18

Table of Contents

Export Settings Dialog ............................................634 Overview..................................................................... 634 To Open the Export Settings Dialog ........................... 634 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 635 XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog .......................636 Overview ..................................................................... 636 To Open the XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog..... 637 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 638 XDCAM Tab............................................................... 640 XDCAM EX Tab ........................................................ 641 XDCAM UDF Tab...................................................... 642 XDCAM Station Tab .................................................. 643 Canon XF Tab............................................................. 644 P2 Tab ......................................................................... 645 XDCAM Device Settings Dialog..............................646 Overview ..................................................................... 646 To Open the XDCAM Device Settings Dialog........... 646 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 647 Project Properties Dialog........................................649 Overview ..................................................................... 649 To Open the Project Properties Dialog ....................... 649 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 650 General Properties Dialog ......................................654 Overview ..................................................................... 654 To Open the General Properties Dialog ...................... 654 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 655 Record to VTR Settings Dialog ..............................657 Overview ..................................................................... 657 To Open the Record to VTR Settings Dialog ............. 657 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 658 Making System and Editing Settings.....................660 System Properties Dialog............................................ 660 Project Explorer Properties Dialog ............................. 660 Logging Properties Dialog .......................................... 660 Timeline Editor Properties Dialog .............................. 661 Project Properties Dialog ............................................ 661 User Setting Management ......................................662 Open File Dialog - Opening User Settings Files ............................................................................664 Overview ..................................................................... 664 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 665 Save As Dialog - Saving User Settings Files ........667 Overview ..................................................................... 667 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 668

Table of Contents

19

User Layouts............................................................670 User Layout Operations .............................................. 670 Default User Layouts .................................................. 670

Chapter 17 Backup and Restore Backup to Folder Dialog .........................................671 Overview ..................................................................... 671 To Open the Backup to Folder Dialog ........................ 671 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 672 Creating Backup Files.............................................673 Restore from File Dialog .........................................674 Overview ..................................................................... 674 To Open the Restore from File Dialog........................ 674 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 675 Restoring Backup Files...........................................676 Cleaning the Local Database..................................677 Overview ..................................................................... 677 Removing Redundant Media Files.............................. 677 Repairing the Local Database ..................................... 677 Deleting System Work Files ....................................... 677

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software Overview...................................................................679 Names and Functions of Parts..................................... 680 Focus Button Bar ........................................................ 682 Command Button Bar ................................................. 682 Operations using NS-CAT1 ....................................684 To Start NS-CAT1 and Connect to the PC ................. 684 To Disconnect from the PC......................................... 684 To Exit NS-CAT1 ....................................................... 684 Troubleshooting .......................................................... 684 Operating Modes .....................................................685 Touch Mode ................................................................ 685 Mouse Mode ............................................................... 688

Chapter 19 Working With Sonaps Overview...................................................................690 Start-up Configurations for Using Sonaps Servers ..... 690 Operating With Material List...................................692 Operating With Play List .........................................695 Download Editing ....................................................696

20

Table of Contents

Appendixes Effect List .................................................................697 Clip Effects ................................................................. 697 Transition Effects ........................................................ 792 CG Effects................................................................... 811 Command Button List .............................................814 Command Buttons Under the Play Tab ...................... 814 Command Buttons Under the Edit Tab....................... 817 Command Buttons Under the Special Tab.................. 824 Command Buttons Under the General Tab................. 830 Functions Available on the Control Panels ..........835 DMW-C1 Media Bar Control Panel ........................... 835 DMW-C2 Jog & Shuttle Control Panel ...................... 836 DMW-C3 Audio Control Panel .................................. 840 DMW-C5 Editing Control Panel................................. 842 Functions Available on the Keyboard ...................850 Global Shortcuts.......................................................... 850 Logging Tool............................................................... 850 Batch Digitize Tool ..................................................... 851 Import File Tool .......................................................... 851 Source Viewer............................................................. 851 Source Viewer (Digitize Mode).................................. 851 Multiple Camera Editor .............................................. 851 Trim Viewer ................................................................ 851 Video Effect Editor ..................................................... 851 Audio Effect Editor ..................................................... 851 CG Editor .................................................................... 851 Advanced Color Corrector .......................................... 851 Import CD Audio Tool................................................ 851 Record to VTR Tool ................................................... 852 Voice Over Tool.......................................................... 852 Master Viewer/Timeline Editor (full default listing) ........................................................................... 853 Record to VTR Tool ................................................... 854 Shortcut Keys ..........................................................855 Global.......................................................................... 855 Project Explorer .......................................................... 856 Source Viewer/Master Viewer.................................... 857 Timeline Editor ........................................................... 858 Multiple Camera Editor .............................................. 861 Effect Tools................................................................. 863 Other Tools ................................................................. 865 Glossary ...................................................................867 Index .........................................................................872

Table of Contents

21

Overview

Overview About XPRI NS/XPRI NS Proxy Overview of XPRI NS/XPRI NS Proxy The NS-N2100 Nonlinear Editing Software (called “XPRI NS” below) and the NS-N1000P Proxy Nonlinear Editing Software (called “XPRI NS Proxy” below) are nonlinear video editing applications. In addition to SDTV and HDTV formats, XPRI NS supports a wide variety of import file formats and delivers high quality and high performance. These applications provide all the functionality needed for sophisticated and efficient video editing, including easyto-use clip management tools and powerful timeline editing functions. The software is provided as part of an integrated editing environment, which also includes effect tools and audio tools.

Chapter

1

Related Manuals Installation manual This manual provides information about how to install the software and about connections for configuring an editing system. Online help This is the HTML help installed on your computer. It explains the user interface of XPRI NS and XPRI NS Proxy. To display the online help, select [Help] >[Editing Software Help...] from the taskbar menu, or select [Help...] from the menus of the various tools, or press F1 on the keyboard. Readme and Release Notes files The Readme and Release Notes files provide important information that could not be included in the system manuals, so be sure to read them.

XPRI NS Editing Software Features High-quality video signal processing

Note

There are certain functional differences between XPRI NS and XPRI NS Proxy. The explanations in this manual are based on XPRI NS but they apply to both applications. When necessary, differences and limitations that apply to XPRI NS Proxy are noted separately. Full explanations are provided for all tools and dialogs available in XPRI NS, although some tools and dialogs are not available in XPRI NS Proxy. See XPRI NS Proxy Limitations for a list of the tools and dialogs that are not available in XPRI NS Proxy.

• • • • • • • • • • •

22

Overview

HD 4:2:0 59.94i/50i 18/25/35 Mbps HD 4:2:2 50 Mbps (XDCAM, EX, AVCHD, NXCAM) DV/DVCAM 59.94i/50i HDV 59.94i/50i IMX 30/40/50 P2 59.94i/50i (DVCPRO 25/50/100 Mbps, AVC Intra, 50/100 Mbps) Mixing of 59.94i and 29.97p scan formats on 59.94i timeline Mixing of 50i and 25p scan formats on 50i timeline H.264: 1280 x 720 25p/29.97p/50p/59.94p, 1920 x 1080 25p/29.97p MPEG HD 50M: 1280 x 720 25p/29.97p/50p/59.94p, 1920 x 1080 25p/29.97p MPEG HD 35(EX)M: 1280 x 720 25p/29.97p/50p/ 59.94p, 1920 x 1080 25p/29.97p

1920 x 1080 59.94p/50p format is not supported.

Convenient operation

Touch control interface XPRI NS supports touch panel operation from a Sony SGPT111 or SGPT112 tablet (SONY Tablet S1) running version 3.2.1 (Release 2) of the AndroidTM operating system. NS-CAT1 device software is provided for installation on the tablet which, when the tablet is paired with a PC running XPRI NS, enables editing using multitouch gestures without the need for legacy hardware controllers and at a fraction of the cost. The only requirement on the PC is Bluetooth support using a Bluetooth adapter.

Chapter 1 Overview

Based on industry-standard conventions with further improvements to enhance ease of operation, the XPRI NS operating environment provides a consistent look across all modules. The control panels are efficient and easy to operate, reflecting Sony’s many years of experience in designing editing systems for the broadcast and production industries.

cause the Source Viewer and other viewers to display incorrectly. Do not perform these operations. • Disable the Windows Update function during use. • Peripheral devices (i.LINK devices, USB devices, 9-pin connection devices, etc.) should not be connected or disconnected and turned on or off while XPRI NS is running. Perform such operations before starting or after exiting XPRI NS. • During processes that require real-time functioning, do not perform operations that will increase the processing load, such as minimizing or maximizing a tool window. Doing so may result in dropped frames or noise.

User management by operating system groups Microsoft Windows allows users to be divided into groups with different privileges. To operate XPRI NS, users must be members of the Administrators group or the Power Users group.

XPRI NS Proxy Limitations The XPRI NS video editing software supports all standard functions. XPRI NS Proxy is software for proxy editing and supports only those features needed for proxy editing. The following tools and functions are not supported by XPRI NS Proxy. • Logging Tool • Batch Digitize tool • Digitize mode of the Source Viewer • Record to VTR tool • Export dialog • Record to VTR Settings dialog • Batch Properties dialog • Device Properties dialog • Export Settings dialog Even when a tool is supported, some functions may not be available in XPRI NS Proxy. Limitations, if any, are noted at the appropriate locations in this manual.

Precautions for Using XPRI NS Observe the following precautions when using XPRI NS. • Pressing Ctrl + Alt + Delete or having a screensaver running uses the Windows GPU resources, and may

Overview

23

Data Sources, Vaults, Projects, and Clips Data Sources and Vaults Data sources Chapter 1 Overview

Data sources are databases that store metadata about projects and clips created with XPRI NS. User settings for tools are also stored in data sources. Use the Data Source tab of the System Properties dialog to specify data sources to hold project and user settings.

Vaults All of the media files of project clips are stored in locations called vaults. Vaults are linked to the various data sources.

You can select the vaults to use in a project in the Project Properties dialog. Make vault settings in the Vaults tab of the System Properties dialog. As shown in the following figure, media files are created when you create clips by digitizing video and audio material. These media files are stored in the specified vaults. See “System Properties Dialog” (page 581) for more information. See “Project Properties Dialog” (page 649) for more information.

Data source Project

Digitize

Clips

Metadata

Link vaults and data source Video vault

Audio vault

Media files Video files

24

Data Sources, Vaults, Projects, and Clips

Audio files

• K: Key track • A1 to A8: Audio tracks

Projects are collections of the clips, titles, effects, and all of the other items used to create a broadcast program or other video work. You can use the Project Explorer tool to view and manage all items in a project except for effects. Effects are viewed and managed in the FX Explorer tool.

Index picture The index picture is a thumbnail image of a single frame in a clip containing video. You can specify which frame to use as the index picture at the time when the clip is created, and change it at a later time. Index pictures make it easier to identify the clip.

Clips

Clip type data Information about the clip, such as whether real-time play is possible.

Information held by all clips Clips for editing by XPRI NS can be classified into several clip types depending on the type of video or audio material they contain. But all clips contain the following information. See “Types of clips” (page 25) for more information about clip types.

Name The name assigned by the user when the clip was created, or a system-generated name. The name can be changed at a later time. FTC (File Timecode) The continuous timecode set for the entire clip. The start time value can be changed with Project Explorer. Timecode of start and end points, timecode of Mark In and Mark Out points Timecode for all of these points is specified at the time when the clip is created. The figure below shows how the points are related.

Total clip length

Other Other information, such as comments entered by the user at the time the clip was created.

Chapter 1 Overview

Projects

Types of clips XPRI NS is able to edit several types of clips. In addition to the common information held by all clips (see page 25), clips contain information that is specific to the clip type. Clips displayed in Project Explorer (reel clips, import clips, CD audio clips, voice over clips, SG clips, sequences, Render To Bin clips, MXF clips, CG clips, TitleMotion clips, XDCAM clips, EX clips, and P2 clips) can be distinguished by their type icons. The icons for the various clip types are shown below. Reel clips Clips created from signals on video tape. In addition to the common information, reel clips contain the following information. • Material reel name (name of video tape reel) • Timecode (LTC/VITC) information included on the material signals • Position information (start and end points, Mark In and Mark Out points) as recorded on the material on the tape • Video or audio adjustment data • Whether or not the clip has been digitized Import clips

Margin Start point

Duration (Mark In point to Mark Out point) Mark In point

Margin

Mark Out point

End point

The Mark In and Mark Out points can be changed after the clip is created, but the start and end points cannot be changed. Output track data (V, K, A1 to A8) The output tracks of the clip are specified by the user or by the system at the time when the clip is created. They cannot be changed. • V: Video track

Clips created from audio or video files (external media files) on the computer hard disk. The following external media file formats are supported. • Movie: AVI, Windows Media. • Image: BMP, JPG, TGA, TIFF, etc. • Sequential image files In addition to the common information, import clips contain the following information. • Material media file name

Data Sources, Vaults, Projects, and Clips

25

DVD video clips

TitleMotion clips

Clips imported from DVDs inserted into the system’s optical disc drive.

Clips generated by Inscriber TitleMotion containing video titles and motion effects, such as rolls, crawls, and other effects.

CD audio clips

XDCAM clips Chapter 1 Overview

Clips created from audio CDs inserted into the system’s optical disc drive. Voice over clips

Clips imported from discs in XDCAM professional video systems. Clips that are linked, not imported, are displayed with a link icon ( ). EX clips

Clips created in real time from external audio input (narration, sound effects, etc.) while monitoring several tracks on the timeline. A clip can contain up to 4 takes recording the results of voice over operations when the clip was created. In Project Explorer, you can open the Select Voice Over Take dialog from the context menu of the clip to select which take to output. SG clips Clips generated by the system’s internal signal generator (color bars and other test signals, audio tone signals). In addition to the common information, they contain parameters for signal generation. Sequences

Clips imported from solid-state media in XDCAM EX professional video systems. Clips that are linked, not imported, are displayed with a link icon ( ). UDF clips Clips imported from UDF-formatted SxS memory cards in Sony camcorders, such as the PMW-500. Clips that are linked, not imported, are displayed with a link icon ( ). Canon XF clips Clips imported from Canon XF-series camcorders, such as the XF105 and XF305. Clips that are linked, not imported, are displayed with a link icon ( ). P2 clips

Clips composed of several clips on the timeline. In addition to the video and audio data, they contain position and other editing information (EDL data, in the broad sense), as well as information about whether they have been rendered (digitized).

Clips imported from solid-state P2 cards in professional digital video systems. Clips that are linked, not imported, are displayed with a link icon ( ). Live Signal clips

: Indicates that another user has opened the sequence (team mode). Clips captured from a live feed signal source. Render To Bin clips Composite clips

26

Clips created in the Render To Bin dialog. Depending on the settings, audio tracks may have mixed down audio files.

Clips composed from the content of multiple clips placed on the timeline.

MXF clips

Multi Camera Sequences

Clips containing MXF (Material Exchange Format) material. In addition to common data, these clips contain metadata about the content, such as start timecode and various marks.

Sequences of clips of a single event taken from multiple camera angles.

Data Sources, Vaults, Projects, and Clips

Clips whose type cannot be determined The above icon is displayed for clips whose type cannot be determined.

Clip icons

See “Picture View Mode” (page 51) for more information.

Digitized indicators Used/Unused indicator Clip type icon

High/Low-resolution indicators

Status indicator

High/Low-resolution indicators The indicator at the front shows the status of fullresolution (high-resolution) media, and the indicator at the back shows the status of proxy (low-resolution) media. They light or go out as follows, according whether or not the clip has the corresponding type of media.

Note

Refer to the Release Notes for the latest information about the supported formats for the high-resolution media and low-resolution proxy media. Has both high-resolution and low-resolution media: Both indicators light or flash.

Chapter 1 Overview

When the List View pane of Project Explorer is put into Picture View mode, the clips in the bin that is selected in the Tree View pane are displayed as icons like the one shown below.

Currently digitizing: Flashes in orange

Has high-resolution media only: The front indicator lights or flashes. Has low-resolution media only: The back indicator lights or flashes. Has neither type of media: Neither indicator lights or flashes (grayed out).

Index picture Clip name

Has whole low-resolution and partial highresolution media: Both indicators light or flash.

The various parts of clip icons provide the following information.

Has partial high-resolution but no low-resolution media: The front indicator lights or flashes. When only a portion of the XDCAM clip contains high-resolution media, only the right half of the front indicator lights green.

Status indicator Shows the status of the clip (OK or NG). Clip type icon Shows the clip type (see page 25). Used/Unused indicator Lights in light blue when the clip is used in the currently open sequence or another data source sequence. Otherwise does not light (grayed out). Digitized indicator The indicator shows whether the clip is digitized or logging.

Note

When a rendered slice exists on a clip on a sequence or sub sequence pasted in nesting mode, both indicators will light. Index picture Shows the clip’s index picture. Mark In, Mark Out, Duration, and Clip Length timecodes can be individually configured for display overlay on the index picture by using the settings in the TC Set tab of the Metadata Window Properties dialog. Metadata Window Properties (see page 598).

The clip/material digitize status.

Clip name Shows the name of the clip.

The clip is logging.

Clip icon colors The colors of clip icons change as shown below to indicate normal status, selected status, and cut reserved status.

The colors in which the indicators light or flash show the digitizing status of the clip. Digitized: Lights in green (full resolution) or lights in red (proxy) Not digitized: Lights in dark gray Audio and video rendered again every time: Lights in light blue

Data Sources, Vaults, Projects, and Clips

27

Normal status

Selected status Cut reserved status

Chapter 1 Overview

Aspect Ratio Mismatch indicator The aspect ratio mismatch indicator is displayed on clips on the timeline when there is an aspect ratio mismatch between the clip and the sequence on the timeline. For example, when the clip has a 4:3 aspect ratio and the sequence on the timeline has a 16:9 aspect ratio. Spanning clip indicator The spanning clip indicator is shown in the disc file list area of the XDCAM Explorer for clips on memory card media that span more than memory card. A red check mark is displayed if a portion of the clip is missing. The duration of each component clip is indicated by a green dot when the clip is previewed in the XDCAM Explorer monitor window.

28

Data Sources, Vaults, Projects, and Clips

Common Window Controls The following controls are found on most of the tool windows in XPRI NS.

Chapter 1 Overview

3 Close button 1 Focus bar 2 Menu button

a Focus bar This bar is highlighted in purple when the window is active. When the window is not active, the color of this bar changes to gray. You can move the window by dragging this bar with the mouse. b Menu button Displays the main menu of the tool. (You can also display the main menu by pressing the Alt + Windows keys, or by pressing the key or control panel button that has been customized to have this function.)

4 Maximize button 5 Minimize button

d Maximize button Enlarges the window so that it fills the whole screen. The button changes into the Restore button, which returns the window to its original size. e Minimize button Minimizes the window and displays it as a button on the XPRI NS taskbar. Click the button on the taskbar to return the window to its original size.

c Close button Closes the window. (You can also close the window by pressing Ctrl + W, or by pressing the key or control panel button that has been customized to have this function.)

Common Window Controls

29

Custom Window Layouts XPRI NS allows you to adjust the size and position of tool and dialog windows to achieve the layouts that are most convenient for your style of working. Chapter 1 Overview

Changing Window Sizes You can adjust the relative sizes of adjoining windows by dragging the border between the windows.

To adjust the size of one window without affecting other windows, hold down the Alt key as you drag the window border.

2 windows

Window 1

Window 2

Window 1

Window 2

Window 1: Expand horizontally Window 2: Reduce horizontally

Window 1

Window 2

Window 1

Window 2

Window 1: Expand vertically Window 2: Reduce vertically

3 windows

Window 1

Window 2

Window 1

Window 3

Window 3

Window 1: Expand vertically and horizontally Window 2: Reduce horizontally, expand vertically Window 3: Reduce vertically

Window snap function The snap function is a function that automatically finishes the positioning of a window border when you drag it close to the edge of another window. This function takes effect when you drag the border into the “snap area” of an adjoining window. Windows have snap areas on the inner and outer sides of their four borders. To temporarily disable the snap function, drag the window border with the Alt key held down.

30

Custom Window Layouts

Window 2

Examples of the snap function at work The following figures illustrate how the snap function works. The slanted lines indicate the snap areas of Window 2.

When you drag the border of Window 1 into a Window 2 snap area, the border of Window 1 jumps to the same position as the border of Window 2.

Example 1

Window 2

Window 1

Chapter 1 Overview

Window 1

Window 2

Example 2

Window 2

Window 1

Window 2

Window 1

To save a window layout configuration, click the menu button in the taskbar and select [Layout] > [Save As]. To load a window layout configuration, select a saved layout in the [Layout] menu. See “User Layouts” (page 670) for more information.

Custom Window Layouts

31

Converting Windows to Tabs You can convert the Source Viewer and Master Viewer to tabs, which allows you to display them alternately in the same window.

Chapter 1 Overview

Tabs

To switch between the Source Viewer and Master Viewer, click the tabs. Tabbing these windows frees up space on the screen to display other tools.

To put the windows into tabs There are two methods, which yield different tab arrangements. • Select [Tabbing Master Viewer] in the main menu of the Source Viewer. A Source Viewer tab appears on the left, and a Master Viewer tab appears on the right. • Select [Tabbing Source Viewer] in the main menu of the Master Viewer. A Master Viewer tab appears on the right, and a Source Viewer tab appears on the left. Note

You cannot change the tab positions of tabbed windows.

32

Custom Window Layouts

To take the windows out of tabs There are two methods. • Select the Source Viewer tab and then select [Release Source Viewer] from the main menu. • Select the Master Viewer tab and then select [Release Master Viewer] from the main menu.

To close a tabbed tool Select [Close] from the main menu in one of the tabbed tools. (It is impossible to close one window only.)

Changing the Date Display Format The format used to display the date and time in XPRI NS is based on your Windows settings. To change the display format, configure the “Regional and Language Options” setting in the Windows Control Panel. The date is displayed in the format specified under the “Short date” setting.

After changing the Windows setting, click Refresh in the Project Explorer tool buttons to update the display.

Chapter 1 Overview

Custom Window Layouts

33

Starting and Exiting

Starting XPRI NS To start XPRI NS, select Start > Programs > XPRI NS > XPRI NS Editing Software from the Windows desktop. Or double click the XPRI NS icon on the Windows desktop. When working with Sonaps, the User Login dialog appears. Enter a login name and password, and then click [OK]. XPRI NS checks the computer’s screen resolution and color depth. If the monitor settings do not match the recommended settings, the message, “Current screen resolution and/or color setting are not recommended. Please change the settings of the screen,” appears. Click [OK] to cancel startup. Change the settings while referring to “Recommended monitor settings” (page 34), and then perform startup again. If the monitor settings match the recommended settings, the “Fast Login Window” (page 35) opens, and you can elect to proceed directly to a sequence in a recently modified project, or to create a new project or sequence. Note

The Fast Login window can be enabled or disabled at startup. See “Configuration Dialog” (page 578) for the FastLogin Properties. If the Fast Login window is disabled at startup and a data source is selected, the XPRI NS taskbar (see page 38) appears and Project Explorer (see page 43) starts at the last used project. When a data source is not selected, the System Properties dialog appears. Select a data source and close the System Properties dialog. When the Configuration List dialog opens, select the user settings to use. (The Configuration List dialog does not open when working with Sonaps.) The taskbar appears and Project Explorer starts.

34

Starting XPRI NS

Chapter

2

Note

It is not possible to start XPRI NS by directly opening an existing project from Windows Explorer, or to perform operations such as copy and duplicate from outside the software. See “System Properties Dialog” (page 581) for more information.

Recommended monitor settings The following monitor settings are recommended. • Monitor resolution: 1280 X 1024 or higher • Color depth: 32-bit Note

When using the above values, select the highest refresh rates supported by your monitor.

Exiting XPRI NS To exit XPRI NS, click the Menu button on the XPRI NS taskbar (see page 38) and select [Exit]. XPRI NS automatically saves the project that you are editing and exits.

Fast Login Window The Fast Login window appears when you first start XPRI NS. It provides shortcuts to your most recent projects and

sequences. It also provides shortcuts for creating a new project or sequence.

Names and Functions of Parts

a Recently Opened Projects

Chapter 2 Starting and Exiting

b New Project button c Recently Opened Sequences

d New Sequence button

e Do not show this window again check box

a Recently Opened Projects Displays icons for the 4 most recently opened projects. The last opened project is selected by default. b New Project button Creates a new project in the selected project group list box. Projects are named “Project_nnn” where nnn is a 3-digit incrementing number (001, 002, and so on). Project Group list box: Lists all the project groups in Project Explorer.

TL Template list box: Lists all the timeline templates for the current user configuration. e [Do not show this window again] check box When this is checked, disables the display of the Fast Login window when starting XPRI NS. To change the Fast Login window setting, see “Configuration Dialog” (page 578) for more information about user settings.

c Recently Opened Sequences Displays icons for the 4 most recently opened sequences in the selected project. The last opened sequence is selected by default. d New Sequence button Creates a new sequence in the selected project, using the template selected in the TL Template list box. Sequences are named “Sequence_nnn” where nnn is a 3-digit incrementing number (001, 002, and so on).

Fast Login Window

35

Configuration List Dialog The Configuration List dialog is used to select your user environment. The user environment is the set of settings that appear on the User tab of the Configuration dialog.

Note

To delete a user environment configuration, close the current project and delete the configuration in Project Explorer. See “User Setting Management” (page 662) for more information about user settings.

Names and Functions of Parts

Chapter 2 Starting and Exiting

1 Menu button

2 User Configuration List

3 Create button 4 Duplicate button 5 [Skip this dialog next time] check box 6 Cancel button 7 OK button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Configuration List dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Configuration List dialog. Close: Closes the Configuration List dialog. This button works the same way as the Cancel button. b User Configuration List Displays a list of the user environments stored in the default data source, as specified on the Data Source tab of the System Properties dialog. c Create button Displays the New Configuration dialog.

36

Configuration List Dialog

Enter a name for the new user environment in the Name field, and enter a comment as required in the Comment field. Click the OK button to create the new user environment and close the New Configuration dialog. Click the Cancel button to cancel the creation of a new user environment. d Duplicate button Select a user environment in the User Configuration List and click this button to create a copy of the selected user environment.

Chapter 2 Starting and Exiting

e [Skip this dialog next time] check box When this is checked, the Configuration List dialog does not appear when XPRI NS starts. In this case, XPRI NS starts with the most recently selected user environment. If you want the Configuration List dialog to appear again, clear the check from the in the Data Source tab of the System Properties dialog. f Cancel button Cancels the startup of XPRI NS. g OK button Starts XPRI NS with the user environment selected in the User Configuration List. Note

To delete a user environment, select User Configurations from the Tree View pane of Project Explorer, and delete the user environment from the context menu.

Configuration List Dialog

37

Taskbar Overview

Chapter 2 Starting and Exiting

38

The taskbar appears when XPRI NS starts. You can use it to start tools such as the Project Manager or the Audio Output Tool. You can drag the taskbar with the mouse to the top or bottom of the monitor screen. The taskbar has the following two display modes, which you can select in the Taskbar Settings dialog. • Normal mode, in which the taskbar is always visible • Hidden mode, in which the taskbar appears only when you move the mouse pointer over it See “Taskbar Settings Dialog” (page 41) for more information.

Taskbar

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button b Project name c Window name

h Clock

d Audio Output Tool button

g Video Playback Media Mode f XDCAM upload icon e CAT connection status

Full Resolution Only: This mode is for playback of full-resolution media only. Media Offline appears when a clip does not have full-resolution media.

See “Taskbar Menu” (page 40) for more information.

b Project name Name of the currently open project. c Window name Name of the currently open window. d Audio Output Tool button Starts the Audio Output Tool (see page 454). e CAT connection status Displays the current connection status of the NS-CAT1 touch control panel. You can disconnect or display detailed connection information by right-clicking the icon and selecting a command from the context menu. f XDCAM upload icon Displayed only when importing clips using the XDCAM Import Tool.

Auto: This mode is for priority playback of fullresolution media. If a clip has full-resolution media, it is used for playback. If not, proxy media is used for playback. Media Offline appears when a clip does not have either full-resolution or proxy media.

Chapter 2 Starting and Exiting

a Menu button Displays the taskbar menu.

Note

The mode does not change immediately when you switch modes during playback. Stop playback, and then start it again. h Clock Displays the current time. The current date appears in a tool tip when you move the mouse pointer over the clock. You can hide the clock by clearing the check from the [Show Clock] check box (see page 42) in the Taskbar Settings dialog.

g Video Playback Media Mode button Displays a list which allows you to switch between the media playback (or scrub) modes in the Source Viewer and Master Viewer. (The mode is fixed as Proxy Only in XPRI NS Proxy.) The following three modes are available. The button icon changes according to the selected mode. (The current mode appears in a tool tip when you move the mouse pointer over the button.) Proxy Only: This mode is for playback of proxy media only. Media Offline appears when a clip does not have proxy media.

Taskbar

39

Taskbar Menu Click the taskbar Menu button or press the Ctrl + Windows keys to display a menu from which you can select the following commands. Note

When you are using the DMW-C5 Editing Control Panel, you can assign the [Task Bar Menu] command as a global shortcut. You can also assign the [Task Bar Menu] command to the keyboard.

Chapter 2 Starting and Exiting

See “Customization Functions” (page 570) for more information about customization.

Project Explorer Starts Project Explorer. If Project Explorer is already running, starts a new instance in a new window.

Layout Allows you to save or load user layouts. The following subcommands are available for saving user layouts. • Save • Save as... User layouts appear in the menu under the names you assigned when saving them. To load a user layout, select it from the menu. See “User Layouts” (page 670) for more information.

Help Opens the Help menu. This command has the following subcommands. Help...: Displays help about XPRI NS. Version Information: Displays the version of XPRI NS.

See “Project Explorer” (page 43) for more information.

Minimize Minimizes the XPRI NS window. Use the Window taskbar to restore a minimized XPRI NS window.

Play List... Opens the Play List when working with Sonaps. When you are not working with Sonaps, this does not appear in the menu.

Exit Exits XPRI NS.

Material List... Opens the Material List when working with Sonaps. When you are not working with Sonaps, this does not appear in the menu. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

Display Frame Rate Opens a dialog that displays the frame rate in real time. Technical Monitor Opens the Technical Monitor. See “Technical Monitor” (page 103) for more information.

Configuration... Opens the Configuration dialog. See “Configuration Dialog” (page 578) for more information.

Audio Output Tool... Starts the Audio Output Tool. See “Audio Output Tool” (page 454) for more information.

Taskbar Settings... Opens the Taskbar Settings dialog so that you can make taskbar settings.

40

See “Taskbar Settings Dialog” (page 41) for more information.

Taskbar Menu

Taskbar Settings Dialog The Taskbar Settings dialog allows you to make taskbar settings. To open this dialog, click the Menu button on the XPRI NS taskbar and select [Taskbar Settings...] from the menu that appears.

Chapter 2 Starting and Exiting

Taskbar Settings Dialog

41

Names and Functions of Parts

1 [Auto Hide] check box 2 [Show Clock] check box

Chapter 2 Starting and Exiting

3 OK button

a [Auto Hide] check box When this check box is checked, the taskbar is displayed only when you move the mouse pointer over it. When this check box is cleared, the taskbar is always displayed regardless of the pointer position. b [Show Clock] check box When this check box is checked, a clock is displayed at the right end of the taskbar. c OK button Enables the settings made in the Taskbar Settings dialog and closes the dialog. d Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Taskbar Settings dialog and closes the dialog.

42

Taskbar Settings Dialog

4 Cancel button

Projects - Project Explorer

Chapter

3

Project Explorer Use Project Explorer to create, load, and exit projects, and to display and manage the clips in the project. Project Explorer is your gateway to clip creation, the Timeline Editor and other editing tools, and output to VTRs. Notes

• Project data is saved in databases called data sources. • Do not try to access XPRI NS files directly from other Windows applications.

To Start Project Explorer Do one of the following. You can open up to eight Project Explorer windows. • Start XPRI NS. • Click the Menu button in the taskbar (see page 38) and select [Project Explorer...] from the menu that appears. • Press the Project Explorer focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information.

Project Explorer

43

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button b User name

c Tool buttons

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

e Tree View pane

f List View pane

a Menu button Displays the main menu of Project Explorer. See “Project Explorer Main Menu” (page 48) for more information about the main menu.

b User name Displays the user name currently in use. c Tool buttons These are the Project Explorer tool buttons. See “Project Explorer Tool Buttons” (page 46) for the names and functions of the tool buttons.

d Search bar Searches for and displays clips with titles matching or partially matching the entered text in the currently selected bin in the Tree View pane. You can enter up to 50 characters, excluding various punctuation marks (*^’~!#/?:”&;,). e Tree View pane Displays a tree containing all the projects existing in the system and bins in the projects. An icon and a name is displayed for each item in the tree. You can click the [+] marks to the left of the icons to display the contents of

44

Project Explorer

d Search bar

g Information display area

container items. When you do so, the [+] mark changes to a [-] mark. Right-clicking a project and selecting [Project Show] > [Project Show/Hide] will hide the project. Selecting [Show My Project Only] or [Show All Project] will show the hidden projects belonging to the user or all projects, respectively. Icons and items correspond as follows. : Trash The Trash contains deleted bins and clips. If a clip that is currently in-use on the timeline is deleted by an administrator, a warning message appears showing the corresponding sequence names containing the clip. Note

The names of the 3 most recently modified sequences only are displayed. : Project group Project groups are folders. They can contain other projects group or projects. : HD-format project HD-format projects can contain bins. : SD-format project SD-format projects can contain bins.

: Bin Bins can contain clips, sequences, and other bins. Bins are containers for classifying the clips and sequences in a project. When working with Sonaps, you can create clips in a bin by selecting one or more material files in the Material List and dragging them to any bin. The clip type is maintained, and if a file contains any metadata, the metadata is imported together with the clip. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

: Search folder Displays the results of searches carried with conditions specified in the Search dialog. See “Search Dialog” (page 74) for more information.

You can carry out various operations on the items in the Tree View pane (projects, bins, the Trash). Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

See “Operations in the Tree View Pane” (page 64) for more information about operations.

f List View pane When there is one container item selected in the Tree View pane, this pane displays a list of the items contained in the selected container item. • Picture View Mode (see page 51) • Text View Mode (see page 53) • Picture and Text View Mode (see page 55) In the List View pane, you can check the video of a specified clip or sequence by playing it on the clip icon (picture icon play). See “Operations in the List View Pane” (page 68) for more information about operations.

g Information display area The metadata of the item selected in the List View pane appears in the Metadata Window. Some metadata items can be changed. See “Metadata Window” (page 56) for more information about operations.

Project Explorer

45

Project Explorer Tool Buttons the mouse wheel while the cursor is on the tool button area, or by clicking the arrow buttons that appear on the left and right ends of the tool button area.

Project Explorer has the following tool buttons. Note

If the window is not wide enough to display all the tool buttons, scroll left and right through the buttons by rolling

a New Project b New Bin c New Sequence d New Reel Clip

u Storyboard View Mode

e XDCAM Explorer

t Auto Arrangement Mode

f Export to XDCAM

s Info View

g FX Explorer h Record to VTR

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

r Picture and Text View

Mode q Text View Mode p Picture View Mode o Refresh n Empty SysTrash m Delete l Paste k Copy j Cut i Search

a New Project Opens the New Project dialog so that you can create a new project.

Right-clicking the button will display a list of the mostrecently used timeline templates that you can select when creating a new sequence.

See “New Project Dialog” (page 58) for more information.

d New Reel Clip Starts the Logging Tool so that you can create a new reel clip.

b New Bin Creates a new bin.

See “Logging Tool” (page 83) for more information. See “Creating New Bins” (page 65) for the operating procedure.

c New Sequence Creates a new sequence named “Sequence_n” (where n is a serial number) in the selected bin and starts the editing tools, so that you can begin editing immediately. At this point the sequence name is still not confirmed. You can rename by entering a name from the keyboard (maximum length 256 characters).

46

Project Explorer Tool Buttons

See “Creating Reel Clips” (page 99) for more information about the procedure to create reel clips.

e XDCAM Explorer Starts the XDCAM Explorer. See “XDCAM Explorer” (page 509) for more information.

f Export to XDCAM Starts XDCAM Export Tool to output the selected clips or sequence to an XDCAM device. See “XDCAM Export Tool” (page 527) for more information.

g FX Explorer Starts the FX Explorer. This button opens a new FX Explorer window each time it is clicked.

n Empty SysTrash Deletes all of the items in the trash. o Refresh Updates the data displayed in Project Explorer with the latest data. p Picture View Mode Puts the List View pane into Picture View mode. See “Picture View Mode” (page 51) for more information.

See “FX Explorer” (page 296) for more information.

h Record to VTR Starts the Record to VTR tool.

q Text View Mode Puts the List View pane into Text View mode. See “Text View Mode” (page 53) for more information.

See “Record to VTR Tool” (page 487) for more information.

i Search Opens the Search dialog, so that you can specify the conditions for a search.

r Picture and Text View Mode Puts the List View pane into Picture and Text View mode. See “Picture and Text View Mode” (page 55) for more information.

See “Search Dialog” (page 74) for more information.

See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about selecting items in the Tree View pane and “Selecting Items” (page 68) for more information about selecting items in the List View pane.

k Copy Makes a copy of the selected item (including text) and saves it to the clipboard. See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about selecting items in the Tree View pane and “Selecting Items” (page 68) for more information about selecting items in the List View pane.

l Paste Pastes an item (including text) from the clipboard. Select the paste location before clicking this button.

Note

You can also switch between the three view modes by pressing Ctrl + >. s Info View Shows and hides the information display area. t Auto Arrangement Mode This is a Picture View mode option. When you move or create items with this button turned on, the items are aligned automatically in the List View pane. (This has the same effect as the [Align Clips in Upper Left] command in the context menu.)

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

j Cut Cuts the selected item (including text) and saves it to the clipboard.

u Storyboard View Mode When the List View pane is in Picture View mode, switches it to Storyboard View mode. In this mode you can also move items, arrange them, and change the display size in the same way. (You cannot use the auto align mode). See “Picture View Mode” (page 51) for more information.

m Delete Moves the selected item to the Trash. See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about selecting items in the Tree View pane and “Selecting Items” (page 68) for more information about selecting items in the List View pane. Note

Items in the Trash are not erased immediately. To delete the items, click the Empty SysTrash button. However, the operation for emptying the trashcan is available only for administrators.

Project Explorer Tool Buttons

47

Project Explorer Main Menu

Non-digitized Clips: Starts the Batch Digitize tool to digitize all of the non-digitized clips in the bin which is selected in the Tree View pane. OK Clips: Starts the Batch Digitize tool to digitize all of the clips with OK marks in the bin which is selected in the Tree View pane.

Click the Menu button in Project Explorer to display the Project Explorer main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands.

See “Batch Digitize Tool” (page 106) for more information.

New Bin Creates a new bin. See “Creating New Bins” (page 65) for the operating procedure.

New Sequence Creates a new sequence named “Sequence_n” (where n is a serial number) in the selected bin and starts the editing tools, so that you can begin editing immediately. At this point the sequence name is still not confirmed. You can rename by entering a name from the keyboard (maximum length 256 characters). Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

New Clip Creates a new clip in the bin which is selected in the Project Explorer Tree View pane. This command has the following subcommands. Generate SG Clip...: Starts the Generate SG Clip tool to create an SG clip. Logging...: Starts the Logging Tool to create a reel clip. Import File...: Start the Import File tool to create an import clip. Import DVD: Starts the Import DVD Tool to create and import a DVD video clip from the DVD inserted into the optical disc drive. Import CD Audio: Starts the Import CD Audio Tool to create and import a CD audio clip from the CD inserted into the optical disc drive.

See “Record to VTR Tool” (page 487) for more information.

See “Generate SG Clip Tool” (page 111) for more information.

See “Render To Bin Dialog” (page 224) for more information.

See “Logging Tool” (page 83) for more information.

See “DVD Export Tool” (page 483) for more information.

See “Import File Tool” (page 116) for more information.

See “XDCAM Export Tool” (page 527) for more information

See “Import CD Audio Tool” (page 132) for more information.

See “Export Dialog” (page 496) for more information.

Batch Digitize Performs a batch digitize operation (digitizing of several clips at once). This command has the following subcommands. All Clips: Starts the Batch Digitize tool to digitize all of the clips in the bin which is selected in the Tree View pane. Selected Clips: Starts the Batch Digitize Tool to digitize the clips which are selected in the List View pane.

48

Output Outputs clips. This command has the following subcommands. Record to VTR...: Starts the Record to VTR Tool to output to VTR the clip or clips which are selected in the List View pane. Render to Bin...: Opens the Render To Bin dialog, and exports the selected sequence to the bin. Export to DVD...: Starts the DVD Export tool, and the record clips and sequences in the project to DVD discs. Export to XDCAM...: Starts XDCAM Export Tool to output the clips or sequence selected in the List View pane to an XDCAM device. Export...: Opens the Export dialog to output the clip which is selected in the List View pane as a media file. Export MXF...: Opens the Export MXF dialog, and outputs the clips or sequences selected in the List View pane as an MXF file. Export AAF...: Starts Export AAF Tool to output the clips or sequence selected in the List View pane as an AAF file. Export EDL...: Starts Export EDL Tool to output the clips or sequence selected in the List View pane as an EDL file. Backup to Folder...: Opens the Backup to Folder dialog to create a backup folder for the project which is selected in the Tree View pane.

Project Explorer Main Menu

See “Export MXF Dialog” (page 505) for more information. See “Export AAF Tool” (page 565) for more information. See “Export EDL Tool” (page 555) for more information. See “Backup to Folder Dialog” (page 671) for more information.

Input Inputs clips and source files. This command has the following subcommand. Import EDL...: Starts Import EDL Tool to import an EDL file and create a sequence and clip. Import AAF...: Starts Import AAF Tool to import an AAF file and create a sequence and clip. Restore from File...: Opens the Restore from File dialog so that you can restore a current or finished project. See “Import EDL Tool” (page 550) for more information. See “Import AAF Tool” (page 561) for more information. See “Restore from File Dialog” (page 674) for more information.

Abridge Deletes the media files of the clip or clips which are selected in the List View pane. This command does not delete the clips themselves. This command cannot be used on rendered sequences.

See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about selecting items in the Tree View pane and “Selecting Items” (page 68) for more information about selecting items in the List View pane.

Undo Undoes the immediately preceding operation. Cut Cuts the selected item (including text) and saves it to the clipboard. See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about selecting items in the Tree View pane and “Selecting Items” (page 68) for more information about selecting items in the List View pane.

Copy Creates a copy (including text) of the selected item and saves the copy to the clipboard. See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about selecting items in the Tree View pane and “Selecting Items” (page 68) for more information about selecting items in the List View pane.

Paste Pastes an item (including text) from the clipboard. Select the paste destination before selecting this command. Selection Selects items. This command has the following subcommands. Select All: Selects all items in the List View pane.

Search Opens the Search dialog. See “Search Dialog” (page 74) for more information.

Rename Renames the item which is selected in the Tree View pane or the List View pane. The name is highlighted and enclosed in a box to show that you can enter a new name. After entering the new name, confirm it by pressing the Enter key or by clicking somewhere outside the name. Empty Trash Deletes all of the items in the Trash from the project. See “Emptying the Trash” (page 67) for more information.

Project Explorer Properties... Opens the Project Explorer Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to make various settings related to Project Explorer. See “Project Explorer Properties Dialog” (page 593) for more information.

Metadata Window Properties... Opens the Metadata Window Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to make various settings related to the Metadata window. See “Metadata Window Properties Dialog” (page 598) for more information.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Delete Puts the selected item into the Trash.

Invert Selection: Deselects all of the selected items in the List View pane, and selects all of the deselected items.

View Selects the view mode of the List View pane. This command has the following subcommands. Apply To Folders: Applies the currently displayed folder view mode (Picture View, Text View, Picture and Text view) and the display size of clips to all folders. Reset Folders: Resets the view mode of all folders to Picture View mode, and resets the display size of clips to [Small]. Refresh: Updates the data displayed in Project Explorer with the latest data. Info View: Opens the Metadata window in the information display area to display the metadata of the clip which is selected in the List View pane. Customize Opens a window for customize operations. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574), which allows you to assign

Project Explorer Main Menu

49

command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Project Show Selects the projects to show. This command has the following subcommands. Show All Project: Shows all projects. Only Show My Project: Shows only the projects created by the currently logged in user. Help... Displays help about Project Explorer. Maximize The command at this position in the main menu becomes [Maximize] when the window is not maximized. Selecting it maximizes the window. Minimize Minimizes the Project Explorer window and displays it as a button on the taskbar.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Open Project Open the project which is selected in the Tree View pane or the List View pane for editing. (You can create new clips in the project and work on its timeline.) When a bin is selected in the Tree View pane or the List View pane, this command opens the project which contains that bin. New Project... Creates a new project in the data source which is selected in the Tree View pane or in a project group folder in that data source. This command opens the New Project dialog. See “New Project Dialog” (page 58) for more information.

New Project Group Creates a new project group in the data source or project group which is selected in the Tree View pane. Close Project Closes the currently open project. You can also close a project from the Tree View pane by right-clicking the project or a bin folder in the project and selecting [Close Project] from the context menu. Close Closes the Project Explorer window.

50

Project Explorer Main Menu

List View Pane Display Modes Picture View Mode Picture View mode is one of the view modes of the List View pane of Project Explorer.

When there is only one container item selected in the Tree View pane of Project Explorer, Picture View mode displays icons for the items stored in that item.

Clip icons Tree View pane

Picture View Mode button

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

When only one bin is selected in the Tree View pane, clip icons are displayed for the clips in that bin.

To select Picture View mode Do one of the following. • Click the Picture View Mode button.

List View pane

• Right click in an empty part of the List View pane and select [View Mode] >[Picture View] from the context menu. • Press Ctrl + > once or twice to cycle through the view modes to Picture View mode.

List View Pane Display Modes

51

To select Auto Align mode Select Picture View mode, and then click the Auto Align Mode button. To select Storyboard View mode Select Picture View mode, and then click the Auto Storyboard View Mode button.

To move items in the List View pane Select the icons of the items that you want to move and drag them to the desired location. You can also move or copy User Configurations in the List View pane. Select User Configurations in the Tree List view, then right-click a User Configuration icon and drag it to the desired location. A context menu appears giving you the option of moving or copying the item. To align the items in the List View pane Right click in an empty part of the List View pane and select [Align Clips in Upper Left] from the context menu that appears. Note Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

When Auto Align mode is on (the Auto Align Mode button is on), items in the List View pane align themselves automatically after items are moved or deleted.

To change the clip display size Use one of the following three methods (A to C). Method A:

1

Right click in an empty part of the List View pane to display the context menu.

2

Select [Picture Icons] from the context menu, and then select [Extra large], [Large], [Medium], or [Small].

Method B:

1

Right click the Picture View Mode button to display the context menu.

2

Select [Extra large], [Large], [Medium], or [Small] from the context menu.

Method C:

1

Click in an empty part of the List View pane.

2

Press Ctrl + + or Ctrl + -. Each press of the Ctrl + + keys increases the size by one step. Each press of the Ctrl + - keys decreases the size by one step.

52

List View Pane Display Modes

Text View Mode Text View mode is one of the view modes of the List View pane of Project Explorer. When there is only one container item selected in the Tree View pane of Project Explorer, Text View mode displays

a list of the items in the selected item, with small icons that indicate the types of the items and text strings that indicate their properties.

Text View Mode button Column headers

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Tree View pane

Item type icons

Item properties

List View pane

When only one bin is selected in the Tree View pane, a list of the clips in that bin is displayed.

List View Pane Display Modes

53

To select Text View mode Do one of the following. • Click the Text View Mode button. • Right click in an empty part of the List View pane and select [View Mode] >[Text View] from the context menu. • Press Ctrl + > once or twice to cycle through the view modes to Text View mode.

To change the information displayed In Text View mode, you can click or drag the column headers to sort the information, turn the display of different properties on and off, adjust column widths, and move columns.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

To sort the items Click the column header of the property item that you want to use as the sort key. The list is sorted in ascending or descending Unicode order. A f mark is displayed in the header when the list is sorted in ascending order, and a F mark is displayed when it is sorted in descending order. The order changes each time you click the header. You can also sort the list by right clicking on the header of the column that you want to use as the key, and selecting [Sort Ascending] or [Sort Descending] from the context menu. Note

Clips created after the sort will be added to the bottom of the list. To display property items that are hidden Proceed as follows.

1

Right click at the edge of the column header where you want to display the item. A context menu appears.

2

Select [Insert Column] from the context menu and select the desired item from the submenu.

To hide property items that are displayed Right click the header of the property item that you want to hide and select [Delete Column] from the context menu. To adjust column widths Drag the right edge of the header of the column you want to adjust. Dragging to the right increases the width, and dragging to the left decreases it. To move columns Do one of the following. • Drag the header of the column you want to move to the header at the location where you want to move it. • Right click the header of the column you want to move, and select [Move to Right Column] or [Move to Left Column] from the context menu.

54

List View Pane Display Modes

About the Used column The Used column shows the state of clips (used or unused) when [Indicate used clips in Timeline] or [Indicate used clips for Entire Data Source] of the Used Clip Indicator (see page 595) option buttons is on in the Project Explorer Properties dialog. When [Indicate used clips in Timeline] is on: “Used” is displayed for clips used in the currently open sequence. When [Indicate used clips for Entire Data Source] is on: “Used” is displayed for clips used in any sequence of the data source. About the Proxy column The Proxy column shows whether clips have proxy media. See “Digitized indicator” (page 27) for more information about how to tell whether clips have proxy media.

Picture and Text View Mode Picture and Text View mode is one of the view modes of the List View pane of Project Explorer.

In addition to the information displayed in Text View mode (see page 53), this mode displays index pictures of the clips.

Picture and Text View Mode button

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Index pictures

In the Text View section, you can sort clips, hide and display property items, change column widths, and move columns. The procedures for doing so are basically the same as in Text View mode. However, the positions of the Clip Name column, the index pictures, and the comment area are fixed.

Text View section

Comment areas

• Right click in an empty part of the List View pane and select [View Mode] >[Picture and Text View] from the context menu. • Press Ctrl + > once or twice to cycle through the view modes to Picture and Text View mode.

To select Picture and Text View mode Do one of the following. • Click the Picture and Text View Mode button.

List View Pane Display Modes

55

Metadata Window When you select a clip in the List View pane, metadata for that clip appears in the Metadata window of the information display area. Some of the metadata items can be modified. To show or hide the Metadata window Click the Info View button, or select [View] >[Info View] from the main menu.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

56

Metadata Window

Names and Functions of Parts 1 General tabs

3 Separator 2 Metadata images

b Metadata images Displays images of the metadata. This section can display the following information. • Images and timecode for index pictures, Mark In points, Mark Out points, Start points, End points • The track configuration of the clip Timecodes can be entered directly using the numeric keypad.

See “Metadata Window Properties Dialog” (page 598) for more information.

Modifying Metadata The content of the following metadata items can be modified. • Clip Name: Enter up to 256 characters • Mark In/Mark Out timecode • Duration • Rights: Enter up to 2048 characters • Comment • Custom 1 to Custom 3: Enter up to 2048 characters

To modify metadata

1

To change the display format and the information displayed

Select the item you want to modify and then do one of the following. • Double click the item. • Press F2. You can now edit the metadata or enter a timecode value in a timecode box.

c Separator You can drag the separator to adjust the sizes of the leftside and right-side areas. d Metadata list Displays a list of metadata. You can adjust column widths by dragging the vertical lines in the list, and adjust row heights by dragging the horizontal lines.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

a General tabs Clip metadata appears in the General tabs. You can display up to six General tabs, and display different data on each tab. You can also rename the tabs. Clip Relatives: Displays source clips for selected sub sequence or composite clip, and displays sequences and composite clips that use selected clip. Double-click an item to display the clip or sequence in the List View pane. TC Set: Sets the display of the Mark In, Mark Out, Duration, and Clip Length timecodes in the index picture icon in Project Explorer.

4 Metadata list

2

Edit the displayed information, or enter a timecode value. Press Ctrl + Enter to enter a new line.

3

When you have finished making your changes, confirm them by pressing the Enter key or clicking another location.

You can use the Metadata Window Properties dialog to rename tabs, change the display formats of the left and right areas, and specify the information to be displayed.

Metadata Window

57

New Project Dialog Overview The New Project dialog allows you to make the necessary settings for a new project. Once you create the project, it is saved automatically every time you create a clip or perform some other operation that changes the project. You do not need to worry about saving projects yourself.

To Open the New Project Dialog Do one of the following in Project Explorer (see page 43). • Click the New Project button. • Select [New Project...] from the main menu. • Right-click in the Tree View pane and select [New Project] from the context menu. Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

58

New Project Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b Tabs

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

d Cancel button c OK button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the New Project dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the New Project dialog. Close: Closes the New Project dialog. Has the same function as the Cancel button. b Tabs The New Project dialog has the following tabs. • Format tab (see page 60) • Media Vaults tab (see page 61) • Stream Defaults tab (see page 62) c OK button Enables the settings made in the New Project dialog, creates a new project in the specified item, and closes the dialog. The new project opens, and a new bin (named “New Bin”) is created directly beneath the new project. d Cancel button Cancels the creation of a new project and closes the New Project dialog.

New Project Dialog

59

Format Tab The Format tab allows you to make format settings for a new project.

a Project Name box b Project Data Source list c Path

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

d Project properties section

a Project Name box Enter the name of the new project. b Project Data Source list Displays the name of the data source that will contain the data of the projects. c Path Displays the path to the new project. d Project properties section Specifies the properties of the new project. Output Video Format list: Select a format from among 1080/50i,1080/59.94i(DF), 525/59.94i(DF), and 625/ 50i. Note

Refer to the Release Notes for the latest information about the supported formats. Width* Height, Frame Rate, Interlace/Progressive: Preset values appear in these fields, according to the setting of Output Video Format. Frame Aspect Ratio list: For HD projects, the default is 16:9. For SD projects, the default is 4:3.

60

New Project Dialog

Note

In this version, 16:9 can be specified only for 625/50i (PAL). For 525/59.94i (NTSC), be sure to select 4:3. Sampling Frequency, Quantization: Fixed system values appear in these fields. Time Code list: Select from FTC, LTC, or VITC for the timecode type. Compression: Select a compression method from among “MPEG IMX 30”, “MPEG IMX 40”, “MPEG IMX 50”, “DVCAM 25” and “Uncompress” (no compression) in SD projects. Select a compression method from among “MPEG HD 18”, “MPEG HD 25”, “MPEG HD 35”, “MPEG HD 50” and “HDV” in HD projects. Note

Refer to the Release Notes for the latest information about the supported compression formats.

Media Vaults Tab The Media Vaults tab of the New Project dialog (see page 58) allows you to select which public system media vaults to use as project media vaults.

1 System Media Vaults list

3 Project Media Vaults list

2 Add>> button

4 button Adds the selected system media vault to the Project Media Vaults list. c Project Media Vaults list Contains all registered project media vaults. d [Import File...] in the menu that opens when you click the Menu button or from the context menu of the selected bin. The Import File Tool (page 116) starts. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool. • MXF clip Click the XDCAM Explorer tool button in Project Explorer. The XDCAM Explorer (page 509) starts. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool. • DVD video clip Select [New Clip] >[Import DVD...] in the menu that opens when you click the Menu button or from the context menu of the selected bin. The Import DVD Tool (page 128) starts. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool. • CD audio clip Select [New Clip] >[Import CD Audio...] in the menu that opens when you click the Menu button or from the context menu of the selected bin. The Import CD Audio Tool (page 132) starts. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool. • Voice over clip Click the Audio Voice Over Tool button in Timeline Editor. The Audio Voice Over Tool (page 457) starts. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool. • SG clip Select [New Clip] >[Generate SG Clip...] in the menu that opens when you click the Menu button or from the context menu of the selected bin. The Generate SG Clip Tool (page 111) starts. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool.

• Render to Bin clip Select [Render to Bin] in the context menu of the selected sequence. The “Render To Bin Dialog” (page 224) opens. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool. • TitleMotion clip Click the CG button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor, and select [TitleMotion] from the context menu. The TitleMotion software starts. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool. See page 423 for more information. • XDCAM, EX, and P2 clips Click the XDCAM Explorer tool button in Project Explorer, and then click the XDCAM Import Tool button. The XDCAM Import Tool (page 521) starts. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool. • Live signal clip Click the Live Signal Capture button in the Logging Tool. • Composite clip Select multiple items in the List View of Project Explorer, and then select [Create Clip Composite] in either the main menu or the context menu. The Clip Composite Dialog (page 199) appears. • Multiple Camera Sequence Select multiple camera angle clips in the List View of Project Explorer, and then select [Multi Camera Editor] from the context menu. The Multiple Camera Editor (page 201) starts. Carry out the rest of the operation in this tool. • Server clip When working with Sonaps, select one or more material files in the Material List and drag them to any bin in Project Explorer. If a file contains any types of metadata, the metadata is imported together with the clip. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690). • Sequence Press Ctrl + E, or select [New Sequence] in the menu that opens when you click the Menu button or from the context menu of the selected bin. Or click the New Sequence button. A sequence named “Sequence_n” (where n is a serial number) is created in the selected bin. The editing tools (see page 142) start, and you can begin editing immediately. At this point the sequence name is still not confirmed. You can rename by entering a name from the keyboard (maximum length 256 characters).

63

Operations in the Tree View Pane

Note

Double clicking a project icon opens the project. (You can create clips and edit the project timeline.) To collapse an expanded container item Click the [-] mark or double click the icon.

Selecting Items The section explains how to select and deselect items in the Tree View pane.

To select an item To select an item displayed in the Tree View pane, click the item. (To click an item means to click its icon or name.) The selected item is highlighted. • When a bin is selected, all of the clips in that bin appear in the List View pane. • When the Trash is selected, all of the items stored immediately below the Trash appear in the List View pane. Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Tree View pane

You can perform the following operations on items (project groups, projects, bins, the Trash) in the Tree View pane. • Display the contents of container items • Select items • Create new project groups • Create new projects • Create new bins • Open new Project Explorer windows to manage the selected items • Change the view of the Project Explorer window • Copy bins • Move projects or bins to other locations • Put bins into the Trash • Retrieve bins from the Trash • Empty the Trash • Rename items • Search for bins

To cancel a selection Do one of the following. • Select a different item. • Click the selected item while holding down the Ctrl key. • Click an empty part of the Tree View pane.

Creating New Project Groups You can create project groups to hold related projects. Proceed as follows to create a new project group in a data source or project group.

1

Select the data source or project group where you want to create the new project group.

2

Select [New Project Group] from the main menu or from the context menu of the data source or project group. A new project group named “New Project Group n” (where n is a serial number) is created directly beneath the data source or project group. At this point the name of the project group is highlighted to indicate that it is still not confirmed. • If you do not need to change the name, proceed to step 4. • If you want to change the name, proceed to step 3.

Displaying the Contents of Container Items The [+] marks to the left of the icons indicate whether container items contain any other items. Click the [+] mark or double click the icon (or name) to expand the container item and display the contents. The [+] mark changes to a [-] mark when a container item is expanded.

3

Enter a name (maximum length 256 characters) from the keyboard.

4

Press the Enter key, or click somewhere outside the name. The name is confirmed.

64

Operations in the Tree View Pane

Creating New Bins

Copying Bins

When you create a new project, one new bin is created automatically directly beneath the new project. You can also create new bins in existing projects.

You can copy bins in the Tree View pane to destinations directly beneath projects or in other bins.

1

Select the project or bin where you want to create the new bin. (For this example, we will create it in a project named A.) Note

You cannot create new bins in bins, the Search Result folder or the Trash.

2

Press Ctrl + B, or select [New Bin] from the main menu or the context menu of project A. Or click the New Bin button.

3

Enter a name (maximum length 256 characters) from the keyboard.

4

Press the Enter key, or click somewhere outside the name.

There are two ways to create copies. • Copy bins by copy and paste • Copy bins by drag and drop

To copy bins by copy and paste

1

Select the bins to copy. (You can select more than one bin.)

2

Press Ctrl + C, or select [Copy] from the main menu or the context menu of the selected bins. Or click the Copy button. Copies of the selected bins are saved to the clipboard.

3

Select the copy destination.

4

Press Ctrl + V, or select [Paste] from the main menu or the context menu of the copy destination. Or click the Paste button. The copies saved to the clipboard are copied to the destination. The names of the copies become “X_Copy_n”, where X is the original name and n is a serial number. When you copy bins that contain clips, copies of the clips are created, but the clip media files are not duplicated.

The name is confirmed.

Opening a New Project Explorer Window to Manage Selected Items Select the target items and then select [New Project Explorer with These Items] from the context menu. A new Project Explorer window opens with the selected items focused in the Tree View pane.

Changing the Project Explorer Window View Right-click the target items to view and then select [View Mode] from the context menu. You can switch between List View, Text View, and Picture and Text view. Note

There is no View Mode context menu option available if a CG Template is selected in the Tree View pane.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

A new bin named “New Bin_n” (where n is a serial number) is created directly beneath project A. At this point the bin name is highlighted to indicate that it is still not confirmed. • If you do not need to change the name, proceed to step 4. • If you want to change the name, proceed to step 3.

Note

The copy destination cannot be the original bin or a bin beneath the original bin.

To copy bins by drag and drop There are two ways to copy bins by drag and drop. • Drag the bins with the Ctrl key held down • Drag the bins with the right button of the mouse held down To copy by dragging with the Ctrl key held down

1

Select the bins to copy. (You can select more than one bin.)

2

With the Ctrl key held down, drag the selected bins and drop them in the copy destination. The copies saved to the clipboard are copied to the destination. The names of the copies become “X_Copy_n”, where X is the original name and n is a serial number.

Operations in the Tree View Pane

65

When you copy bins that contain clips, copies of the clips are created, but the clip media files are not duplicated.

4

To copy by dragging with the right mouse button held down

1

Select the bins to copy. (You can select more than one bin.)

2

With the right mouse button held down, drag the selected bins and drop them in the copy destination.

3

Click [Copy] in the context menu displayed. The copies are created in the copy destination. The names of the copies become “X_Copy_n”, where X is the original name and n is a serial number.

Moving Projects or Bins to Other Locations

The projects or bins in the clipboard are pasted to the destination. To move projects or bins by drag and drop Select the projects or bins to move and then do one of the following. • Drag the projects or bins to the destination. • Drag the projects or bins while pressing the right mouse button, drop them in the destination, and select [Move] in the context menu that appears.

Putting Bins Into the Trash

1

Select the bins to put into the Trash.

2

Do one of the following.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

• Click the Delete button. • Press the Delete key on the keyboard. • Drag the selected bins to the Trash icon.

You can move projects or bins in the Tree View pane to other locations. You can also move bins from inside the Trash to locations outside the Trash. Projects can be moved to a different project group. Bins can be moved into a project or into a bin.

The selected bins are saved in the Trash. Bins saved in the Trash have not yet been deleted from the project. If necessary, you can retrieve them from the Trash and return them to their original locations.

There are two ways to move projects or bins: by cut and paste, and by drag and drop. To move projects or bins by cut and paste

1

In the Tree View pane, select the projects or bins to move. (You can select more than one project or bin.)

2

Press Ctrl + X, or select [Cut] in the main menu or the context menu of the selected projects or bins. Or click the Cut button. The selected projects or bins are cut and saved to the clipboard. Note

The clipboard contains the results of one operation only. Whenever you cut or copy projects or bins, any items that may have been in the clipboard previously are discarded.

3

Retrieving Bins From the Trash To retrieve bins from the Trash, you can use the drag and drop method or the [Return to Original Location] command. Retrieving bins with the drag and drop method See Moving Projects or Bins to Other Locations (page 66) for more information about using the drag and drop method. Retrieving bins with the [Return to Original Location] command

1

Expand the Trash to display its contents (see Displaying the Contents of Container Items (page 64)), and select the bins that you want to retrieve. Note

Select the destination.

In the Tree View pane, the [Return to Original Location] command can be executed only for bins stored immediately beneath the Trash.

Notes

• You cannot move bins to projects or bins where identically named bins already exist. • You cannot move projects to project groups where identically named projects already exist.

66

Press Ctrl + V, or select [Paste] in the main menu or the context menu of the destination. Or click the Paste button.

Operations in the Tree View Pane

2

Select [Return to Original Location] from the context menu of the selected bins. The selected bins are moved from the Trash to their original locations.

Emptying the Trash You can discard the contents of the current project’s Trash by emptying the Trash. Notes

• Discarded bins and clips or sequences in bins are removed from the current project and cannot be restored. • Bins containing the clips that are currently in use by a tool or viewer cannot be discarded.

1

Do one of the following in Project Explorer. • Click the Empty Trash tool button. • Select [Empty Trash] from the main menu. • Right-click the Trash icon in the Tree View pane to display its context menu, and then select [Empty Trash]. A dialog appears asking if you really want to empty the Trash.

2

Processing to empty the Trash begins and a progress dialog appears. You can stop the processing by clicking Cancel in the progress dialog. When bins are discarded, media files for clips in the bins were created are also discarded.

Enter the name from the keyboard.

3

To confirm the new name, do one of the following. • Press the Enter key. • Click somewhere outside of the name. • Select another item.

Using cut, copy, and paste on the name string When the item name is highlighted and enclosed in a box, you can perform cut, copy, and paste operations on the name string. • Cut: Press Ctrl + X, click the Cut button, or select [Cut] in the main menu or context menu. • Copy: Press Ctrl + C, click the Copy button, or select [Copy] in the main menu or context menu. • Paste: Press Ctrl + V, click the Paste button, or select [Paste] in the main menu or context menu.

Searching for Bins Using the First Letter of the Name There are two ways to search for bins in the current project. • Search using the first letter of the name • Search using the Search dialog This section explains how to search for bins using the first letter of the name. See page 74 on how to search using the Search dialog.

Renaming Items Proceed as follows to rename items (project group, projects, and bins) in the Tree View pane. Note

The Trash, the Search Result folder, and items in them cannot be renamed.

1

Do one of the following. • Click an item name. • Select an item and then select [Rename] in the main menu or context menu, or press F2 on the keyboard.

To search for bins using the first letter of the name

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Click Yes in the confirmation dialog (or No if you want to cancel the operation).

2

With the Tree View pane active, enter the first letter in the name of the bin that you want to find from the keyboard. When a bin is selected, the search proceeds downward from the selected bin. When nothing is selected, the search proceeds from the top of the Tree View pane toward the bottom. (Lower levels of bins are not scanned unless they are expanded in the tree display.) The search returns the first bin whose first letter matches the search letter. The found bin is selected automatically. A beep sounds if no matching bin is found.

Note

The F2 key does not change the item name if you have assigned a command button function to that key in the Keyboard Customize window. Use one of the other methods to rename the item. The name is highlighted and enclosed by a box to show that you can enter a new name in the box. If you want to change only part of the name, click on that part.

Operations in the Tree View Pane

67

Operations in the List View Pane

• Press the up, down, left and right arrow keys to move the selection. If the List View pane is not active, activate it by pressing the Tab key. (The Tab key alternately activates the List View pane and the Tree View pane.) See “Picture View Mode” (page 51), “Text View Mode” (page 53), and “Picture and Text View Mode” (page 55) for more information about each mode.

To cancel a selection Do one of the following. • Select a different item. • Click the selected item while holding down the Ctrl key. • Click an empty part of the List View pane.

To make additional selections

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Click the items you want to select one after the other while holding down the Ctrl key. Alternatively, while holding down the Ctrl key, drag the mouse to draw a rectangle that contains at least part of the names or icons of all of the items that you want to select. To select items by dragging in this way, you must start dragging in an empty part of the List View pane (a part where no icons or names are displayed). List View pane

You can perform the following operations on items in the List View pane. • Select items • Copy items • Move items to other locations • Put items into the Trash • Retrieve items from the Trash • Rename items • Apply a color marker • Search for items • Play back picture icons When working with Sonaps, you can save sequences to folders in the Material List.

To select all of the items in a range, first select the first (or last) item, and then click the last (or first) item with the Shift key held down. Alternatively, drag the mouse to draw a rectangle that contains at least part of the names or icons of all of the items that you want to select. To select items by dragging in this way, you must start dragging in an empty part of the List View pane (a part where no icons or names are displayed). To cancel multiple selections at once Do one of the following. • Click an empty part of the List View pane. • Click any non-selected item.

To select one item

To cancel some selections from among multiple selections Do one of the following. • While holding down the Ctrl key, click the items that you want to deselect. • While holding down the Ctrl key, drag the mouse to draw a rectangle that contains at least part of the names or icons of all of the items that you want to deselect. To cancel selections by dragging in this way, you must start dragging in an empty part of the List View pane.

• In Picture View mode, click the icon of a clip to select it. The icon of a selected item changes color to orange. • In Text View mode or Picture and Text View mode, click the small clip type icon or name of a clip to select it. The icon and name of a selected clip are highlighted.

To invert selections Choose [Selection] >[Invert Selection] from the main menu or from the context menu of the selected container item in the Tree View pane (available when there is only container item selected).

For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

Selecting Items The section explains how to select and deselect items in the List View pane.

68

To select multiple items at once

Operations in the List View Pane

The copies saved to the clipboard are copied to the destination. The copies are named “X_Copy_n”, where X is the name of the original clip and n is a serial number.

All of the currently selected List View pane items are deselected, and all of the deselected List View pane items are selected.

To select all items in the List View pane Choose [Selection] >[Select All] from the main menu or from the context menu of the selected container item in the Tree View pane. Or press Ctrl + A. This selects all items in the container item that is selected in the Tree View pane.

To copy items by drag and drop There are two ways to copy items in the List View pane by drag and drop. • Drag the items with the Ctrl key held down • Drag the items with the right button of the mouse held down

Copying Items

To copy by dragging with the Ctrl key held down

You can copy items in the List View pane to container items in the same project or another project. Copying of clips does not copy media files. Copy clips reference the media files of the original clips. You can use the following methods to copy items. • Copy by copy and paste • Copy by drag and drop with the Ctrl key held down • Copy by drag and drop with the right mouse button held down, followed by selection of the [Copy] command from the context menu.

1

Note

You cannot copy items in the Trash.

2

Note

You cannot use items in the Search Result folder as the copy destination.

Note

3

Copies of the selected items are created in the destination. The names of the copies become “X_Copy_n”, where X is the name of the original item and n is a serial number.

Press Ctrl + C, or select [Copy] from the main menu or the context menu of the selected items. Or click the Copy button. Copies of the selected items are saved to the clipboard.

To copy by dragging with the right mouse button held down

Select a copy destination container item in the Tree View pane.

1

The contents of the selected item appear in the List View pane.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Select the items to copy. (You can select more than one item.)

You cannot copy items in the Trash.

2

While holding down the Ctrl key, drag the selected items to the copy destination item. (When there is only one item selected in the Tree View pane of another Project Explorer window, you can drag the clips to the List View pane of that window and drop them there.)

To copy items by copy and paste

1

Select the items to copy. (You can select more than one item.)

Select the items to copy. (You can select more than one item.) Note

You cannot copy items in the Trash. Notes

• You cannot copy clips to directly beneath a project. • You cannot use items in the Trash as copy destinations.

4

Press Ctrl + V, or select [Paste] from the main menu or the context menu of the copy destination (or from the context menu of an empty part of the List View pane). Or click the Paste button.

2

While holding down the right mouse button, drag the selected items to the copy destination item in the Tree View pane. (When there is only one item selected in the Tree View pane of another Project Explorer window, you can drag the clips to the List View pane of that window and drop them there.) A context menu appears.

Operations in the List View Pane

69

Note

You cannot use items in the Search Result folder as the copy destination.

3

Select [Copy] from the context menu. Copies of the selected items are created in the destination. The names of the copies become “X_Copy_n”.

Moving Items to Other Locations You can move items in the List View pane to other locations. You can also move items inside the trash to items from inside the Trash to container items outside the Trash. As the destination, you can use container items in the same project or container items in other projects with the same frame rate. There are two ways to move items: by cut and paste, and by drag and drop.

• Drag the items and drop them in the destination item, or in the List View pane displaying the contents of the destination item. • Drag the items while pressing the right mouse button, drop them in the destination item or in the List View pane displaying the contents of the destination item, and select [Move] from the context menu that appears.

Putting Items Into the Trash

1

In the List View pane, select the items to put into the Trash.

2

Do one of the following. • Click the Delete button. • Press the Delete key on the keyboard. • Select [Delete] in the context menu of the selected items. • Drag the selected items to the Trash icon in the Tree View pane. • Select [Delete] in the main menu.

Notes Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

• Clips can be moved only to bins. They cannot be moved directly to a project. • You cannot move items to container items in the Search Result folder or to container items in the Trash. • You cannot move items to container items where identically named items already exist.

When the Trash icon is selected in the Tree View pane of another Project Explorer window, you can also do the following. • Drag the selected items and drop them on the Trash icon in the other Project Explorer window, or drop them in the List View pane displaying the contents of the Trash. • Drag the selected items while holding down the right button of the mouse, drop them in the List View pane of the other Project Explorer window, and then select [Move] from the context menu that appears. The selected items are saved in the Trash. Items saved in the Trash have not yet been deleted from the project. If necessary, you can retrieve them from the Trash.

To move items by cut and paste

1

In the List View pane, select the items to move. (You can select more than one item.)

2

Press Ctrl + X, or select [Cut] from the main menu or the context menu of the selected items. Or click the Cut button. The selected items are cut and saved to the clipboard. Note

The clipboard contains the results of one operation only. Whenever you cut or copy items, any items that may have been in the clipboard previously are discarded.

3

Select the destination item.

4

Press Ctrl + V, or select [Paste] from the main menu or the context menu of the destination item. Or click the Paste button. The items in the clipboard are pasted to the destination item.

To move items by drag and drop Select the items to move and then do one of the following.

70

Operations in the List View Pane

Retrieving Items From the Trash To retrieve items from the Trash, you can use the drag and drop method or the [Return to Original Location] command. Retrieving items with the drag and drop method See “Moving Items to Other Locations” (page 70) for more information about using the drag and drop method. Retrieving items with the [Return to Original Location] command

1

Display the items you want to retrieve in the List View pane.

adjusting the synchronization point for Multi Camera editing. • File Link tab: Re-establishes links between the media offline clips and the corresponding media files. Select the desired resolution for linked media ([High] for high-resolution media or [Low] for proxy media. Click the browse button [...] in the Video File field or Audio File field and select the media file. Note that composite clips, multiple camera sequences, and SG clips cannot be linked with media files. Note also that timecode break marks and scene change marks are deleted after relinking, but essence marks, scene In/Out points, and mark In/Out points are maintained.

• To display the items immediately beneath the Trash, select the Trash in the Tree View pane. • To display the contents of a container item in the Trash, select only that item in the List View pane.

2

Select [Return to Original Location] from the context menu of the items selected in the List View pane. The selected items are moved from the Trash to their original locations.

Note

When the original location has itself been put into the Trash, you can retrieve the entire location, but you cannot retrieve lower level items. For example, you cannot move clips back to their original bin if that bin is in the Trash.

Modifying Items You can modify the names of selected clips, reel names, and timecodes on specified tracks for clips in the List View pane of Project Explorer.

2

Select the items you want to modify in the List View pane. Right-click the selected items and select [Clip Modify] from the context menu. The Clip Modify dialog appears.

3

Specify the modifications and then click the Apply button. • Track tab: Specifies the tracks used for the selected clips, adding or deleting tracks as necessary. When [Modify if the track fits the condition] is checked, the modification is applied only to the clips with the selected tracks specified in [Select the track condition]. When not checked, the modification is applied to all selected clips. After modification, the clips will use the tracks specified in the [Select the track after the modification]. This function is useful for deleting unwanted tracks or adding muted tracks. • Base Information tab: Replaces strings in clip names, reel names, and comments. You can also change the scene number. • Timecode tab: Changes the timecode for the selected clips. Select the desired timecode from [Timecode View]. The timecode of the In point (or start timecode if there is no In point) of the first selected clip is displayed in [Old Timecode]. The value in [Offset] is used to shift the timecode. Values between 0 and 24H can be entered for both these parameters. The [New Timecode] display is the sum of [Old Timecode] and [Offset]. This function is useful for correcting timecode errors or

Click the OK button to modify the clips and close the dialog.

Note

You can also rename items in the List View pane by using the [Rename] command from the context menu.

Color Marking Items You can add a color marker to items, including bins, sequences, or individual clips in the List View pane of Project Explorer. To add a color marker, right-click the selected item(s), select [Color] from the context menu, and then select a color marker. Clips with color labels retain the color setting when added to the timeline. You can also sort items in the List View pane by color. To sort by color, right-click in an empty part of the List View pane, and select [Sort by] > [Color] from the context menu.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

1

4

You can also add a color marker to essence marks in clips by right-clicking an essence mark and selecting a color from the context menu.

Picture Icon Play - Checking Video on the Icon In the List View pane, you can check the video of a specified clip or sequence by playing it on the clip icon. This function is called “Picture Icon Play”. For clips with audio tracks, the audio is also played. In Picture Icon Play mode, you can select a new frame to use as the clip’s index picture. Note

Picture icon play is not possible for non-digitized clips. It is supported for abridged clips high/low-quality clips.

Operations in the List View Pane

71

To start picture icon play In the List View pane of Project Explorer, do one of the following. • Right click the clip that you want to play and select [Picture Icon Play] from the context menu. • If the List View pane is in Picture View mode, double click the clip icon (with the Ctrl key held down, if that has been specified in the Project Explorer Properties dialog). • If the List View pane is in Text View mode or Text and Picture View mode, double click the clip type icon or the name (with the Ctrl key held down, if that has been specified). • Press the key to which you have assigned the Play function by customization. Use [Customize] (see page 49) in the main menu. When you do any of the above, Project Explorer enters picture icon play mode and play starts.

Video being played

Playline (red line) Position bar

The playline starts at the position corresponding to the index picture frame. Play continues form there to the end point.

Notes

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

• Normally, double clicking the clip does not start picture icon play when the Timeline Editor is running. However, you can specify that it should by selecting picture icon play as the double click action in both the Clip Action and Sequence Action sections of the Project Explorer Properties dialog. • The specification of whether you need to hold down the Ctrl key as you double click is also made in the Clip Action and Sequence Action sections of the Project Explorer Properties dialog. • When you configure an index picture in picture icon play mode, the index picture is updated after you exit picture icon play mode. See “Project Explorer Properties Dialog” (page 593) for more information.

When the List View pane is in Text View mode, picture icon play displays the clip icon immediately above the clip name. The icon is similar to the icons displayed in Picture View mode. During play, the playback video and a position bar appear in place of the index picture.

Note

The jog and shuttle controls on the control panel can also be used to control play. In addition, the mouse wheel can be used for seek and shuttle functions when the mouse is moved over the position bar. Scroll the mouse wheel for the seek function, or click the wheel and scroll the wheel for the shuttle function. To stop play Do one of the following. • Press the space key on the keyboard. • Click the playback video. • Press the key to which you have assigned the Play function or Stop function by customization. To play in slow motion Press and hold the K key on the keyboard. Additionally, press the J key for slow motion reverse, or the L key for slow motion forward. Press the J or L key repeatedly to change the play speed. Release the K key to stop slow motion play. To restart play after it stops Do one of the following. • Click the playback video. • Press the key to which you have assigned the Play function by customization. To set the Mark In or Mark Out point of the clip Press the key on the keyboard or the control panel to which you have assigned the Mark In or Mark Out function by customization. Use [Customize] (see page 49) in the main menu.

72

Operations in the List View Pane

Note

You can use the following shortcut keys during picture icon play. • T or t: Move 1 frame back or forward. • Shift + T or t: Move 10 frames back or forward. • Home: Move to the start point. • End: Move to the end point. To set the index picture Press the key on the keyboard or the control panel to which you have assigned the Set Index function by customization. Use [Customize] (see page 49) in the main menu. To add the clip to the timeline Press the key on the keyboard to which you have assigned the Splice-in or Overwrite function by customization. Use [Customize] (see page 49) in the main menu. To exit picture icon play mode Do one of the following. • Press the Esc key. • Click in Project Explorer somewhere outside of the playback video. Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Operations in the List View Pane

73

search are saved in the Search Result folder, you can narrow down the search by selecting from among the bins in the Search Result folder.

Search Dialog 2 Overview Searching for items belonging to the current project When Project Explorer is open, you can use this dialog to find items (bins and clips) belonging to the current project that match a specified set of search criteria. The results of a search are stored temporarily in the Search Result folder. Operations on the aliases in the Search Result folder are reflected back to the original items, allowing you to change the properties of the originals or edit them by operating on the aliases. However, the following operations cannot be performed on the Search Result folder or its contents. • Copying, moving, or deleting the Search Result folder. • Renaming the Search Result folder.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Searching for items belonging to other projects The Search dialog also allows you to search for items belonging to other projects in a data source. In these cases, the search range can be the data source, project groups, projects, or bins beneath projects. You can search several of these locations at the same time. The results of the search are stored temporarily in the Search Result folder of the data source. Search operations for items belonging to other projects are basically the same as the search operations for items belonging to the current project, which are described in the following sections. See “Searching With the Search Dialog” (page 79) for information about how to search with the Search dialog.

Searching for clips on XDCAM The Search dialog allows you to search for clips registered in XDCAM Explorer databases for XDCAM discs, XDCAM EX cards, P2 cards, and other devices. In these cases, you select the search target database or media in XDCAM Explorer, then click the Search button to display the Search dialog. The search target database or media can be added to or deleted from the Search dialog. When a search is executed, the search results are saved in the Search folder of the XDCAM Explorer disc database.

To Open the Search Dialog To search from Project Explorer Proceed as follows in Project Explorer.

1

Specify the search range. In the Tree View pane, select the target bins. You can select multiple bins. When the results of the previous

74

Search Dialog

Do one of the following. • Press Ctrl + F. • Select [Search...] in the main menu or the context menu of the selected bins. • Click the Search tool button.

When only one item is selected in the Tree View pane You can start the Search dialog by selecting [Search...] in the context menu that appears when you click an empty part of the List View pane. In this case, the search range is limited to the selected item. To search within sequences You can search for clips within sequences. In step 1, right click the sequence, and in step 2 select [Search Within this sequence] from the context menu. The Search dialog starts. To search from XDCAM Explorer Proceed as follows in XDCAM Explorer.

1

Specify the search location (database or media). In the disc database, select the target location. You can select multiple locations by selecting while holding down the Ctrl key. When the results of the previous search are saved in the Search folder, you can narrow down the search by selecting from among the locations in the Search folder. You can also add search locations using the Search dialog.

2

Click the Search tool button.

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button 2 Tabs

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

5 Close button 4 Search button 3 Clear button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Search dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Search dialog. Minimize: Minimizes the Search dialog and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close: Closes the Search dialog. Has the same function as the Cancel button. b Tabs The Search dialog has the following tabs. • General tab (page 76) • Detail tab (page 77)

The Search dialog remains open after the settings are cleared. d Search button Starts the search. When the search finishes, the results are saved in the Search Result folder. If the Search Result folder contained results from a previous search, those results are overwritten. If the search did not find any matches, a message box appears. Click OK to close the message box and Search dialog. e Close button Cancels settings made in the Search dialog and closes the dialog.

c Clear button Clears all of the settings in the Search dialog. When you click this button, a message box appears asking if you really want to clear all of the settings. Click OK in the message box to clear the settings, or click Cancel to leave them as they are.

Search Dialog

75

General tab The General tab specifies the name and the location to search.

a Name b Search in

d Add Path button e Delete Path button Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

f Contents

c Do not search sub-directory check box

a Name Specifies the item name. If you want to include the item name in the search criteria, enter all or part of the name. You can enter up to 64 characters. You can specify several strings, separated by spaces. The search will look for matches that include all of the strings. If the string you want to find includes spaces, enclose it in “ ” (quotation marks). You can use wildcards. Enter “*” to find any string, and “?” to find any character. You can quickly specify text by using the copy, cut, and paste operations available in the context menu. b Search in Displays the names of the items that were selected in the Tree View pane of Project Explorer when the Search dialog opened. When a sequence was selected, displays the name of the sequence. c Do not search sub-directory check box Specifies whether or not to search the subdirectories. When this is unchecked, the path and all its subdirectories are searched.

76

Search Dialog

d [Add Path] button Displays the Bin Selection window and adds the search location. This button is displayed when the Search dialog is opened from XDCAM Explorer. e Delete Path button Deletes an unneeded search location from the Search in list. f Contents Specifies the content to search.

Detail tab The Detail tab is used to specify detailed search criteria. The displayed items vary depending on whether the Search dialog is opened from Project Explorer or from XDCAM

Explorer. The following diagram shows the dialog when opened from Project Explorer.

a Clip Type b Material ID c User Name d Reel Names e Comments f Source g Rights h Date Created

j Scope

a Clip Type Specifies a clip type. Select the type from the drop-down list.

f Title1/Title2 Specifies a string (up to 64 characters) to find in Title1 or Title2.

b Material ID When working with Sonaps, specifies the event ID or material ID for displaying the material in the Playlist window. This item is displayed when the dialog is opened from Project Explorer.

g Status Selects the clip status (OK/NG/NONE).

c User Name Specifies a string (up to 64 characters) to find in the user configuration name. This item is displayed when the dialog is opened from Project Explorer.

i Source Specifies a string (up to 64 characters) to find in the source name. This item is displayed when the dialog is opened from Project Explorer.

d Reel Names Specifies a string (up to 64 characters) to find in the reel name. This item is displayed when the dialog is opened from Project Explorer.

j Rights Specifies a string (up to 64 characters) to find in the rights. This item is displayed when the dialog is opened from Project Explorer.

e Disc Name Specifies a string (up to 64 characters) to find in the disc name or card name. This item is displayed when the dialog is opened from XDCAM Explorer.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

i Date Modified

h Comments Specifies a string (up to 64 characters) to find in the comments.

k Date Created Specifies a range of dates to search. Enter a start date in the left box, and an end date in the right box. The search will look for clips created on dates within that range. You can click the V buttons on the right side of the boxes to display a calendar where you can select the dates. Click

Search Dialog

77

the B button in the calendar to display the previous month, and the b button to display the next month. Instead of selecting from the calendar, you can also enter dates in the format “yy/mm/dd” or “yyyy/mm/dd” from the keyboard. l Date Modified Specifies a range of dates to search. The search will look for clips that were most recently modified on dates within that range. Use the left and right boxes in the same way as the Created Date boxes.

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

78

m Scope Enables the administrator to search for content that has been orphaned (physical file has no owner). For example, a user creates material ‘A’ and its corresponding physical file is created in the system. Then, the user creates material ‘B’ by copying material ‘A’, so that material ‘B’ is linked to the same physical file as material ‘A’. If the user then deletes material ‘A’, the physical file owner changes to the Nobody account. When “Nobody” is selected for Scope, the administrator can search for material managed by user Nobody, in this case material ‘B’. This item is displayed when the dialog is opened from Project Explorer.

Search Dialog

3

Searching With the Search Dialog Searching for Items with the Search Dialog Proceed as follows to search for items in the current project with the Search dialog.

1

2

5

5

Set the search criteria in the Detail tab. For details, see “Detail tab” (page 77).

6

Click the Search button in the Search dialog. The search starts. When the search finishes, the results are stored in the Search Result folder.

Searching for Clips on XDCAM with the Search Dialog

1

In the disc database of XDCAM Explorer, select the locations (database or media) to search (multiple selections possible).

The Search dialog opens.

2

Click the Search tool button.

Enter the name or part of the name of the item that you want to find in the Name box of the General tab.

Check the Search in list in the General tab. If it contains any unneeded items, select them and click the Delete Path button.

The Search dialog opens.

3

4

Check the Search in list in the General tab. If it contains any unneeded items, select them and click the Delete Path button.

5

Set the search criteria in the Detail tab. For details, see “Detail tab” (page 77).

Click the Search button in the Search dialog. The search starts. When the search finishes, the results are stored in the Search Result folder.

Searching for Clips in Sequences with the Search Dialog

1

In the Tree View pane of Project Explorer, select the sequence to search (multiple selections possible).

2

Select [Search Within this sequence] from the context menu of the selected sequence.

Enter the name or part of the name of the item that you want to find in the Name box of the General tab. For details, see Name (page 76).

If you want to search for clips only, set the search criteria in the Detail tab. For details, see “Detail tab” (page 77).

6

Check the Search in list in the General tab. If it contains any unneeded items, select them and click the Delete Path button.

Click the Search button in Project Explorer, or select [Search...] from the context menu of the selected items.

For details, see “General tab” (page 76).

4

4

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

3

For details, see “General tab” (page 76).

In the Tree View pane of Project Explorer, select the locations that you want to search (the container items that may contain the clips that you want to find). • If you do not know which container item contains the target items, select a higher level container item. • Multiple selections are possible. You can select container items of different types at the same time.

In the Name box of the General tab, enter the name or part of the name of the target clip or sequence.

6

Click the Search button in the Search dialog. The search starts. When the search finishes, the results are stored in the Search folder in XDCAM Explorer.

Narrowing Down a Search When a search returns a large number of items that meet the search criteria, you can narrow down the search by searching those items. Repeating this process allows you to find precisely the items you are looking for. This method is especially effective when searching for clips.

The Search dialog opens.

Searching With the Search Dialog

79

To narrow down a search In Project Explorer Proceed as follows.

1

In the Tree View pane of Project Explorer, select the Search Result folder or bins located directly beneath the Search Result folder (multiple selections are possible. Note

The Search Result folder or bins in the Search Result folder, cannot be selected at the same time as folders or bins outside the Search Result folder.

2

Click the Search button in Project Explorer, or select [Search...] in the context menu of the selected items. The Search dialog opens.

3 Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

Carry out steps 3 and following in the procedures described in Searching for Clips in Sequences With the Search Dialog or Searching for Items With the Search Dialog.

In XDCAM Explorer Proceed as follows.

1

In the disc database of XDCAM Explorer, select the Search folder.

2

Click the Search button in XDCAM Explorer, or select [Search...] in the context menu of the selected items. The Search dialog opens.

3

80

Carry out the procedure from step 2 in “Searching for Clips on XDCAM with the Search Dialog” (page 79).

Searching With the Search Dialog

Working With XDCAM Material XPRI NS allows you to import material recorded with XDCAM-series systems and to do online editing of the material on the timeline. Contact your Sony representative for more information about XDCAM connections.

Flow of Operations (1)Using the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software supplied with the XDCAM system, do offline cut editing of Proxy AV data on the XDCAM disc, and create a PD-EDL file. r

Chapter 3 Projects - Project Explorer

(2)Use the XDCAM Explorer (see page 509) to select and digitize the PD-EDL file. One sequence and multiple MXF clips are created, and the MXF files are digitized. r (3)In the Timeline Editor (see page 171), do online editing of the newly created sequence.

Working With XDCAM Material

81

Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Overview (Creating Clips) Editing in the Timeline Editor is the process of assembling clips into sequences. Logging and digitizing are the processes of creating clips by importing required sections from video and audio material. In logging, you specify timecode and the track configuration and register clips in project bins. In digitizing, you make the same specifications, register clips, and also save digital video and audio to your hard disk. This chapter explains the Logging Tool, which allows you to create reel clips from input signals, the Batch Digitize tool, which allows you to digitize a number of clips at once, and the Generate SG Clip tool, which allows you to create clips from internal test signals. When the Source Viewer is in digitize mode, you can carry out the entire procedure of creating reel clips and pasting them to the timeline from within the Source Viewer. For details, see “Source Viewer” (page 144). You can also import and create clips from video and audio files and MXF files. For details, see “Importing Media Files”.

82

Overview (Creating Clips)

Chapter

4

Logging Tool Overview The Logging Tool is a tool for creating reel clips (see page 25). It controls the player, plays video and audio, and performs logging and digitizing. You can also create sub clips while digitizing.

To Start the Logging Tool

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

To start the Logging Tool, use any of the following methods. • Do one of the following in Project Explorer (page 43). - Click the New Reel Clip button. - Click the Menu button and select [New Clip] >[Logging...]. - Right click a bin in the Tree View pane and select [New Clip] >[Logging...]. - Right click an empty part of the List View pane, and select [New Clip] >[Logging...]. - Press Ctrl + L on the keyboard. • Press the Logging Tool focus hot keys, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information.

Logging Tool

83

Names and Functions of Parts Note

When a Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, an Audio Control Panel, or an Editing Control Panel is connected to the computer, you can perform some of the functions from the control panels.

See “Functions Available on the Control Panels” (page 835) for more information.

You can also change the functions assigned to the control panel buttons. See “Control Panel Customize window” (page 574) for more information.

1 Menu button 2 Source track buttons

3 Tool buttons

w; Reel Name

4 Memo window

ql Reel button qk Player time

5 Index picture

qj Status

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

qh Monitor

6 Logging button

qg Output mode

7 Digitize button

buttons

qf Command

8 Shuttle slider

button area

9 Progress bar

qd Device list box

qs Recording

destination vault list boxes Mark In point

qa Compression

0 Bin Name list box

list box Mark Out point

Duration

wa Timecode ws Timecode

(for sub clips)

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Logging Tool. See “Logging Tool Main Menu” (page 91) for more information about the main menu.

b Source track buttons Select the tracks to record in a reel clip.

84

Logging Tool

Clicking a button depresses the button and changes its color to orange, to show that the button is selected. Clicking it again returns the button to its original state and cancels the selection. Note

Tracks where there are not input signals cannot be selected.

For more information about audio tracks on which Dolby E streams are recorded, see “Logging Tool” (page 467).

c Tool buttons This area contains the tool buttons of the Logging Tool. See page 87 for more information about the tool buttons.

d Memo window Allows you to enter clip names, scene numbers, take numbers, and comments for each port. e Index picture Displays the index picture of the clip. If no index picture has been set for the clip, displays a picture of the Mark In point. For sub clips created during digitizing, displays a picture of the Mark In point. Displays a musical note for clips consisting of audio only.

See “Creating Clips” (page 99) for more information about logging operations.

g Digitize button When clicked after confirming logging data (timecode, source tracks, etc.), creates a reel clip and saves it in the selected bin, and at the same time records the clip’s video and audio data to hard disks. Margins are added before the Mark In point and after the Mark Out point. Set the length of the margins with the Margin (Pre/Post Digitize Duration) (page 603) control in the Logging Properties dialog. When clicked without setting Mark In and Mark Out points in advance, digitizes as follows. The first click of this button sets a Mark In point at the current position and starts digitizing. The second click sets a Mark Out point at the current position, digitizes the margin, and stops digitizing. Only one margin is added after the Mark Out point. You can also create sub clips while digitizing.

Note

Sub clips are not created automatically when the continuous timecode range is very short. If you click the Digitize button again during digitizing, the digitizing is either aborted or completed. A message dialog appears when digitizing stops before it is finished, either because the Digitize button was pressed or because of an error on the side of the player that is selected in the Device list box. Click one of the following in the message dialog to select whether to save the results of digitizing up to the point of the interruption. Save Log (only when an Out point has been set): Delete the digitizing results for the range over which digitizing was finished, and create a log clip only. Save Clip: Create a clip from the range over which digitizing was finished. Abort: If the clip is already in use by the Edit While Digitizing function, create a clip from the range over which digitizing was finished. Otherwise delete the clip. See “Creating Clips” (page 99) for more information about logging operations. Notes

• Total digitizing time including margins cannot exceed 12 hours. • If you are already digitizing with another tool, a message appears to inform you that digitizing cannot be carried out with the Logging Tool until digitizing with the other tool ends or is aborted.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

f Logging button When clicked after confirming logging data (timecode, source tracks, etc.), creates a reel clip and saves it in the selected bin. When clicked without setting timecode in advance, starts logging during which you can set the timecode shown in the player time display. When clicked without setting Mark In and Mark Out points in advance, creates a log clip as follows. The first click of this button starts logging and sets a Mark In point at the current position. The second click sets a Mark Out point at the current position. You can cancel the creation of log clip by clicking the Clear Mark In, Clear Mark Out, or Clear Both Marks button before the log clip is created.

Notes

• If you want to create sub clips while digitizing, you should set the Naming Mode (page 596) option buttons in the Project Explorer Properties dialog to [Automatic]. • You can continue performing other tasks in XPRI NS that do not require the engine while digitizing, such as importing files, creating CG effects, adding marks, and so on. However, some operations on the material being digitized are prohibited, such as loading to Source Viewer and Timeline, picture icon play, and export functions. You can have sub clips generated automatically when you digitize material containing timecode breaks (see page 102).

h Shuttle slider Allows you to perform variable speed playback. Drag the knob in the forward or reverse direction to start playback. Playback speed increases as the knob approaches the ends of the slider range. Playback stops and the knob returns to the center position when you stop dragging. By holding the Ctrl key while dragging the knob on the shuttle slider and releasing, you can lock the knob at any

Logging Tool

85

position on the slider and enable continuous forward or reverse playback at varied speed. To release the lock, drag the knob again without pressing the Ctrl key, or click one of the command buttons under the Play tab (Rewind, Fast Forward, Play, Still, etc.). Note

Variable speed playback is not supported for players connected via i.LINK. In addition, images in the monitor may not refresh, depending on the playback speed. i Progress bar Indicates the progress of the digitizing and timecode. j Bin Name list box Displays the current destination bin. The drop-down list displays the names of up to 10 bins that have been selected in the Bin Selection dialog. You can select another destination bin for newly created clips from the drop-down list. You can also select [Bin Selection...] in the drop-down list to open the Bin Selection dialog and select a destination bin which is not displayed in the dropdown list. When bin names are changed in Project Explorer, the bin names shown here are updated automatically. When working with Sonaps, you can specify a folder in the Material List as the save destination for clips in the Bin Selection dialog.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

k Compression list box Selects the compression method used during digitizing.

m Device list box Selects either [SDI] or [i.LINK] for the input ports of the signals to be digitized. The name of the remotely connected video players also appears. If an i.LINK device name is not in the Device Type list of the Device Properties dialog, the device appears as “Unknown.” Select [Device Properties...] to open the Device Properties Dialog (page 584) for configuring hardware and video I/O settings. Note

When digitizing i.LINK inputs, the following limitations and precautions apply. • A slight discrepancy of a few frames may occur in the audio and video of the created clips in relation to the input material. • Remote operations for variable speed playback and eject are not supported. • If you change the configurations on the connected video player or switch to media of a different recording format, the device (player) may not be properly recognized. In such cases, reconnect the device. • For more information about configurations on the player, refer to the operating instructions for the connected device. • When digitizing from an HDV device, set the input format and system format of the device to HDV. • While digitizing is in progress, input signals are output to SDI OUT for monitor output.

Note

The video resolution of AVI2 and MOV files is converted automatically, as necessary. • 1280x720, 1920x1080 convert to MPEG HD50 (1920x1080) • 1440x1080 convert to MPEG HD15 (1440x1080) • All others convert to IMX30 (PAL: 720x608; NTSC:720x512) l Recording destination vault list boxes Allow you to select the recording destination vaults. Select the video vault from the Video Capacity drop-down list and select the audio vault from the Audio Capacity drop-down list. These lists display the vaults designated as recording destinations in the Media Vaults tab (page 652) of the Project Properties dialog. You can also select Project Properties... to open the Project Properties dialog and change the recording destination settings. The approximate remaining times of the selected recording vaults are displayed as calculated on the basis of the compression methods and numbers of tracks.

86

If there is not enough free capacity remaining, a message appears to inform you of that and the digitizing is not carried out. If there is no remaining free capacity, “00:00:00:00” is displayed. If there is no vault selected, “-:--:--:--” is displayed.

Logging Tool

n Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Logging Tool. See page 89 for more information about the command button area.

o Output mode buttons As an optional function when you are creating reel clips by logging or digitizing, you can have the clips sent to the Timeline Editor. See page 88 for more information about the Logging Tool output mode buttons.

p Monitor Displays input video from the player. When the Logging Tool is active, a scratchpad appears in the center of the monitor if you use the numeric keypad on the keyboard to enter timecode. After entering the timecode, you can press the Mark In, Mark Out, and Duration buttons to set the value. The scratchpad

disappears when you set the value or press the Esc key to cancel it. However, note that the scratchpad does not appear in the following cases. • When a Timecode or Timecode (for sub clips) field is active. • When the edit box of the Memo window is active.

not displayed. You can customize the Logging Tool as required to display these buttons.

Logging Tool tool buttons a Video Imput Tool (Technical Monitor) b Audio Input Tool

q Status Displays player operating status, digitizing execution status, live signal status, and so on.

c Bypass (Audio Input Tool)

f Memo window

r Player time Displays the timecode or frames of the player. Right click the display and use the context menu to switch between timecode display and frame display. You can switch between TC display and CTL display in the submenu for timecode display. You can also select LTC or VITC in TC display from the Device Properties dialog. See “Device Properties Dialog” (page 584) for more information.

e Logging Properties d Live Signal Capture

a Video Input Tool (Technical Monitor) Starts the Technical Monitor, or exits it if it is running. Note that if the current target port of digitizing or logging is i.LINK input, the waveforms cannot be monitored using the Technical Monitor.

s Reel button Opens the Reel Database dialog, so that you can select a reel (the material tape loaded in the player).

See page 103 for more information about the Technical Monitor.

See “Reel Database Dialog” (page 93) for more information.

b Audio Input Tool Starts the Audio Input Tool, or exits the tool if it is running. The adjustments are reflected in the digitized data.

See “Reel Database Dialog” (page 93) for more information.

u Timecode Display the Mark In, Mark Out, and duration timecodes. You can click these fields to activate them, and then enter timecode values from the numeric keypad on the keyboard. v Timecode (for sub clips) Display the Mark In, Mark Out, and duration timecodes for sub clips. During digitizing, you can click the Mark In button for sub clips to set a Mark In point and display the timecode for that point here. You can set and display Mark Out points in the same way, by clicking the Mark Out button for sub clips. The duration from Mark In point to Mark Out point is calculated and displayed. With the Mark In point, Mark Out point, and duration displayed, you can click the Make Sub Clip button to create the sub clip. Note

By default, the Mark In, Mark Out, Clear Mark In, Clear Mark Out, and Clear Both Marks buttons for sub clips are

See page 424 for more information about the Audio Input Tool.

c Bypass (Audio Input Tool) Temporarily bypasses the audio adjustments made with the Audio Input Tool (page 424). If you digitize with this button on, the audio is digitized without adjustment processing. d Live Signal Capture Selects the live signal input feed source. Notes

• An external switch can be used to control switching between live signal feed and VTR source. • i.LINK does not support live signal capture.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

t Reel Name Displays the name of the reel selected in the Reel Database dialog.

e Logging Properties Opens the Logging Properties dialog. See page 601 for more information about the Logging Properties dialog.

f Memo window Displays or hides the memo window with each click.

Logging Tool

87

Logging Tool output mode buttons You can optionally choose to have reel clips sent to the Timeline Editor automatically after they are created by logging or digitizing. 1 Send Mode (Splice-In) 2 Send Mode (Overwrite)

3 Send Mode (Do Not Send)

a Send Mode (Splice-In) Places newly created clips on the timeline in Splice-In mode. Note

The Timeline Editor must be started in advance. See “Splice-In Editing” (page 250) for more information about Splice-In mode.

b Send Mode (Overwrite) Places newly created clips on the timeline in Overwrite mode. Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

88

Note

The Timeline Editor must be started in advance. See “Overwrite Editing” (page 247) for more information about Overwrite mode.

c Send Mode (Do Not Send) Creates new clips, but does not send them to the Timeline Editor. This is the default mode.

Logging Tool

Logging Tool command button area This area contains command buttons for the Logging Tool. By default the buttons in the Logging Tool command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting [Customize] (see page 92) in the main menu.

Default command button configuration

Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. Icon

Button function

Rewind

Rewinds the video tape.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the video tape.

Mark In

Marks the current position as the In point. Move to the point that you want to set as the In point by playing or by using the command buttons, and then click this button to set the In point. If an In point is already set when you click this button, it is reset to the new point.

Play

Plays from the current position to the end. To stop play, click this button again or click the Stop button.

Mark Out

Marks the current position as the Out point. Move to the point that you want to set as the Out point by playing or by using the command buttons, and then click this button to set the Out point. If an Out point is already set when you click this button, it is reset to the new point.

Clear In Mark

Clears the In point, if it exists.

Clear Out Mark

Clears the Out point, if it exists.

Make Sub Clip

Creates a sub clip. Set the In and Out points for the sub clip and then click this button. A sub clip is created and saved in the same bin as the original clip. Margins of the length specified in the Logging Properties dialog are added before the In point and after the Out point of the sub clip. See “Logging Properties Dialog” (page 601) for more information.

Still

Pauses at the current position.

Go to In

Jumps to the In point, if it exists.

Stop

Stops play, fast forward, or rewind.

Go to Out

Jumps to the Out point, if it exists.

Set Index Picture

By default, XPRI NS creates an index picture from the video of the In point whenever it digitizes a clip. No index picture is made for logged clips unless you click this button.

Clear Both Marks

Clears both the In and Out points, or the existing point if only one of them exists.

Logging Tool

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Button name

89

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Button function

Step Backward

Moves 1 frame back from the current position.

Step Forward

Moves 1 frame forward from the current position.

Step Backward 10 Frames Moves 10 frames back from the current position. Step Forward 10 Frames

Moves 10 frames forward from the current position.

All Stop

Stops all operations.

All Cancel

Stops all operations. When clicked during digitizing, stops the digitizing and discards the digitizing results.

Eject

Ejects the cassette. Note Does not function for players connected via i.LINK.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

90

Logging Tool

Standby Off

Sets the player to standby off.

Play Reverse

Plays in the reverse direction (from the current position to the start point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Play Forward

Plays in the forward direction (from the current position to the end point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Mark In (Sub)

Marks the current position as the In point for a sub clip. Move to the point that you want to set as the In point by playing or by using the command buttons, and then click this button to set the In point. If an In point is already set when you click this button, it is reset to the new point.

Mark Out (Sub)

Marks the current position as the Out point for a sub clip. Move to the point that you want to set as the Out point by playing or by using the command buttons, and then click this button to set the Out point. If an Out point is already set when you click this button, it is reset to the new point.

Clear In Mark (Sub)

Clears the In point for a sub clip, if it exists.

Clear Out Mark (Sub)

Clears the Out point for a sub clip, if it exists.

Clear Both Marks (Sub)

Clears both the In and Out points for a sub clip, or the existing point if only one of them exists.

Still Picture

Digitizes a still picture and creates a clip. Still clips are TGA-format clips with default name NewPicture_Sequence name_nnn, where nnn (001, 002, ...) increments with each new clip in the sequence Sequence name.

Set Duration

Sets the duration.

Set Essence Mark

Sets an essence mark at the current position.

Splice-In

Places the clip on the sequence in Splice-In mode.

Overwrite

Places the clip on the sequence in Overwrite mode.

Icon

Button name

Button function

Don’t Send to Timeline

Creates a clip, but does not place it on the timeline.

Overwrite Mode Record

Performs linear-like editing and adds the results to a sequence in Overwrite mode.

Splice-In Mode Record

Performs linear-like editing and adds the results to a sequence in Splice-In mode.

Jog

Selects jog mode.

Shuttle

Selects shuttle mode.

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Switches between jog and shuttle modes.

CTL Reset

Performs a CTL reset on the player connected to the selected device. The player’s timecode becomes CTL.

TC/CTL

Switches between CTL and LTC on the player connected to the selected device.

Help

Starts the Online Help.

Properties

Displays the Logging Properties dialog.

a) The send to Timeline Editor mode of the Logging Tool changes if you use one of these buttons when digitizing stops. For example, if you start digitizing with the Splice-In Mode Record button but stop it with the Overwrite Mode Record button, then the send to timeline mode of the Logging Tool becomes Overwrite. If you want to avoid this, you should click the All Stop button to stop digitizing.

Splice-In: After creating the clip, send it to the timeline in Splice-In Mode. Do not send: Create the clip, but do not send it to the timeline. This is the default mode.

Logging Tool Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Logging Tool to display the Logging Tool main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Tracks Allows you to select the tracks to record in a clip. This command has the following subcommands. Reset: Resets the track selection to the defaults. V: Selects the video track. A1 to A8: Select the audio tracks. Note

See “Splice-In Editing” (page 250) for more information about Splice-In mode.

Reel Database... Opens the Reel Database dialog. See page 93 for more information about the Reel Database dialog.

Video Input Tool... Starts the Technical Monitor, or exits it if it is already running. Note that if the current target port of digitizing or logging is i.LINK input, the waveforms cannot be monitored using the Technical Monitor.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

See “Overwrite Editing” (page 247) for more information about Overwrite mode.

Tracks that have no signal input cannot be selected. Send Mode Selects the mode that determines whether a clip should be sent to the Timeline Editor (page 171) after logging or digitizing. This command has the following subcommands. Overwrite: After creating the clip, send it to the timeline in Overwrite Mode.

See page 103 for more information about the Technical Monitor.

Audio Input Tool... Starts the Audio Input Tool, or exits the Audio Input Tool if it is already running. See page 424 for more information about the Audio Input Tool.

Logging Tool

91

Bypass (Audio Input Tool) Temporarily bypasses the audio adjustments made by the Audio Input Tool (page 424). If you digitize with this button on, the audio is digitized without adjustment processing. Memo Window Displays the memo window. Use this window to enter clip names, scene numbers, take numbers, and comments. Logging Properties... Opens the Logging Properties dialog. See “Logging Properties Dialog” (page 601) for more information about the Logging Properties dialog.

Bin Selection... Opens the Bin Selection dialog so that you can select a bin to store newly created clips. Select the bin from the Tree View pane in the dialog, and then click the OK button in the dialog to confirm the selection or the Cancel button to cancel it. When working with Sonaps, you can specify a folder in the Material List as the save destination for clips in the Bin Selection dialog. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Logging Tool. Minimize Minimizes the Logging Tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Logging Tool window.

92

Logging Tool

Reel Database Dialog The Reel Database dialog allows you to manage the reels that contain your video source material. Reels are managed in data source units. They are used when creating reel clips in the Logging Tool (page 83) and in the digitize mode of the Source Viewer (page 144). To open the Reel Database dialog, do one of the following. • Click the Reel button in the Logging Tool. • Select [Reel Database...] from the main menu of the Logging Tool. • Put the Source Viewer into digitize mode and then select [Reel Database...] from the main menu of the Source Viewer. • Activate the Logging Tool and press Ctrl + R on the keyboard. • Activate the Source Viewer, put it into digitize mode, and press Ctrl + R on the keyboard.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Reel Database Dialog

93

Names and Functions of Parts

3 List View button

1 Menu button 2 Filter buttons

4 Details View button

5 Reel list

8 Reel Name box

6 Cancel button

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Reel Database dialog.

f Cancel button Closes the dialog without selecting a reel.

See “Reel Database Dialog Main Menu” (page 95) for more information about the main menu.

g OK button Completes selection of a reel and closes the dialog.

b Filter buttons Allow you to filter the reels displayed in the reel list according to the following criteria. All: Display all reels. Project: Display the reels used in the currently open project (default). Text: Display reels whose reel names or comments contain the string entered in the text box.

h Reel Name box Displays the name of the reel selected in the reel list. You can register a reel by entering a reel name and clicking the OK button. A default reel name appears in this box when the Reel Database dialog was opened automatically. You can set the default reel name in the Project Defaults tab of the System Properties dialog.

c List View button For registered reels, displays reel names only in the reel list. d Details View button Displays reel names and comments in the reel list. e Reel list Displays a list of reels. Newly registered reels are added to this list. Select the reel to use in creating clips from the list.

94

7 OK button

Reel Database Dialog

Note

Reel names which consist of spaces only are invalid. Leading and trailing spaces are deleted from reel names.

Reel Database Dialog Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Reel Database dialog (see page 93) to display the Reel Database main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. New... Opens the Reel Information dialog so that you can register a new reel. Register the reel by entering a name (up to 256 characters) in the edit box and clicking the OK button. See “Reel Information Dialog” (page 96) for more information.

Open... Opens the Reel Information dialog so that you can view the information registered for the selected reel. See “Reel Information Dialog” (page 96) for more information.

Delete Deletes the selected reel. Help... Displays help about the Reel Database dialog. Close Closes the Reel Database dialog. Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Note

Reel names which consist of spaces only are invalid (cannot be registered). Leading and trailing spaces are deleted from reel names.

Reel Database Dialog

95

Reel Information Dialog The Reel Information dialog is called from the Reel Database dialog (see page 93). It allows you to enter and edit reel information. To open the Reel Information dialog, do one of the following. To register a new reel • In the Reel Database dialog, click the Menu button and select [New...].

• In the Reel Database dialog, right click in an empty part of the reel list and select [New...] from the context menu. To edit reel information • In the Reel Database dialog, select a reel in the reel list, click the Menu button, and select [Open...]. • In the Reel Database dialog, right click the name of a reel in the reel list and select [Open...] from the context menu.

1 Reel Name

2 Comments

4 Cancel button 3 OK button Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

96

a Reel Name Enter the reel name (up to 256 characters). b Comments Enter or edit the comment (up to 256 characters). c OK button Registers the reel information and closes the Reel Information dialog. d Cancel button Closes the Reel Information dialog without registering reel information.

Reel Database Dialog

2

Handling Reels Reels are the source for reel clips created with the Logging Tool and the Source Viewer (page 144) in digitize mode. They are a unit for managing material. This section explains how to handle reels.

• Click the Menu button and select [New...]. • Right click in an empty part of the reel list and select [New...] from the context menu. The Reel Information dialog opens.

3

In the Reel Information dialog, enter a name in the Reel Name box (up to 256 alphanumeric characters), and enter comments as required in the comments box (up to 256 characters).

4

Click the OK button.

Selecting Reels

1

Open the Reel Database dialog. See page 93 for more information about how to open the Reel Database dialog.

2

Select a reel in the Reel Database dialog reel list.

3

Click the OK button. The reel is selected and the Reel Database dialog closes. The Reel Database dialog closes immediately if you select a reel in step 2 by double clicking it.

This completes the registration of a new reel. The Reel Database dialog closes.

Renaming Reels

1 2

Enter a reel name from the keyboard.

Open the Reel Database dialog. Note

Enter a reel name in the Reel Name box (up to 256 alphanumeric characters).

Reel names which consist of spaces only are invalid. Leading and trailing spaces are deleted from reel names.

4

Confirm the new reel name by doing one of the following.

Note

• Press the Enter key. • Click somewhere away from the reel name. • Select another item.

Reel names which consist of spaces only are invalid. Leading and trailing spaces are deleted from reel names.

3

Click the OK button. This completes the registration of a new reel. The Reel Database dialog closes.

Deleting Reels

1

Open the Reel Database dialog. See page 93 for more information about how to open the Reel Database dialog.

Open the Reel Database dialog. See page 93 for more information about how to open the Reel Database dialog.

To create a new reel with comments

1

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

3

See page 93 for more information about how to open the Reel Database dialog.

2

Do one of the following in the Reel Database dialog. • Right click in the name of a reel in the reel list and select [Rename...] from the context menu. • Click a reel in the reel list.

Use the same procedure for changing a reel.

1

Open the Reel Database dialog. See page 93 for more information about how to open the Reel Database dialog.

Note

Creating New Reels

Do one of the following in the Reel Database dialog.

2

Select a reel in the Reel Database dialog reel list. To display unused reels only in the reel list Click the Unused filter button.

Handling Reels

97

3

Do one of the following. • Press the Delete key. • Select [Delete] from the context menu of the reel selected in step 2. • Select [Delete] from the main menu. A confirmation dialog appears asking whether you really want to delete the reel.

4

Click OK in the confirmation dialog. This completes the deletion of the reel. The Reel Database dialog closes. Note

Reels cannot be deleted if they are in use.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

98

Handling Reels

Note

Creating Clips

You can also use the Digitize and Logging buttons to set Mark In and Mark Out points.

See “Batch Digitizing of Multiple Clips” (page 110) for the procedure to digitize a number of clips in one operation.

For more information, see “To set Mark In and Mark Out points while logging or digitizing” (page 101).

Note

7

Click the Digitize button.

You can also put the Source Viewer into digitize mode and edit clips as you digitize them.

Digitizing starts. When it finishes, a new reel clip is stored in the currently selected bin.

See “Linear-Like Editing” (page 258) for more information.

When digitizing is interrupted When digitizing is stopped before it is finished, either because the Digitize button was pressed or because of an error on the side of the player that is selected in the Device list box, a message appears asking you whether you want the results of processing to be saved or not. Click one of the following in the message dialog. Save Log (only when an Out point has been set): Delete the digitizing results for the range over which digitizing was finished, and create a log clip only. Save Clip: Create a clip from the range over which digitizing was finished. Abort: If the clip is already in use via edit while digitizing, create a clip from the range over which digitizing was finished. Otherwise delete the clip.

Creating Reel Clips Use the following procedure to create reel clips in the Logging Tool.

1

Start the Logging Tool. See page 83 for more information about how to start the Logging Tool.

2

Open the Reel Database dialog. See page 93 for more information about how to open the Reel Database dialog.

3

Create a new reel.

See page 97 for more information about how to create a new reel.

4

Select the reel. See page 97 for more information about how to select reels.

5

Set the following items in the Logging Tool. • Player used to play the reel (in the Device list box) • Tracks (source track buttons) • Scene number, take number, and comments (memo window) • Digitize destination bin ([Bin Selection] in the main menu, or Ctrl + B) See “Names and Functions of Parts” (page 84) for more information about the parts of the Logging Tool.

6

Use the buttons in the command button area to play the tape, and set Mark In and Mark Out points in the scene that you want to use in the clip. See page 89 for more information about the command button area.

To create sub clips while digitizing During digitizing, the timecode display section for sub clips is activated, and you can set Mark In and Mark Out points for sub clips. To create sub clips, set the Mark In and Mark Out points by clicking the Mark In (for sub clips) and Mark Out (for sub clips) buttons, and then click the Make Sub Clip button. You can create sub clips automatically when material with timecode breaks is digitized. (For details, see “Digitizing clips with timecode breaks” (page 102).) If the send mode is Overwrite or Splice-In, sub clips are placed in sequences instead of the master clip, which is not placed.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Proceed to step 4 if you want to use an already registered reel.

Note

It is recommended that you set the Naming Mode (page 596) option in the Project Explorer Properties dialog to [Automatic] before creating sub clips while digitizing. To digitize while specifying the send mode Add the following command buttons by customization. Overwrite Mode Record: Digitize and send the results to the Timeline Editor in Overwrite mode. Splice-In Mode Record: Digitize and send the results to the Timeline Editor in Splice-In mode.

Creating Clips

99

Normal Digitize: Digitize but do not send the results to the Timeline Editor. These buttons can also be used to stop digitizing. Command button customization allows you to add the All Stop button and use it to stop digitizing. Note

The send to Timeline Editor mode of the Logging Tool changes when you stop digitizing with the Overwrite Mode Record or Splice-In Mode Record button. For example, if you start digitizing with the Splice-In Mode Record button but stop it with the Overwrite Mode Record button, then the send mode of the Logging Tool becomes Overwrite. If you want to avoid this, you should click the All Stop button to stop digitizing.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

100

Creating Clips

To set Mark In and Mark Out points while logging or digitizing When you click the Logging or Digitize button, the Mark In point and Mark Out point are set as follows, depending on which, if any, of the duration, Mark In point, and Mark Out point were set before you clicked the button.

Note

The player must be in remote mode when you manually digitize i.LINK input. Otherwise digitizing will not start.

Mark In

Mark Out

Duration

Logging button clicked

Digitize button clicked

Set

Not set

Not set

Mark Out point set at click point.

Open-end digitizing done.

Not set

Set

Not set

Mark In point set at click point.

Digitize button disabled.

Not set

Not set

Not set

Mark In point set at first click point and Mark Out point set at next click point.

Open-end digitizing done with click position set as Mark In point.

Not set

Not set

Set

Mark In point set at click point.

Click point set as Mark In point and duration amount digitized.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Creating Clips

101

Digitizing clips with timecode breaks In the Timecode Breaks (discontinuous timecode) option buttons (see page 603) of the Logging Properties dialog and Timecode Breaks (page 622) of the Batch Properties dialog, the Make Sub Clip button can be turned on to create sub clips automatically whenever timecode breaks are encountered. (This button is on by default.) Digitizing continues without pausing even when timecode breaks are encountered. Then, after the digitizing finishes, a sub clip is created for each location where a timecode break was encountered. The sub clips are stored in the same bin as the original clip.

Notes

• Sub clips with a duration less than the preroll time are not created. • After digitizing, the status of clips with timecode breaks is set to NG. • Sub clips are not created when digitizing in CTL mode. • It is recommended that you set the Naming Mode (see page 596) option buttons in the Project Explorer Properties dialog to [Automatic] before creating sub clips.

This figure illustrates the case where the preroll time is set to 2 seconds.

Preroll

Sub Clip3 Sub Clip2 Sub Clip1 In point (2:02:00)

In point (3:02:00) Timecode break locations

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

102

Timecode

Creating Clips

1:00:00

2:00:00

3:00:00

4:00:00

Technical Monitor Overview The Technical Monitor is a tool for checking the color of video signals before digitizing using a vectorscope and waveform monitor. Note

If the current target port of digitizing or logging is i.LINK input, the waveforms cannot be monitored using the Technical Monitor.

To Start the Technical Monitor To start the Technical Monitor, do one of the following. • Click the Video Input Tool button of the Logging Tool. • Click the Logging Tool Menu button and select [Video Input Tool...]. • Activate the Logging Tool and press Ctrl + I on the keyboard. • Select [Technical Monitor] from the taskbar menu button of Source Viewer, Master Viewer, Effect Editor, Advanced Color Corrector, or picture icon playback.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Technical Monitor

103

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button 2 Wave Form Monitor button 3 Vector Scope Monitor button 4 Wave Form monitor

5 Vector Scope monitor

8 Freeze button 7 Over Sample Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

6 Parameters

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Technical Monitor. Help... Displays help about the Technical Monitor. Close Closes the Technical Monitor. b Wave Form Monitor button Displays or hides the Wave Form monitor. c Vector Scope Monitor button Displays or hides the Vector Scope monitor. d Wave Form monitor Allows you to check the components of a selected video signal visually. You can select several signals at the same time. Y: Displays the waveform of the Y signal. The width is 0 to 100 IRE. B-Y: Displays the waveform of the B-Y signal. The width is -80 to +80 IRE.

104

Technical Monitor

R-Y: Displays the waveform of the R-Y signal. The width is -80 to +80 IRE. Intensity: Adjusts the brightness of the waveform display. Note

The waveform display is not updated during digitizing if the [Line] check box is not checked (all-line scanning mode). e Vector Scope monitor Allows you to check the R-Y and B-Y components of the video signal visually. Six target boxes are displayed, one each for R (red), MG (magenta), B (blue), CY (cyan), G (green), and YL (yellow). This furnishes a measure for color correction. Vector Scope markers are based on a 100% color bar. Intensity: Adjusts the brightness of the vector scope display. Notes

• The [Line] check box in the line selection section must be checked to use the Vector Scope monitor. When the

[Line] check box is not checked (all lines scanned), the data of the most recently selected line is displayed. • The Vector Scope display is not updated during digitizing. f Parameters Selects the image to monitor. Full Frame: Selects the entire frame to monitor. Line: Selects the display line to monitor. • Odd: Selects the odd field (odd-numbered lines). • Even: Selects the even field (even-numbered lines). • Number: Selects the number of the line. You can use the slider or the numeric keypad on the keyboard to enter a line number. The Line number selection range is 21 to 263 for NTSC, 23 to 310 for PAL, and 21 to 560 (odd field) or 561 (even field) for HD. Note that the maximum value in the selection range may be limited depending on the type of video signal. g Over Sample Selects the level of oversampling (1/2/4/8/16/32/64) used during processing in order to improve the accuracy of the waveform display of the selected line. This parameter is available only when the [Line] parameter is selected.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

h Freeze button Displays the field read at the instant when you press this button as a still image on the monitor of the Logging Tool and on the video monitor. Wave Form monitor and Vector Scope monitor processing is performed on this field.

Technical Monitor

105

Batch Digitize Tool Overview The Batch Digitize tool allows you to digitize multiple clips in one operation for each port. As the targets for batch digitizing operations, you can select reel clips, SG clips, import clips, CD audio clips, and sequences. In addition to digitizing clips for the first time, you can re-digitize clips that have already been digitized. Select the clips to digitize in the List View pane of Project Explorer. You can also select a bin in the Tree View pane and digitize all clips in that bin, or digitize only nondigitized clips or only clips with OK status.

To Start the Batch Digitize Tool

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

To start the Batch Digitize tool, select the target clips or bin in Project Explorer (page 43) and then do one of the following. • Click the Project Explorer Menu button and select [Batch Digitize]. Further, depending on the type of clips you want to digitize, select [All Clips], [Selected Clips], [Non-digitized Clips], or [OK Clips] from the subcommands that appear. All Clips: Digitizes all of the clips displayed in the Project Explorer List View pane. Selected Clips: Digitizes all of the clips selected in the Project Explorer List View pane. Non-digitized Clips: Digitizes all of the non-digitized clips in the bin that is selected in the Project Explorer Tree View pane. OK Clips: Digitizes all of the clips with OK status in the Project Explorer List View pane. • Press the Batch Digitize Tool focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information. Notes

• Starting the Batch Digitize tool with a sequence selected does not load the sequence itself. Instead, it loads the clips in the sequence that match the type specified by the subcommand that you choose to start the Batch Digitize tool. • Batch digitizing cannot be performed on clips created through manual digitizing (clips without specified In points).

106

Batch Digitize Tool

Names and Functions of Parts

1 Menu button

2 Monitor

3 Target clip list

4 Temporary

re-digitize setting list box 5 Recording

destination vault boxes qa Device list box

6 Compression box

qs Total (total digitizing

time of all clips) qd Clip (total digitizing time of current clip) qf Command button area qg Timecode display

7 Expand Display button 8 All Stop button 9 Digitize button 0 Shuttle slider

(see page 622) option buttons can be set to [Accept] or [Reject].)

See “Batch Digitize Tool Main Menu” (page 109) for more information about the main menu.

e Recording destination vault boxes Display the approximate amount of remaining capacity in the recording destination vaults (Video Capacity, Audio Capacity), calculated on the basis of the compression ratio and the number of source tracks.

b Monitor Displays the video being digitized. However, the video of import clips is not displayed. When digitizing reel clips, the timecode of the player is displayed at the top of the monitor. If you right click the timecode and select [Timecode View] from the context menu, you can switch between TC display and CTL display. c Target clip list Displays a list of the digitize target clips, according to the selection in the Device list box. (Clips which are already digitized are gray.) d Temporary re-digitize setting list box Select Accept in this list if you want to redigitize clips whose status is “Digitized”, even when the system setting is to reject redigitizing of such clips. (The system setting is made in the Batch Properties dialog where the Re-digitize

f Compression box Displays the compression method to use in digitizing. g Expand Display button Selects whether to display the area that contains the target clip list, the recording vault boxes, and the Compression box.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Batch Digitize tool.

h All Stop button When clicked during digitizing, stops the digitizing. i Digitize button When the digitizing target clip is a reel clip, displays a reel confirmation dialog. Check that the reel selection is correct and click OK to start digitizing. Or click Skip to display the

Batch Digitize Tool

107

reel confirmation dialog for another reel, or Cancel to cancel digitizing. When the digitizing target clip is not a reel clip, starts digitizing as soon as you click the Digitize button. Digitizing stops if you click the Digitize button again during digitizing. Notes

• Before starting a batch digitize operation, XPRI NS calculates the length of time that can be digitized from the total length (total time) of the clips and the amount of free hard disk space. A warning dialog appears if there is not enough free disk space. Click OK in the dialog to digitize as much as possible. XPRI NS displays a message at the point where the free space is used up. • If the clip and source (reel) frame modes are different, a confirmation dialog appears before digitizing starts. Click OK if you want to digitize with a converted clip frame mode. If you check the check box in the dialog, digitizing will convert the clip frame mode whenever it is different from the source frame mode. • You can create sub clips automatically when material with timecode breaks is digitized (see page 102).

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

j Shuttle slider Drag the slider for variable speed playback in the forward and reverse directions. Playback speed increases as the slider nears the edges. When you stop dragging, the slider returns to the center position and variable speed playback in the forward and reverse directions stops. By holding the Ctrl key while dragging the knob on the shuttle slider and releasing, you can lock the knob at any position on the slider and enable continuous forward or reverse playback at varied speed. To release the lock, drag the knob again without pressing the Ctrl key, or click one of the command buttons. Note

Variable speed playback is not supported for players connected via i.LINK. In addition, images in the monitor may not refresh, depending on the playback speed. k Device list box Displays a list of clips from the specified port. Select a device to narrow down the clips that were specified when the Batch Digitize tool started. All: All clips Sony Record Engine: Clips created from the reel that is loaded in the player connected to the SDI input connector of the Sony MSQ-S001. The device name of the connected player is also displayed. i.LINK Record Engine: Clips created from the reel that is loaded in the player connected to the i.LINK connector.

108

Batch Digitize Tool

Others: Clips other than reel clips. l Total (total digitizing time of all clips) Displays in timecode format the total length of the digitize target clips (including margins). The progress bar indicates the progress of the digitizing, and the total time of the clips remaining to be digitized appears in the Remain box. m Clip (total digitizing time of current clip) Displays in timecode format the total length of the clip currently being digitized. The progress bar indicates the progress of the digitizing, and the time remaining to be digitized appears in the Remain box. n Command button area Contains command buttons used to control the player. See page 108 for more information about the command button area.

o Timecode display Displays timecode for the Mark In point, Mark Out point, and duration of the clip being digitized. If you right click the timecode display and select Timecode View from the context menu, you can switch between TC display and CTL display.

Batch Digitize Tool Command Buttons This area contains command buttons for the Batch Digitize tool. By default the buttons in the Batch Digitize tool command button area are arranged as shown in the figure below. You can customize the command button area by selecting [Customize] (see page 92) in the main menu. Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. Default command button configuration

Icon

Button name Button function Eject

Ejects a cassette. Note Does not function for players connected via i.LINK.

Icon

Button name Button function Rewind

Rewinds a video tape.

Play

Plays from the current position to the end. To stop play, click this button again or click the Stop button.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards a video tape.

Stop

Stops play, rewind, or fast forward.

Minimize Minimizes the Batch Digitize tool and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Maximize Maximizes the Batch Digitize tool window. Close Closes the Batch Digitize tool.

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name Button function Play Reverse

Plays from the current position in the reverse direction. Click the Stop button to stop play.

Play Forward

Plays from the current position in the forward direction. Click the Stop button to stop play.

Still

Pauses at the current position.

Batch Digitize Tool Main Menu Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Click the Menu button in the Batch Digitize tool to display the Batch Digitize tool main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Batch Properties... Opens the Batch Properties dialog. See “Batch Properties Dialog” (page 621) for more information.

Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Batch Digitize tool.

Batch Digitize Tool

109

6

Batch Digitizing of Multiple Clips In XPRI NS, you can select multiple clips which have logging data (timecode, source track, and other data) and digitize them all in one operation. This operation is called batch digitizing. Use the following procedure to perform batch digitizing.

1

In the Tree View pane of Project Explorer, select the bin that contains the batch digitize target clips. Proceed to step 3 if you want to digitize one of the predefined categories [All Clips], [Non-digitized Clips], or [OK Clips].

2

In the List View pane of Project Explorer, select the clips to batch digitize (reel clips, SG clips, sequences, import clips, and CD audio clips). See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about how to select clips.

3

Click the Project Explorer Menu button, select [Batch Digitize], and then select [All Clips], [Selected Clips], [Non-digitized Clips], or [OK Clips].

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

The Batch Digitize tool starts. To add clips to the selection Repeat steps 2 and 3, or select clips and drag them to the Batch Digitize tool.

4

Check the target clips, the remaining capacity of the recording vaults, the compression method, and the Clip and Total displays. If necessary, use the main menu to open the Batch Properties dialog and change the settings. See page 621 for more information about the Batch Properties dialog. Note

Click the Expanded Display button if the target clip list, the recording vaults and the compression method are not displayed in the Batch Digitize tool.

5

Click the Digitize button. If you selected reel clips in step 2, the Reel dialog appears. In this case, proceed to step 6. If you selected a sequence or clips of another type, digitizing starts immediately. To stop digitizing while it is in progress, click the Digitize button again.

110

Batch Digitizing of Multiple Clips

Check that the correct reel is selected in the Reel dialog and click OK. To cancel the digitizing, click Cancel. Digitizing of the reel clips starts. To stop digitizing while it is in progress, click the Digitize button again. An error list appears after the batch digitizing if any of the clips could not be digitized because of an error. Note

When digitizing reel clips, make sure that the display mode configuration (TC or CTL) of the timecode that appears at the top of the Batch Digitize tool monitor, the Timecode list configuration in the Hardware Settings tab (see page 586) of the Device Properties dialog, and the TC Reader configuration for the connected player match. If the configurations during clip creation differ from these configurations, a digitizing error may occur. When there are breaks in clip timecode In the Timecode Breaks (see page 622) section of the Batch Properties dialog, the Make Sub Clip button can be turned on to create sub clips automatically whenever timecode breaks are encountered. See “Digitizing clips with timecode breaks” (page 102) for more information.

Generate SG Clip Tool Overview The Generate SG Clip tool allows you to create clips for adjustment purposes containing test signals, tones, and so on. You can also create single-color matte clips for use in title backgrounds and in effects.

To Start the Generate SG Clip Tool To start the Generate SG Clip tool, do one of the following. • Click the Project Explorer Menu button and select [New Clip] >[Generate SG Clip...]. • Press the Generate SG Clip Tool focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

Generate SG Clip Tool

111

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b Track buttons

c Clip Name box d Duration box e Pattern list box f Tone list box g Tone level section h Preview button

i Cancel button j Apply button

m Index picture

k New button l Bin Name list

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Generate SG Clip tool. Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

See “Generate SG Clip Tool Main Menu” (page 113) for more information about the main menu.

b Track buttons Select the tracks to record in the clip. Click the buttons of the tracks you want to use to turn them on. By default V and A1 to A4 are on. The Pattern list box is disabled if you turn the V button off. The Tone list box is disabled if you turn all of the audio buttons (A1 to A8) off. c Clip Name box Specifies the name of the clip. Activate the box by clicking it and then enter a name from the keyboard. The default name is the name of the selected pattern or tone. d Duration box Specifies the name of the clip. Activate the box by clicking it and then enter a duration from the keyboard. The default duration is 30 seconds. e Pattern list box Provides a list of video test patterns. Select a signal pattern from the drop-down list. The following patterns are available.

112

Generate SG Clip Tool

• • • • • • • • • •

CB (100%) CB (75%) A CB (75%) B Color and Reference Black White ARIB CB (100%) (HD-format projects) ARIB CB (75%) (HD-format projects) ARIB CB (+I) (HD-format projects) Color Palette...

f Tone list box Provides a list of audio test tones. Select a tone from the drop-down list. The following tones are available. • 100Hz • 400Hz • 800Hz • 1kHz (default) g Tone level section Provides controls for adjusting the level of test tones. Rotate the knob or enter a number in the input box to adjust the tone level (-30 to 0dB, default -20dB). To adjust with the knob: The mark (the orange segment) shows the current position of the knob. When you click the knob, the current position of the knob changes to the clicked position. You can continue by dragging the knob in the desired direction. The knob

position is determined by the angle between the center of the knob and the mouse pointer. You can make fine adjustments by dragging to a position away from the center of the knob. To cancel the adjustment and return the knob to its original position, press the Esc key while dragging. Double click the knob to return it to the default settings. To adjust by entering a number: Double click the input box and enter a number. To confirm the entered number, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer and click somewhere outside the input box. To restore the previous number, press Ctrl + Z before confirming the new number. h Preview button Starts or stops a preview of the selected tone. Click once to execute the preview, and click again to stop the preview. You can change the selected tone during the preview. i Cancel button If the settings have not been changed, closes the Generate SG Clip tool window without saving an SG clip in a bin. If the settings have been changed, displays a message asking if you want to save the changes. Click OK in the message box to save the changes and close the Generate SG Clip tool window, or Cancel to discard the changes and return to the Generate SG Clip window.

Generate SG Clip Tool Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Generate SG Clip tool to display the Generate SG Clip tool main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Tracks Selects the tracks to record. This command has the following subcommands. Reset: Deselects all tracks. V: Selects the video track. A1 to A8: Select audio tracks. Bin Selection... Opens the Bin Selection dialog, so that you can select a destination bin for clips created in the Generate SG Clip tool. Select a bin in the Tree View pane of the dialog, and then click OK to confirm the selection or Cancel to cancel it. Help... Displays help about the Generate SG Clip tool. Minimize Minimizes the Generate SG Clip tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Generate SG Clip tool window. Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

j Apply button Saves changes to the settings. k New button Creates a new SG clip with the specified content and saves it in a bin. The Generate SG Clip tool window remains open. Note

When editing materials with mixed formats, you cannot convert resolutions for SG clips. Create separate SG clips for different video formats. l Bin Name list Displays the name of the current destination bin. The drop-down list displays the names of up to 10 bins that have been selected in the Bin Selection dialog. You can select another destination bin for newly created clips from the drop-down list. You can also select Bin Selection... in the drop-down list to open the Bin Selection dialog and select a destination bin which is not displayed in the dropdown list. m Index picture Displays the pattern selected from the Pattern list.

Generate SG Clip Tool

113

Creating SG Clips Use the following procedure to create SG clips for use in video and audio adjustment.

1

Start the Generate SG Clip tool. See “To Start the Generate SG Clip Tool” (page 111) for more information about how to start the Generate SG Clip tool.

2

Turn on the track buttons for the tracks you want to use (by default, the V and A1 to A4 buttons are on). Notes

• The Pattern list box is disabled if the V track button is off. • The Tone list box is disabled if all of the A1 to A8 track buttons are off.

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

114

3

While viewing the index pictures, select a test signal pattern in the Pattern list box. Or select a tone signal in the Tone list box.

4

Enter the duration of the clip in the Duration box (the default is 30 seconds).

5

Enter the clip name in the Clip Name box (the default name is the name of the selected signal pattern or tone).

6

Check the selected tone as required by clicking the Preview button. Click the button again to stop the preview. Note

You can select another tone during the preview.

7

Click the New button. An SG clip is created and stored in the currently selected destination bin.

Creating SG Clips

Creating Color Clips Creating Color Clips You can create clips from single colors, gradient color, gradient templates where the colors are mapped to grey scales, and clips that use textures.

1

Start the Generate SG Clip tool. See “To Start the Generate SG Clip Tool” (page 111) for more information about how to start the Generate SG Clip tool.

2

Select Color Palette... in the Pattern list box. The Color Palette dialog opens.

3

In the Color Palette dialog, select the tab for the type of clip to create.

4

On each tab, specify the clip settings. See page 362 for more information about the Color Palette dialog.

5

Click the Close button of the Color Palette dialog.

6

Chapter 4 Creating Clips - Logging and Digitizing

The index picture of the Generate SG Clip tool changes to the clip selected in the Color Palette dialog. Click the New or Apply button. A color clip is created and stored in the currently selected destination bin.

Editing Color Matte Clips

1

Right click a color matte clip in Project Explorer and select [Back to Creator]. The Color Selection dialog opens.

2

Select a color and click the New or Apply button.

Creating Color Clips

115

Importing Media Files

Import File Tool Overview The Import File tool is a tool for importing external media files (digital image, movie, and audio files) and using them to create clips for use in XPRI NS.

To Start the Import File Tool To start the Import File tool, use any of the following methods. • Do one of the following in Project Explorer (page 43). - Click the Menu button and select [New Clip] >[Import File...]. - Right click a bin in the Tree View pane and select [New Clip] >[Import File...]. - Right click an empty part of the List View pane and select [New Clip] >[Import File...]. • Press the Import File Tool focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information.

The Import File tool window opens, and the Open File dialog appears in the window. Use the Open File dialog to specify the file to import. See page 122 for more information about the Open File dialog.

116

Import File Tool

Chapter

5

Names and Functions of Parts c Crop mode button d Position/size adjustment button e Expand Display button f [Fixed Aspect] check box

1 Menu button

g Parameters section

2 Track buttons

u Clip Name

h Audio Input Level

section

t Monitor

i Fit To Screen button j Quick Zoom button s Timecode display

k Image/audio

and entry section

processing section

e Expand Display button

q Recording destination

l Digitize button m Logging button

n File Name

vault list boxes r Command button area

o Bin Name list box p Compression list box

Mark Out point

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Import File tool. See “Import File Tool Main Menu” (page 121) for more information about the main menu.

b Track buttons Select the signal tracks to be recorded in the import clip. Select as required from V, A1 to A8, and alpha (α). By default, all of the tracks in the material are selected. When multiple files are selected, the state of the buttons selects the tracks to be recorded for all files, regardless of the number of tracks in the source files. Note

TGA and MOV files can be imported with or without alpha channel.

Duration

c Crop mode button When this is selected, position and size adjustment of the crop frame is enabled. d Position/size adjustment button When this is selected, position and size adjustment of the image is enabled.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

Mark In point

e Expand Display button Selects whether to display the Parameters section, the Audio Input Level section, the image processing section, the Reset All button, and the Audio Mix Down section. f [Fixed Aspect] check box When this is checked, files are imported without changing the aspect ratio of the original files. When you change the

Import File Tool

117

image size by changing the height and width or clicking the Fit to Screen button, the aspect ratio is retained. Note

If the original file and selected format differ in aspect ratios, the imported file will be distorted. To prevent distortion in the image, check the [Fixed Aspect] check box. g Parameters section Displays the size and position of the import image and allows you to configure them. • ScaleX: Size as percentage of original (horizontal) • ScaleY: Size as percentage of original (vertical) • CenterX: Horizontal position of picture center • CenterY: Vertical position of picture center Note

JPEG and TGA files larger than 20 MB are automatically scaled down incrementally until the size is less than 20 MB, and then imported. The source image is not affected. h Audio Input Level section Contains controls for adjusting the audio input level of the import file. Adjust the level by dragging the knob on the slider or by double clicking the text box and entering a numeric value. i Fit To Screen button Enlarges or reduces the size of import files according to the selected format. When multiple files are selected, this process is applied to all the files. j Quick Zoom button Allows you to zoom in and out on the image by dragging the mouse. Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

118

k Image/audio processing section [Audio Mix Down to Mono] check box: When this is checked, multiple audio tracks in the import file are mixed down to a single monaural track in the digitized clip. Note

The [Audio Mix Down to Mono] check box is disabled when: • The import file format is not one of the supported formats. • The import file has only one usable audio track. [Limiter] check box: When this is checked, audio peaks that exceed a preset threshold during audio mix down are suppressed. Mix down is supported for audio files of the following types. • WAVE (*.wav) • MP3 (*.mp3)

Import File Tool

Note

Audio peaks may cause clipping even when the [Limiter] check box is checked. If this occurs, adjust the input level with the controls in the Audio Input Level section. [Compose] check box: When this is checked, sequential image files are converted into a single file. [Unwrap to Avi/Wav] check box: When this is checked and you import XDCAM, EX, P2, MXF, AVCHD, or HDV files, the files are imported as separate AVI files and WAV files. [Transcode] check box: When this is checked, clips are transcoded during import. When not checked, the clips are imported using the native codec. Note

The Transcode option is strongly recommended when importing NXCAM clips. [Level Conversion] check box: When this is checked, the color range of the import file is compressed to that of the video equipment. Field Invert: Invert the field dominance between field 1 and field 2. 16:9 Flag list box: Select the aspect ratio for the screen. DropFrame list box: When DF is selected, drop-frame timecode count is enabled. When NDF is selected, non-drop-frame timecode count is enabled. l Digitize button Copies the selected file to create an import clip. m Logging button Refers the selected file to create an import clip. n File Name Displays the import file name. To open other files, click the Browse button. The Open File dialog appears, allowing you to select other files. See “Open File Dialog” (page 122) for more information.

o Bin Name list box Displays the current destination bin. The drop-down list displays the names of up to 10 bins that have been selected in the Bin Selection dialog. You can select another destination bin for newly created clips from the drop-down list. You can also select Bin Selection... in the drop-down list to open the Bin Selection dialog and select a destination bin which is not displayed in the dropdown list. When working with Sonaps, you can specify a folder in the Material List as the save destination for clips in the Bin Selection dialog. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

p Compression list box Selects the method used to compress video signals when the [Compose] check box is checked. q Recording destination vault list boxes Allow you to select the recording destination vaults. Select the video vault from the Video Capacity drop-down list and select the audio vault from the Audio Capacity drop-down list. These lists display the vaults designated as recording destinations in the Project Properties dialog. You can also select Project Properties... to open the Project Properties dialog and change the recording destination settings. The approximate remaining times of the selected recording vaults are displayed as calculated on the basis of the compression methods and numbers of tracks. If there is not enough free capacity remaining, a message appears to inform you of that and the digitizing is not carried out. If there is no remaining free capacity, “00:00:00:00” is displayed. If there is no vault selected, “--:--:--:--” is displayed.

current playback position, and marks to indicate the Mark In and Mark Out points. You can scrub (drag) the playline to play the file. When several files are selected, the first file is displayed. u Clip Name Displays the name of the imported clip. You can rename the clip by clicking to activate the field and entering a new name from the keyboard. By default, the clip name is the name of the original file without the file name extension.

See “Project Properties Dialog” (page 649) for more information.

r Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Import File tool. See page 120 for more information about the command button area.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

s Timecode display and entry section Mark In point: Displays the timecode of the import clip Mark In point. You can change the displayed value by clicking this field to activate it and entering a new value from the numeric keypad on the keyboard. Mark Out point: Displays the timecode of the import clip Mark Out point. You can change the displayed value by clicking this field to activate it and entering a new value from the numeric keypad on the keyboard. Duration: Displays the timecode of the import clip duration. If you are importing an image file, the default duration set in the Still Clip section of the Logging Properties dialog appears here. You can change the displayed duration by clicking this field to activate it and entering a new value from the numeric keypad on the keyboard. When multiple files are selected, the timecode of the first file is displayed, and it cannot be changed. t Monitor Displays the image or video of the import file. The position bar at the bottom of the monitor shows the temporal axis of playback for the current file. On the position bar are a playline (a red line), which shows the

Import File Tool

119

Import File Tool Command Button Area This area contains command buttons for the Import File tool.

Note

Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys.

All of the command buttons are disabled and cannot be used when multiple files are selected.

Default command button configuration

By default the buttons in the Import File tool command button area are arranged as shown in the figure below. You can customize the command button area by selecting [Customize] (see page 121) from the main menu.

Icon

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

Button name

Button function

Set Index Picture

By default, the system sets a picture of the Mark In point as the index picture when it logs or digitizes an import clip.

Audio Waveform/Video picture switch

Switches between audio waveform display and video image display on the monitor.

Mark In

Marks an In point. You can click this button during play, or after dragging the playline to the point you want to set as the In point. If an In point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the newly clicked point.

Play

Plays the clip from the current position to the end. During play, becomes a Stop button.

Mark Out

Marks an Out point. You can click this button during play, or after dragging the playline to the point you want to set as the Out point. If an Out point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the newly clicked point.

Step Backward

Steps one frame back with each click.

Step Forward

Steps one frame forward with each click.

Go to Start

Jumps to the clip start.

Go to End

Jumps to the clip end.

Clear In Mark

Clears the In point, if it exists.

Clear Out Mark

Clears the Out point, if it exists.

Go to In

Jumps to the In point, if it exists.

Go to Out

Jumps to the Out point, if it exists.

Step Backward 10 Frames Steps back 10 frames with each click. Step Forward 10 Frames

120

Import File Tool

Steps forward 10 frames with each click.

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Button function

Stop

Stops play.

Play In to Out

Plays from the In point to the Out point. During play, becomes a Stop button. Starts loop play from the In point to the Out point if clicked while holding down the Alt key.

Import File Tool Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Import File tool to display the Import File tool main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Tracks Selects the tracks to record. This command has the following subcommands. Reset: Resets the track selection to the defaults. Alpha: Selects the key track. V: Selects the video track. A1 to A8: Select the audio tracks.

Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Import File tool. Minimize Minimizes the Import File tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Import File tool window.

Audio Language Selects the interface language. Note

This menu option is disabled in the current version of XPRI NS. Only English is available.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

Bin Selection... Opens the Bin Selection dialog so that you can select a bin to store newly created clips. Select the bin from the Tree View pane in the dialog, and then click the OK button in the dialog to confirm the selection or the Cancel button to cancel it. When working with Sonaps, you can specify a folder in the Material List as the save destination for clips in the Bin Selection dialog. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard.

Import File Tool

121

Open File Dialog The Open File dialog allows you to specify external media files to import to the Import File tool (see page 116).

This dialog appears when the Import File tool starts.

c New Folder button d Back button e Forward button

a Menu button b Search list box

f Move Up button

g View button

h File list

p File Name i Sequential o Files of Type list box

File section

n Clip Name box

j Position list box

m Auto Link check box Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

l Open button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Open File dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Open File dialog. Close: Closes the Open File dialog. b Search list box Displays a drop-down list of folders. Select the folder where external media files are located. Note

You cannot specify folders in UNC path syntax. To access a server through a network, configure the server as a network drive.

122

k Cancel button

Import File Tool

c New Folder button Creates a new folder in the folder displayed in the Search list box. d Back button Displays the most recently accessed folder. e Forward button After the most recently accessed folder has been displayed with the Back button, returns to the folder that was visible when the Back button was pressed. f Move Up button Moves up to the next higher folder in the folder tree, relative to the folder in the Search list box.

n Clip Name box Allows you to enter a clip name. Activate the box by clicking it and then enter a name from the keyboard. However, this box is disabled when multiple files are selected in the file list.

h File list Displays a list of files in the folder specified in the Search list box which are of the type specified in the Files of Type list box. You can select multiple files in the list. (This allows you to import multiple files with a single operation.) Double click a file name in this list to import an external media file to the Import File tool.

o Files of Type list box Specifies the type of files to load. Select the file type from the drop-down list. • Video File (*.3gp) • Video File (*.avi) • Video File (*.mpg) • Video File (*.mpeg) • Video File (*.wmv) • Video File (*.mxf) • Video File (*.mov) • Video File (*.mp4) • Video File (*.m2t) • Video File (*.m2ts) • Video File (*.mts) • Video File (*.flv) • Video File (*.bmp) • Video File (*.tga) • Video File (*.jpg) • Video File (*.gif) • Video File (*.tif) • Video File (*.pcx) • Video File (*.png) • TitleMotion (*.icg) • Audio File (*.wav) • Audio File (*.mp3) • Audio File (*.wma) • Audio File (*.mov) • Audio File (*.bwf) • Audio File (*.mp4) • Audio File (*.avi) • Audio File (*.mxf) • Audio File (*.dbe) • Audio File (*.m2ts, *.mts) • Audio File (*.m2t) • All File (*.*)

Note

Files in a folder cannot be imported by selecting the folder. i Sequential File section Contains controls for specifying a series of sequential image files to be loaded as a movie. The files must be named in the format “n.ext”, where “n” is the sequence number and “ext” is the extension, and all files in the sequence must be stored in the folder that is selected in the Search list box. To load the files, check the check box and specify to range to load (0 to 899 for TGA files, 0 to 99999 for all other file types). For example, if you specify the range 0 to 60 and the file type is BMP, XPRI NS loads the files 0.bmp to 60.bmp as a movie. Specify the range by clicking the spin buttons or by entering values directly in the boxes. The file types supported by the sequential file function are BMP, JPEG, TIFF, and TGA. In the Sequential File section, the file that is selected in the file list and displayed in the File Name box becomes the start point frame. Beginning with that frame, there is one frame for each file. The clip’s duration and end point will vary according to the number of files. j Position list box Selects the default position of imported images when displayed in the Import File Tool monitor.

Notes

k Cancel button Closes the Open File dialog (the Import File tool window remains open). l Open button Loads the external media files selected in the file list into the Import File tool. m Auto Link check box When this is checked, automatically imports all files linked to the selected clip and displays them as a single clip.

• Windows Media Player 11 must be installed to import Windows Media files. • When editing materials with mixed formats, you cannot convert resolutions for still images. Import still images of different video formats separately. • JPEG and TGA files larger than 20 MB are automatically scaled down incrementally until the size is less than 20 MB, and then imported. The source image is not affected. • Supports 96, 48, 44.1, 32, and 22.05 kHz audio sampling frequencies in all formats.

Import File Tool

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

g View button Selects the view mode of the file list. Icon: Displays file names and icons in the file list. List: Displays a list of file names only in the file list. Details: Displays the name, type, date of most recent modification, and size for each file in the file list.

123

• Importing of *.3gp, *.avi, *.flv, *.mov, *.mp4, and *.mxf video files in interlaced or progressive scan mode formats is supported. • Only 25 fps and 29.97 fps conversion frame rates are supported. NTSC signals are converted to 29.97 fps, and PAL signals are converted to 25 fps. The scan mode is not converted. • Supports input frame rate of 8 fps to 60 fps (constant). Variable frame rates are not supported. • Frame rate conversion also transcodes the material to the format selected in the [Compression] list box in the Import File tool. Up/down conversion of the frame size is performed as necessary. • Importing of TitleMotion animation clips is not supported. These clips can only be added to the timeline by launching the Inscriber TitleMotion software directly from Timeline Editor. TitleMotion still clips can be imported, but their duration follows the default Still Clip setting in the Import File Settings dialog. • Importing MP4 files with variable GOP is not recommended. p File Name Displays the name of the file selected in the file list. When multiple files are selected, the name of the first selected file is displayed.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

124

Import File Tool

Picture Adjust Tool Overview The Picture Adjust Tool is a tool for adjusting the position and size of still image clips imported onto the timeline. You can also adjust the position and size of import clips on the timeline using the following method. • Right click a clip on the timeline, and select [Add Positioning Effect] from the context menu. When you want to display only a portion of an imported still image that is larger than the screen size, using the Picture Adjust Tool will result in less degradation in image quality than using the Positioning effect.

To Start the Picture Adjust Tool To start the Picture Adjust Tool, use any of the following methods. • Right click a clip on the timeline, and select [Picture Adjust] from the context menu. • Double click a clip on the timeline with the Ctrl key held down.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

Picture Adjust Tool

125

Names and Functions of Parts a Monitor

b Parameters section c [Fixed Aspect] check box

d Position/size adjustment button e Crop mode button f Fit to Screen button g Quick Zoom button h [Apply All Clip] check box

i Cancel button j OK button

a Monitor Displays the imported clip. b Parameters section Allows you to configure the size and position of the image.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

When the position/size adjustment button is selected Specifies the position of the central point of the image and the size in relation to the original image. CenterX (horizontal), CenterY (vertical): Specify the position of the central point of the image in relation to the central point and right edge of the original image, 0.5 and 1 respectively. ScaleX (horizontal), ScaleY (vertical): Specify the image scale factor as a percentage of the original size of the image in the horizontal and vertical directions. When the crop mode button is selected Adjust the position of the central point and size for cropping. Left, Top: Specify in pixels the position of the central point for cropping in relation the central point of the image, 0. Specify negative values to shift the crop frame left or down from the central point of the image. Width, Height: Specify in pixels the width and height of the crop frame. c [Fixed Aspect] check box When this is checked, the aspect ratio is fixed to that of the original image.

126

Picture Adjust Tool

Even when you change the image size by changing the height and width or clicking the Fit to Screen button, the aspect ratio is retained. d Position/size adjustment button When this is selected, position and size adjustment of the image is enabled. e Crop mode button When this is selected, position and size adjustment of the crop frame is enabled. f Fit to Screen button Enlarges or reduces the size of the image according to the selected format. g Quick Zoom button Toggles the operation performed when the mouse is dragged. The operation switches between position adjustment and size adjustment with each click of the button. This button is only enabled when the position/size adjustment button is selected. h [Apply All Clip] check box When this is checked and the same import clip exists multiple times on the timeline, the adjustments are applied to all the clips.

i OK button Registers the picture position and size adjustment and closes the Picture Adjust Tool window. j Cancel button Closes the Picture Adjust Tool window without registering picture adjustment information. Note

When applying 3D effects to material that is smaller than the project size, position the image at the center and specify the size as 1.0.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

Picture Adjust Tool

127

Import DVD Tool Overview The Import DVD Tool is a tool for importing DVD-format files from DVDs. It allows you to do the following. • Monitor DVD video material. • Set Mark In and Mark Out points for partial digitizing. • Batch digitize multiple clips

To Start the Import DVD Tool To start the Import DVD Tool, use any of the following methods. • Do one of the following in Project Explorer (page 43). - Click the Menu button and select [New Clip] > [Import DVD...]. - Right click the Tree View Pane and select [New Clip] > [Import DVD...]. - Right click an empty part of the List View Pane and select [New Clip] >[Import DVD...].

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

128

Import DVD Tool

Names and Functions of Parts c Clip Name box d Path list box

a Menu button

e Chapter list

b Source track buttons

f Progress bar g Playline position h Format

i Timecodes j Command button area k Recording destination

vault list boxes

n Batch digitizing task list m Bin Name list box l Compression list box

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Import DVD Tool. Help...: Displays help about the Import DVD Tool. Close: Closes the Import DVD Tool window.

Note

Tracks where there are no input signals cannot be selected. c Clip Name box Specifies the name of the clip. Activate the box by clicking it and then enter a name from the keyboard. The prefix “DVD” is automatically added to the clip name. In batch digitize, the clips are named “DVD_nnn” where nnn (001, 002, ...) increments with each new clip.

e Chapter list Displays a list of the chapters in the DVD loaded in the drive selected in the DVD device list box. The following options are available in the context menu when you rightclick a chapter. Record: Digitizes the specified duration of the selected chapter (multiple selections possible). In queue: Adds the specified duration of the chapter to the Batch digitizing task list. Position: Moves the playline to the beginning of the selected chapter. Mark In: Marks the first frame of the clip to digitize. Mark Out: Marks the last frame of the clip to digitize.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

b Source track buttons Select the tracks to record in a DVD clip. Clicking a button depresses the button and changes its color to orange, to show that the button is selected. Clicking it again returns the button to its original state and cancels the selection.

d Path list box Allows you to select the DVD optical disc drive from a drop-down list.

f Progress bar Displays the progress of digitizing clips. g Playline position Displays the timecode of the current playline position. You can also use this area to move the playline to a time position. Click this area to activate it, use the numeric

Import DVD Tool

129

keypad to enter the desired time position value, and press the Enter key. h Format Displays the DVD disc format (NTSC or PAL). i Timecodes Displays the Mark In, Mark Out, and duration timecodes. You can click these fields to activate them, and then enter timecode values from the numeric keypad on the keyboard. j Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Import DVD Tool. See page 131 for more information about the command button area.

k Recording destination vault list boxes Selects the video and audio vaults registered in the Media Vaults tab of the Project Properties dialog. The approximate remaining time of the selected recording vault is displayed as calculated on the basis of the compression method and numbers of tracks. If there is not enough free capacity remaining, a message appears to inform you of that and the digitizing is not carried out. If there is no remaining free capacity, “00:00:00:00” is displayed. If there is no vault selected, “--:--:--:--” is displayed. l Compression list box Selects the compression method used during digitizing (Uncompressed, MPEG IMX 30M/40M/50M, DVCAM 25).

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

m Bin Name list box Displays the current destination bin. The drop-down list displays the names of up to 10 bins that have been selected in the Bin Selection dialog. You can select another destination bin for newly created clips from the drop-down list. You can also select Bin Selection... in the drop-down list to open the Bin Selection dialog and select a destination bin which is not displayed in the dropdown list. When working with Sonaps, you can specify a folder in the Material List as the save destination for clips in the Bin Selection dialog. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

n Batch digitizing task list Displays a list of digitize tasks, with information about each clip. The following options are available in the context menu when you right-click a task. • Capture selected task(s) • Batch capture all tasks • Stop all captures

130

Import DVD Tool

• • • • •

Export Task File Import Task File Append Task File Select All Tasks Cancel All Selected

Import DVD Tool Command Button Area By default the buttons in the Import DVD Tool command button area are arranged as shown in the figure below. Default command button configuration

Icon

Button name

Button function

Mark In

Marks an In point. You can click this button during play, or after dragging the playline to the point you want to set as the In point. If an In point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Mark Out

Marks an Out point. You can click this button during play, or after dragging the playline to the point you want to set as the Out point. You can also set an Out point by clicking this button after you enter a timecode value with the numeric keypad. If an Out point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Step Backward 10 Frames Steps back 10 frames with each click. Steps one frame back with each click.

Play

Starts play from the current position to the end. If clicked again, pauses at that position. (To stop play, click the Stop button.)

Step Forward

Steps one frame forward with each click.

Step Forward 10 Frames

Steps forward 10 frames with each click.

Go to In

Jumps to the In point, if it exists.

Go to Out

Jumps to the Out point, if it exists.

Record

When clicked after setting In and Out points, creates a DVD clip and saves it in the selected bin, and simultaneously records the clip's video and audio data to hard disk. Margins are added before the In point and after the Out point. When clicked without setting In and Out points, it sets an In point at the current position and starts digitizing. A second click sets an Out point at the current position, digitizes a margin, and then stops digitizing. Only one margin is added after the Out point.

Stop

Stops play, rewind, or fast forward.

Open Batch Record Task List

Opens and closes the Batch Record Task List pane.

+

Adds the duration between In and Out points to the Batch Record task list.

-

Deletes the item selected in the Batch Record task list.

Batch Record

Starts to digitize the tasks in the Batch Record task list.

Cancel

Stops digitizing and cancels the Batch Record tasks.

Import DVD Tool

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

Step Backward

131

Import CD Audio Tool Overview The Import CD Audio Tool is a tool for importing audio material from CDs and creating CD audio clips available on XPRI NS. It allows you to do the following. • Monitor audio material. • Display material track names and total time. • Digitize individual tracks and groups of tracks.

To Start the Import CD Audio Tool To start the Import CD Audio Tool, use any of the following methods. • Do one of the following in Project Explorer (page 43). - Click the Menu button and select [New Clip] >[Import CD Audio...]. - Right click the Tree View Pane and select [New Clip] >[Import CD Audio...]. - Right click an empty part of the List View Pane and select [New Clip] >[Import CD Audio...]. • Press the Import CD Audio Tool focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

132

Import CD Audio Tool

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b Location list box

c CD name d Audio CD

Database button

e Audio level fader

f Track list g CD time display h Logging button i Digitize button j Progress bars

n Command

button area

m Recording destination l Compression

vault list box

k Bin Name list box

list box

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Import CD Audio Tool. See “Import CD Audio Tool Main Menu” (page 135) for more information about the main menu.

c CD name Displays the name of the audio CD loaded in the selected drive. d Audio CD Database button Opens the Audio CD Database dialog. See “Audio CD Database Dialog” (page 137) for more information.

e Audio level fader Adjusts the input level of the CD audio. f Track list Displays a list of the tracks in the CD loaded in the drive selected in the Location list box, with check boxes to select

g CD time display With each click, switches between display of 1) the index number, track name, and CD time, or 2) “Total” + the total CD time.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

b Location list box Allows you to select the location of the CD audio material from a drop-down list.

the tracks to import. The following information is displayed. Import: Check the tracks that you want to monitor or import (multiple selections possible). Track: Displays the index number of the track. Track Name: Displays the track name as “Tr” + an index number. Time: Displays the total time of each track. Clip Name: Displays the name of the clip created from the track (by default the name displayed in the Track Name field). You can specify a different name.

h Logging button Saves the selected tracks as clips in a bin. If you are using an audio CD that has not yet been registered in the current project, this button opens the Audio CD Database dialog. See “Audio CD Database Dialog” (page 137) for more information.

Import CD Audio Tool

133

i Digitize button Saves the selected tracks as clips in a bin and at the same time records the audio data of the clip to the system hard disk. If you are using an audio CD that has not yet been registered in the current project, this button opens the Audio CD Database dialog. See “Audio CD Database Dialog” (page 137) for more information.

If you click the Digitize button again during digitizing, the digitizing stops and the log clip is created. j Progress bars Display the progress of digitizing. The upper bar displays the name of the clip currently being digitized and digitizing progress for that clip. The lower bar shows how many clips have been digitized thus far. k Bin Name list box Displays the current destination bin. The drop-down list displays the names of up to 10 bins that have been selected in the Bin Selection dialog. You can select another destination bin for newly created clips from the drop-down list. You can also select Bin Selection... in the drop-down list to open the Bin Selection dialog and select a destination bin which is not displayed in the dropdown list. When working with Sonaps, you can specify a folder in the Material List as the save destination for clips in the Bin Selection dialog. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

l Compression list box Displays the video format of the import clip. Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

m Recording destination vault list box Allows you to select the recording destination vault. This drop-down list displays vaults designated as recording destinations in the Project Properties dialog. You can also select Project Properties... to open the Project Properties dialog and change the recording destination settings. The approximate remaining time of the selected recording vault is displayed as calculated on the basis of the compression method and numbers of tracks. If there is not enough free capacity remaining, a message appears to inform you of that and the digitizing is not carried out. If there is no remaining free capacity, “00:00:00:00” is displayed. If there is no vault selected, “--:--:--:--” is displayed. See Project Properties Dialog (page 649) for more information.

134

Import CD Audio Tool

n Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Import CD Audio Tool. You can use the command buttons to monitor tracks. See page 135 for more information about the command button area.

Import CD Audio Tool Command Button Area This area contains the Import CD Audio Tool command buttons. By default the buttons in the Import CD Audio Tool command button area are arranged as shown in the figure below. You can customize the command button area by selecting [Customize] (see page 136) from the main menu.

Default command button configuration

Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. Icon

Button name

Button function

Go to Start

When clicked at the start of a track, jumps to the start of the previous track. If there is no previous track, jumps to the last track. If clicked midway through a track, jumps to the start of the track. If clicked during play, restarts play from the jump position. If clicked again within 3 seconds after play restarts, jumps to the start of the previous track.

Rewind

Rewinds the track.

Play

Starts play from the current position to the end. If clicked again, pauses at that position. (To stop play, click the Stop button.)

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the track.

Go to End

Jumps to the start of the next track. If there is no next track, jumps to the first track. If clicked during play, restarts play from the jump position.

All Stop

Stops all operations.

Stop

Stops play, rewind, or fast forward.

Still

Pauses at the current position. Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Button function

Help

Starts the Online Help.

Import CD Audio Tool Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Import CD Audio Tool window to display the Import CD Audio Tool main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Select All Tracks Checks all check boxes to select all tracks. Select No Track Clears all check boxes to deselect all tracks.

Audio CD Database... Opens the Audio CD Database dialog. See “Audio CD Database Dialog” (page 137) for more information.

Bin Selection... Opens the Bin Selection dialog so that you can select a bin to store newly created clips. Select the bin from the Tree View pane in the dialog, and then click the OK button in the dialog to confirm the selection or the Cancel button to cancel it.

Import CD Audio Tool

135

When working with Sonaps, you can specify a folder in the Material List as the save destination for clips in the Bin Selection dialog. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Import CD Audio Tool. Minimize Minimizes the Import CD Audio Tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Import CD Audio Tool window.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

136

Import CD Audio Tool

Audio CD Database Dialog The Audio CD Database dialog allows you to register audio CD information to be used in projects. To open the Audio CD Database dialog, click the Audio CD Database button in the Import CD Audio Tool (page 132). The Audio CD Database dialog appears, displaying

information about the audio CDs used in the current project. The Audio CD Database dialog may also open automatically when you start the Import CD Audio Tool or click the Logging or Digitize button in the Import CD Audio Tool. This occurs when you have inserted an audio CD that is not yet registered in the current project. 3 List View button

1 Menu button 2 Filter buttons

4 Details View button

5 CD information list

6 Drive 7 CD Name

8 Cancel button 9 OK button

b Filter buttons Allow you to filter the CDs displayed in the CD information list according to the following criteria. All: Display all CDs. Project: Display the CDs used in the currently open project. Text: Display CDs whose CD names or comments contain the string entered in the text box. Unused: Display unused CDs.

c List View button Displays names only in the CD information list. d Details View button Displays detailed information in the CD information list. e CD information list Displays information about the audio CDs registered in the current project. To update names and comments for the audio CDs in the list, do one of the following To update a name only: Right click an audio CD name to display the context menu. To update a name and comment: Select an audio CD name and select [Open...] in the main menu or double click the name to open the Audio CD Information dialog.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Audio CD Database dialog. The main menu has the following commands. New...: Opens the Audio CD Information dialog so that you can register a new audio CD. Open...: Opens the Audio CD Information dialog with information about the CD that is currently selected in the CD information list. Delete: Deletes the information for the CD selected in the CD information list. Help...: Displays help about the Audio CD Database dialog. Close: Closes the Audio CD Database dialog.

f Drive Displays the drive where an unregistered CD is loaded. Displays nothing when a registered audio CD is loaded.

Import CD Audio Tool

137

g CD Name When an unregistered CD is loaded, allows you to enter its name. When a registered audio CD is loaded, this display is disabled (grayed out). h Cancel button Cancels any setting changes and closes the Audio CD Database dialog. i OK button Registers the information for a new audio CD, or saves the changes when information for a registered audio CD has been updated.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

138

Import CD Audio Tool

• The import destination bin (Bin Selection in the main menu)

Creating Clips by Importing Files and Audio Material

Note

It is impossible to set these items when multiple files are selected. You can adjust the video and audio of the imported files as required. If you want to perform logging and digitizing at the same time, proceed to step 9.

In XPRI NS, you can create clips by importing external media files and CD audio material.

Importing External Media Files

1

8

The logging data is confirmed.

Start the Import File tool. The Import File tool window opens, and the Open File dialog appears in the Import File window.

Note

You can confirm the logging data for multiple clips and digitize all of the clips later in one operation.

See page 116 for more information about how to start the Import File tool.

2 3

Use the Search list box in the Open File dialog to specify where the external media file is stored. Select the file type from the Files of Type list box.

Click the Logging button.

See “Batch Digitizing of Multiple Clips” (page 110) for more information.

9

Click the Digitize button. An import clips is created and stored in the destination bin.

Note

Check the [Sequential File] check box before importing a series of image files as a movie.

4

Select the file to import from the file list. Note

Multiple files can be selected.

5

Enter the clip name in the Clip Name box.

To stop digitizing Click the Digitize button again during digitizing. Note

Note

A clip name cannot be entered when multiple files are selected.

6

Click the Open button. The external media file that you selected in the file list is imported to the Import File tool.

7

In the Import File tool, set the following items as required. • The tracks (track buttons) • The image position and size (Parameters section) • Color level conversion and filter application (image processing section) • The Mark In point, Mark Out point, and duration (timecode display and entry boxes, command buttons)

To adjust imported images and audio To adjust the image position • Click the Left and Top spin buttons in the Parameters section to set those values. • Use the numeric keypad on the keyboard to enter values in the Left and Top edit boxes of the Parameters section. • Drag the image displayed on the screen.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

To import NXCAM clips spanning more than 1 card, we strongly recommend using the Content Management Utility provided with the NXCAM unit to merge clips into a single clip before importing. NXCAM clips can be imported simply by dragging the clips from the Content Management Utility to the Project Explorer.

To adjust the image size Do any of the following to adjust the image to the desired size. • Click the Width and Height spin buttons in the Parameters section to set those values. • Use the numeric keypad on the keyboard to enter values in the Width and Height edit boxes of the Parameters section.

Creating Clips by Importing Files and Audio Material

139

• Drag one of the borders or a corner of the image displayed in the monitor.

5

Repeat the steps, as required, to add additional tasks to the Batch Record task list.

To adjust to a size that fits the video format of the project, click the Fit to Screen button. Note

6

The image will be distorted if the original file and the selected video format have different aspect ratios. To avoid distortion, check the [Fixed Aspect] check box. To adjust the video luminance level Check the [Level Conversion] check box. The luminance level is adjusted to from 0% for RGB (0,0,0) to 100% for RGB (255,255,255). To adjust the audio level In the Audio Input Level section, drag the knob or double click the text box and enter a numeric value. To convert the audio to mono Check the [Audio Mix Down to Mono] check box to mix down the audio tracks. You can check the [Limiter] check box to enable limiting of audio peaks that exceed a preset threshold during the mixdown.

To stop digitizing Click the Digitize button again during digitizing. Note

• DVDs with copyright protection cannot be imported.

Importing CD Audio Material

1 2

Select the location of the CD audio material in the Location list box.

3

Check the tracks that you want to import in the Import column of the track list (multiple selections possible). To monitor tracks In the track list, select the tracks to monitor by clicking them and then use the command buttons to play them. Note

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

Tracks to monitor can be selected separately from the tracks in the Import column.

Start the Import DVD Tool.

4

In the Clip Name column of the track list, specify the names of the imported clips.

See page 128 for more information about how to start the Import DVD Tool.

5

Click the Digitize button.

2

Select the DVD optical disc drive in the Path list box.

3

Select the destination video and audio vaults, compression format, and bin name.

4

Select a chapter in the Chapter List, and click the Mark In and Mark Out buttons in the command button area to set the start frame and end frame, as necessary. To monitor chapters In the chapter list, select the tracks to monitor by clicking them and then use the command buttons to play them.

140

Start the Import CD Audio Tool. See page 132 for more information about how to start the Import CD Audio Tool.

Importing DVD Video Material

1

Click the Batch Record button. The DVD video clips are created and stored in the destination bin.

Notes

• The [Audio Mix Down to Mono] check box is disabled when: - The import file format is not one of the supported formats - The import file has only one audio track. • Audio peaks may cause clipping even when the [Limiter] check box is checked. If this occurs, adjust the input level with the controls in the Audio Input Level section.

Click the Add Task button to add the digitize task to the Batch Record task list.

Creating Clips by Importing Files and Audio Material

The CD audio clips are created and stored in the destination bin. To stop digitizing Click the Digitize button again during digitizing. Notes

• Imports may fail for some CDs and some CD-ROM drives. • Digitizing from Copy Controlled CDs (CCCDs) is not guaranteed. • When you need to re-edit a CD audio clip, load the CD in the tray of the CD-ROM drive. On some systems, you may need to wait until the system recognizes the CD (the

access LED goes out) before you can proceed to the next operation.

Chapter 5 Importing Media Files

Creating Clips by Importing Files and Audio Material

141

Editing Tools

Overview (Editing Tools) XPRI NS provides a number of editing tools. The basic editing tools allow you to assemble your sequence on the timeline. Other editing tools allow you to adjust the sequence and apply a variety of effects. Basic editing tools Tool or function name

Function

Source Viewer (see page 144)

• Preview clips and add them to sequences. • Create clips by digitizing VTR, and add the clips to sequences.

Master Viewer (see page 160)

Check the results of editing on the timeline.

Timeline Editor (see page 171)

Arrange clips on the timeline and create sequences.

Other editing tools

142

Tool or function name

Function

Timeline Searching (see page 289)

• Search the timeline for clips loaded in the Source Viewer. • Search the timeline for duplicate clips. • Search the timeline for flash frames. • Search the timeline for media offline clips. • Search the timeline for sections in which only proxy media exist.

Render To Bin Dialog (see page 224)

Render a specified range in a sequence as a clip and save the clip to a bin.

Timecode Window (see page 229)

Display various types of timecode information for the clip at the playline position on the timeline.

Overview (Editing Tools)

Tool or function name

Chapter

6

Function

Speed Control Create speed clips with specified Dialogs (see page speeds or durations. 231) Audio Rubber Band Function (see page 284)

Adjust fader levels for audio tracks on the timeline.

Trim Viewer (see page 212)

Adjust the lengths of clips around transitions on the timeline.

Simple Effect Editor (see page 308)

Adjust the parameters of effects applied to clips or transitions.

Customizing the Operating Screens XPRI NS allows you to freely combine tool windows and arrange them in the layouts that are most convenient for your style of working. You can save your layouts so that you do not have to start the tools again every time you begin working. For greater editing efficiency, we recommend that you customize the window layout. See “Custom Window Layouts” (page 30) for more information about customizing the operating screen layout.

Example 1: Customized operating screens This layout is convenient for exploring the clip in your project as you place it on the timeline. When you play back the timeline, the Source Viewer changes to the Master Viewer, allowing you to check the results of your editing.

Project Explorer

Source Viewer/Master Viewer

Timeline Editor

Example 2: Customized operating screens This layout is convenient for editing effects that have been applied on the timeline. You can check the editing results in the Simple Effect Editor.

Simple Effect Editor

Timeline Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Overview (Editing Tools)

143

Source Viewer

See “Logging Properties Dialog” (page 601) for more information. Note

Overview The Source Viewer has two operating modes. The modes are designed for different types of tasks, and they provide different sets of functions. Normal mode: For previewing clips and adding them to sequences. Digitize mode: For creating clips by digitizing VTR, and adding the clips to sequences.

To Start the Source Viewer With the Timeline Editor running, do one of the following in Project Explorer. • Double click a clip in a bin. • Select a clip in a bin and press the Enter key. • Select a clip in a bin and press the Source Viewer focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information about focus hot keys. Notes

• The Source Viewer cannot be started unless the Timeline Editor is running. To start the Timeline Editor, do one of the following in Project Explorer. - Select a bin, click the Menu button, and select [New Sequence]. - Select a bin and click the New Sequence button. - Double click a sequence in a bin. - Select a sequence in a bin and press the Enter key. • If the Timeline Editor is not running, picture icon play starts when you double click or press the Enter key.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

144

Switching the Source Viewer Operating Mode To switch to digitize mode Do one of the following to switch the Source Viewer from normal mode to digitize mode. • Select a device for digitizing (Sony Record Engine, Matrox (Xmio) Record, or i.LINK Record Engine) in the Source Viewer clip list. • Check that the Logging Tool is not running, and press the X1 or i.LINK focus hot key, which can be assigned to any key on the keyboard or any button on the control panels.

Source Viewer

The Source Viewer cannot be put into digitize mode while the Logging Tool is running. Exit the Logging Tool before pressing an input source button.

To switch to normal mode Do one of the following to switch the Source Viewer from digitize mode to normal mode. • Load a clip into the Source Viewer. • Press the Source Viewer focus hot key, which can be assigned to any key on the keyboard or any button on the control panels. Note

You cannot put the Source Viewer into normal mode while digitizing. Wait for the digitizing to finish and then try again.

Names and Functions of Parts Normal mode Source Viewer Normal mode is for previewing clips and adding them to sequences.

See the explanation of the Source Viewer for more information about how to start the Source Viewer. Click on the names of parts to display explanations of the parts.

a Menu button b Clip list box c Playline position

d Source monitor

e Playline

f Position bar g Timecodes

h Command button area

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the normal mode Source Viewer. See “Source Viewer Main Menu (Normal Mode)” (page 157) for more information about the main menu.

c Playline position Displays the timecode of the current playline position. You can switch to frame count display by right clicking in this area and selecting [Frames] from the context menu. You can also use this area to move the playline to a time position. Click this area to activate it, use the numeric

Icon

Function The clip/material has already been ingested in Sonaps. The clip/material is being ingested in Sonaps, or the (XDCAM, MXF) clip is being imported. The timecode is displayed against an orange background. The timecode flashes when ingesting is finished.

No icon

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

b Clip list box Displays clip names and input device names. You can click the button on the right side of the box to display the names of all clips currently loaded in the Source Viewer and the names of the input devices connected to the XPRI NS system.

keypad to enter the desired time position value, and press the Enter key. Another method to move the playline is: with the Source Monitor active, enter the desired time position value on the scratch pad which appears when you operate the numeric keypad, and then press the Enter key. When using Sonaps, also displays the status of the clip by using the following marks:

A local sequence is being previewed in the Source Viewer.

Source Viewer

145

d Source monitor Displays the video of clips loaded in the Source Viewer. The following event information is shown when the frame being displayed is a still frame. • Start point • End point • Mark In point • Mark Out point • Essence marks, scene change marks, and timecode break marks • Comments added to essence marks Note

Event information is not output to the video monitor. You can select whether to display a frame or a field (field 1 or 2) in the monitor when play is stopped. To do so, select the desired display format in the Display tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. See “Display tab” (page 609) for more information.

e Playline Indicates the position of the frame which is currently displayed in the Source Monitor. You can also scrub the playline (drag it back and forth on the position bar) to play clips. When setting Mark In and Mark Out points, you can use the playline to move to the desired position in the clip.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

146

f Position bar Displays the time axis of the clip being displayed in the Source Monitor and the current frame position (playline). When the Source Viewer is active, the background of the section from the start point to the end point is highlighted. The following event information is also shown. • Mark In point • Mark Out point • Scene In point • Scene Out point • Essence marks, scene change marks, and timecode break marks • Phantom marks • Timecode breaks Multiple scenes can overlap each other in the Position bar. Each scene can be assigned a different color from the context menu for easy identification. When you click overlapping scenes, the scene whose boundary is closest to the mouse position is selected. You can use the following shortcut keys to zoom in or zoom out on the timeline, even while performing other actions on the timeline. • Zoom in: Ctrl + + • Zoom out: Ctrl + - (up to full length, 12 hours) • Show entire scale: Ctrl + 0

Source Viewer

• Zoom in/zoom out: Right-click on the position bar while holding down the Ctrl key, and drag the mouse up and down. g Timecodes Displays the timecodes for the Mark In point, Mark Out point, duration between Mark In and Out points, and the length of the clip. You can switch to frame count display by right clicking in this area and selecting [Frame View] from the context menu. You can also set a Mark In, Mark Out, or duration value by clicking on the corresponding timecode and entering a value by using the numeric keypad. When entering a duration timecode, the following conditions determine whether a Mark In or Mark Out point is set. • When a Mark In point is set: A Mark Out point is set so that the duration matches the duration entered with the numeric keypad. • When Mark Out point only is set: A Mark In point is set so that the duration matches the duration entered with the numeric keypad. h Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Source Viewer (normal mode). See page 148 for more information about the command button area in normal mode.

Digitize mode Source Viewer Digitize mode allows you to create clips by digitizing VTR material 1) and live material, and to add the clips to sequences. 1) Including material recorded on devices connected via i.LINK connectors.

See “Linear-Like Editing” (page 258) for more information about operations. Notes

• It is impossible to digitize live sources to create live clips. • Clips are always added to sequences. It is not possible to digitize reel clips in the Source Viewer without placing them on the timeline. • Use the Logging Tool if you want to create reel clips without adding them to sequences, or if you want to create log clips and sub clips. To put the Source Viewer into digitize mode, do either of the following. • In the clip list box of the Source Viewer, select a device for digitizing (Sony Record Engine, Matrox (Xmio) Record, or i.LINK Record Engine).

• Check that the Logging Tool is not running, and press the X1 or i.LINK focus hot key, which can be assigned to any key on the keyboard.

See “Logging Properties Dialog” (page 601) for more information.

The Source Viewer window changes to the configuration shown in the following figure.

a Menu button b Clip list box c Source monitor d Player position timecode

e Status f Progress bar

g Timecodes

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the digitize mode Source Viewer.

h Command button area

b Clip list box Displays the connected input device (Sony Record Engine, Matrox (Xmio) Record, or i.LINK Record Engine).

e Status Displays information about the status of the VTR and the status of digitizing operations.

c Source monitor Displays the video of the connected VTR or live input port.

f Progress bar Displays the progress of digitizing.

d Player position timecode Displays the timecode or frame of the current player position. You can also use this area to cue up a position in the material. Click this area to activate it and then enter timecode from the keyboard. XPRI NS cues up the specified position on the player.

g Timecodes Displays the timecodes for the Mark In point, Mark Out point, duration between Mark In and Out points, and the length of the clip. You can also set a Mark In, Mark Out, or duration value by clicking on the corresponding timecode and entering a value by using the numeric keypad.

Source Viewer

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

See “Source Viewer Main Menu (Digitize Mode)” (page 158) for more information about the main menu.

Right click the display and use the context menu to switch between timecode display and frame display. You can switch between TC display and CTL display in the submenu for timecode display. You can also select LTC or VITC in TC display from the Device Properties Dialog (page 584).

147

h Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Source Viewer (digitize mode). See page 155 for more information about the command button area in digitize mode.

The settings which govern digitizing in the Source Viewer are the settings made in the various setting dialogs or tools. Item

Referenced dialog or tool

Digitize settings

Logging Properties dialog

Save destination for media Project Properties dialog files Compression method used to digitize video signals

Project Properties dialog

Save destination for digitized clips

Bin that contains the current sequence

Clip naming rules

Project Explorer Properties dialog

Reel management

Reel Database dialog

Equalizer adjustment of input levels for external audio input a)

Audio Input Tool

VTR connection settings

Device Properties dialog

a) The bypass function is disabled for digitizing in the Source Viewer. Equalizer settings are ignored when i.LINK is selected.

Source Viewer Command Button Area (Normal Mode) By default, the buttons in the Source Viewer command button area (normal mode) are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 158) from the main menu. Notes

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

148

• The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. • The jog and shuttle controls on the control panel can also be used to control play. • The mouse wheel can be used for seek and shuttle functions when the mouse is moved over the position bar. Scroll the mouse wheel for the seek function, or click the wheel and scroll the wheel for the shuttle function.

Source Viewer

Default command button configuration

Icon

Button name

Button function

Command Button Palette

Displays the command button palette. See “Command button palette” (page 150) for more information.

Audio Waveform/Video picture switch

Switches between audio waveform display and video image display on the monitor.

Scene In

Marks the beginning of a scene.

Scene Out

Marks the end of a scene.

Clear In Mark

Clears the In point, if it exists. Scene markers are displayed in the position bar. In and Out points can be added to scenes by right-clicking the scene marker and selecting the [Set Mark In and Mark Out] from the context menu.

Clear Out Mark

Clears the Out point, if it exists.

Go to Previous Event

Jumps to a destination in the previous event, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to select all tracks or active tracks only as jump targets. It also allows you to select starting frames, ending frames, In and Out points, essence marks, scene change marks, and timecode break marks as jump destinations. You can jump to different target tracks and different jump destinations by clicking this button alone or clicking it with the Alt key or Alt + Ctrl keys held down. See “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) for more information.

Go to Next Event

Jumps to a destination in the next event, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to select all tracks or active tracks only as jump targets. It also allows you to select starting frames, ending frames, In and Out points, essence marks, scene change marks, and timecode break marks as jump destinations. You can jump to different target tracks and different jump destinations by clicking this button alone or clicking it with the Alt key or Alt + Ctrl keys held down. See “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) for more information.

Mark In

See “Edit tab” (page 610) for more information. Play

Plays a clip from the current position to the end. During play mode, the button is lit green.

Source Viewer

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Marks an In point. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to set the In point, and then click this button to set it. You can also set an In point by clicking this button during play, or by clicking it after you enter a timecode value with the numeric keypad. If an In point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point. If you have checked the [Commit TLE Source Viewer changes to clips] check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog, the In point set with this button is also set as the In point of the clip.

149

Icon

Button name

Button function

Mark Out

Marks an Out point. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to set the Out point, and then click this button to set it. You can also set an Out point by clicking this button during play, or by clicking it after you enter a timecode value with the numeric keypad. If an Out point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point. If you have checked the [Commit TLE Source Viewer changes to clips] check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog, the Out point set with this button is also set as the Out point of the clip. See “Edit tab” (page 610) for more information.

Set Essence Mark

Sets an essence mark. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to set the essence mark, and then click this button to set it. If you have checked the [Commit TLE Source Viewer changes to clips] check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog, the essence mark set with this button is also set as an essence mark of the clip. See “Edit tab” (page 610) for more information.

Delete Mark

Deletes a mark. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to delete the mark (essence mark or scene change mark), and then click this button to delete it. Note You can tell whether the playline is at a mark position by checking the Source Monitor. A mark display appears in the Source Monitor when the playline reaches a mark.

Go to Previous Marker

Jumps to the previous marker, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to select essence marks, scene change marks, and timecode break marks as jump destinations. See “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) for more information.

Go to Next Marker

Jumps to the next marker, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to select essence marks, scene change marks, and timecode break marks as jump destinations. See “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) for more information.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

150

Replace

Places the clip on the sequence in Replace mode.

Splice-In

Selects Splice-In mode as the mode for placing clips on the timeline. If you right-click this button and select [Fit to Fill] from the context menu, the clip will be placed with the clip speed adjusted to match the duration between the In and Out points on the timeline.

Overwrite

Selects Overwrite mode as the mode for placing clips on the timeline. If you right-click this button and select [Fit to Fill] from the context menu, the clip will be placed with the clip speed adjusted to match the duration between the In and Out points on the timeline.

Command button palette The Source Viewer (normal mode) command button palette contains less frequently used command buttons. Open it by clicking the Command Button Palette button. The palette closes automatically when you click one of its command buttons. By default, the buttons in the command button palette are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button palette by selecting Customize (page 158) from the main menu.

Source Viewer

See “Customization” (page 570) for more information about customization.

Default command button configuration

Icon

Button name

Button function

Play to Out

Plays the clip from the current position to the Out point.

Play In to Out

Plays from the In point to the Out point. During play mode, the button is lit green. Starts loop play from the In point to the Out point if clicked while holding down the Alt key.

Make Sub Clip

Creates a sub clip.

Nesting

Selects Nesting mode as the mode for placing other sequences into the sequence on the timeline. See “Sequence-in-Sequence Function” (page 253) for more information.

Versioning

Selects Versioning mode as the mode for placing other sequences into the sequence on the timeline. See “Sequence-in-Sequence Function” (page 253) for more information. Opens the Marker List dialog, which displays all of the marks in the current clip. When you click a mark in the list, or select one with the up and down arrow keys, the playline moves to the timecode of that mark. When you double click a mark or select it and press the Enter key, the playline moves to that mark and the window focus moves to the Source Viewer.

Find Clip

Searches for the loaded clip. The found clip is highlighted in Project Explorer.

Match Frame

Loads into the Source Viewer the clip that corresponds to a specified frame in a sequence. The Source Viewer playline moves to the specified frame and an In point and Out point is set.

List Reverse Match

Executes a reverse match search on the timeline for any frame in a clip loaded into the Source Viewer.

Set Index Picture

Sets the In point as the index picture.

Overwrite Mode Record

Performs linear-like editing and adds the results to a sequence in Overwrite mode.

Splice-In Mode Record

Performs linear-like editing and adds the results to a sequence in Splice-In mode.

TCR

Switches between timecode display modes: FTC, LTC, VITC, and CTL.

CTL Reset

Performs a CTL timecode reset.

See “Switching the Timecode Display Mode” (page 253) for more information.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Mark List

See “Switching the Timecode Display Mode” (page 253) for more information. TC/CTL

In Normal mode, switches the playline time display between TC and CTL. In Digitize mode, switches timecode used for VTR control between CTL and LTC.

Scene Detect

Analyzes the content of the clip loaded in the Source Viewer, and adds essence marks to points where scene changes are detected.

Source Viewer

151

Icon

Button name

Button function

Make Scene Section Sub Clip

Creates a sub clip in Project Explorer containing the selected scene(s) in the Source Viewer. The clip name is appended with the “_Sub” string.

Add Scene Section to Timeline

Adds the selected scene(s) in the Source Viewer to the timeline in Splice-in mode. You can also add selected scene(s) from the Source Viewer Marker List in Overwrite mode by dragging them to the timeline.

Safe Action Area

Displays a box showing the safe action area on the screen.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

152

Source Viewer

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Icon

Button name

Icon

Button name

Mark Clip

Analog Scrub Mode

Fast Forward

Set Duration

...

CG1 to CG8

Rewind 1.5

Set Index Picture

...

V1 to V8

Forward 1.5

Marker List

...

A1 to A12

Stop

Create Scene Section Sub Clip

Make Sub Clip

Step Backward

Add Scene Section to Timeline

CTL Reset

Step Forward

Overwrite Mode Record

TC/CTL

Step Backward 10 Frames

Splice-In Mode Record

Zoom In

Step Forward 10 Frames

Composer Mode

Zoom Out

Play In to Out

Segment (Extract/ Splice-in) Mode

Show Entire

Play to Out

Segment (Lift/ Overwrite) Mode

Monitor Select

Play Reverse

Trim Mode

Speed Control

Play Forward

Edit Mode

Match Frame

Still

Nesting

Match TC

Go to Start

Versioning

Toggle F1/F2

Go to End

Focus

Toggle Field/Frame

Go to Previous Event

Save

Next Reverse Match Frame

Go to Next Event

Extract

Previous Reverse Match Frame

Go to In

Lift

List Reverse Match

Go to Out

Copy to Clipboard

Safe Action Area

Previous Clip

Add Edit

Toggle Timeline View

Source Viewer

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Rewind

153

Icon

Button name

Chapter 6 Editing Tools Source Viewer

Button name

Icon

Button name

Render All

TC Switch

Previous FX

Render Whole (Both)

Scene Detect

Next FX

Render Whole (Video)

Waveform Magnify

All Stop

Render Whole (Audio)

Waveform Minify

All Cancel

Add Dissolve

Gang

FX1 to FX9

Help

Pre-roll Play (5 Sec)

Open FX

Properties

Pre-roll Review (3 Sec)

Transition Options

Find Clip

Pre-roll Review (5 Sec)

Still Picture

Undo

Pre-roll Review from Transition (3 Sec)

Jog

Redo

Pre-roll Review from Transition (5 Sec)

Shuttle

Merge

Clear Both Marks

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Refresh

Pre-roll Play (3 Sec)

154

Icon

Next Clip

...

Source Viewer Command Button Area (Digitize Mode) By default, the buttons in the Source Viewer command button area (digitize mode) are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 158) from the main menu. Notes

• The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. • The jog and shuttle controls on the control panel can also be used to control play. • The mouse wheel can be used for seek and shuttle functions when the mouse is moved over the position bar. Scroll the mouse wheel for the seek function, or click the wheel and scroll the wheel for the shuttle function.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Source Viewer

155

Default command button arrangement

Icon

Button name

Button function

Eject

Ejects the tape. Note Does not function for players connected via i.LINK.

Standby Off

Sets VTR standby to off.

Go to In

Jumps to the In point, if it exists.

Go to Out

Jumps to the Out point, if it exists.

Clear In Mark

Clears the In point, if it exists.

Clear Out Mark

Clears the Out point, if it exists.

Rewind

Rewinds the player.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the player.

Mark In

Marks an In point. Start playback on the player, and click this button at the position you want to set as the In point. If an In point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Play

Starts playback on the player. Becomes a Still button during play.

Mark Out

Mark an Out point. Start playback on the player, and click this button at the position you want to set as the Out point. If an Out point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Set Essence Mark

Sets an essence mark. The position at which this button is clicked during digitizing will be set as an essence mark in the digitized clip.

CTL Reset

Performs a CTL timecode reset. See “Switching the Timecode Display Mode” (page 253) for more information.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

156

TC/CTL

In Normal mode, switches the playline time display between TC and CTL. In Digitize mode, switches timecode used for VTR control between CTL and LTC.

Splice-In

Digitizes and places the clip on the sequence in Splice-In mode.

Overwrite

Digitizes and places the clip on the sequence in Overwrite mode.

Overwrite Mode Record

Executes linear-like editing in Overwrite mode.

Splice-In Mode Record

Executes linear-like editing in Splice-In mode.

Source Viewer

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Icon

Button name

Icon

Button name

Stop

Still

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Step Backward

All Stop

Help

Step Forward

All Cancel

Properties

Step Backward 10 Frames

Clear Both Marks

Undo

Step Forward 10 Frames

Set Duration

Redo

Play Reverse

Jog

Play Forward

Shuttle

Source Viewer Main Menu (Normal Mode) Click the Menu button in the Source Viewer to display the Source Viewer main menu. In normal mode, the main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Load Filler Loads filler into the Source Viewer. “Filler” is displayed at the top of the clip list, and a darkgray black picture appears in the Source Monitor. The default duration is 1 minute. You can change the duration after placing the filler on the timeline. Note

Although “Filler” is displayed at the top of the clip list when filler is loaded, the filler cannot be loaded into the Source Monitor from the clip list. Clear List Clears all of the clips from the clip list, except the clip currently displayed in the Source Monitor.

Save Clipboard Takes a sequence that has been copied to the clipboard with the [Cut to SV] or [Copy to SV] command in the Master Viewer and Timeline Editor main menus and saves it in the same bin as the currently open sequence.

Undo/Redo Displays subcommands for undoing and redoing operations. The subcommands are: Undo: Undoes an operation in the Source Viewer. You can undo up to 64 operations, in order from the most recent. Redo: Redoes a Source Viewer operation that was undone with the [Undo] command. You can redo up to 64 operations. Undo List: Displays a list of up to 64 of the most recent operations in the Source Viewer. You can select an operation from the undo list to return the Source Viewer to the state it was in before that operation. When an operation is undone, a separator appears in the undo list. The only operations that can be undone are the ones above the separator. Clear Undo List: Clears the undo list. Select Tracks Selects and deselects tracks. This command has the following subcommands. Select All Tracks: Selects all tracks in the current Source Viewer clip. Deselect All Tracks: Deselects all tracks in the current Source Viewer clip. Scene Detection Analyzes the content of clips loaded to Source Viewer, and adds essence marks at points where scenes change.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Clear Monitor Clears the clip currently displayed in the Source Monitor. The effect is as if nothing is loaded in the Source Viewer.

Reverse Match Executes a reverse match search. (see Reverse Match Frame (page 289)).

Make Sub Clip Creates a sub clip of the duration between the Mark In and Mark Out points.

Source Viewer

157

Note

Essence marks will not be added between scenes for which dissolves are applied, as the scenes are recognized as a single clip. Phantom Marks Selects the phantom mark display mode. This command has the following subcommands. None: Does not display phantom marks. Viewer: Displays phantom marks in the Source Viewer and Master Viewer. Viewer, Timeline: Displays phantom marks in the Source Viewer, Master Viewer and on the timeline. Note

When clips are added in Overwrite or Splice-In mode, the phantom marks show the position of the addition (Mark In point, Mark Out point). Markers Displays subcommands related to essence mark settings for Source Viewer clips. The subcommands are: Add Essence Mark: Sets an essence mark at the specified time. You can right-click an essence mark in the timeline to apply a color marker, add a comment, or delete the essence mark. Add Comment...: Opens the Essence Mark Comment dialog so that you can enter a comment about an essence mark. Delete Mark: Deletes the mark at the playline position. Marker List...: Opens the Marker List dialog, which displays all of the marks in the current clip. When you click a mark in the list, or select it with the up and down arrow keys, the playline moves to the timecode of the selected mark. When you double click a mark or select it and press the Enter key, the playline moves to that mark and the window focus moves to the Source Viewer. You can also edit marks by using commands from the context menu. Note

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Marks set in the Source Viewer are inserted in the timeline and also reflected in the clip. If you do not want the marks to be reflected in the clip, clear the [Commit TLE Source Viewer changes to clips] check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. See “Edit tab” (page 610) for more information.

Timeline Editor Properties... Opens the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. See “Timeline Editor Properties Dialog” (page 607) for more information.

Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands.

158

Source Viewer

Command Button...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Show Master Viewer Tab/Hide Source Viewer Tab Displays a Master Viewer tab, or hides the Source Viewer tab. See “Converting Windows to Tabs” (page 32) for more information about showing and hiding viewer tabs.

Help... Displays help about the Source Viewer. Minimize Minimizes the Source Viewer window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Maximize/Restore Maximizes the Source Viewer window, or restores it to its original size. Close Closes the Source Viewer window.

Source Viewer Main Menu (Digitize Mode) Click the Menu button in the Source Viewer to display the Source Viewer main menu. In digitize mode, the main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Reel Database... Opens the Reel Database dialog. See “Reel Database Dialog” (page 93) for more information.

Audio Input Tool... Starts the Audio Input Tool, or exits the Audio Input Tool if it is already running. See Audio Input Tool (page 424) for more information.

Bin Selection... Opens the Bin Selection dialog so that you can select a bin to store newly created clips. Select the bin from the Tree View pane in the dialog, and then click the OK button in the dialog to confirm the selection or the Cancel button to cancel it.

Pre-Edit Properties... Opens the Pre-Edit Properties dialog. See “Pre-Edit Properties Dialog” (page 605) for more information.

Logging Properties... Opens the Logging Properties dialog. See “Logging Properties Dialog” (page 601) for more information.

Timeline Editor Properties... Opens the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. See “Timeline Editor Properties Dialog” (page 607) for more information.

Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Button...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Source Viewer. Minimize Minimizes the Source Viewer window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Maximize/Restore Maximizes the Source Viewer window, or restores it to its original size. Close Closes the Source Viewer window. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Source Viewer

159

Master Viewer Overview The Master Viewer is a tool for viewing the results of editing on the timeline.

To Start the Master Viewer With the Timeline Editor running, do one of the following in Project Explorer. • Select [Open Master Viewer] from the main menu of the Timeline Editor. • Select a sequence in a bin and press the Master Viewer focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information about focus hot keys. Note

The Master Viewer cannot be started unless the Timeline Editor is running. To start the Timeline Editor, do one of the following in Project Explorer. • Select a bin, click the Menu button, and select [New Sequence]. • Select a bin and click the New Sequence button. • Double click a sequence in a bin. • Select a sequence in a bin and press the Enter key.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

160

Master Viewer

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

c Playline position

b Clip list box

d Master monitor

e Playline

f Position bar g Timecodes

h Command button area

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Master Viewer. See “Master Viewer Main Menu” (page 169) for more information about the main menu.

b Clip list box Displays clip names. You can click the button on the right side of the box to display the names of all clips on the timeline.

d Master monitor Displays the video of the sequence currently being edited.

Note

Event information is not output to the video monitor. You can select whether to display a frame or a field (field 1 or 2) in the monitor when play is stopped. To do so, select the desired display format in the Display tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. See “Display tab” (page 609) for more information.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

c Playline position Displays the timecode of the current playline position. You can switch to frame count display by right clicking in this area and selecting [Frames] from the context menu. You can also use this area to move the playline to a time position. Click this area to activate it, use the numeric keypad to enter the desired time position value, and press the Enter key. Another method to move the playline is: with the Master Monitor active, enter the desired time position value on the scratch pad which appears when you operate the numeric keypad, and then press the Enter key.

The following event information is shown when the frame being displayed is a still frame. • Start point • End point • End point + 1 frame • Mark In point • Mark Out point • Essence marks and scene change marks • Comments added to essence marks

e Playline Indicates the position of the frame which is currently displayed in the Master monitor. You can also scrub the playline (drag it back and forth on the position bar) to play a sequence. When setting Mark In

Master Viewer

161

and Mark Out points, you can use the playline to move to the desired position in the clip. f Position bar Displays the time axis of the sequence being displayed in the Master Monitor and the current frame position (playline). When the Master Viewer is active, the background of the section shown on the timeline is highlighted. The following event information is also shown. • Mark In point • Mark Out point • Marks (essence marks or scene change marks set in all clips on the timeline and at time points on the timeline) • Phantom marks You can use the following shortcut keys to zoom in or zoom out on the timeline, even while performing other actions on the timeline. • Zoom in: Ctrl + + • Zoom out: Ctrl + - (up to full length, 12 hours) • Show entire scale: Ctrl + 0 • Zoom in/zoom out: Right-click on the position bar while holding down the Ctrl key, and drag the mouse up and down. g Timecodes Displays the timecodes for the Mark In point, Mark Out point, duration between Mark In and Out points, and the length of the clip. You can switch to frame count display by right clicking in this area and selecting [Frame View] from the context menu. You can also set a Mark In, Mark Out, or duration value by clicking on the corresponding timecode and entering a value by using the numeric keypad. When entering a duration timecode, the following conditions determine whether a Mark In or Mark Out point is set. • When a Mark In point is set: A Mark Out point is set so that the duration matches the duration entered with the numeric keypad. • When Mark Out point only is set: A Mark In point is set so that the duration matches the duration entered with the numeric keypad. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

h Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Master Viewer. See page 162 for more information about the command button area.

Master Viewer Command Button Area By default, the buttons in the Master Viewer command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure.

162

Master Viewer

You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 169) from the main menu. Notes

• The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. • The jog and shuttle controls on the control panel can also be used to control play. • The mouse wheel can be used for seek and shuttle functions when the mouse is moved over the position bar. Scroll the mouse wheel for the seek function, or click the wheel and scroll the wheel for the shuttle function.

Default command button configuration

Icon

Button name

Button function

Command Button Palette

Displays the command button palette. See “Command button palette” (page 164) for more information.

Match Frame

Loads into the Source Viewer the clip that corresponds to a specified frame in a sequence. The Source Viewer playline moves to the specified frame and an In point and Out point is set.

Preroll Play (3 seconds)

Moves the focus to the Master Viewer and starts play from 3 seconds before the playline. When there is an In point in the clip, starts play from 3 seconds before the In point.

Preroll Review (3 seconds)

Moves the focus to the Master Viewer and starts play from 3 seconds before the cut point closest to and in advance of the playline on the active tracks.

Clear In Mark

Clears the In point, if it exists.

Clear Out Mark

Clears the Out point, if it exists.

Go to Previous Event

Jumps to a destination in the previous event, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. The Shortcut Key tab allows you to select all tracks or active tracks only as jump targets. It also allows you to select starting frames, ending frames, In and Out points, essence marks and scene change marks as jump destinations. You can jump to different target tracks and different jump destinations by clicking this button with the Alt key or Alt + Ctrl keys held down. See “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) for more information.

Go to Next Event

Jumps to a destination in the next event, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. The Shortcut Key tab allows you to select all tracks or active tracks only as jump targets. It also allows you to select starting frames, ending frames, In and Out points, essence marks and scene change marks as jump destinations. You can jump to different target tracks and different jump destinations by clicking this button with the Alt key or Alt + Ctrl keys held down. See “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) for more information. Marks an In point. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to set the In point, and then click this button to set it. You can also set an In point by clicking this button during play, or by clicking it after you enter a timecode value with the numeric keypad. If an In point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Play

Plays a clip from the current position to the end. During playback mode, the button is lit green.

Mark Out

Marks an Out point. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to set the Out point, and then click this button to set it. You can also set an Out point by clicking this button during play, or by clicking it after you enter a timecode value with the numeric keypad. If an Out point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Set Essence Mark

Sets an essence mark. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to set the essence mark, and then click this button to set it.

Master Viewer

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Mark In

163

Icon

Button name

Button function

Delete Mark

Deletes a mark. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to delete the mark, and then click this button to delete it. Note You can tell whether the playline is at a mark position by checking the Source Monitor. A mark display appears in the Source Monitor when the playline reaches a mark.

Go to Previous Marker

Jumps to the previous marker, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to select essence marks, scene change marks, and timecode break marks as jump destinations. See “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) for more information.

Go to Next Marker

Jumps to the next marker, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to select essence marks, scene change marks, and timecode break marks as jump destinations. See “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) for more information.

Replace

Places the clip on the sequence in Replace mode.

Splice-In

Selects Splice-In mode as the mode for placing clips on the timeline.

Overwrite

Selects Overwrite mode as the mode for placing clips on the timeline.

Command button palette The Master Viewer command button palette contains less frequently used command buttons. Open it by clicking the Command Button Palette button. The palette closes automatically when you click one of its command buttons. By default, the buttons in the command button palette are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button palette by selecting Customize (page 169) from the main menu.

Icon

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

164

Default command button configuration

Button name

Button function

Play to Out

Plays the clip from the current position to the Out point.

Play In to Out

Plays from the In point to the Out point. During play, becomes a Stop button. Starts loop play from the In point to the Out point if clicked while holding down the Alt key.

Delete Effect

Deletes the effect at the playline position on the active tracks. Or deletes the effect in the range specified by setting In and Out points.

Extract

Deletes a section specified by In and Out points on the active tracks, and shifts the following clips on the timeline to the left to fill the resulting gap. The duration of the tracks becomes shorter.

Lift

Deletes a section specified by In and Out points on the active tracks, and fills the resulting gap with filler (black on the video track and silence on audio tracks). The duration of the tracks does not change.

Master Viewer

Icon

Button name

Button function

Mark List

Opens the Marker List dialog, which displays all of the marks in the current sequence. When you click a mark in the list, or select one with the up and down arrow keys, the playline moves to the timecode of that mark. When you double click a mark or select it and press the Enter key, the playline moves to that mark and the window focus moves to the Timeline Editor.

Find Clip

Searches the open sequence. By clicking this button with the Alt key held down, you can find the clip at the playline position on the uppermost active track.

Match Frame

Loads into the Source Viewer the clip that corresponds to a specified frame in a sequence. The Source Viewer playline moves to the specified frame and an In point and Out point is set.

Match TC

Searches the clip currently loaded in the Source Viewer for a frame with the same timecode as the timecode of a specified frame on the timeline, moves the playline to that frame, sets an In point, and cues up the frame in the Source Viewer in Digitize mode. If the duration of the clip in the Source Viewer is longer than the playline to clip tail duration in the timeline, it also adds an Out point.

Flash Frame Detection

Searches the timeline for clips and filler with durations less than or equal to a specified duration.

Add Dissolve

Opens the Transitions Options dialog. A dissolve (or cross fade for audio) is set in the active track at the transition closest to the playline, according to the current parameters in the Transition Options dialog. If you click this button after entering a timecode value with the numeric keypad, the Transition Options dialog opens with the value as the duration. You can set the placement default for transition effects in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. If you clear the [Enable Transition Options dialog] check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog, a dissolve is added automatically, without opening the Transition Options dialog. Note You can change the parameters of an existing dissolve by right clicking it, selecting [Options] from the context menu, and editing the parameters in the Transition Options dialog. See “Transition Options Dialog” (page 302) and “Edit tab” (page 610) for more information. Switches between field display, frame 1, and frame 2 display.

TC/CTL

Switches the display mode for playline time data between timecode and CTL time data.

CTL Reset

Performs a CTL reset on the playline time data display.

FG Monitor

Displays the foreground picture.

Key Monitor

Displays the foreground picture key.

Extract from Clip Top to Current Playline

Deletes the section between the start point of the clip on which the playline is positioned and the current playline position on the active tracks, and shifts the following clips on the timeline to fill the resulting gap. The duration of the tracks becomes shorter. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be extracted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for extraction.

Master Viewer

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Toggle Field/Frame

165

Icon

Button name

Button function

Extract from Current Playline Deletes the section between the current playline position on the active tracks and the to Clip End end point of the clip on which the playline is positioned, and shifts the following clips on the timeline to fill the resulting gap. The duration of the tracks becomes shorter. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be extracted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for extraction. Lift from Clip Top to Current Playline

Deletes the section between the start point of the clip on which the playline is positioned and the current playline position on the active tracks, and fills the resulting gap with filler (black on the video track and silence on audio tracks). The duration of the tracks does not change. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be lifted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for lifting.

Lift from Current Playline to Clip End

Deletes the section between the current playline position on the active tracks and the end point of the clip on which the playline is positioned, and fills the resulting gap with filler (black on the video track and silence on audio tracks). The duration of the tracks does not change. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be lifted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for lifting.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

166

Master Viewer

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Icon

Button name

Icon

Button name

Nesting

...

V1 to V8

Fast Forward

Versioning

...

A1 to A12

Rewind 1.5

Focus

...

K1 to K8

Forward 1.5

Save

CTL Reset

Stop

Extract

TC/CTL

Step Backward

Lift

Overwrite Mode Record

Step Forward

Extract from Clip Top to Current Playline

Splice-In Mode Record

Step Backward 10 Frames

Extract from Current Playline to Clip End

Show Entire

Step Forward 10 Frames

Lift from Clip Top to Current Playline

Monitor Select

Play In to Out

Lift from Current Playline to Clip End

Speed Control

Play to Out

Collapse

Match TC

Play Reverse

Copy to Clipboard

Solo Reset

Play Forward

Add Edit

Scrub (w/Fx) Mode

Still

Trim 1 Frame Back

Toggle F1/F2

Go to Start

Trim 1 Frame Forward

Toggle Field/Frame

Go to End

Trim 10 Frames Back

Duplicate Detection

Go to In

Trim 10 Frames Forward

List Reverse Match

Go to Out

Extend

Flash Frame Detection

Previous Clip

Freeze Frame

Proxy Only Detection

Next Clip

Copy to SV

Media Offline Detection

Previous FX

Cut to SV

FG Monitor

Next FX

Paste from SV

Key Monitor

Master Viewer

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Rewind

167

Icon

Button name

Button name

Icon

Button name

Render to Bin

Toggle Video/Key Monitor

All Cancel

Render All

Safe Action Area

Pre-roll Play (5 Sec)

Render In-Out

Audio Automation Enable

Pre-roll Review (5 Sec)

Render Whole (Both)

Toggle Timeline View

Pre-roll Review from Transition (3 Sec)

Render Whole (Video)

Waveform Magnify

Pre-roll Review from Transition (5 Sec)

Render Whole (Audio)

Waveform Minify

Clear Both Marks

Add Dissolve

Gang

FX1 to FX9

Help

Set Duration

Delete Effect

Properties

Set Index Picture

Open FX

Find Clip

Mark List

Transition Options

Undo

Splice-In

CG

Redo

Overwrite Mode Record

Add Key Frame

Audio Mixer

Splice-In Mode Record

Still Picture

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool

Composer Mode

Grouping

Audio Group Bus Fader Tool

Segment (Extract/ Splice-in) Mode

Auto White Balance

Voice Over Tool

Segment (Lift/ Overwrite) Mode

Jog

FX Explorer

Trim Mode

Shuttle

Timecode Window

Rubber Band Mode

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Prompter

Track Level Copy

Analog Scrub Mode

Mark Clip

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

168

Icon

All Stop

Edit Mode

Master Viewer

...

...

CG1 to CG8

Master Viewer Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Master Viewer to display the Master Viewer main menu. (You can also display the main menu by activating the Master Viewer window and pressing the Alt + Windows keys.) The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Clear List Clears all of the clips from the clip list, except the clip currently displayed in the Master Monitor. Save Saves the current sequence. Save As... Saves the current sequence in the same bin under another name. Enter a name (up to 256 characters) and click OK. Undo/Redo Displays subcommands for undoing and redoing operations. The subcommands are: Undo: Undoes an operation in the Master Viewer. You can undo up to 64 operations, in order from the most recent. Redo: Redoes a Master Viewer operation that was undone with the [Undo] command. You can redo up to 64 operations. Undo List...: Displays a list of up to 64 of the most recent operations in the Master Viewer. You can select an operation from the undo list to return the Master Viewer to the state it was in before that operation. When an operation is undone, a separator appears in the undo list. The only operations that can be undone are the ones above the separator. Clear Undo List: Clears the undo list. Cut to SV Cuts the selected part of a sequence on the timeline and loads it from the clipboard into the Source Viewer. You can get the same effect by right clicking a sequence on the timeline and selecting [Cut to SV] from the context menu.

Paste from SV Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the timeline, after a copy operation in the Source Viewer. The clipboard can contain any number of tracks or clips. See “Sequence Cut, Copy, and Paste Operations” (page 255) for more information about how to cut, copy, and paste sequences.

Phantom Marks Selects the phantom mark display mode. This command has the following subcommands. None: Does not display phantom marks. Viewer: Displays phantom marks in the Source Viewer and Master Viewer. Viewer, Timeline: Displays phantom marks in the Source Viewer, Master Viewer and on the timeline. Note

When clips are added in Overwrite or Splice-In mode, the phantom marks show the position of the addition (Mark In point, Mark Out point). Markers Makes mark settings for a timeline clip. This command has the following subcommands. Add Essence Mark: Sets an essence mark at the specified time. You can right-click an essence mark in the timeline to apply a color marker, add a comment, or delete the essence mark. Add Comment...: Opens the Essence Mark Comment dialog so that you can enter a comment about an essence mark. Delete Mark: Deletes the mark at the playline position. Marker List...: Opens the Marker List dialog, which displays all of the marks in the current sequence. When you click a mark in the list, or select it with the up and down arrow keys, the playline moves to the timecode of the selected mark. When you double click a mark or select it and press the Enter key, the playline moves to that mark and the window focus moves to the Timeline Editor. You can also edit marks by using commands from the context menu. Timeline Editor Properties... Opens the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. See “Timeline Editor Properties Dialog” (page 607) for more information.

Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Button...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard.

Master Viewer

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Copy to SV Copies the selected part of a sequence on the timeline and loads it from the clipboard into the Source Viewer. You can also get the same effect by right clicking a sequence and selecting [Copy to SV] from the context menu.

Select Tracks Selects and deselects tracks. This command has the following subcommands. Select All Tracks: Selects all of the tracks in the clips on the timeline. Deselect All Tracks: Deselects all of the tracks in the clips on the timeline.

169

Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Tabbing Source Viewer/Release Master Viewer Displays a Source Viewer tab, or hides the Master Viewer tab. See “Converting Windows to Tabs” (page 32) for more information about showing and hiding viewer tabs.

Register to Playout Server When working with Sonaps, displays the Registration window to send the material to a specific event on the Playlist or to a specific OA folder. When you are not working with Sonaps, this does not appear in the menu. Help... Displays help about the Master Viewer. Minimize Minimizes the Master Viewer window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Maximize/Restore Maximizes the Master Viewer window, or restores it to its original size. Close Closes the Master Viewer window.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

170

Master Viewer

Timeline Editor Overview The Timeline Editor is a tool for displaying edited clips in the correct order on video and audio tracks. You can use it to add clips to tracks, delete clips from tracks, and move clips to different locations. You can also use it trim clips and add transitions between clips. You also use it to add filler (black video areas) between clips. When working with Sonaps, you can edit material in the Material List directly and also register created sequences in the Play List to send them an on-air buffer. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

To Start the Timeline Editor Do one of the following in Project Explorer. • Select a bin, click the Menu button, and select [New Sequence]. • Select a bin and click the New Sequence button. • Double click a sequence in a bin. • Select a sequence in a bin and press the Enter key. • Select a sequence in a bin press the Timeline Editor focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information about focus hot keys.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Timeline Editor

171

Names and Functions of Parts a Timeline Editor menu button b Render indicator c Timeline Editor title bar d Command button area

g Status bar

a Timeline Editor menu button Displays the main menu of the Timeline Editor. See “Timeline Editor Main Menu” (page 189) for more information about the main menu.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

172

b Render indicator Lights green to indicate that the current sequence can be played in real time, and lights red to indicate that the sequence cannot be played in real time. You can click this indicator to render both video and audio in the range between the start and the end of the sequence that cannot be played in real time. You can also render from the context menu of the render indicator. The following commands are available. Render All: Over the range from the sequence start point to the sequence end point, renders only those sections that cannot be played in real time. A media file is created for each rendered range. Render In-Out: Over the range from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point, renders only those sections that cannot be played in real time. If there is no Mark In point or Mark Out point, renders around the playline position.

Timeline Editor

e Storyboard

f Timeline

Render At Playline: In the clip at the playline position, renders only those sections that cannot be played in real time. Render Selected Slice(s): Renders preselected slices in order. Render Slice(s) for Edit: Renders the range from the lowest numbered to the highest numbered of the selected slices. For a range that spans more than one slice, the range is the same as the range used in the [Set Mark In/Mark Out for Edit#] command of the slice number context menu. Video Rendering only: Renders video only. This command has the following subcommands. Aside from the fact that audio is not rendered, they are the same as the commands described above. • Render All • Render In-Out • Render At Playline • Render Selected Slice(s) • Render Slice(s) for Edit Audio Rendering only: Renders audio only. This command has the following subcommands. Aside from the fact that video is not rendered, they are the same as the commands described above. • Render All

• • • •

Render In-Out Render At Playline Render Selected Slice(s) Render Slice(s) for Edit

c Timeline Editor title bar Displays the path of the sequence or sub sequence, and the video format. : Sub sequence indicator is displayed on the Timeline Editor title bar when a sub sequence is open. The valid area of a sub sequence in the main sequence is indicated in dark blue in the position bar. d Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Timeline Editor. See page 182 for more information about the Timeline Editor command buttons.

e Storyboard Allows you to do quick editing by arranging clips on the lowermost active video track. See page 174 for more information about the storyboard.

f Timeline Displays tracks for editing video and audio material on the time axis.

- Trim Mode - Advanced Color Corrector Nesting/Versioning mode - Nesting - Versioning • Field select status - F1 - F2 - Frame • Output status - Output: ON - Output: OFF • Scrub (w/FX) mode - Scrub (w/FX) Mode: ON - Scrub (w/FX) Mode: OFF • Snap status - Snap: ON - Snap: OFF • Audio automation enable - Audio Automation: ON - Audio Automation: OFF • Analog scrub status - Analog Scrub: ON - Analog Scrub: OFF • Audio level status - Audio Level: ON - Audio Level: OFF;

See page 175 for more information about the timeline.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

g Status bar Displays the current editing status. The following status information is displayed in the status bar from left to right. The status display is updated automatically. • Audio seek status - Audio Seek Muting (Caps Lock: OFF) - Audio Seek Sound (Caps Lock: ON) • Play Status - fps: 0.00 Cache Size: 0 • Playback Status - Play - Stop - Play Forward - Play Reverse - Play Forward 1.5 - Play Reverse 1.5 - Pro-Roll play (3Sec) - Pro-Roll play (5Sec) - Pre-Roll review from transition (3Sec) - Pre-Roll review from transition (5Sec) • Playback speed - Play Rate: -16, -8, -4, -2, -1.5, -1, 0, 1, 1.5, 2, 4, 8, 16 • Edit Mode - Segment Mode - Composer Mode - Rubber Band

Timeline Editor

173

Storyboard • Click the Menu button in the Timeline View and select [Open Storyboard]. • Click the Toggle Timeline Display button.

The storyboard displays clips on the lowermost active video track. To open the storyboard, do one of the following in the Timeline Editor.

1 Storyboard clips 2 Storyboard clip view area

3 Scrollbar

a Storyboard clips The clips on the storyboard are the clips on the lowermost active video track. Index pictures of the Mark In and Mark Out points are displayed in the upper and lower rows. The timecode above the upper row represents the clip head timecode, and the timecode below the lower row represents the clip tail timecode. The timecodes can be modified to trim clips from the storyboard, by entering a timecode directly or using the +/- keys on the keyboard. The clip duration is displayed at the bottom of the clip icon. When you move the playline to a clip on the video track, that clip is selected on the storyboard. A text comments area is displayed in the lower row when the [Open Storyboard Comment] check box is checked in the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. A comment of up to 256 characters can be entered. Note

The text comments are not saved when a clip is exported to an XML, AAF, or EDL file. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

b Storyboard clip view area This area displays the storyboard clips. c Scrollbar Scrolls the storyboard (but does not scroll the timeline track area). See “Storyboard Editing” (page 265) for more information about operations on the storyboard.

174

Timeline Editor

Timeline Overview The timeline is made up of tracks containing the video and audio material to edit. You create sequences by placing

material from VTRs and other input sources at the desired points along the temporal axis of the timeline.

1 Timeline View menu button 2 Zoom controller 3 Playline time 4 Slice numbers 5 Position bar

0 Playline qa Shadow playline 9 Track area 8 Effect icon 6 Track panel

7 Key track

a Timeline View menu button Displays the main menu of the Timeline View. See “Timeline View Main Menu” (page 193) for more information about the main menu.

d Slice numbers Slice numbers are the numbers displayed above the timeline tracks. Numbers are assigned in order to the sections between cut points. Render status bars are displayed for sections which need to be rendered. The render status bars display unrendered parts in red and rendered parts in green. You can execute rendering from slice number context menus. The following commands are available. Set Mark In/Mark Out for Edit#: Sets Mark In and Mark Out points at the selected slices. Render All: Over the range from the sequence start point to the sequence end point, renders only those sections that cannot be played in real time. A media file is created for each rendered range.

Timeline Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

b Zoom controller Zooms in on the timeline when the slider is dragged to the right, and zooms out when the slider is dragged to the left. The zoom controller scale varies according to the position of the start point and end point on the timeline. You can also use the following shortcut keys, even while performing other actions on the timeline. • Zoom in: Ctrl + + • Zoom out: Ctrl + - (up to full length, 12 hours) • Show entire scale: Ctrl + 0 • Zoom in/zoom out: Right-click on the position bar while holding down the Ctrl key, and drag the mouse up and down.

c Playline time Displays the timecode of the current playline position. Timecodes can be entered directly using the numeric keypad.

175

Render In-Out: Over the range from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point, renders only those sections that cannot be played in real time. If there is no Mark In point or Mark Out point, renders around the playline position. Render At Playline: In the clip at the playline position, renders only those sections that cannot be played in real time. Re-render All Layers: Displays a menu with the following subcommands. • Here: Render all layers of the right-clicked slice. • Slice(s) for Edit #: Renders all layers of the range from the lowest numbered to the highest numbered of the selected slices. Render Here: Renders the right-clicked slice. Render Selected Slice(s): Renders preselected slices in order. Render Slice(s) for Edit: Renders the maximum and minimum range of the selected slice. For a range that spans more than one slice, the range is the same as the range used in the [Set Mark In/Mark Out for Edit#] command. Note

If compression has been selected in the Finishing Quality section of the Sequence Settings dialog, picture quality becomes progressively worse toward the lower layers of the MPEG video as you repeatedly render your material. To obtain optimum picture quality, it is recommended that you render all layers. The Render Status dialog appears when rendering starts. This dialog displays the number of the slice that is currently being rendered, the position, and a progress bar. To cancel the rendering, click Cancel in the Render Status. e Position bar Displays timecode in a variety of scales, as selected with the zoom controller. f Track panel Allows you to select tracks and make track settings. See page 177 for more information about the track panel. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

g Key track Displays key track when you select [External Key Track] from the context menu of a video track on the master track panel. To display the key tracks for all video tracks, select [Show External Key Track] from the Timeline View menu. To hide the key tracks, select [Hide External Key Track]. See “Key Track Operations” (page 253) for more information about working with key tracks.

176

Timeline Editor

h Effect icon Indicates an effect that has been placed on the timeline. The category and effect name appear in a tooltip when you move the mouse pointer over the icon. The effect icons are in the upper right corner of the clip in the timeline, except for transition effects which are shown between clips. A red square is displayed to indicate the presence of hidden effects if the length of the clip in the timeline is not long enough to display all the effect icons. i Track area Displays the tracks in sequences. This area itself is sometimes called the timeline. Moving the mouse to the edges of the track area moves the display to the next page of the track area. See “Context Menu for Timeline Clips” (page 180) for more information about the context menu for timeline clips in the track area.

j Playline Shows the current position on the timeline. The playline on the timeline and the playline on the position bar of the Master Viewer are at the same position and move together. k Shadow playline Indicates the position of the next frame after the playline. The shadow playline is displayed as a gray line. You can gauge the width of one frame from the distance between the playline and the shadow playline. Note

The shadow playline is displayed only when the timeline has been enlarged to a size where the shadow playline and playline do not overlap.

See “Timeline Editor Properties Dialog” (page 607) for more information.

Track Panel

See “Automatic track patching” (page 178) for an example of how automatic track patching works for video tracks. a Source track panel area b Track panel indicator c Master track panel area

d Track lock indicators e Master track monitor

buttons (video)

c Master track panel area Contains the master track panel, track lock indicators, and Master Track Monitor buttons. d Track lock indicators Light to show that editing has been disabled on a track, or that the sync lock function has been enabled to prevent sync breaks from occurring during operations such as trimming and Splice-In editing. A padlock icon indicates track lock, and a link icon indicates sync lock. e Master track monitor buttons (video/audio) Enable and disable monitoring of output tracks. These buttons are displayed for master sequence output tracks.

e Master track monitor

buttons (audio)

f Master track panel g Source track panel h Clip track monitor buttons (audio)

a Source track panel area Contains the source track panel and the Source Track Monitor buttons.

g Source track panel Lists track names to use in patching (mapping) source tracks to master tracks. Also allows you to add source tracks to master tracks during editing. XPRI NS patches tracks automatically if the [Enable Automatic Track Patching] check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog is checked. When there is a source track patched to a track on the master track panel, and that master track is deactivated, the source track is patched automatically to a new master track. For video tracks, the new master track is the lowest ranking active master track. For audio tracks, it is the highest ranking master track which is active and does not already have a patched source track. If key tracks are displayed, key tracks are included when selecting video tracks as targets of automatic track patching. See “Automatic track patching” (page 178) for an example of how automatic track patching works for video tracks.

h Clip track monitor buttons (audio) Shown according to the audio clip tracks. Clicking a button turns clip playback monitoring on and off for each output track. The on/off status of these buttons has no effect on the edited result. Even if a clip is placed in a sequence with the button in the off state, the track will still be included in the sequence.

Timeline Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

b Track panel indicator Indicates whether the source track panel shows tracks for clips in the Source Viewer or for clips in other tools. You can patch (map) tracks to master tracks from the clips loaded in the indicated tool (or from selected clips, in the case of Project Explorer). Src: Shows tracks for clips in the Source Viewer. Outer: Shows tracks for clips in another tool (the Logging Tool or Project Explorer, whichever is active). XPRI NS patches tracks automatically if the [Enable Automatic Track Patching] check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog is checked. When there is a source track patched to a track on the master track panel, and that master track is deactivated, the source track is patched automatically to a new master track. For video tracks, the new master track is the lowest ranking active master track. For audio tracks, it is the highest ranking master track which is active and does not already have a patched source track. If key tracks are displayed, key tracks are included when selecting video tracks as targets of automatic track patching.

f Master track panel Displays the track names of master sequences. Use this panel to select tracks as master track editing targets. You can also right click the master track panel to display a context menu with various track options.

177

Timeline Operations To reverse the selection state of multiple tracks You can reverse the selection state of multiple tracks by dragging the mouse with the right button held down to draw a rectangle from left to right over all of the tracks that you want to reverse. Selected tracks are deselected, and deselected tracks are selected.

• If you patch an active source track to an inactive master track, the master track is activated. • If you patch an inactive source track, the source track is activated. Automatic track patching You can check the [Enable Automatic Track Patching] check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog to enable automatic track patching. The following example shows how automatic patching allows patching even when the normal patch target is deactivated.

Notes

• Drawing a rectangle over a clip head or tail reverses the clip selection. • Drawing a rectangle over a cut point between two clips reverses the selection of both clips. • Drawing a rectangle over more than one cut point reverses the selection of only the clips between the cut points. • Drawing a rectangle from right to left opens the Trim Viewer Tool for the selected objects.

Video2 V1 1

Deactivate the Video1 master track panel. Video1, the target of V1, was deactivated, so automatic track patching is performed. Video2 is the lowest ranking of the active and nonpatched master video tracks. Therefore, V1 of the source track panel is patched to Video2.

To display external key tracks To display a specific external key track, select [External Key Track] from the context menu of a video track on the master track panel. The corresponding key track appears beneath the video track. To display the key tracks of all video tracks, select [Show External Key Track] from the Timeline View menu. To hide the key tracks of all video tracks, select it again. Even if a key track is hidden, you can tell that it exists because a white line (a key track indicator) appears on the corresponding video track. The color of the key track indicator changes to gray when a key track is on.

V1 2

Reactivate Video1. Automatic track patching is not performed.

V1

Video2 Video1

Patching tracks (mapping)

3

Deactivate Video2.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Video2, the target of V1, was deactivated, so automatic track patching is performed. Video1 is the lowest ranking of the active and nonpatched master video tracks. Therefore, V1 is patched to Video1.

Note

The following tracks can be specified as patch destinations. • Video tracks: video tracks • Audio tracks: audio tracks Patching by drag and drop can activate a master or source track, as follows.

178

Video2 Video1

See “Key Track Operations” (page 253) for more information about key track operations.

Assigning source tracks to master tracks is called patching. To patch a track, do one of the following. • Drag a source track to the master track to which you want to assign it. • Right click a source track and select the name of the track to assign to from the context menu.

Video1

Timeline Editor

Video2 V1

Video1

Notes

2

• Automatic track patching is not performed when all tracks are selected or deselected (Ctrl + A or Ctrl + Shift + A). • Automatic track patching is not performed when the [Lasso] command in the context menu of the master track panel has been used to invert track selections.

• Right click a selected track and select [Track Lock] from the context menu. • Press Ctrl + Shift + T. Notes

• If any of the tracks are already track locked, they remain track locked. • Tracks which are sync locked remain sync locked when they are track locked. They also remain sync locked when the track lock is unlocked. • Sync lock operation are not added to the Undo/Redo list.

To patch tracks from the Logging Tool or Project Explorer You can also patch tracks when you place clips Logging Tool or Project Explorer clips on the timeline. Proceed as follows.

1

To switch back to the source track panel Do one of the following. • Click the track panel indicator. • Click somewhere outside the track panel. • Activate something outside the Timeline Editor.

2

To unlock track-locked tracks Do one of the following. • Select [Un-lock Tracks] from the context menu. • Press Ctrl + Shift + U.

Start the Logging Tool or Project Explorer. (If the tool is already running, activate it. If it is Project Explorer, select a clip.) The source track panel changes into the outer source track panel, and the display on the track panel indicator changes to “Outer”. The track selection state changes to match the selection state in the Logging Tool or the track selection state of the clip selected in Project Explorer.

Patch tracks from the outer source track panel in the same way that you patch tracks from the source track panel.

Do one of the following.

To sync lock several tracks

1

Activate the tracks to sync lock.

2

Do one of the following. • Right click a selected track and select [Sync Lock] from the context menu. • Press Ctrl + T. Notes

• If any of the tracks are already sync locked, they remain sync locked. • Tracks which are track locked remain track locked when they are sync locked. • Sync lock operation are not added to the Undo/Redo list.

Notes

• Patch information is reflected in the outer source track panel when you operate the source track panel. • Patch information from the outer source track panel is not reflected in the source track panel.

To unlock sync-locked tracks Do one of the following. • Select [Un-lock Sync-locked Tracks] from the context menu. • Press Ctrl + U.

Sync lock and track lock To set track colors

To track lock several tracks

Setting sequence defaults

1

Activate the tracks to lock.

You can customize track colors. To change a track color, right click the track in the track panel and select the desired color from the [Color Selection] sub menu.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Sync lock is a function to keep tracks in sync when you trim and do Splice-In/Extract editing on the timeline. Track lock is a function to prevent tracks from being edited. You can sync lock and track lock several tracks at the same time.

You can save the configurations of the currently open sequence as a template for creating new sequences. You can also apply previously saved configurations to the currently open sequence. For more information about the configurations that are saved, see “Saved information” (page 180).

Timeline Editor

179

To save sequence information

1

Right click the track panel and select [Sequence Template] > [New Template]. The New Template dialog appears.

2

Select the configuration options, enter a name for the template, and click the OK button.

• Track Settings: track name, track type, number of tracks, color selection*, track lock, and sync lock • Timeline View*: Highlight, track height, track view, track text, audio data, and external key track • Audio Settings: audio automation enable, read/write*, track fader, audio bus routing* • Audio Keyframe: track fader level, track level copy* • Voice Over Settings: source track selections, source state, monitor timeline, stereo/mono

The configuration settings are saved.

To change the size of waveform display Note

You can also open the New Template dialog from the Sequence Template Settings dialog by clicking the New button. To apply saved configurations You can apply previously saved configurations to the currently open sequence and to subsequent sequences you create.

1

Right click the track panel, select [Sequence Template], and select a template from the sub menu.

Note

The twelve most recently used templates are listed in the sub menu. You can also apply template configurations from the Sequence Template Settings dialog by selecting a template and clicking the Apply button. To edit saved configurations You can edit the current configurations or other previously saved configurations.

1

Right click a track panel and select [Sequence Template] > [Sequence Template Settings]. The Sequence Template Settings dialog appears.

2

Select the name of the configurations in the Sequence Template Settings dialog, and click the Change button. The Change Template dialog appears.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

3

Modify the configurations as required, enter a name for the template, and click the OK button.

If you applied the configurations to a currently open sequence but want to restore the original configurations, use the Undo/Redo commands in the Timeline Editor main menu. However, a portion of the configurations will not be restored. For more information, see “Saved information” (page 180). Saved information Information marked with * cannot be restored with the Undo command.

180

Timeline Editor

To change the scale of the waveform displayed for the audio track, do one of the following. • Select [Show Audio Data] > [Waveform] from the Timeline View main menu, and select a zoom setting for the display from the subcommands. • Press Ctrl + R (zoom in) or Ctrl + r (zoom out) on the keyboard. If you want to change the scale for a specific clip on the timeline, display the context menu for that clip, and then select [Waveform Magnify].

Context Menu for Timeline Clips Cut Cuts one or more selected clips from the timeline and copies them to the clipboard. When Mark In and Mark Out points are set, cuts the Mark In-Mark Out section on the active tracks. You can paste them from the clipboard back to the timeline at a different location (cut & paste), in effect moving the clips. Copy Copies one or more selected clips from the timeline to the clipboard. When Mark In and Mark Out points are set, copies the Mark In-Mark Out section on the active tracks. You can paste them from the clipboard back to the timeline at a different location (copy & paste), in effect duplicating the clips. Delete Deletes one or more selected clips from the timeline. Paste Pastes on the timeline a clip that was copied to the clipboard. In Segment mode, does a Splice-In or Overwrite paste, depending on which mode is selected. In Composer mode, does a Splice-In paste. Disable/Enable Disables/Enables preview of the selected clips in the timeline. Disabled clips are shown in gray color in the timeline and the corresponding render status bars disappear.

The video and audio content, depending on the type of clip, of disabled clips is not previewed during play modes in the Source Viewer, Master Viewer, and various editing tool windows. A still picture for disabled video clips is displayed during stop mode for some functions, such as trimming. Note

The Disable/Enable context menu commands are not available for locked tracks or for clips selected in the Storyboard pane. Group/Ungroup Groups/Ungroups the selected clips on the timeline. Grouped clips can be edited, copied, and moved on the timeline as a single entity. Grouping clips that are themselves grouped cancels the initial grouping; grouping is single-level only. See “Grouping Tracks or Clips on Tracks” (page 275). Enabled only when clip(s) are selected. Paste Video Effect Pastes a video effect that was copied to the clipboard onto a clip or transition. Enabled only when a video clip is selected.

Source Viewer in Digitize mode. If the duration of the clip in the Source Viewer is longer than the playline to clip tail duration in the timeline, it also sets a Mark Out point. Match Master Clip Loads the original clip for the upper-most enabled track in the timeline into the Source Viewer, and moves the playline to the specified frame. Enabled only when a sub sequence, sub clip, composite clip or speed clip is selected on the timeline. Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool Starts Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool (page 198). Enabled only when a video clip is selected. Picture Adjust Starts Picture Adjust Tool (page 125). Enabled only when a still image import clip is selected. Timeline Clip Properties Opens the Timeline Clip Properties dialog. The properties displayed in the Clip Properties dialog for a composite clip are the properties of the first clip. FX Properties Opens the FX Properties Dialog (page 306).

Add Fade In/Out Effect Pastes a fade-in effect or fade-out effect onto a clip or transition. Enabled only when a video clip is selected.

Open Sub Sequence/Open as Sub Sequence When nesting mode is selected, opens a sub sequence or opens a collapse as a subsequence for editing. Enabled only when a sub sequence or collapse is selected.

Add Positioning Effect Pastes a positioning clip onto a clip or transition. Enabled only when a video clip is selected.

Replace Clip Creates a speed clip.

Add Customize Effect Pastes an effect assigned to FX1 to FX9 onto a clip or transition. Enabled only when a video clip is selected.

See “Creating Speed Clips” (page 270) for more information.

Cut to SV Cuts the selected part of a sequence on the timeline and loads it from the clipboard into the Source Viewer.

See “Trim Viewer” (page 212) for more information.

Copy to SV Copies the selected part of a sequence on the timeline and loads it from the clipboard into the Source Viewer.

Match Frame Displays in the Source Viewer the frame that is specified in Timeline Editor, moves the playline to that frame, and sets a Mark In point and Mark Out point. Match TC Searches the clip currently loaded in the Source Viewer for a frame with the same timecode as the timecode of a specified frame in the sequence, moves the playline to that frame, sets a Mark In point, and cues up the frame in the

Add Filler Adds filler in the gap between the two adjacent clips on the timeline. A filler is a region of black video that can be edited, copied, moved, trimmed, rendered, etc., like a regular clip. However, Match Frame, Match TC, and adding essence marks in the timeline are invalid. Effects can be applied to fillers, including transition effects between regular clips and fillers. Note

Transition effects between a clip and a gap in the timeline are removed if filler is added to the gap.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Rename Timeline Clip Name Renames timeline clips (names that can be renamed in Timeline Editor).

Trim Performs a slip trim or a slide trim.

FileEdit Launches external software for editing the selected clip.

Timeline Editor

181

Waveform Magnify Changes the scale of the waveform displayed for the audio track. Enabled only when an audio track is selected. See “To change the size of waveform display” (page 180) for more information.

Remove Audio Effect Deletes all audio effects on the selected clip. Enabled only when an audio track is selected. Paste Audio Effect Pastes an audio effect that was copied to the clipboard onto a clip or transition. Enabled only when an audio track is selected. Import XDCAM Clips Starts Import Timeline Clip Tool (page 525). Enabled only when an XDCAM clip is selected. Import Canon FX Clips Starts Import Timeline Clip Tool (page 525). Enabled only when a Canon FX clip is selected. Save As CG Template Saves the selected CG clip as a CG template. Enabled only when a CG clip is selected. Edit in Simple CG Editor Opens the selected CG clip in the Simple CG Editor. Enabled only when a CG clip is selected. Edit CG Opens CG Editor. Enabled only when a CG clip is selected. Deconstruct Expands a sub sequence onto separate tracks or expands a collapse into its component clips and tracks on the timeline. Enabled only when a sub sequence or collapse is selected.

Timeline Editor Command Button Area Chapter 6 Editing Tools

182

By default, the buttons in the Timeline Editor command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 192) from the main menu. Notes

• The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. • If the window is not wide enough to display all the tool buttons, scroll left and right through the buttons by rolling the mouse wheel while the cursor is on the tool

Timeline Editor

button area, or by clicking the arrow buttons that appear on the left and right ends of the tool button area. • The jog and shuttle controls on the control panel can also be used to control play. • The mouse wheel can be used for seek and shuttle functions when the mouse is moved over the position bar. Scroll the mouse wheel for the seek function, or click the wheel and scroll the wheel for the shuttle function.

Default command button configuration

Icon

Button name

Button function

Command Button Palette

Displays the command button palette. See “Command button palette” (page 186) for more information.

Match Frame

Loads into the Source Viewer the clip that corresponds to a specified frame in a sequence. The Source Viewer playline moves to the specified frame and an In point and Out point is set.

Focus

Expands the timeline scale to a pre-defined size. Click again to return the timeline scale to its original size.

Composer Mode

Selects the normal editing mode. In this mode, you can do the following. • Play the sequence by scrubbing the playline (dragging it back and forth on the position bar). • Move the playline to the clicked track. • Open sequences on the timeline by double clicking. • Start the Effect Editor by double clicking an effect icon. You can also switch from Segment mode to Composer mode by clicking the timeline timecode area. Note Clips cannot be selected in Composer mode. See “Video Effect Editor” (page 308) for more information.

Segment (Extract/Splice-in) Mode Segment (Lift/Overwrite) Mode

Selects an editing mode in which you can move and delete segments (groups of one or more clips) in the track area. In Extract/Splice-in mode, clips are extracted when you move or delete them, and spliced in when you add them. In Lift/Overwrite mode, clips are lifted when you move or delete them, and overwritten when you add them. In Segment mode you can do the following. • Select clips. You can select multiple clips by holding the Ctrl key down as you select. • Cut clips and copy them to the clipboard. • Copy clips to the clipboard without cutting them. • Move the playline to the desired position and paste clips that have been copied to the clipboard. • Delete clips. • Move the selected segment by drag and drop. • Move the selected segment one frame at a time by dragging and dropping with the Ctrl key held down. • Move the selected segment to a snap point (cut point, transition start point, transition end point) by dragging and dropping with the Alt key held down. • Delete segments. • Set In and Out points around the selected segment by clicking the Mark Clip button of the Master Viewer.

Trim Mode

Puts the timeline into Trim Viewer mode and displays the Trim Viewer in the Source and Master Viewers. In Trim Viewer mode you can trim transitions and carry out Slip and Slide trims on segments.

Rubber Band Mode

Puts the Timeline Editor into Rubber Band mode so that you can adjust track fader levels on the timeline.

Nesting

Pastes a sequence into another sequence in nesting mode.

Timeline Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Note Clips are copied to the clipboard when they are extracted from a sequence. Even if you close the sequence, put it in the Trash, and then empty the Trash, clips on the clipboard are not deleted.

183

Icon

Button function

Versioning

Pastes a sequence into another sequence in versioning mode.

Toggle Field/Frame

Switches between field display, frame 1, and frame 2 display.

Analog Scrub Mode

Switches between analog scrub and digital scrub. Turn the button on to select Analog Scrub mode.

Toggle Video/Key Monitor

Switches between the video monitor and the picture key.

Toggle Timeline View

Toggles the Timeline Editor between display of the timeline and display of the storyboard.

CG

Starts the CG Editor. Click the CG button to display a list of effects, and select an effect type. The effect is placed on the timeline and CG Editor starts. Alternatively, shift-click the CG button and select an effect type. The Add Title dialog appears where you can specify a title and track. The effect is then placed on the timeline and the CG Editor starts.

Advanced Color Corrector

Displays the Advanced Color Corrector.

FX Explorer

Starts the FX Explorer (see page 296). When one or more FX Explorer windows are open, clicking this button closes all the FX Explorer windows.

Audio Mixer

Starts the Audio Mixer (see page 434).

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool

Starts the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool (see page 447).

Audio Group Bus Fader

Starts the Audio Group Bus Fader (see page 450).

Voice Over Tool

Starts the Audio Voice Over Tool (see page 457).

XDCAM Import Timeline Clips

Starts the Import Timeline Clip Tool to re-import XDCAM clips on the timeline.

Timecode Window

Activates the Timecode window. If the Timecode window is not open, opens it.

Add Key Frame

Adds audio keyframes to the timeline when audio automation is enabled.

Freeze Frame

Replaces the range in a video clip from the playline position to the last frame with a still image (a 0% speed clip). Click the button to replace the range with a freeze frame image. Shift-click the button to display the Freeze Frame dialog to change the duration, edit mode, or the bin in which to save the freeze frame clip. The bin selection is retained until the project changes, user changes, or application is restarted. Right-click the button to display the context menu and select the freeze frame creation method.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Button name

184

Timeline Editor

Icon

Button name

Button function

Add Dissolve

Opens the Transition Options dialog. A dissolve (or cross fade for audio) is set in the active track at the transition closest to the playline, according to the current parameters in the Transition Options dialog. Alternatively, a dissolve is set in the range specified by In and Out markers. If you click this button after entering a timecode value with the numeric keypad, the Transition Options dialog opens with the timecode value as the duration. You can set the placement default for transition effects in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. If you clear the [Enable Transition Options] dialog check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog, a dissolve is added automatically, without opening the Transition Options dialog. Note You can change the parameters of an existing dissolve by right clicking it, selecting [Options] from the context menu, and editing the parameters in the Transition Options dialog. See “Transition Options Dialog” (page 302) and “Edit tab” (page 610) for more information.

Add Edit

Adds a cut point at the clip on the active tracks at the playline position. When cut points are added during play (forward, reverse, fast, slow, shuttle, jog, etc.), the cut points are indicated by the slice numbers on the timeline only. Play does not stop when adding cut points. The display of cut points in clips on the active tracks is not refreshed until play is stopped. Also, any effects added to clips that are cut during play are placed on the rightmost section only. Cuts added during play are grouped into a single undo/redo action. The default setting is to continue playback when adding cut points. You can change this setting so that playback stops when adding cut points in order to refresh tracks immediately. This is especially useful when using the K keyboard button when adding cut points. To change the default setting, modify the following registry. HKEY_CURRENT_USER¥Software¥Sony¥1 Entry name: 39 (DWORD Value) Value = 0 (add edit will not stop playing during playback). Default. Value = 1 (add edit will stop playing during playback)

Still Picture

Digitizes a still picture and creates a clip. Still clips are TGA-format clips with default name NewPicture_New Sequence_nnn, where nnn increments.

Grouping

When inactive, temporarily releases the grouping of clips on the timeline, allowing the individual clips to be edited independently. When active, the grouping of clips is restored.

Collapse

Collapses the active, unlocked tracks in the timeline into a single collapse clip. Video and audio tracks are collapsed separately.

Waveform Magnify

Zooms in the waveform display.

Waveform Minify

Zooms out the waveform display.

Copy to SV

Copies to the Source Viewer.

1

Digital scrub audio is not output when the Caps Lock key is on.

Click the Analog Scrub Mode button to turn it off. The scrub mode changes to digital scrub.

2

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

To turn audio on and off while scrubbing

Turn the Caps Lock key on or off to turn audio output on or off. Digital scrub audio is output when the Caps Lock key is off.

Timeline Editor

185

Command button palette The Timeline Editor command button palette contains less frequently used command buttons. By default, the buttons in the command button palette are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button palette by selecting Customize (page 192) from the main menu.

Icon

Default command button configuration

Button name

Button function

Extend

Executes a dual trim up to the specified Mark In point or Mark Out point. See “Using the extend function” (page 277) for more information.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

186

Transition Options

Opens the Transition Options dialog.

Toggle F1/F2

Switches between field 1 display, field 2 display, and off.

Delete Effect

Deletes the effect at the playline position on the active tracks. Or deletes the effect in the range specified by setting In and Out points.

Extract

Deletes a section specified by In and Out points on the active tracks, and shifts the following clips on the timeline to the left to fill the resulting gap. The duration of the tracks becomes shorter.

Lift

Deletes a section specified by In and Out points on the active tracks, and fills the resulting gap with filler (black on the video track and silence on audio tracks). The duration of the tracks does not change.

Find Clip

Searches the open sequence. By clicking this button with the Alt key held down, you can find the clip at the playline position on the uppermost active track.

Track Level Copy

When this button is on, a clip’s rubber band is also moved, deleted, copied, or trimmed whenever the clip itself is moved, deleted, copied, or trimmed.

Render To Bin

Performs a render to bin.

Set Essence Mark

Sets an essence mark. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to set the essence mark, and then click this button to set it. The essence mark is set at the playline position on all selected clips. When no clip is selected or all tracks are disabled, the essence mark is set at the playline position on the timeline.

Delete Mark

Deletes a mark. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to delete the mark, and then click this button to delete it. The essence marks at the playline position on all selected clips are deleted. When no clip is selected or all tracks are disabled, the essence mark at the playline position on the timeline is deleted.

Mark List

Opens the Marker List dialog, which displays all of the marks in the current sequence. When you click a mark in the list, or select one with the up and down arrow keys, the playline moves to the timecode of that mark. When you double click a mark or select it and press the Enter key, the playline moves to that mark and the window focus moves to the Timeline Editor.

Timeline Editor

Icon

Button name

Button function

Extract from Clip Top to Current Playline

Deletes the section between the start point of the clip on which the playline is positioned and the current playline position on the active tracks, and shifts the following clips on the timeline to fill the resulting gap. The duration of the tracks becomes shorter. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be extracted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for extraction.

Extract from Current Playline Deletes the section between the current playline position on the active tracks and the to Clip End end point of the clip on which the playline is positioned, and shifts the following clips on the timeline to fill the resulting gap. The duration of the tracks becomes shorter. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be extracted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for extraction. Lift from Clip Top to Current Playline

Deletes the section between the start point of the clip on which the playline is positioned and the current playline position on the active tracks, and fills the resulting gap with filler (black on the video track and silence on audio tracks). The duration of the tracks does not change. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be lifted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for lifting.

Lift from Current Playline to Clip End

Deletes the section between the current playline position on the active tracks and the end point of the clip on which the playline is positioned, and fills the resulting gap with filler (black on the video track and silence on audio tracks). The duration of the tracks does not change. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be lifted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for lifting.

Proxy Only Detection

Searches the timeline for sections that contain only proxy (low resolution) media.

Media Offline Detection

Searches the timeline for media offline clips.

Flash Frame Detection

Searches the timeline for clips and filler with durations less than or equal to a specified duration.

Duplicate Detection

Searches the timeline for clips and frames (parts of clips that are used twice or more (duplicates).

Reverse Match List

Executes a reverse match search on the timeline for any frame in a clip loaded into the Source Viewer. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Timeline Editor

187

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

188

Button name

Icon

Button name

Icon

Button name

Play

Mark Clip

Delete Effect

Rewind

Set Duration

Open FX

Fast Forward

Set Index Picture

Transition Options

Rewind 1.5

Mark List

Import Image

Forward 1.5

Set Essence Mark

Auto White Balance

Stop

Delete Mark

Jog

Step Backward

Splice-In

Shuttle

Step Forward

Overwrite

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Step Backward 10 Frames

Replace

...

CG1 to CG8

Step Forward 10 Frames

Overwrite Mode Record

...

V1 to V8

Play In to Out

Splice-In Mode Record

...

A1 to A12

Play to Out

Track Level Copy

...

K1 to K8

Play Reverse

Edit Mode

CTL Reset

Play Forward

Save

TC/CTL

Still

Extract

Speed Control

Go to Start

Lift

Change speed from clip head to PL

Go to End

Extract from Clip Top to Current Playline

Change speed from clip tail to PL

Go to Previous Event

Extract from Current Playline to Clip End

Match TC

Go to Next Event

Lift from Clip Top to Current Playline

Solo Reset

Go to In

Lift from Current Playline to Clip End

Scrub (w/Fx) Mode

Go to Out

Collapse

Toggle F1/F2

Go to Previous Marker

Copy to Clipboard

Duplicate Detection

Timeline Editor

Icon

Button name

Icon

Button name

Icon

Button name

Go to Next Marker

Trim 1 Frame Back

List Reverse Match

Previous Clip

Trim 1 Frame Forward

Flash Frame Detection

Next Clip

Trim 10 Frames Back

Proxy Only Detection

Previous FX

Trim 10 Frames Forward

Media Offline Detection

Next FX

Extend

FG Monitor

All Stop

Cut to SV

Key Monitor

Pre-roll Play (3 Sec)

Paste from SV

Audio Automation Enable

Pre-roll Play (5 Sec)

Render to Bin

Render to Server

Pre-roll Review (3 Sec)

Render All

Real-time Judgement

Pre-roll Review (5 Sec)

Render In-Out

Snap

Pre-roll Review from Transition (3 Sec)

Render Whole (Both)

Gang

Pre-roll Review from Transition (5 Sec)

Render Whole (Video)

Help

Mark In

Render Whole (Audio)

Find Clip

Mark Out

Add Dissolve

Undo

Clear In Mark

Head Dissolve

Redo

Clear Out Mark

Tail Dissolve

Prompter

Clear Both Marks

...

FX1 to FX9

Timeline Editor Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Timeline Editor to display the Timeline Editor main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Save Saves the current sequence.

Save As... Saves the current sequence in the same bin under another name. Enter a name (up to 256 characters) and click OK. Undo/Redo Displays subcommands for undoing and redoing operations. The subcommands are: Undo: Undoes a timeline operation. You can undo up to 64 operations, in order from the most recent. Redo: Redoes a timeline operation that was undone with the [Undo] command. You can redo up to 64 operations. Undo List: Displays a list of up to 64 of the most recent timeline operations.

Timeline Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Almost all of the buttons that can be placed in the Master Viewer command button area can also be placed in the Timeline Editor command button area.

189

You can select an operation from the undo list to return the timeline to the state it was in before that operation. When an operation is undone, a separator appears in the undo list. The only operations that can be undone are the ones above the separator. Clear Undo List: Clears the undo list. Cut Cuts one or more selected clips from the timeline and copies them to the clipboard. When Mark In and Mark Out points are set, cuts the Mark In-Mark Out section on the active tracks. You can paste them from the clipboard back to the timeline at a different location (cut & paste), in effect moving the clips. Copy Copies one or more selected clips from the timeline to the clipboard. When Mark In and Mark Out points are set, copies the Mark In-Mark Out section on the active tracks. You can paste them from the clipboard back to the timeline at a different location (copy & paste), in effect duplicating the clips. Paste Pastes on the timeline a clip that was copied to the clipboard. In Segment mode, does a Splice-In or Overwrite paste, depending on which mode is selected. In Composer mode, does a Splice-In paste. Cut Effect Cuts one or more effects applied to clips and transitions and copies them to the clipboard. This allows you to move effects by cut and paste. Copy Effect Copies effects applied to clips and transitions to the clipboard. This allows you to copy effects by copy and paste. Paste Effect Pastes an effect or effects from the clipboard to a clip or transition.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

190

Cut to SV Cuts the selected part of a sequence on the timeline and loads it from the clipboard into the Source Viewer. You can also get the same effect by right clicking a sequence and selecting [Cut to SV] from the context menu. Copy to SV Copies the selected part of a sequence on the timeline and loads it from the clipboard into the Source Viewer. You can also get the same effect by right clicking a sequence and selecting [Copy to SV] from the context menu.

Timeline Editor

Paste from SV Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the timeline, after a copy operation in the Source Viewer. The clipboard can contain any number of tracks or clips. See “Sequence Cut, Copy, and Paste Operations” (page 255) for more information about how to cut, copy, and paste sequences.

Delete Deletes one or more selected clips from the timeline. The deleted clips are not copied to the clipboard. This command is available in Segment mode. Duplicate Duplicates the currently open sequence and rendered media files and automatically opens the duplicate. The name of the duplicated sequence is the name of the source sequence plus “_Duplicate_nnn” (nnn: 001, 002, ...). Note

You can also use the following methods to duplicate sequences. • With the Timeline Editor active, press Ctrl + D. • Duplicate the sequence in Project Explorer. Select Track Selects and deselects tracks. This command has the following subcommands. Select All Tracks: Selects all of the tracks on the timeline. Deselect All Tracks: Deselects all of the tracks on the timeline. Remove Match Frame Edits Deletes cut points added by the Add Edit command button. To delete match frame edits, make a selection that includes the cut points you want to delete (by specifying tracks, Mark In points and Mark Out points), and then select this command. Create Clip Composite Opens the Clip Composite dialog to create a single clip composed from the content of the selected clips on the timeline. See “Clip Composite Dialog” (page 199) for more information.

Timeline Find Searches the timeline. This command has the following subcommands. Dupe Detection: Detects duplicates. Searches the timeline for clips and frames (parts of clips) which are used twice or more. Flash Frame Detection: Searches the timeline for clips and filler with durations shorter than a specified value.

Media Offline Detection: Determines media offline status. Proxy Only Detection: Searches the timeline for sections that contain only proxy (low resolution) media. Search Within this sequence: Searches for clips inside sequences on the timeline. See page 289 for more information.

Phantom Marks Selects the phantom mark display mode. This command has the following subcommands. None: Does not display phantom marks. Viewer: Displays phantom marks in the Source Viewer and Master Viewer. Viewer, Timeline: Displays phantom marks in the Source Viewer, Master Viewer and on the timeline. Note

When clips are added in Overwrite or Splice-In mode, the phantom marks show the position of the addition (Mark In point, Mark Out point).

Audio Options Displays subcommands related to audio options. The subcommands are: Audio Solo Mode: Selects the solo mode in the Audio Mixer (page 434). This commands has the following subcommands.

New Track Adds a new track to the timeline. This command has the following subcommands. Graph Track: Adds a new CG track above the uppermost CG track (up to a total of 20 tracks). Video Track: Adds a new video track between the CG tracks and audio tracks (up to a total of 48 tracks). Audio Track: Adds a new audio track below the lowermost audio track (up to a total of 48 tracks). Astream Track: Adds a new audio track below the lowermost audio astream track (up to a total of 48 tracks). Timeline Settings... Opens the Timeline Settings dialog. See “Timeline Settings Dialog” (page 195) for more information.

Sequence Settings... Opens the Sequence Settings dialog. See “Sequence Settings Dialog” (page 195) for more information.

Render Renders all or part of the current sequence. This command has the following subcommands. Render Whole: Renders an entire section from first normal clip to the last normal clip, including sections that do no need to be rendered (Empty Filler and Blank cannot be considered a normal clip, FX Filler can be considered a normal clip). This command creates one media file. The following subcommands select how rendering is done when there are both video and audio clips in the sequence to be rendered. • Both: Both video and audio are rendered, and two media files are created, one for each. • Video: Video clips only are rendered, and one media file is created. • Audio: Audio clips only are rendered, and one media file is created.

Timeline Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Marker(s) Displays subcommands related to mark settings for timeline clips. The subcommands are: Add Essence Mark: Sets an essence mark at the specified time on all selected clips. If no clip is selected, sets an essence mark on the timeline. You can right-click an essence mark in the timeline to apply a color marker, add a comment, or delete the essence mark. Add Comment: Opens the Essence Mark Comment dialog so that you can enter a comment about an essence mark. If several clips are selected, opens the Essence Mark Comment dialog for the essence mark on the uppermost selected clip. If no clip is selected, opens the Essence Mark Comment dialog for the essence mark on the timeline. Delete Marker: Deletes the mark at the playline position from all selected clips. If no clip is selected, deletes the essence mark from the timeline. Marker List...: Opens the Marker List dialog, which displays all of the marks in the current sequence. When you click a mark in the list, or select it with the up and down arrow keys, the playline moves to the timecode of the selected mark. When you double click a mark or select it and press the Enter key, the playline moves to that mark and the window focus moves to the Timeline Editor. You can also edit marks by using commands from the context menu.

• Latch: The solo function can be turned on for up to 8 tracks. • Swing: The solo function can be turned on for one track only. The solo function is turned off for all other tracks. Audio Solo Reset: Turns the solo function off for all tracks. Audio Automation: Enables and disables the audio rubber band functions. This command has the following subcommands. • Read All: Toggles the audio rubber band Read function on and off. • Write All: Toggles the audio rubber band Write function on and off.

191

Notes

• If the sequence contains only video clips, the [Both] and [Audio] subcommands are disabled. If the sequence contains only audio clips, the [Both] and [Video] subcommands are disabled. • Use the Render Whole command only when you want to add a sequence to another sequence in Nesting mode. Render All: Over the range from the sequence start point to the sequence end point, renders only those sections that cannot be played in real time. A media file is created for each rendered range. Note

Use [Render All] when you want to record the sequence to tape. Render In-Out: Over the range from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point, renders only those sections that cannot be played in real time. If there is no Mark In point or Mark Out point, renders around the playline position. Note

The Render In-Out button has the same effect. You can add it to the Master Viewer command button area by customization.

Note

It is recommended that you execute the [Temporary Media Files] subcommand when you finish editing. You can conserve disk space by deleting temporary media files. Tools Starts the various tools. This command has the following subcommands. Audio Mixer: Starts the Audio Mixer (see page 434). Audio Routing Tool: Starts the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool (see page 447). Audio Group Bus Fader Tool: Starts the Audio Group Bus Fader (see page 450). Audio Output Tool: Starts the Audio Output Tool (see page 454). Voice Over Tool: Starts the Audio Voice Over Tool (see page 457). Prompter: Starts the Prompter (see page 462). FX Explorer: Starts FX Explorer (page 296). This button opens a new FX Explorer window each time it is clicked. Safe Color Settings: Opens the Safe Color Settings dialog.

Render At Playline: In the clip at the playline position, renders only those sections that cannot be played in real time. Render To Bin: Opens the Render To Bin dialog. Select this command after setting Mark In and Mark Out points in the timeline sequence.

Timecode Window: Opens the Timecode Window (see page 229).

See “Render To Bin Dialog” (page 224) for more information.

Timeline Editor Properties... Opens the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Render and FTP upload to Sonaps Renders the sequence selected on the timeline, and transfers it to the Sonaps Material List via FTP.

See “Timeline Editor Properties Dialog” (page 607) for more information.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

See “To render a timeline sequence and transfer it from Project Explorer to the Material List via FTP” (page 693) for more information.

FTP Management Displays the status for rendering and transferring of clips and sequences to the Material List. See “To manage FTP transfer tasks” (page 693) for more information.

Delete Media files Deletes media files. This command has the following subcommands.

192

Media File (Current Used): Delete current used media files existing on the opened sequence. Temporary Media Files: Deletes temporary media files which are not directly related to the current editing results on the timeline.

Timeline Editor

Note

This option is disabled in the current version of XPRI NS.

Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Button...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel.

Open Source Viewer Opens the Source Viewer (see page 144). Open Master Viewer Opens the Master Viewer (see page 160). Open Storyboard/Close Storyboard Opens or closes the storyboard at the top of the timeline. See “Storyboard” (page 174) for more information.

Help... Displays help about the Timeline Editor. Minimize Minimizes the Timeline Editor and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Maximize/Restore Maximizes the Timeline Editor window, or restores it to its original size. Close Closes the Timeline Editor window.

Timeline View Main Menu Click the Timeline View Menu button in the Timeline Editor to display the Timeline View main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Clear Timeline Deletes all clips in the sequence from the timeline. Zoom In Zooms in by increasing the scale on the timeline. Zoom Out Zooms out by decreasing the scale on the timeline. Show Entire Sequence Shows the entire timeline range.

Track Height Adjusts the height of all tracks. This command has the following subcommands. 23, 26, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100: Adjust the track height to the value (unit: pixels) selected from the list. Custom: Adjusts the track height to a value entered from the keyboard (setting range: 23 to 500, unit: pixels). Enlarge Track Height Increases the height to 1.5 times the current height. Reduce Track Height Decreases the height to 2/3 the current height. Show Track View Specifies the view items to show for clips on all tracks. This command has the following subcommands. None: No view items are shown. Head: Thumbnail pictures of clip head frames are shown over the clip. Tail: Thumbnail pictures of clip tail frames are shown over the clip. Index: Index pictures are shown. Marker(s): Essence marks are shown at the corresponding positions in the clip. Clip Status: An indicator is shown at the left side of the first line of text display to indicate the status of the clip (not digitized, or digitized). ResQuality: An indicator is shown in the first line of text display to indicate whether the clip has full-resolution media or proxy media. If the clip has full-resolution media, the front indicator lights green. If the clip has proxy media, the back indicator lights red. If the clip has neither type of media, both indicators appear gray. Locations for which full-resolution media exist are indicated by a blue line under the clip, and locations for which only proxy media exist are indicated by a red line. When only a portion of the XDCAM clip contains full-resolution media, only the right half of the front indicator lights green. Sync Break: Sync break sections created by editing are shown. This command has the following subcommands. Both: Sync break lines on both video and audio tracks. Video: Sync break lines on video tracks only. Audio: Sync break lines on audio tracks only. Effect Icon: Effect icon marks are shown over clips and transitions.

Timeline Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Highlight Highlights the selected range. This command has the following subcommands. In-Out: When the master track panel is active, highlights clips and filler between Mark In and Mark Out points and the corresponding sections on the position bar. When the master track panel is not active, highlights filler between Mark In and Mark Out points and the corresponding sections on the position bar. Phantom Marks: When the master track panel is active, highlights clips and filler between phantom marks, and the corresponding sections on the position bar. When the master track panel is not active, highlights filler between phantom marks and the corresponding sections on the position bar. Off: Highlighting is turned off.

Note

When clips are added in Overwrite and Splice-In mode, the phantom marks show the position of the addition (Mark In and Mark Out points).

193

Notes

• Some items may not be shown if the track height is too low. • Head frames, tail frames, and index pictures cannot be displayed at the same time. • Index pictures cannot be displayed when head frames or tail frames are displayed. • Head frames and tail frames cannot be displayed when index pictures are displayed. Hide Track View Specifies the view items to hide for clips on all tracks. This command has the following subcommands. All: Hides all view items. Head: Hides the thumbnail pictures of clip head frames. Tail: Hides the thumbnail pictures of clip tail frames. Index: Hides index pictures. Essence Marks: Hides essence marks. Clip Status: Hides the indicator that indicates the status of a clip (not digitized or digitized). ResQuality: Hides the indicator that indicates whether a clip contains full-resolution media or proxy media. Sync Break: Hides the lines that indicate sync breaks between tracks composing a clip. This command has the following subcommands. Both: Hides sync break lines on both video and audio tracks. Video: Hides sync break lines on video tracks only. Audio: Hides sync break lines on audio tracks only. Effect Icon: Hides effect icon marks. Show Track Text Specifies the text items to show for clips on all tracks. This command has the following subcommands. None: No text items are shown. Clip Name: The name of the clip to which the clip refers (the name in Project Explorer) is shown on the clip. This name also changes when the name in the Project Explorer changes. Timeline Clip Name: The clip name which can be changed in the Timeline Editor is shown on the clip. The default name is “ClipName”. You can change the name by right clicking the clip on the timeline and selecting [Rename Timeline Clip] from the context menu. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

194

Note

A timeline clip has a timeline clip name in addition to a clip name. Both names can be shown on the clip at the same time. Duration: The clip duration is shown on the clip as timecode. Reel: For reel clips, the name of the reel containing the clip source material is shown on the clip. Comment: Clip comments, as registered in the Memo window, are shown on the clip.

Timeline Editor

Mark In/Out: The timecode of the clip Mark In point and Mark Out points is shown on the clip. Notes

• Some items may not be shown if the track height is too low. • When text items overlap with view items, the text items are shown over the view items. Hide Track Text Specifies the text items to hide for clips on all tracks. This command has the following subcommands. All: Hides all text items. Clip Name: Hides the name of the clip to which the clip refers (the name in Project Explorer). Timeline Clip Name: Hides the clip names that can be changed in Timeline Editor. Duration: Hides the clip duration. Reel: Hides the name of the reel containing source material for reel clips. Comment: Hides clip comments that have been registered in the Memo window. Mark In/Out: Hides Mark In and Mark Out points. Show Audio Data Specifies the audio data to show for clips on all tracks. This command has the following subcommands. Waveform: Shows audio signal waveforms. You can select from the following display scales. Normal(x1): Normal zoom Magnify(x10): Zoom x10 Magnify(x100): Zoom x100 Note

Waveforms are not displayed for sequences or sub sequences pasted in nesting mode. If you need to view a waveform, create a clip in the Render To Bin dialog, for example. Track Fader Level: Shows track fader levels. Clip Level: Shows the clip level. Hide Audio Data Specifies the audio data to hide for clips on all tracks. This command has the following subcommands. Waveform: Hides the waveforms for audio signals. Track Fader Level: Hides track fader levels. Clip Level: Hides the clip level. Show External Key Track Shows all external key tracks. Hide External Key Track Hides all external key tracks.

Timeline Settings Dialog

Sequence Settings Dialog

Overview

Overview

The Timeline Settings dialog allows you to set the starting timecode and default duration of the open sequence.

The Sequence Settings dialog allows you to check the finishing quality of final output video and to specify the method used to convert between different frames sizes.

To open the Timeline Settings dialog Click the Timeline Editor Menu button and select [Timeline Settings...].

Names and Functions of Parts

To open the Sequence Settings dialog Click the Timeline Editor Menu button and select [Sequence Settings...]. See “Mixing Clips of Different Frame Sizes” (page 262) for more information about frame size conversion.

5 Cancel button 4 OK button 3 Timeline Duration box 2 Frame mode selection buttons 1 Start Timecode box

a Start Timecode box Specifies the starting timecode of the open sequence. b Frame mode selection buttons If the video format is NTSC, select DF (drop-frame) or NDF (non-drop frame). c Timeline Duration box Specifies the default duration of the open sequence. Note Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Changes to the value in the Timeline Duration box cannot be undone. To restore the original value, enter it again. d OK button Confirms the settings and closes the dialog. e Cancel button Cancels the settings and closes the dialog.

Timeline Editor

195

Names and Functions of Parts 1 [Delete Rendered results] check box 2 Compression list box

8 Cancel button 7 OK button 6 [Apply zoom only when converting from formatted frame size] check box 5 Down convert zoom option buttons 4 [Apply zoom only when converting from formatted frame size] check box 3 Up convert zoom option buttons

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

196

Finishing Quality section

Frame Size Conversion section

a [Delete Rendered results] check box All rendering results are deleted when this is checked. By default this check box is cleared.

c Up convert zoom option buttons Specify the method used to convert clip frame sizes for HD sequences (see page 262). These settings are disabled for SD sequences. 100%: The frame size is unchanged. Fit to height: The height is enlarged to the frame height of the HD project. Fit to width: The width is enlarged to the frame width of the HD project. Specify: The width and height are enlarged to the ratio specified in the edit box.

b Compression list box Displays the finishing quality (compression ratio) of the current project. Depending on the project type, the following values can be set. SD projects: Uncompress, IMX 30, IMX 40, IMX 50, DVCAM 25 HD projects: MPEG HD 50, MPEG HD 35, MPEG HD 25, MPEG HD 18, HDV Rendering results are created using the compression ratio shown here.

Timeline Editor

d [Apply zoom only when converting from formatted frame size] check box When this is checked, conversion to the specified zoom ratio is performed only for clips with the default frame size (SD frame size). In this version this check box is always checked.

e Down convert zoom option buttons Specify the method used to convert clip frame sizes for SD sequences (see page 262). These settings are disabled for HD sequences. 100%: The frame size is unchanged. Fit to height: The height is reduced to the frame height of the SD project. Fit to width: The width is reduced to the frame width of the SD project. Specify: The width and height are reduced to the ratio specified in the edit box. f [Apply zoom only when converting from formatted frame size] check box When this is checked, conversion to the specified zoom ratio is performed only for clips with the default frame size (HD frame size). In this version this check box is always checked. g OK button Enables the settings and closes the dialog. h Cancel button Cancels the settings and closes the dialog.

Sequence Template Settings Dialog Overview The Sequence Template Settings dialog allows you to save parameter configurations as a template and collectively apply these configurations to the currently open sequence or use them when creating a new sequence.

Note

You cannot use sequence templates from other users.

To Open the Sequence Template Settings Dialog Right click a track in Timeline Editor, and select [Sequence Template] > [Sequence Template Settings] from the context menu.

a Menu button

c New button d Change button e Delete button f Apply button b Template Name

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Sequence Template Settings dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Sequence Template Settings dialog. Close: Cancels settings and closes the Sequence Template Settings dialog. b Template Name Displays the name of the template currently in use. Select the template to apply to the sequence from the list of saved template names that appear below. c New button Opens the New Template dialog to create a new template. Enter a name for the new template before clicking this button. d Change button Opens the Change Template dialog for the selected template to edit the template configuration settings. e Delete button Deletes the selected template. If you delete a template that is currently in use, the Default Template will be applied automatically. The Default Template cannot be deleted. f Apply button Applies the template currently selected in the template name list. A confirmation dialog appears when you click the Apply button. OK: Applies the template to the currently open sequence. In addition, this template is applied the next time you create a new sequence. Cancel: Does not apply the template to the currently open sequence. This template is applied the next time you create a new sequence. If you applied the configurations to a currently open sequence but want to restore the original configurations, use the Undo/Redo commands in the Timeline Editor main menu.

Timeline Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Parameters that can be saved in templates are as follows. • Track Settings: track name, track type, number of tracks, color selection, track lock, and sync lock • Timeline View: Highlight, track height, track view, track text, audio data, and external key track • Audio Settings: audio automation enable, read/write, track fader, audio bus routing • Audio Keyframe: track fader level, track level copy • Voice Over Settings: source track selections, source state, monitor timeline, stereo/mono

Names and Functions of Parts

197

When you right-click a template name in the list, a context menu allowing the following functions appears. Save As: Save the template under a different name. Rename: Rename the template. Import Template: Import a template file. Export Template: Exports the selected template as a template file.

Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool Overview The Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool allows you to specify clips on the timeline and convert the frame size. Note

The aspect ratio mismatch indicator is displayed on clips placed on the timeline when there is an aspect ratio mismatch between the clip and the sequence on the timeline. For example, when the clip has a 4:3 aspect ratio and the sequence on the timeline has a 16:9 aspect ratio.

To Start the Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool Select [Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool] from the context menu of the clip on the timeline. Notes

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

198

• Sub sequences pasted in nesting mode are not compatible with this tool. If you need to convert the frame size, create a clip in the Render To Bin dialog before using this tool. You can use the P in P effect when decreasing the size. • The Zoom function is enabled in the following cases. • When pasting an SD clip onto an SD 16:9 sequence, HD (1080) sequence, or HD (1920) sequence. • When pasting an SD 16:9 clip onto an SD sequence, HD (1080) sequence, or HD (1920) sequence. • When pasting an HD (1080) clip onto an SD clip or sequence, or SD 16:9 sequence. • When pasting an HD (1920) clip onto an SD clip or sequence, or SD 16:9 sequence.

Timeline Editor

Names and Functions of Parts b Previous video clip button a Clip Name

c Next video clip button

d Zoom

e Position f [Apply to the same clips of

current TL] check box

h Cancel button g OK button

a Clip Name Displays the name of the clip selected on the timeline. b Previous video clip button Selects the clip that immediately precedes the currently selected clip on the same track. If you modified settings for the currently selected clip and then press this button, a confirmation dialog appears. Click Yes to save your setting modifications. c Next video clip button Selects the clip that immediately follows the currently selected clip on the same track. If you modified settings for the currently selected clip and then press this button, a confirmation dialog appears. Click Yes to save your setting modifications.

e Position Specifies the position of the central point of the image in relation to the original image. CenterX (horizontal), CenterY (vertical): Specify the central point in 0.001 increments based on the central

f [Apply to the same clips of current TL] check box When this is checked and the same import clip exists multiple times on the timeline, the adjustments are applied to all the clips. g OK button Applies the settings, and closes the Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool. h Cancel button Cancels the settings, and closes the Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool.

Clip Composite Dialog Overview The Clip Composite dialog allows you to set the starting timecode and default display settings for clips composed from the content of multiple selected clips.

To open the Clip Composite dialog Select multiple clips in the timeline and click [Create Clip Composite] from the Timeline Editor main menu. The Clip Composite dialog can also be opened from Project Explorer. Select multiple clips in the List View and select [Create Clip Composite] from the main menu or clip context menu.

Timeline Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

d Zoom Select the display size for the clip 100%: Displays the clip in its original image size. Fit to height: Enlarges or reduces the display size to match the frame height configured for the project. Fit to width: Enlarges or reduces the display size to match the frame width configured for the project. Specify: Enlarges or reduces the display size to the specified size.

point and right edge of the original image, 0.5 and 1 respectively.

199

Names and Functions of Parts c Start Timecode b Clip Range a Composite Name

f Load to SV check box When this is checked, loads the composite clip into the Source Viewer upon completion. g Set Essence Mark on clip event When this is checked, automatically adds essence marks in the composite clip at points corresponding to the edit points between sub clips. h Use FTC to fill original TC When this is checked, displays FTC for the durations of component sub clips that have no LTC timecode.

h Use FTC to fill original TC g Set Essence Mark on clip event f Load to SV e Low Resolution d High Resolution

a Composite Name Specifies the name of the composite clip. The default setting is Composite_nnn, where nnn (001, 002, ...) increments with each new composite clip. b Clip Range Specifies the portion of the selected clips to include when composing the composite clip. Head to Tail: Uses the head-to-tail range of the sub clips. This option is not available when creating a composite clip from Timeline Editor. It is available only when creating a composite clip from Project Explorer. Source In to Out: Use the In-to-Out range of the sub clips. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

c Start Timecode box Specifies the starting timecode of the composite clip. d High Resolution check box When this is checked, includes High-resolution clips in the composite clip. It is automatically selected if one of the sub clips has high-resolution content. e Low Resolution check box When this is checked, includes Low-resolution clips in the composite clip. It is automatically selected if one of the sub clips has low-resolution content.

200

Timeline Editor

Multiple Camera Editor Overview The Multiple Camera Editor allows you to create sequences and edit sequences for an event from multiple camera sources and apply the result to the timeline or save the result as Multi Camera sequence. This function is useful for sports events, magazine programs, and similar events.

To Start the Multiple Camera Editor Do one of the following: • Select multiple camera materials in Project Explorer, right-click the materials and select [Multi Camera Editor] from the context menu. • Double click a Multi Camera sequence in Project Explorer. • Double click a Multi Camera sequence in Timeline Editor. • Select a Multi Camera sequence in a bin and press the Enter key.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Multiple Camera Editor

201

Names and Functions of Parts a Multiple Camera Editor menu button b Left Monitor pane

d Command button area

a Multiple Camera Editor menu button Displays the main menu of the Multiple Camera Editor. See “Multiple Camera Editor Main Menu” (page 208) for more information about the main menu.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

202

b Left monitor pane Displays multiple camera angles that can be scrubbed and monitored synchronously. The Left monitor pane can be subdivided into 1x2, 2x2, or 3x3 subwindows to display 2, 4, or 9 camera angles, respectively. The subwindow with current focus has a yellow border, and the camera angle in that subwindow is also displayed in the Right monitor pane. Subwindows are numbered from left to right, and from top to bottom. The number of the subwindow with current focus is also reflected in the Camera angle control bar. You can change the camera angle displayed in a subwindow by right-clicking in a subwindow and selecting [Video Select] from the context menu. This is most useful

Multiple Camera Editor

c Right Monitor pane

e Timeline

if the number of camera tracks is greater than the number of subwindows in the Left monitor pane. The audio mode for the output sequence in the Right monitor pane is also set from the context menu for the Left monitor pane. Audio None: Audio input from each camera angle is discarded, and no audio is added to the timeline. Audio Follow: The audio tracks follow the camera angle input. Switching the camera angle focus also switches the audio input. Audio Fix: The audio tracks follow the audio from a fixed input, regardless of which camera angle has the current focus. • Same Camera: All audio tracks are fixed to the audio input from a single camera. • A1-A4: Each audio track is independently fixed to the audio input from a single camera.

c Right monitor pane Displays the output video of the Multiple Camera Editor. The output image reflects the subwindow that has the current focus in the Left monitor pane. The image is scrubbed and monitored in sync with the Left monitor pane. d Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Multiple Camera Editor. See page 205 for more information about the Multiple Camera Editor command buttons.

e Timeline Displays tracks for editing video and audio material on the time axis. See page 204 for more information about the Multiple Camera Editor timeline.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Multiple Camera Editor

203

Timeline (Multiple Camera Editor) Overview The timeline is made up tracks containing the video and audio material to edit. You create Multi Camera sequences

by switching between camera angles in the Left monitor pane of the Multiple Camera Editor.

a Timeline View menu button b Zoom Controller c Playline time d Camera Angle control bar

f Track panel

e Position bar

h Playline g Track area

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

204

a Timeline View menu button Displays the main menu of the Timeline View. The main menu has a subset of commands in common with the main menu of the Timeline Editor.

c Playline time Displays the timecode of the current playline position. Timecodes can be entered directly using the numeric keypad.

See “Timeline View Main Menu” (page 193) for more information about the main menu of the Timeline Editor.

d Camera angle control bar Displays the camera angle input numbers above the timeline tracks. The camera angle numbers represent durations when the corresponding cameras have focus. The durations are indicated by the highlighted intervals in the timeline. Moving the mouse near a camera angle boundary changes the cursor to the trim cursor. Dragging the camera angle boundary trims the camera angle durations on both sides of the boundary. The relative trim duration is displayed in the Playline time display. You can edit the camera angle composition using context menus. The following commands are available. Cut Here: Cuts the right-clicked camera angle duration in two. Select: Selects/Deselects the right-clicked camera angle duration(s).

b Zoom controller Zooms in on the timeline when the slider is dragged to the right, and zooms out when the slider is dragged to the left. The zoom controller scale varies according to the position of the start point and end point on the timeline. You can also use the following shortcut keys, even while performing other actions on the timeline. • Zoom in: Ctrl + + • Zoom out: Ctrl + • Show entire scale: Ctrl + 0 • Zoom in/zoom out: Right-click on the position bar while holding down the Ctrl key, and drag the mouse up and down.

Multiple Camera Editor

Delete: Deletes the right-clicked camera angle duration(s). Compose Select: Converts the selected camera angle duration(s) to a single duration. The duration has the focus of the right-clicked camera angle number. Compose Same: Merges all consecutive camera angle duration(s), within the selection, that have the same camera angle. Clear: Deletes the camera angle duration(s) from the timeline. 1 to 9: Changes the selected camera angle duration(s) to the camera angle selected in the context menu. It does not merge durations. e Position bar Displays timecode in a variety of scales, as selected with the zoom controller. f Track panel Allows you to select camera tracks and make track settings. A camera angle indicator shows the camera angle assigned to the camera track. You can change the camera assignment from the context menu of the camera angle indicator. The following options are available. Cancel: Removes the camera angle assignment. Default: Assigns the camera angles in order from 1 to 9 starting with the bottommost camera track in the timeline. 1 to 9: Assigns the camera angle to the camera track. The track panel has a subset of operations in common with the track panel of the Timeline Editor, with the main difference being that tracks in the Multiple Camera Editor are camera tracks.

Multiple Camera Editor Command Button Area By default, the buttons in the Multiple Camera Editor command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 209) from the main menu. Notes

• The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. • If the window is not wide enough to display all the tool buttons, scroll left and right through the buttons by rolling the mouse wheel while the cursor is on the tool button area, or by clicking the arrow buttons that appear on the left and right ends of the tool button area.

See page 177 for more information about the track panel in the Timeline Editor.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

g Track area Displays the camera tracks in the sequence. Up to 9 camera tracks can be added to the track area. Clips can be added from Project Explorer by dragging them to the track area. Moving the mouse to the edges of the track area moves the display to the next page of the track area. The tracks can be trimmed, effects can be added to the tracks, and speed clips can be created in the same way as in the Timeline Editor. The track area context menu has a subset of operations in common with the track area of the Timeline Editor. See “Context Menu for Timeline Clips” (page 180) for more information about the context menu for timeline clips in the track area in Timeline Editor.

h Playline Shows the current position on the timeline.

Multiple Camera Editor

205

Default command button configuration

Icon

Button name

Button function

Go to In

Moves the playline to the In point.

Mark In

Marks an In point. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to set the In point, and then click this button to set it. You can also set an In point by clicking this button during play, or by clicking it after you enter a timecode value with the numeric keypad. If an In point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Play

Plays a clip from the current position to the end. Becomes a Still button during play.

Mark Out

Marks an Out point. Scrub the playline (move it back and forth on the position bar) to move to the point where you want to set the Out point, and then click this button to set it. You can also set an Out point by clicking this button during play, or by clicking it after you enter a timecode value with the numeric keypad. If an Out point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Go to Out

Moves the playline to the Out point.

Record

Starts recording the multiple camera sequence. Clicking the camera angles in the Left monitor pane selects the camera angle for inclusion in the Multi Camera sequence.

Composer Mode

Selects the normal editing mode. Allows you to scrub the playline.

Segment (Extract/Splice-in) Mode

Selects an editing mode in which you can move and delete segments (groups of one or more clips) in the track area. In Extract/Splice-in mode, clips are extracted when you move or delete them, and spliced in when you add them. In Lift/Overwrite mode, clips are lifted when you move or delete them, and overwritten when you add them. In Segment mode you can do the following. • Select clips. You can select multiple clips by holding the Ctrl key down as you select. • Cut clips and copy them to the clipboard. • Copy clips to the clipboard without cutting them. • Move the playline to the desired position and paste clips that have been copied to the clipboard. • Delete clips. • Move the selected segment by drag and drop. • Move the selected segment one frame at a time by dragging and dropping with the Ctrl key held down. • Move the selected segment to a snap point (cut point, transition start point, transition end point) by dragging and dropping with the Alt key held down. • Delete segments. • Set In and Out points around the selected segment by clicking the Mark Clip button.

Segment (Lift/Overwrite) Mode

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

206

Note Clips are copied to the clipboard when they are extracted from a sequence. Even if you close the sequence, put it in the Trash, and then empty the Trash, clips on the clipboard are not deleted. 2 View

Selects the display of 2 camera angles on a 1 x 2 grid in the Left monitor pane.

4 View

Selects the display of 4 camera angles on a 2 x 2 grid in the Left monitor pane.

9 View

Selects the display of 9 camera angles on a 3 x 3 grid in the Left monitor pane.

Multiple Camera Editor

Icon

Button name

Button function

Camera 1 to 9

Selects the camera angle to give focus. The number of buttons displayed depends on the number of camera angles displayed in the Left monitor pane.

Cut at Playline

Cuts the camera angle duration with focus at the playline into two portions.

Add Edit

Adds a cut point at the clip on the active tracks at the playline position. When cut points are added during play (forward, reverse, fast, slow, shuttle, jog, etc.), the cut points are indicated by the slice numbers on the timeline only. Play does not stop when adding cut points. The display of cut points in clips on the active tracks is not refreshed until play is stopped. Also, any effects added to clips that are cut during play are placed on the rightmost section only. Cuts added during play are grouped into a single undo/redo action. The default setting is to continue playback when adding cut points. You can change this setting so that playback stops when adding cut points in order to refresh tracks immediately. This is especially useful when using the K keyboard button when adding cut points. To change the default setting, modify the following registry. HKEY_CURRENT_USER¥Software¥Sony¥1 Entry name: 39 (DWORD Value) Value = 0 (add edit will not stop playing during playback). Default. Value = 1 (add edit will stop playing during playback)

Left Output

Switches the function of the Left monitor pane and Right monitor pane in the Multiple Camera Editor window.

Add Dissolve

Adds a dissolve at the trim point position.

FX Explorer

Starts the FX Explorer (see page 296). When one or more FX Explorer windows are open, clicking this button closes all the FX Explorer windows.

Splice-In

Selects Splice-In mode as the mode for placing clips on the Timeline Editor timeline. If you right-click this button and select [Fit to Fill] from the context menu, the clip will be placed with the clip speed adjusted to match the duration between the In and Out points on the timeline.

Overwrite

Selects Overwrite mode as the mode for placing clips on the Timeline Editor timeline. If you right-click this button and select [Fit to Fill] from the context menu, the clip will be placed with the clip speed adjusted to match the duration between the In and Out points on the timeline.

Save

Saves the Multi Camera sequence in Project Explorer.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Multiple Camera Editor

207

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Button name

Icon

Button name

Stop

Versioning

Cut at PL

Step Backward

Extract

Jog

Step Forward

Lift

Shuttle

Step Backward 10 Frames

Extract from Clip Top to Current Playline

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Step Forward 10 Frames

Extract from Current Playline to Clip End

Analog Scrub Mode

Play Reverse

Lift from Clip Top to Current Playline

Play Forward

Lift from Current Playline to Clip End

Speed Control

Still

Trim 1 Frame Back

Scrub (w/Fx) Mode

Go to Start

Trim 1 Frame Forward

Toggle F1/F2

Go to End

Trim 10 Frames Back

Toggle Field/Frame

Go to Previous Event

Trim 10 Frames Forward

Snap

Go to Next Event

Extend

Help

Go to Previous Marker

Freeze Frame

Find Clip

Go to Next Marker

Add Dissolve

Undo

FX1 to FX9

Redo

Clear Out Mark

Delete Effect

FX Explorer

Clear Both Marks

Open FX

Nesting

Transition Options

Clear In Mark

...

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Multiple Camera Editor Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Multiple Camera Editor to display the main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Save Saves the Multi Camera sequence.

208

Icon

Multiple Camera Editor

...

V1 to V8

Save As... Saves the Multi Camera sequence in the same bin under another name. Enter a name (up to 256 characters) and click OK. MultiView Selects the number of camera angles to display in the Left monitor pane (2, 4, or 9).

Undo/Redo Displays subcommands for undoing and redoing operations. The subcommands are: Undo: Undoes an operation. You can undo up to 64 operations, in order from the most recent. Redo: Redoes an operation that was undone with the [Undo] command. You can redo up to 64 operations. Undo List: Displays a list of up to 64 of the most recent operations. You can select an operation from the undo list to return to the state it was in before that operation. When an operation is undone, a separator appears in the undo list. The only operations that can be undone are the ones above the separator. Clear Undo List: Clears the undo list. Cut Cuts one or more selected clips from the timeline and copies them to the clipboard. When Mark In and Mark Out points are set, cuts the Mark In-Mark Out section on the active tracks. You can paste them from the clipboard back to the timeline at a different location (cut & paste), in effect moving the clips. Copy Copies one or more selected clips from the timeline to the clipboard. When Mark In and Mark Out points are set, copies the Mark In-Mark Out section on the active tracks. You can paste them from the clipboard back to the timeline at a different location (copy & paste), in effect duplicating the clips. Paste Pastes on the timeline a clip that was copied to the clipboard. In Segment mode, does a Splice-In or Overwrite paste, depending on which mode is selected. In Composer mode, does a Splice-In paste. Cut Effect Cuts one or more effects applied to clips and transitions and copies them to the clipboard. This allows you to move effects by cut and paste.

Paste Effect Pastes an effect or effects from the clipboard to a clip or transition. Delete Deletes one or more selected clips from the timeline. The deleted clips are not copied to the clipboard. This command is available in Segment mode.

Note

You can convert between timecodes or add an offset to a timecode before adding clips to the Multiple Camera Editor by using the Modify Clip dialog in Project Explorer. See “Modifying Items” (page 71) for more information.

Transition Setting Displays the Transition Setting dialog. It is used to automatically add dissolve transitions to video tracks and audio crossfades to audio tracks in the timeline. See “Transition Setting Dialog” (page 210) for more information.

Clear Stay Part with In/Out Mode Clears the camera angle durations between camera angle selections when recording in In/Out mode, leaving blank durations in the timeline. See “Multi Camera Recording Modes” (page 211) for more information.

Display Camera Track Name Displays the camera angle track names in the Left monitor pane. Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Button...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard.

Multiple Camera Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Copy Effect Copies effects applied to clips and transitions to the clipboard. This allows you to copy effects by copy and paste.

Synchropoint Displays the Synchropoint dialog. The Synchropoint sets the method used to synchronize clips when they are added to the timeline in the Multiple Camera Editor. The following options are supported: In Point: Places clips on separate tracks and synchronizes their Mark In points. When there is no Mark In point, synchronizes the start of each clip. Out Point: Places clips on separate tracks and synchronizes their Mark Out points. When there is no Mark Out point, synchronizes the start of each clip. Source Timecode (LTC): Places clips on separate tracks and synchronizes their LTC timecodes. When there is no LTC, synchronizes using FTC. Source Timecode (VITC): Places clips on separate tracks and synchronizes their VITC timecodes. When there is no VITC, synchronizes using FTC. First Marker: Places clips on separate tracks and synchronizes the first markers in each clip. When there is no marker, synchronizes the start of each clip.

209

Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Multiple Camera Editor. Minimize Minimizes the Multiple Camera Editor and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Maximize Maximizes the Multiple Camera Editor window, or restores it to its original size. Close Closes the Multiple Camera Editor window.

Transition Setting Dialog The Transition Setting dialog allows you to automatically set the duration and alignment of transition effects. The Transition Setting dialog appears when you select [Transition Setting] from the main menu of the Multiple Camera Editor.

a Menu button b Duration

c Alignment list box d Before Edit Point

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Transition Setting dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Transition Setting dialog. Close: Closes the Transition Setting dialog. b Duration Enter the duration of the transition effect. The default duration is set in the Edit tab (see page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. c Alignment list box Select an alignment method from the drop down list. The default alignment is set in the Edit tab (see page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. 1. Start at Cut: Aligns the start point of the effect with the first frame after the cut point. 2. End at Cut: Aligns the end point of the effect with the first frame before the cut point. 3. Centered on Cut: Aligns the effect between the two clips. If the duration is an odd number, the duration from the start point to the center point is one frame longer than the duration from the center point to the end point. 4. Custom Start Settings: Aligns the effect position to any specified point. Note

The duration of the clip in the Full Effect Editor timeline includes the clip duration and the portion of the transition effects that extend beyond the head or tail of the clip. d Before Edit Point (effect start point) When you select [4. Custom Start Settings] from the Alignment list box, specify the effect start point and a duration here. When you select a different alignment method, the effect start point is determined automatically on the basis of the alignment type and the duration. e Apply to Video When this is checked, adds dissolve transitions to video tracks only.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

f Apply to Audio When this is checked, adds crossfade transitions to audio tracks only. i Cancel button h OK button g Auto Set Transition Within Clip f Apply to Audio e Apply to Video

210

Multiple Camera Editor

g Auto Set Transition Within Clip When this is checked, aligns transition effects in Start at Cut mode when the cut point is at the head of the clip, and End at Cut mode when the cut point is at the tail of the clip. h OK button Confirms the settings made in the Transition Setting dialog and closes the dialog.

i Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Transition Setting dialog and closes the dialog.

(between Out points and In points) in the timeline. This is useful for quickly returning to the main camera angle.

Multi Camera Recording Modes A Multi Camera sequence is created by selecting different camera angles throughout the sequence in the timeline of the Multiple Camera Editor tool. During recording, the camera angles can be assigned using two modes. • In/In mode • In/Out mode Note

The recording mode is determined by the mouse operations in the Left monitor pane.You can alternate between methods when editing a Multi Camera sequence.

• [Clear Stay Part with In/Out Mode] is enabled: The intervals between camera angles (between Out points and In points) in the timeline are left unassigned.

To record using In/In mode

1

Select the starting camera angle in the Left monitor pane, and click the Record button to start recording.

2

Click a different camera angle in the Left monitor pane as the playline sweeps the timeline to set the In point for that camera angle. Repeat as required. The recorded camera angles are highlighted on the timeline.

To select camera angles from the keyboard When Num Lock is turned Off, the camera angles can be selected from the numeric keypad.

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

To record using In/Out mode Select the starting camera angle in the Left monitor pane, and click the Record button to start recording.

2

Click a different camera angle in the Left monitor pane to set the In point for that camera angle. Then, click the same camera angle again to set the Out point. Repeat as required.

When Num Lock is turned On, the timecode for the corresponding camera angle is displayed to cue-up the clip.

The recorded camera angles that are highlighted on the timeline vary depending on the [Clear Stay Part with In/Out Mode] setting in the main menu of the Multiple Camera Editor. • [Clear Stay Part with In/Out Mode] is disabled: The starting camera angle is automatically assigned to the blank intervals between camera angles

Multiple Camera Editor

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

1

211

Trim Viewer Overview The Trim Viewer allows you to trim around the transitions between clips on the timeline. When the Trim Viewer starts, the timeline enters trim mode and trim handles appear on the timeline. You can do the following in Trim Viewer mode. • Adjust the start and end points of transitions. • Add, delete, and adjust transition effects • Preview transitions See “Trimming Operations” (page 277) for more information about operations. See “Trim Viewer Trim Modes” (page 215) for more information about the kinds of trims you can perform with the Trim Viewer. Notes

• Clips on disabled tracks and locked tracks cannot be trimmed. • Slide and Slip trimming of non-continuous clips are not possible. • Trims are possible only for clips with sufficient margins. • Detection of the need for timeline rendering and updating of the display are not carried out in Trim Viewer mode. They are done after you exit Trim Viewer mode.

To Start the Trim Viewer The methods used to start the Trim Viewer vary depending on the Timeline Editor mode. Note

The Trim Viewer starts without a trim point set if there are no transitions in the active tracks on the timeline. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Composer mode Click the Trim Mode (page 183) button. The trim mode becomes Dual Trim and the transition closest to the playline on the active tracks becomes the trimming target (trim point). See page 183 for more information about Composer mode.

Segment mode Do one of the following. • Click the Trim Mode (page 183) button. The trim mode becomes Dual Trim and the transition closest to the

212

Trim Viewer

playline on the active tracks becomes the trimming target (trim point). • Select a segment to trim and click the Trim Mode button, or double click the segment. The trim mode becomes Slip Trim. • Select a segment to trim and double click the segment while holding down the Ctrl key. The trim mode becomes Slide Trim. See page 183 for more information about Segment mode.

Names and Functions of Parts The Trim Viewer has the following three display formats. 2-monitor display: Selected when the trim mode is Single Trim or Dual Trim 4-monitor display: Selected when the trim mode is Slip Trim or Slide Trim (see “Trim Viewer Trim Modes” (page 215))

6-monitor display: Selected when you are adjusting a transition effect (see “To put the Trim Viewer into 6monitor mode” (page 278)) The figure below shows 2-monitor display.

1 Menu button 2 Monitors

3 Clip durations

6 Active clip indicators

7 Trim amounts

5 Command button area 4 Transition duration

Exiting the Trim Viewer

are adjusting a transition, you can click the Transition Corner Display button to select 6-monitor mode.

Do one of the following to exit the Trim Viewer. • Click the Trim Mode button again, or click any button except the Trim Mode button to put the timeline into another mode. • Press Ctrl + W or the Esc key to close the Trim Viewer. The timeline returns to the mode it was in before entering Trim Viewer mode.

See page 215 for more information about 4-monitor mode, and see “To put the Trim Viewer into 6-monitor mode” (page 278) for more information about 6-monitor mode.

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Trim Viewer.

c Clip durations From the left, this section displays the duration of the outgoing clip, the playline position, and the duration of the incoming clip.

b Monitors In 2-monitor mode, the last frame of the outgoing clip appears in the left monitor and the first frame of the incoming clip appears in the right monitor. When the trim mode is Slip Trim or Slide Trim, the Trim Viewer enters 4-monitor mode automatically. When you

d Transition duration Displays the duration of the transition effect. If there is no transition effect at the current trim point, displays “00:00:00:00”. You can adjust the duration by clicking this field to activate it and entering a value from the keyboard. The

Trim Viewer

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

See “Trim Viewer Main Menu” (page 223) for more information about the main menu.

If you trim the first or last frame of the clip, an orange line will appear on the left or right side of the screen respectively.

213

duration of an effect can vary depending on how it is aligned (see page 278). e Command button area Contains the Trim Viewer command buttons. See page 218 for more information about the command buttons.

f Active clip indicators Indicate whether the trim buttons operate on the outgoing clip or the incoming clip. g Trim amounts Display the trim amounts of the outgoing clip and the incoming clip in units of frames.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

214

Trim Viewer

Trim Viewer Trim Modes Overview When the Trim Viewer starts, the timeline enters trim mode and a trim point appears, together with trim handles. Note

The Trim Viewer starts without a trim point set (and the trim handles do not appear) if there are no transitions in the active tracks on the timeline.

There are five trim modes, corresponding to the trim point position. • A-side Single Trim • B-side Single Trim • Dual Trim (AB-side Trim) • Slip Trim • Slide Trim The 4-monitor display mode is selected automatically when the Trim Viewer enters Slip or Slide Trim mode.

Outgoing frame Head frame of the selected clip (segment) Tail frame of the selected clip (segment) Incoming frame

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Trim Viewer Trim Modes

215

Single Trim

Slip Trim

A-side Single Trim Trims the outgoing frame of the transition.

Simultaneously trims the In point and Out point of the trimming target clip. The clip’s duration and the duration of the timeline as a whole do not change.

Trim handle Trim handle

B-side Single Trim Trims the incoming frame of the transition.

Slide Trim Simultaneously trims the Out point of the clip before the trimming target clip, and the In point of the clip after the trimming target clip. The trimming target clip’s duration and the duration of the timeline as a whole do not change.

Trim handle

Dual Trim (AB-Side Trim) Simultaneously trims the outgoing frame and incoming frame of the transition.

Trim handle

Selecting a Trim Mode The initial trim mode is decided automatically, depending on how you started the Trim Viewer. You can use the following methods to change the trim mode after the Trim Viewer starts. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Trim handle

216

To select a Single Trim mode Do one of the following. • Click the command button for the Single Trim mode you want (A-side or B-side). • Set a trim handle for the Single Trim mode you want. For A-side Single Trim, set a handle on the outgoing frame, and for B-side Single Trim set a handle on the incoming frame. • Click a Trim Viewer monitor. Click the left monitor to select A-side Single Trim, and click the right monitor to select B-side Single Trim.

Trim Viewer Trim Modes

To select Dual Trim mode Do one of the following. • Click the AB-side Trim button. • Set trim handles on the incoming frame and outgoing frame of the target clip. • Click at the border between the left and right monitors (the shape of the mouse pointer changes when you move it over the point to click).

To select Slip Trim mode Set trim handles at the In point and Out point of the target clip.

To select Slide Trim mode Set trim handles on the Out point of the clip before the target clip and on the In point of the clip after the target clip.

To toggle trim modes Add the Toggle A/B/AB Side Trim command button by customization to cycle through trim modes. Each press of the button selects the next trim mode, in the order Dual Trim > A-side Single Trim > B-side Single Trim > Dual Trim.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Trim Viewer Trim Modes

217

Trim Viewer Command Button Area The command button area of the Trim Viewer contains the Current Alignment button and transition duration display in addition to the Trim Viewer command buttons. By default, the buttons in the Trim Viewer command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 223) from the main menu. Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

218

Trim Viewer Command Button Area

Default command button configuration

Icon

Button name

Button function

Transition Align

Displays a drop-down list so that you can check the alignment of the transition effect applied to the current trim point. To change the alignment, select another item from the list. See “To change the effect alignment” (page 278) for more information about effect alignments. Note The position of this button cannot be changed by customization. Exits Trim Viewer mode and returns to the editing mode in force before Trim Viewer mode was selected.

Transition Corner Display

When there is a transition effect at the trim point, puts the Trim Viewer into 6-monitor mode.

Monitor Select

Selects the Trim Viewer monitor to display on the video monitor. With each click the next monitor in order from the left appears on the video monitor.

Toggle AB/A/B side Trim

Switches the Trim Viewer trim mode.

Focus

Enlarges the timeline scale to a pre-determined size.

Previous Transition

Moves the trim point to the previous transition. When there are several trim target tracks, moves to the transition in the same track as the transition at the playline position.

Next Transition

Moves the trim point to the next transition. When there are several trim target tracks, moves to the transition in the same track as the transition at the playline position.

Trim 10 Frames Back

Moves the trim point 10 frames back.

Trim 1 Frame Back

Moves the trim point 1 frame back.

Trim 1 Frame Forward

Moves the trim point 1 frame forward.

Trim 10 Frames Forward

Moves the trim point 10 frames forward.

Loop Play

Starts loop play. Becomes a Stop button during loop play.

A side Trim

Sets the trim mode to A-side Single Trim.

B side Trim

Sets the trim mode to B-side Single Trim.

AB side Trim

Sets the trim mode to Dual (AB-side) Trim.

Add Dissolve

Adds a dissolve at the trim point position.

Delete Effect

Deletes the transition effect at the trim point.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Trim Mode

Trim Viewer Command Button Area

219

Icon

Button name

Button function

Render Effect

Renders the effect at the trim point to make it available for preview. Note The preroll and postroll ranges are not rendered.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

220

Trim Viewer Command Button Area

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Button function

Stop

Stops play.

Play Reverse

Plays in the reverse direction. Allows you to trim while checking the playback video and audio.

Play Forward

Plays in the forward direction. Allows you to trim while checking the playback video and audio.

Still

Pauses play. Allows you to check the video at the current position while playing in the forward and reverse directions.

Go to In

Jumps to the In point. Allows you to check trim results. See “To check trim results” (page 279) for more information.

Go to Out

Jumps to the Out point. Allows you to check trim results. See “To check trim results” (page 279) for more information.

All Stop

Stops loop play. Allows you to check the video at the current position while playing in the forward and reverse directions.

Mark In

Sets a new trim point. Use this button for on-the-fly trimming. See “To perform on-the-fly trimming” (page 279).

...

Set Duration

Sets the duration of a transition effect.

Segment (Extract/Splice-in) Mode

Exits Trim Viewer mode and selects Segment (Extract/Splice-in) mode.

Segment (Lift/Overwrite) Mode

Exits Trim Viewer mode and selects Segment (Lift/Overwrite) mode.

Rubber Band Mode

Exits Trim Viewer mode and selects Rubber Band mode.

Edit Mode

Exits Trim Viewer mode and switches the Timeline Editor edit mode.

Save

Saves the sequence.

FX1 to FX9

Apply the effects assigned to FX1 to FX9. Note In Trim Viewer mode, you can only assign transition effects. Opens the Transition Options dialog.

Jog

Selects jog mode.

Shuttle

Selects shuttle mode.

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Switches between jog and shuttle modes.

...

V1 to V8

Select tracks V1 to V8.

...

A1 to A12

Select tracks A1 to A12.

...

CG1 to CG8

Selects tracks from CG1 to CG8.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Transition Options

Trim Viewer Command Button Area

221

Icon ...

Button name

Button function

K1 to K8

Select tracks from K1 to K8.

Undo

Undoes one editing operation with each click. You can undo up to 64 operations.

Redo

Redoes with each click one operation that has been undone with the Undo button. You can redo up to 64 operations.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

222

Trim Viewer Command Button Area

Trim Viewer Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Trim Viewer to display the Trim Viewer main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Trim Settings... Displays the Timeline Editor Properties dialog, where you can make the following settings. Preroll Time: The length of the preroll before a trim point or the In point of a transition effect at the trim point. The preroll time determines where a preview starts. Postroll Time: The length of the postroll after a trim point or the Out point of a transition effect at the trim point. The postroll time determines where a preview ends. Intermission Time: The length of the intermissions between loops in loop play. Focus on Trim Point: Specifies whether to turn the Focus button on automatically when the trim mode changes. Maintain Playline Position During Quick Trim (Segment mode): Specifies whether to maintain the current playline line position during quick trim in segment mode. Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Button...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Trim Viewer. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Trim Viewer Main Menu

223

Render To Bin Dialog Overview The Render To Bin dialog allows you to create a clip by rendering between Mark In and Mark Out points in a sequence on the timeline, and to save the clip to a bin. Notes

• When using XPRI NS Proxy, up convert the proxy files before rendering them with Render To Bin. • Rendering always creates an interlaced clip, even if there are progressive clips on the timeline.

To Open the Render To Bin Dialog To open the Render To Bin dialog, set Mark In and Mark Out points in a sequence on the timeline and then do one of the following. • Click the Render to Bin button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor or Master Viewer. • Click the Menu button of the Timeline Editor and select [Render] >[Render To Bin...]. Note

• By default, the Render to Bin button does not appear in the command button areas of the Timeline Editor and Master Viewer. To use this button, you will need to customize one of the command button areas. • When working with Sonaps, do one of the following to open the Render To Bin dialog. • Select [Render and FTP upload to Sonaps] on the Field Editor. • Transfer a clip to the Sonaps system after local rendering.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

224

Render To Bin Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button b Track buttons

n Res List

c Source d Valid Region list box e Convert list box

f Clip Configuration o p q r

Add button Duplicate button Delete button Clear button

u Batch Stop button t Batch Render button s Update button m Open/Close Res List button l Bin Name list box k Compression list box j Recording destination vault list boxes g Render button h Cancel button i Add to Batch button

b Track buttons Select the tracks to record in the clip. Select from α, V, CG, and A1 to A8 as required. By default, all of the channels assigned to the sequence PGM bus are selected. CG clips from third-party plug-ins can only be placed on video tracks, but are still controlled by the CG track button. However, XPRI native CG clips are controlled by the V track button when placed on video tracks, and by the CG button when placed on CG tracks.

c Source Displays the path to the bin containing the original clip or sequence. The path format is “Computer name/Project name/Bin name/Sequence or clip name.” d Valid Region list box Selects the section to be rendered. Entire: Renders the entire sequence, excluding the filler at the end of the timeline. In and Out: Renders the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points. Check the [Proxy] check box to create clips that include proxy media. e Convert list box Selects the conversion method used for Render to Bin clips (SD to HD, HD to SD). No Convert: Retains SD clip’s original frame size after Render to Bin. Fill: Changes SD clip’s aspect ratio to 16:9 and fills viewer after Render to Bin. Fill To Width: Changes SD clip’s frame size to fill the width of the viewer. Fill To Height: Changes SD clip’s frame size to fill the height of the viewer.

Render To Bin Dialog

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Render To Bin dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Customize: Opens the Keyboard Customize window to assign command button functions to the keyboard, or the Control Panel Customize window to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel and the Editing Control Panel. Help...: Displays help about the Render To Bin dialog. Close: Closes the Render To Bin dialog. Update Timecode Information: Updates the timecode information of clips/sequences in the Render to Bin dialog if the clips/sequences were modified after the dialog was opened.

225

f Clip Configuration Enter a name, keyword, and comment for the clip to be rendered. g Render button Renders the specified range in the selected sequence, creates a clip, and stores it in the specified bin. h Cancel button Cancels all of the settings that have been made in the dialog and closes the dialog. i Add to Batch button Adds the clip or sequence, together with render information, to the Res List. j Recording destination vault list boxes Allow you to select the recording destination vaults. Select the video vault from the Video Capacity drop-down list and select the audio vault from the Audio Capacity drop-down list. These lists display the vaults designated as recording destinations in the Media Vaults tab of the Project Properties dialog. You can also select Project Properties... to open the Project Properties dialog and change the recording destination settings. The approximate remaining times of the selected recording vaults are displayed as calculated on the basis of the compression methods and numbers of tracks. If there is not enough free capacity remaining, a message appears to inform you of that and the rendering is not carried out. If there is no remaining free capacity, “00:00:00:00” is displayed. If there is no vault selected, “--:--:--:--” is displayed. See “Project Properties Dialog” (page 649) for more information about vaults.

k Compression list box Displays the video signal compression method used in rendering.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

l Bin Name list box Displays the current destination bin. The drop-down list displays the names of up to 10 bins that have been selected in the Bin Selection dialog. You can select another destination bin from the drop-down list. You can also select Bin Selection... in the drop-down list to open the Bin Selection dialog and select a destination bin which is not displayed in the dropdown list. When bin names are changed in Project Explorer, the bin names shown here are updated automatically. When working with Sonaps, you can specify a folder in the Material List as the save destination for clips in the Bin Selection dialog. For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690).

226

Render To Bin Dialog

m Open/Close Res List button Opens/closes the Res List pane. n Res List Displays the list of resources for rendering. Double click a clip or sequence in the list to display the render settings in the left pane. Right-click a clip or sequence to display context menu shortcut commands. The following information is displayed for each clip or sequence. • Status • Clip name • Source name • Compression • Mark In • Mark Out • Duration • Track(s) • Valid region • Convert • Target path • Result o Add button Adds the selected clip or sequence in Project Explorer to the Res List. p Duplicate button Duplicates the selected clip or sequence. q Delete button Deletes the selected clip or sequence. r Clear button Deletes all clips and sequences from the Res List. s Update button Updates the selected clip or sequence with the information specified in the left pane. t Batch Render button Renders the specified range in the clips and sequences in the Res List one at a time, and stores clips in the specified bins. u Batch Stop button Stops the rendering of the clips and sequences in the Res List.

Marker List Dialog The Marker List dialog displays all the marks in the current sequence. Selecting a marker moves to the timecode of the selected mark. Double-clicking a mark (or selecting and pressing the Enter key) moves the playline to that mark. You can also edit marks by using commands from the context menu. To open the Marker List dialog, do one of the following. • Click the Marker List button in Source Viewer, Master Viewer, Timeline Editor, and other tools. • Select [Markers] > [Marker List...] from the main menu of Source Viewer, Master Viewer, or Timeline Editor.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Marker List Dialog

227

Names and Functions of Parts

a Essence marks b Scene change marks

e Refresh

c Timecode marks

f Thumbnail

d Scene In/Out marks

g List

h Markers

a Essence marks Displays the essence marks in the current sequence. b Scene change marks Displays the scene changes in the current sequence. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

c Timecode marks Displays the timecode break marks in the current sequence. d Scene In/Out marks Displays the scene In and Out marks in the current sequence. e Refresh Updates the data displayed in the Marker List with the latest data.

228

Marker List Dialog

f Thumbnail Displays the essence marks in thumbnail view in the Marker List. g List Displays the essence marks in list view in the Marker List. h Markers Displays the marks for the marker types selected in the toolbar of the Marker List dialog.

Timecode Window The Timecode window displays various timecode values for the clip at the playline position in the Timeline Editor. You can display different timecode values, and display several values at once. To open the Timecode window, do one of the following. • Click the Timeline Editor Menu button and select [Tools] >[Timecode Window...]. • Select a sequence in a bin when the Timeline Editor is running, and then press the Timecode Window focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information about focus hot keys.

The window shows timecode for the clip in the active Timeline Editor viewer.

1 Menu button 2 Timecode name

3 Timecode

Timecode selection menu A context menu appears when you click the timecode name or timecode. The menu contains the following items. Pos, In, Out, Dur, I/O, Abs, Rem, Mas Pos, Src Pos, TC (V1, ..., K1, ..., A1, ...) Select timecode values to display. (Check marks appear next to selected items.) Source timecode (V1, ..., K1, ..., A1, ...) is displayed according to the number of tracks in the clip. When “TC” only is displayed, the item cannot be selected. See “Displayable timecode values” (page 229) for more information about the values that can be displayed.

Timecode View, Frame View Select either the timecode display mode (VITC, LTC, FTC, CTL, or AUTO) or frame display mode. (A black dot appears next to the selected display mode.) When set to AUTO, an asterisk appears beside the timecode in the Timecode window to indicate the auto setting is enabled (for example, “*FTC”). Actual Time View Displays timecode after conversion into actual time. Add Timecode Adds to the window another line of the same type of timecode that you clicked to display the menu. There is no limit to the number of timecode lines that can be added, but they cannot extend beyond the bottom of the screen. To show more lines, create more space by moving the window up or making it smaller. Delete Timecode Deletes the timecode that you clicked to display the menu. Copy Copies to the clipboard the timecode that you clicked to display the menu. Copied timecode can be pasted to the timecode display areas of other tools. (Select the [Paste] command in the context menu of the timecode display area.) Pasted timecode is shown in the display format of the paste destination.

Displayable timecode values You can display the following timecode values in the Timecode window.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the timecode window. The main menu has the following commands. Add Timecode: Adds to the window another line of timecode, initially containing the same value as the line above it. There is no limit to the number of lines that can be added, but they cannot extend beyond the bottom of the screen. To show more lines, create more space by moving the window up or by making it smaller. Delete Timecode: Deletes the selected line of timecode from the window. Help...: Displays help about the timecode window. Minimize: Minimizes the Timecode window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close: Closes the Timecode window.

c Timecode Displays the timecode. The display format varies depending on the type of timecode.

b Timecode name Displays the name of the timecode value.

Timecode Window

229

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

230

Name

Description

Display format

Pos

Position of the playline in the Timecode Source Viewer or the Master Viewer, when one of the viewers has the focus

In

Mark In point timecode

Timecode

Out

Mark Out point timecode

Timecode

Dur

Duration between the Mark In point and Mark Out point

Duration

I/O

Displays the following durations, depending on whether Mark In and Mark Out points are set. • When both Mark In and Mark Out points are set: Duration between Mark In and Mark Out points • When Mark In point only is set: Duration between Mark In point and playline position • When Mark Out point only is set: Duration between playline position and Mark Out point • When neither Mark In point nor Mark Out point is set: Duration between playline position and End point

Duration

Abs

Duration between the Start point and playline position

Duration

Rem

Duration between the playline position and End point

Duration

Mas Pos

Timecode of the Master Viewer playline position

Timecode

Src Pos

Timecode of the Source Viewer playline position

Timecode

V1

Source timecode of the clip Timecode at the playline position on the lowermost video track

K1

Source timecode of the clip Timecode at the playline position on the lowermost key track

A1

Source timecode of the clip Timecode at the playline position on the uppermost audio track

Notes

• When In or Out is selected, and an In or Out point has not yet been set, a calculated value is displayed if it can be calculated from other edit points. If the result of the calculation is outside the clip range, “--: --: --: --” is displayed. (Duration is extended in the Master Viewer, so timecode may be displayed even if it is outside the range.)

Timecode Window

• When source timecode (V1, ..., K1, ..., A1, ...) is selected, “--: --: --: --” is displayed if there is filler at the playline position. • In duration displays, zeros in the most significant positions are abbreviated. Example: 2 seconds is displayed as “2:00”, not “00:00:02:00”. However, zeros in the seconds position are not abbreviated if the value is less than one second. Example: 20 frames is displayed as “0:20”. • In drop-frame timecode, the delimiter between minutes and seconds is a period (.) instead of a colon (:). Example: A duration less than one minute is displayed as “.2:00”.

Speed Control Dialogs Overview There are three types of Speed Control dialog, which vary in complexity and in the types of speed control that they enable. Simple dialogs: Create speed clips by specifying a speed or a duration. There are two simple dialogs, one for specifying a speed and one for specifying a duration. They allow you to quickly and easily create speed clips from clips on the timeline. (See “Simple Speed Control Dialogs” (page 231)). Basic dialog: Creates speed clips by specifying a speed or a duration. This dialog allows you to create speed clips from clips on the timeline or in the Source Viewer. (See “Basic Speed Control Dialog” (page 232)). Detailed dialog: Creates speed clips by setting keyframes and speed paths. This dialog allows you to freely vary the speed of speed clips along the temporal axis. It can create speed clips from clips on the timeline or in the Source Viewer. (See “Detailed Speed Control Dialog” (page 235)). The duration of speed clips is limited to 3 hours in the forward direction and 1 hour 30 minutes in the reverse direction.

To open a Simple Speed Control dialog To open a Simple Speed Control dialog, right click a clip on the timeline and select one of the following from the context menu. • [Replace Clip] >[Change Speed]: Opens the dialog for specifying a speed. • [Replace Clip] >[Change Duration]: Opens the dialog for specifying a duration. You can also click the Speed Control button in the Master Viewer to open a popup dialog, use the up and down arrow buttons or keys to select Speed Change, and then click the ENTER button (or press the Enter key). This opens the dialog for specifying a speed. In the same way, you can select Change Duration to open the dialog for specifying a duration.

Real-time slow motion It is possible to create speed clips without rendering. However, the following limitations apply. • The speed range for audio is from -400 to +400%. The speed range for video varies depending on your system. Rendering is required if either limit is exceeded. • Dropped frames occur during previews of speed clips that cannot be played back in real time. • Speed clips cannot be rendered directly. Render them after placing them on the timeline. See “Creating Speed Clips” (page 270) for more information about creating and editing speed clips. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Simple Speed Control Dialogs Overview These dialogs create speed clips from clips on the timeline. The speed clips are stored in the same bin as the currently open sequence on the timeline, and replace the original clips on the timeline. There are two dialogs, one for varying the speed and one for varying the duration.

Speed Control Dialogs

231

Names and functions of parts

Simple Speed Control dialog (for varying speed)

a Speed/Duration box b Bin Selection

c [Fit to clip duration maintaining

first frame] check box

Simple Speed Control dialog (for varying duration)

e Cancel button d OK button

a Speed/Duration box Specifies the speed or the duration of the new speed clip. b Bin Selection Sets the bin in which to create the new speed clip. The default bin is set in the Speed Clip tab of the Timeline Editor Properties window. c [Fit to clip duration maintaining first frame] check box When checked, the duration remains the same even when the speed is changed. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

232

Note

The speed clip inherits the Mark In and Mark Out points of the original clip. The following parameters are set to fixed values. If you want different values, you can set them in the Basic Speed Control dialog. • Computation Video (video signal interpolation method): Field Cut (when the project is using an interlaced format) or Frame Cut (when the project is using a progressive format) • Computation Audio (audio signal interpolation method): Variable Pitch

Note

See “Basic Speed Control Dialog” (page 232) for more information.

Be sure to select this check box before changing the speed. The duration will be changed if the check box is selected after changing the speed.

e Cancel button Cancels the creation of a speed clip and closes the dialog.

d OK button Creates a speed clip and closes the dialog. The clip that was selected on the timeline when the dialog opened is deleted and the new speed clip is inserted in Splice-In mode.

Speed Control Dialogs

Basic Speed Control Dialog Overview The Basic Speed Control dialog allows you to create speed clips by specifying a speed or a duration. You can set

parameters such as margins and the video/audio signal interpolation method in the dialog.

To open the Basic Speed Control dialog To open the Basic Speed Control dialog, do one of the following. • Right click a clip on the timeline and select [Replace Clip] >[Speed Clip] from the context menu. • Click the Speed Control button in the Source Viewer. You can also click the Speed Control button in the Master Viewer to open a popup dialog, use the up and down arrow buttons or keys to select Speed Clip, and then click the ENTER button (or press the Enter key). This opens the Basic dialog.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Speed Control Dialogs

233

Names and Functions of Parts

a Source track buttons b Original Duration c New Speed Clip Duration box d Speed box e Head and Tail f Computation Video list box g Computation Audio list box h Bin Selection list box i [Fit to clip duration maintaining

first frame] check box

l Details button k Cancel button j OK button

a Source track buttons Displays and sets the tracks of the original clip in the speed clip.

tab of the Timeline Editor Properties window. The adjusts the clip length and trim margins of the speed clip in the timeline.

b Original Duration Displays the duration of the original clip.

f Computation Video list box Specifies the video signal interpolation method. Select it from among the following. • Projects using an interlaced format - Filter Off - Field Cut - Field Mix - Motion Adaptive Cut - Motion Adaptive Mix - Field Smooth Slow - Frame Smooth Slow - Still 1st - Still 2nd • Projects using a progressive format - Frame Cut - Frame Mix - Still Frame

c New Speed Clip Duration box Specifies the duration of the speed to create. Enter the desired duration (maximum setting value: 03:00:00:00). You do not need to make this setting if you set the speed in the Speed box. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

d Speed box Specifies the speed of the speed clip to create. Enter the desired speed (setting range: -1,000,000% to +1,000,000%). You do not need to make this setting if you set the duration in the New Speed Clip Duration box. Note

The speed cannot be set when Computation Video is set to Still 1st, Still 2nd or Still Frame.

Notes

e Head and Tail Sets the default margin when [Create speed clip between In/Out point with margin] is turned on in the Speed Clip

234

Speed Control Dialogs

• When a slow-speed clip is created with Computation Video set to Field Mix, the clip may end in the next

frame past the Out point. This treatment is intended for smooth viewing of the last frame. • When a speed clip is created with Computation Video set to Field Smooth Slow or Frame Smooth Slow, creation of the interpolation image may take longer. We recommend that you finish configuring settings and render the material before using this function.

See “Basic Speed Control Dialog” (page 232) for more information.

g Computation Audio list box Displays the audio signal interpolation method. The method is fixed as Variable Pitch. Note

The speed range over which Variable Pitch interpolation can be applied is -3000 to +3000%. Audio is silent outside of this range. h Bin Selection Sets the bin in which to create the new speed clip. The default bin is set in the Speed Clip tab of the Timeline Editor Properties window. i [Fit to clip duration maintaining first frame] check box When checked, the duration remains the same even when the speed is changed. Note

Be sure to select this check box before changing the speed. The duration will be changed if the check box is selected after changing the speed. j OK button Creates a speed clip and closes the dialog. k Cancel button Cancels creating a speed clip and closes the dialog. l Details button Switches to the Detailed Speed Control dialog. See “Detailed Speed Control Dialog” (page 235) for more information. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Detailed Speed Control Dialog Overview The Detailed Speed Control dialog allows you to create clips which vary in speed along the temporal axis.

To open the Detailed Speed Control dialog To open the Detailed Speed Control dialog, click the Details button in the Basic Speed Control dialog. The Basic Speed Control dialog switches to the Detailed Speed Control dialog.

Speed Control Dialogs

235

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button b Source track buttons

c Timecode

o Clip name box n Speed path button m Speed box

l Computation section d Monitor

e Graph

f [Create rippled speed clip

maintaining head and tail frames] check box g [Fit to clip duration

k Command button area

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Detailed Speed Control dialog. See “Detailed Speed Control dialog main menu” (page 242) for more information about the main menu.

b Source track buttons Displays the tracks of the original clip, and sets the tracks in the speed clip.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

236

c Timecode Displays, from the left, the timecode of the playline position, the speed clip duration, and the original clip position. You can click a field to activate it and enter a value from the keyboard. d Monitor Displays the video of the clip loaded in the Speed Control dialog. Real-time slow-motion speed clips can be previewed in real time. A red line appears at the bottom of the monitor if real-time play is impossible. The red line appears if any part cannot be played back in real time (because it contains audio, because it contains a non-real-time keyframe, etc.).

Speed Control Dialogs

maintaining first frame] check box h Basic button i Cancel button j OK button

e Graph Displays a speed or position graph to show speed settings for the entire clip, or temporal variations in the clip versus real time. See “Graph section of the Detailed Speed Control dialog” (page 239) for more information.

f [Create rippled speed clip maintaining head and tail frames] check box When checked, specifies that the duration should change as the speed changes. When the picture corresponding to the Mark In point or Mark Out point has changed because of keyframe editing, automatically moves the Mark In or Mark Out point to the position of the original picture. The relative positions of the Mark In point, Mark Out point, and edited keyframe determine whether or not the Mark In point, Mark Out point, and subsequent keyframes are reset, in the following way. • When a keyframe prior to the Mark In point was edited: The Mark Out point and subsequent keyframes are reset. • When keyframe between the Mark In and Mark Out points was edited: The Mark Out point and subsequent keyframes are reset.

• When a keyframe after the Mark Out point was edited: Subsequent keyframes are reset. The Mark In and Mark Out points are not reset. Clear this check box when you do not want the duration set by Mark In and Mark Out points set in the original clip to change as you conduct speed control of a still image. Note

If you edit a keyframe with a speed of 0% while the interlock function is on, the Mark In and Mark Out points may move away from their original times. To return to the original times, undo the operation. g [Fit to clip duration maintaining first frame] check box When checked, the duration remains the same even when the speed is changed. Note

Be sure to select this check box before changing the speed. The duration will be changed if the check box is selected after changing the speed. h Basic button Switches back to the Basic Speed Control dialog. See “Basic Speed Control Dialog” (page 232) for more information.

i Cancel button Cancels the creation of a speed clip and closes the dialog. j OK button Creates a speed clip and closes the dialog. k Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Detailed Speed Control dialog. See “Detailed Speed Control dialog command button area” (page 240) for more information about the command buttons.

Notes

• When a slow-speed clip is created with Computation Video set to Field Mix, the clip may end in the next frame past the Out point. This treatment is intended for smooth viewing of the last frame. • When a speed clip is created with Computation Video set to Field Smooth Slow or Frame Smooth Slow, creation of the interpolation image may take longer. We recommend that you finish configuring settings and render the material before using this function. Mix Range: When Field Mix or Frame Mix is selected under Computation Video, specifies the relative amounts of time allotted to mix video processing and cut behavior. • 100%: Mix video processing • n%: n% mix video processing and (100 - n)% cut behavior (same as Field Cut or Frame Cut behavior) • 0%: Cut behavior (same as Field Cut or Frame Cut behavior) Field Select list box: Allows you to select field or frame for each keyframe. Select “None” if you do not want to select either.

Speed Control Dialogs

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

l Computation section Specifies the video and audio signal interpolation methods.

Computation Video list box: Specifies the video signal interpolation method. Select it from among the following. • Filter Off • Field Cut • Field Mix • Motion Adaptive Cut • Motion Adaptive Mix • Field Smooth Slow • Frame Smooth Slow • Frame Cut • Frame Mix

237

Computation Video list box Field Select list box Filter Off Field Cut Field Mix

None Field 1 Field 2 Frame

Motion Adaptive Cut Motion Adaptive Mix Field Smooth Slow Frame Smooth Slow Frame Cut Frame Mix

When Field 1, Field 2 or Frame is selected, “F1”, “F2”, or “Fr” appears below the keyframe display to show which field is selected.

Computation Audio list box: Displays the audio signal interpolation method. The method is fixed as Variable Pitch. Note

The speed range over which Variable Pitch interpolation can be applied is -3000 to +3000%. m Speed box Displays the speed at the playline position. If you adjust this value, a keyframe is generated and set with the new value.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

n Speed path button Sets the speed path to one of the following. The selection changes with each click of the button. : Step No path is drawn between keyframes. The speed parameter is updated when the playline passes through a keyframe. : Linear Keyframes are connected by straight lines. Speed changes gradually between keyframes. : Bezier Curve Keyframes are connected by a smooth curve, with the speed varying along the curve.

238

Speed Control Dialogs

o Clip name box Specifies the name of the speed clip. Enter the desired name.

Graph section of the Detailed Speed Control dialog 7 Speed and Position tabs 1 Speed and Position graph 6 Zoom controller

5 Speed and position scale 2 Playline

4 Zoom controller

a Speed and Position graph Displays a speed or position graph, selected by clicking the Speed or Position tab. • Speed graph: Allows you to check the speed settings of the entire clip. • Position graph: Allows you to check temporal variations in the clip versus real time. You can change the speed by dragging a keyframe vertically, and change the timecode of a keyframe by dragging it horizontally with the Ctrl key held down. In the latter case, the keyframe cannot be moved beyond an adjacent keyframe.

3 Position bar

The Speed tab shows a logarithmic speed (%) scale, and the Position tab shows a time scale like that of the horizontal position bar. f Zoom controller Zooms in and out on the speed and position scale. Drag to the right to zoom in and drag to the left to zoom out. g Speed and Position tabs Select the speed and position scales.

b Playline Shows the position on the timeline. c Position bar Displays a time scale of the duration of the original clip.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

d Zoom controller Zooms in and out on the position bar. Drag to the right to zoom in and drag to the left to zoom out. You can also use the following options. • Zoom in: Ctrl + + • Zoom out: Ctrl + - (up to full length, 12 hours) • Show entire scale: Ctrl + 0 • Zoom in/zoom out: Right-click on the position bar while holding down the Ctrl key, and drag the mouse up and down. • Zoom in/zoom out fine adjustment: Hold the Ctrl key and drag the zoom controller. e Speed and position scale Displays a speed or position scale, selected with the Speed and Position tabs.

Speed Control Dialogs

239

Detailed Speed Control dialog command button area This area contains the command buttons of the Detailed Speed Control dialog. By default, the buttons in the command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 242) from the main menu.

Default command button configuration

Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. Icon

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

240

Button name

Button function

Step Backward

Moves the playline 1 frame backward with each click.

Step Forward

Moves the playline 1 frame forward with each click.

Mark In

Marks an In point at the playline position.

Play

Plays from the playline position.

Mark Out

Marks an Out point at the playline position.

Play In to Out

Plays the speed clip from the In point to the Out point.

Go to Start

Moves the playline to the Start point of the clip.

Go to End

Moves the playline to the End point of the clip.

Go to In

Moves the playline to the In point, if it exists.

Go to Out

Moves the playline to the Out point, if it exists.

Clear In Mark

Clears the In point, if it exists.

Clear Out Mark

Clears the Out point, if it exists.

All Stop

Stops all operations.

Set Keyframe

Generates a keyframe at the playline position. This button is disabled if there is already a keyframe at the playline position.

Delete Keyframe

Deletes the keyframe at the playline position. This button is disabled if there is no keyframe at the playline position.

Cut Keyframe

Cuts the selected keyframe. This button is disabled when there is no keyframe selected.

Speed Control Dialogs

Icon

Button name

Button function

Paste keyframe

Pastes the keyframe data stored in internal memory to the playline position of the corresponding track. If a keyframe already exists at the playline position, its content is updated. If there is no keyframe at the playline position, a new keyframe is generated. The corresponding track is displayed automatically if it is hidden. This button is disabled when there is no keyframe data in internal memory. Note The keyframe data remains in internal memory even after it is pasted, until the next keyframe copy operation.

Previous Keyframe

Moves the playline to the previous keyframe.

Next Keyframe

Moves the playline to the next keyframe.

Copy Keyframe

Copies the parameter settings of the currently selected keyframe to internal memory. This button is disabled when there is no keyframe selected.

Toggle Field/Frame

Switches between field display, frame 1, and frame 2 display.

Chapter 6 Editing Tools

Speed Control Dialogs

241

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Button function

Rewind

Rewinds the track.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the track.

Stop

Stops play at the current position.

Jog

Selects jog mode.

Shuttle

Selects shuttle mode.

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Switches between jog and shuttle modes.

Zoom In

Expands the timeline scale.

Zoom Out

Reduces the timeline scale.

Show Entire

Shows the entire timeline.

Toggle F1/F2

Switches between field 1, field 2, and Off when field display is selected.

Help

Displays help about the Detailed Speed Control dialog.

Detailed Speed Control dialog main menu Click the Menu button in the Detailed Speed Control dialog to display the Detailed Speed Control dialog main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Undo Undoes an operation in the dialog. You can undo up to 64 operations, in order from the most recent. Redo Redoes an operation that was undone with the [Undo] command. You can redo up to 64 operations. Chapter 6 Editing Tools

242

Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. • Command Button...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. • Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. • Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign

Speed Control Dialogs

command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Detailed Speed Control dialog. Close Closes the Detailed Speed Control dialog.

Editing Operations

Chapter

7

Sequence Editing Operations Setting Edit Points Many editing operations employ edit points to specify a range of material or to mark the position where material should be added to a sequence. You can use the Source Viewer to set edit points in your source material, and use the Master Viewer to set edit points on the timeline. When the Source Viewer is in normal mode, the start point becomes the Mark In point when no edit point exists in the material. When the Source Viewer is in digitize mode, there must be at least one edit point in the material. When no edit point has been set in the Master Viewer or on the timeline, the playline position becomes the Mark In point when an edit is executed. Execution of the edit may not be possible for some combinations of edit point settings.

Sequence Editing Operations

243

Overwrite mode editing results In Overwrite mode, material is placed as a clip and overwrites the contents of the timeline starting from the specified position.

The following table lists the editing results that are obtained for the various combinations of edit points in the Source Viewer and Master Viewer. Master Viewer/ Timeline Editor settings

Source Viewer settings A: No setting (normal mode) a)

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Start point

End point

B: Mark In point only Mark In point

C: Mark Out point only Mark Out point

Material

Material

D: Mark In and Mark Out points b) Mark In point

Mark Out point

Material Material

1: No settings

A-1

Playline

B-1 (normal mode) Start point

End point

End point

C-1 (normal mode)

D-1

Start point

Clip

Section from material start point to end point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position.

Section from material Mark In point to end point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position.

Section from material start point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position.

Section from material Mark In point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position.

B-1 (digitize mode: open- C-1 (digitize mode) end editing) Cannot be executed.

Open-end

Section after material Mark In point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position, in open-end mode. 2: Mark In point only

A-2 Start point

B-2 (normal mode) End point

End point

C-2 (normal mode)

D-2 (three-point editing)

Start point

Clip Mark In point

Section from material start point to end point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point.

Section from material Mark In point to end point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point.

Section from material start point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point.

Section from material Mark In point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point.

B-2 (digitize mode: open- C-2 (digitize mode) end editing) Cannot be executed.

Open-end

Section after material Mark In point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point, in open-end mode. 3: Mark Out point only before playline

A-3 Start point

B-3 (normal mode) End point

End point

C-3 (normal mode)

D-3 (three-point editing)

Start point

Playline Clip Mark Out point

244

Section from material start point to end point is placed on timeline, material end point aligned with timeline Mark Out point.

Sequence Editing Operations

Section from material Mark In point to end point is placed on timeline, material end point aligned with timeline Mark Out point.

Section from material start point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, material Mark Out point aligned with timeline Mark Out point.

B-3 (digitize mode) Cannot be executed.

C-3 (digitize mode) Cannot be executed.

Section from material Mark In point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, up to timeline Mark Out point.

Master Viewer/ Timeline Editor settings

Source Viewer settings A: No setting (normal mode) a) Start point

End point

B: Mark In point only

C: Mark Out point only

Mark In point

Mark Out point

Material

Material

D: Mark In and Mark Out points b) Mark In point

Mark Out point

Material Material

4: Mark Out point only at or after playline position

A-4

B-4

C-4

D-4 (three-point editing)

Section after material start point is placed on timeline, between timeline playline position and Mark Out point.

Section after material Mark In point is placed on timeline, between timeline playline position and Mark Out point.

Section up to material Mark Out point is placed on timeline, between timeline playline position and Mark Out point.

Section from material Mark In point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, up to timeline Mark Out point.

A-5

B-5 (three-point editing)

C-5 (three-point editing)

D-5

Section after material Mark In point is placed on timeline, between timeline Mark In point and Mark Out point.

Section up to material Mark Out point is placed on timeline, between timeline Mark In point and Mark Out point.

Section after material Mark In point is placed on timeline between timeline Mark In point and Mark Out point.

Start point

Mark Out point

5: Mark In point and Mark Out point b) Clip Mark In point

Mark Out point

Start point

Section after material start point is placed on timeline, between timeline Mark In point and Mark Out point.

a) Cannot be executed in digitize mode.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Playline Clip

b) Always set Mark Out points so that they are after Mark In points. Edits cannot be executed when a Mark Out point is located before a Mark In point.

Splice-In mode editing results In Splice-In mode, material is placed as a clip and is inserted into the existing edited contents of the timeline. The clips (or parts of clips) are moved toward the end of the timeline to make room for the insertion.

The following table lists the editing results that are obtained for the various combinations of edit points in the Source Viewer and Master Viewer. Master Viewer/ Timeline Editor settings

Source Viewer settings A: No setting (normal mode) a) Start point

End point

B: Mark In point only Mark In point

C: Mark Out point only Mark Out point

Material

Material

D: Mark In point and Mark Out point b) Mark In point

Mark Out point

Material Material

1: No setting Playline

A-1

B-1 (normal mode) Start point

End point

End point

C-1 (normal mode)

D-1

Start point

Clip

Section from material start point to end point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position.

Section from material Mark In point to end point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position.

Section from material start point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position.

Section from material Mark In point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position.

B-1 (digitize mode: open- C-1 (digitize mode) end editing) Cannot be executed.

Open-end

Section after material Mark In point is placed on timeline, starting from playline position, in open-end mode.

Sequence Editing Operations

245

Master Viewer/ Timeline Editor settings

Source Viewer settings A: No setting (normal mode) a) Start point

End point

B: Mark In point only Mark In point

C: Mark Out point only Mark Out point

Material

Material

D: Mark In point and Mark Out point b) Mark In point

Mark Out point

Material Material

2: Mark In point only

A-2

B-2 (normal mode) Start point

End point

End point

C-2 (normal mode)

D-2 (three-point editing)

Start point

Clip

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Mark In point

Section from material start point to end point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point.

Section from material Mark In point to end point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point.

Section from material start point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point.

Section from material Mark In point to Mark Out point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point.

B-2 (digitize mode: open- C-2 (digitize mode) end editing) Cannot be executed.

Open-end

Section after material Mark In point is placed on timeline, starting from timeline Mark In point, in open-end mode. 3: Mark Out point only before playline

A-3 Cannot be executed.

B-3 Cannot be executed.

C-3 Cannot be executed.

D-3 Cannot be executed.

A-4 Cannot be executed.

B-4 Cannot be executed.

C-4 Cannot be executed.

D-4 Cannot be executed.

A-5

B-5 (three-point editing)

C-5 (three-point editing)

D-5

Section after material Mark In point is placed on timeline, between timeline Mark In point and Mark Out point.

Section up to material Mark Out point is placed on timeline, between timeline Mark In point and Mark Out point.

Section after material Mark In point is placed on timeline between timeline Mark In point and Mark Out point.

Playline Clip Mark Out point

4: Mark Out point only at or after playline Playline Clip Mark Out point

5: Mark In point and Mark Out point b) Clip Mark In point

Mark Out point

Start point

Section after material start point is placed on timeline, between timeline Mark In point and Mark Out point.

a) Cannot be executed in digitize mode. b) Always set Mark Out points so that they are after Mark In points. Edits cannot be executed when a Mark Out point is located before a Mark In point.

246

Sequence Editing Operations

To set edit points in source material Click the Mark In and Mark Out buttons in the command button area of the Source Viewer. You can check edit point settings at the following locations in the Source Viewer. Location

Display

Source monitor

• Mark In point marks (triangular marks that appear in the upper left and lower left of the monitor when the monitor is displaying a frame where a Mark In point has been set) • Mark Out point marks (triangular marks that appear in the upper right and lower right of the monitor when the monitor is displaying a frame where a Mark In point has been set)

Timecode displays

• Mark In point timecode (digitize mode only) • Mark Out point timecode (digitize mode only) • Duration (when Mark In and Mark Out points exist if the Source Viewer is in digitize mode)

To set edit points on the timeline Do one of the following. • Click the Mark In and Mark Out buttons in the command button area of the Master Viewer. • Move the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor playline to the point where you want a clip to start when you place it on the timeline. (The playline position becomes the Mark In point.) You can check edit point settings at the following location in the Master Viewer and Timeline Editor. Location

Display

Position bar

• Mark In point mark (when a Mark In point exists) • Mark Out point mark (when a Mark In point exists)

To synchronize the Source Viewer and Master Viewer You can synchronize the display in the Source Viewer and Master Viewer monitors to the current playline positions in both viewers using the gang function. This function is useful for moving through the footage in both viewers simultaneously. You can also use the gang function when importing clips from an XDCAM device or digitizing a clip in Source Viewer Digitize mode.

1

Load a sequence into the Master Viewer.

2

Load a clip in the Source Viewer.

3

Move the playline in both of the viewers to the position that you want to synchronize.

4

Click the Gang button.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

To find scenes to set edit points Do one of the following to find the scenes where you want to set your edit points. • Use the playback buttons in the Source Viewer or Master Viewer command button area. • Scrub the playline in the Source Viewer or Master Viewer (drag it back and forth on the position bar of the Source Viewer or Master Viewer). • Scrub the playline in the Timeline Editor (drag it back and forth on the timeline). • Activate the tool in which you want to set the edit points (Source Viewer, Master Viewer, or Timeline Editor) and then use the jog and shuttle functions of the DMW-C2 Jog & Shuttle Control Panel or the DMW-C5 Editing Control Panel.

The Gang button is a customizable button available in the Special tab of the Command Button Customizable window.

5

Monitor the footage in either viewer. The audio output is from the active viewer.

The two playlines move together in real-time when seeking, scrubbing, or editing. However, when playing or in fast forward/rewind, only the playline in the active viewer moves, and then the playline in the passive viewer moves an equivalent number of frames when the operation in the active viewer finishes. Note

The gang function is released automatically under the following conditions • When a clip is loaded into the Source Viewer • When trim mode is exited • When pre-roll editing is executed • When tabbing Source Viewer and Master Viewer windows • When focus moves to another window (e.g. Multiple Camera Editor) • When Match frame, Match TC, or Match Reverse Frame operation is executed

Overwrite Editing When you add clips to a sequence or move clips in Overwrite mode, the inserted clips overwrite the content of the timeline at the specified position. If the overwritten section includes a transition effect, the effect is deleted. If the overwritten section includes clip effects, the effects are deleted across the length of the overwriting only.

Sequence Editing Operations

247

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Because newly added clips overwrite existing clips in the sequence, the total duration of the sequence does not change. (If you add a clip to a sequence after the end point, the duration increases by the length of the added clip.) If you move a clip over another clip in the sequence in Segment (Lift/Overwrite) mode, the clip at the move destination is overwritten, and filler is added at the original position of the moved clip. The total duration of the sequence does not change. (If you move a clip to a sequence after the end point, the duration increases by the length of the moved clip.)

Note

You can also drag clips to the timeline in Composer mode. The placement mode (Overwrite or Splice-In) varies as follows, depending whether or not the [Dragging Clips in Composer / Rubber Band Mode defaults to Overwrite] check box in the Edit tab (see page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog is checked. • When the check box is checked: Dragged clips are placed in Overwrite mode. • When the check box is not checked: Dragged clips are placed in Splice-In mode. • When the Shift key is held down while dragging: The check box setting is temporarily reversed, and dragged clips are placed in the opposite mode.

To overwrite a clip from the Source Viewer

1

Specify the overwrite point on the timeline by moving the playline.

2

Click the master track panel to select the tracks needed to edit the clip.

3

Do one of the following.

Note

The range that is overwritten from the clip depends on the following settings in the Normal mode Source Viewer (page 145). • When Mark In and Mark Out points do not exist: The overwrite range is from the start point to the end point. • When a Mark In point only exists: The overwrite range is from the Mark In point to the end point. • When a Mark Out point only exists: The overwrite range is from the start point to the Mark Out point. • When both Mark In and Mark Out points exist: The overwrite range is from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point.

2

• Drag a clip from a Project Explorer bin to the timeline. • Drag a clip from the Source monitor of the Source Viewer to the timeline. The clip is placed at the location where you drop it, overwriting the previous contents of the timeline. Notes

• While you are dragging a clip over the timeline, the mouse pointer is colored red in Overwrite mode and yellow in Splice-In mode. • When you drag the clip with the Shift key held down, the placement mode is temporarily reversed and the clip is placed in the opposite mode (SpliceIn mode when Overwrite mode is selected, and Overwrite mode when Splice-In mode is selected). • Other operating results can be obtained by holding down the following keys as you drag and drop. Alt key: The first frame of the clip is overwritten at a cut point or the playline position. Ctrl key: You can check the video of the drop destination one frame at a time. Ctrl + Alt keys: The last frame of the clip is overwritten at a cut point or the playline position. • Sequences cannot be placed by drag and drop.

Check that the source tracks are selected on the source track panel, and select the tracks where you want to overwrite them on the master track panel. Notes

• The clip will not be overwritten if no tracks are selected on the source track panel and master track panel. • When master tracks only are selected, filler will be added.

3

Click the Overwrite command button. The clip is overwritten, and the playline moves to the frame after the Mark Out point of the overwritten clip.

To drag a clip from a Project Explorer bin or the Source Viewer directly to the timeline

1

Select Segment (Lift/Overwrite) mode.

To move clips on the timeline by using drag and drop

1

Select Segment (Lift/Overwrite) mode.

2

Select one or more clips by doing one of the following. • Click a clip.

248

Sequence Editing Operations

To copy clips on the timeline by using drag and drop

1

Select Segment (Lift/Overwrite) mode.

2

Select one or more clips by doing one of the following. • Click a clip. • Drag from left to right with the mouse right button held down to draw a rectangle around one or more clips. • With the Ctrl key held down, click clips one after the other, or drag from left to right with the mouse right button held down to draw a rectangle around one or more clips. • Move the mouse pointer to the slice number display section or an empty area at the start of the tracks and drag with the mouse left button held down to draw a rectangle.

Note

If you use the last method to select clips while the editing mode is Composer mode, the editing mode automatically changes to Segment (Extract/Splice-in) mode.

3

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

• Drag from left to right with the mouse right button held down to draw a rectangle around one or more clips. • With the Ctrl key held down, click clips one after the other, or drag from left to right with the mouse right button held down to draw a rectangle around one or more clips. • Click a clip and then press the Move Space shortcut key to also select all clips with the same head timecode, and all clips to the right of the selected clip head timecode up to the end of the timeline. • Move the mouse pointer to the slice number display section or an empty area at the start of the tracks and drag with the mouse left button held down to draw a rectangle.

Note

Drag the clip that you want to move, and drop it at any position.

If you use the last method to select clips while the editing mode is Composer mode, the editing mode automatically changes to Segment (Extract/Splice-in) mode.

3

See “Customization Functions” (page 570) for more information about customization.

Move to here

4

The clip overwrites whatever was at the drop destination (the black section in the figure shows filler). Note

Other operating results can be obtained by holding down the following keys as you drag and drop. • Shift key: The system does not select 4-monitor mode. (Normally the system does select 4-monitor mode in Segment mode. You can disable this behavior temporarily with the Shift key. You can also disable it permanently by clearing the [4 Windows Display (Segment Mode)] check box on the Display tab (see page 609) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. The system will then select 4-monitor mode only when you press the Shift key.) • Alt key: The first frame of the clip is overwritten at a cut point or the playline position. • Ctrl key: You can check the video of the drop destination one frame at a time.

Press the Drag and Copy shortcut key.

Drag the clip that you want to copy, and drop it at any position. The clip overwrites whatever was at the drop destination (the black section in the figure shows filler). Note

Other operating results can be obtained by holding down the following keys as you drag and drop. • Shift key: The system does not select 4-monitor mode. (Normally the system does select 4-monitor mode in Segment mode. You can disable this behavior temporarily with the Shift key. You can also disable it permanently by clearing the [4 Windows Display (Segment Mode)] check box on the Display tab (see page 609) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. The system will then select 4-monitor mode only when you press the Shift key.) • Alt key: The first frame of the clip is overwritten at a cut point or the playline position. • Ctrl key: You can check the video of the drop destination one frame at a time.

Sequence Editing Operations

249

To load a clip from a bin into the Master Viewer by using drag and drop

1

Move the playline on the timeline to select the clip overwrite start point.

2

Select the tracks where you want to overwrite the clip on the master track panel.

To insert a clip from the Source Viewer

1

Note

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

The range that is inserted from the clip depends on the following settings in the Normal mode Source Viewer (see page 145). • When Mark In and Mark Out points do not exist: The insertion range is from the start point to the end point. • When a Mark In point only exists: The insertion range is from the Mark In point to the end point. • When a Mark Out point only exists: The insertion range is from the start point to the Mark Out point. • When both Mark In and Mark Out points exist: The insertion range is from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point.

Notes

• Source track material is never placed on a disabled master track. • When a track is disabled on the master track panel, and a clip has a corresponding source track, then filler is added into the master track.

3

Specify the insertion point on the timeline by moving the playline.

Drag a clip from the Project Explorer List View pane and drop it in the monitor of the Master Viewer. In Segment mode, the clip is placed on the timeline using the current placement mode, either Overwrite mode or Splice-In mode. In Composer mode, the way in which the clip is placed varies as follows, depending whether or not the [Dragging Clips in Composer / Rubber Band Mode defaults to Overwrite] check box in the Edit tab (see page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog is checked. • When the check box is checked: The dragged clip is placed in Overwrite mode. • When the check box is not checked: The dragged clip is placed in Splice-In mode. • When the Shift key is held down while dragging: The check box setting is temporarily reversed, and the dragged clip is placed in the opposite mode.

Splice-In Editing When you add clips to a sequence or move clips in SpliceIn mode, the clips are inserted into the content of the timeline at the insertion position. If the insertion point is over a clip, that clip is divided at the insertion point. If the insertion point is between clips and there is a transition effect at that point, the effect is deleted. If the insertion point is over a clip and a clip effect has been applied to that clip, the effect is preserved. When you add clips to the timeline the total duration of the timeline increases, because the existing clips on the timeline shift to the right. Moving a clip on the timeline in Segment (Extract/Splicein) mode simply rearranges the order of the clips, so the total duration of the timeline does not change.

2

Check that the source tracks are selected on the source track panel, and select the tracks where you want to insert them on the master track panel. Notes

• The clip will not be inserted if no tracks are selected on the source track panel and master track panel. • When master tracks only are selected, filler will be inserted.

3

Click the Splice-In command button. The clip is inserted in Splice-In mode, and the playline moves to the frame after the Mark Out point of the inserted clip.

To drag a clip from a Project Explorer bin directly to the timeline

1

Select Segment (Extract/Splice-in) mode. The subsequent steps are the same as those described in the “Overwrite Editing” section. See “To drag a clip from a Project Explorer bin or the Source Viewer directly to the timeline” (page 248) for more information.

To move clips on the timeline by using drag and drop

1

Select Segment (Extract/Splice-in) mode.

2

Select one or more clips by doing one of the following. • Click a clip.

250

Sequence Editing Operations

Note

If you use the last method to select clips while the editing mode is Composer mode, the editing mode automatically changes to Segment (Extract/Splice-in) mode.

Note

If you use the last method to select clips while the editing mode is Composer mode, the editing mode automatically changes to Segment (Extract/Splice-in) mode.

3

Drag the clip that you want to move, and drop it at any position.

3

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

• Drag from left to right with the mouse right button held down to draw a rectangle around one or more clips. • With the Ctrl key held down, click clips one after the other, or drag from left to right with the mouse right button held down to draw a rectangle around one or more clips. • Move the mouse pointer to the slice number display section or an empty area at the start of the tracks and drag with the mouse left button held down to draw a rectangle.

• Drag from left to right with the mouse right button held down to draw a rectangle around one or more clips. • With the Ctrl key held down, click clips one after the other, or drag from left to right with the mouse right button held down to draw a rectangle around one or more clips. • Click a clip and then click the Move Space button to also select all clips with the same head timecode, and all clips to the right of the selected clip head timecode up to the end of the timeline. • Move the mouse pointer to the slice number display section or an empty area at the start of the tracks and drag with the mouse left button held down to draw a rectangle.

Press the Drag and Copy shortcut key. See “Customization Functions” (page 570) for more information about customization.

4

Drag the clip that you want to copy, and drop it at any position. The new clip is inserted at the insertion point, dividing the existing clip at that point into two.

Move to here

Note

Other operating results can be obtained by holding down the following keys as you drag and drop. • Shift key: The system does not select 4-monitor mode. • Alt key: The first frame of the clip is inserted at a cut point or the playline position. • Ctrl key: You can check the video of the drop destination one frame at a time.

The new clip is inserted at the insertion point, dividing the existing clip at that point into two. Note

Other operating results can be obtained by holding down the following keys as you drag and drop. • Shift key: The system does not select 4-monitor mode. • Alt key: The first frame of the clip is inserted at a cut point or the playline position. • Ctrl key: You can check the video of the drop destination one frame at a time.

To load clips from bins into the Master Viewer by using drag and drop

1

Move the playline on the timeline to select the clip insertion start point.

2

Select the tracks where you want to insert the clip on the master track panel.

To copy clips on the timeline by using drag and drop

1

Select Segment (Extract/Splice-in) mode.

2

Select one or more clips by doing one of the following. • Click a clip.

Note

Source track material is never inserted into a disabled master track.

3

While holding down the Ctrl key, drag the clip from the Project Explorer List View pane and drop it in the monitor of the Master Viewer. The clip is inserted in Splice-In mode.

Sequence Editing Operations

251

Replace Editing Replace editing allows you to replace a specified range on the timeline with a clip from the Source Viewer, while preserving the duration of the specified range.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

If there is a transition effect or clip effect applied to the range being replaced, the effect is preserved. However, the effect is deleted if you specify the replacement range by Mark In and Mark Out points on the timeline. The replacement range is from the In point to the Out point of the clip under the playline. The Mark In point or Mark Out point is ignored.

To replace clips on the timeline

1

Set Mark In and Mark Out points on the timeline to specify the range to replace.

• When neither a Mark In point nor a Mark Out point is set (whole clip)

You do not need to set Mark In and Mark Out points if you want to replace an entire clip. The following figure show how Mark In and Mark Out points determine the replacement range relative to the playline position. • When Mark In and Mark Out points are set

The replacement range is from the In point to the Out point of the clip under the playline.

The replacement range is from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point. • When the playline is outside the Mark In point to Mark Out point range

2

Load into the Source Viewer the clip that you want to replace the specified range.

3

Move the playlines on the timeline and in the Source Viewer to the respective replacement origin frames.

4

Check that the source tracks are selected on the source track panel, and select the tracks where you want to insert them on the master track panel. Notes

• The specified range will not be replaced if no tracks are selected on the source track panel and master track panel. • When master tracks only are selected, filler will be inserted.

5

Click the Replace button. 1) The specified range is replaced.

The replacement range is still from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point. • When either a Mark In point or Mark Out point is set

252

Sequence Editing Operations

1)By default, the Replace button does not appear in the command button area of the normal mode Source Viewer. To use this button, you will need to customize the command button area. For more information about customization, see Command Button Customize window (page 570).

Switching the Timecode Display Mode

Key track operations are almost the same as video track operations. This section explains only those operations which are different.

As required, you can switch the type of timecode displayed in viewer position displays.

To display key tracks

To switch the playline time display

To add and delete key tracks The corresponding key track is added or deleted whenever you add or delete a video track.

Sync lock and track lock Key tracks can be sync locked and track locked in the same way as for video tracks. If you hide a sync locked key track, the sync lock is released. Track locks remain in force when key tracks are hidden.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Do one of the following. • Select [Timeline View] from the context menu of the playline position display of a viewer (Source Viewer or Master Viewer), and select one of the following subcommands. • VITC • LTC • FTC • CTL • Activate a viewer (Source Viewer or Master Viewer), and then click the TC/CTL button or TCR button (only in Source Viewer).

Use the timeline track panel. See “To display external key tracks” (page 178) for more information.

To monitor key output When set to CTL timecode display, “CTL Pos” appears as the timecode type indication (to the left of the playline position display), and the color of the timecode changes to green. Note

VITC and LTC can only be selected in Source Viewer.

To reset the playline time to CTL timecode

1 2

Move the playline to the point where you want to reset the CTL timecode. Do one of the following. • Select [Timecode View] >[CTL Reset] from the context menu of the viewer’s playline position display. • Activate a viewer (Source Viewer or Master Viewer), and click the CTL Reset button. The timecode of the playline position is reset to 00:00:00:00. “CTL Pos” appears as the timecode type indication (to the left of the playline position display), and the color of the timecode changes to green.

Key Track Operations You can use key tracks to specify different material for key fills and key sources, which makes it possible to do composite editing. By applying transition effects to the filler on key tracks you can create effects such as key fades and key wipes.

Click the Key Monitor button. To stop monitoring, click the Key Monitor button again. The Toggle FG/Key Monitor button toggles between video output, key output, and video + key output with each click. Note

By default, the Key Monitor button and the Toggle FG/ Key Monitor button do not appear in the various command button areas. To display these buttons, you need to customize the command button areas.

To edit key tracks When key tracks are displayed, they can be edited independently of video tracks. When key tracks are hidden, they can automatically have the same operations applied to them that are applied to the corresponding video tracks. To select this mode of operation, check the [Auto Edit Hidden Key Tracks] check box in the Edit tab (see page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. However, Trimming and Segment mode editing are not possible if transitions on the video and key tracks are not in the same positions.

Sequence-in-Sequence Function You can place part or all of any sequence into another sequence. To do so, specify a range by setting Mark In and Mark Out points in the sequence to be placed, and then place it in nesting mode or versioning mode.

Nesting mode The sequence is placed into another sequence as a single clip.

Sequence Editing Operations

253

: Transition effect

Source track panel Master track panel

V2 V1

In Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Sequence is pasted as a single clip.

The range in the placed clip shown by the dotted lines can be trimmed. In the above figure, the range that can be trimmed is from the start point of the clip on the V1 track in the original sequence to the end point of the clip on the V2 track.

The sequence is placed into another sequence with its hierarchical structure intact. If audio rubber band settings have been made for audio tracks, these settings are reflected on the destination tracks.

V4

V3

V3

V2

V2

V1

V1

V3

V4

V1

V3

V2

V2

V4

V1

Sequence 1

Out

Versioning mode

V4

Sequence 2

See “Patching tracks (mapping)” (page 178) for more information about how to patch tracks.

The content of source tracks cannot be placed unless corresponding tracks exist in the placement destination.

: Transition effect

V2

V3

V3

V2

V2

V1

V1

Sequence 3

V1

In

Out V2

Sequence is pasted with its hierarchical structure intact.

The clips which make up the placed sequence can be trimmed separately. The trimmable range is from the start point to the end point of each clip. Track patching The internal tracks of a sequence appear in the Timeline Editor source track panel when a sequence is loaded into the Source Viewer in versioning mode. In versioning mode, you can use patch operations to change the track order before placing the sequence.

V1

V2

V3

V1

Sequence 4

The required tracks must be added before loading the sequence. Alternatively, the required tracks can be added automatically using the [Auto-Add tracks when subsequence place to timeline in versioning mode] setting in the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. Note

Only the required video tracks are added automatically. The addition of audio tracks is not supported.

To place a sequence into another sequence To paste sequence A into sequence B, proceed as follows.

254

Sequence Editing Operations

1

If you want to use nesting mode, execute a Render Whole on sequence A.

2

Set Mark In and Mark Out points within sequence A to mark the range to be placed.

3

Note

To cut and paste the sequence, select [Cut to SV] from the main menu.

In sequence B, generate the required tracks, and then move the playline to the point where sequence A will be inserted. Load sequence A into the Source Viewer. You can also copy sequence A to the clipboard. (In this case, the results are the same as placing in versioning mode, so you can skip step 5.)

5

In the Source Viewer command button palette, click the Nesting Mode button or the Versioning Mode button to select the sequence placement mode. If you select versioning mode, you can rearrange the order of the source tracks before placing the sequence. To do so, patch the source tracks to the desired master tracks. Click the Overwrite, Splice-In, or Replace button to select the editing mode and execute the insertion.

“Clipboard” appears in the Source Viewer clip list box, and a clipboard icon appears in the Source monitor, allowing you to confirm that the sequence has been copied to the clipboard. The names of the tracks in the sequence appear on the source track panel.

3

Patch the source track to the master tracks where you want to paste the sequence.

4

Move the playline to the point where you want to paste the sequence.

5

Select [Paste from SV] from the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor main menu.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

4

6

• Right click the range specified in step 1 and select [Copy to SV] from the context menu.

The events are pasted at the specified point.

Sequence A is inserted into sequence B in the selected editing mode. Notes

• Before placing sequences, always activate the required tracks at the placement destination. • Before placing a sequence in nesting mode, you should do a Render Whole on the sequence. Whenever you place an unrendered sequence, that sequence becomes a media offline part of the placement destination. Be sure to do a Render Whole on a sequence before placing it. • In versioning mode, transitions are lost when Mark In points or Mark Out points are set inside transition effects. • The Fit to Fill function cannot be used with sequences placed in versioning mode.

Sequence Cut, Copy, and Paste Operations This section explains how to copy sequences and place them on other tracks.

1

Set Mark In and Mark Out points in the sequence, or select several clips and set a copy range in Segment mode.

2

Do one of the following. • Select [Copy to SV] from the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor main menu.

Sequence Editing Operations

255

Edit While Digitizing

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

You can begin displaying and editing clips while the clip is being ingested and digitized. In this mode, you can start editing the part of the clip that has been digitized, before the entire clip is available. A short delay between the start of digitizing is required before the clip is available for editing. This function is useful for reducing the overall time taken required from ingest to export. Content that is being digitized from VTR, rendered to bin, or being ingested by the Sonaps Ingest Server can be edited while digitizing. Adding a clip that is being digitized to the sequence on the timeline or to the Source Viewer displays the part that has already been digitized. In Source Viewer, the end point is updated automatically every few seconds as new material becomes available. In the Timeline Editor, the end point is not updated automatically, but can be updated manually by trimming the clip or using the Extend button. The ingest status is displayed in the playline position timecode area of Source Viewer. The timecode area is colored orange while material is being digitized. After the entire clip has been digitized, the timecode area starts flashing to indicate that digitizing has finished. The timecode area flashes until you click the Source Viewer window. When using Sonaps, clips in the Material List can be edited while being digitized. The clips are created as soon as digitizing starts in the Sonaps Ingest Server. The following icons are displayed for remote content. Icon

Function The clip/material has already been ingested in Sonaps. The clip/material is being ingested in Sonaps or the clip (XDCAM, MXF) is being imported.

For more information about working with Sonaps, see “Working With Sonaps” (page 690). Note

The playback video and audio of sections that are being added to a clip while being digitized may vanish if you perform an editing operation (splice-in, overwrite, etc.) that causes the timeline duration to exceed 12 hours. Proper operation is not guaranteed when the timeline duration exceeds 12 hours, so you should avoid such operations. Operations on clips being digitized As shown below, some Project Explorer operations are not supported for clips being digitized.

256

Edit While Digitizing

Playing clips Clips can be played in the Source Viewer even while they are being digitized. When you load a clip, the playline is positioned at the beginning of the clip. If the playline is moved to the end of the clip, the playline continues to move as digitizing progresses. The scale on the position bar, the positions of Mark In and Mark Out points, and various mark positions also change gradually. As shown below, some Source Viewer operations are different from normal Source Viewer operations when the loaded clip is still being digitized. Operation

Difference

Play In to Out

When no Mark Out point exists, play continues until it is stopped manually.

Loop Play Play to Out Play Forward

After variable-speed play to the end of the digitized section, the playline stops at the last frame and “Digitize In Progress” appears in the Source monitor.

Go to End

Jumps to the last frame that has been digitized.

Go to Out

If no Out point exists, jumps to the last frame that has been digitized.

Preroll Play (3 Seconds)

Play continues until digitizing stops.

Preroll Play (5 Seconds) Preroll Review (3 Seconds) Preroll Review (5 Seconds) Preroll Review from Transition (3 Seconds) Preroll Review from Transition (5 Seconds) Mark Clip

When no Mark Out point exists, the target is the section that has been digitized up to the present.

Set Essence Mark

Settable only in the section that has been digitized.

Speed Control

Not supported

Make Sub Clip

When no Mark Out point exists, the target is up to the last frame that has been digitized.

Notes

• The position bar in the Source Viewer starts flashing when digitizing is complete, and continues to flash until an operation other than playback is performed. It starts flashing and continues to flash even when digitizing finishes during playback.

• Playback of an Edit While Digitizing clip in the Source Viewer does not stop automatically. Even after digitizing finishes and playback reaches the End point, the “Digitize in Progress” indication remains visible and playback continues until you explicitly stop it. • When an Edit While Digitizing clip with no Out point is placed on the timeline in Source Viewer Overwrite/ Splice-in mode, the clip extends in the timeline automatically, but playback in the Source Viewer stops.

The results differ in Overwrite mode and Splice-In mode, as shown below. • Overwrite mode Previously set Mark Out point Automatically extended clip Digitizing stops

You can place clips on the timeline in Splice-In or Overwrite mode while they are still being digitized. When you place a such a clip on the timeline with Mark In and Mark Out points set, you can edit it in the same way as a completely digitized clip. The timeline displays only the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points of the clip, and the clip is not extended as digitizing progresses (although the range that can be trimmed does become longer). When an Edit While Digitizing clip is placed on the timeline with no Mark Out point set, the clip is extended automatically as digitizing progresses.

• Splice-In mode

Previously set Mark Out point Automatically extended clip

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Original sequence remains.

Editing operations

Digitizing stops

Filler is inserted.

Note

The function to allow the clip to extend automatically is configured during the XPRI NS installation process. Source Viewer Mark In and Mark Out points settings for clips on the timeline Setting and deleting Mark In points in the Source Viewer has no effect on clips that have already been placed on the timeline. However, Mark Out points set in the Source Viewer do affect clips on the timeline. Even when a clip on the timeline already has a Mark Out point, a Mark Out point set in the Source Viewer receives priority and the clip’s extension stops. If you delete a Mark Out point in the Source Viewer, it is also deleted from the clip on the timeline. Extension of the clip resumes and continues until another Mark Out point is set.

Limitations Editing during digitizing is subject to the following limitations. • When a clip without a Mark Out point is placed on the timeline, undo is not available until a Mark Out point is set. However, you can press Ctrl + Z to cancel the placement. • Exporting and recording to VTRs are not supported.

Master Viewer Mark Out point settings For clips that have been placed on the timeline without Mark Out points set, you can set Mark Out points using any of the normal Master Viewer methods (command button, shortcut key, or control panel). If you set a Mark Out point in the digitized section, the clip’s automatic extension stops. The Mark Out point setting also stops play if the clip is being played. Automatically modified Mark Out points If digitizing of a clip ends or stops before reaching a previously set Mark Out point, the Mark Out point is changed to the point where digitizing ended or stopped, and extension of the clip stops.

Edit While Digitizing

257

Linear-Like Editing

Mark In point

Mark Out point

Material

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Linear-like editing is a procedure reminiscent of tapebased linear video editors. It allows you to digitize material and place it on the timeline in a single seamless operation, while previewing the timeline around cut points and checking the transitions between clips. This is an efficient way to proceed, because it allows you to digitize material and set up transitions at the same time.

Flow of Operations This section explains the steps in linear-like editing. It explains how to use the three-point editing method 1) to create clips from material on a VTR, and explains the processes that take place automatically in the Source Viewer, in the Master Viewer, and on the timeline after you place the clips on the timeline in Overwrite mode. 1) Three-point editing: An editing technique that allows you to specify a clip’s duration by setting any three of the following four points: material Mark In point, material Mark Out point, timeline Mark In point, timeline Mark Out point.

Edit point settings in the Source Viewer

Clip Mark In point

Edit point settings in the Master Viewer/timeline

3

Click the Overwrite Mode Record button. A control signal is sent to the VTR to cue it up to the device preroll time position in advance of the digitize start position. In the Master Viewer and on the timeline, the playline moves to a point equal to the Mark In point minus the preroll time set in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog (system preroll time).

Playline Move (CUE UP)

Note

• Linear-like editing is not supported for i.LINK devices. You can, however, digitize material and create clips. For details, see the notes at the end of the following procedure. • Linear-like editing to external key tracks is not supported. • For limitations and precautions when digitizing i.LINK inputs, see page 86 in Logging Tool.

1

Margin Device preroll time

Movement in the Source Viewer

Put the Source Viewer into digitize mode.

See “Switching the Source Viewer Operating Mode” (page 260) for more information about how to put the Source Viewer into digitize mode.

While viewing the material in the Source Viewer, set three out of the four edit points, one or two in the Source Viewer and one or two in the Master Viewer or on the timeline. See “Setting Edit Points” (page 243) for more information about how to set edit points.

258

Material

Playline

This makes linear-like editing available.

2

Mark In point Mark Out point

Linear-Like Editing

Move (CUE UP) Clip Mark In point System preroll time

Movement in the Master Viewer/timeline

When the cue-up finishes, the cued up video appears as a still image in the Source Viewer. The Master Viewer and timeline play the video of the preroll segment.

disappears and is replaced by a Mark In point in both the Source Viewer and Master Viewer.

Play (PLAY)

Mark In point

Mark Out point

Stop

Material Mark In point Margin

Mark Out point

Material Digitized

Movement in the Source Viewer

Movement in the Source Viewer Timeline play (POST)

Timeline playback (PRE) Clip

Clip

Clip Mark In point

Mark In point

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Preroll segment

Postroll segment Preroll segment

System postroll time

Movement in the Master Viewer/timeline

When VTR playback reaches the margin prior to the Mark In point (as set in the Logging Properties dialog), digitizing starts and a clip is created in Project Explorer. The progress bar displays the progress of the digitizing. When the Master Viewer and timeline reach the Mark In point, they switch to playback of the material being digitized. The material playback continues up to the Mark Out point.

Digitizing (DIGITIZE) Mark In point

Mark Out point

Material Margin

Margin

Movement in the Source Viewer Play/digitizing (RECORD) Clip

Material Mark In point

Movement in the Master Viewer/timeline

When digitizing the margin after the Mark Out point finishes, the VTR stops. After the end of material playback, the Master Viewer and timeline play up to the postroll time (system postroll time) set in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog, and then stop at the Mark Out point. The digitized material is placed on the timeline as a clip. The Mark Out point

Movement in the Master Viewer/timeline

4

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add more clips to the timeline. Notes

• If you click the Splice-In mode record button, material is inserted at the specified position on the timeline. • If no Mark In point is placed on the timeline in Splice-In mode, the preroll segment is not digitized. • If no Mark In point is placed on the timeline in Overwrite mode, the preroll segment is digitized only if the duration between the timeline head and the Out point is shorter than the duration in the Source Viewer. • When you use the Overwrite Mode Record button or Splice-In Mode Record button to digitize clips, the results are placed to the timeline in Overwrite or Splice-In mode, and a preview is carried out. • If you click the Overwrite or Splice-In button instead of the Overwrite Mode Record or Splice-In Mode Record button, the material is digitized and placed on the timeline in Overwrite or Splice-In mode, but a timeline preview is not carried out. • In open-end digitizing 1) you need to stop playback manually after step 3. • When you play back the timeline during editing, only the track that is being edited will play back within the margins of the preroll segment. 1)Open-end digitizing: An editing method that allows you to digitize without setting a Mark Out point in either the Source Viewer or the timeline in advance. A Mark In point on the timeline is optional, subject to the conditions noted above. The various points are set automatically while digitizing.

Linear-Like Editing

259

Switching the Source Viewer Operating Mode

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Depending on what you want to accomplish, you can switch the Source Viewer into either of the following operating modes. (By default the Source Viewer starts in normal mode.) Normal mode: Edit existing clips and place them on the timeline or storyboard. Digitize mode: Create clips by digitizing material and place the clips on the timeline or storyboard.

4

Click the V and A1 to A8 buttons to select the recording target tracks.

5

Set edit points, both in the Source Viewer and in the Master Viewer and on the timeline. See “Setting Edit Points” (page 243) for more information about how to set edit points.

6

Do one of the following to start digitizing. To place the clip in Overwrite mode Click the Overwrite Mode Record button.

To switch to digitize mode Do one of the following to switch the Source Viewer from normal mode to digitize mode. • Select an input device in the Source Viewer clip list. Select Port1, Port2, or i.LINK to select a device for digitizing (Sony Record Engine, Matrox (Xmio) Record, or i.LINK Record Engine). • Check that the Logging Tool is not running, and click the X1 or i.LINK command button.

To place the clip in Splice-In mode Click the Splice-In Mode Record button. See step 3 in “Flow of Operations” for an explanation of what occurs after you click the Record button.

A reel clip is created in a bin.1) 1)When there is a sequence open on the timeline, clips are created in the bin that contains the sequence. When you select Bin Selection... from the main menu to open the Bin Selection dialog and select another destination bin, clips are created in the bin.

Note

The Source Viewer cannot be put into digitize mode while the Logging Tool is running. Exit the Logging Tool before pressing an input source button.

Notes

• If you click the Overwrite or Splice-In button instead of the Overwrite Mode Record or Splice-In Mode Record button, the material is digitized and placed on the timeline in Overwrite or Splice-In mode, but a timeline preview is not carried out. • If there is a transition effect in the range overwritten by a clip placement, the transition effect is deleted. • Other operations are not possible during execution of linear-like editing.

To switch to normal mode Do one of the following to switch the Source Viewer from digitize mode to normal mode. • Load a clip into the Source Viewer. • Press the Source Viewer focus hot key, which can be assigned to any key on the keyboard. Note

You cannot put the Source Viewer into normal mode while digitizing. Wait for the digitizing to finish and then try again.

Creating Reel Clips This example explains how to create reel clips from VTR material.

1

Load the tape into the VTR.

2

Put the Source Viewer into digitize mode by selecting the device for digitizing (Sony Record Engine, Matrox (Xmio) Record, or i.LINK Record Engine). The input video from the VTR appears in the Source monitor and the Reel Database dialog opens.

3

260

Modify the reel name as required and click the OK button.

Linear-Like Editing

7

If you are conducting open-end editing (see cells B-1 and B-2 in “Setting Edit Points” (page 243)), do one of the following to stop the digitizing. These operations can also be used when a Mark Out point already exists, to stop digitizing before it stops automatically. To stop after digitizing a margin Click the Overwrite Mode Record button, Splice-In Mode Record button, or Mark Out button. To stop without digitizing a margin Click the All Stop button. Note

When you have selected an i.LINK input source, digitizing does not stop when you click the Mark Out point button. Click the All Stop button to stop digitizing.

After digitizing finishes, the clip is placed on the timeline in the mode selected by the Record button (Overwrite or Splice-In). To cancel execution of linear-like editing Click the All Cancel button. The clip is deleted from the bin, and is not placed on the timeline. However, the edit points remain in the Source Viewer and the Master Viewer. Chapter 7 Editing Operations

To undo linear-like editing operations Click the Undo button, or press Ctrl + Z on the keyboard. You can cancel placement of the clip on the timeline. However, the clip remains in the bin. To redo the operation, click the Redo button, or press Ctrl + Y on the keyboard.

Linear-Like Editing

261

Mixing Clips of Different Frame Sizes

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

You can use clips with different frame sizes in your projects. Regardless of their original frame size, all clips can be placed directly on the timeline because the frame size is converted whenever necessary to a frame size specified in advance. For example, if you are making the transition from SD to HD production, you can still make effective use of your SD clip resources. You can place them as always in your HD projects and XPRI NS will make the necessary frame size conversions.

5

Load an SD clip into the Source Viewer (see page 144).

6

Place the SD clip on the timeline. The SD clip is automatically converted to the proper frame size, according to the settings in the Sequence Settings Dialog (see page 195).

Converting SD project material with a 4:3 aspect ratio for use in HD projects The following conversions are performed, according to the settings in the Frame Size Convert section of the Sequence Settings Dialog (see page 195). • When [Fit to height] is selected The frame height is enlarged to match the frame height of the HD project, and the left and right sides become transparent.

Notes

•

The aspect ratio mismatch indicator is displayed on clips placed on the timeline when there is an aspect ratio mismatch between the clip and the sequence on the timeline. For example, when the clip has a 4:3 aspect ratio and the sequence on the timeline has a 16:9 aspect ratio. • It is not possible to mix clips with different frame rates in the same project. Input sources are converted to 29.97fps (NTSC) or 25fps (PAL) when files are imported. However, interlaced and progressive clips with corresponding frame rates can be mixed on the timeline. Specifically, 59.94i and 29.97p scan formats can be mixed on a 59.94i timeline, and 50i and 25p scan formats can be mixed on a 50i timeline. Progressive scan mode clips are not converted to interlaced scan mode. Internally, all processing is performed in interlaced scan mode format. • It is not possible to mix still images of different video formats. If you want to use the images, import them again in the same format.

• When [Fit to width] is selected The frame width is enlarged to match the frame width of the HD project, and the top and bottom edges of the picture (the shaded sections in the following figure) are cut.

Flow of operations The following example shows how to use SD (VTR) material in an HD project.

262

1

Create an SD project in Project Explorer (see page 43), or open an existing SD project.

2

Use the Logging Tool (see page 83) to create clips by digitizing VTR material.

3

Create an HD project in Project Explorer, or open an existing HD project.

4

Create a sequence in the Timeline Editor (see page 171).

Mixing Clips of Different Frame Sizes

• When [Specify] is selected The width and height are enlarged to the specified size.

Converting SD project material with 16:9 aspect ratio for use in HD projects The following conversions are performed, according to the settings in the Frame Size Conversion section of the Sequence Settings Dialog (see page 195). • When [Fit to height] is selected The frame height is enlarged to match the frame height of the HD project. Chapter 7 Editing Operations

• When [Fit to width] is selected The frame width is reduced to match the frame width of the SD project, and the top and bottom sides become transparent.

• When [Fit to width] is selected The frame width is enlarged to match the frame width of the HD project. • When [Specify] is selected The width and height are reduced to the specified size.

• When [Specify] is selected The width and height are enlarged to the specified size.

Converting HD project material for use in an SD project with a 4:3 aspect ratio The following conversions are performed, according to the settings in the Frame Size Convert section of the Sequence Settings Dialog (see page 195). • When [Fit to height] is selected The frame height is reduced to match the frame height of the SD project, and the left and right edges of the picture (the shaded sections in the following figure) are cut.

Converting HD project material for use in an SD project with a 16:9 aspect ratio The following conversions are performed, according to the settings in the Frame Size Conversion section of the Sequence Settings Dialog (see page 195). • When [Fit to height] is selected The frame height is reduced to match the frame height of the SD project.

• When [Fit to width] is selected The frame width is reduced to match the frame width of the SD project.

Mixing Clips of Different Frame Sizes

263

3

By adjusting parameters in the Effect Editor, you can convert the clip to the desired size and adjust its position. See page 308 for more information about the Effect Editor.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

• When [Specify] is selected The width and height are reduced to the specified size.

To perform all frame size conversions in a sequence automatically Select your preferred frame size conversion method in the Sequence Settings Dialog (see page 195) before you edit the timeline. When you do an editing operation on the timeline, the frame size of all target clips will be converted automatically according to the settings made in the Sequence Settings dialog. See the previous section “Flow of operations” (page 262) for the results of frame size settings made in the Sequence Settings dialog.

To convert the frame size of any single clip in a sequence You can use the Frame Size Conversion effect to convert the frame size of any clip on the timeline to a desired size. Note

Once you use this method to set the size of a specific clip, that clip will be protected from automatic frame size conversion to the settings in the Sequence Settings dialog.

1

Select the Video FX bin in the Clip folder of the Tree View pane of FX Explorer See page 296 for more information about FX Explorer.

2

264

Select Frame Size Conversion in the Effect View pane, and drag and drop it on the video clip whose frame size you want to change.

Mixing Clips of Different Frame Sizes

Storyboard Editing

a copy and paste if you drag with the Ctrl key held down.)

To display the storyboard

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Do one of the following in the Timeline Editor. • Click the Timeline View Menu button and select [Open Storyboard]. • Click the Toggle Timeline Display command button. Note

You can select to hide the timeline when opening the storyboard on the Other tab (page 619) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Selecting an Editing Mode

1

Do one of the following to activate the Master Viewer. • Select an editing target clip on the timeline. • Press the Master Viewer focus hot key, which can be assigned to any key on the keyboard.

2

Click one of the following buttons. • Segment (Extract/Splice-In) Mode • Segment (Lift/Overwrite) Mode The Master Viewer enters the selected mode, and the clip at the playline position is activated on the storyboard.

Exchanging Storyboard Clips

1

Do one of the following to select a storyboard clip. • Click the Next Clip or Previous Clip button. • Click a clip on the storyboard. To select several clips at once Click the first (or last) clip, and then click the last (or first) clip with the Shift key held down. To select several clips individually Click each clip that you want to select while holding down the Ctrl key. Note

Exchanging of non-contiguous selected clips is not supported.

2

Drag the clip(s) and drop at a destination between other clips on the storyboard. (The operation becomes

Storyboard Editing

265

Clip exchange example

Storyboard

Click Clip 1, then click Clip 3 with Shift key held down.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Drag and drop

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 4

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 4

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 4

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Timeline Playline

Playline

Editing Storyboard Clips Cut Select a clip and perform one of the operations in the Operation column of the following table. The editing result differs according to the operation. See step 1 in “Exchanging Storyboard Clips” (page 265) for more information about how to select clips.

266

Insertion guide

Operation

Editing result Clipboard

Click the Extract button.

The selected clip is deleted, and the neighboring clips slide into the gap left by the deletion.

Click the Lift button.

The selected clip is deleted, and filler is inserted into the gap left by the deletion.

Press Ctrl + X or the Delete key on the keyboard, or select [Delete] from the context menu.

Same result as extract operation

Composer mode Segment (Extract/ Splice-in) mode Segment (Lift/ Overwrite) mode

Storyboard Editing

Same result as lift operation

The deleted clip is copied to the clipboard.

The deleted clip is not copied to the clipboard.

Cut examples

Clipboard

Clip 3 Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Clip 3 Clip 3 Clip 3

Storyboard

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Extract

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 4

Timeline Playline

Playline

Clipboard

Clip 3

Clip 3 Clip 3 Clip 3

Storyboard

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 3

Lift

Clip 1

Clip 2

Filler

Clip 4

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Filler

Clip 4

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Filler

Clip 4

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Filler

Clip 4

Timeline Playline

Copy Select a clip and do one of the following. See step 1 in “Exchanging Storyboard Clips” (page 265) for more information about how to select clips.

Playline

• Click the Timeline Editor Menu button and select [Copy] from the main menu. • Select [Copy] from the context menu of a storyboard clip. • Press Ctrl + C on the keyboard.

Storyboard Editing

267

Paste After cutting (except with the Delete key) or copying a storyboard clip, proceed as follows.

1

2

Press Ctrl + V, or select [Paste] from the main menu of the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor. The clip that was copied to the clipboard is inserted before the selected clip.

Do one of the following to select the clip after the position where you want to paste the clip.

Note

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

• Repeatedly press the Previous Clip button or the Next Clip button until the clip after the paste destination is selected. • Click the clip after the paste destination.

If you move the playline by scrubbing or some other operation after carrying out step 1, the clip is inserted at the new playline position.

Paste example

Clipboard

Clip 3

Clip 3 Clip 3 Clip 3

Paste destination

Storyboard

Clip that was copied to the clipboard is inserted and activated

Select the clip after the paste destination. Paste button

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 3

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 3

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 3

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 2

Clip 4

Clip 1

Clip 3

Clip 2

Clip 4

Timeline Playline

Trim You can trim a clip on the timeline directly from the storyboard.

1

Select [Open Storyboard] from the Timeline View menu.

2

Select Segment mode. Clips cannot be trimmed in Composer mode.

3

Select a clip on the storyboard.

4

Click either the upper or lower timecode of the selected clip. The timecode field becomes editable.

268

Storyboard Editing

Playline

5

Enter a new timecode and press the Enter key. The corresponding clip on the timeline is trimmed according to the entered timecode, and the clip duration at the bottom of the clip icon is automatically updated.

Notes

• You can select the type of timecode displayed in the clip icons on the Display tab (page 609) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. • The timecode above the upper row represents the clip head timecode. Modifying this timecode performs Bside trimming.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

• The timecode below the lower row represents the clip tail timecode. Modifying this timecode performs A-side trimming. • Gaps are not added between clips by trimming. Clips are always trimmed in Splice-In mode. • If grouping is enabled on the timeline and a clip within a grouped clip is trimmed on the storyboard, all clips within the group are also trimmed. Trimming a clip within a group on the storyboard may affect the sync between clips.

Storyboard Editing

269

4

Creating Speed Clips

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

You can create speed clips (clips whose duration has been changed) from digitized clips. The duration of speed clips is limited to 3 hours in the forward direction and 1 hour 30 minutes in the reverse direction. Speed clips are stored in a central directory, specified using the [Default speed clip bin] setting on the Speed Clip tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. Alternatively, you can save speed clips in the last used bin within the project when the speed clip is created using the [Use last selected bin] setting. See“Speed Clip tab” (page 618) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

If you are in the Basic Speed Control dialog, set the following parameters. • Head and Tail margin if you want to create a speed clip of length between the In and Out points • Computation Video (video signal interpolation method) • Computation Audio (audio signal interpolation method) • Bin Selection specifying where to save the speed clip.

5

Click the OK button. The original clip on the timeline is deleted and the new speed clip is inserted in Splice-In mode.

About speed clip timecode • Speed clips inherit the Mark In point timecode of their original clips. • Timecode is reassigned when a speed clip is created by modifying a Mark In point. • The timecode of speed clips advances in real time.

Creating Speed Clips From Clips on the Timeline

Notes

• The speed clip inherits the Mark In and Mark Out points of the original clip. If it was created in a Simple Speed Control dialog, the following parameters are set to fixed values. Computation Video (video signal interpolation method): Field Cut (when the project is using an interlaced format) or Frame Cut (when the project is using a progressive format) Computation Audio (audio signal interpolation method): Variable Pitch • When the duration was modified, sync breaks occur between the speed clip (Clip 2 in the above figure) and subsequent tracks.

The following procedure shows how to create a speed clip from Clip 2 on the Video 1 and Audio 1 tracks of the timeline.

1

Select the Video 1 and Audio 1 tracks.

2

Right click Clip 2 on the Video 1 or Audio 1 track and select one of the following from the context menu. • To specify speed or duration and set other parameters: [Replace Clip] >[Speed Clip] • To specify speed: [Replace Clip] >[Change Speed] • To specify duration: [Replace Clip] >[Change Duration] The Basic Speed Control Dialog (see page 232) or one of the Simple Speed Control Dialogs (see page 231) opens.

3

Enter the speed or duration.

Creating Speed Clips using Command Buttons You can quickly create speed clips by shortening or lengthening the duration of the original clips on the timeline using the [Change speed from clip head to PL] and [Change speed from clip tail to PL] customizable command buttons. You can customize the command button area by selecting “Customize” (page 192) in the main menu.

1

Make the track containing the clip is the topmost active track. Deactivate other tracks on the timeline temporarily if they contain the same source clip to prevent the speed clip being applied to those tracks as well.

270

Creating Speed Clips

2

3

• Right click the Splice-In button, and select [Fit to Fill] from the context menu.

Position the playline on the timeline at the desired position.

Replace mode • Click the Replace button while holding down the Alt key. • Right click the Replace button, and select [Fit to Fill] from the context menu. Note

[Fit to Fill] cannot be selected to place a sequence in versioning mode.

Creating Still Images If the playline is over the clip, the clip duration is shortened. If the playline is over a gap in the timeline, the clip duration is lengthened. The [Change speed from clip head to PL] command button searches for the clip head to the right of the playline. The [Change speed from clip tail to PL] command button searches for the clip tail to the left of the playline. The speed of the clip is recalculated automatically. Note

When a clip is part of a group on the timeline, only the selected clip is modified. Creating a speed clip ignores the grouping of clips.

You can easily replace the range in a video clip from the playline position to the last frame with a still image (a speed clip with a speed of 0%), to serve as a post-credits throwaway cut or a stop-motion cut. Note

This function is not available under the following conditions. Take the steps in the “What to do” column. Condition

What to do

The editing mode is • Trim mode • Rubber band mode

Switch to Composer mode or a Segment mode (Overwrite or Splice-In).

The Simple Effect Editor is running.

Exit the Simple Effect Editor.

1

Creating a Speed Clip That Fits Into a Specified Duration

1

In the Source Viewer, set Mark In and Mark Out points within the source clip to specify the range that you want to use as the speed clip.

2

In the Master Viewer, set Mark In and Mark Out points to specify the duration that you want the speed clip to fit into.

3

Splice-In mode • Click the Splice-In button while holding down the Alt key.

Activate a video track. The target of this procedure is the clip under the playline in the uppermost active video track.

2

While viewing the video in the Master monitor, move the playline to the frame that you want to use as the still image.

Clip

In the Source Viewer, do one of the following, depending on how you want to place the speed clip on the timeline. Overwrite mode • Click the Overwrite button while holding down the Alt key. • Right click the Overwrite button, and select [Fit to Fill] from the context menu.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Click the [Change speed from clip head to PL] command button to move the clip head to the playline, or click the [Change speed from clip tail to PL] command button to move the clip tail to the playline.

Note

Speed clips cannot be created from clips of the following types. • Filler • SG Clip • Still image import clip

3

Click the Freeze Frame button. In the clip under the playline, the range from the playline to the final frame is converted into a still

Creating Speed Clips

271

image (a speed clip with a speed of 0%). The image shows the frame at the playline position.

Clip

Still image

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Note

A transition effect at the playline position will be deleted. To specify the duration or create a freeze frame image in the backward direction In step 3, right click the Freeze Frame button and select the method used to create the still image from the context menu that appears. Note

You can specify the default bin in which to save freeze frame clips by opening the Freeze Frame dialog by shift-clicking the Freeze Frame button. Freeze Forward: Creates a freeze frame in the forward direction from the playline position on the timeline. (The frame at the playline position is used as a still image.) You can also specify the bin in which to save the freeze frame clip at the same time by opening the Freeze Frame dialog by right-clicking the Freeze Frame button while holding the Shift key down and selecting the context menu item. Freeze Backward: Creates a freeze frame in the backward direction from the playline position on the timeline. You can also specify the bin in which to save the freeze frame clip at the same time by opening the Freeze Frame dialog by right-clicking the Freeze Frame button while holding the Shift key down and selecting the context menu item. Freeze Entire Clip: Converts the entire clip into a still image clip. The frame at the playline position is used as the still image. Freeze frame with Duration: The Freeze Frame dialog appears, allowing you to specify a duration for the still image. If the duration differs from the duration from the playline position to the final frame of the clip, specify how to place the still image clip by selecting [Replace] or [Overwrite]. Select [Replace] to replace the section from the playline position to the final frame with the specified duration. Select [Overwrite] to overwrite it with the specified duration. If you specify a duration that is longer than the default, the next clip is overwritten. If the duration is shorter than the default, filler is inserted to make up the difference.

272

Creating Speed Clips

Freeze frame backward with Duration: Creates a freeze frame image of the specified duration in the backward direction. The procedure is the same as the procedure for the [Freeze frame with duration] item. Freeze frame (insert): Inserts a still image clip between the playline position and the next frame. The frame that follows the playline position will be placed after the inserted still image clip in its original duration. When you select this, the Freeze Frame (Insert) dialog opens, allowing you to specify a duration for the still image. The Replace Process function in the Freeze Frame (Insert) dialog cannot be used. Fill still picture to previous clip: Inserts a still image clip between the playline position and the last frame of the previous clip, and creates a speed clip in Project Explorer. If the playline is within a clip and there is no previous clip in the timeline, the still image clip is inserted between the playline position and the start of the timeline. You can also specify the bin in which to save the freeze frame clip at the same time by opening the Freeze Frame dialog by right-clicking the Freeze Frame button while holding the Shift key down and selecting the context menu item. Fill still picture to next clip: Inserts a still image clip between the playline position and the first frame of the next clip, and creates a speed clip in Project Explorer. If the playline is within a clip and there is no subsequent clip in the timeline, the still image clip is inserted between the playline position and the end of the timeline. You can also specify the bin in which to save the freeze frame clip at the same time by opening the Freeze Frame dialog by right-clicking the Freeze Frame button while holding the Shift key down and selecting the context menu item.

Editing Speed Clips To start editing a speed clip, right click a speed clip on the timeline and select [Replace Clip] >[Speed Clip] from the context menu. See “Creating Speed Clips” (page 270) for more information about editing operations.

Creating Composite Clips

The composite clip is formed from the content of the uppermost video tracks. The composite clip is indicated by an icon in Project Explorer.

You can create composite clips composed from the amalgamation of content from multiple source clips.

The composite clip has the following structure when displayed in the Source Viewer. Markers are displayed above the playline to show the boundaries between the component clips of the composite clip.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

When creating a composite clip from a selection of source clips, the following limitations and precautions apply. • Frame resolution of source clips must be identical (cannot mix SD and HD content). Some formats can be mixed, such as IMX 30/40/50, DVCAM 25, MPEG HD 18/25/35/50. • Maximum number of sub clips: 200 • Maximum length of composite clip:12H • Speed clips are not supported. • Still clips are not supported. • Mixed aspect ratios (4:3 and 16:9) are not supported. • TitleMotion, CG & CG Template, Sequence, SG, Voice Over clips are not supported. • Composite clips cannot be used to create another composite clip. • Sub clips using Scene In/Out markers are not supported. • Mixed DF and NDF clips are not supported. • Clips with Dolby E channels are not supported. • Filler in sub clips is retained in a composite clip, although no essence mark is added to filler edit points.

Creating Composite Clips From Clips on the Timeline The following example shows how to create a composite clip from clips on the timeline.

1

Place the source clips to merge into a single composite clip on the timeline.

2

Click [Create Clip Composite] from the Timeline Editor main menu.

If [Set Essence Mark on clip event] is checked, essence marks are automatically added to the sub clip edit points in the composite clip.

The Clip Composite dialog appears.

3

Select the desired settings and click the OK button.

Notes

• The composite clip spans the duration between the In and Out points of the uppermost active video and audio tracks on the timeline.

Creating Composite Clips

273

• If there is no In point or Out point, the composite clip spans the duration of the uppermost video and audio clips. • The duration of selected clips on the timeline takes precedence over the In and Out points of the uppermost active video and audio tracks. • Information about each sub clip in the composite clip is displayed in the Clip Relatives tab of the Metadata window in Project Explorer. Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Creating Composite Clips From XDCAM Explorer The following example shows how to create composite clips from XDCAM Explorer.

1

Select multiple XDCAM clips in the Clip bin of XDCAM Explorer. Note

The composite clip function does not support content in the PD-EDL and Sequence bins.

2

Select Upload Clip Composite from the clip context menu. The following options are available. Low: Create low-resolution (proxy) composite clip. High: Create high-resolution composite clip. High/Low: Create high-resolution and proxy composite clip. The Clip Composite dialog appears.

3

Select the desired settings and click the OK button. The composite clip is uploaded to Project Explorer.

Notes

• If the source clips are XDCAM clips, any existing essence marks in sub clips are removed if [Load to SV] is checked in the Clip Composite dialog. • Information about each sub clip in the XDCAM composite clip is NOT displayed in the Clip Relatives tab of the Metadata window in Project Explorer. • When a composite clip is created containing EX, P2, or Canon XF clips, high-resolution data only is uploaded to Project Explorer and proxy media is not created, even if [Create Proxy when no Proxy clips rooted in card] is selected in the XDCAM Explorer dialog.

274

Creating Composite Clips

Combining Tracks or Clips on the Timeline Collapsing Tracks

Collapsing also offers several other features. The following operations are available on a collapse. • Saving as a sub sequence. • Opening as sub sequences to edit the component clips using the Open as Sub Sequence command from the clip context menu. • Applying effects to a collapse applies the effects to all component clips of the collapse. • Deconstructing (expanding) into component clips and tracks on the timeline by using the Deconstruct command from the clip context menu. • Editing functions in common with single clips, such as copy, cut, paste, add edit, move, trim, transitions, undo/ redo, and so on. • Collapse nesting up to 4 levels.

1

Enable the tracks to include in the collapse, and disable or lock the tracks to exclude from the collapse.

2

Set a Mark In point and Mark Out point on the timeline to mark the duration of the collapse.

3

Click the Collapse button to create a video collapse, or click the Collapse button while holding the Ctrl key down to create an audio collapse. You can also right-click the Collapse button and select the collapse type from the context menu.

Notes

• Only clips on all active, unlocked tracks are collapsed. • CG tracks are treated as a video track in the collapse. • Key tracks clips are included in the collapse if the corresponding video tracks and key track are both active. • Audio tracks are collapsed onto a separate collapse track for each PGM bus setting in the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool. • If a clip overlaps the collapse duration, the portion outside the duration remains on the same track in the timeline. The portion inside the duration is moved to the collapse track in the timeline. • If a clip with effects overlaps the collapse duration, the effects are applied to all portions inside and outside the collapse duration. • If a transition overlaps the collapse duration and the transition cut point is outside the duration, the transition is retained on the original track in the timeline. If it is inside the duration, it is collapsed. • Trimming a collapse is similar to trimming a sequence. It changes the length or the position of the collapse on the timeline. The margins of a collapse are determined by the length of the collapse. • A collapse cannot be used to create a composite clip. • A collapse does not support speed clips or Freeze Frame editing. • The waveform of an audio collapse cannot be displayed. • Render to bin is not supported when a collapse is opened as a sub sequence.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

You can collapse multiple clips on multiple tracks into a collapse container represented as a single collapse clip on the timeline. The collapse retains all original timeline information, including sync, effects, track status, keyframes, clip structure, render results, and so on. This function is predominantly useful for reducing clutter in the timeline.

When the collapse is opened, the collapse duration is displayed on the position bar as a blue region.

Grouping Tracks or Clips on Tracks You can combine tracks within a clip or combine separate clips on the timeline into a group in order to perform editing functions (moving, trimming, etc.) on all of the grouped items simultaneously. You can release the grouping when not required. You can also use a command button to ignore grouping temporarily to perform an edit on individual tracks or clips within the group, and then restore the grouping. When a clip is added to the timeline, all video and audio tracks within the clip are grouped automatically by default. When any track in the group is selected, all tracks within the clip are also selected automatically, even if the clip contains inactive tracks. Likewise, when clips are grouped, selecting any clip will select all the clips in the group. The timeline can contain multiple clip groups, each containing clips of any type or number. Note

Groups are single-level only. Grouping items that are already part of a group will cancel the initial grouping and apply the new grouping.

Combining Tracks or Clips on the Timeline

275

To group tracks or clips Select the items on the timeline, then right-click a selected item and select [Group] from the context menu. Grouped items can be moved, disabled, copied, or deleted as a single entity.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

To ungroup tracks or clips Right-click a grouped item and select [Ungroup] from the context menu. Items can be ungrouped even when grouping is temporarily being ignored or a track within the group is locked. To temporarily ignore grouping Select the grouped item and click the [Grouping] button in the command button area to deactivate the button indicator. To restore the grouping, click the Grouping button again. The individual items do not need to be selected to restore the grouping. You can add the [Grouping] command button to the command button area by selecting Customize (page 192) from the main menu of the Timeline Editor. Edit operations on grouped items Grouped items can be moved, disabled, copied, or deleted as a single entity. Note

Creating a speed clip ignores the grouping of clips, and operates on the selected clip only. Clips within a group can be edited separately by temporarily ignoring grouping using the [Grouping] command button and still remain part of the group. For example, if clip A in the following diagrams is trimmed, clip A remains part of the group after the trim operation.

276

If clip G is moved to overwrite a portion of clip A, then clip A still remains part of the group. Clip G is still a separate item and does not become part of the group.

Combining Tracks or Clips on the Timeline

Grouped items can also be trimmed as a single entity. In Aside and B-side trimming, all outermost clips in the grouped clip are trimmed. In AB-side trimming, only the track with focus can be trimmed; all other tracks remain untrimmed. When performing an edit that partitions a clip in a grouped item (cut, extract, lift, etc.), the grouping of the resulting items changes. • The left side of clips directly involved in an edit will remain part of the original group. • The right side of clips involved in an edit will form a new group. For example, in the following diagram, the left side of clips A and B will remain in the original group with clips C and D after a cut edit. The right side of clips A and B together will form a new group.

Trimming Operations

Adjusting Transition Start and End Points Setting trim points Trim points are the targets of trimming operations. XPRI NS sets them automatically, depending on the way that you started the Trim Viewer (see page 212). You can use the following methods to change trim points after the Trim Viewer starts. Note that changing the trim points may also change the trim mode. • Delete a trim handle by clicking it. • Add a trim handle by clicking the desired point with the Ctrl key held down. • Activate a track on which you want to add a trim handle by clicking the track panel. (The transition closest to the playline becomes the trim point.) • Deactivate a track from which you want to delete trim handles by clicking the track panel. • Move a trim handle by clicking at the desired position in a transition. • Move a trim handle to the next or previous transition by clicking the Next Transition or Previous Transition button.

To adjust transition positions You can use the following methods to trim transition positions.

Trimming by scrubbing Scrub the mouse pointer on a Trim Viewer monitor, scrub a trim handle, or scrub the playline on the timeline position bar. If there are multiple trim points, the other points are trimmed by the same amount as the clip under the playline. Scrubbing while holding down the Ctrl key or Alt key has the following effects. Ctrl key + scrub: Trims one frame at a time. This works only when the zoom ratio of the Timeline Editor time scale is greater than 1 pixel per frame. Alt key + scrub: Trims in snap mode. The trim point snaps to cut points on other tracks. Shift key + scrub: Inserts filler. See “To insert filler” (page 277). Scrubbing from the left edge to the right edge of the monitor in the Trim Viewer will trim by a fixed 10 seconds, regardless of the zoom factor. You can also trim both sides of a transition simultaneously. Click the Trim Trans on Both Sides button to add trim handles to both sides of the transition. Trimming on one trim handle also trims the opposite side by an equal amount.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

The Trim Viewer allows you to set transition start and end points, to apply effects to transitions, and to adjust or delete the effects. You can check trimming results on the monitor (preview), and execute trims during previews (on-the-fly trimming).

Note

Trimming is done to the start or end point of the material if an invalid trimming value (a value greater than the duration) is specified.

Using the keyboard J, K, and L keys Pressing the J, K, and L keys on the keyboard allows you to trim while monitoring playback video and audio. The J key gives reverse play, and the L key gives forward play. The K key and the spacebar pause play. You can trim during slow-motion play by holding down the Alt key as you press the J or K key.

To insert filler To shorten a clip, trim with the Shift key held down. Filler is inserted into the trimmed section.

Using the extend function Note

If you want to trim while preserving synchronization between tracks, check that the Track lock indicators (page 177) on the track panel show sync lock. Trimming by entering trim amounts You can enter values in the trim amount displays of the Trim Viewer. Click a display to activate it, and then enter a numeric value. Use the + and - keys to indicate plus and minus values. The specified number of frames are trimmed when you press the Enter key. You can edit the displayed value with the Backspace key, or cancel the change with the Esc key.

You can do a dual trim by using the Extend button. This function is available in Composer and Segment modes.

1

Move the playline to the transition that you want to trim.

2

Activate the trim target tracks.

3

Use the Mark In or Mark Out button to set a Mark In point or Mark Out point at the trim destination to which you moved. To trim in the forward direction, set a Mark Out point. To trim in the backward direction, set a Mark In point.

Trimming Operations

277

4

Note

Note

This function does not work if you set both a Mark In point and a Mark Out point. Set only one.

The trim line in the Timeline Editor is displayed as a broken line if there is insufficient margin in any of the tracks, for example as can occur when trimming audio and video simultaneously.

Click the Extend button. The transition at the playline position moves to the Mark In point or Mark Out point, and a trim line is displayed in the Timeline Editor.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Adding, Deleting, and Adjusting Transition Effects In Trim mode, you can add, delete, and adjust effects (dissolves and cross fades) at transitions that are trim points.

To add a transition effect Click the Add Dissolve button.

To put the Trim Viewer into 6-monitor mode To adjust a transition effect, click the Transition Corner Display button to put the Trim Viewer into 6-monitor mode. When finished, click the Transition Corner Display button again to return the Trim Viewer to 2-monitor mode. Note

To delete a transition effect

The Trim Viewer cannot be put into 6-monitor mode when there is no transition effect at the current trim point.

Click the Delete Effect button.

Effect start frame of the outgoing clip Tail frame of the outgoing clip Effect end frame of the outgoing clip

Effect end frame of the incoming clip Head frame of the incoming clip Effect start frame of the incoming clip

To change the alignment and adjust the duration of a transition effect To adjust the alignment and adjust the duration of a transition effect, you can use the Current Alignment button and the transition duration display in the command button area.

278

Trimming Operations

To change the effect alignment Select an effect alignment method from the drop-down list of the Current Alignment button. The following methods are available. Start At Cut: Aligns the start point of the effect with the point after a cut. End At Cut: Aligns the end point of the effect with the point before a cut.

Centered On Cut: Aligns the effect so that it is centered between two clips. If the duration is odd, the section from the start point to the center is one frame longer than the section from the center to the end point. Custom Start Setting...: Opens the Transition Options dialog so that you can specify any position for the effect.

To change the effect duration Click the transition duration display and enter a value.

To adjust effect start and end points by scrubbing To adjust an effect start point Scrub the start frame of the effect on the monitor. To adjust an effect end point Scrub the end frame of the effect on the monitor.

Previewing Transitions Overview You can play continuously around the trim point (loop play) to preview a transition on the monitor. The displayed video is created by combining the video of the clips on the active tracks. However, note that it may not be possible to display some tracks in real time unless they are rendered. You can perform on-the-fly trimming during a preview.

To render transitions If there is an effect at the trim point, and it needs to be rendered, click the Render Effect button. Note

To render preroll and postroll sections, exit Trim mode and select the desired rendering command from the slice number context menu of the slice that you want to render, or from the main menu of the Timeline Editor.

To perform on-the-fly trimming During loop play, you can set new trim points and trim while checking the results on the monitor. In on-the-fly trimming, use the Mark In button to trim. Loop play stops as soon as you make the trim, and starts again from the preroll start position. To stop an on-the-fly trim, click the Loop Play button again.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Note

The duration of the clip in the Full Effect Editor timeline includes the clip duration and the portion of the transition effects that extend beyond the head or tail of the clip.

When there is an effect at the transition Effects have preroll and postroll segments. You can specify the preroll start point and postroll stop point by selecting [Trim Settings] from the main menu of the Trim Viewer. Between the time when one loop ends and the time when the next loop starts, there is an intermission during which the screen is blacked out. You can set the length of the intermission by selecting [Trim Settings] from the Trim Viewer main menu.

Note

The Mark In button is not displayed by default. To display it, you need to customize the command button area by selecting [Customize] from the main menu. To set trim points During loop play, click the Mark In button. Trimming is done according to the selected mode (A-side Single Trim, B-side Single Trim, or Dual (AB-side) Trim). A-side Single Trim: The Out point of the outgoing clip is trimmed. B-side Single Trim: The In point of the incoming clip is trimmed. Dual Trim: The Out point of the outgoing clip and the In point of the incoming clip are trimmed. To check trim results In Dual Trim mode, you can click the Go to Mark In and Go to Mark Out buttons to change the preview range. Go to Mark In button: Plays from the preroll position of the outgoing clip to the Out point, and returns to normal loop play when clicked again. Go to Mark Out button: Plays from the In point of the incoming clip to the postroll position, and returns to normal loop play when clicked again.

See page 175 for more information about slice number context menus, and see page 189 for more information about the main menu of the Timeline Editor.

To perform loop play Click the Loop Play button. The play range is from the preroll start point to the trim point to the postroll stop point.

Trimming Operations

279

Quick Trim Overview You can do trimming on the timeline even without starting the Trim Viewer (page 212). Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Notes

• Clips on disabled tracks and locked tracks cannot be trimmed. • Grouped clips on tracks or a selection of multiple clips on tracks can be trimmed using quick trim. In A-side and B-side trimming, all outermost clips in the grouped clip or selected clips are trimmed. In AB-side trimming, only one track can be trimmed at a time; all other tracks remain untrimmed. • Slide and slip trimming of discontinuous clips are not possible. • Slide and slip trims do not execute when the margins of a clip are not sufficient.

Quick trimming with a control panel When a control panel is connected, you can assign trim functions to the buttons on the control panel.

Checking the trim amount A trim counter appears when you do a quick trim, allowing you to monitor the amount of the trim. If you know exactly how many frames you want to trim, you can also use the scratchpad to set the amount. Enter a number in the scratchpad to trim by that number of frames. Enter a plus (+) value to trim forward and a minus (-) value to trim back.

Trimming in Composer Mode To put the timeline into Composer mode, click the Composer mode button in the Timeline Editor command button area. In Composer mode, the Master monitor shows the incoming frame during AB-side and B-side trims. During A-side trims, the Master monitor shows the outgoing frame. The picture on the monitor changes as the trim progresses.

Segment mode and composer mode The quick trim operations that are possible on the timeline differ according to whether the timeline is in Segment mode (Overwrite or Splice-In) or Composer mode. Segment mode: You can move clips and do slide and slip trims. (See “Trimming in Segment Mode” (page 281)). Composer mode: You can do Single (A-side and B-side) and Dual (AB-side) trimming. (See “Trimming in Composer Mode” (page 280)).

Ways to do quick trimming You can do quick trimming by using any of the following methods. • By selecting a clip and rotating the mouse wheel (in Segment mode) • By moving the playline close to a cut point (Composer mode) or by selecting a clip (Segment mode) and using the trim command buttons • By moving the playline close to a cut point (Composer mode) or by selecting a clip (Segment mode) and using control panel buttons Quick trimming with shortcut keys By default, trim functions are assigned to the following keys. • . key: Moves the trim point 1 frame forward. • , key: Moves the trim point 1 frame back. • / key: Moves the trim point 10 frames forward. • M key: Moves the trim point 10 frames back.

280

Quick Trim

To do AB-side trimming Move the playline to a cut point and do one of the following. • Hold down the Shift key and rotate the mouse wheel while checking the amount of trimming in the trim counter. • Click a trim command button. • Activate the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor and enter the desired number of frames in the scratchpad (+: trimming forward, -: trimming back). Then click a trim command button. Note

You can select a cut point to trim by dragging around it with the right mouse button held down. Cut points on several tracks can be selected in this way.

To do A-side trimming Move the playline to a cut point and do one of the following. • Hold down the Ctrl + Alt keys and rotate the mouse wheel while checking the amount of trimming in the trim counter. • While holding down the Ctrl + Alt keys, click a trim command button. • Activate the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor and enter the desired number of frames in the scratchpad (+: trimming forward, -: trimming back). Then click a trim command button while holding down the Ctrl + Alt keys.

To do B-side trimming

Trimming in Segment Mode To put the timeline into Segment mode, click the Segment (Lift/Overwrite) mode button or the Segment (Extract/ Splice-in) mode button in the Timeline Editor command button area. To fix the playline In Segment mode, the playline normally moves to the cut point after you complete a quick trim. If you do not want to move the playline, you can check the [Maintain Playline Position During Quick Trim (Segment Mode)] check box in the Trim tab of the Timeline Editor Properties Dialog (see page 607). This fixes the playline so that it does not move after a quick trim.

To move clips When you move a clip in Overwrite mode, filler is inserted into the gap left at the clip’s original position. When you move a clip in Splice-In mode, the other clips on the timeline rearrange themselves to fill in the gap. Select a clip and do one of the following. • Click a trim command button. • Activate the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor and enter the desired number of frames in the scratchpad (+: trimming forward, -: trimming back). Then click a trim command button. To move the start point or end point of a clip to a specified position Select a clip, activate the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor, and then enter the timecode of the target timeline position in the scratchpad. To move the clip’s start point to that position, click the Trim 1 Frame Back button or the Trim 10 Frames Back button. To move the clip’s end point to that position, click the Trim 1 Frame Forward button or the Trim 10 Frames Forward button.

To do slide trimming To slide trim a clip, select the clip and do one of the following.

To slide trim the start point or end point of a clip to a specified position Select a clip, activate the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor, and enter the timecode of the target timeline position in the scratchpad. To slide trim the clip’s start point to that position, hold down the Ctrl + Alt keys and click the Trim 1 Frame Back button or the Trim 10 Frames Back button. To move the clip’s end point to that position, click the Trim 1 Frame Forward button or the Trim 10 Frames Forward button.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Move the playline to a cut point and do one of the following. • Hold down the Alt key and rotate the mouse wheel while checking the amount of trimming in the trim counter. • While holding down the Alt key, click a trim command button. • Activate the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor and enter the desired number of frames in the scratchpad (+: trimming forward, -: trimming back). Then click a trim command button while holding down the Alt key.

• Hold down the Ctrl + Alt keys and drag the clip to the desired position while checking the amount of trimming in the trim counter. • Hold down the Ctrl + Alt keys and click a trim command button. • Activate the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor and enter the desired number of frames in the scratchpad (+: trimming forward, -: trimming back). Then click a trim command button while holding down the Ctrl + Alt keys.

To do slip trimming To slip trim a clip, select the clip and do one of the following. • Hold down the Alt key and drag the clip to the desired position while checking the amount of trimming in the trim counter. • Hold down the Alt key and click a trim command button. • Activate the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor and enter the desired number of frames in the scratchpad (+: trimming forward, -: trimming back). Then click a trim command button while holding down the Alt keys. Note

You can select clips to trim on several tracks by holding down the right button of the mouse and dragging in the clockwise direction to surround the clips. To slip trim the start point or end point of a clip to a specified position Select a clip, activate the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor, and enter the timecode of the target timeline position in the scratchpad. To slip trim the clip’s start point to that position, hold down the Alt key and click the Trim 1 Frame Back button or the Trim 10 Frames Back button. To move the clip’s end point to that position, click the Trim 1 Frame Forward button or the Trim 10 Frames Forward button.

To do A-side or B-side trimming When you move the mouse pointer to the Mark Out point of an outgoing clip or the Mark In point of an incoming clip in Splice-In mode, the appearance of the cursor changes. Drag the mouse left or right during this state.

Quick Trim

281

To do dual trimming

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

When you move the mouse pointer to the Mark Out point of an outgoing clip or the Mark In point of an incoming clip in Overwrite mode, the appearance of the cursor changes. Drag the mouse left or right during this state. If you trim the Mark Out point of an outgoing clip in the backward direction or trim the Mark In point of an incoming clip in the forward direction, an AB-side trim is performed. If you trim the Mark Out point of an outgoing clip in the forward direction or trim the Mark In point of an incoming clip in the backward direction, the duration of the trimmed clip is shortened while the duration of the other clip remains the same. Overwrite mode (When the Mark Out point of an outgoing clip is trimmed backward)

1

a

2

b

1

a

282

Quick Trim

c

2

b

c

Adjusting the Clip Level You can adjust the clip level using the mouse on the Timeline Editor.

To display the clip level Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Right-click on the track in the Timeline Editor and select [Audio Data] > [Clip Level]. The clip level of the clip on the sequence will be shown.

To adjust the clip level If you click near the clip level line while holding down the Ctrl key in Composer mode, the cursor changes to . You can now adjust the level by dragging the mouse up or down while holding the left mouse button. When you release the mouse button, the current value will be used as the new clip level setting. The current value and the changed value are shown as follows while dragging the mouse.

In the above example, the level was changed by +8.63 dB, resulting in a setting of +3.97 dB. While adjusting the clip level, you can cancel the adjustment and retain the original level by: • pressing the Esc key. • releasing the Ctrl key.

Adjusting the Clip Level

283

Audio Rubber Band Function

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

The audio rubber band function allows you to display and adjust audio fader levels in the Timeline Editor. It uses fader levels that have been recorded by the audio automation function. Note

When the AUTOMATION ENABLE button of the Audio Mixer (see page 434) and the Audio Automation Enable button of the Timeline Editor (see page 171) are on, track fader level variations during playback are saved as keyframes for tracks with their WRITE buttons on. Keyframes saved in this way are displayed on the timeline as rubber bands. To adjust track fader levels on the timeline by using the mouse, put the Timeline Editor into rubber band mode. To put the Timeline Editor into rubber band mode Click the Rubber Band Mode button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor. The color of the mouse changes to blue in rubber band mode. Note

You can also drag clips and effects to the timeline in Rubber Band mode. The placement mode (Overwrite or Splice-In) varies as follows, depending whether or not the [Dragging Clips in Composer / Rubber Band Mode defaults to Overwrite] check box in the Edit tab (see page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog is checked. • When the check box is checked: Dragged clips are placed in Overwrite mode. • When the check box is not checked: Dragged clips are placed in Splice-In mode. • When the Shift key is held down while dragging: The check box setting is temporarily reversed, and dragged clips are placed in the opposite mode.

To display track fader levels as rubber bands Rubber bands can be displayed even when the Timeline Editor is not in rubber band mode. To display the track fader levels of a specific audio track on its rubber band, right click the master track panel for that track and select [Audio Data] > [Track Fader Level] from the context menu. To display the rubber bands of all audio tracks, select [Show Audio Data] > [Track Fader Level] from the Timeline View menu.

284

Audio Rubber Band Function

Adjusting Track Fader Levels To adjust track fader levels, adjust the keyframes that represent the fader levels visually. To operate on keyframes in the Timeline Editor, activate the target tracks. When Mark In and Mark Out points are set, the operation applies to that range. (This limitation does not apply when you are adjusting track fader levels in the Audio Mixer.)

To add keyframes Point with the mouse pointer to the point on the rubber band where you want to add the keyframe (the mouse pointer changes to an arrow with a plus (+) mark at the upper right), and then click. A keyframe is added and selected. To operate in the Audio Mixer

1

Move the playline to the point where you want to add a keyframe.

2

Turn on the AUTOMATION ENABLE button, and turn on the WRITE button of the target track.

3

Move the track fader to adjust the audio level. A keyframe is added at the playline position.

If you have customized the command button area for Timeline Editor to include the Add Key Frame button, you can simply click the button to add the keyframe at the playline position. See page 434 for more information about Audio Mixer controls.

To select multiple keyframes Do one of the following. • Display the context menu for an active audio track and select an operation. Select Current Track: Selects all keyframes on the selected track. Select Active Track(s): Selects all keyframes on all active tracks. Select at Playline: Selects all keyframes in all clips on the playline. • Click on the keyframes while holding down the Shift key. • Drag the mouse to draw a rectangle that contains all of the keyframes you want to select.

To delete keyframes Do one of the following. • Select the keyframe to delete, then press the Delete key.

To delete multiple keyframes at once Select the keyframes, then press the Delete key.

To cut, copy, and paste keyframes Do one of the following. • Select a keyframe and drag it to the point where you want to paste it while holding down the Ctrl key or Alt key. The keyframe is copied if you hold down the Ctrl key, and cut if you hold down the Alt key. • Select a keyframe, select [Copy] or [Cut] from the context menu of the keyframe or the track. Select [Paste] from the context menu to paste the keyframes at the playline position to the same tracks. Select [Paste at Playline] from the context menu to past the keyframes at the playline position from the current selected track. Select [Paste Vertical] from the context menu to paste the keyframes to the vertically active tracks at the current selected keyframe position. • You can copy, cut and paste keyframes on multiple tracks by using the Copy, Cut, and Paste commands. Select [Paste] from the context menu to paste the keyframes at the playline on the same tracks. • You can also copy, cut, and paste by using standard keyboard shortcuts (Ctrl + C, Ctrl + X, Ctrl + V).

Drag keyframe

10dB(+5)

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

of the pointer, and the fader level appears at the lower right or lower left, with the amount of change enclosed in parentheses. • While you are dragging the keyframe, the timecode of the mouse pointer position appears highlighted in the playline time display area. • You can restrict the adjustment to the vertical or horizontal direction by dragging with the Shift key held down. • The track fader level adjustment range is from -∞ (at the lower edge of the track) to +10 dB (at the upper edge of the track).

• Right click the keyframe to delete, then select [Delete] from the context menu.

TRACK A1

4

Adjust the overall fader level as required by adding, moving, and deleting keyframes.

TRACK A1

To adjust keyframes You can adjust track level variations along the temporal axis by moving keyframes on the audio rubber band.

Move keyframe TRACK A1

To adjust a single keyframe

1

Display a rubber band of track fader levels. Delete 4th keyframe from left

See “To display track fader levels as rubber bands” (page 284) for more information about how to display rubber bands.

TRACK A1

TRACK A1

2

TRACK A1

Add keyframes. See “To add keyframes” (page 284) for more information about how to add keyframes.

Add keyframes TRACK A1

3

Drag the keyframe that you want to adjust. • When you move the mouse pointer over a keyframe, a black square appears at the upper right

Example of adjusting overall track fader level

To adjust without selecting keyframes Note

This method cannot be used to adjust multiple tracks at once.

1

Move the mouse pointer close to the keyframe that you want to adjust, and move from there toward the upper edge of the track (to a point about 1/10 the height of the track below the upper edge).

Audio Rubber Band Function

285

A horizontal line appears above the mouse pointer.

Notes

• When the keyframe value moves out of the range of the display scale, resulting in clipping, you can return all of the keyframes to their original values by moving the dragged keyframe back to its original position. This can be done only while the keyframe is still being dragged. • Keyframe movement is limited so that keyframes do not overlap or move beyond neighboring keyframes.

TRACK A1

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

2

Drag the mouse pointer up or down. (+10dB)

TRACK A1

The keyframes to the left and right of the keyframe under the mouse pointer move, with the amount of change appearing to the lower right or lower left of the mouse pointer.

3

Release the mouse button at the position corresponding to the amount of adjustment that you want.

To adjust the fader level for a clip You can adjust the fader levels of all keyframes within an entire clip in a single operation.

1

A minus sign appears at the upper right of the pointer ( ).

2

TRACK A1

To adjust multiple keyframes simultaneously You can adjust multiple keyframes in essentially the same ways that you adjust a single keyframe. The following example explains how parameters change when you adjust multiple keyframes simultaneously.

1

3

Drag any of the keyframes

Move the mouse up/down to set the desired track fader levels. The rubber band for the current clip is adjusted by the same amount across the clip. New keyframes are added at both ends of the clip to maintain connection with the rubber bands from neighboring clips.

Select the keyframes that you want to adjust.

Drag any one of the selected keyframes.

Press and hold the Ctrl key, click the left mouse button, and then move the mouse. An arrow pointing left and right appears at the upper right of the pointer ( ). The pointer does not change until after you move the mouse.

See “To select multiple keyframes” (page 284) for more information about how to select multiple keyframes.

2

Move the mouse pointer to the clip you wish to adjust, and position the cursor near the top edge of the track..

4

Release the Ctrl key when finished adjusting the level.

To adjust the fader level between In and Out points You can adjust the fader levels of all keyframes between the In and Out points, even across clip boundaries. –6dB(–6)

1

Move the mouse pointer to the clip you wish to adjust, and position the cursor near the top edge of the track..

TRACK A1

A minus sign appears at the upper right of the pointer ( ).

TRACK A2 TRACK A3 TRACK A4

2

TRACK A5

All of the selected keyframes move by the same amount as the dragged keyframe. In the above example, the track fader levels of all affected keyframes drop by 6 dB.

Press and hold the Alt key, click the left mouse button, and then move the mouse. An arrow with In/Out markers appears at the upper right of the pointer ( ). The pointer does not change until after you move the mouse.

3

Move the mouse to set the desired track fader levels. The rubber band for the region between the In and Out points is adjusted by the same amount. New

286

Audio Rubber Band Function

keyframes are added at both ends of the region to maintain connection with the rubber bands from neighboring portions of the clip(s).

4

Release the Ctrl key when finished adjusting the level.

Operating on Track Fader Level Rubber Bands Whenever You Operate on Clips Turn on the Track Level Copy button in the command button palette of the Timeline Editor. The fader level rubber band will be moved, deleted, copied, or trimmed whenever a clip is moved, deleted, copied, or trimmed.

To enable audio automation in the Audio Mixer Click the AUTOMATION ENABLE button in the Audio Mixer so that it is displayed in red. When audio automation is enabled, you can enable and disable the rubber band WRITE and READ buttons of all tracks or selected tracks by doing the following. • By clicking the READ and WRITE buttons of individual tracks • By turning [Automation Read] and [Automation Write] on and off in the context menu of the AUTOMATION ENABLE button • By turning [Read All] and [Write All] on and off under [Audio Options] > [Audio Automation] in the main menu of the Audio Mixer. When using stereo pairs, such as tracks 1 and 2 or tracks 3 and 4, you can operate on both tracks in the pair at once by holding down the Shift key as you operate on either track.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

To switch between adding and adjusting keyframes Pressing Ctrl + Q while a keyframe is selected enables keyframe adjustment mode and disables the addition of keyframes via mouse operations. Pressing Ctrl + Q again, enables the keyframe adding mode, allowing you to add keyframes by moving the mouse pointer and clicking.

main menu, and toggle the read function on and off by clicking [Read All] in the same menu.

Note

Audio Automation Audio automation enables recording (WRITE) and playback (READ) of audio fader levels during real-time play. By enabling audio automation, you enable the audio rubber band function for all tracks on the timeline. There are two audio automation functions: recording (WRITE) and playback (READ). When the write function is enabled for a track, variations in the track fader level during timeline play are saved as keyframes. When the read function is enabled for a track, the saved keyframes are displayed as a rubber band on the timeline. Keyframes are easy to edit because they display fader level changes in a stopped state. The recorded and edited fader level variations are played back when you play the timeline with the read function on.

The Audio Automation Enable button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor has the same function as the AUTOMATION ENABLE button in the Audio Mixer, and the READ and WRITE buttons on the Timeline Editor track panel have the same functions as the READ and WRITE buttons on the Audio Mixer tracks. Whenever one of these buttons is turned on or off in either tool, the corresponding button is turned on or off in the other tool.

To enable audio automation in the Timeline Editor Click the Audio Automation Enable button in the Timeline Editor command button area, so that it is displayed in green. When audio automation is enabled, the rubber band WRITE and READ buttons are enabled for all of the tracks on the track panel. (You can also turn the WRITE and READ buttons on and off individually, even when audio automation is disabled. This allows you to adjust audio levels for specific tracks.) You can also toggle the write function on and off by clicking [Write All] under [Audio Options] >[Audio Automation] in the Timeline Editor

Audio Rubber Band Function

287

Mixing Down Audio Tracks

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

When the number of audio tracks that must be played at the same time exceeds 8, you can reduce the number of tracks by mixing down audio tracks. This allows you to add other clips that you need to play at the same time.

1

Set Mark In and Mark Out points on the timeline to specify the mix down range. Note

To mix down the entire timeline, set a Mark In point at the start point and a Mark Out point at the end point.

2

Use the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool (page 447) to group the audio tracks that you want to mix down.

3

Open the Render To Bin Dialog (see page 224).

4

Using the track buttons, select the mixdown output tracks (audio tracks) and turn the video track button off.

5

Enter a name in the Clip Name box and select a save destination in the Bin Name list box.

6

Click the Render button. An audio mixdown clip is created in the specified bin.

288

7

Load the mixdown clip into the Source Viewer.

8

Create an audio track for the mixdown clip on the timeline, and place the mixdown clip.

9

Turn off the monitoring of the mixdown source tracks, or delete the tracks if they are no longer needed.

Mixing Down Audio Tracks

XPRI NS provides the following functions for searching the timeline.

: Previous Reverse Match Executes a reverse match search on the timeline in the reverse direction from the current playline position.

Reverse match frame Searches the timeline for any frame of a clip loaded into the Source Viewer. This is the converse function to Match Frame (see page 183).

If a matching frame is found, the playline moves to that frame. If no matching frame is found, a confirmation message appears

See “Reverse Match Frame” (page 289) for more information about how to use this function.

Detection of duplicate clips and frames Searches the timeline for clips and frames (parts of clips) that are used twice or more. See “Detection of Duplicate Clips and Frames” (page 290) for more information about how to use this function.

Detection of flash frames Searches the timeline for clips and filler with durations shorter than a specified value.

To do a list reverse matching search

1

Display the frame that you want to find on the timeline in the Source Viewer.

2

Do one of the following in the Source Viewer. • Click the Reverse Match List button in the Source Viewer command button palette. • Select [Reverse Match] from the main menu. • Select [List View] from the context menu of the Previous Reverse Match or Next Reverse Match button (see step 2 of the previous procedure).

See “Detection of Flash Frames” (page 290) for more information about how to use this function.

Note

Detection of media offline clips Searches the timeline for media offline clips.

This operation is not possible if the Previous Reverse Match and Next Reverse Match button are present in the command button palette.

See “Detection of Media Offline Clips” (page 291) for more information about how to use this function.

Detection of sections containing only proxy media Searches the timeline for sections that contain only proxy (low resolution) media.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Timeline Searching

: Next Reverse Match Executes a reverse match search on the timeline in the forward direction from the current playline position.

If one or more matches is found, the Reverse Match dialog opens to display a list of the search results. (If no matches are found, a confirmation message appears instead of the Reverse Match dialog.) The list displays the timecode positions, tracks, and clip names of the matching frames.

See “Detection of Sections Containing Only Proxy Media” (page 292) for more information about how to use this function.

Reverse Match Frame You can do reverse matching searches of the timeline to find any frame of a clip loaded into the Source Viewer. There are two kinds of reverse matching searches: quick searches and list searches.

To do a quick reverse match frame search

1

Display the frame that you want to find on the timeline in the Source Viewer.

2

Click one of the following buttons in the Source Viewer command button palette.

Timeline Searching

289

3

To identify the found frames on the timeline, do one of the following. • Click an item in the search results list. • Select an item in the list by pressing the up and down arrow keys. The playline moves to the selected frame.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

To identify a matching frame and activate the timeline Double click an item in the search results list, or select an item and press the Enter key. The playline moves to the corresponding frame and the timeline is activated.

Note

The meaning of the information displayed in the Dupe Info column is as follows. • The number after Dupe # is the number of the duplication. • @Tails and @Heads indicate that duplications were found at clip tails and heads. • Dupe Event indicates that entire clips are duplicated.

To close the window Click the Close box or press the Esc key. Notes

• The search results list is updated automatically when you edit the corresponding frame on the timeline. • To do a reverse matching search for another frame, repeat from step 1.

Detection of Duplicate Clips and Frames You can search the timeline for clips and frames which are used twice or more. Notes

• Only video tracks may be targeted. • Only clips of the same type are found. For example, only reel clips are examined for duplication with a reel clip.

To find duplicate clips and frames

1

Do one of the following. • Click the Dupe Detection button in the command button palette of the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor. • Select [Timeline Find] > [Dupe Detection] from the Timeline Editor main menu. If duplications are found, the Dupe Detection dialog opens to display a list of the detection results. (If no duplications are found, a confirmation message appears instead of the Dupe Detection dialog.) The list displays the timecode positions, tracks, and information of the duplicate clips or frames.

2

To identify the detected duplications on the timeline, do one of the following. • Click an item in the detection results list. • Select an item in the list by pressing the up and down arrow keys. The playline moves to the first frame of the duplication. To identify a duplication position and activate the timeline Double click an item in the detection results list, or select an item and press the Enter key. The playline moves to the first frame of the duplication and the timeline is activated. When you double click an item in the list, Mark In and Mark Out points are placed around the duplicated range. To close the window Click the Close button or the OK button, or press the Esc key. Note

The detection results list is updated automatically when you edit the corresponding clips or frames on the timeline.

Detection of Flash Frames You can search the timeline for clips and filler with durations shorter than a specified value. Note

Nested sequences are not searched for flash frames.

290

Timeline Searching

To find flash frames

1

To identify a flash frame and activate the timeline Double click an item in the detection results list, or select an item and press the Enter key. The playline moves to the first frame of the flash frame and the timeline is activated. When you double click an item in the list, Mark In and Mark Out points are placed around the selected event.

Do one of the following. • Click the Flash Frame Detection button in the command button palette of the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor. • Select [Timeline Find] >[Flash Frame Detection] from the Timeline Editor main menu.

Notes

2

Enter the maximum duration that you want to find in the timecode box.

3

Select the search targets from among the following. Black Events Only: Filler only Short Clip Events Only: Clips only Both: Both clips and filler

4

Click the OK button. If the search finds flash frames meeting the conditions specified in the Flash Frame Options dialog, the Flash Frame Detection dialog opens to display a list of the detection results. (If no flash frames are found, a confirmation message appears instead of the Flash Frame Detection dialog.) The list displays the timecode positions, tracks, and durations of the flash frames.

• Flash frames are found only on monitored tracks. Tracks whose master track monitoring buttons are off are ignored. • The detection results list is updated automatically when you edit the corresponding event on the timeline or turn a master track monitoring button on or off. • To find events up to a different duration, repeat from step 1.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

To close the window Click the Close button or the OK button, or press the Esc key.

The Flash Frame Options dialog opens.

To find the source clips (master clips) of speed clips, composite clips, and sub clips on the timeline Load the source clips of speed clips, composite clips, and sub clips on the timeline into Source Viewer, and perform Match Frame. Note

Match Frame does not function with CG clips, as CG clips are not created in Project Explorer.

1

Select [Match Master Clip] from the context menu of the speed clip (or sub clip) on the timeline. The source clip (master clip) of the speed clip, sub clip, composite clip, or sub sequence is loaded into Source Viewer.

Detection of Media Offline Clips You can search the timeline to determine whether it contains any media offline clips.

To find media offline clips

5

To identify the detected flash frames on the timeline, do one of the following. • Click an item in the detection results list. • Select an item in the list by pressing the up and down arrow keys.

Click the Media Offline Detection button in the command button palette of the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor, or select [Timeline Find] > [Media Offline Detection] from the main menu of the Timeline Editor. The Media Offline Detection dialog appears and displays a list of clips which do not have full-resolution media.

The playline moves to the first frame of the corresponding flash frame.

Timeline Searching

291

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

Items appearing as “Slice n” in the Track column indicate that rendered results of the slice are not full resolution. Check the check boxes on the left side of the window and click the Search Result button. All of the checked clips are stored in the Search Result folder of Project Explorer. This is useful when performing a Batch Digitize process. If the clip is on the timeline but has been deleted from Project Explorer, a black image is used as the index picture for the clip on the timeline. If the clip is still in Project Explorer but the clip media file cannot be found, a “Media Offline’ image is used as the index picture.

Detection of Sections Containing Only Proxy Media You can search the timeline for sections that contain only proxy (low resolution) media. To find sections that contain only proxy media Click the Proxy Only Detection button in the command button palette of the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor, or select [Timeline Find] > [Proxy Only Detection] from the main menu of the Timeline Editor. The Proxy Only Detection dialog appears and displays a list of clips that contain sections of only proxy media.

The timecodes for the starting points of sections that contain only proxy media appear in the Timecode column. If you check the boxes on the left side of the window and click the Search Result button, all of the checked clips are stored in the Search Result folder of Project Explorer. This is useful when performing a Batch Digitize process.

292

Timeline Searching

Rendering Regardless of the video playback media mode, rendering of the timeline is always done using full-resolution media.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

If the original content includes an AVI or MXF file and the target export format uses the same video codec, the export uses a smart render workflow to save rendering time. In this case, the export target video wrapper format and audio format are ignored. Notes

• When full-resolution media is not available, an error message appears and the rendering task is cancelled. • Rendering always creates an interlaced clip, even if there are progressive clips on the timeline.

Rendering

293

Adjusting White Balance Automatically You can adjust the white balance of multiple clips on the timeline automatically using a single operation. Chapter 7 Editing Operations

1

In Timeline Editor, select the clips whose white balance you wish to adjust.

2

Position the playline over the image to use as the white balance reference.

3

Click the Auto White Balance button. The image at the playline is used as the reference for white balance adjustment, and the adjustment is applied to all selected clips.

After adjusting the white balance, the result can be checked and fine tuned by opening the White Balance effect in Effect Editor. To apply white balance to all clips on the same reel Right-click the Auto White Balance button and select [Apply to Source Reel] from the context menu. The white balance adjustment is applied to all clips within the timeline that have the same reel name. To apply white balance to clips with the same name Right-click the Auto White Balance button and select [Apply to Source Clip Name] from the context menu. The white balance adjustment is applied to all clips within the timeline that have the same clip name. Clip name extensions for subclips, copied/duplicate clips, and speed clips (for example, “_S001”) are ignored when comparing clip names.

294

Adjusting White Balance Automatically

Working With After Effects

7

Open the Output Module Settings dialog from the Render Queue window, and select [Xpri NS AVI File] for [Format].

8

Click the OK button in the Output Module Settings dialog.

9

Click the Render button in the Rendering Queue dialog.

Starting After Effects

10 When the rendering finishes, exit After Effects.

The following explains how to start After Effects from the XPRI NS Editing Software.

11 If a dialog appears asking if you want to save your changes, click the Yes button. The rendered clip appears in the Source Viewer.

To start After Effects from the Timeline Editor (timeline mode)

1

Right-click the clip that you wish to send to After Effects from the sequence, and select [File Edit] > [After Effects].

To start After Effects from Project Explorer (Project Explorer mode)

1

Click to select a clip in Project Explorer (multiple selections possible).

2

Right click the selected clip or clips and select [File Edit] > [After Effects] from the context menu.

After Effects starts.

2

Select [File] > [Project Settings], and check to be sure that [Timecode Base] is set to the frame rate of the current project. Note

This setting is changed whenever the frame rate of the XPRI NS project changes.

Chapter 7 Editing Operations

If Adobe After Effects is correctly installed on the Workstation, you can do the following. • Start After Effects from the XPRI NS Editing Software. • Export clips and sequences created in XPRI NS to After Effects, edit them in After Effects, and then import the edited clips to XPRI NS.

Note

It is recommended that you save all After Effects projects in a single location.

After Effects starts.

3

Carry out steps 2 and following in the previous section, “To start After Effects from the Timeline Editor (timeline mode).”

The XPRI NS project folders appear in the Composition window.

3

Double click the XPRI NS Composition icon. Note

You can only send one clip from the sequence (the clip that you selected by right-clicking) to After Effects. To send the entire sequence, select the sequence clip with Project Explorer.

4

Edit the clip with After Effects.

5

Select [File] > [Render to XPRI]. A window for saving the project opens.

6

Specify the project name and save destination and click the [Save] button.

Working With After Effects

295

Effect Tools

FX Explorer Overview FX Explorer allows you to view and manage the effects belonging to the current project. It handles video, audio, and CG effects. In addition to the standard effects, you can manage modified effects and optional effects. Use this tool to select effects to apply to clips on the timeline or to transitions. XPRI NS also supports CG effects (effects applied to CG clips). Normally these effects can be handled in the same way as video effects. Unless otherwise noted, the descriptions of video effects apply to CG effects as well. XPRI NS also provides support for OpenFX support for open interface effects using an OpenFX plug-in. It currently supports GenArts Sapphire v5.04 x86 and Monsters GT V6 x86 OpenFX effects. Notes

• OpenFX effects must be installed in the default folder. Do not change the installation folder when running the installer. • OpenFX effects must be rendered when added to the timeline. When adding OpenFX effects, the red line on timeline slice bar does not indicate real-time. • OpenFX effects cannot be edited using the DMW-C1 media bar control panel.

To Start FX Explorer To start FX Explorer, click the FX Explorer (page 184) button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor or the Project Explorer, or press the focus hot key which starts FX Explorer. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.)

296

FX Explorer

Chapter

8

See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information about focus hot keys.

Clicking the FX button of the Project Explorer opens an additional FX Explorer window. Up to four EX Explorer windows can be open simultaneously. When one or more FX Explorer windows is open, clicking the FX Explorer button of the Timeline Editor closes all the FX Explorer windows. The focus hot key opens a new FX Explorer window only when no window is open. When a window is already open, it moves the focus to that window. If there are more than one FX Explorer windows open, it shifts the focus between FX Explorer windows.

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b Toolbar

c Search bar

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

d Tree View pane

a Menu button Displays the main menu of FX Explorer.

e Effect View pane

b Toolbar Contains the FX Explorer tool buttons.

e Effect View pane Displays the effects and effect shortcuts in the bin which is selected in the Tree View pane. When the Trash is selected, it also displays effects located immediately below the Trash. There are two display modes. • Picture View mode • Text View mode

See FX Explorer Tool Buttons (page 304) for more information about the FX Explorer tool buttons.

See FX Explorer Effect View Pane (page 300) for more information about the Effect View pane.

See “FX Explorer Main Menu” (page 305) for more information about the main menu.

c Search bar Searches for and displays clips with titles matching or partially matching the entered text in the currently selected folder in the Tree View pane. You can enter up to 50 characters, excluding various punctuation marks (*^’~!#/?:”&;,). d Tree View pane Displays in tree format the folders and bins in the current project that contain effects. See FX Explorer Tree View Pane (page 298) for more information about the Tree View pane.

FX Explorer

297

FX Explorer Tree View Pane Overview Displays a tree of the folders and bins in the current project.

Items in the Tree View Pane Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Icons and names are displayed for each item. There are icons for the following item types. Folders

Effects

Effect type

FX3

Barn Wipe

Transition

FX4

Box Wipe

Transition

FX5

Mosaic

Clip

FX6

Defocus

Clip

FX7

Blur

Clip

FX8

P in P

Clip

FX9

Color Corrector

Clip

Only users with XPRI Manager access rights are allowed to change data in the Common folder. User folder: Any effect can be stored. Folders named “Common” or with log-on names in the User’s FX folders can contain other folders and bins in any arrangement that is convenient. Bins

Folders can contain bins or other folders. The following folders are displayed in FX Explorer. CG Template folder: Contains CG templates. User’s FX folders: Contain modified effects. You can assign names to user folders and create as many as needed. Effects saved in user folders are private, and can only accessed by the owner. Effects saved in the “Common” folder are public, and can be accessed by all users. Clip folder: Contains effects applied to clips. Transition folder: Contains effects applied to transitions. Command Button Customize folder: Contains the Common folder, where effects corresponding to the FX1 to FX9 command buttons are stored, and User folders, where users can store any effects. Video Effects folder: Contains shortcuts for the video effects that can be applied to video clips and transitions. OpenFX effects are displayed in a subfolder. XPRI NS supports GenArts Sapphire v5.04 x86 and Monsters GT V6 x86 OpenFX effects. Audio Effects folder: Contains shortcuts for the audio effects that can be applied to audio clips. Trash folder: Contains effects removed from folders in the Tree View pane. Effects placed in the Trash folder can be restored to another folder. To delete the effects permanently, delete the contents of the Trash folder. The Command Button Customize folder contains the following folders. Common folder: By default, the bins in the Common folder contain the effects shown in the following table.

298

Bin

Bin

Effects

Effect type

FX1

Slide Wipe

Transition

FX2

Shape Wipe

Transition

FX Explorer Tree View Pane

Bins can contain effects. They cannot contain folders. Trash

The Trash contains deleted folders, bins, and effects.

Tree View Pane Operations In the Tree View pane, you can perform the same types of operations on items (folders, bins, and the Trash) as in the Tree View pane of Project Explorer (see page 43). However, the following operations are not possible in the Clip folder and the Transition folder. • Deleting (moving to the Trash) the folder itself or folders which it contains • Creating new folders within the folder • Moving the folder or the folders which it contains • Cutting the folder to the clipboard and pasting it from the clipboard • Renaming the folder or the folders which it contains • Moving items into the folder from the Trash or the clipboard

Operations in the Command Button Customize folder The following operations are possible in the Command Button Customize folder. However, only users with XPRI Manager access rights are allowed to change, load, and save data in the Common folder. • One effect can be stored in one bin. If a bin already contains a video effect or an audio effect set, it is overwritten when another is stored there.

• The Restore to Default command in the main menu and context menu returns the effects stored in the bins to the defaults. • Whenever you store an effect in a User bin, that bin receives priority over the Common bin of the same name, and a message appears to inform you of that fact. If you click OK in the message, an X mark appears over the corresponding bin in the Common folder, providing a visual indication of the priority.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

• The Save Data command in the main and context menus of FX Explorer can be executed only for the whole Common folder or the whole User folder. The Load Data command can be executed only from the Command Button Customize folder. A confirmation message appears if a load operation will overwrite data in one or more bins. Notes

• Effects stored in the Common folder bins cannot be deleted. • You cannot rename, delete, or move the Command Button Customize folder or the folders and bins which it contains. • No data can be loaded into the Command Button Customize folder other than data saved from the Common folder or a User’s FX folder in the Command Button Customize folder. • To store an effect in a User folder within the Command Button Customize folder, configure the effect on the timeline, and then copy and paste it.

FX Explorer Tree View Pane

299

FX Explorer Effect View Pane Overview The Effect View pane displays the effects and effect shortcuts in the bin which is selected in the Tree View pane. When the Trash is selected, it also displays effects located below the Trash. There are two display modes. • Picture View mode • Text View mode Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Effect View Pane Operations You can use the Effect View pane to move effects into User’s FX folders from the timeline and from other folders (see the next section), and to apply effects to clips on the timeline (see “Operating on Effects on the Timeline” (page 307)). You can also perform the same operations on effects that you can perform in the List View pane of Project Explorer (see “List View pane” (page 45)). However, you cannot perform the following operations on bins in the Clip and Transition folders. • Deleting effects in the bins • Moving effects in the bins to the other bins • Cutting effects in the bins to the clipboard and pasting effects from the clipboard • Renaming effects in the bins • Moving effects into the bin from the Trash or the clipboard

To save effects into User’s FX folder bins Drag the effect from the timeline or another folder, or copy a video effect or an audio effect to the clipboard and paste it from the clipboard to the user folder bin. When you right-click and drag an effect within the Effect View pane or from the Effect View pane to another folder bin, a context menu appears giving you the option to move the material or to copy the effect (excluding pre-installed effects). When you drag a transition effect from the timeline, information about the duration and alignment that were set on the timeline is stored in the effect. To check the duration and alignment of each effect, put the Effect View pane into Text View mode. Note

When saving effects that are pasted on CG clips, the entire area on which the effect is applied (overall-/in-/middle-/ out-effect areas) is saved, in addition to the parameters.

300

FX Explorer Effect View Pane

To change effect icons You can assign any image as the icon of an effect stored in a User’s FX folder. The image must be in Windows 8-bit color BMP or 24-bit color BMP format. Select the effect whose icon you want to change, and select [Icon] > [Select Image] from the context menu. In the dialog that appears, specify the location and name of the image file that you want to use as the icon and click OK. The data from the image file is stored internally, so you can delete the image file after creating the icon. To restore the original icon, select the effect and select [Icon] > [Original Image] from the context menu.

To save or load effects You can save user effects /audio effect sets created in a User’s FX folder in another location under any name, and load them again into the User’s FX folder. To save a bin effect Select the bin that you want to save, or the folder that contains the bin, and select Save Data from the main menu, or select Save Data in the context menu of the selected bin or folder. In the dialog that appears, specify the save location and name, and click OK. One folder is created for each bin. When a folder is selected, effects are saved for the folder and all of the bins in the folder. To load a saved bin effect Select any folder in the folder named “Common” or with log-on name in a User’s FX folder and select Load Data from the main menu, or select Load Data from the context menu of the selected folder. In the dialog that appears, specify the location and name of the folder containing the desired data, and click OK. The effect is loaded into the selected folder.

Picture View Mode (FX Explorer) Overview Picture View mode is one of the view modes of the Effect View pane of the FX Explorer window. When only one bin is selected in the Tree View pane, icons are displayed for the effects in that bin. You can move the mouse over pre-installed effect icons to display an animation of the corresponding effect. On user effects, small indicator icons across the top of the effects icons indicate the type of effect for easy identification. Note

User customized effects icons do not support icon animation.

Text View Mode (FX Explorer) Overview

: Video Effect Template : Audio Effect Template : Transition Effect Template : CG Effect Template

: CG In-Effect Area : CG Middle-Effect Area : CG Out-Effect Area To change the icon size Right click the Picture View Mode button and select one of the following sizes from the context menu. • Extra Large • Large • Medium • Small

For a video effect • Name: Effect name • Type: Clip (clip effect) or Transition (transition effect) • Category: Name of the effect category (Wipe, 3D FX, etc.) • Original: The effect link destination • Duration: The duration set on the timeline • Alignment: The alignment set on the timeline For an audio effect • Name: Name of an effect • Type: Clip (clip effect) or Transition (transition effect) • Category: No display • Original: No display • Duration: The duration set when the effect is applied on the timeline • Alignment: The alignment set when the effect is applied on the timeline

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

: CG Overall-Effect Area

Text View mode is one of the view modes of the Effect View pane of the FX Explorer window. When only one bin is selected in the Tree View pane, the Effect View pane displays a list of the effects in that bin. The following properties are displayed:

You can click the string displayed under Alignment for a transition user effect to display a list and select a new alignment. Select Custom Start Setting from the list to start the Custom Start Setting dialog, which allows you to specify the effect alignment and duration.

To select Picture View mode Do one of the following. • Click the Picture View Mode button on the . • Right click in an empty part of the Effect View pane, and select View Mode > Picture View from the context menu.

To select Text View mode Do one of the following. • Click the Text View Mode button on the . • Right click in an empty part of the Effect View pane, and select View Mode > Text View from the context menu.

FX Explorer Effect View Pane

301

Applying Effects to Clips on the Timeline

• In-effect Area: Applies effects to the head of the clip. • Middle-effect Area: Applies effects to the middle portion of the clip. • Out-effect Area: Applies effects to the tail of the clip. Notes

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

To apply effects to clips or transitions between clips on the timeline, drag the desired effect from FX Explorer to the timeline. You can apply the system default video and audio effects by dragging effects from the Video Effects and Audio Effects folders in the Tree View of FX Explorer. Or you can apply user-defined effects from the User’s FX folder. You can also press the FX1 to FX9 command buttons to apply effects. Effects corresponding to these buttons are stored in the Command Button Customize folder. When you activate the Timeline Editor and press one of the FX1 to FX9 button, the effect in the bin (FX1 to FX9) for that button is applied to video or audio clips at the playline position on all active tracks. When a video effect is registered, it is applied to video clips. When an audio effect is registered, it is applied to audio clips. The FX1 to FX9 buttons are available through customization. Effects that have been registered for the FX1 to FX9 command buttons can also be applied by selecting them from the sub menu of the Add Customize Effect command in the context menu of video or audio tracks. You can apply one effect to one or more clips at the same time. You can also apply multiple effects to one or more clips at the same time.

• Transition effects cannot be applied to CG clips. If you want to apply a transition effect, move the CG clip to a video track before applying the effect. • Video effects can be applied to CG clips and CG templates. All option parameters for each video effect are available for selection in the Effect Editor window, with the exception of the Tracking tab. Effects can be copied from one CG clip and applied to another CG clip by using the Copy, Cut, and Paste commands. The effect is automatically applied to the same effect area in the target effect as it had in the source effect. The length of an effect can also be copied by holding down the Shift key when copying or cutting an effect. The pasted effect has the same length as the source effect if the target clip is equal or longer in length.

Transition Options Dialog The Transition Options dialog allows you to set the duration and alignment of transition effects. The Transition Options dialog appears when you apply a transition effect to a clip on the timeline (if the Transition Options dialog option is enabled in the Edit tab (page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog).

Note

To apply effects to a transition, sufficient margins are required outside the In points and Out points of both clips. A dialog appears to alert you if there is no margin or an insufficient margin for one or both of the clips. To cancel application of the effect, click the Cancel button. To apply the effect, select an option in the dialog to have the system automatically modify the settings for the transitions, then click the OK button.

1 Menu button 2 Duration 3 Alignment list box

To apply one or more effects to several clips at the same time Select the target clips, highlighting them. Select one or more effects and drag to one of the selected clips with the Shift key held down. The same effect or effects are applied to all of the highlighted clips. Applying effects to CG clips You can select one of four effect areas when applying effects to CG clips. 6 Cancel button

Overall In

Middle

Out

5 OK button 4 Before Edit Point

• Overall-effect Area: Applies effects to the entire clip.

302

Applying Effects to Clips on the Timeline

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Transition Options dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Transition Options dialog. Close: Closes the Transition Options dialog. b Duration Enter the duration of the transition effect. The initial duration is set in the Edit tab (see page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. c Alignment list box Select an alignment method from the drop down list. The initial alignment is set in the Edit tab (see page 610).

Keyframes Clip timecode

-10

When Snap on Frame is selected Keyframe positions change in approximate ratio with the length of the clip, so that each keyframe comes to the closest frame position. When this would result two keyframes being assigned to the same frame, priority is given to the keyframe that is closest to the frame position.

Keyframes Clip timecode

-10

d Before Edit Point (effect start point) When you select 4. Custom Start Settings from the Alignment list box, specify the effect start point and a duration here. (When you select an alignment method other than 4. Custom Start Settings, the effect start point is determined automatically on the basis of the alignment type and the duration.) e OK button Confirms the settings made in the Transition Options dialog and closes the dialog.

IN 0

OUT 10

20

Positions after the cell length changes

Note

The duration of the clip in the Full Effect Editor timeline includes the clip duration and the portion of the transition effects that extend beyond the head or tail of the clip.

IN OUT 0 20 10 Positions when keyframes are created

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

1. Start at Cut: Aligns the start point of the effect with the first frame after the cut point. 2. End at Cut: Aligns the end point of the effect with the first frame before the cut point. 3. Centered on Cut: Aligns the effect between the two clips. If the duration is an odd number, the duration from the start point to the center point is one frame longer than the duration from the center point to the end point. 4. Custom Start Settings: Aligns the effect position to any specified point.

In the Keyframe list box (page 312) of the Effect Editor, select Snap on Frame or Time Code. The following examples show how keyframe positions are adjusted by each of these methods. The figure below shows an example of the clip when the keyframes were created and the keyframe positions.

When Time Code is selected Keyframe positions are fixed relative to timecode.

Keyframes Clip timecode

-10

IN 0

OUT 10

20

Positions after the cell length changes

For more information about keyframes, see page 321.

f Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Transition Options dialog and closes the dialog.

Keyframe Application Adjustments When you apply effects from a User’s FX folder, you can specify how keyframe positions should be adjusted when the length of the clip used to create the keyframes differs from the length of the clip to which the keyframes are applied. Make this setting in the Effect Editor before saving an effect in a User’s FX folder.

Applying Effects to Clips on the Timeline

303

FX Explorer Tool Buttons the mouse wheel while the cursor is on the tool button area, or by clicking the arrow buttons that appear on the left and right ends of the tool button area.

FX Explorer has the following tool buttons. Note

If the window is not wide enough to display all the tool buttons, scroll left and right through the buttons by rolling b Cut cCopy

g Picture View Mode h Text View Mode

d Paste

i Auto Align Mode

e Delete Chapter 8 Effect Tools

a New Bin

f Refresh

a New Bin Creates a new bin in a User’s FX folder.

(page 68) for more information about selecting effects in the Effect View pane.

See “Creating New Bins” (page 65) for more information about the procedure to create a new bin.

This is disabled when working with Sonaps.

b Cut Cuts the selected item (including text) from a User’s FX folder or the Trash and saves it to the clipboard. See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about selecting items in the Tree View pane, and “Selecting Items” (page 68) for more information about selecting effects in the Effect View pane.

c Copy Creates a copy (including text) of the selected item and saves the copy to the clipboard. See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about selecting items in the Tree View pane, and “Selecting Items” (page 68) for more information about selecting effects in the Effect View pane.

d Paste Pastes an item (including text) from the clipboard. Click this button after selecting the paste destination. You cannot paste an item to the Clip folder or the Transition folder in FX Explorer. e Delete Deletes items from User’s FX folders and from the Trash. See “Selecting Items” (page 64) for more information about selecting items in the Tree View pane, and “Selecting Items”

304

j Storyboard View Mode

FX Explorer Tool Buttons

f Refresh Updates the data displayed in FX Explorer with the latest data. g Picture View Mode Puts the Effect View pane into Picture View Mode (see page 300). h Text View Mode Puts the Effect View pane into Text View Mode (see page 301). i Auto Align Mode This is a Picture View mode option. When you move or create items with this button turned on, the items are aligned automatically in the List View pane. (This has the same effect as the [Align Clips in Upper Left] command in the context menu.) j Storyboard View Mode When the List View pane is in Picture View mode, switches it to Storyboard View mode. In this mode you can also move items, arrange them, and change the display size in the same way. (You cannot use the auto align mode).

FX Explorer Main Menu

Close Closes the FX Explorer window.

Click the Menu button in FX Explorer to display the FX Explorer main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Selection Selects an effect. This command has the following subcommands. Select All Icon(s) In Bin: Selects all of the effects in the bin that is selected in the Tree View pane. Invert Selection: Deselects all selected effects and selects all other effects in the Effect View Pane. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Load Data Loads a user effect saved in a file into a User’s FX folder. For details, see “To save or load effects” (page 300).

Save Data Saves a user effect in a User’s FX folder to a file. For details, see “To save or load effects” (page 300). Note

It can be time consuming to load or save User’s FX folders to a floppy disk. Restore to Default Does not function in this version. Empty Trash Deletes all of the items in the Trash. For details, see “Emptying the Trash” (page 67).

Customize Opens a customize window. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about FX Explorer. Maximize Maximizes the FX Explorer window. Minimize Minimizes the FX Explorer window and displays it as a button on the taskbar.

FX Explorer Main Menu

305

FX Properties Dialog The FX Properties dialog displays a list of the clip effects applied to the selected clip on the timeline. The order of effects in a list indicates the order of application, with effects at the top of the list being applied first. You can use the FX Properties dialog to do the following. • Change the order of effects in a list. • Delete unneeded effects from a list. • Start the Effect Editor from an effect in a list. • Apply an effect from a list to another clip (copy or move). Chapter 8 Effect Tools

To open the FX Properties dialog Select a clip effect on the timeline, or a clip to which an effect has been applied, right click, and select [FX Properties...] from the context menu.

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button

2 Trash button

3 Effect list

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the FX Properties dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Open...: Starts the Effect Editor for the selected effect. Close: Closes the FX Properties dialog. b Trash button Deletes the selected effect. c Effect list Displays a list of icons and names for the effects applied to the selected clip. You can select and delete effects in the list, turn effects on and off, change the order of effects in

306

FX Properties Dialog

the list, and start the Effect Editor. You can also apply effects in the list to other clips. See “Operating on Effects on the Timeline” (page 307) for more information about effect list operations.

Operating on Effects on the Timeline To operate on effects applied to a clip on the timeline, select the clip and open the FX Properties dialog from the context menu.

To delete effects

To change the effect order

Operating on Transition Effects

Select an effect and drag it to the point where you want to move it in the list.

You can use the Transition Options dialog to change the duration and alignment of transition effects after placing them on the timeline.

To change effect parameters

To display the Transition Options dialog Place the Timeline Editor playline on a transition effect in an active track, and then select Options from the transition effect’s context menu. If the Transition Options button has been made available by customization, you can also click that button to open the Transition Options dialog.

it, 1) 2)

Select an effect and double click or select [Edit in Simple Effect Editor] or [Edit in Full Effect Editor] from the context menu of an effect to start the Simple Effect Editor (see page 308) or the Full Effect Editor (see page 311).

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Select the effects to delete in the effect list of the FX Properties dialog and click the Trash button or press the Delete key. You can delete an effect without opening the FX Properties dialog. Right click on an effect on the timeline and select Delete from the context menu.

Moving and copying effects between CG clips and video clips The following limitations apply when moving and copying effects between CG clips and video clips. • Movement and copying of effects is enabled between video clips and CG cells with overall-effect area. • Movement and copying of effects is disabled between video clips and CG cells with in-/middle-/out-effect area. • Effects can be copied from one CG clip and applied to another CG clip by using the Copy, Cut, and Paste commands. The effect is automatically applied to the same effect area in the target effect as it had in the source effect. The length of an effect can also be copied by holding down the Shift key when copying or cutting an effect. The pasted effect has the same length as the source effect if the target clip is equal or longer in length.

1) The Effect Editor starts in the mode selected by the Default Effect Editor option in the Display tab (page 626) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog. 2) To start the Effect Editor when you double click an effect icon, you need to check the [Editor Start-up with Double Click (Composer Mode)] check box in the Edit tab (page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

To move or copy effects to other clips Select the effect in the FX Properties dialog, and drag it to the clip to which you want to apply it with the Alt key held down. This moves the effect from the original clip to the target clip. To copy from the original clip to the clips to which you want to apply the effect, drag the effect with the Ctrl key held down. To copy effects to several clips Highlight all of the clips to which you want to apply the effect by selecting them, and then drag the effect from the FX Properties dialog to one of the highlighted clips with the Shift key held down. This copies the effect from the original clip to all of the highlighted clips. To select multiple effects Click the effects that you want to select in the effect list with the Ctrl key held down. Select an effect and then click another effect with the Shift key held down to select both effects and all of the effects between them.

[Apply to all Valid Tracks] check box By checking this check box before you change the duration or alignment of an effect, you can apply the changes to effects at the same position in all valid tracks. [Auto Set Transition Within Clip] check box When this is checked, transition effects are aligned in Start at Cut mode when the cut point is at the head of the clip, and End at Cut mode when the cut point is at the tail of the clip.

Operating on Effects on the Timeline

307

Video Effect Editor

2) To start either Effect Editor when you double click an effect icon, you need to check the [Editor Start-up with Double Click (Composer Mode)] check box in the Edit tab (page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Notes

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

The Video Effect Editor allows you to adjust parameters of effects applied to video clips and transitions. CG effects can be adjusted in the same way. Unless otherwise noted, “Effect Editor” in the following refers to the Video Effect Editor, and “effects” refers to video effects. In the Effect Editor you can do the following. • Adjust effects parameters • Check the video after applying effects • Create effect keyframes You can choose either of the following Effect Editor modes, depending on what you want to do. Simple Effect Editor: This mode works together with the Timeline Editor and allows you to adjust effect parameters quickly and easily. However, it does not allow you to adjust all of the parameters that can be adjusted with the Full Effect Editor. (See “Simple Effect Editor” (page 308) for more information.) Full Effect Editor: This mode allows you to adjust all effect parameters. (See “Full Effect Editor” (page 311) for more information.)

Simple Effect Editor Overview The Simple Effect Editor is a tool for quickly and easily adjusting the parameters of effects applied to clips and transitions on the timeline. It does not support some of the more complex parameters (for these you must use the Full Effect Editor), but it does enable efficient editing, because it is integrated into the Timeline Editor.

To start the Simple Effect Editor Do one of the following. • In the Timeline Editor (page 171), select the effect whose parameters you want to adjust and then select [Edit in Simple Effect Editor] from the context menu. • Double click an effect icon. 1) 2) If you have customized the command button area to include the Open FX button, you can click the button to start the Simple Effect Editor for the clip or transition at the playline position on the active tracks. 1) When several effects have been applied to a single clip, a pop-up list of the effects appears. Use the up and down arrow buttons or keys to select the effect you want, and then press the ENTER button or Enter key. 1) To have the Simple Effect Editor start instead of the Full Effect Editor, set the Default Effect Editor option in the Display tab (page 626) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog to [Simple].

308

Video Effect Editor

• The Simple Effect Editor closes when you select one of the Timeline Editor editing modes (Composer, Segment (Extract/Splice-In), Segment (Lift/Overwrite), Rubber band, or Trim). Effect operations possible on the timeline when the Simple Effect Editor is running • Video effects open in the Simple Effect Editor when you click an effect icon. • Clip effects open in the Simple Effect Editor when you click a video clip. (When several effects have been applied to a clip, the effect at the end of the effect order opens. When no effect has been applied, nothing is loaded into the Simple Effect Editor.) • The effect set applied to a clip opens in the Simple Effect Editor when you click that clip. (When no effect has been applied, nothing is loaded into the Simple Effect Editor.) • You can copy effects by dragging their icons with the Ctrl key held down.

Names and functions of parts 3 Effect name display 1 Menu button

4 Effect viewer 2 Parameter display section

5 Timecode display

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

7 Position bar

8 Effect list

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Effect Editor. See “Effect Editor Main Menu” (page 330) for more information about the main menu.

b Parameter display section Displays the current values of effect parameters. You can change the values as required. Except for the fact that no tabs are displayed, this section is the same as the parameter display section of the Full Effect Editor.

6 Command button area

e Timecode display Displays the timecode for the playline position (left box) and the duration of the clip at the playline position (right box). “--:--:--:--” appears as the duration when there is no target effect. f Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Simple Effect Editor. The command buttons shown here are the same as those shown in the Full Effect Editor.

See “Parameter display section” (page 314) for more information.

See page 324 for more information about the command buttons.

c Effect name display Displays the name of the effect that is the current target of adjustment. However, nothing appears here for effects that are not supported by the Simple Effect Editor.

g Position bar Displays the duration of clip effects and transition effects.

d Effect Viewer Allows you to display, play, and preview video after adding effects.

See page 310 for more information about the position bar.

h Effect list Displays a list of effects applied to clips or transitions. You can perform the following operations in this list. • Select effects so that you can modify their parameters.

Video Effect Editor

309

The display range is as follows. Clip effects: From the In point to the Out point of the clip Transition effects: From the start frame to the end frame of the transition Keyframe position marks and essence marks are also shown on the position bar.

• Turn effects on and off (through). • Add effects. For details on effect list, see page 311.

Position bar Overview The position bar displays the duration of clip effects and transition effects.

Names and Functions of Parts

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

1 Go to In area 2 Scrub area 3 Keyframe position mark 4 Essence mark

5 Playline

a Go to In area Represents the start of the effect. The playline moves to the start frame when you click this area. b Scrub area Represents the body of the effect. You can move around the effect by dragging the playline to the left and right within this area. c Keyframe position mark Indicates a frame where a keyframe has been set, and the state of the keyframe. The marks of currently selected keyframes are displayed in orange. d Essence mark Indicates an essence mark set on the timeline. If there are several essence marks set at the same position, only one essence mark is shown. It contains the information for the topmost track at that position. You can use the command buttons to jump to essence mark positions, and to display a marker list. e Playline Indicates the playline position. The Simple Effect Editor playline moves together with the Timeline Editor playline. For example, if you move the

310

Video Effect Editor

6 Go to Out area

Timeline Editor playline, the composition results for the corresponding tracks appear in the Effect Viewer. f Go to Out area Represents the end of the effect. The playline moves to the end frame when you click this area.

Effect List

Full Effect Editor

Displays a list of effects applied to clips or transitions. You can perform the following operations in this list. • Select effects so that you can modify their parameters. You can also select effects by clicking the effects icon in the timeline. • Turn effects on and off (through). • Add effects. • Rearrange the display order of effects by right-clicking an effect and using commands in the context menu. Note that if the Frame Size Conversion effect is in the list, it is always displayed at the top.

1 Effect names 2 On/Off controls

The Full Effect Editor is a tool for adjusting the parameters of effects applied to clips and transitions. It allows you to adjust all parameters.

To start the Full Effect Editor Do one of the following. • In the Timeline Editor (page 171), select the effect whose parameters you want to adjust and then select [Edit in Full Effect Editor] from the context menu. • Double click an effect icon. 1) 2) If you have customized the command button area to include the Open FX button, you can click the button to start the Full Effect Editor for the clip or transition at the playline position on the active tracks. 1) When several effects have been applied to a single clip, a pop-up list of the effects appears. Use the up and down arrow buttons or keys to select the effect you want, and then press the ENTER button or Enter key.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

You can hide or display the list using [Effect List] of the main menu.

Overview

1) To have the Full Effect Editor start instead of the Simple Effect Editor, set the Default Effect Editor option in the Display tab (page 626) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog to [Full]. 2) To start either Effect Editor when you double click an effect icon, you need to check the [Editor Start-up with Double Click (Composer Mode)] check box in the Edit tab (page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

a Effect names List the names of the effects applied to a clip. Effects are applied in order from the top. You can click the name of an effect to select that effect as a target of parameter adjustment. b On/Off (through) controls Turn the effect on when checked, and turn it off (through) when cleared. To add an effect Drag the effect that you want to add from FX Explorer and drop it into the list.

Video Effect Editor

311

Names and functions of parts a Menu button 1 Parameter display section b Keyframe list box c Effect name display d Timecode display e Effect Viewer

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

f Command button area 2 Effect timeline

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Effect Editor.

Timecode: Keyframe positions are fixed relative to timecode.

See “Effect Editor Main Menu” (page 330) for more information about the main menu.

You can set the initial keyframe handling mode in the Keyframe tab (see page 627) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog.

b Keyframe list box Allows you to specify how keyframe position should be adjusted when you apply a keyframe to a clip on the timeline whose length differs from the length of the clip used to create the keyframe. Select one of the following from the drop-down list. Snap: Keyframe positions change in approximate ratio with the length of the clip, so that each keyframe comes to the closest frame position. When this would result in two keyframes being assigned to the same frame, priority is given to the keyframe that is closest to the frame position.

312

Video Effect Editor

c Effect name display Displays the name of the effect that is the current target of adjustment. d Timecode display Displays the timecode for the playline position (left box) and the duration of the clip at the playline position (right box). You can click the timecode display, enter a timecode value, and press ENTER to jump to the frame at the corresponding timecode.

The timecode display can be switched between field 1, field 2, and frame. When field 2 is displayed, it is underlined. To switch the display between field 1, field 2, and frame, use the Display tab (see page 609) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

e Effect Viewer Allows you to confirm to display, play, and preview video after adding effects. You can adjust the effect parameters while viewing the video (see page 319). You can use the command buttons to change the viewer display mode of the Effect Viewer, or select a special kind of display. The Effect Viewer displays the video of the scene at the playline position. To move the playline, use one of the following methods. • Drag the playline on the effect timeline. • Use the command buttons to move the playline. Notes

• You can hear the audio belonging to video during scrubbing. To hear the audio, turn the Caps Lock key on. • Dropped frames may occur more often during playback when safe areas, grids, and crop frames are displayed in the Effect Viewer. See Previewing Effects (page 318) for more information.

f Command button area Contains the Full Effect Editor command buttons. The command buttons shown here are the same as those shown in the Simple Effect Editor. See page 324 for more information about the Effect Editor command buttons.

Video Effect Editor

313

1 Parameter display section Overview Displays the current values of effect parameters. You can change the values as required. The type and number of the displayed parameters vary depending on the selected effect. The parameters are classified under separate tabs. See “Effect List” (page 697) for a list of effects that can be used in the Full Effect Editor and their parameters.

Note

Some parameters can also be adjusted by using the Media Bar Control Panel. See“Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels” (page 320) for more information.

Names and Functions of Parts

1 Tabs 2 Parameter name Chapter 8 Effect Tools

3 Edit box 4 Link button 5 Scrollbar 6 Keyframe mode button 7 Slider

8 Plate Reset 9 Reset button q; Picker button qa Color selection button

qs Drop-down list

qd Path edit button

qf Plate qg Knob mark

a Tabs Display a different class of parameters when clicked. b Parameter name Displays the name of the parameter. Clicking a parameter name selects that parameter as the target of the operation (the parameter gains the focus). You can also press the Tab key to select (give the focus to) parameters.

314

Video Effect Editor

c Edit box Displays the current setting. To change the setting, either enter a value directly or click the f/F buttons. Note

When you change a setting, do so before operating in the Effect Viewer or on the control panel.

d Link button Clicking this button enables the button (the button changes its color to orange when enabled) and allows you to change related parameters at the same time. For example, the aspect ratio is preserved if you click to link width and height. For 3D effects, a 3D link button is displayed for the X, Y, and Z parameters. By enabling the 3D link button, you can change two or all three of the X, Y, and Z parameters at the same time. You can set initial values in the Effect Editor Properties dialog. For more information, see “Effect Editor Properties Dialog” (page 624).

k Color selection button Displays the color currently applied to the effect. Clicking this button displays the Color Selection dialog, allowing you to select a color. For more information, see “Color Selection Tab” (page 362).

l Drop-down list Click the F button to display a list and select the desired value. m Path edit button Left click this button to cycle between the keyframe path types. Right click to display the Path Setting dialog. The path type and the items in the Path Setting dialog change depending on whether the wave is periodic.

e Scrollbar Drag the scrollbar to move to another plate. f Keyframe mode button Enables or disables keyframe. : Enabled (Keyframe mode) : Disabled (Single keyframe mode) You can set initial values in the Effect Editor Properties dialog. You can use the [Keyframe Mode] command in the main menu to enable or disable all parameters. For more information, see “Effect Editor Properties Dialog” (page 624) and “Keyframe Mode” (page 330). For more information about keyframe operations, see Keyframe Operations (page 321).

g Slider Drag the knobs on sliders to set parameter values. Clicking in a slider beside the knob changes the value in units of 10. h Plate Reset Resets all of the parameters in the corresponding plate to their default values. This button is disabled when the parameters in the plate are already set to the default values. i Reset button Resets the parameter to its default value. This button is disabled when the parameter is already set to the default value. When there are sub parameters, a reset button is displayed for each sub parameter. j Picker button Allows you to select colors in the Effect Viewer. When you click this button, the shape of the mouse pointer changes into an eye dropper.

Step: Parameter values change at keyframe positions. Linear: Values are interpolated linearly between keyframes. Speed is constant. Smooth: Values are interpolated on a curve between keyframes. Speed increases and decreases around the keyframe, becoming fastest at the center point between keyframes. Spline: When you select Spline, you can set the Tension (tension of the path curve), Bias (slope of the tangential line relative to the path curve), and Continuity (continuity of the path). When these parameters are set to their default values, this path type produces the same type of curve as Smooth. You can adjust the curve by changing the parameters. The color of the button changes when the parameters are set to non-default values. You can select the initial path type in the Effect Editor Properties dialog.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Note

Initial values cannot be set for 3D effects.

For more information, see “Effect Editor Properties Dialog” (page 624).

n Plate Each tab has one or more plates. Activate a plate by clicking inside it. The title bar of the active plate is green. Note

Before using the Media Bar Control Panel to change parameters, activate the relevant plate. When a plate is activated, the knobs of the Media Bar Control Panel are assigned to the parameters for that plate. o Knob mark The knob mark in the active plate is colored, indicating which knob on the Media Bar Control Panel is assigned to which parameter. For parameters not assigned to knobs, the corresponding knob marks are displayed in gray.

Video Effect Editor

315

2 Effect timeline Overview The effect timeline allows you to create and edit effect keyframes. Names and Functions of Parts

b + and – buttons

a Clip In and Out points

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

f Position bar

g Scroll bar/ zoom controller

l Tracks k Keyframe position mark

e Playline time d Track names

3 Timeline display button

j Keyframe mark i Essence mark h Playline

a Clip In and Out points For clip effects, the In point and Out point of the clip are displayed. For transition effects, the start point and end point of the transition are displayed. b + and - buttons Click the + button to display the parameter tree of the active tab, and click the - button to hide it. Right-click to import keyframes, or to export keyframes or interpolated data. c Timeline display button Turns the effect timeline display on and off. d Track names Display tab and parameter names as track names. Clicking a track name selects that track as the target of the operation (the track gains the focus). The name of the selected track is displayed in white. You can also press the Tab key to select (give the focus to) tracks. Only parameters with enabled keyframes (keyframe mode) are displayed on tracks. By displaying the context menu of this section, you can import and export keyframes of the selected parameters. e Playline time Displays the current position of the playline in timecode format.

316

Video Effect Editor

f Position bar Displays the duration of clip effects and transitions. g Scroll bar/zoom controller Zooms in and out on the timeline. Has the following functions, in addition to normal scroll bar function. Drag right arrow to zoom in, and drag left arrow to zoom out. Alternatively, right-click while holding the Ctrl key and drag up/down on the timecode area to zoom in and out. Right-click while holding the Ctrl key and drag left/right on the timeline to move the timeline. Double-click the scroll bar to collapse/expand its length. h Playline Shows the current position on the effect timeline. i Essence mark Indicates an essence mark set on the timeline. If there are several essence marks set at the same position, only one essence mark is shown. It contains the information for all of the essence marks at that position. You can use the command buttons to jump to essence mark positions, and to display a marker list. j Keyframe mark Displays a keyframe position on a parameter track. The currently selected keyframe mark is displayed in orange.

Keyframe marks are not displayed in the track of the currently open tab. Tab keyframe marks are displayed in the tracks of tabs that are not currently open. These show the state of the keyframes on the tracks of the parameters in the tab. For more information about keyframe selections, see page 321.

k Keyframe position mark Displays a frame for which a keyframe has been set, and the state of the keyframe which it contains. The marks of the currently selected keyframes are displayed in orange. For more information about keyframe selections, see page 321. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

l Tracks Display the positions where the parameters of the currently open tab are applied.

Video Effect Editor

317

bar. Scroll the mouse wheel for the seek function, or click the wheel and scroll the wheel for the shuttle function.

Effect Editor Basic Operations

To switch the Effect Viewer display mode This section explains basic editing operations which are common to both the Simple Effect Editor and the Full Effect Editor.

Editing Effects Edit effects by selecting parameters and setting the desired parameter values.

You can select from the following five display modes. • FG Monitor: Foreground picture • Key Monitor: The key of the foreground picture • FG&BG Monitor: A composite picture, consisting of the foreground and background pictures (default) • BG Monitor: The background picture • All Tracks Monitor: Output picture of all tracks (same as the Master monitor of the Master Viewer) Select with the corresponding command buttons.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

To select parameters Click the name of the parameter in the parameter display section. In the Full Effect Editor, you can also click the parameter name on the Effect Timeline. You can also select parameters by pressing the Tab key. Note

A parameter gains the focus automatically when you change its values with the sliders in the parameter display section or the knobs on the Media Control Panel.

To change parameter settings Use the tools in the Parameter Display section. The method to use depends on the selected parameter. Note

To set special display on the Effect Viewer screen Use the following command buttons. • Safe action area • Grid • Split View You can also change the grid settings in the main menu.

To split the Effect Viewer screen You can split the Effect Viewer screen into two panes to show the picture before and after application of an effect. When you split the Effect Viewer, the pictures in the Master Viewer and on the video monitor are also split.

1

A Split View mark appears in the Effect Viewer.

Some parameters can also be adjusted with the Media Bar Control Panel.

1)By default, the Split View command button does not appear in the command button area of the Effect Editor. To use this button, you will need to customize the command button area. For more information about customization, see “Command Button Customize window” (page 570).

See “Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels” (page 320) for more information.

Previewing Effects You can display and play video after adding effects. To display or play another scene, use one of the following methods to move the playline. • In the Simple Effect Editor, drag the playline on the position bar. • In the Full Effect Editor, drag the playline on the Effect Timeline. • Use the command buttons to move the playline. Notes

• The playline can also be moved in the Timeline Editor. • The jog and shuttle controls on the control panel can also be used to control play. • The mouse wheel can be used for seek and shuttle functions when the mouse is moved over the position

318

Effect Editor Basic Operations

Click the Split View command button, turning it on. 1)

2

Drag the triangle (border mark) of the Split View mark to set the point where the Effect Viewer screen is split. The original picture is displayed on the THRU side, and the picture with the effect applied is displayed on the FX side. You can switch the THRU and FX sides by double clicking the border mark.

Note

Transition effects cannot be viewed in Split View mode. The Split View button is disabled when you select an effect that cannot be viewed in Split View mode.

Parameter Adjustments in the Effect Viewer Parameters that can be adjusted or set with sliders, edit boxes, or the picker button can be adjusted while viewing the video in the Effect Viewer.

Notes

• You can make fine adjustments to values by dragging the mouse with the Ctrl key held down. (Values change by 1/ the normal amount.) 5 • When adjusting parameters by moving the mouse up, down, right, and left, you can adjust only the item with the greatest amount of variation by moving the mouse with the Shift key held down. • Double clicking the Effect Viewer while holding Shift key down resets the parameter to its initial value.

Parameters with one setting item To increase a value: Drag right To decrease a value: Drag left However, for parameters that rotate the picture, you may need to drag in the opposite direction.

Parameters with two setting items To increase X values: Drag right To decrease X values: Drag left To increase Y values: Drag up To decrease Y values: Drag down

When the XZ plane is selected To increase X values: Drag right To decrease X values: Drag left To increase Z values: Drag up To decrease Z values: Drag down Y values do not change. Operations may be different for parameters that rotate the picture.

Parameters with four setting items As an example of parameters with four setting items, the following explains Rectangle parameters (Left, Right, Top, Bottom). Adjust the position and size of a rectangle on the viewer screen as follows. Clicked position

Drag direction

Setting

On the inside of the rectangle

Drag right (Right)

Move right

On the top or bottom lines

On the left or right lines

Drag left (Left)

Move left

Drag up (Top)

Move up

Drag down (Bottom)

Move down

Drag up

Expand upward or reduce downward

Drag down

Reduce upward or expand downward

Drag left

Expand left or reduce right

Drag right

Reduce left or expand right

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

When adjustable parameters are selected in the Effect Viewer, the shape of the mouse pointer in the Effect Viewer changes and you can adjust values by dragging in the Effect Viewer instead of using sliders and edit boxes. The picker button provides a color selection function for operations in the Effect Viewer. When the button is clicked, the mouse pointer changes into an eye dropper. Dragging the dropper to any point in the viewer and releasing it there selects the color at that position.

When the XY plane is selected To increase X values: Drag right To decrease X values: Drag left To increase Y values: Drag up To decrease Y values: Drag down Z values do not change.

Parameters with three setting items Parameters with three setting items are 3D effect parameters. When adjusting 3D effect parameters, use the Effect Viewer context menu or the X-Y and X-Z buttons of the parameter display section to select whether to operate on the XY plane or the XZ plane. Coordinate definitions in the Effect Viewer are as follows. Origin: Center of screen X: Horizontal direction, positive from left to right Y: Vertical direction, positive from bottom to top Z: Depth direction, positive from front to back

Parameter Adjustments in the Effect Viewer

319

Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels Effect Editor parameters can be adjusted with the Media Bar Control Panel.

Adjusting Parameters With the Media Bar Control Panel

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Parameters that can be adjusted with the Media Bar Control Panel are indicated with a knob mark in the Parameter display section (page 314). Adjust a parameter by rotating the knob with the same color as the knob mark. Normally rotating a knob in the clockwise direction increases the value, while rotating a knob in the counterclockwise direction decreases the value. However, operations may be different for parameters that rotate the picture. Note

Dragging the mouse with the Ctrl key held down makes values change by 1/5 the normal amount.

320

Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels

Keyframe Operations Enabling and Disabling Keyframe Mode

When you switch from keyframe mode to single keyframe mode The keyframe mode interpolation value is copied to the single keyframe mode parameter value. If you do not want to copy the value, switch to single keyframe mode with the Ctrl key held down. When you switch from single keyframe mode to keyframe mode The single keyframe mode parameter value is copied to the keyframe at the playline position. A keyframe is created if one does not already exist at the playline position. If you do not want to copy the value or create a new keyframe, switch to keyframe mode with the Ctrl key held down.

Creating Keyframes When a parameter value is changed, a keyframe is automatically created at the playline position, and a keyframe mark is displayed (see page 316). To create a keyframe without changing parameter values, click the Set Keyframe command button, or select [Add KF] from the context menu of a track. If a keyframe already exists at that position, its content is updated. You can also use the Copy Keyframe and Paste Keyframe buttons to create a keyframe from a keyframe that already exists on a track.

Keyframe marks and keyframe position marks The positions of keyframes on tracks are shown by marks. Note

Keyframe marks and tab keyframe marks appear only in the Full Effect Editor.

•

: Not selected

When the cell length changes, the keyframe positions are displaced from the corresponding frames. If this occurs, it is possible for more than one keyframe to exist in a single frame. In this case, keyframes are displayed as follows. • : All keyframes in a frame are selected •

: Only the keyframe closest to the frame start position is selected

•

: No keyframe is selected

When you move the playline to a frame where several keyframes exist and adjust parameters, the settings of the keyframe closest to that frame’s start position are changed. To select several keyframes, drag with the right button of the mouse held down to surround the keyframe marks with a rectangle.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

You can select the default keyframe mode setting (enabled or disabled) in the Keyframe tab of the Effect Editor Properties dialog. Single keyframe mode is enabled when you disable keyframe mode. Selecting single keyframe mode allows you to keep effect parameters constant across an entire clip. To enable or disable keyframe mode for each parameter, click the keyframe mode button in the parameter display section. To enable or disable keyframe mode for all parameters, select [Enable] or [Disable] under [Keyframe Mode] in the main menu, or alternatively click the Keyframe Mode button while holding down the Alt key.

Keyframe marks When you create a keyframe, a mark is displayed at the playline position of the parameter. Selected and not selected keyframe marks have different colors. • : Selected

Tab keyframe marks When a parameter track is not displayed (is collapsed), a mark for the keyframes in that track is displayed on the tab track (tab keyframe mark). Even if a track is not displayed, selecting a tab keyframe mark on the tab track allows you to select all of the keyframes in one frame. Tab keyframe marks are displayed differently, as shown below, depending on whether there is one keyframe each in each track or different numbers of keyframes in different tracks. One keyframe in each track • : All keyframes are selected •

: No keyframe is selected

Different numbers of keyframes in different tracks • : All keyframes are selected •

or

: Some keyframes are selected

•

: No keyframe is selected

Keyframe position marks In the Simple Effect editor, keyframe position marks appear at the bottom of the position bar. In the Full Effect Editor, they appear in the upper part of the effect timeline. You can select all of the keyframe in a frame by selecting a keyframe position mark. Keyframe position marks are displayed differently, as shown below, depending on whether there is one keyframe

Keyframe Operations

321

each in each track or different numbers of keyframes in different tracks. One keyframe in each track • : All keyframes are selected •

: No keyframe is selected

• Press Ctrl + Shift + A. The following operations automatically cancel the selection of all currently selected keyframes: • Creating a new keyframe • Enabling or disabling keyframe mode • Performing some operation on another keyframe

Different numbers of keyframes in different tracks • : All keyframes are selected

Changing Keyframe Positions

•

or

To cut, copy, paste, or delete keyframes

•

: No keyframe is selected

: Some keyframes are selected

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

To select multiple keyframe marks or keyframe position marks Drag with the right button of the mouse held down to surround the marks you want to select with a rectangle. Keyframe marks or keyframe position marks are selected, depending on which type was surrounded first.

Do the following: • Cut: Click the Cut Keyframe button or select [Cut] from the context menu of the keyframe • Copy: Click the Copy Keyframe button or select [Copy] from the context menu of the keyframe • Paste: Click the Paste Keyframe button or select [Paste] from the context menu of the keyframe • Delete: Click the Delete Keyframe button or select [Delete] from the context menu of the keyframe

Selecting the Target Keyframe of an Operation

Moving keyframes along the time axis

The following operations select one keyframe on a track: • Changing the parameters set for a keyframe • Clicking a keyframe mark. To select multiple keyframes Do one of the following. • With the Ctrl key held down, click the keyframe marks that you want to select in order. • Drag with the right button of the mouse held down to surround the keyframe marks you want to select with a rectangle. To select all of the keyframes in a tab for a single frame Click the tab keyframe mark. To select all keyframes in a frame Click the keyframe position mark.

Proceed as follows, operating on the position bar in the Simple Effect Editor and on the effect timeline in the Full Effect Editor.

1

Select keyframes or keyframe position marks. In the Simple Effect Editor, you can operate only on keyframe position marks. The color of the selected keyframes or keyframe position marks changes to orange or yellow.

2

Drag the selected keyframes or keyframe position marks. As you drag, the keyframes or keyframe position marks are shown in their original locations in the selected state (orange or yellow). The current positions are shown by empty orange or yellow marks.

To select all keyframes Do one of the following. • Open the context menu of the Full Effect Editor Effect Timeline and choose [Select All KF]. • Press Ctrl + A.

To cancel selections To cancel the selection of a specific keyframe, click the keyframe mark while holding down the Ctrl key. To cancel the selection of all keyframes Do one of the following. • Open the context menu of the Full Effect Editor effect timeline and choose [Deselect All KF].

322

Keyframe Operations

Press the Esc key to cancel the operation while you are dragging.

When you release the mouse button, the keyframes or keyframe position marks are shown in the current position in the selected state.

Key

Operation

Ctrl + Shift + Alt

• Copy keyframes across neighboring keyframes. • Copy while snapping to the positions of keyframe position markers. • If there is a keyframe at the copy destination, it is overwritten.

Changing Keyframe Content To adjust parameters Notes

Movement and copy limitations When you move or copy keyframes, it is normally not possible to drag them past across the neighboring keyframes. If you are moving or copying several keyframes at once, this limitation depends on the location of the nearest keyframe. However, you can disable this limitation by pressing the Shift key as you drag (see the following section). Operating with both the mouse and the keyboard The following table shows what occurs when you drag while holding down the Shift, Alt, and Ctrl keys. Key

Operation

Shift

• Move keyframes across neighboring keyframes. • If there is a keyframe at the move destination, it is overwritten.

Alt

Move while snapping to the positions of keyframe position markers.

Ctrl

Copy keyframes.

Shift + Alt

• Move keyframes across neighboring keyframes. • Move while snapping to the positions of keyframe position markers. • If there is a keyframe at the move destination, it is overwritten.

Ctrl + Alt

Copy while snapping to the positions of keyframe position markers.

Ctrl + Shift

• Copy keyframes across neighboring keyframes. • If there is a keyframe at the copy destination, it is overwritten.

To return parameter settings to their defaults Click the Reset button. To confirm the adjusted parameters, do one of the following. • Click the Create/Update Keyframe button • Move the playline to another position • Adjust another parameter

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

• When you have selected Bezier under the Type parameter in the Mask tab, the Effect Editor Tool is displayed, but the window cannot be switched between displayed and hidden during keyframe movement. • Keyframe movement is not supported for the Transition parameter of transition effects.

See “To change parameter settings” in “Effect Editor Basic Operations” (page 318).

Pressing the Esc key before confirming the values returns the keyframe parameter values to the values before adjustment. Undoing an adjustment before confirming the values moves two steps back, canceling the adjustment and also undoing the values that existed before the adjustment.

To set the keyframe path type (interpolation method) Do one of the following. • Left click the Path edit button (see page 315) and select the path type. • Right click the Path edit button to display the Path Settings dialog, and select the desired path type. To change the path type for several keyframes at once Select the target keyframes, open the effect timeline context menu, and select [Change Path Type...]. Select the desired path type when the Path Settings dialog appears.

Keyframe Operations

323

Effect Editor Command Button Area By default, the buttons in the Effect Editor command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 330) from the main menu. Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

324

Effect Editor Command Button Area

Default command button configuration

Icon

Button function

Set Keyframe

Creates a keyframe at the playline position on the track. If a keyframe already exists at the playline position, its content is updated. When the Add KF To All Parameters option buttons (see page 627) in the Keyframe tab of the Effect Editor Properties dialog is on, keyframes are created for all parameters at the playline position that are in keyframe mode.

Delete Keyframe

Deletes the selected keyframe. This button is disabled when no keyframe is selected.

Cut Keyframe

Cuts the selected keyframe. This button is disabled when no keyframe is selected.

Copy Keyframe

Copies the parameter settings of the selected keyframe to internal memory. This button is disabled when no keyframe is selected.

Previous Keyframe

Moves the playline to the previous keyframe.

Next Keyframe

Moves the playline to the next keyframe.

Add Keyframe to All

Generates or updates keyframes for all parameters that are in keyframe mode.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Button name

Note In the Simple Effect Editor, this button generates or updates keyframes for all parameters, even parameters that are not displayed. Paste Keyframe

Pastes the keyframe data stored in internal memory to the playline position of the corresponding track. If a keyframe already exists at the playline position, its content is updated. If there is no keyframe at the playline position, a new keyframe is created. The corresponding track is displayed automatically if it is hidden. This button is disabled when there is no keyframe data in internal memory. Note The keyframe data remains in internal memory even after it is pasted, until the next keyframe copy operation.

Step Backward

Moves the playline 1 frame back with each click.

Step Forward

Moves the playline 1 frame forward with each click. If you want to continuously move the playline forward (for a frame-by-frame continuous playback), click this button while holding down the Alt key.

Mark In

Marks an In point.

Play

Starts playback from the playline. Dropped frames may occur for effects that cannot be played in real time. When clicked again, stops playback. Note Dropped frames occur in near-real-time play when there is an interval between the displayed frames. The length of the interval varies depending on the type of effect. You can also click the Step Forward button while holding down the Alt key to check continuous play one frame at a time.

Effect Editor Command Button Area

325

Icon

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

326

Button name

Button function

Mark Out

Marks an Out point.

Step Backward 10 Frames

Moves the playline 10 frames forward with each click.

Step Forward 10 Frames

Moves the playline 10 frames back with each click.

Go to Previous Marker

Moves the playline to the first mark before the current position.

Go to Next Marker

Moves the playline to the first mark after the current position.

Go to In

Moves the playline to the In point.

Go to Out

Moves the playline to the Out point plus 1 frame.

Zoom Adjustment

Selects zoom mode. When this button is clicked, the shape of the mouse pointer changes, allowing zoom in and out by dragging on the Effect Viewer screen (100 to 1/100 times). Right-clicking the zoom button displays a context menu with preset zoom settings. Double clicking in the screen cancels the zoom effect. Clicking the button again returns the mouse point to its original shape.

Move Canvas

Selects scroll mode. When this button is clicked, the shape of the mouse pointer changes, allowing you to scroll the frame by dragging on the Effect Viewer screen. Double clicking in the screen centers the frame in the monitor.

Restore to Original Picture

Cancels zoom adjustments in the Effect Viewer and returns the frame to original size.

Safe action area

Displays a safe area (frame) and center mark (cross) in the Effect Viewer screen. Clicking the button again hides the safe area and center mark.

Grid

Displays a grid on the Effect Viewer screen. Clicking the button again hides the grid. The position, size, and color of the grid are set in the Grid Property dialog. Select [Grid Property...] from the main menu to display the Grid Property dialog. The following items can be set. Interval (Horz/Vert) [pixel]: Enter the grid interval size (1 to 999). Offset (Horz/Vert) [pixel]: Enter the display position of the grid (-999 to +999). Grid Color: Click to display a color palette that allows you to select the color of the grid.

Reset Effect

Works the same way as the Reset Effect (page 330) command in the main menu.

Help

Displays help about the Effect Editor.

FG Monitor

Displays the foreground picture in the Effect Viewer.

Key Monitor

Displays the foreground picture key in the Effect Viewer.

FG & BG Monitor

Displays a composite picture consisting of the foreground and background pictures in the Effect Viewer.

BG Monitor

Displays the background picture in the Effect Viewer.

All Tracks Monitor

Sets Effect Viewer display to the output of all tracks (like the Master Viewer display).

Effect Editor Command Button Area

Icon

Button name

Button function

Restore All Default

Click to restore the initial settings of the selected keyframes.

Open Detail

Switches between Full Effect Editor and Simple Effect Editor. Effects that are open in Effect Editor will be displayed in the Effect Editor that you switch to.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Effect Editor Command Button Area

327

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

328

Button name

Button function

Rewind

Rewinds the track.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the track.

Stop

Stops play at the current position.

Play In to Out

Plays back the clip from the In point to the Out point. During playback this button becomes a Stop button. Clicking this button with the Alt key held down gives loop playback from the In point to the Out point.

Play Reverse

Plays in the reverse direction (from the current position to the start point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Play Forward

Plays in the forward direction (from the current position to the end point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Still

Pauses play at the current position.

All Stop

Stops play.

Mark List

Opens the Marker List dialog.

Revert Direction

Inverts the keyframe direction.

Jog

Selects jog mode.

Shuttle

Selects shuttle mode.

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Switches between jog and shuttle modes.

Zoom In

Zooms in on the effect timeline of the Full Effect Editor (shortcut key Ctrl + +).

Zoom Out

Zooms out on the effect timeline of the Full Effect Editor (shortcut key Ctrl + -).

Show Entire

Displays the whole effect timeline of the Full Effect Editor (shortcut key Ctrl + 0).

Details View

Displays the details window.

Go to Previous Tab

Moves to the previous tab.

Go to Next Tab

Moves to the next tab.

Go to Previous Plate

Moves to the previous plate.

Effect Editor Command Button Area

Icon

Button function

Go to Next Plate

Moves to the next plate.

Go to Previous Parameter

Moves to the previous parameter.

Go to Next Parameter

Moves to the next parameter.

Split View

When this button is on, a Split View mark appears in the Effect Viewer. You can drag the Split View mark to any position to split the Effect Viewer screen into two panes.

Source

Selects Source Axis Mode (DME 3D Transform).

Target

Selects Target Axis Mode (DME 3D Transform).

Help

Starts the Online Help.

Undo

Undoes operations performed on the timeline.

Redo

Redoes operations performed on the timeline.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Button name

Effect Editor Command Button Area

329

Effect Editor Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Simple Effect Editor or the Full Effect Editor to display the Effect Editor main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Keyframe Mode Allows you to select whether to enable or disable keyframe mode for all parameters. Enable: Enables keyframe mode for all parameters. Disable: Enables single keyframe mode for all parameters. You can set the initial mode in the Effect Editor Properties dialog. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Grid Properties... Opens the Grid Properties dialog, so that you can adjust the position, size, and color of the grid on the Effect Viewer screen. Reset Effect Resets the effect to the same state as when it was first applied. Effect Editor Properties... Opens the Effect Editor Properties dialog, so that you can make settings related to initial keyframe defaults. See “Effect Editor Properties Dialog” (page 624) for more information.

Customize Opens a customization window. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570), which allows you to customize command button palettes by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Effect List Displays or hides the effect list. Display: Displays the effect list. Hide: Hides the effect list. The initial setting of this item can be selected in the Keyframe tab (see page 627) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog. Help... Displays help about the Effect Editor.

330

Effect Editor Main Menu

Maximize Maximizes the Effect Editor window. Minimize Minimizes the Effect Editor window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Effect Editor window.

Rotospline Masks Video Effect Editor masks allow you to apply effects to limited sections in the input video. For example, you can apply a mosaic to a specific section of a picture, and even adjust its surface color. Rotospline masks are created with Bézier curves and can change in shape over time. Tracking data can also be applied. For more information about tracking, see “Motion Tracking” (page 338).

Operating Procedure Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Proceed as follows to create a Rotospline mask.

1

On the timeline, select the effect to which you want to apply the mask (for example, Mosaic) and double click its icon, 1) 2) or select [Edit in Simple Effect Editor] or [Edit in Full Effect Editor] from the context menu of the effect. The Simple Effect Editor (see page 308) or the Full Effect Editor (see page 311) starts. 1)The editor that starts (Simple or Full) depends on the setting of the Default Effect Editor option in the Display tab (page 626) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog. 2)To start either Effect Editor when you double click an effect icon, you need to check the [Editor Start-up with Double Click (Composer Mode)] check box in the Edit tab (page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

2

Adjust the effect parameters so that the effect is applied to the entire picture.

3

• In the Simple Effect Editor, select the Mask plate. • In the Full Effect Editor, click the Mask tab to display the Mask plate.

Check the [Mask] check box in the Mask plate and select Bézier as the Type parameter. A tool window appears at the right edge of the effect timeline, with tools for drawing Bézier curves.

For more information about the tools see “Using the Rotospline Mask Tools” (page 332).

4

Draw a figure with the tool window tools. You can draw several closed curves. The number of anchor points that can be set in a mask is 2 to 128. The results of the drawing are reflected in the Rotospline tracks. For more information about drawing methods, see “Using the Rotospline Mask Tools” (page 332).

Rotospline Masks

331

For more information about Rotospline tracks, see “Rotospline Tracks” (page 335).

5

6

Adjust the effect parameters of the Mask1 plate as required in the parameter display section.

Mask region

See “Rotospline Mask Parameters” (see page 332) for more information about parameters.

Effect processing region

Optionally, add a surface color to the mask on the Mask plate. Adjust the color and transparency as required in the parameter display section. Note

Surface color can be added to Bezier and Shape mask types only. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

7

Press the Play button. You can check the effect after application of the mask in the Effect Viewer.

When the figure contains several closed curves All of the sections enclosed by closed curves are mask ranges. See the figure in “Invert” (page 332).

Rotospline Mask Parameters Set the following parameters for Rotospline masks. Type For Rotospline always choose Bézier.

Center Sets the effect center position. Even if you change this parameter after drawing closed curves, the relative positional relationship between the effect center point and the existing closed curves is maintained. Soft Edge Softens the edges of mask borders. This gives a more natural appearance to the changes at the borders between the input video and the effect processed video.

Using the Rotospline Mask Tools In the parameter display section, a tool window appears at the right edge of the effect timeline when you display the Mask plate and select Bézier as the Type parameter. These tools can be used to draw, shape, and edit masks. You can move the tool window by dragging it with the mouse.

Selection tool Pen tool

Invert Turning this ON inverts the mask range. When it is OFF, the areas outside the closed curves are masked, and video with the effect applied is output inside the curves. Turning this parameter ON inverts this.

Corner tool Rectangle tool

• OFF (default)

Ellipse tool Effect processing region

Mask region

• ON

Move tool Resize tool

Select a tool to use by clicking it. The selected tool lights in green. Only one tool can be selected at one time. You can switch between tools by using keyboard shortcuts.

332

Rotospline Masks

For more information about rotospline mask tool keyboard shortcuts, see “Effect Tools” (page 863).

Resize tool mouse pointer shapes Shape

State

Tool states and mouse pointer shapes

Changing the horizontal size of a figure, or in a state where the horizontal size can be changed.

The shape of the mouse pointer changes as follows, depending on the state of the selected tool.

Changing the vertical size of a figure, or in a state where the vertical size can be changed.

Pen tool mouse pointer shapes Shape

State

Changing the horizontal and vertical size of a figure, or in a state where the horizontal and vertical size can be changed.

Mouse pointer is in region where anchor point can be created. Drawing a closed path. Deleting an anchor point.

State other than the above.

To draw a new figure Select the Pen tool and set an anchor point by clicking or dragging in the Effect Viewer. Click to add a sharp anchor point, or drag to add a rounded anchor point.

Selection tool mouse pointer shapes

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Inserting an anchor point.

State other than the above.

Anchor point (red when selected)

Shape

State Anchor point selected. Figure can be selected by clicking. State other than the above. Corner tool mouse pointer shapes

Shape

Drag

State Above an anchor point. Above a control point.

Control point (displayed automatically)

State other than the above.

Rectangle and Ellipse tool mouse pointer shapes Shape

State Dragging to draw a rectangle or ellipse shape, or in a state where the pointer can be dragged to draw a shape. State other than the above.

Set two or more anchor points. With the mouse pointer in the state, which indicates creation of a closed path, return to the first anchor point and click. This completes the creation of a closed Bézier curve. 1 4 2

Move tool mouse pointer shapes Shape

State Moving the selected element, or in a state where the element can be moved. State other than the above.

3

If you click instead of dragging when setting an anchor point You can create a sharp angle at the point where the new line joins the figure.

Rotospline Masks

333

Click Drag

To insert an anchor point into an existing figure

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

In the Effect Viewer, click with Pen tool on the path (curve) of the selected figure. A new anchor point is inserted at the point where you clicked. This does not change the shape of the figure. The mouse pointer changes into an hourglass while the point is being inserted. The new anchor point is a rounded peak point.

If you drag while holding down the Shift key The point moves in a straight line, either vertically or horizontally. If you click while holding down the Shift key Each click alternately selects and deselects the anchor point. If you drag a control point The control point moves. If the control point belongs to a rounded anchor point, the opposite control point also moves to maintain the smoothness of the curves on both sides of the anchor point.

Click

To select anchor points Click an anchor point with the Selection tool. To select multiple anchor points, click the points or drag a rectangle around the points while holding the Ctrl key down. You can also select anchor points with the Pen, Corner, Rectangle, or Ellipse tool by clicking the points or dragging a rectangle around the points while holding the Ctrl key down. To select curves Drag a rectangle around the points in a curve with the Selection tool or Pen tool while holding the Ctrl key down. If the selection rectangle encloses all points in a curve, the curve is selected. You can also select a curve with the Move tool or Resize tool by clicking on the curve. To select multiple curves, click the curves while holding down the Ctrl key.

Drag

To convert a rounded anchor point into a sharp anchor point You can use either of the following methods to convert a rounded anchor point into a sharp anchor point. • Click with the Corner tool

To delete an anchor point Click the anchor point with the Pen tool. This deletes the anchor point and changes the shape of the figure. The mouse pointer changes into an hourglass while the point is being deleted.

To move an anchor point with the mouse Drag the anchor point with the Selection tool. The control points move along with the anchor point.

Click

• Drag the control points to adjust their positions

334

Rotospline Masks

After drawing the ellipse you can adjust its shape any way you like by adding, deleting, and moving anchor points. To draw a circle Drag with the mouse while holding the Shift key down.

To move a figure with the mouse When you select the Move tool, a rectangle appears around the selected figure. You can move the figure by placing the mouse pointer inside the figure, so that the shape of the pointer changes, and then dragging the figure.

Drag

The control points on both sides of the anchor point can be manipulated independently.

Rectangle

Drag the sharp anchor point. The control points on either side of the anchor point move, smoothing out the lines which connect the anchor point to the figure.

To draw a rectangle Drag with the Rectangle tool in the Effect Viewer. A rectangle like the one shown in the figure appears. The rectangle has four anchor points, numbered 1 to 4 in the counterclockwise direction from the lower left. 4

3

1

2

Anchor point

Selected figure Drag

If you drag while holding down the Shift key The figure moves in a straight line, either vertically or horizontally.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

To convert a sharp anchor point into a rounded anchor point

To change the size of a figure with the mouse When you select the Resize tool, a rectangle appears around the selected figure. Drag the mouse pointer over the rectangle until its shape changes into an arrow, and then drag the arrow. The size of the figure changes in the direction that you drag the arrow.

Rectangle

After drawing the rectangle you can adjust its shape any way you like by adding, deleting, and moving anchor points. To draw a square Drag with the mouse while holding the Shift key down.

To draw an ellipse Drag with the Rectangle tool in the Effect Viewer. An ellipse like the one shown below appears. The ellipse has four anchor points, numbered 1 to 4 from the right. 2 Anchor point

3

Selected figure

To change the size without changing the vertical/ horizontal ratio Move the mouse pointer until its shape changes into or , and then drag with the Shift key held down.

Rotospline Tracks

1 4

Note

The Simple Effect Editor does not support rotosplines. Use the Full Effect Editor to edit rotosplines.

Rotospline Masks

335

The track names section of the effect timeline contains a Rotospline tab track (entitled +Figure or -Figure) for every Rotospline figure.

To switch between selecting and unselecting a figure Click the corresponding figure tab with the Ctrl key held down.

Note

To select an anchor point Click the corresponding Rotospline track.

Rotospline tab tracks do not appear unless the Type parameter of the Mask plate is set to Bézier. Clicking a tab track entitled +Figure displays tracks for all of the anchor points of that figure. These tracks are called Rotospline tracks. Sequential numbers are assigned to each of the Rotospline tracks, corresponding to the anchor point numbers in the Effect Viewer.

To delete the selected figure Right click the corresponding Rotospline tab track and select Delete Figure from the context menu. To close the Rotospline tracks of a figure Click the -Figure tab.

Importing and Exporting Keyframes Chapter 8 Effect Tools

You can import and export keyframes in figure units or anchor point units. In figure unit operations, all of the anchor points of the figure are targeted.

To import or export keyframes Right click a Rotospline tab track, if you want to operate in figure units, or right click a Rotospline track, if you want to operate in control point units. Select Import Keyframe or Export Keyframe from the context menu. When you are importing in figure units from the clipboard or a file The following dialog appears.

Rotospline tracks Rotospline tab tracks

To select a figure displayed in the Effect Viewer Click the corresponding Rotospline tab (+Figure or -Figure). The figure is selected and the Rotospline tracks of the figure are highlighted. To select several contiguous figure tabs in the track names section With the Shift key held down, click an unselected Rotospline tab. All of the tabs between the currently selected tab and the clicked tab are selected.

336

Rotospline Masks

Import: Specifies whether to enable or disable each of the axes (X, Y, and Z) of the imported keyframe. Operation: Selects the operation to perform. • Replace: Replaces the selected figure. • New: Creates a new figure. Position: Selects whether to specify the imported keyframe by timecode or by the position of the playline. When you are importing tracking data The following dialog appears.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Function • Position: Imports tracking data (X and Y values) corresponding to the specifications in Data. • Rotation: Imports tracking data for the angle between two tracking points corresponding to the specifications in Data. • Scale: Imports tracking data for the distance between two tracking points corresponding to the specifications in Data. Data: Specifies the tracking data to import. • When the Function setting is Position, you can select any one of Data1 to Data 8. • When the Function setting is Rotation or Scale, you can select any pair consisting of Data n and Data n+1. Import: Specifies whether to enable or disable each of the axes (X, Y, and Z) of the imported keyframe. Operation: Selects the operation to perform. • Replace: Replaces the keyframe data. • Add: Adds to keyframe data. • Add (Offset): Adds an offset from the data start to keyframe data. • Subtract: Subtracts from keyframe data. • Subtract (Offset): Subtracts an offset from the data start from keyframe data • Multiplication: Multiplies keyframe data. Position: Selects whether to specify the imported keyframes by timecode or by the position of the playline.

Rotospline Masks

337

Motion Tracking Motion tracking allows you to collect tracking data, or data about the movement of a pattern, by tracking a specific object in a video picture. Note

The Simple Effect Editor does not support tracking data. Use the Full Effect Editor to edit tracking data.

Block matching search box The figure below shows the configuration of the block matching search box.

Search box

Tracking point Reference block Search area

Examples of how you can use tracking data Chapter 8 Effect Tools

To move masks You can move masks according to the movement of a tracking target. For the operating procedure, see “To move masks” (page 339).

To move pictures You can move the picture in one layer (typically a reduced picture) according to the movement of a tracking target on a lower layer. For the operating procedure, see “To move pictures” (page 343).

Stabilizing You can specify a tracking target in a layer and fix the onscreen position of the target.

Reference block Set up this block so that the tracking target fits inside it. The center of this block is called the tracking point. Search area (inside the search box) Specifies the area to search in the next frame. To adjust the positions and sizes of the reference block and search area You can adjust the positions and sizes of the reference block and search area in the Effect Viewer. • Adjusting the sizes of the reference block and search area When you move the mouse pointer over the borders of the reference block and search area, the pointer changes into a double headed arrow. You can expand or reduce the sizes of the reference block and search area by dragging the arrow pointer.

For the operating procedure, see “To fix the position of a target (stabilizing)” (page 346).

Tracking Methods There are two tracking methods. Block matching This method has a wide range of application. When the tracking target is clearly outlined against a simple background, this method allows you to easily collect precise tracking data. Edge detection This method is appropriate when there is a great deal of variation in the background, making it impossible to collect precise data about the tracking target by block matching. This method, by tracking the edges of the target, produces precise data regardless of changes in the background.

338

Motion Tracking

Drag the arrows in any direction.

• Moving the reference block and search area together To move the reference block and search area together, drag inside the reference block. To move the search area without moving the reference block, drag inside the search area but outside the reference block.

Reference block Drag here to move the reference block and the search area together.

To change edge handle direction and angle - drag the edge handle Move the mouse pointer to an edge handle and drag when the pointer changes into a circular arrow (indicating rotation).

Search area Drag here to move the search area only.

Notes

Edge detection search box The edge detection search box has the same components as the block matching search box, with the addition of edge detection handles and an edge detection arc.

Search box Reference block

Drag this.

Example Operating Procedures Refer to the following example procedures for an introduction to working with motion tracking. • • • •

Tracking point (edge cross point)

To move masks (see below) To move pictures (see page 343) To fix the position of a target (stabilizing) (see page 346) To track an arbitrarily shaped mask (rotospline mask) (see page 346)

Edge handle 1

To move masks

Edge detection arc

This example shows how to move a mask (Mask1) set for the Mosaic effect.

Search area Edge handle 2

To adjust the positions and sizes of the reference block and search area You can adjust the positions and sizes of the reference block and search area in the Effect Viewer by using the same methods that are used with block matching. To move the edge handles together - drag the edge cross point Move the mouse pointer to the edge cross point and drag when the pointer changes into crossed arrows. Note

The edge cross point cannot be dragged outside the reference block.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

• It is not possible to move only the reference block. • The reference block cannot be moved outside the search area. • The maximum length of reference block sides is 500 pixels. The maximum length of search area sides is 1000 pixels.

It is also possible to change the shape of the mask as time passes. For details, see “To track an arbitrarily shaped mask (rotospline mask)” (page 346).

1

Paste a Mosaic effect on a video clip on the timeline, and select [Edit in Full Effect Editor] from the context menu of the effect icon. (To paste a Mosaic effect on a video clip, go to the FX Explorer tree view pane, open folders in the order Fx Folder t Clip t Video FX, and drag the effect from the effect display section.) The Full Effect Editor starts.

2

Click the Tracking tab in the parameter display section. The Tracking plate for the Mosaic effect appears. At the same time, a search box appears in the Effect Viewer.

Motion Tracking

339

You can expand the picture inside the reference block by moving the mouse pointer to the tracking point and clicking. This makes it easier to check the selected picture. By holding down the Alt key when you click, you can get an expanded view of the picture as it is before application of the Color Space settings.

Tracking plate Search box

Note

For some effect types, it may not be possible to expand the picture or show the picture before application of the Color Space settings. See “Color Space” (page 350) for more information about Color Space settings. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

3

Make the required settings in the Tracking plate.

6

For the settings to make in the Tracking plate, see “Tracking Plate Settings” (page 349).

4

Click the Go to In button

Click the Analyze forward direction button Tracking plate.

in the

Tracking is executed. The Tracking Status dialog appears while tracking is in progress.

.

The playline of the effect timeline moves to the In point of the scene.

5

Move the reference block of the search box to set the tracking point. (The tracking point is inside the reference block.)

Tracking point Reference block

7

Click the Mask tab in the parameter display section to display the Mask plate. You can set up to 3 masks in a single effect. The Mask plate contains common settings, and the Mask1, Mask2, and Mask3 plates contain the individual settings for each mask, such as their positions. This example will use Mask1.

To ensure that the target is tracked accurately Adjust the size of the reference block to match the size of the target. See “To adjust the positions and sizes of the reference block and search area” (page 338) for details about how to move and resize the reference block.

340

Motion Tracking

8

Check the [Mask] check box in the Mask1 plate.

9

Click the Keyframe Mode button of the Center parameter to enable keyframe mode.

See “Import Tracking Data dialog settings” (page 350) for more information about this dialog.

The tracking data is registered in the keyframe of the Center parameter.

12 Make the required settings in the Mask1 plate to set up

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

11 Click the OK button.

the mask range. In this example we will set it up as follows, so that the skier is surrounded by a circle. Mask plate [Mask] check box: Checked Type: Shape Border Width: 0.05 Mask1 plate [Mask] check box: Checked Shape: Ellipse Size: 0.2

10 Right click the Center track of the Mask1 on the Effect Timeline to open the context menu, and select [Import Keyframe] > [Tracking Data]. Center track Context menu

The Import Tracking Data dialog appears.

You can use a guide frame display in the Effect Viewer to change Size settings. See the next section “Using the guide frame to change parameter settings” for more information. To apply a Mosaic effect within the circle Display the Mosaic plate and specify a Mosaic effect.

Motion Tracking

341

13 Click the Play button

, or hold down the Alt key and click the Step Forward button .

3

The results of applying the effect appear in the Effect Viewer.

To adjust the position of the guide frame Drag the positioning lines up, down, left, or right.

Note

To adjust the size of the guide frame • Drag the control points at the center of each side of the guide frame to enlarge or reduce the frame from that side in the horizontal or vertical direction. • Drag the control points at the corners of the guide frame to enlarge or reduce the frame in both directions from both of the adjoining sides.

During motion tracking operations (with the Tracking tab displayed), frames may be dropped even if the target of the operation is an effect that normally plays in real time.

14 Click the Menu button to open the Effect Editor main menu and select Close.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

To adjust the size of the guide frame by moving the opposing side at the same time Drag a control point while holding the Ctrl key down.

The Effect Editor window closes, and the scene is ready for rendering. Using the guide frame to change parameter settings To adjust Center and Size parameters, you can display a guide frame in the Effect Viewer and use the positioning lines and control points to adjust the guide frame as required.

1 2

Drag the positioning lines or control points to adjust the position and size of the guide frame.

Check the [Mask] check boxes in the mask plates (Mask1 to Mask3) whose parameters you want to adjust. Move the focus to the Center or Size parameter. To move the focus to a parameter Click the slider or edit box. A solid-line guide frame appears for the parameter that gained the focus. Guide frames are shown for all of the plates whose [Mask] check boxes are checked, but only the frame for the focused parameter in shown in solid lines. The other frames are shown in broken lines.

To adjust the size while preserving the aspect ratio Drag a corner control point while holding the Shift key down. You can drag with the Ctrl and Shift keys held down to move the opposite side while preserving the aspect ratio. To track during part of a scene If you want to track during part of scene only, specify timecode for the In and Out points of that part. This method allows you to restart tracking if the tracking point loses the target midway through a scene.

1

Carry out steps 1 to 4 of “To move masks” (page 339).

2

Use the following buttons in the command button area to move the playline of the Effect Timeline, searching for the point that you want to use as the tracking start point (In point). • • • • • •

Guide frame

Step Forward/Backward Step Forward/Backward 10 Frames Play Stop Previous/Next Keyframe Go to In/Out

The timecode value for the playline position appears in the timecode display.

3

Enter the timecode of the In point in the Start time box of the Tracking plate. The In point is set.

Control point

342

Motion Tracking

Positioning lines

Start time box

The tracking points appear in the Effect Viewer.

4

Repeat the playline search to find a tracking end point (Out point) and enter its timecode in the End time box of the Tracking plate.

Tracking points

2

The Out point is set, completing the tracking range specification.

5

• • • • • •

Carry out steps 5 and following of “To move masks” (page 339).

To change the tracking point position If you want to adjust the tracking data, you can use the mouse to change any tracking point position. For example, after executing tracking by steps 1 to 6 in “To move masks” (page 339), you can adjust the position of any tracking point with the following procedure.

1

Use the following buttons in the command button area to move the playline of the Effect Timeline, searching for the point where you want to change the tracking point position.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

End time box

Step Forward/Backward Step Forward/Backward 10 Frames Play Stop Previous/Next Keyframe Go to In/Out

The color of the tracking point changes to pink at the playline position.

3

In the effect timeline, click the Data1 track below the Tracking track.

Drag the pink tracking point to the position where you want it.

To move pictures This example shows how to use the Positioning effect to add pictures of musical notes following the skier.

1

Paste the skier clip on Video1 (Layer1) on the timeline, and paste the notes clip on Video2 (Layer2).

Data1 track

Motion Tracking

343

Tracking plate

7 Chapter 8 Effect Tools

2

Search box

Move the reference block of the search box to set the tracking point. (The tracking point is inside the reference block.)

Paste the Positioning effect on the notes clip in Video2 (Layer2), and select [Edit in Full Effect Editor] from the context menu of the effect icon. (To paste a Positioning effect on a video clip, go to the FX Explorer tree view pane, open folders in the order Fx Folder t Clip t Video FX, and drag the effect from the effect display section. Or select [Add Positioning Effect] from the context menu of the video clip.)

Tracking point Reference block

Select [Edit in Full Effect Editor] from the context menu

The Full Effect Editor starts.

3

Click the Tracking tab in the parameter display section. The Tracking plate of the Positioning effect appears and a search box appears in the Effect Viewer.

4

Make the required settings in the Tracking plate. For the settings to make in the Tracking plate, see “Tracking Plate Settings” (page 349).

5

Click the Go to In button

.

The playline of the effect timeline moves to the In point of the scene.

6

Check the [Background] check box in the Tracking plate. The clip of the skier pasted to Video1 (Layer1) appears in the Effect Viewer.

344

Motion Tracking

To ensure that the target is tracked accurately Adjust the size of the reference block to match the size of the target. See “To adjust the positions and sizes of the reference block and search area” (page 338) for more information about how to move and resize the reference block.

You can expand the picture inside the reference block by moving the mouse pointer to the tracking point and clicking. This makes it easier to check the selected picture. By holding down the Alt key when you click, you can get an expanded view of the picture as it is before application of the Color Space settings. Note

For some effect types, it may not be possible to expand the picture or show the picture before application of the Color Space settings.

See “Color Space” (page 350) for more information about Color Space settings.

8

Click the Analyze forward direction button Tracking plate.

in the

Tracking is executed. The Tracking Status dialog appears while tracking is in progress.

11 Click the Go to In button

.

The playline of the effect timeline moves to the In point of the scene.

9

Click the Positioning tab in the parameter display section. The Positioning plate appears.

values of Position to move the musical notes (foreground) to any position. (In this example, the notes in the upper left of the picture follow the skier.)

13 Click the Keyframe Mode button of the Position

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

12 In the Positioning plate, adjust the Position X and Y

parameter to enable keyframe mode.

14 Right click the Position track to open the context menu, and select [Import Keyframe] > [Tracking Data]. The Import Tracking Data dialog appears.

10 Click the FG&BG monitor button

.

A synthesized picture of the musical notes (foreground) and the skier (background) appears in the Effect Viewer.

See “Import Tracking Data dialog settings” (page 350) for more information about this dialog.

15 Set Operation in the dialog to Add (Offset) and click the OK button. Add (Offset): When you do tracking with this setting, the tracking data is added to the Position In point value. In this example, this is what makes it possible to track the musical notes which have been moved to an arbitrary position.

Motion Tracking

345

16 Click the Play button

The playline of the effect timeline moves to the In point of the scene.

, or hold down the Alt key and click the Step Forward button .

4

In the Positioning plate, adjust the Position X and Y values of Translate to move the foreground picture (the skier) to the desired position.

menu and select Close.

5

The Effect Editor window closes, and the scene is ready for rendering.

Click the Keyframe Mode button of the Position parameter to enable keyframe mode.

6

Right click the effect timeline Position track to open the context menu, and select [Import Keyframe] > [Tracking Data].

The results of applying the effect appear in the Effect Viewer.

17 Click the Menu button to open the Effect Editor main

To fix the position of a target (stabilizing)

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

This example explains how to specify a tracking target in a target layer and move the position of the layer so that the relative position remains stable. On the screen, the tracking target appears to be stopped in the same position. In this example, we will use the Positioning effect to stabilize the skier at the center of the screen. Proceed as follows.

1

2

The Import Tracking Data dialog appears.

Carry out steps 1 to 5 of “To move masks” (page 339). However, instead of pasting the Mosaic effect on the timeline video clip, paste the Positioning effect. (To paste a Positioning effect, go to the FX Explorer tree view pane, open folders in the order Fx Folder t Clip t Video FX, and drag the effect from the effect display section. Or select [Add Positioning Effect] from the context menu of the video clip.) Click the Positioning tab in the parameters display section.

See “Import Tracking Data dialog settings” (page 350) for more information about this dialog.

7

The Positioning plate appears.

Set Operation in the dialog to Subtract (Offset) and click the OK button. Subtract (Offset): When you do tracking with this setting, the tracking data is subtracted from the Position In point value. In this example, this is what makes it possible to fix the position of the skier who has been moved to an arbitrary position.

To track an arbitrarily shaped mask (rotospline mask) Rotospline masks (see page 331) allow you to draw arbitrarily shaped masks with Bézier curves. The masks can be tracked, and they can vary in shape over time. This example shows how to create a mask that tracks the movements of a skier’s body with eight tracking points. In this example, we will use the Color Corrector effect to highlight the mask and make it easier to see.

1 3 346

Click the Go to In button

Motion Tracking

.

Paste the Color Corrector effect on a video clip on the timeline, and select [Edit in Full Effect Editor] from the context menu of the effect icon. (To paste a Color Corrector effect on a video clip, go to the FX Explorer tree view pane, open folders in the

order Fx Folder t Clip t Color Filter, and drag the effect from the effect display section.)

4

Click the Tracking tab in the parameter display section.

.

The playline of the effect timeline moves to the In point of the scene.

The Full Effect Editor starts.

2

Click the Go to In button

5

The Tracking plate of the Color Corrector effect appears.

Set the eight tracking points for the skier. Set the points as shown in the following figure, with the numbers increasing in order around the outline of the skier.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Display in Effect Viewer

3

Set Data in the Tracking plate to 8 points. Eight search boxes appear in the Effect Viewer. Search box (red)

6

Click the Analyze forward direction button Tracking plate.

in the

Tracking is executed. The Tracking Status dialog appears while tracking is in progress.

Data number Tracking point

Motion Tracking

347

For more information about the tools, see “Using the Rotospline Mask Tools” (page 332).

10 Right click the Figure track of the effect timeline to 7

Click the Mask tab in the parameter display section.

open the context menu, and select [Import Keyframe] >[Tracking Data].

The Mask plate appears. Figure track Context menu Chapter 8 Effect Tools

The Import Tracking Data dialog appears.

Tracking Data: Data 1 to Data 8 correspond to eight tracking points. Tracking data is imported only for the numbers whose corresponding check boxes are checked. Check boxes cannot be checked unless the corresponding tracking data exists. Position: Selects whether to specify the imported keyframe by timecode or by the position of the playline.

8

9

Click the Go to In button

.

The playline of the effect timeline moves to the In point of the scene.

Data for the 8 tracking points is imported and registered as Data1 to Data 8.

Check the [Mask] check box in the Mask plate and set Type to Bezier.

To cancel without executing the import Click the Cancel button of the Import Tracking Data dialog.

A tool window appears at the right edge of the effect timeline, with tools for drawing Bézier curves.

348

11 Click the New button.

Motion Tracking

To replace the selected figures Click the Replace button of the Import Tracking Data dialog.

Tracking Plate Settings Set the following parameters in the Tracking plate.

12 Click the Color Balance tab of the Color Corrector effect to display the Color balance plate, and select the desired color.

Note

While the Tracking plate is displayed, the video before application of the effect appears in the Effect Viewer.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

13 Click the Play button

, or hold down the Alt key and click the Step Forward button . The results of applying the effect appear in the Effect Viewer.

Analyze forward direction and Analyze reverse direction Click to execute tracking in the forward or reverse direction. If you click these buttons with the Alt key held down, only the currently selected tracking points are tracked. Start time and End time Display the timecode of the tracking start and end points. To set the time point, click the Mark In or Mark Out button in the command button area. The timecode of the playline position is set as the Start or End point. You can also enter timecode values directly. Note

The Mark In and Mark Out buttons must be placed in the command button area in advance by using the customize function. In the Effect Editor, the only purpose for these buttons is to specify Start and End times.

14 Click the Menu button to open the Effect Editor main menu and select [Close]. The Effect Editor window closes, and the scene is ready for rendering.

Reset Tracker Resets the tracking point positions specified in the next item, Data. Tracking points return to the positions they were in before moving.

Motion Tracking

349

Data Specifies the number of tracking points and the tracking data numbers.

Data plate The Data plate appears when you click Data in the lower part of the Tracking plate.

Background Check this if you want to track a background picture. When this is checked, the picture in the Effect Viewer changes from the foreground to the background video. Use Same Setting Check this to use the same setting for all of the tracking points specified in Data. When this is checked, the Tracking plate displays settings for one tracking point only. If you check this when different tracking points have different settings, the settings of the lowest numbered tracking point are used. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Color Space Selects the video components of the tracking targets for each tracking point. The following components can be selected. Setting

Description

RGBA

Track the video RGBA.

RGB

Track the video RGB.

R

Track the video R.

G

Track the video G.

B

Track the video B.

Luminance

Track the luminance value of the video.

Saturation

Track the saturation of the video.

Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the video after application of a Color Space setting. Effective tracking is sometimes facilitated by emphasizing the contrast. An enlarged view of the selected tracking point appears in the Effect Viewer while you are operating the slider. Blur and Sharpen Blur or Sharpen can be specified as preprocessing to perform on the video before tracking. • Blur: Reduces noise in the input video and may facilitate effective tracking. When you select Blur, you can set a parameter specifying the number of pixels. • Sharpen: Sometimes facilitates effective tracking in indistinct video. To specify either, check the [Blur and Sharpen] check box and then select either Blur or Sharpen. An enlarged view of the selected tracking point appears in the Effect Viewer while you are operating the sliders. Algorithm Selects Block Matching or Edge as the tracking method. Data Displays the Data plate.

350

Motion Tracking

The Data plate displays tracking data (X and Y values) for each tracking point. You can adjust the data values as required by moving the sliders.

Using Tracking Data Import tracking data applied to effects by using the context menu. To open the context menu, right click the data track of the effect on the timeline. To execute an import Select [Import Keyframe] >[Tracking Data] from the context menu, opening the Import Tracking Data dialog. Then click the OK button in the dialog. See “Example Operating Procedures” (page 339) for examples of the actual flow of operations.

Import Tracking Data dialog settings Make the following settings in the Import Tracking Data dialog.

only the X check box is available; Y and Z check boxes are grayed out. Operation Specifies how to process the imported tracking data. The following table shows the Operation items that can be selected when the Function setting is Position or Rotation.

Function Select one of the following. • Position Import tracking data (X and Y values) corresponding to the specifications in Data. • Rotation Import tracking data for the angle between two tracking points corresponding to the specifications in Data. • Scale Import tracking data for the distance between two tracking points corresponding to the specifications in Data. Data Specifies the tracking data to import. • When the Function setting is Position, you can select any one of Data1 to Data 8. • When the Function setting is Rotation or Scale, you can select any pair consisting of Data n and Data n+1. Import Specifies whether to enable or disable each of the axes (X, Y, and Z) of the imported tracking data. The options available depend on the number of parameters in the source and the number of parameters in the target. When the number of source parameters is the same as the target, the check boxes for X, Y, and Z can be selected. When the source has more parameters than the target, more check boxes than the number of parameters are available but not all of them can be selected. When the source has fewer parameters than the target, one or more check boxes are grayed out. For example, when the source is a Position (2 parameters) and the target is a Transparency (1 sub parameter), check boxes X and Y are enabled but you can only select one of them. When the source is a Transparency (1 parameter) and the target is a Crop/Border Bounds (4 sub parameters),

Description

Replace

Replace keyframe data.

Add

Add to keyframe data.

Add (Offset)

Add an offset from the data start to keyframe data.

Subtract

Subtract from keyframe data.

Subtract (Offset)

Subtract an offset from the data start from keyframe data

The following table shows the Operation items that can be selected when the Function setting is Scale. Item

Description

Multiplication

Multiply keyframe data.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

See step 10 of “To track an arbitrarily shaped mask (rotospline mask)” (page 346) for an illustration of the Import Tracking Data dialog that appears when you are importing tracking data using the Rotospline mask function.

Item

The following tables show examples of the application of tracking data for Function and Operation specifications. • When the Function specification is Position Operation

Application example

Replace

Set the tracking position to the effect center position.

Add

-

Add (Offset)

Add motion that tracks the background picture to the foreground picture.

Subtract

-

Subtract (Offset)

Subtract motion due to factors such as camera shake from the foreground picture (stabilize).

• When the Function specification is Rotation Operation

Application example

Replace

Set the angle obtained from tracking as the effect angle.

Add

-

Add (Offset)

Add motion that tracks rotation in the background picture to the foreground picture.

Subtract

-

Subtract (Offset)

Subtract rotation motion in the target from the foreground picture (stabilize).

Motion Tracking

351

• When the Function specification is Scale Operation

Application example

Multiplication

Apply variations in the distance between two points, obtained through tracking, to effect parameters such as size.

Position Specifies the position of imported tracking data. • Playline Set keyframes based on the playline position. • Timecode Set keyframes based on timecode values. Note Chapter 8 Effect Tools

352

The system of coordinates differs between 3D effects and other effects. For this reason, positional displacement occurs if you import tracking data via the clipboard or a file from one effect type to the other.

Motion Tracking

Chromakey Operations Flow of Operations The following figure shows the flow of chromakey processing in XPRI NS.

Input video

Output video

Color cancellation

Key modification

Masking

Combination

Input key

Video

Step

Output key

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Key creation

Flow of video signals

Flow of key signals

The following explains each step in the process. Key creation (keying) Creates a key signal from input video color signal data. The key signal determines which part of the input video to remove. There are two borders, called Inner and Outer, between colors which are not removed at all, color which are partly removed, and colors which are completely removed. The borders are specified by luminance, saturation, and hue. Color cancellation Processing to remove the background color from the object and restore the original color. Performs color correction of the input video so that the output video will appear more natural. The input video for the chromakey can contain the background color within the object that is to be extracted. Color correction compensates for this, converting the video to a natural state.

especially effective when keying material created from video signals, because in this case luminance signals can get slightly out of sync with color signals. Masking In masking, processing is carried out to create the pattern image and use it to perform logical calculations on the key. By specifying the pattern position and shape, it is possible to remove unneeded sections and add necessary sections.

Advanced Chromakey Parameters See “Advanced Chroma Key” (page 722) for more information about chromakey parameters.

Key modification Once the key is created, processing is carried out to adjust the edge positions, apply blurring, and so on. This is

Chromakey Operations

353

About Auto Start

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Turn the picker button on by checking Auto Start in the Chromakey > Key Adjust plate, and then drag with the left mouse button held down to surround an area in the Effect Viewer. When you release the button, the surrounded area is registered as a color range specifying the color to remove from the picture. A key signal is created on the basis of this color range to indicate which portions to remove from the input video. To use color cancellation Set the On/Off parameter in the Color Cancel plate of the Col Cncl tab to On. The Color Cancel effect is applied automatically to the selected color range.

354

Chromakey Operations

Secondary Color Corrector Secondary Color Corrector is a clip effect which replaces specified colors with other colors.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Secondary Color Corrector

355

Setting Parameters The following figure shows the Color Corrector Effect Editor window.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Effect Viewer settings When setting Color Corrector parameters, it is convenient to put the Effect Viewer into Split View mode. Split View Split View allows you to split the Effect Viewer screen into two panes, so that you can compare the pictures before and after the color change. To use Split View, turn the Split View command button on. See To split the Effect Viewer screen (page 318) for more information about Split View operations.

356

Secondary Color Corrector

For secondary color corrector operations, see page 358.

6Vector tab Use the 6Vector tab to select the color range to change, and to specify the type of change. 1 New button 2 Delete button 3 Add button 4 Sub button

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

5 Vector scope

6 Parameters section

a NEW button Selects a color range to change. b DEL (delete) button Deletes a color range selection. c ADD button Widens the color range selected by clicking the NEW button. d SUB (subtract color) button Narrows the color range selected by clicking the NEW button.

e Vector scope Allows you to specify a color range by dragging a fanshaped region. Drag with no keys pressed to change the hue. Drag with the Shift key pressed to change the saturation. f Parameters section Contains the following parameters. Center HUE: Specifies the center hue of the selected range. HUE Range: Specifies the range of the selected color. Sat: Specifies the minimum saturation of the selected range. HUE Softness: When softening of hue range edges is specified, specifies the degree of softness.

Secondary Color Corrector

357

Sat Softness: When softening of saturation range edges is specified, specifies the degree of softness. Target Color HUE (center hue after correction): Specifies the center hue after correction for the selected vector. Target Color Sat (center saturation after correction): Specifies the center saturation after correction for the selected vector. Target Color Lumi (center luminance after correction): Specifies the center luminance after correction for the selected vector. Invert: Deselects the selected range, and selects the colors outside the range.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Changing Colors With the Secondary Color Corrector Proceed as follows to change colors in a specified range to other colors.

1

Click the NEW button.

2

In the Effect Viewer, click a color that you want to change. A color range centered around the clicked color is selected. To widen the color range Click the ADD button and drag the fan-shaped region on the vector scope. Drag with no keys pressed to adjust the hue, or drag with the Shift key pressed to adjust the saturation. You can also adjust the range by setting the Center HUE, HUE Range, and Sat parameters. To narrow the color range Click the SUB button and drag the fan-shaped region on the vector scope. Drag with no keys pressed to adjust the hue, or drag with the Shift key pressed to adjust the saturation. You can also adjust the range by setting the Center HUE, HUE Range, and Sat parameters.

3

Set the HUE Offset, Sat Offset, and Lumi Offset parameters to specify the colors after the change. You can also set the colors by dragging the fan-shaped region on the vector scope. Adjust the HUE Softness and Sat Softness parameters as required.

4

Check the color change results in the Effect Viewer. You can compare the original colors with the changed colors by clicking the Split View button to turn it on.

358

Secondary Color Corrector

Color Palette Dialog The Color Palette dialog allows you to adjust colors while checking the colors on the screen, and create still frame clips. To open the Color Selection dialog, do one of the following. • Click the Color Selection button in the parameter display section of the Effect Editor. • Select Color Palette... in the Pattern list in the Generate SG Clip Tool.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Color Palette Dialog

359

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button b Tabs

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

c Template

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Color Palette dialog. The menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Color Palette dialog. Close: Closes the Color Palette dialog. b Tabs The Color Palette dialog has the following tabs. • “Gradient Color Tab” (page 361) • “Color Selection Tab” (page 362) • “Gradient Template Tab” (page 364) • “Texture Tab” (page 365) c Template Displays the templates saved on each tab. User button: Displays the templates created by the user. You can add and delete templates. System button: Displays the system templates provided as standard. System templates cannot be deleted. [+] button: Saves clips as templates and adds them to the User templates. [-] button: Deletes the selected template. System templates cannot be deleted.

360

Color Palette Dialog

Gradient Color Tab The Gradient Color tab is used to create gradient color clips.

a Preview

b Style selector

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

c Gradient Color Bar

d Detailed settings

a Preview Displays the gradient color clip. b Style selector Selects the color gradient style. • Line • Center • Circle • Four points c Gradient Color Bar Sets the gradient color range. Double-click the color stops beneath the color bar to display a dialog for selecting a color. Invert: Inverts the color bar. Pos: Sets the position of the color stop beneath the gradient color bar.

Whirl Angle: Sets the gradient angle. This item is displayed only when Line style is selected. Frequency: Sets the number of times the gradient is repeated. This item is displayed only when Line, Center or Circle style is selected. Repeat Type: Selects the type of repetition. This item is displayed only when Line, Center or Circle style is selected. • Repeat • Alternate Point Controller: Drag the four corner points to set the gradation color for each corner. This item is displayed only when Four Points style is selected.

d Detailed settings Sets parameters for the clip. The parameters displayed vary depending on the selected style.

Color Palette Dialog

361

Color Selection Tab The Color Selection tab creates single color clips.

a Color field b Color slider

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

c H/S/L/RGB section

d Color display section

e Color picker

a Color field Displays colors that you can select. Drag the mouse over the field to select a color. The selected color appears on the left side of the color display section. b Color slider Displays colors that you can select. Drag the slider with the mouse to select a color. The selected color appears on the left side of the color display section.

d Color display section Displays the selected color on the left side of the window, and the color before the change on the right side. A mark appears if any of the R, G, or B values is below 16 or over 235. Choosing the selected color when it is in this state results in the output of an illegal color. Note

Depending on effect parameter settings, an illegal color c H/S/L (Hue/Saturation/Luminance)/RGB section Provides spin buttons to set Hue, Luminance Saturation, and RGB. When the Media Bar Control Panel is connected to the Workstation, you can adjust a parameter by rotating the knob with the same color as the knob mark.

362

Color Palette Dialog

may not be output even when the

mark is displayed.

Conversely, an illegal color may be output even if no mark is displayed.

e Color picker Not supported in this version.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Color Palette Dialog

363

Gradient Template Tab The Gradient Template tab creates color gradient clip using an 8-bit grayscale mapping.

a Preview

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

b Gradient Color Bar

c Template

a Preview Displays the gradient color clip. b Gradient Color Bar Sets the gradient color range. Double-click the color stops beneath the color bar to display a dialog for selecting a color. The color gradient is set by the gradient defined in a grayscale template. The color assigned to the left hand end of the color bar is mapped to black in the selected template, and the color assigned to the right hand end of the color bar is mapped to white in the selected template. The color in the middle of the color bar is mapped to the grayscale level at the corresponding position in the template. Invert: Inverts the color bar. Pos: Sets the position of the color stop beneath the gradient color bar.

364

Color Palette Dialog

c Template Selector Selects the gradient template. The gradient in the selected template is mapped to the colors selected in the gradient color bar. Click the [+] button to add a bmp file as a gradient template. Only 8-bit grayscale bmp files are supported. Click the [-] button to delete the selected gradient template.

Texture Tab The Texture tab creates color gradient clips using imported images. Images in the following file formats can be used as textures. • .bmp • .tga

• • • • •

.jpg .gif .tif .pcx .png

a Texture mode

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

b Texture Selector

c Detailed settings

a Texture mode Selects the texture mode. Static Texture: Specifies a static texture. BumpMap Texture: Adds simulated surface relief detail to the texture using bump mapping. b Texture Selector Selects the texture image. Click the [+] button to add an image as a new textures. Click the [-] button to delete the selected texture.

Compensate for Darkening: Compensates the image for darkened regions. Invert BumpMap: Inverts the angle of the bump map. Tile BumpMap: Tiles the bump map. Azimuth: Sets the light source angle in the horizontal plane (0.00 to 360.00). Elevation: Sets the light source angle above the horizontal plane (0.00 to 360.00). Depth: Sets the depth of the embossing (1 to 65).

c Detailed settings Sets parameters for the clip. The parameters displayed vary depending on the selected texture. Image Type: Selects the texture display method. • Elongate • Central • Tiles Map Type: Selects the texture mapping method. • Linear Map • Spherical Map • Sinusoidal Map

Color Palette Dialog

365

Advanced Color Corrector

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

366

To start the Advanced Color Corrector, do one of the following. • Click the Advanced Color Corrector button on the timeline toolbar. • Double click an existing Advanced Color Corrector effect. • Use a shortcut key. • Press the focus hot key which starts Advanced Color Corrector. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.) For more information about focus hot keys, see page 832.

Advanced Color Corrector

Names and Functions of Parts Note

Some of these items can be manipulated with the Media Bar Control Panel and the Trackball Control Panel.

1 Menu button 2 Color correction group buttons

Color Corrector viewer Chapter 8 Effect Tools

3 Color correction work area

4 Color Corrector timeline

8 Source relationship section

5 Tool buttons

7 Color match section 6 Color Correction Presets

a Menu button Displays the Advanced Color Corrector Main Menu (see page 372). b Color correction group buttons Select the color correction group. HSL button: Allows you to correct colors by adjusting Hue, Saturation, and Luminance. There are two subgroups of controls under the HSL group, the Controls subgroup and the Hue Offsets subgroup. Controls: Provides sliders for Hue, Saturation, Brightness, and Contrast as well as Clip High/ Low control boxes for histogram adjustment. Hue Offsets: Provides Hue and Saturation controls for the Shadows, Midtones and Highlights of an image independently. Level adjustments can be made with Gain, Gamma, and Setup sliders. Curves button: Allows you to correct colors by adjusting four curves: Red, Green, Blue, and Master.

Secondary button: Allows you to modify colors of up to six separate vectors within an image. The Parameter Mode button at the left side of the buttons is gray when no parameters have been modified in that color correction group or subgroup. The Parameter Mode button is light blue whenever a parameter has been modified. You can reset the parameters by clicking the light blue Parameter Mode button with the Alt key held down. The color of the Parameter Mode button changes back to gray and the parameters are reset to their default values. For details about operation, see “Correcting Colors Using the HSL Group” (page 372), “Correcting Colors Using the Curves Group” (page 375), and “Correcting Colors Using the Secondary Group” (page 376).

c Color correction work area The controls shown in this area vary depending on the selected color correction (sub) group.

Advanced Color Corrector

367

Sliders, edit boxes, and knob marks work in the same way as the corresponding controls in the Effect Editor. However, edit boxes have a Parameter Mode button which turns light blue when the parameter selected in the box has been modified. You can reset the parameter to its default value by clicking a light blue Parameter Button with the Alt key held down. In some color correction (sub) groups, color wheels and curves are shown in this area. For more information about sliders, edit boxes, and knob marks, see page 314. See “Correcting Colors Using the HSL Group” (page 372) for more information about using color wheels. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

See “Correcting Colors Using the Curves Group” (page 375) for more information about using curves.

d Color Corrector timeline The Color Corrector timeline provides a subset of the functions available on the timeline, with the addition of special functions for color correction, such as comparing the colors of clips on the timeline and checking changes in the colors of adjacent clips. Dashed red lines beneath cells indicate source clip relationship. Color correction data is shared among related events and can be updated using the Update Related and Apply buttons. Solid red lines beneath cells indicate that the cells are not related to other cells. e Tool buttons The following buttons are available in the Advanced Color Corrector.

Icon

Button name

Function

ACCR Mode

Exits the Advanced Color Corrector and returns to the Timeline Editor.

Focus

Expands the timeline to a predefined size. Click again to return the timeline to its original size.

Solo CCR

Limits the display of effects on the timeline to Advanced Color Corrector effects only. Clip effects and transition effects are not shown.

Safe Color Settings

Opens the Safe Color Settings dialog. Note This button is disabled in the current version of XPRI NS.

368

Advanced Color Corrector

Icon

Button name

Function

Properties

Opens the Advanced Color Corrector Properties Dialog (see page 371)

f Color Correction Presets You can store the color corrections applied to a clip for later reuse. Store the corrections as a preset by clicking a CC number button in the upper row, and recall the preset by clicking the corresponding button in the lower row. A color wheel icon appears on the corresponding lower row button when the preset is stored. For details, see “To store color correction results as a preset” (page 377).

g Color match section This section contains color pickers, which allow you to pick input and output colors from the video in the viewer monitors. The Match Type drop-down list specifies the color match method, and the Color Match button executes the color match. See “Correcting colors with the color match control” (page 376) for more information about color matching.

h Source relationship section After making a color correction, you can apply it to other cells based on a group relationship. Choose the appropriate type from the drop-down list and click the Apply button. See “To apply color correction results to related cells (source clip relationship function)” (page 377) for more information about source clip relationship function.

Color Corrector Viewers 1 Monitors 2 Timecode displays

4 Position bars and playlines

3 Monitor switch lists

5 Viewer command buttons

b Timecode displays Displays the timecode of the position bar for each monitor. The Current viewer will always display the timecode of the playline position on the position bar. c Monitor switch lists Select the information displayed in the monitors. Select from among the following. • Empty: Nothing displayed • Entire Sequence: Entire sequence Note

The Reference monitor will always display the timecode and the playline position on the position bar while other monitors change displays depending on the position on the timeline. • • • • •

Advanced Color Corrector, source clip name/sequence name list is purged. Notes

• It is impossible to drop source clips or sequences into the Current monitor. • Current can be selected for one monitor only. The Current video cannot be displayed at the same time in two or three monitors.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

a Monitors The three monitors allow you to view the clips under and around the Color Corrector playline. You can use the monitor switch lists at the top of the monitors to select the content displayed in the monitors. By default, the center monitor shows the clip under the playline, the left monitor shows the previous clip, and the right monitor shows the next clip.

d Position bars and playlines The position bars are the temporal axes of the content displayed in the monitors. The scale changes depending on what is being displayed. The playlines show the current frame position. You can scrub the position bars to play the clips or sequences shown in the monitors. e Viewer command buttons Displays the command buttons for each of the color corrector viewers. By default the command buttons are arranged as shown in the figure below. You can customize the buttons in the command button area of the color corrector viewers by selecting Customize (see page 372) in the main menu.

Current: The clip under the playline Previous: The first clip before the current clip Next: The first clip after the current clip Second Previous: The second clip before current clip Second Next: The second clip after the current clip

When a source clip or sequence is dropped into the Color Corrector viewer that source clip name or sequence name is displayed in one of the Monitor switch lists. Each new source clip name and/or sequence name is added to the list below the separator whenever either is dropped. The source clip/sequence name list is displayed in order of newest on top, oldest on the bottom. When you exit the

Advanced Color Corrector

369

Default command button configuration

Icon

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Button name

Function

Command Button Palette

Displays the command button palette.

Split View

Displays a split view in the viewer. You can drag the split screen mark between the two panes. The split view is displayed in the viewer labeled Current only. Only the video at the playline position is shown in split view.

Go to Previous Event

Moves to a point in the previous event, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab (page 615) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Go to Next Event

Moves to a point in the next event, as specified in the Shortcut Key tab (page 615) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Play

Plays from the current position to the end.

Go to Previous Uncorrected Event Moves to the first clip to the left of the playlilne which does not have an advanced color correction effect mark. Go to Next Uncorrected Event

Moves to the first clip to the right of the playlilne which does not have an advanced color correction effect mark.

Delete Effect

Deletes the advanced color correction effect at the playline.

Move Canvas

Allows you to scroll the frame by dragging the viewer screen.

Zoom Adjustment

Allows you to zoom in and out by dragging the dragging the viewer screen. Right-clicking the zoom button displays a context menu with preset zoom settings.

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Function

Rewind

Rewinds the video tape or the track.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the video tape or the track.

Stop

Stops play.

Play In to Out

Plays from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point. When clicked with the Alt key held down, starts loop play from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point.

Play Reverse

Plays in the reverse direction (from the current position to the start point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed. Note Sound becomes discontinuous above 4 times normal speed.

370

Advanced Color Corrector

Play Forward

Plays in the forward direction (from the current position to the end point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed. Note Sound becomes discontinuous above 4 times normal speed. Pauses at the current position.

Loop Play

Performs loop play.

All Stop

Stops all operations.

Jog

Selects jog mode.

Shuttle

Selects shuttle mode.

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Switches between jog and shuttle modes.

Monitor Select

Selects the monitor to display on the video monitor of the Trim Viewer.

Go to Previous Tab

Moves to the previous tab.

Go to Next Tab

Moves to the next tab.

Go to Previous Plate

Moves to the previous plate.

Go to Next Plate

Moves to the next plate.

Go to Previous Sub Plate

Moves to the previous sub plate.

Go to Next Sub Plate

Moves to the next sub plate.

Go to Previous Parameter

Moves to the previous parameter.

Go to Next Parameter

Moves to the next parameter.

Help

Starts the Online Help.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Still

Color Corrector Properties Dialog Click the Color Corrector Properties button or select Properties... in the menu to open the Color Corrector Properties dialog shown in the following figure.

Advanced Color Corrector

371

For details, see “To apply color correction results to related cells (source clip relationship function)” (page 377).

1 Menu button

Sever Event Severs the relationships of the current cell. Sever Related Severs all the relationships of a particular group (determined by context menu) and sets their status to the original cell. Sever All... Severs the relationships of all cells. Displays a dialog that allows you to select the types of relationship to sever. 4 Cancel button 3 OK button Chapter 8 Effect Tools

2 Eyedropper 3x3 Averaging checkbox

a Menu button Displays the Color Corrector Properties dialog main menu. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Color Corrector Properties dialog. Close: Closes the Color Corrector Properties dialog. b Eyedropper 3x3 Averaging check box Sets the color picker to sample a 3 x 3 pixel area around the pixel at the pointer position. The 9 pixels that were sampled will have their individual component channels averaged to determine the sampled color. When this is checked, 3 x 3 Averaging function is off when Alt + click or Alt + dragging the color picker. When the check box is off, 3 x 3 Averaging function is on. c OK button Enables the settings made in the Color Corrector Properties dialog and closes the dialog. d Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Color Corrector Properties dialog and closes the dialog. You can also press the ESC key on the keyboard to cancel settings. A dialog appears asking for confirmation.

Advanced Color Corrector Main Menu The Advanced Color Corrector main menu appears when you click the Menu button in the Advanced Color Corrector (see page 366) window. The main menu has the following commands. Update Related Applies the result of color correction to cells related to the current event.

372

Advanced Color Corrector

For details, see “To sever cell relationships” (page 378).

Delete Effect Deletes an advanced color correction effect from the current clip. Properties... Displays the Color Corrector Properties Dialog (see page 371). Customize Opens a customization window. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to customize command button palettes by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel or the Trackball Control Panel. Cancel Cancels color correction mode. Answer “Yes” at the prompt to discard changes and close the Advanced Color Corrector, and return to the Timeline Editor. Exit Advanced Color Corrector Exits the Advanced Color Corrector and returns to the Timeline Editor.

Correcting Colors Using the HSL Group Move the playline to the cell you want to correct, and click the HSL button to select HSL group. You can make color corrections with the Controls subgroup and the Hue Offsets subgroup of color correction controls.

To make color corrections with the Controls subgroup Click the Controls button.

The controls shown below appear in the color correction work area.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Making adjustments Adjustments to these controls can be made in several ways. • Type a value in the edit box. • Use the up and down spin buttons to modify the value in minimal increments. • Drag the slider to modify the value. • If a Media Bar Control Panel is connected, rotate the knob on the Media Bar Control Panel that corresponds to the knob mark. Settings Hue: Specifies the hue. Saturation: Specifies the saturation. Brightness: Specifies the luminance offset. Contrast: Specifies the contrast. Gain: Specifies the gain. Gamma: Specifies the midpoint of the luminance range. Setup: Specifies the setup. Clip Low: Specifies the minimum luminance level. Clip High: Specifies the maximum luminance level. Invert Chrominance: Check this box to replace the color value with the opposite color value. Invert Luminance: Check this box, reverse the brightness level. To reset color correction With the Alt key held down, click the parameter mode button on the left side of the HSL color correction group button. All HSL group parameters are reset to their default values.

Advanced Color Corrector

373

To make color corrections with the Hue Offsets subgroup Click the Hue Offsets button.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Making adjustments Three color wheel controls that allow you to adjust hue and saturation values. Each color wheel control adjusts a distinct luminance range (Shadows, Midtones, and Highlights). • Type a value in the edit box. • Use the up and down spin buttons to modify the value in minimal increments. • Drag the slider to modify the value. • Press and hold the Shift key and drag the mouse in a color wheel to adjust the Saturation value only. • Press and hold the Alt key and drag the mouse in a color wheel to adjust the Hue value only. • Press and hold the Ctrl key in combination with the Shift key or Alt key for fine tuning adjustment of saturation or hue, respectively. • If a Media Bar Control Panel is connected, rotate the knob on the Media Bar Control Panel that corresponds to the knob mark. • If a Trackball Control Panel is connected, change color wheel settings with the trackball. Settings Mid/High Crossover: Sets the luminance of the border between highlight and midtone. Shad/Mid Crossover: Sets the luminance of the border between midtone and shadow. To reset color correction With the Alt key held down, click the parameter mode button on the left side of the Hue Offsets color correction group button. All Hue Offsets group parameters are reset to their default values.

374

Advanced Color Corrector

The controls shown below appear in the color correction work area. The three color wheels allow you to adjust hue and saturation at the same time.

Correcting Colors Using the Curves Group Move the playline to the cell you want to correct and click the Curves button to select Curves group. The controls shown below appear in the color correction work area.

You can modify colors by shaping curves for the Red, Green, Blue and Master channels. Up to 16 control points can be added to the graph of each curve.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

To make color corrections The Curves group will allow you to control color by placing up to 16 control points on a graph and then adjusting the points. There are graphs for Red, Green, Blue and Master channels. A graph shows the relationship of input values (on the horizontal axis) to output values (on the vertical axis). The default curve is an ascending 45 degree straight line, since input and output values are the same across the entire range. You can add points to the control curve by moving the mouse cursor over the curve and clicking to make the output values lower or higher than the input values. When the mouse cursor is over a control point the point will be highlighted and can be moved by clicking and dragging. Two control points are set by default, at (0,0) and (255,255). Click the curve to add a new control point (up to 16 points except two default points). The Delete and Backspace keys delete the currently active control point (except for the two default control points). • Type a value in the edit box. • Use the up and down spin buttons to modify the value in minimal increments. • If a Media Bar Control Panel is connected, rotate the knob on the Media Bar Control Panel that corresponds to the knob mark. • Click on the graph to add a control point and drag the control point. If a Trackball Control Panel is connected, you can move the active control point with the trackball. To reset color correction With the Alt key held down, click the parameter mode button on the left side of the Curves color correction group button. All Curves group parameters are reset to their default values.

Advanced Color Corrector

375

Correcting Colors Using the Secondary Group

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Move the playline to the cell you want to correct and click the Secondary button to select Secondary group. The

controls shown below appear in the color correction work area. You can select and adjust up to six vectors of color.

Making adjustments The Secondary Group allows for correction of up to 6 user defined vectors of color. This correction requires 2 stages of user input; selection of the vector (input) and modification of the selected vector (output). • Type a value in the edit box. • Use the up and down spin buttons to modify the value in minimal increments. • Drag the slider to modify the value. • If a Media Bar Control Panel is connected, rotate the knob on the Media Bar Control Panel that corresponds to the knob mark. • Select a color to adjust by using the picker button to pick it from the video in the monitors. • Click directly on the Input Vector control to create a vector. Input Vector parameters can be modified here as well (Hue, Hue Range, and Saturation). • Click on the corresponding Output Vector to modify its parameters (Hue Shift, Saturation and Luminance). • To soften a color range edge, specifies the degree of softness (Hue Softness, Sat Softness, and Lum Softness).

Correcting colors with the color match control

Check the Invert Vector check box to invert the vector range. Check the Isolate Vector check box to turn all colors outside the selected color to monochrome. Use the following buttons to operate Vector wheels. Color Picker button: Chooses a color and sets the initial vector. Delete button: Deletes a selected vector. Color Picker Add button: Widens a selected vector range. Color Picker Subtract button: Narrows a selected vector range. To reset color correction reset With the Alt key held down, click the parameter mode button on the left side of the Secondary color correction group button. All Secondary group parameters are reset to their default values.

376

Advanced Color Corrector

Each group of color correction controls contains a Color Match control. This control allows you to make quick corrections by selecting input and output colors from video images.

Proceed as follows.

1

Click the input color picker and select a color to correct from the video on a monitor.

2

Click the output color picker and select the target color from the video on a monitor.

3

Select the match type from the drop-down list. The list contents vary depending on the current color correction (sub) group.

4

Click the Match Color button to execute the match. The parameters in the (sub)group are automatically adjusted to achieve the closest possible match based on the match method you selected in step 3.

Note

The preference “Color Display Mode” is available from the Advanced Color Corrector Properties dialog. This preference has two settings for displaying picked colors; RGB and HSL. This setting modifies how the values of a selected color are displayed in the Color Match Source and Target color displays.

To reset color correction With the Alt key held down, click the parameter mode button on the left side of a color correction group button. All parameters in the selected group are reset to their default values.

After Making Color Corrections After you make a color correction, you can save it as a preset or apply it to related cells.

To delete an advanced color correction effect To load a preset file Right click the color wheel button and select Load from the context menu, then select a file to load.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Set one of the monitors to Current and display the advanced color correction effect that you want to delete. Then do one of the following. • Click the Delete Effect button at the bottom of the monitor. • Select Delete Effect from the main menu. • Right click the monitor and select Delete Effect from the context menu. • Right click the event on the timeline and select Delete Effect from the context menu. • Press the | key.

To store color correction results as a preset Click one of the CC1 to CC9 buttons. Advanced All of the color corrections currently displayed in the Color Corrector are stored as the preset for the button you clicked. A color wheel icon appears on the button beneath the clicked button. All presets are cleared when the Advanced Color Corrector is closed. To recall a preset Color wheel icons are displayed on preset buttons when they contain presets. To recall a preset, click the color wheel icon or right click and select Recall from the context menu.

To rename a preset Preset names are displayed in Tool Tips (small floating windows) when you move the cursor over a preset button. To give a meaningful name to the preset, right click the color wheel icon and select Rename from the context menu. Enter the new name in the dialog. which appears.

To delete a preset To delete a preset, right-click the color wheel icon and select Empty from the context menu.

To save color correction results as a preset file You can save presets stored in CC1 to CC9 by right clicking a button and selecting Save from the context menu. The preset is saved under the preset name in the location you specify.

To apply color correction results to related cells (source clip relationship function) After making a color correction, you can apply it to other source events based on a group relationship. In the source relationship section, choose the appropriate type from the drop-down list and click the Apply button. The drop-down list displays the following types of source relationships.

Advanced Color Corrector

377

Source Event: Color correction is applied to no other cells. Original cells are protected from updates with the Update Related command and the Apply button in this section. Source Reel: Color correction is applied to the current cell and all other cells in the current sequence that use material from the same source reel or MXF disc database. Source Clip Name: Color correction is applied to this cell and all other cells in the current sequence that have the same clip name. To update color correction of related cells Select Update Related from the main menu or a context menu. The settings of the clip recalled by Update Related are applied to all the cells in that group. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

To sever cell relationships There are two sever functions: Sever Event: Sever the current cell from the group relationship. Sever Related: Sever all clips in the group relationship that the current clip belongs to. To sever all relationships, or some types of relationships, right click a viewer and select Sever All... from the context menu. You can also select Sever All... from the main menu. The Sever All... command displays the Sever All dialog.

Select the relationships to sever in the Source Relationships check boxes and click the OK button. Source Reel: All events that are related by source reel. Source Clip Name: All events that are related by clip name. When the relationships of a cell are severed, its status changes to the original cell.

To play cells treated by Advanced Color Corrector in real time Cells to which Advanced Color Corrector corrections have been applied can be played back in real time, provided that the following conditions are met. 1. The source does not require rendering when placed on the timeline.

378

Advanced Color Corrector

2. The number of effects (clip effects or transition effects) applied to the effect’s slice on the timeline is one. 3. The effect is not part of a layer structure on the timeline. However, rendering is always required under the following circumstances. • When Secondary has been selected for material with keys • When you are using a split view for material with keys in the Effect Viewer

Audio Effect Editor Overview The Audio Effect Editor is a tool for editing audio effects.

Usable audio effect plug-ins XPRI NS can use VST audio effect plug-ins. To use an audio effect plug-in, you need to install it in advance.

XPRI NS uses the following location folder for storing VST plug-ins. C:\Program Files\VSTPlugins When installing a plug-in using the installer, be sure to specify this location folder. Note

VST plug-in installers generally use the same folder for both the install folder and location folder. However, for Waves installers and certain other installers, the install folder and location folder are separate. Freeware VST plug-ins can generally be obtained in DLL format. To use these plug-ins in XPRI NS, save the DLL files directly to the location folder (C:\Program Files\VSTPlugins).

VST plug-in limitations • VST plug-in parameters will only operate using the UI with which they are provided. Therefore, plug-ins that are not provided with UI cannot be used with XPRI NS. • Keyframe processes cannot be performed with VST plug-ins. • When VST plug-ins are installed, icons do not appear when dragging and dropping effects. • When Waves VST plug-ins are installed, be sure to insert the dongle before starting XPRI NS.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Hereafter, unless otherwise noted, “Effect Editor” in the following refers to the Video Effect Editor, and “effects” refers to video effects. You can do the following in the Audio Effect Editor. • Adjust the parameters of individual effects. • Check audio clips after the addition of effects (preview). • Create keyframes for audio effects. You can use either of the following two effect editors, depending on whether you want to work with simple effects on the Timeline Editor timeline or with keyframe effects on a special keyframe control timeline. Simple Effect Editor: The special keyframe control timeline does not appear. Use this editor when working with effects that do not use keyframes. (See “Simple Effect Editor (for Audio Effects)” (page 379).) Full Effect Editor: The special keyframe control timeline allows you to adjust all parameters in a visually intuitive way. (See “Full Effect Editor (for Audio Effects)” (page 383).)

Installing VST plug-ins

DX Plug-Ins Compatible DX plug-ins Refer to the Release Notes for details on compatible plugins.

Notes

• XPRI NS executes the processing required by the effects. Using a large number of effects increases the burden on XPRI NS, possibly affecting playback and rendering. If this occurs, you should reduce the number of effects. • An effect plug-in which requires complex processing may burden the system as heavily as several normal plug-ins. When using such effect plug-ins, you should be aware of the total number of effects making up the effect sequence and be prepared to reduce the number if necessary.

VST Plug-Ins Compatible VST audio effect plug-ins Refer to the Release Notes for details on compatible plugins.

Note

DX plug-in parameters operate using the UI of XPRI NS. The UI provided with the plug-in is disabled.

Simple Effect Editor (for Audio Effects) Overview The Simple Effect Editor is a tool for quickly and easily adjusting the parameters of effects applied to clips and transitions on the timeline. It does not support some of the more complex parameters (for these you must use the Full Effect Editor), but it does enable efficient editing, because it is integrated into the Timeline Editor. CG effects can be adjusted in the same way. Unless otherwise noted, “Effect Editor” in the following refers to the Video Effect Editor, and “effects” refers to video effects.

Audio Effect Editor

379

To start the Simple Effect Editor

Notes

Do one of the following. • In the Timeline Editor (page 171), select the effect whose parameters you want to adjust and then select [Edit in Simple Effect Editor] from the context menu. • Double click an effect icon. 1) 2) If you have customized the command button area to include the Open FX button, you can click the button to start the Simple Effect Editor for the clip or transition at the playline position on the active tracks. 1) When audio effects have been applied to the current clip, an audio effect list appears, showing the applied effects. You can click effects in this list to select them, or select them with the up and down arrow keys. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

1) To have the Simple Effect Editor start instead of the Full Effect Editor, set the Default Effect Editor option in the Display tab (page 626) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog to [Simple]. 2) To start either Effect Editor when you double click an effect icon, you need to check the [Editor Start-up with Double Click (Composer Mode)] check box in the Edit tab (page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

• The Simple Effect Editor closes when you select one of the Timeline Editor editing modes (Composer, Segment (Extract/Splice-In), Segment (Lift/Overwrite), Rubber band, or Trim). Effect operations possible on the timeline when the Simple Effect Editor is running • Effects open in the Simple Effect Editor when you click an effect icon. • Clip effects open in the Simple Effect Editor when you click a video clip. (When several effects have been applied to a clip, the effect at the end of the effect order opens. When no effect has been applied, nothing is loaded into the Simple Effect Editor.) • You can copy effects by dragging their icons with the Ctrl key held down.

Names and functions of parts 3 Effect name display 1 Menu button

4 Effect viewer 2 Parameter display section

8 Audio effect list

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Effect Editor. See “Effect Editor Main Menu (for Audio Effects)” (page 399) for more information about the main menu.

380

Audio Effect Editor

5 Timecode display

6 Command button area

7 Position bar

b Parameter display section Displays the current values of effect parameters. You can change the values as required. Except for the fact that no tabs are displayed, this section is the same as the parameter display section of the Full Effect Editor.

The parameter display section will be empty for VST plugins.

See page 395 for more information about the command buttons.

See “1 Parameter display section (for audio effects)” (page 386) for more information.

g Position bar Displays the duration of clip effects and transition effects.

c Effect name display Displays the name of the effect that is the current target of adjustment. However, nothing appears here for effects that are not supported by the Simple Effect Editor.

See page 381 for more information about the position bar.

e Timecode display Displays the timecode for the playline position (left box) and the duration of the clip at the playline position (right box). “--:--:--:--” appears as the duration when there is no target effect. The parameter display section will be empty for VST plugins. f Command button area Contains the command buttons of the Simple Effect Editor. The command buttons shown here are the same as those shown in the Full Effect Editor.

For details on audio effect list, page 383.

Position bar (for audio effects) Overview The position bar displays the duration of clip effects and transition effects. The display range is as follows. Clip effects: From the In point to the Out point of the clip Transition effects: From the start frame to the end frame of the transition Keyframe position marks and essence marks are also shown on the position bar.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

d Effect Viewer You can play and preview the audio after adding audio effects. This allows you to check the additions while viewing the video. Timeline playback also appears in the Effect Viewer.

h Audio effect list Displays a list of effects applied to clips or transitions. You can perform the following operations in this list. • Select effects so that you can modify their parameters. • Turn effects on and off (through). • Add effects.

Names and Functions of Parts

1 Go to In area 2 Scrub area 3 Keyframe position mark 4 Essence mark

5 Playline

a Go to In area Represents the start of the effect. The playline moves to the start frame when you click this area.

6 Go to Out area

b Scrub area Represents the body of the effect. You can move around the effect by dragging the playline to the left and right within this area.

Audio Effect Editor

381

c Keyframe position mark Indicates a frame where a keyframe has been set, and the state of the keyframe. The marks of currently selected keyframes are displayed in orange. d Essence mark Indicates an essence mark set on the timeline. If there are several essence marks set at the same position, only one essence mark is shown. It contains the information for all of the essence marks at that position. You can use the command buttons to jump to essence mark positions, and to display a marker list.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

382

e Playline Indicates the playline position. The Simple Effect Editor playline moves together with the Timeline Editor playline. For example, if you move the Timeline Editor playline, the composition results for the corresponding tracks appear in the Effect Viewer. f Go to Out area Represents the end of the effect. The playline moves to the end frame when you click this area.

Audio Effect Editor

To start the Full Effect Editor

Audio Effect List Displays a list of effects applied to clips or transitions. You can perform the following operations in this list. • Select effects so that you can modify their parameters. • Turn effects on and off. • Add effects. You can hide or display the list by using [Effect List] of the main menu.

2 On/Off controls

1) To have the Full Effect Editor start instead of the Simple Effect Editor, set the Default Effect Editor option in the Display tab (page 626) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog to [Full]. 2) To start either Effect Editor when you double click an effect icon, you need to check the [Editor Start-up with Double Click (Composer Mode)] check box in the Edit tab (page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

1 Effect names

Do one of the following. • In the Timeline Editor (page 171), select the effect whose parameters you want to adjust and then select [Edit in Full Effect Editor] from the context menu. • Double click an effect icon. 1) 2) If you have customized the command button area to include the Open FX button, you can click the button to start the Full Effect Editor for the clip or transition at the playline position on the active tracks. 1) When audio effects have been applied to the current clip, an effect list appears, showing the applied effects. You can click effects in this list to select them, or select them with the up and down arrow keys.

a Effect names List the names of the effects applied to a clip. Effects are applied in order from the top. You can click the name of an effect to select that effect as a target of parameter adjustment. b On/Off (through) controls Turn the effect on when checked, and turn it off (through) when cleared. To add an effect Drag the effect that you want to add from FX Explorer and drop it into the list.

Full Effect Editor (for Audio Effects) Overview The Full Effect Editor is a tool for adjusting the parameters of effects applied to clips and transitions. It has a special timeline for keyframe control, which allows you to adjust all parameters in a visually intuitive way.

Audio Effect Editor

383

Names and functions of parts a Menu button 1 Parameter display section b Keyframe list box c Effect name display d Timecode display e Effect Viewer

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

f Command button area 2 Effect timeline

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Effect Editor.

Time Code: Keyframe positions are fixed relative to timecode.

See “Effect Editor Main Menu (for Audio Effects)” (page 399) for more information about the main menu.

You can set the initial keyframe handling mode in the Keyframe tab (see page 627) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog.

b Keyframe list box Allows you to specify how keyframe position should be adjusted when you apply a keyframe to a clip on the timeline whose length differs from the length of the clip used to create the keyframe. Select one of the following from the drop-down list. Snap on Frame: Keyframe positions change in approximate ratio with the length of the clip, so that each keyframe comes to the closest frame position. When this would result in two keyframes being assigned to the same frame, priority is given to the keyframe that is closest to the frame position.

384

Audio Effect Editor

c Effect name display Displays the name of the effect that is the current target of adjustment. d Timecode display Displays the timecode for the playline position (left box) and the duration of the clip at the playline position (right box). The timecode display can be switched between field 1, field 2, and frame. When field 2 is displayed, it is underlined.

To switch the display between field 1, field 2, and frame, use the Display tab (see page 609) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog. e Effect Viewer You can play and preview the audio after adding audio effects. This allows you to check the additions while viewing the video. The Effect Viewer displays the video of the scene at the playline position. To move the playline, use one of the following methods. • Drag the playline on the effect timeline. • Use the command buttons to move the playline.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

f Command button area Contains the Full Effect Editor command buttons. The command buttons shown here are the same as those shown in the Simple Effect Editor. See page 395 for more information about the Effect Editor command buttons.

Audio Effect Editor

385

1 Parameter display section (for audio effects) Overview Displays the current values of effect parameters. You can change the values as required. The type and number of the displayed parameters vary depending on the selected effect. The parameter display section will be empty for VST plugins. In addition, keyframe processes will be disabled. To edit the effect, click the icon to the left of the Custom Settings at the top of the parameter display section to open the UI provided with the plug-in.

Note

Some parameters can also be adjusted by using the Media Bar Control Panel. See“Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels (for Audio Effects)” (page 391) for more information.

Names and Functions of Parts

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

1 Plate Reset 2 Parameter name 3 Edit box 4 Scrollbar 5 Keyframe mode button 6 Slider

7 Reset button

8 Path edit button 9 Knob mark

a Plate Reset Resets all of the parameters in the corresponding plate to their default values. This button is disabled when the parameters in the plate are already set to the default values. b Parameter name Displays the name of the parameter. Clicking a parameter name selects that parameter as the target of the operation (the parameter gains the focus). You can also press the Tab key to select (give the focus to) parameters. c Edit box Displays the current setting. To change the setting, either enter a value directly or click the f/F buttons.

386

Audio Effect Editor

Note

When you change a setting, do so before operating in the Effect Viewer or on the control panel. d Scrollbar Drag the scrollbar to move to another plate. e Keyframe mode button Enables or disables keyframe. : Enabled (Keyframe mode) : Disabled (Single keyframe mode) You can set initial values in the Effect Editor Properties dialog. You can use the [Keyframe Mode] command in the main menu to enable or disable all parameters.

For more information, see “Effect Editor Properties Dialog” (page 624) and “Keyframe Mode” (page 330). For more information about keyframe operations, see “Keyframe Operations (for Audio Effects)” (page 392).

f Slider Drag the knobs on sliders to set parameter values. Clicking in a slider beside the knob changes the value in units of 10. g Reset button Resets the parameter to its default value. This button is disabled when the parameter is already set to the default value. When there are sub parameters, a reset button is displayed for each sub parameter. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

h Path edit button Left click this button to cycle between the keyframe path types. Right click to display the Path Setting dialog. The path type and the items in the Path Setting dialog change depending on whether the wave is periodic. Step: Parameter values change at keyframe positions. Linear: Values are interpolated linearly between keyframes. Speed is constant. Smooth: Values are interpolated on a curve between keyframes. Speed increases and decreases around the keyframe, becoming fastest at the center point between keyframes. Spline: When you select Spline, you can set the Tension (tension of the path curve), Bias (slope of the tangential line relative to the path curve), and Continuity (continuity of the path). When these parameters are set to their default values, this path type produces the same type of curve as Smooth. You can adjust the curve by changing the parameters. The color of the button changes when the parameters are set to non-default values. You can select the initial path type in the Effect Editor Properties dialog. For more information, see “Effect Editor Properties Dialog” (page 624).

i Knob mark The knob mark in the active plate is colored, indicating which knob on the Media Bar Control Panel is assigned to which parameter. For parameters not assigned to knobs, the corresponding knob marks are displayed in gray.

Audio Effect Editor

387

2 Effect timeline (for audio effects) Overview The effect timeline allows you to create and edit effect keyframes. Names and Functions of Parts b + and – buttons

a Clip In and Out points

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

f Position bar

g Scroll bar/ zoom controller

3 Timeline display button

l Tracks k Keyframe position mark

e Playline time

j Keyframe mark

d Track names

i Essence mark h Playline

a Clip In and Out points For clip effects, the In point and Out point of the clip are displayed. For transition effects, the start point and end point of the transition are displayed. b + and - buttons Click the + button to display the parameter tree of the active tab, and click the - button to hide it. c Timeline display button Turns the effect timeline display on and off. d Track names Display tab and parameter names as track names. Clicking a track name selects that track as the target of the operation (the track gains the focus). The name of the selected track is displayed in white. You can also press the Tab key to select (give the focus to) tracks. Only parameters with enabled keyframes (keyframe mode) are displayed on tracks. By displaying the context menu of this section, you can import and export keyframes of the selected parameters. e Playline time Displays the current position of the playline in timecode format.

388

Audio Effect Editor

f Position bar Displays the duration of clip effects and transitions. g Scroll bar/zoom controller Zooms in and out on the timeline. Has the following functions, in addition to normal scroll bar function. Drag right arrow to zoom in, and drag left arrow to zoom out. Alternatively, right-click while holding the Ctrl key and drag up/down on the timecode area to zoom in and out. Right-click while holding the Ctrl key and drag left/right on the timeline to move the timeline. Double-click the scroll bar to collapse/expand its length. h Playline Shows the current position on the effect timeline. i Essence mark Indicates an essence mark set on the timeline. If there are several essence marks set at the same position, only one essence mark is shown. It contains the information for all of the essence marks at that position. You can use the command buttons to jump to essence mark positions, and to display a marker list. j Keyframe mark Displays a keyframe position on a parameter track. The currently selected keyframe mark is displayed in orange.

Keyframe marks are not displayed in the track of the currently open tab. Tab keyframe marks are displayed in the tracks of tabs that are not currently open. These show the state of the keyframes on the tracks of the parameters in the tab. For more information about keyframe selections, see page 392.

k Keyframe position mark Displays a frame for which a keyframe has been set, and the state of the keyframe which it contains. The marks of the currently selected keyframes are displayed in orange. For more information about keyframe selections, see page 392. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

l Tracks Display the positions where the parameters of the currently open tab are applied.

Audio Effect Editor

389

Effect Editor Basic Operations (for Audio Effects) This section explains basic editing operations which are common to both the Simple Effect Editor and the Full Effect Editor.

Editing Effects Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Edit effects by selecting parameters and setting the desired parameter values.

To select parameters Click the name of the parameter in the parameter display section. In the Full Effect Editor, you can also click the parameter name on the Effect Timeline. You can also select parameters by pressing the Tab key. Note

A parameter gains the focus automatically when you change its values with the sliders in the parameter display section or the knobs on the Media Control Panel.

To change parameter settings Use the tools in the Parameter Display section. The method to use depends on the selected parameter. Note

Some parameters can also be adjusted with the Media Bar Control Panel. See “Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels (for Audio Effects)” (page 391) for more information.

To edit VST plug-in effects The parameter display section will be empty for VST plugins. To edit the effect, click the icon to the left of the Custom Settings at the top of the parameter display section to open the UI provided with the plug-in.

Previewing Effects You can play audio after adding effects. To play another scene, use one of the following methods to move the playline. • In the Simple Effect Editor, drag the playline on the position bar.

390

Effect Editor Basic Operations (for Audio Effects)

• In the Full Effect Editor, drag the playline on the Effect Timeline. • Use the command buttons to move the playline. Note

The playline can also be moved in the Timeline Editor.

Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels (for Audio Effects) Effect Editor parameters can be adjusted with the Media Bar Control Panel. VST plug-in parameters cannot be adjusted with the Media Bar Control Panel.

Adjusting Parameters With the Media Bar Control Panel Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Parameters that can be adjusted with the Media Bar Control Panel are indicated with a knob mark in the Parameter display section (for audio effects) (page 386). Adjust a parameter by rotating the knob with the same color as the knob mark. Normally rotating a knob in the clockwise direction increases the value, while rotating a knob in the counterclockwise direction decreases the value. However, operations may be different for parameters that rotate the picture. Note

Dragging the mouse with the Ctrl key held down makes values change by 1/5 the normal amount.

Adjusting Parameters With Control Panels (for Audio Effects)

391

Keyframe Operations (for Audio Effects)

Keyframe marks and keyframe position marks The positions of keyframes on tracks are shown by marks. Note

Enabling and Disabling Keyframe Mode

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

You can select the default keyframe mode setting (enabled or disabled) in the Keyframe tab of the Effect Editor Properties dialog. Single keyframe mode is enabled when you disable keyframe mode. Selecting single keyframe mode allows you to keep effect parameters constant across an entire clip. To enable or disable keyframe mode for each parameter, click the keyframe mode button in the parameter display section. To enable or disable keyframe mode for all parameters, select [Enable] or [Disable] under [Keyframe Mode] in the main menu, or alternatively click the Keyframe Mode button while holding down the Alt key.

Keyframe marks and tab keyframe marks appear only in the Full Effect Editor. Keyframe marks When you create a keyframe, a mark is displayed at the playline position of the parameter. Selected and not selected keyframe marks have different colors. • : Selected •

When the cell length changes, the keyframe positions are displaced from the corresponding frames. If this occurs, it is possible for more than one keyframe to exist in a single frame. In this case, keyframes are displayed as follows. • : All keyframes in a frame are selected •

: Only the keyframe closest to the frame start position is selected

Note

Keyframe processes cannot be performed with VST plugins.

•

When you switch from keyframe mode to single keyframe mode The keyframe mode interpolation value is copied to the single keyframe mode parameter value. If you do not want to copy the value, switch to single keyframe mode with the Ctrl key held down.

When you move the playline to a frame where several keyframes exist and adjust parameters, the settings of the keyframe closest to that frame’s start position are changed. To select several keyframes, drag with the right button of the mouse held down to surround the keyframe marks with a rectangle.

When you switch from single keyframe mode to keyframe mode The single keyframe mode parameter value is copied to the keyframe at the playline position. A keyframe is created if one does not already exist at the playline position. If you do not want to copy the value or create a new keyframe, switch to keyframe mode with the Ctrl key held down.

Tab keyframe marks When a parameter track is not displayed (is collapsed), a mark for the keyframes in that track is displayed on the tab track (tab keyframe mark). Even if a track is not displayed, selecting a tab keyframe mark on the tab track allows you to select all of the keyframes in one frame. Tab keyframe marks are displayed differently, as shown below, depending on whether there is one keyframe each in each track or different numbers of keyframes in different tracks.

Creating Keyframes When a parameter value is changed, a keyframe is automatically created at the playline position, and a keyframe mark is displayed (see page 316). To create a keyframe without changing parameter values, click the Set Keyframe command button, or select [Add KF] from the context menu of a track. If a keyframe already exists at that position, its content is updated. You can also use the Copy Keyframe and Paste Keyframe buttons to create a keyframe from a keyframe that already exists on a track.

392

: Not selected

Keyframe Operations (for Audio Effects)

: No keyframe is selected

One keyframe in each track • : All keyframes are selected •

: No keyframe is selected

Different numbers of keyframes in different tracks • : All keyframes are selected •

or

: Some keyframes are selected

•

: No keyframe is selected

Keyframe position marks In the Simple Effect editor, keyframe position marks appear at the bottom of the position bar. In the Full Effect Editor, they appear in the upper part of the effect timeline. You can select all of the keyframe in a frame by selecting a keyframe position mark. Keyframe position marks are displayed differently, as shown below, depending on whether there is one keyframe each in each track or different numbers of keyframes in different tracks. One keyframe in each track • : All keyframes are selected •

: No keyframe is selected

•

or

: Some keyframes are selected

•

: No keyframe is selected

To cancel the selection of a specific keyframe, click the keyframe mark while holding down the Ctrl key. To cancel the selection of all keyframes Do one of the following. • Open the context menu of the Full Effect Editor effect timeline and choose [Deselect All KF]. • Press Ctrl + Shift + A. The following operations automatically cancel the selection of all currently selected keyframes: • Creating a new keyframe • Enabling or disabling keyframe mode • Performing some operation on another keyframe

Changing Keyframe Positions To cut, copy, paste, or delete keyframes

To select multiple keyframe marks or keyframe position marks Drag with the right button of the mouse held down to surround the marks you want to select with a rectangle. Keyframe marks or keyframe position marks are selected, depending on which type was surrounded first.

Do the following: • Cut: Click the Cut Keyframe button or select [Cut] from the context menu of the keyframe • Copy: Click the Copy Keyframe button or select [Copy] from the context menu of the keyframe • Paste: Click the Paste Keyframe button or select [Paste] from the context menu of the keyframe • Delete: Click the Delete Keyframe button or select [Delete] from the context menu of the keyframe

Selecting the Target Keyframe of an Operation

Moving keyframes along the time axis

The following operations select one keyframe on a track: • Changing the parameters set for a keyframe • Clicking a keyframe mark. To select multiple keyframes Do one of the following. • With the Ctrl key held down, click the keyframe marks that you want to select in order. • Drag with the right button of the mouse held down to surround the keyframe marks you want to select with a rectangle. To select all of the keyframes in a tab for a single frame Click the tab keyframe mark. To select all keyframes in a frame Click the keyframe position mark.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Different numbers of keyframes in different tracks • : All keyframes are selected

To cancel selections

Proceed as follows, operating on the position bar in the Simple Effect Editor and on the effect timeline in the Full Effect Editor.

1

Select keyframes or keyframe position marks. In the Simple Effect Editor, you can operate only on keyframe position marks. The color of the selected keyframes or keyframe position marks changes to orange or yellow.

2

Drag the selected keyframes or keyframe position marks. As you drag, the keyframes or keyframe position marks are shown in their original locations in the selected state (orange or yellow). The current positions are shown by empty orange or yellow marks.

To select all keyframes Do one of the following. • Open the context menu of the Full Effect Editor Effect Timeline and choose [Select All KF]. • Press Ctrl + A.

Keyframe Operations (for Audio Effects)

393

Press the Esc key to cancel the operation while you are dragging. When you release the mouse button, the keyframes or keyframe position marks are shown in the current position in the selected state. Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Key

Operation

Shift + Alt

• Move keyframes across neighboring keyframes. • Move while snapping to the positions of keyframe position markers. • If there is a keyframe at the move destination, it is overwritten.

Ctrl + Alt

Copy while snapping to the positions of keyframe position markers.

Ctrl + Shift

• Copy keyframes across neighboring keyframes. • If there is a keyframe at the copy destination, it is overwritten.

Ctrl + Shift + Alt

• Copy keyframes across neighboring keyframes. • Copy while snapping to the positions of keyframe position markers. • If there is a keyframe at the copy destination, it is overwritten.

Changing Keyframe Content To adjust parameters See “To change parameter settings” in “Effect Editor Basic Operations (for Audio Effects)” (page 390). Notes

• When you have selected Bezier under the Type parameter in the Mask tab, the Effect Editor Tool is displayed, but the window cannot be switched between displayed and hidden during keyframe movement. • Keyframe movement is not supported for the Transition parameter of transition effects. Movement and copy limitations When you move or copy keyframes, it is normally not possible to drag them past across the neighboring keyframes. If you are moving or copying several keyframes at once, this limitation depends on the location of the nearest keyframe. However, you can disable this limitation by pressing the Shift key as you drag (see the following section). Operating with both the mouse and the keyboard The following table shows what occurs when you drag while holding down the Shift, Alt, and Ctrl keys.

394

Key

Operation

Shift

• Move keyframes across neighboring keyframes. • If there is a keyframe at the move destination, it is overwritten.

Alt

Move while snapping to the positions of keyframe position markers.

Ctrl

Copy keyframes.

Keyframe Operations (for Audio Effects)

To return parameter settings to their defaults Click the Reset button. To confirm the adjusted parameters, do one of the following. • Click the Create/Update Keyframe button • Move the playline to another position • Adjust another parameter Pressing the Esc key before confirming the values returns the keyframe parameter values to the values before adjustment. Undoing an adjustment before confirming the values moves two steps back, canceling the adjustment and also undoing the values that existed before the adjustment.

To set the keyframe path type (interpolation method) Do one of the following. • Left click the Path edit button (see page 387) and select the path type. • Right click the Path edit button to display the Path Settings dialog, and select the desired path type. To change the path type for several keyframes at once Select the target keyframes, open the effect timeline context menu, and select [Change Path Type...]. Select the desired path type when the Path Settings dialog appears.

Effect Editor Command Button Area (for Audio Effects) By default, the buttons in the Effect Editor command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 399) command from the main menu. Note

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys.

Effect Editor Command Button Area (for Audio Effects)

395

Default command button configuration

Icon

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Button name

Button function

Set Keyframe

Creates a keyframe at the playline position on the track. If a keyframe already exists at the playline position, its content is updated. When the Add KF To All Parameters option buttons (see page 627) in the Keyframe tab of the Effect Editor Properties dialog is on, keyframes are created for all parameters at the playline position that are in keyframe mode.

Delete Keyframe

Deletes the selected keyframe. This button is disabled when no keyframe is selected.

Previous Keyframe

Moves the playline to the previous keyframe.

Next Keyframe

Moves the playline to the next keyframe.

Add Keyframe to All

Generates or updates keyframes for all parameters that are in keyframe mode. Note In the Simple Effect Editor, this button generates or updates keyframes for all parameters, even parameters that are not displayed.

Cut Keyframe

Cuts the selected keyframe. This button is disabled when no keyframe is selected.

Copy Keyframe

Copies the parameter settings of the selected keyframe to internal memory. This button is disabled when no keyframe is selected.

Paste Keyframe

Pastes the keyframe data stored in internal memory to the playline position of the corresponding track. If a keyframe already exists at the playline position, its content is updated. If there is no keyframe at the playline position, a new keyframe is created. The corresponding track is displayed automatically if it is hidden. This button is disabled when there is no keyframe data in internal memory. Note The keyframe data remains in internal memory even after it is pasted, until the next keyframe copy operation.

Step Backward

Moves the playline 1 frame back with each click.

Step Forward

Moves the playline 1 frame forward with each click. If you want to continuously move the playline forward (for a frame-by-frame continuous playback), click this button while holding down the Alt key.

Go to In

Moves the playline to the In point.

Play

Starts playback from the playline. Dropped frames may occur for effects that cannot be played in real time. When clicked again, stops playback. Note Dropped frames occur in near-real-time play when there is an interval between the displayed frames. The length of the interval varies depending on the type of effect. You can also click the Step Forward button while holding down the Alt key to check continuous play one frame at a time.

396

Effect Editor Command Button Area (for Audio Effects)

Icon

Button name

Button function

Go to Out

Moves the playline to the Out point plus 1 frame.

Play Reverse

Plays in the reverse direction (from the current position to the start point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed. Note Audio is not heard above 2 times normal speed.

Play Forward

Plays in the forward direction (from the current position to the end point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Step Forward 10 Frames

Moves the playline 10 frames back with each click.

Step Backward 10 Frames

Moves the playline 10 frames forward with each click.

Go to Start

When clicked at the start of a track, jumps to the start of the previous track. If there is no previous track, jumps to the last track. If clicked midway through a track, jumps to the start of the track. If clicked during play, restarts play from the jump position. If clicked again within 3 seconds after play restarts, jumps to the start of the previous track.

Stop

Stops play at the current position.

Go to End

Jumps to the start of the next track. If there is no next track, jumps to the first track. If clicked during play, restarts play from the jump position.

Go to Previous Marker

Moves the playline to the first mark before the current position.

Go to Next Marker

Moves the playline to the first mark after the current position.

Mark List

Starts the Marker List dialog, which displays all of the marks in the selected clip. You can click a mark in the list to move the playline to that timecode position. The dialog stays open.

Reset Effect

Resets the effect to the same state as when it was first applied.

Help

Displays help about the Effect Editor.

All Stop

Stops play.

Restore All Default

Click to restore the initial settings of the selected keyframes.

Details View

Switches between Full Effect Editor and Simple Effect Editor. Effects that are open in Effect Editor will be displayed in the Effect Editor that you switch to.

Effect Editor Command Button Area (for Audio Effects)

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Note Audio is not heard above 2 times normal speed.

397

Command buttons available through customization (for audio effects) Icon

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

398

Button name

Button function

Rewind

Rewinds the track.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the track.

Play In to Out

Plays back the clip from the In point to the Out point. During playback this button becomes a Stop button. Clicking this button with the Alt key held down gives loop playback from the In point to the Out point.

Play to Out

Plays the clip from the current position to the Out point.

Still

Pauses at the current position.

Revert Direction

Inverts the keyframe direction.

Jog

Selects jog mode.

Shuttle

Selects shuttle mode.

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Switches between jog and shuttle modes.

Go to Previous Tab

Moves to the previous tab.

Go to Next Tab

Moves to the next tab.

Go to Previous Plate

Moves to the previous plate.

Go to Next Plate

Moves to the next plate.

Go to Previous Parameter

Moves to the previous parameter.

Go to Next Parameter

Moves to the next parameter.

Undo

Undoes operations performed on the timeline.

Redo

Redoes operations performed on the timeline.

Effect Editor Command Button Area (for Audio Effects)

Effect Editor Main Menu (for Audio Effects)

Minimize Minimizes the Effect Editor window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Effect Editor window.

Click the Menu button in the Simple Effect Editor or the Full Effect Editor to display the Effect Editor main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Keyframe Mode Allows you to select whether to enable or disable keyframe mode for all parameters. Enable: Enables keyframe mode for all parameters. Disable: Enables single keyframe mode for all parameters. You can set the initial mode in the Effect Editor Properties dialog. Reset Effect Resets the effect to the same state as when it was first applied. Effect Editor Properties... Opens the Effect Editor Properties dialog, so that you can make settings related to initial keyframe defaults. See “Effect Editor Properties Dialog” (page 624) for more information.

Customize Opens a customization window. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570), which allows you to customize command button palettes by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Show Effect List Displays or hides the audio effect list. Display: Displays the audio effect list. Hide: Hides the audio effect list. The initial setting of this item can be selected in the Keyframe tab (see page 627) of the Effect Editor Properties dialog. Help... Displays help about the Effect Editor. Maximize Maximizes the Effect Editor window.

Effect Editor Main Menu (for Audio Effects)

399

Voice Disguise Function Voice Disguise is an audio effect tool to disguise the voice of a recorded speaker so that the speaker cannot be identified. Effects produced by this tool can be applied to clips on the timeline via the Effect Editor.

Chapter 8 Effect Tools

400

Voice Disguise Function

Voice Disguise parameters The following explains the Voice Disguise parameters setting screen displayed by the Audio Effect.

1 Parameter name 2 Edit box

3 Slider Chapter 8 Effect Tools

a Parameter name Displays the name of the parameter. The following table shows the default setting for each parameter. Voice Disguise parameters

Default settings For women

For men

Effect(%)

90

95

Dry Delay(ms)

24

20

Wet Delay(ms)

0

0

Pitch(cent)

400

500

FB Delay(ms)

26

24

FB Level(%)

40

-45

b Edit box Displays the current setting. You can change the setting by entering a value directly. c Slider Allows you to change the setting by dragging the knob.

Voice Disguise Function

401

Voice Disguise operating principles The figure below shows a block diagram of audio processing by the Voice Disguise effect. The broken-line arrows indicate which parameters control which blocks.

In

Delay

Out Mixer

Dry Delay Time

Delay

Fader

Effect Balance Chapter 8 Effect Tools

Feedback Level Delay

Pitch Shifter

Wet Delay Time

Pitch

Parameters and setting ranges Effect Balance: The balance between the original audio and the effect audio after pitch adjustment. Setting range: 0% (original sound only) to 100% (effect sound only). Dry Delay Time: The delay time of the original audio. Setting range: 0 to 300 msec. Wet Delay Time: The delay time of the effect audio. Setting range: 0 to 300 msec (a delay of 384 samples occurs in the pitch shifter, so that a total delay of 8 msec (case of Fs 48 kHz) occurs when this parameter is set to 0). Pitch: Amount of pitch variation. Setting range: -1200 cents (1 octave lower) to +1200 cents (1 octave higher). Feedback Delay Time: Feedback delay time of effect audio. Setting range: 0 to 300 msec (a delay of 384 samples occurs in the pitch shifter, so that a total delay of 8 msec (case of Fs 48 kHz) occurs when this parameter is set to 0). Feedback Level: Feedback level of the effect audio. Setting range: -60% to +60%

402

Feedback Delay Time

Voice Disguise Function

CG Clips

Chapter

9

Note

Creating CG Clips

Keyframes must be added to the timeline in order to animate CG effects.

CG clips are created on the active CG, Video, and external key tracks of the timeline.

Specifying the Track and Mode for CG Clips

1

Do one of the following to specify where to create the clip in the CG track. • Set In and Out points • Move the playline.

2

Click the CG button, and select the object you want to create.

After clicking the CG button, make a selection from the menu while holding down the Shift key to display the Add Title dialog. Use this dialog to specify the mode (Overwrite/Splice-In) and track in which the CG clip is added. The settings configured here are saved separately for each project.

a Mode list box

A CG clip is created at the position specified in step 1. If In and Out points were set, the length of the CG clip is the length between the In and Out points. If only one of the In and Out points is set, or if the position was specified by moving the playline, a CG clip with the default length is created.

e Cancel button d OK button c Track list box b Length

The CG Editor starts automatically as soon as the clip is created in segment mode. a Mode list box Select Overwrite mode or Splice-In mode.

Creating CG Clips

403

b Length Specify the length of the CG clip. If an In point and Out point are configured, this specification is disabled. The value configured for the Default Duration of CG Clip setting in the Edit tab (page 610) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog is used as the default length during project creation. c Track list box Select the track to which to add the CG clip. If you want to add a new track to the timeline, click the Add Track button. CG clips from third-party plug-ins can only be placed on video tracks. d OK button Enables the settings made in the Add Title dialog and closes the dialog. e Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Add Title dialog and closes the dialog. Chapter 9 CG Clips

404

Creating CG Clips

CG Editor The CG Editor is a tool for composing video with text, shapes, and other graphic objects (CG clips). It allows you to specify the color, shape, and position of the objects. The main window appears when the CG Editor starts.

To start the CG Editor The CG Editor starts automatically the first time you create a CG clip on a CG track in segment mode. Subsequently, to start the CG Editor from the timeline, click the CG button on the timeline toolbar. To start the CG Editor from a Text CG object on the timeline, double-click the Text object. To modify a CG clip placed on a CG track in Composer mode, double click the CG clip to start the CG Editor.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

CG Editor

405

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b CG Object list box

Chapter 9 CG Clips

f Plates

g Command button area

a Menu button Displays the main menu of CG Editor. See “CG Editor Main Menu” (page 411) for more information about the main menu.

b CG Object list box Select the name of CG object you want to edit from the drop-down list. c Timecode Displays the timecode of the current position (POS) in the CG clip, and the total length (DUR) of the CG clip. d Floating toolbar Contains the tool buttons for selected CG object. Note

Each object has a different set of tool buttons. e Template tabs Contains the Object Template and Object Color Template tabs. Object Template: Displays template objects that can be applied to effects drawn in the CG Editor window. Object Color Template: Displays template colors that can be applied to effects drawn in the CG Editor window. f CG monitor Displays a video with graphic objects against a background. You can use the monitor to adjust the size,

406

CG Editor

c Timecode

d Floating toolbar

e Template tabs

h CG monitor

shape, and color of objects in the graphic composition while viewing the video. Note

When you open the CG Editor on a rendered slice, the rendered image is displayed as the background image, resulting in duplicate CG object display. If you change the parameters for the CG object, display the context menu for the background image, and execute Get Video Background to update the image before continuing editing. g Command button area Contains the command buttons of the CG Editor. See page 407 for more information about the command button area. h Plates Controls for the various graphic objects are arranged into plates. This area displays the plate for the current object, together with plates for effects that can be used by all objects. See page 412 for more information about plates.

CG Editor Command Button Area By default, the buttons in the CG Editor command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure.

Icon

Button function

Select

Puts the CG monitor into object selection mode.

Animation

Create Animation objects.

Art Word

Create Art Word objects.

Circle

Create Circle objects.

Clock

Create Clock objects.

Curve

Create Curve objects.

Image

Create Image objects.

Material

Create Material objects.

Polygon

Create Polygon objects.

Scroll Screen

Create Scroll Screen objects.

Subtitle

Create Subtitle objects and opens the Subtitle Editor.

Text

Create Text objects.

Set Keyframe

Creates a keyframe at the playline position on the track. If a keyframe already exists at the playline position, its content is updated. When the Add KF To All Parameters option buttons in the Keyframe tab of the CG Editor Properties dialog is on, keyframes are created for all parameters at the playline position that are in keyframe mode.

Delete Keyframe

Deletes the selected keyframe. This button is disabled when no keyframe is selected.

Step Backward

Moves the playline 1 frame back with each click.

Step Forward

Moves the playline 1 frame forward with each click.

Play/Stop

Plays from the current position to the end. To stop play, click this button again or click the Stop button. Plays from the current position to the end.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

Button name

CG Editor Command Button Area

407

Icon

Chapter 9 CG Clips

408

Button name

Button function

Previous Keyframe

Moves to the previous keyframe.

Next Keyframe

Moves to the next keyframe.

Step Backward 10 Frames

Moves the playline 10 frames back with each click.

Step Forward 10 Frames

Moves the playline 10 frames forward with each click.

Go to Start

Jumps to the clip start.

Go to End

Jumps to the clip end.

Motion

Puts the CG monitor into keyframe setting mode.

Restore to Original Picture

Cancels zoom adjustments and returns the frame to original size.

Move Canvas

Selects scroll mode. When this button is clicked, the shape of the mouse pointer changes, allowing you to scroll the frame by dragging on the CG monitor. Double clicking on the monitor returns the frame to the center of the CG monitor. Clicking the button again returns the mouse point to its original shape.

Zoom Adjustment

Selects zoom mode. When this button is clicked, the shape of the mouse pointer changes, allowing zoom in and out by dragging on the CG monitor (100 to 1/100 times). Right-clicking the zoom button displays a context menu with preset zoom settings. Double clicking on the monitor returns the display to physical size (SD: 720 x 576; HD: 1920 x 1080 frames). Clicking the button again returns the mouse point to its original shape.

Help

Displays help about the CG Editor.

Format Brush

Copies a format.

Color Palette

Opens the Color Selection dialog.

FG Monitor

Displays the foreground picture.

All Tracks Monitor

Display the output of all tracks on the CG monitor.

Safe action area

Displays a safe area (frame) and center mark (cross) on the CG monitor. Clicking the button again hides the safe area and center mark.

CG Editor Command Button Area

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button function

Rewind

Rewinds the track.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the track.

Stop

Stops play.

Play In to Out

Plays from the In point to the Out point. When clicked with the Alt key held down, starts loop play from the In point to the Out point.

Play Reverse

Plays in the reverse direction (from the current position to the start point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Play Forward

Plays in the forward direction (from the current position to the end point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Still

Pauses at the current position.

Go to In

Jumps to the In point, if it exists. Otherwise, if phantom marks are shown, jumps to the start phantom mark.

Go to Out

Jumps to the Out point, if it exists. Otherwise, if phantom marks are shown, jumps to the end phantom mark.

All Stop

Stops all operations.

Mark List

Opens the Marker List dialog.

Cut Keyframe

Cuts a keyframe and pastes it to the clipboard.

Copy Keyframe

Copies the parameter settings of the selected keyframe to the clipboard.

Paste Keyframe

Pastes a copied keyframe.

Revert Direction

Inverts the keyframe direction.

Go to Previous Plate

Moves to the previous plate.

Go to Next Plate

Moves to the next plate.

Go to Previous Parameter

Moves to the previous parameter.

Go to Next Parameter

Moves to the next parameter.

Restore All Default

Restores default values.

Properties

Displays the CG Editor Properties dialog.

CG Editor Command Button Area

Chapter 9 CG Clips

Button name

409

Icon

Button name

Button function

Undo

Undoes the last operation. (You can undo up to 64 operations, in order from the most recent.)

Redo

Redoes an undone operation. (You can redo up to 64 operations, in order from the most recent.)

Reset CG Object

Resets CG object parameters and keyframes to the same state as when they were first set.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

410

CG Editor Command Button Area

CG Editor Main Menu Click the Menu button in the CG Editor to display the CG Editor main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands.

Minimize Minimizes the CG Editor window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the CG Editor window.

Keyframe Mode Selects whether to enable keyframe mode. When keyframe mode is disabled, single keyframe mode is enabled. Reset Object Resets the object parameter to the same state as when it was first applied and deletes all keyframes.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

Object Color Template Opens the Object Color Template tab. The tab displays a range of template colors that can be applied to objects drawn in the CG Editor window. To apply a color, select the object in the CG Editor window and then double-click the desired template object color in the Object Color Template tab. System object color templates cannot be modified. Object Template Opens the Object Template tab. The tab displays a range of template objects that can be applied to objects drawn in the CG Editor window using the Art Word, Circle, Curve, Image, Material, Polygon, or Text objects. To apply a template to an object, select the object in the CG Editor window and then double-click the desired template object in the Object Template tab. System object templates cannot be modified. CG Editor Properties... Opens the CG Editor Properties dialog. Customize Opens a customization window. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570), which allows you to customize command button palettes by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the CG Editor. Maximize Maximizes the CG Editor window.

CG Editor Main Menu

411

Plates Controls for the various graphic objects are arranged into plates. This area displays the plate for the current object, together with plates for effects that can be used by all objects. There are two types of plates: object plates, which contain the controls for specific graphic objects, and common plates, which contain controls that can be used on all objects. The object plates and common plates are listed below.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

Object plates • Animation plate (see page 412) • Art Word plate (see page 412) • Circle plate (see page 412) • Clock plate (see page 413) • Curve plate (see page 413) • Image plate (see page 413) • Material plate (see page 413) • Polygon plate (see page 413) • Scroll Screen plate (see page 414) • Subtitle plate (see page 414) • Text plate (see page 414) Common plates • Font plate (see page 414) • Color Selection plate (see page 415) You can use the controls on the common plates to add effects to the CG clips that you create on the object plates. However, Font effects can be applied only to Art Word, Clock, Scroll Screen, Text, and Subtitle objects.

Using the controls on object and common plates The object and common plates contain controls that allow you to create CG clips by entering text, loading files, and selecting and adjusting parameters. The parameter selection and modification controls in the CG Editor operate in the same way as the controls in the parameter display section of the Effect Editor. For more information about the Effect Editor controls, see “1 Parameter display section” (page 314).

Animation Plate This plate allows you to load animation objects (sequential image files). To do so, enter a file name in the File Name box, or click the Browse button and select an animation file. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter.

412

Plates

Art Word Plate This plate allows you to created animated text objects. Enter the text in the Text box, and select the type of transformation in the Art Type list box. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter.

Circle Plate This plate allows you to create circle, fan, and arc objects. Select type of shape to create from the Circle Type list box. Use the Size and Angle parameters to adjust the appearance of the object. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter.

Clock Plate This plate allows you to create clock objects. Select the type of clock to create from the Clock Type list box, and specify the display format by selecting from the Format list box. Enter a starting time in the Timecode box (excluding the FTC clock type, which is acquired automatically). You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter.

Material Plate This plate allows you to apply local transformations to the surface quality. Select the surface quality you want from the Material Type list box. Select the area to which the surface quality is to be applied from the Shape list box. To change the background color, click the Color button to open the Color Selection dialog. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter. See “Color Selection Tab” (page 362) for more information.

This plate allows you to create curve objects. Select the type of curve to create from the Curve Type list box. Use the Line Width parameter to adjust the width of the line. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

Curve Plate

Polygon Plate

Image Plate This plate allows you to load user-created or standard image objects. To load a user-created image, enter a file name in File Name box. To load a standard image, such as a national flag or weather symbol, select it from the Picture list. You can adjust the size of the object with the Height and Width parameters. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter, relative to the point set in the Display Type parameter.

This plate allows you to create Polygon objects. Select the type of polygon from the Polygon Type list box. You can then use the Vertex Count controls to specify a different number of vertexes. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter.

Plates

413

Scroll Screen Plate This plate allows you create a scrolling text object. Enter the name of the scroll file in the Scroll File box, or click the Browse button to specify the file. Select the type of roll from the Roll Type list box. Check the [Line Scroll] check box if you want a line scroll. You can use the Fade In and Fade Out controls to specify fade times. To change the background color, click the color selection button to open the Color Selection dialog. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter. See “Color Selection Tab” (page 362) for more information. Notes

If you double click an area other than the text during text entry, you will enter object selection mode and text editing will be disabled. To return to text entry mode, double click the text area. Scroll Screen objects show a thin screen separator line that indicates the break point between screens.

Text Plate

Chapter 9 CG Clips

This plate is displayed when a text object is displayed and selected on the CG monitor. This plate allows you to apply the same color to all or part of a text object. Select the whole text or partial text parameter from the Apply Color list box. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter. To create a text object Press the CG button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor or press the Text button in the command button area of the CG Editor, to show the text creation tool.

Subtitle Plate This plate allows you to display text at specified intervals. To edit the text, double click the text in the CG monitor and open the Subtitle Editor. To set the interval at which the text displays, play back the subtitle object and click the REC button in Subtitle Editor according to the interval at which you want the text displayed. You can set the position of the object with the Position parameter.

414

Plates

Font Plate This plate allows you to specify the font size (Format controls) and font (Font Face controls) for Art Word, Clock, Scroll Screen, Text, and Subtitle objects. You can also specify underline types (Underline controls) and the direction and alignment of the text (Text Layout controls). The 10 most recently used font faces are displayed when the font face list box drop-down menu is displayed. The last used font face is displayed at the top of the list.

Color Selection Plate This plate allows you to apply to graphic objects. You can specify the face, shadow, border, and 3D border color separately. The Filter buttons open the CG Filter dialog so that you can register the current settings as a filter. The Anti-Flicker softens edges of color items when displayed at high zoom. Chapter 9 CG Clips

See “CG Filter Dialog” (page 416) for more information about the CG Filter dialog.

Plates

415

CG Filter Dialog The CG Filter dialog opens when you click the Filter button in the Color plate. It allows you to register the current settings of the color plate as a color filter. It also allows you to change the settings registered as a color filter and to delete unneeded filters. See “Color Selection Plate” (page 415) for more information about the Color plate.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

416

CG Filter Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts

b Add button

c Delete button

a Filter list

d Delete All button

e Up/Down buttons

h Parameter display Chapter 9 CG Clips

f OK button

g Cancel button

a Filter list Displays a list of the currently registered filters, with their numbers, names, and type.

h Parameter display Set parameters for the filter selected from the list box.

b Add button Adds the current Color plate settings as a filter. c Delete button Deletes the selected filter from the filter list. d Delete All button Deletes all filters from the filter list. e Up/Down buttons Select a filter to delete from the filter list. f OK button Saves the changes made to the filter list and closes the dialog. g Cancel button Discards changes made to the filter list and closes the dialog.

CG Filter Dialog

417

Scroll Speed Dialog The Scroll Speed dialog allows you to adjust the scroll speed of scrolling text objects on the CG monitor.

To open the Scroll Speed dialog Right click the CG monitor with a scrolling text object displayed.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

418

Scroll Speed Dialog

To start the Subtitle Editor

Subtitle Editor The Subtitle Editor is a tool for specifying the text for subtitles, importing and exporting subtitle files, and specifying the timecodes for subtitle CG objects.

a Main menu

b Toolbar

Do one of the following. • Click the CG button in Timeline Editor and select Subtitle from the drop-down menu. • Double-click exiting subtitle text in the CG monitor.

c Subtitles

Chapter 9 CG Clips

e Controls

f Record Mode

d Template

Subtitle Editor

419

CG Templates You can use CG clips that you create in the CG Editor as CG templates. XPRI NS also provides the following collections of system standard CG templates. • Billboard: Displays information in tabular formats. • News bar: Displays a heading and subheading, designed primarily for use in news stories. • Title bar: Displays a single title bar, for example for news events, place names, or personal names. CG templates are saved in the CG folder in FX Explorer.

Creating CG Templates CG templates are created on the active CG Video and K tracks of the timeline.

1

In Timeline Editor, create a CG clip on the timeline.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

The CG Editor starts automatically as soon as the clip is created in segment mode.

2

Add the desired effects in the CG Editor, then close the CG Editor window. The effects are displayed on the timeline.

3

Right-click the CG click on the timeline and select [Save as CG Template] from the context menu to save the CG template.

Copying CG Templates CG templates can also be created by copying and editing existing CG templates.

1

In Timeline Editor, click the CG button and select a CG template in the Tree View pane. The Timeline Editor automatically opens the template on a CG track in the timeline.

2

Open the CG Editor and add the desired effects, then close the CG Editor window. The effects are displayed on the timeline.

3

Right-click the CG clip on the timeline and select [Save as CG Template] from the context menu to save the CG template for future use.

Note

CG system default templates can copied only by dragging an existing CG template to a CG clip on the timeline, and then editing it in the CG Editor. The font face and color of

420

CG Templates

titles in system CG templates can be modified. The backgrounds are image files that cannot be modified. System CG templates can be edited and saved as new CG templates; they cannot be overwritten.

Trimming CG Templates If a CG template is trimmed on the timeline, the duration of objects may or may not change depending on the command selected. To change the duration or position of CG objects

1

Double click the CG template, and open CG Editor.

2

Right click the CG object, and select one of the following commands from the context menu. • Align In to PL • Align Out to PL • Auto Fill

Align In to PL Sets the starting point of the CG object to the playline position. The duration of the CG clip on the timeline does not change. (However, if the playline is positioned on the timeline before the CG object, the CG object does not move.) Align Out to PL Sets the ending point of the CG object to the playline position. The duration of the CG clip on the timeline does not change. (However, if the playline is positioned on the timeline after the CG object, the CG object does not move.) Auto Fill Changes the duration of CG objects according to the duration of the CG template after trimming. (The object duration changes regardless of whether the duration of the CG template was lengthened or shortened as a result of trimming.) Note

CG templates cannot be lengthened to the left of the CG clip head. If necessary, move the CG template to the left, and then lengthen it.

Simple CG Editor The Simple CG Editor is a tool for specifying the effect templates for the selected CG clip on the timeline.

To start the Simple CG Editor Do one of the following. • Right-click a CG clip on the timeline and select “Edit in Simple CG Editor” from the context menu. • Double-click a CG clip on the timeline while holding down the Ctrl key.

Chapter 9 CG Clips

Simple CG Editor

421

Names and Functions of Parts a Main menu b Effects

c Text area

d Position area e Edit button Chapter 9 CG Clips

f OK button g Cancel button

a Main menu Displays the main menu of Simple CG Editor. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Simple CG Editor. Close: Closes the Simple CG Editor. b Effects Selects and displays the effect templates applied to each position in a CG clip (In, Middle, Out).

d Position area Specifies the position of the CG effect template on the image. Drag the effect in the position area to specify the location.

Displays an icon for the current CG clip effect template or blank when no template has been specified. Click to open the Select FX Template dialog to select a CG effect template to apply. Only CG effect templates for the selected position are available for selection (for example, only In-effect CG templates can be applied as an In Effect).

e Edit button Opens the CG Editor.

Removes the CG effect template.

g Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Simple CG Editor and closes the dialog.

Displays the timecode for transitions between effect positions. Specifying the timecodes determines the duration of the effects. Click on the timecode to enter a value. When this is checked, the effect is applied to the text one character at a time. The text box specifies the speed at which the effect is applied to each character.

422

c Text area Specifies the text to be displayed using the selected CG effect template. This is available only for Text and Art Word objects.

Simple CG Editor

f OK button Enables the settings made in the Simple CG Editor and closes the dialog.

3

Click the Save button. Enter a clip name when the Create TitleMotion Clip dialog appears.

4

Click the New button.

Working With TitleMotion When Inscriber TitleMotion is installed on the computer, the following operations are available. • Creating new title clips with TitleMotion. • Starting up TitleMotion from a TitleMotion clip on an XPRI NS timeline, and editing the clip.

To create a new TitleMotion clip

1

Click the CG button in the command button area of Timeline Editor, and select [TitleMotion] from the context menu. TitleMotion starts. See step 2. Note

If you shift + click the CG button and select [TitleMotion] from the context menu, the Add CG dialog appears.

The created TitleMotion clip is placed on the timeline.

To edit an existing TitleMotion clip Chapter 9 CG Clips

Do one of the following. • Double click the TitleMotion clip that you want to edit on the timeline with the Ctrl key held down. • Right click the icon for the TitleMotion clip that you want to edit in the List View pane of Project Explorer, and select [Back to Creator] from the context menu. TitleMotion starts. Edit objects in TitleMotion and save them as you would when creating a new TitleMotion clip. Note

Select the editing mode, length, and track information, then click the OK button. TitleMotion starts.

2

Create an object in TitleMotion, and edit the colors and size.

Before you begin editing a TitleMotion clip on the timeline, be sure to disable the monitor button for the track that includes the TitleMotion clip. If you do not disable the monitor button, the image you are tying to edit will appear as the background image in TitleMotion. When using TitleMotion, the following limitations apply. • TitleMotion animation clips cannot be imported using the Import File Tool. These clips can only be added to the timeline by launching the Inscriber TitleMotion software directly from Timeline Editor. • TitleMotion still clips can be imported using the Import File Tool, but their duration follows the default Still Clip setting in the Logging Properties dialog. • If the duration of a TitleMotion still clip is modified in TitleMotion, the clip is updated on the timeline but the duration is left unchanged. • If the duration of a TitleMotion animation clip is modified in TitleMotion, the clip is not updated on the timeline. The clip must be placed on the timeline again from Project Explorer.

Working With TitleMotion

423

Audio Tools

Audio Input Tool Overview Adjusts the input level and equalizer during logging and digitizing of external audio input. If you adjust the input level or equalizer during logging and digitizing, the adjusted audio data is saved as an audio clip. The input level and equalizer parameters (settings) are also saved in the clip. The saved parameters can be used during redigitizing. Separate input fader levels and fader group settings are maintained for the Source Viewer Digitize Tool and the Logging Tool when switching between the two tools.

To Start the Audio Input Tool Do one of the following. To adjust the audio input level during logging/ digitizing Click the Audio Input Tool (see page 87) button on the Logging Tool toolbar. Or press Ctrl + U, or select [Audio Input Tool...] from the main menu of the Logging Tool. To adjust external audio input during linear-like editing Select [Audio Input Tool...] from the main menu of the digitize mode Source Viewer. To adjust the audio input during voice over recording Select [Audio Input Tool...] from the main menu of the Audio Voice Over Tool.

424

Audio Input Tool

Chapter

10

Names and Functions of Parts Note

When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system, some functions can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel (channel display section faders and EQ buttons).

1 Menu button

1 Channel display section

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

2 Scrollbar

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Audio Input Tool. See “Audio Input Tool Main Menu” (page 426) for more information about the main menu.

b Scrollbar Scrolls the channel display.

Note

When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system, some functions can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel. For information about functions assigned to the Audio Control Panel, see page 840.

1Channel display section Overview Displays the current input level and equalizer settings for each channel of external audio input. You can adjust the level and equalizer as required. Adjusted audio input is saved as audio data when the input is digitized.

Audio Input Tool

425

Names and Functions of Parts

1 Channel number display 2 EQ button

exist, the whole display below the channel number changes to the inactive color. f Meter Displays the peak audio level. On overflow, the overflow indicator lights. You can select the hold mode of the peak value and overflow indicator. For details, see page 428.

Audio Input Tool Main Menu 3 Fader

Click the Menu button in the Audio Input Tool to display the Audio Input Tool main menu. The main menu has the following commands and subcommands.

4 GP drop-down list 5 Wave pipe display

6 Meter

a Channel number display Displays channel numbers A1 to A8. Chapter 10 Audio Tools

b EQ (equalizer) button Turns the equalizer function on/off. Does not function when the Audio Input Tool is opened from the Logging Tool. c Fader Adjusts the external audio input level. For details, see page 428.

d GP (group) drop-down list Makes settings for fader grouping. For details, see page 428.

e Wave pipe display Displays the active color (green) when audio is audible, and the inactive color (red) when it is not audible. If audio is not audible on a channel, it is for one of the following reasons. • The audio level is set to minus infinity. • The channel does not exist (is not used by the Logging Tool or the digitize mode Source Viewer). The wave pipe below the control responsible for the problem displays the inactive color. For example, if the audio level is set to minus infinity, the wave pipe below the fader changes to the inactive color. If the channel does not

426

Audio Input Tool

Meter Reset Resets (turns off) the overflow indicators and peak hold display for all channels. Overflow Hold Selects the hold mode of the overflow indicators. Applied to all channels. Hold: Light until reset. Auto: Light for 1.5 seconds. Off: Do not hold the overflow indicators. Peak Hold Selects the peak hold mode. Applied to all channels. Hold: Hold the peak value until it changes. Auto: Hold the peak value for 1.5 seconds. Off: Do not hold the peak value. Reset All Parameters Resets all equalizer, audio level, and fader grouping parameters to the defaults. Reset Grouping Returns fader grouping settings to the defaults. Customize Opens a customize window. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Audio Input Tool. Minimize Minimizes the Audio Input Tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar.

Close Closes the Audio Input Tool window.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Audio Input Tool

427

Audio Input Tool Operations

Setting Fader Groupings

To reset all settings to the defaults You can resets all equalizer, audio level, and fader grouping parameters to the defaults by selecting [Reset All Parameters] from the main menu.

You can insert a fader into a group, or remove it from a group. To insert into a group, select one of GP1 to GP4 from the GP drop-down list. To remove from a group, select GP-. You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair.

Changing Audio Levels

Changing the Meter Display

You can change audio levels with the faders. Use one of the following methods.

You can select the peak hold mode and the hold mode of the overflow indicator.

The Audio Input Tool allows you to do the following.

Dragging the slider knob Drag the slider knob to change the level. Hold the Ctrl key down while dragging to make fine adjustments. Press the Esc key while dragging to return the knob to its original position. You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair. However, linking within group is given priority for grouped channels. Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Entering a number in the input box Double click the input box or select [Change Fader Level] from the context menu and enter a number. To confirm the entered number, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer to somewhere outside the input box and click. To restore the previous number, press Ctrl + Z before confirming the new number. To cancel the change, press the Esc key. You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair. However, linking within group is given priority for grouped channels.

Overflow indicator

Peak hold Select the peak hold mode by selecting [Peak Hold] from the main menu of the Audio Input Tool (see page 426). To reset peak hold, click the display. Selecting [Meter Reset] from the main menu turns off the peak hold display and the overflow indicators for all channels.

To reset the fader level to 0 dB Double click the slider knob or select [Reset to 0 dB] from the context menu. If you do this on the fader of a grouped channel, the other faders in the group slide by the amount of change (they are not reset to 0 dB). You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair. However, linking within group is given priority for grouped channels.

428

Audio Input Tool Operations

Overflow indicator Select the hold mode by selecting [Overflow Hold Mode] from the main menu of the Audio Input Tool. To turn the indicator off, click the indicator. Selecting [Meter Reset] from the main menu turns off the peak hold display and the overflow indicators for all channels.

Audio Equalizer Overview Equalizes audio clips on the timeline or external audio input during logging/digitizing. When a timeline clip is equalized, the equalizing parameters are stored in the clip, but the audio data itself is not changed. Equalizing parameters can be set for individual clips. They are saved in the clip at the playline, and can be recalled. If there is no clip at the playline, the value in the parameter input box disappears and adjustments are ignored. When external audio input is equalized, equalized audio data and the parameters are saved in a clip.

To Start the Audio Equalizer To equalize an audio clip on the timeline Select [Open EQ Window] from the context menu of the “EQ (equalizer) button” (see page 436) in the track display section of the Audio Mixer.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Audio Equalizer

429

Names and Functions of Parts Note

When the Media Bar Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system, some functions can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel (EQ button and equalizer operation section).

1 Menu button 2 EQ button 3 Track name (channel number)

5 PRESET buttons

4 Equalizer curve

6 Expanded display button

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

7 Equalizer operation section

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Audio Equalizer. See “Audio Equalizer Main Menu” (page 431) for more information about the main menu.

b EQ (equalizer) button Selects whether to apply the results of equalizing in audio data. (They are applied when the button is On, and not applied when the button is Off.) Equalizing can also be turned On and Off with the EQ item of the context menu. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding

430

Audio Equalizer

down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. c Track name (channel number) When started from the Audio Mixer: Displays the track name of the clip being set. When started from the Audio Input Tool: Displays the number of the channel being set. d Equalizer curve Displays a graph of the equalizer frequency response. The vertical axis is gain and the horizontal axis is the frequency. When the Expanded display button is set to

“Displayed”, this graph is always shown, regardless of whether the EQ button is On or Off. e PRESET buttons You can preset equalizer settings for each track in either of two buttons, for later loading. By default, neither of the buttons is active. To preset the current settings, select Save Settings from the context menu. This activates the button used for preset. To load the preset settings, select Load Settings from the context menu. If you change parameters after loading the settings, the button used for preset is deactivated and remains deactivated until pressed again. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. f Expanded display button Selects whether to display the equalizer curve (the default is “Not displayed”). This button becomes a

button

when the equalizer curve is displayed, and a

button

when it is not displayed. g Equalizer operation section Allows you to adjust LOW, MID, and HIGH gain and frequency. The MID section also allows Q adjustment.

Allows you to adjust LOW, MID, and HIGH gain and frequency. The MID section also allows Q adjustment. The setting ranges are as follows.

LOW Gain: -12 to +12 dB (default value: 0 dB) Frequency: 30 to 500 Hz (default value: 122 Hz)

MID Gain: -12 to +12 dB (default value: 0 dB) Frequency: 100 Hz to 12 kHz (default value: 1.095 kHz) Q: 0.4 to 10 (default 2.0)

HIGH Gain: -12 to +12 dB (default value: 0 dB) Frequency: 2 to 15 kHz (default value: 5.477 kHz)

MID adjustment section

GAIN adjustment section

HIGH adjustment section

Q adjustment section

FREQ (frequency) adjustment section

Use the following methods to make adjustments. Rotating the knobs The mark (the orange segment) shows the current position of the knob. When you click the knob, the current position of the knob changes to the clicked position. You can continue by dragging the knob in the desired direction. The knob position is determined by the angle between the center of the knob and the mouse pointer. You can make fine adjustments by dragging to a position away from the center of the knob. To cancel the adjustment and return the knob to its original position, press the Esc key while dragging. Double click the knob to return it to the default settings. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. Entering a number in the input box Double click the input box or select Change Gain, Change Frequency, or Change Q from the context menu and enter a number. To confirm the entered number, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer to somewhere outside the input box and click. To restore the previous number, press Ctrl + Z before confirming the new number. To cancel the change, press the Esc key. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Equalizer Operation Section of the Audio Equalizer

LOW adjustment section

Audio Equalizer Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Audio Equalizer to display the Audio Equalizer main menu. The main menu has the following commands and subcommands.

Audio Equalizer

431

Load Parameter... Opens the Open File dialog so that you can load equalizer parameters saved in a file. Select a file and click the OK button. Save Parameter... Opens the Save As dialog so that you can save an equalizer parameter file. Enter the file name and click the Save button. Customize Opens a customize window. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Audio Equalizer. Minimize Minimizes the Audio Equalizer window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Audio Equalizer window. Chapter 10 Audio Tools

432

Audio Equalizer

on the same track, or to the region between the In and Out points on the same track.

Audio Equalizer Operations

1

In Timeline Editor, move the playline to a clip on the track you wish to set.

The Audio Equalizer allows you to do the following.

2

Set the equalizer settings for a clip on the track using the Audio Equalizer.

Displaying the Equalizer Curve

3

If you wish to apply the equalizer settings to selected clips only, select the clips.

By default, equalizer curves are not displayed. Click the expanded display button to display the equalizer curve.

4

In the Audio Mixer, right-click the EQ button for the track whose settings you want to apply and select one of the following menu items.

Expanded display button

- Apply EQ to the selected clips in the same track - Apply EQ to the clips between In and Out points on the same track. Equalization is applied to the whole clips at both the In and Out points. - Apply EQ to all the clips in the same track. The equalizer settings and equalizer enable/disable state is copied from the source clip and applied to the other clips.

Making Equalizer Settings Note Chapter 10 Audio Tools

You can also use the Media Bar Control Panel to make equalizer settings. For information about functions assigned to the Media Bar Control Panel, see page 835.

Turning the EQ button on and off Before making equalizer settings, turn the EQ button on or off. EQ button on: Equalizing results are reflected in the audio data. EQ button off: Equalizing results are not reflected in the audio data. Equalizing can also be turned on and off with the [EQ] item of the context menu. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair.

Applying Equalizer Settings You can take the equalizer settings made to one clip and apply them to selected clips on the same track, to all clips

Audio Equalizer Operations

433

Audio Mixer Overview Adjusts the audio track on the timeline and the individual clips placed on those tracks. The following parameters can be set. • Track name • Track adjustment: track level, muting, solo function • Clip adjustment: clip level, equalizer, panning

To Start the Audio Mixer Click the Audio Mixer (page 184) button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor or press the focus hot key which starts the Audio Mixer. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.) For more information about focus hot keys, see “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832).

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

434

Audio Mixer

Names and Functions of Parts Note

When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system, some functions can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel (track display section controls and track faders).

1 Track display section

1 Menu button

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

4 Scroll memory buttons

3 Scrollbar 2 AUTOMATION ENABLE button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Audio Mixer. See “Audio Mixer Main Menu” (page 439) for more information about the main menu.

b AUTOMATION ENABLE button Enables or disables the audio rubber band function for all tracks. The button color changes as follows. Red: Enable Gray: Disable c Scrollbar Scrolls the track display.

d Scroll memory buttons Switch the track display in page units. In the default setting, eight tracks each are assigned to buttons 1 to 8.

1 Track display section

Track Display Section of the Audio Mixer Allows you to view the current settings of all tracks and change them if necessary. Also allows you to create new audio tracks. Changes made here are applied in the Timeline Editor. To display other tracks, use the scroll bar or the scroll memory buttons.

Audio Mixer

435

See “Scroll memory buttons” (page 435) for more information.

b Clip Level adjustment section Adjusts the audio level (-∞ +10 dB, default value 0) of the corresponding track of the clip at the playline.

Note

As group buses are rendered during audio rendering, the Audio Mixer meter display is disabled. Verify output levels in Audio Output Tool. Note

When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system and the Timeline Editor is active, some functions can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel. For information about functions assigned to the Audio Control Panel, see page 840.

Names and Functions of Parts

For details, see page 437.

c EQ (equalizer) button Turns the equalizer function on and off (default setting: off). The setting is stored and recalled for each clip. You can also toggle the equalizer setting by select EQ from the context menu. To adjust the equalizer, start the Audio Equalizer by selecting Open EQ Window from the context menu of the EQ button. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. When the FUNCTION button on the Audio Control Panel is set on, Function buttons 1 to 8 on the Audio Control Panel have the same effect.

1 Track name display 2 Clip Level adjustment section 3 EQ button 4 MUTING button

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

qs Audio meter

5 Track fader

e Track fader Adjusts the audio level of the track. 6 GP drop-down list

7 Wave pipe display

8 PAN slider

9 SOLO button 0 ROUTER button

qa READ/WRITE button

a Track name display Displays the track name. For details, page 437.

436

d MUTING button Turns muting of the track on and off (default setting: off). You can also toggle muting on and off by selecting MUTING from the context menu of the MUTING button. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. When the MUTING button on the Audio Control Panel is set on, Muting buttons 1 to 8 on the Audio Control Panel have the same effect.

Audio Mixer

For details, see page 438.

f GP (group) drop-down list Makes settings for track fader grouping. To insert a track into a group, select one of GP1 to GP8 from the drop-down list. To remove a track from a group, select GP-. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. g Wave pipe display Display the active color (green) when audio is audible, and the inactive color (red) when it is not audible. See “Wave Pipe Displays of the Audio Mixer” (page 438) for more information.

h PAN slider Displays the status of the pan at the playline position.

You can also perform the following operations on track names.

See “PAN Slider of the Audio Mixer” (page 439) for more information.

Renaming tracks

i SOLO button Turns the Solo function on and off (default setting: off). You can also toggle the Solo function on and off by selecting Solo from the context menu. To reset the Solo function and change the Solo mode, select Solo from the .You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. However, in Swing Solo mode, only one track can be turned on (the others are turned off automatically). When the MUTING button on the Audio Control Panel is set off, Muting buttons 1 to 8 on the Audio Control Panel have the same effect. Note

In Latch Solo mode, the Solo function can be turned on for up to 8 tracks. When it is on for 8 tracks, the SOLO buttons of other tracks are disabled. j ROUTER button Starts the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool. You can also start the tool by selecting Open Router Window from the context menu.

Note

Reading and writing cannot be turned on when the AUTOMATION ENABLE button is gray. l Audio meter Displays the peak audio level, according to the meter point set in advance. The number of segments varies according to the height of the window. On overflow, the overflow indicator lights. You can select the peak hold mode and the hold mode of the overflow indicator.

Creating a new audio track Select New Audio Track from the context menu. A new audio track with the name Audio n (n is a serial number) is created.

Clip Level Adjustment Section of the Audio Mixer Adjusts the audio level (-∞ to +10 dB, default value 0) of the track clip at the playline. The setting is stored and recalled for each clip. If there is no clip at the playline, the value in the input box disappears and adjustments are ignored. Use the following methods to adjust the gain.

Rotating the knob The white bar on the knob shows the current position of the knob. When you click the knob, the current position of the knob changes to the clicked position. You can continue by dragging the knob in the desired direction. The knob position is determined by the angle between the center of the knob and the mouse pointer. You can make fine adjustments by dragging to a position away from the center of the knob. To cancel the adjustment and return the knob to its original position, press the Esc key while dragging. Double click the knob to return it to the default settings. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

k READ/WRITE button Turn audio rubber band reading and writing on or off for all tracks.

Double click the track name, or select Rename Track from the context menu, and enter the new name. To confirm the newly entered name, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer to somewhere outside the input box and click. To restore the old name before confirming the new one, press Ctrl + Z. To cancel the renaming, press the Esc key.

For details, see page 439.

Using the control panel

Track Name Display of the Audio Mixer Displays the track name. If only part of the name is visible, you can hold the mouse pointer over the name for one second or longer to display the full name in a small pop-up window.

The following table shows the values which can be set with the knob. Setting range

Step

+10 to -10

0.5

-10 to -40

1

-40 to -50

2

-50 to -60

5

Audio Mixer

437

Setting range

Step

-60 dB or below

-68 dB, -76 dB, -84 dB, -92 dB, -∞ dB

To make finer settings, rotate the knob with the Ctrl key held down. Steps are 1/5 as large as when the Ctrl key is not held down. For example, if a value would normally change from +5 dB to +5.5 dB, the intermediate steps +5.1, +5.2, +5.3, +5.4 dB can be set by keeping the Ctrl key held down. However, in the range -60 dB or below, values are limited to those shown in the table. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair.

Entering a number in the input box

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Double click the input box or select Change Clip Level from the context menu of the clip level adjustment section and enter a number. To confirm the number, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer to somewhere outside the input box and click. To restore the previous number, press Ctrl + Z before confirming the new number. To cancel the change, press the Esc key. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair.

To Reset the Clip Level to 0 dB Double click the slider knob or select Reset to 0 dB from the context menu. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair.

Track Fader of the Audio Mixer Displays the current audio level of the track (default value 0). Use one of the following methods to change the audio level. If the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system, and the Timeline Editor is active, you can also use channel faders 1 to 8 on the Audio Control Panel.

Dragging the slider knob Drag the slider knob to change the audio level. Hold the Ctrl key down while dragging to make fine adjustments. Press the Esc key while dragging to return the knob to its original position.

438

Audio Mixer

You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. However, linking within the group is given priority for grouped tracks.

Entering a number in the input box Double click the input box or select Change Fader Level from the context menu and enter a number. To confirm the number, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer to somewhere outside the input box and click. To restore the previous number, press Ctrl + Z before confirming the new number. To cancel the change, press the Esc key. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. However, linking within the group is given priority for grouped tracks.

To Reset the Audio Level to 0 dB Double click the slider knob or select Reset to 0 dB from the context menu. If you do this on a fader of a grouped track, the other faders in the group slide by the amount of change (they are not set to 0 dB). You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. However, linking within the group is given priority for grouped tracks.

Wave Pipe Displays of the Audio Mixer Display the active color (green) when audio is audible, and the inactive color (red) when it is not audible. If audio is not audible on a track, it is for one of the following reasons. • The monitor button for the corresponding track on the timeline is off. • The muting function is on. • The fader is set to minus infinity. • Pan is set to L100% or R100%. • The Solo function is off for the track and on for another track. The wave pipe below the control responsible for the problem displays the inactive color. For example, if pan is set to R100%, the wave pipe of the L channel below the PAN button changes to the inactive color.

PAN Slider of the Audio Mixer

Audio Meter of the Audio Mixer

Displays the status of the pan at the playline position (L100% to Center to R100%, default value Center). The setting is stored and recalled for each clip. If there is no clip at the playline, the value in the input box disappears and adjustments are ignored. To change the pan status, use one of the following methods.

Dragging the pan slider knob Drag the pan slider knob to change the pan status. Hold the Ctrl key down while dragging to make fine adjustments. Press the Esc key while dragging to return the knob to its original position. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair.

Entering a number in the input box

To Reset to Center Double click the pan slider knob, or select Set to Center from the context menu. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair.

Meter selection buttons Select Pre-Fader or Post-Fader. The upper button selects Pre-Fader, and the lower button selects Post-Fader.

Peak hold Select the hold mode by selecting Meter > Peak Hold Mode from the . To turn the indicator off, click the meter display. Selecting Meter > Meter Reset in the main menu turns off the overflow indicators and peak hold display for all tracks.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Double click the input box or select Change Pan from the context menu and enter a number. To confirm the number, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer to somewhere outside the input box and click. To restore the previous number, press Ctrl + Z before confirming the new number. To cancel the change, press the Esc key. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair.

Displays the peak audio level, according to the meter point set in advance. The number of segments varies according to the height of the window. On overflow, the overflow indicator lights. You can select the hold mode of the peak value and overflow indicator.

Overflow indicator Select the hold mode by selecting Overflow Hold Mode from the . To turn the indicator off, click the indicator. Selecting Meter > Meter Reset in the main menu turns off the peak hold display and the overflow indicators for all tracks.

Audio Mixer Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Audio Mixer to display the Audio Mixer main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Solo Solo Mode: Selects the Solo mode. • Latch: The Solo function can be turned on for up to 8 tracks.

Audio Mixer

439

• Swing: The Solo function can be turned on for one track only. The Solo function for all other tracks is turned off. Solo Reset: Turns the Solo function off for all tracks. Meter Meter Reset: Resets (turns off) the overflow indicators and peak hold displays of all tracks. Meter Point: Selects the points displayed on the meter. • Pre-Fader • Post-Fader Overflow Hold: Selects the hold mode of the overflow indicators. Applied to all tracks when selected for any track. • Hold: Light until reset. • Auto: Light for 1.5 seconds. • Off: Do not hold the overflow indicators. Peak Hold: Selects the peak hold mode. Applied to all tracks when selected for any track. • Hold: Hold the peak value until it changes. • Auto: Hold the peak value for 1.5 seconds. • Off: Do not hold the peak value. Automation Read All: Turns the audio rubber band read function on and off. Write All: Turns the audio rubber band write function on and off. Note Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Reading and writing cannot be turned on when the AUTOMATION ENABLE button is disabled (gray). Reset Grouping Resets track fader grouping settings. This command has the following subcommands. All: Resets the grouping settings of all tracks. This item is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be selected if there are no grouping settings. GP1 to GP8: Reset the grouping settings of the selected group. These items are disabled (grayed out) and cannot be selected if there are no grouping settings. Customize Opens a customize window. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Audio Mixer.

440

Audio Mixer

Minimize Minimizes the Audio Mixer window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Audio Mixer window.

Audio Mixer Operations Using the Audio Rubber Band Function First, enable the audio rubber band function for all tracks by clicking the AUTOMATION ENABLE button to turn its color red. Then click the READ or WRITE buttons for the tracks where you want to use the audio rubber band function, turning them on. Or select [Automation Read] or [Automation Write] in the context menus of the buttons to turn them on. You can also enable the audio rubber band function by selecting [Read All] or [Write All] under [Automation] in the main menu. When the Write function is enabled for a track, variations in the track fader level during timeline play are saved as keyframes. When the Read function is enabled for a track, the saved keyframes are displayed as a rubber band on the timeline. (You can also turn the Write and Read functions on and off for the timeline.) When using stereo pairs, such as tracks 1 and 2 or tracks 3 and 4, you can operate on both tracks in the pair at once by holding down the Shift key as you operate on either track.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Turning the Track Solo Function On and Off To turn the Solo function on and off, click the SOLO button or select Solo from the context menu. To reset the Solo function and change the Solo mode, select [Solo] from the main menu of the Audio Mixer. You can operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the tracks. The results of the operation are applied to both tracks in the pair. However, in Swing Solo mode, only one track can be turned on (the others are turned off automatically). See “Audio Mixer Main Menu” (page 439) for more information about the main menu. Note

In Latch Solo mode, the Solo function can be turned on for up to 8 tracks. When it is on for 8 tracks, the SOLO buttons of other tracks are disabled.

Routing Tracks to the PGM Busses Use the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool (see page 447). To start the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool, click the ROUTER button or select [Open Router Window] from the context menu.

Audio Mixer Operations

441

Clip Audio Control Tool To Start the Clip Audio Control Tool Activate the Source Viewer and click the Audio Mixer (page 184) button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

442

Clip Audio Control Tool

Names and Functions of Parts Note

When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system, some functions can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel (channel display section controls and track faders).

1 Menu button

1 Channel display section

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

2 Scrollbar

3 [Level Control is valid in Monitoring Only] check box

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Clip Audio Control Tool.

1 Channel display section

See “Clip Audio Control Tool Main Menu” (page 445) for more information about the main menu.

Channel Display Section of the Clip Audio Control Tool

b Scrollbar Scrolls the channel display. c [Level Control is valid in Monitoring Only] check box Specifies whether the audio level setting applies only during monitoring. Checked: Level setting applies only during monitoring, not when clip is placed on timeline. Unchecked: Level setting applies also when clip is placed on timeline.

Allows you to view the current clip audio level settings and change them if necessary. Note

When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system and the Timeline Editor is active, some functions can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel. For information about functions assigned to the Audio Control Panel, see page 840.

Clip Audio Control Tool

443

1 Channel number display

2 Fader

3 GP drop-down list

4 Wave pipe display 5 MUTING button

6 SOLO button 7 Audio meter

• The Solo function is off for the channel (and on for another channel) pair. The wave pipe below the control responsible for the problem displays the inactive color. For example, if the audio level is set to minus infinity, the wave pipe below the fader changes to the inactive color. If the channel does not exist, the whole display below the channel number changes to the inactive color. e MUTING button Turns muting of the channel on and off (default setting: off). You can also toggle muting on and off by selecting [Muting] from the context menu of the MUTING button. You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair. When the MUTING button on the Audio Control Panel is set on, MUTING buttons 1 to 8 on the Audio Control Panel have the same effect. Note

a Channel number display Displays channel numbers A1 to A8. If a channel does not exist, this area changes to red. b Fader Adjusts the clip audio level for the corresponding channel. Chapter 10 Audio Tools

For details, see page 445.

c GP (group) drop-down list Makes settings for fader grouping. You can insert a fader into a group, or remove it from a group. To insert into a group, select one of GP1 to GP4 from the GP drop-down list. To remove from a group, select GP-. You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair. To reset all groupings, select [Reset Grouping] > [All] in the main menu. To reset the grouping for a specific group, select [Reset Grouping] and one of [GP1] to [GP4] in the main menu. d Wave pipe display Displays the active color (green) when audio is audible, and the inactive color (red) when it is not audible. If audio is not audible on a channel, it is for one of the following reasons. • The audio level is set to minus infinity. • The channel does not exist (is not used by the Logging Tool).

444

Clip Audio Control Tool

Muting settings made with this button are not reflected when the clip is placed on the timeline. f SOLO button Turns the Solo function on and off (default setting: off). You can also toggle the Solo function on and off by selecting [Solo] from the context menu. To reset the Solo function and change the Solo mode, select [Solo] from the Audio Mixer main menu. You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair. However, in Swing Solo mode, only one channel can be turned on (the others are turned off automatically). When the MUTING button on the Audio Control Panel is set off, MUTING buttons 1 to 8 on the Audio Control Panel have the same effect. Notes

• Solo settings made with this button are not reflected when the clip is placed on the timeline. • In Latch Solo mode, the Solo function can be turned on for up to 8 channels. When it is on for 8 channels, the SOLO buttons of other channels are disabled. g Audio meter Displays the peak audio level in 32 steps. On overflow, the overflow indicator lights. You can select the hold mode of the peak value and overflow indicator. For details, see page 446.

Clip Audio Control Tool Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Clip Audio Control Tool (see page 442) to display the Clip Audio Control Tool main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Solo Solo Mode: Selects the Solo mode. • Latch: The Solo function can be turned on for up to 12 channels. • Swing: The Solo function can be turned on for one channel only. The Solo function for all other channels is turned off. Solo Reset: Turns the Solo function off for all channels. Meter Meter Reset: Resets (turns off) the overflow indicators and peak hold displays of all channels. Overflow Hold: Selects the hold mode of the overflow indicators. Applied to all channels when selected for any channel. • Hold: Light until reset. • Auto: Light for 1.5 seconds. • Off: Do not hold the overflow indicators. Peak Hold: Selects the peak hold mode. Applied to all channels when selected for any channel. • Hold: Hold the peak value until it changes. • Auto: Hold the peak value for 1.5 seconds. • Off: Do not hold the peak value.

Customize Opens a customize window. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Clip Audio Control Tool. Minimize Minimizes the Clip Audio Control Tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar.

Fader of the Clip Audio Control Tool Displays the current fader level of the channel (default value: 0). Use one of the following methods to change the level. When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system and the Source Viewer is active, you can also use channel faders 1 to 8 on the Audio Control Panel.

Dragging the slide knob Drag the slide knob to change the level. Hold the Ctrl key down while dragging to make fine adjustments. Press the Esc key while dragging to return the knob to its original position. You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair. However, linking within group is given priority for grouped channels.

Entering a number in the input box Double click the input box or select Change Fader Level from the context menu and enter a number. To confirm the entered number, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer to somewhere outside the input box and click. To restore the previous number, press Ctrl + Z before confirming the new number. To cancel the change, press the Esc key. You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair. However, linking within group is given priority for grouped channels.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Reset Grouping Resets channel fader grouping settings. This command has the following subcommands. All: Resets the grouping settings of all tracks. This item is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be selected if there are no grouping settings. GP1 to GP4: Reset the grouping settings of the selected groups. These items are disabled (grayed out) and cannot be selected if there are no grouping settings.

Close Closes the Clip Audio Control Tool window.

To Reset the Fader Level to 0 dB Double click the slide knob, or select Reset to 0 dB from the context menu. If you do this on the fader of a grouped channel, the other faders in the group slide by the amount of change (they are not reset to 0 dB). You can operate on pairs of channels that may be handled as stereo, such as channels 1 and 2, or channels 3 and 4, by holding down the Shift key as you operate on one of the channels. The results of the operation are applied to both channels in the pair. However, linking within group is given priority for grouped channels.

Clip Audio Control Tool

445

Audio Meter of the Clip Audio Control Tool

Overflow indicator

Displays the peak audio level in 32 steps. On overflow, the overflow indicator lights. You can select the hold mode of the peak value and overflow indicator.

Peak hold Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Select the peak hold mode by selecting Peak Hold in the Clip Audio Control Tool main menu. To reset peak hold, click the display. Selecting Meter Reset in the main menu turns off the peak hold display and the overflow indicators for all channels.

Overflow indicator Select the hold mode by selecting Overflow Hold Mode from the Clip Audio Control Tool main menu. To turn the indicator off, click the indicator. Selecting Meter Reset in the main menu turns off the peak hold display and the overflow indicators for all channels.

446

Clip Audio Control Tool

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool Overview Routes audio tracks to PGM (program) busses 1 to 8.

To Start the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool Click the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool (page 184) button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor or click one of the ROUTER buttons in the track display section of the Audio Mixer. You can also press the focus hot key which starts the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.) For more information about focus hot keys, see “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832).

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool

447

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button

3 PGM bus names

2 Track names

4 PGM bus setting section

5 Scrollbars

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool. Chapter 10 Audio Tools

See “Audio Group Bus Routing Tool Main Menu” (page 448) for more information about the main menu.

b Track names Displays names set in the timeline audio track. Audio tracks which do not exist on the timeline are not displayed. If you open the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool by clicking a ROUTER button in the Audio Mixer (see page 434), the name of the track to which the clicked ROUTER button belongs is highlighted. c PGM (program) bus names Displays names set in the PGM bus names section of the Audio Group Bus Fader (see page 450).

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool to display the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool main menu. The main menu has the following commands and sub commands. Clear All PGM Bus Clears all PGM bus settings. Set To Stereo All tracks are sent to PGM1 and PGM 2 only. All other busses are disabled.

d PGM (program) bus setting section Makes settings for the PGM busses. To assign a track to a bus, click the bus check box so that a check mark appears (multiple busses can be selected). By default, tracks 1 to 8 are assigned in order to PGM1 to PGM8. Tracks 9 and following are assigned in order in the same way.

Customize Opens a customize window. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel.

e Scrollbars Scroll the PGM bus setting section.

Help... Displays help about the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool. Minimize Minimizes the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar.

448

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool

Close Closes the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool window.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool

449

Audio Group Bus Fader Overview Displays and adjusts the fader level of audio data sent to the PGM (program) group bus.

To Start the Audio Group Bus Fader Click the Audio Group Bus Fader (page 184) button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.) For more information about focus hot keys, see “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832).

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

450

Audio Group Bus Fader

Names and Functions of Parts Note

When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system, one of the PGM bus faders can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel.

For information about functions assigned to the Audio Control Panel, see page 840.

1 PGM bus fader operation section

1 Menu button

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

2 Scrollbar

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Audio Group Bus Fader. See “Audio Group Bus Fader Main Menu” (page 453) for more information about the main menu.

b Scrollbar Scrolls the PGM bus faders.

1 PGM (program) bus fader operation section Overview Displays the current PGM bus audio levels, and allows you to change them.

Audio Group Bus Fader

451

Names and Functions of Parts

1 PGM bus number

PGM Bus Name of the Audio Group Bus Fader

3 Wave pipe display

Displays the PGM bus name, which you can change if necessary. If only part of the name is visible, you can hold the mouse pointer over the name for 1 second or longer to display the full name in small pop-up window. The default name is “PGMn” (n is a PGM bus number). The upper side is the L name and the lower side is the R name (different names can be assigned to L and R).

4 PGM bus faders

Changing the PGM Bus Name

2 PGM bus names

Double click the name, or select Rename PGM Bus from the context menu. To confirm a name after entering one, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer to somewhere outside the input box and click. To restore the original name before confirming the new one, press Ctrl + Z. To cancel the change, press the Esc key. 5 GP drop-down list

6 Meter

a PGM bus number Displays the PGM bus number (PGM1/2, PGM3/4, PGM5/6, PGM7/8). Chapter 10 Audio Tools

b PGM (program) bus names Displays the PGM bus names, which you can change if necessary. For details, see page 452.

c Wave pipe display Displays the active color (green) when audio is audible, and the inactive color (red) when it is not audible (when there is no audio track assigned to the bus). d PGM (program) bus faders Adjusts the audio levels of the PGM bus.

PGM Bus Fader of the Audio Group Bus Fader Displays the current fader level of the PGM bus (default value: 0). Use one of the following methods to change the fader level. When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system and the Timeline Editor is active, the MASTER fader has the same effect. Dragging the slider knob Drag the slider knob to change the level. Hold the Ctrl key down while dragging to make fine adjustments. Press the Esc key while dragging to return the knob to its original position. For ungrouped faders, the L and R fader levels are adjusted at the same time. To adjust the L and R fader levels independently, hold the Shift key down while dragging slider knob. For grouped faders, adjusting the level of any fader adjusts the other faders by the same amount. In this case, the L and R fader levels can always be adjusted independently.

For details, see page 452.

e GP (group) drop-down list Makes settings for fader grouping. To insert into a group, select one of GP1 to GP4 from the drop-down list. To remove from a group, select GP-. f Meter Displays the peak audio level. On overflow, the overflow indicator lights. You can select the peak hold mode and the hold mode of the overflow indicator. For details, see page 453.

452

Audio Group Bus Fader

Entering a number in the input box The input box is enabled when you double click it or select Change Fader Level from the context menu. To confirm the entered number, press the Enter key or move the mouse pointer to somewhere outside the input box and click. To restore the previous number, press Ctrl + Z before confirming the new number. To cancel the change, press the Esc key.

To Reset the Fader Level to 0 dB Double click the slider knob, or select Reset to 0 dB from the context menu.

The reset is applied independently to the L and R faders. If you do this on a grouped fader, the other faders in the group slide by the amount of change (they are not reset to 0 dB).

Meter of the Audio Group Bus Fader

Meter Reset Resets (turns off) the overflow indicators and peak hold display for all busses. Overflow Hold Selects the hold mode of the overflow indicators. Applied to all busses when selected for any bus. Hold: Light until reset. Auto: Light for 1.5 seconds. Off: Do not hold the overflow indicators. Peak Hold Selects the peak hold mode. Applied to all busses when selected for any bus. Hold: Hold the peak value until it changes. Auto: Hold the peak value for 1.5 seconds. Off: Do not hold the peak value. Reset Grouping Resets group bus fader grouping settings. This command has the following subcommands. All: Resets the grouping settings of all tracks. This item is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be selected if there are no grouping settings. GP1 to GP4: Resets the grouping settings of the selected groups. This item is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be selected if there are no grouping settings.

Peak hold Select the peak hold mode by selecting Peak Hold in the . To reset peak hold, click the display. Selecting Meter Reset in the main menu turns off the peak hold display and the overflow indicators for all busses. Overflow indicators Select the hold mode by selecting Overflow Hold Mode from the . To turn the indicator off, click the indicator. Selecting Meter in the main menu turns off the peak hold display and the overflow indicators for all busses.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Displays the peak audio level. On overflow, the overflow indicator lights. You can select the hold mode of the peak value and overflow indicator.

Customize Opens a customize window. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Audio Group Bus Fader. Minimize Minimizes the Audio Group Bus Fader window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Audio Group Bus Fader window.

Audio Group Bus Fader Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Audio Group Bus Fader to display the Audio Group Bus Fader main menu. The main menu has the following commands and sub commands.

Audio Group Bus Fader

453

Audio Output Tool

1 Menu button 2 Tabs

Overview This is a tool for settings on audio monitoring and checking the output level. Make settings for audio monitor in the and check the output level in the . Note

The Audio Output Tool meter display is disabled when digitizing with Logging Tool or digitize mode of Source Viewer. Verify levels in Audio Input Tool or with the audio meter of the VTR.

To Start the Audio Output Tool Click the Audio Output Tool button on the taskbar or press the focus hot key which starts the Audio Output Tool. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.)

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

For more information about focus hot keys, see “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832).

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Audio Output Tool.

Names and Functions of Parts

See “Audio Output Tool Main Menu” (page 456) for more information about the main menu.

Note

When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system, functions in the Monitor tab (see page 454) can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel.

b Tabs Switch between the Monitor tab (see page 454) and the Output Meter tab (see page 455).

Monitor tab Overview Makes settings for audio monitoring. Audio monitoring sources are switched automatically according to the active tool. Note

When the Audio Control Panel is connected to the XPRI NS system, some functions can be controlled from the Audio Control Panel. For information about functions assigned to the Audio Control Panel, see page 840.

Names and Functions of Parts Click on the names of parts to display explanations of the parts.

454

Audio Output Tool

1 Monitor Bank list box 2 Monitor channel section

The MONO button on the Audio Control Panel has the same effect. d [Apply to all] check box Check to apply the audio output settings to all windows. Leave unchecked to apply different audio output settings in each window.

Output Meter tab Overview Displays the output levels of monitor output, PGM output, and clip output. (The levels cannot be adjusted in this tab.)

Names and Functions of Parts

1 Overflow indicators

3 [Apply to all] check box 3 [MONO] check box

b Monitor channel section Check the check boxes to specify the monitor source channels to assign to the L/R monitor output. Check the check boxes to specify the monitor source channels to assign to the L/R monitor output. Click again to cancel the selection. Multiple monitor channels can be selected. In this case, the output of the selected channels is mixed. In the default setting, odd-numbered channels are assigned to L and even-numbered channels are assigned to R. This setting is saved as audio data for each monitor source bank. Monitor channel selection buttons on the Audio Control Panel have the same effect. c [MONO (monaural)] check box Check to specify monaural output or clear to specify stereo output. (The default setting is stereo.) If you select monaural, L/R signals are mixed for output from both L and R.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

a Monitor Bank list box When there are eight channels (tracks) in the monitor source, select whether to monitor CH1 to 4 (A1 to 4) or CH5 to 8 (A5 to 8) from the drop-down list. (The default setting is CH1 to 4 (A1 to 4).) If no monitor source exists, nothing is displayed in the list. The BANK button on the Audio Control Panel has the same effect.

2 Audio meters

a Overflow indicators Select the hold mode by selecting Meter > Overflow Hold Mode from the . To turn the indicator off, click the indicator. Selecting Meter>Meter Reset in the main menu turns off the peak hold display and the overflow indicators for all channels. b Audio meters Display the peak audio level. On overflow, the overflow indicators light. You can select the peak hold mode and the hold mode of the overflow indicator.

Audio Output Tool

455

Peak hold Select the peak hold mode by selecting Meter>Peak Hold in the . To reset peak hold, click the display. Selecting Meter>Meter Reset in the main menu turns off the peak hold display and the overflow indicators for all channels.

Audio Output Tool Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Audio Output Tool to display the Audio Output Tool main menu. The main menu has the following commands and sub commands. Meter Meter Reset: Resets (turns off) the overflow indicators and peak hold display for all channels. Overflow Hold: Selects the hold mode of the overflow indicators. Applied to all channels when selected for any channel. • Hold: Light until reset. • Auto: Light for 1.5 seconds. • Off: Do not hold the overflow indicators. Peak Hold: Selects the peak hold mode. Applied to all channels when selected for any channel. • Hold: Hold the peak value until it changes. • Auto: Hold the peak value for 1.5 seconds. • Off: Do not hold the peak value.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Customize Opens a customize window. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Audio Output Tool. Minimize Minimizes the Audio Output Tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Audio Output Tool window.

456

Audio Output Tool

Audio Voice Over Tool Overview The Audio Voice Over Tool allows you to record narration keyed to timeline playback and to place it as a voice over clip. When the [Auto Dissolve] check box (see page 616) in the Voice Over tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog is on, dissolves are added automatically to all voice over clips that you create (duration 1 frame, alignment Start at Cut). Notes

• The dissolves are added only when there are sufficient margins around the voice over clip. Depending on the state of the margins, a dissolve may be added only to the In point side or only to the Out point side. • Audio monitoring is not supported outside of digitizing operations. If you need to monitor audio, use the Windows audio mixer. If you are using an external audio device, you can also monitor audio by using the device’s direct monitoring function.

To Start the Audio Voice Over Tool Chapter 10 Audio Tools

Click the Voice Over Tool (page 184) button in the command button area of the Timeline Editor or press the focus hot key which starts the Audio Voice Over Tool. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.) For more information about focus hot keys, see “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832).

The Audio Voice Over Tool has a simple mode and full mode, and will start up in the mode that was last used. You can switch between simple mode and full mode by clicking the Full Display button.

Audio Voice Over Tool

457

Names and Functions of Parts The following is the display in full mode.

a Menu button f Timecode

b Clip Name c Stereo/Mono selection

g Review button

buttons

h Record button

d [Monitor Timeline]

i Preview button

check box e Take setting section

j Full Display button k Source selection section l Track selection section

o Bin Name list box n Audio Capacity list box m Device list box Chapter 10 Audio Tools

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Audio Voice Over Tool. See “Audio Voice Over Tool Main Menu” (page 459) for more information about the main menu.

b Clip Name Specifies the name of the voice over clip to create. Voice Over clips are created with default name VO_Sequence name_nnn, where nnn (001, 002, ...) increments for each Voice Over clip in the sequence. c Stereo/Mono selection buttons When there are two input channels, select whether to use both of the channels (Stereo) or only one of the channels (Mono). d [Monitor TimeLine] check box Selects the tracks to monitor during preview, record, and review. When this is checked, all audio tracks will be selected for monitoring. When this is not checked, only the track used for Voice Over will be selected for monitoring.

458

Audio Voice Over Tool

Note

You cannot monitor audio in tracks for which audio has been disabled in Timeline Editor. e Take setting section Contains controls related to takes. Up to four takes can be recorded in 1 clip. You can delete unneeded takes. No. list: Selects the number (1 to 4) of a take to execute, preview, or delete from a drop down list. Digitized display: Displays “Yes” when the take specified in the No. list contains digitized media. Displays “No” when it does not contain digitized media. Comment box: Enter a comment about the take specified in the No. list. Delete button: Deletes the take specified in the No. list. Takes can be deleted only when “Yes” appears in the Digitized display. f Timecode Displays the playline timecode during recording. The timecode is not displayed until recording starts. • Green: During preparation and post-recording preview. • Yellow: During preroll and postroll. • Red: During recording.

g Review button Starts a review. When clicked during a review, the review stops. This button is only enabled when a review is possible. h Record button Executes one take of the voice over, creates a voice over clip, and saves it in the storage location. At the same time, it records the clip’s audio data to disk. If clicked during execution, this button stops the take and saves the data recorded in the take up to that point. i Preview button Starts a preview. When clicked during a preview, stops the preview.

Audio Voice Over Tool Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Audio Voice Over Tool (see page 457) to display the Audio Voice Over Tool main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Source Selects the input source channel (A1 and/or A2). • A1 • A2 Audio Input Tool... Starts the Audio Input Tool.

j Full Display button Switches between simple mode and full mode.

Prompter Starts the Prompter to display the script for Voice Over recording.

k Source selection section Allows you to select the source channels. Select by clicking one or both of the A1 and A2 buttons. Only the selected source channels are monitored and are the targets of the voice over.

Timeline Editor Properties... Displays the Voice Over tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Note

The selection status will change in accordance with the Stereo/Mono button selection.

m Device list box Always displays Voice Over as the voice over input source. n Audio Capacity list box Displays the digitize vault and its free capacity. o Bin Name list box Displays the current destination bin. The drop-down list displays the names of up to 10 bins that have been selected in the Bin Selection dialog. You can select another destination bin for newly created clips from the drop-down list. You can also select [Bin Selection...] in the drop-down list to open the Bin Selection dialog and select a destination bin which is not displayed in the dropdown list. When bin names are changed in Project Explorer, the bin names shown here are updated automatically.

Customize Opens a customization window. This command has the following subcommands. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

l Track selection section Allows you to select the tracks on which to place the audio captured with the voice over function (voice over tracks). Select the tracks from the drop-down lists.

Bin Selection... Opens the Bin Selection dialog so that you can select a bin to store voice over clips from the Tree View pane. Click OK in the window to confirm the selection or Cancel to cancel it.

Help... Displays help about the Audio Voice Over Tool. Minimize Minimizes the Audio Voice Over Tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Audio Voice Over Tool window.

Audio Voice Over Tool

459

3

Audio Voice Over Tool Operations

Select the tracks on which to place the captured audio by selecting from the track selection drop-down lists. Note

Check to make sure that the selected tracks are not locked in the Timeline Editor. The main operations that you will do with the Audio Voice Over Tool are creating voice over takes, previewing, creating voice over clips, and placing the voice over clips on the timeline.

Preparing for Voice Over Operations on the Timeline

1

Set a Mark In point and a Mark Out point at the start point and the end point of the voice over. Note

There does not necessarily have to be Mark In and Mark Out points. If no Mark Out point is set, the voice over end point is the timeline end point.

2

Select the tracks to monitor during voice over creation with the monitor buttons. Note

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

If there are more than eight tracks on the timeline with monitor buttons on, the first eight from the top are selected as the monitor targets.

To assign names to voice over clips In the Clip Name input box, enter a name for the voice over clip to be created.

To specify save destinations for voice over clips and audio data Select a bin to save clips in the Bin Selection dialog. To open the Bin Selection dialog, press the Ctrl + B keys or select [Bin Selection...] from the main menu or [Bin Name] list box. Alternatively, if the bin you want appears in the Bin Name list box, you can select it from the Bin Name list box. To specify the save destination of audio data, select a vault from the Audio Capacity list box. The free capacity of the selected vault is displayed.

Executing Voice Over Operations One set of voice over operations is called a “take”. You can repeat voice over operations and save up to four of the best takes in the voice over clip. You can also overwrite takes, and delete unneeded takes.

Starting the Audio Voice Over Tool

1

Start the Audio Voice Over Tool by clicking the Audio Voice Over Tool button, or by selecting [Tools] >[Audio Voice Over Tool...] from the main menu of the Timeline Editor.

Select [Timeline Editor Properties...] from the main menu or press Ctrl + 1 to open the Timeline Editor Properties dialog, and select the input audio monitor method in the Voice Over tab (page 616).

2

In the Take section, select the number (1 to 4) of the take you are about to make from the No. list. If necessary, enter a comment about the take in the Comment box.

Preparing for Voice Over Operations in the Audio Voice Over Tool

“Yes” appears in the Digitized display if the take selected in the No. list contains material that has already been digitized. “No” appears if it does not contain material that has already been digitized.

Carry out the following operations.

To select input sources

1

2

460

Select Device Properties... in the Device list box to open the Voice Over Properties dialog, and check the audio input source for the Voice Over device in the Configuration tab. Select source channels by clicking the A1 and/or A2 button in the Source selection section or selecting A1 and/or A2 under Source in the main menu.

Audio Voice Over Tool Operations

3

To execute a preview before digitizing, select an undigitized take and click the Preview button. To skip the preview, proceed to step 4. To set preroll and postroll times Select [Timeline Editor Properties...] from the main menu or press Ctrl + 1 to open the Timeline Editor Properties dialog, and make the settings in the Voice Over tab.

To stop a preview Click the Preview button again.

To record a take with Prompter You can import and read a script when recording a voice over clip by using the Prompter tool.

Note

If no Mark In point is set, one is set at the position where the playline is located when Preview or the Record button is clicked.

4

Click the Record button. One take of the voice over is executed, and a voice over clip is created on the specified tracks in the timeline. The clip is saved in the specified bin and the audio data is saved on the specified drive.

1

Select [Prompter] from the main menu to open the Prompter window.

2

Select [Open] from the main menu or double-click the empty window to open a text-format script file. The script loads into the Prompter window.

3

The script scrolls in the Prompter window. You can pause and resume during recording by clicking the Play/Pause button. You can adjust the scrolling speed by dragging the Speed Adjust bar. You can set the starting line in the script by rightclicking in the script and selecting [Set As Startup Line] from the context menu.

To stop execution of a take Click the Record button again.

5

To check a digitized take, select the take to check and click the Preview button. To change the take to be used after exiting the Audio Voice Over Tool Select a voice over clip in Project Explorer. Select [Extra Properties] from the context menu of the clip, and then choose [Select Voice Over Take...].

To set essence marks while executing voice over operations

To overwrite a take Takes can be overwritten only when all of the following conditions are met. • The source In and Out points match the In and Out points of the original take. (In open-ended takes, the In points match.) • The input source is the same. • The voice over track is the same.

4

Click the Record button again to stop recording.

To delete unneeded takes Select the take to delete from the No. list and click the Delete button. However, the only takes which can be deleted are those with “Yes” in the Digitized display.

Auto Dissolve of Voice Over Clips When the [Auto Dissolve] check box in the Voice Over tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog is on, dissolves are added automatically to all voice over clips that you create (duration 1 frame, alignment Start at Cut).

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

By assigning the Set Essence Mark function to a keyboard key or control panel button beforehand, you can press the key or button to set essence marks while executing voice operations. You can assign the Set Essence Mark function by using the [Customize] in the main menu.

Click the Record button in the Audio Voice Over Tool to start recording.

Note

The dissolves are added only when there are sufficient margins around the voice over clip. Depending on the state of the margins, a dissolve may be added only to the In point side or only to the Out point side.

After changing In or Out points or changing the input source or voice over tracks, you can search for takes that meet the new conditions and overwrite them as required. Note

In open-ended takes, the length of the voice over clip is determined by the length of the first take. The length of this original voice over clip cannot be changed even if you overwrite the first take with a longer take. To change the length of the voice over clip, trim it on the timeline.

Audio Voice Over Tool Operations

461

Prompter The Prompter displays a script that can be used when recording a Voice Over clip or displayed for reference purposes while editing on the timeline.

To Start the Prompter Do one of the following. • Select [Prompter] from the main menu of the Audio Voice Over Tool. You can also select the [Auto open Prompter when start Voice Over Tool] setting in the Timeline Editor Properties to start Prompter automatically when the Audio Voice Over Tool opens. • Select [Tools] > [Prompter] from the main menu of the Timeline Editor.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

462

Prompter

Names and Functions of Parts The following is the display in full mode.

a Menu button

e Refresh button

f Speed Adjust

d Go to End button c Play button b Go to Start button

See “Prompter Main Menu” (page 463) for more information about the main menu.

b Go to Start button Moves the display to the start line of the script. c Play button Pauses and resumes recording of the Voice Over clip. You can also pause and resume by double-clicking in the script window. d Go to End button Moves the display to the last line of the script. e Refresh button Retrieves the script from Playout Server, overwriting the script currently displayed in the Prompter window (System NLE only). f Speed Adjust Adjusts the scrolling speed of the script in the Prompter window. The speed is measured in words per second (wps), in increments set by the Speed Offset setting in the Prompter Properties dialog.

Prompter Main Menu Click the Menu button in the Prompter window to display the Prompter main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Prompter tool.

Open, Save As, Save Same functions as Notepad editor. Properties Opens the Prompter Properties dialog. Mode: Enables scrolling of the script or stationary display. Text Format: Sets the font size and line spacing measured in points. Speed Offset: Sets the speed adjustment increment unit of the Speed Adjust bar. Normal Color: Sets the color of text in the script. Highlight Color: Sets the color of highlighted text in the script. Help... Displays help about the Prompter window. Minimize Minimizes the Prompter window and displays it as a button on the taskbar.

Prompter

463

Close Closes the Prompter window.

Chapter 10 Audio Tools

464

Prompter

Dolby E Functions

Overview (Dolby E) Dolby E is multichannel audio coding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that codes multichannel audio material into two channels. XPRI NS allows you to use the coded two-channel audio stream data to perform the following processes. • Importing master video tapes that contain Dolby E stream channels from a VTR (Logging). • Cut editing by frame. • Exporting sequences that contain Dolby E stream tracks to a VTR (Record to VTR). XPRI NS does include encode/decode functions for Dolby E. However, the following processes are not supported. • Monitoring Dolby E stream tracks and channels while playing back timelines or clips • Level adjustment, application of effects, and other signal processing. • Coding audio tracks into Dolby E. • Inclusion of Dolby E channels in composite clips. To perform monitoring, a device such as the DP572 Dolby E Decoder (Dolby Laboratories, Inc.) is required.

XPRI NS Functions Supporting Dolby E This section provides an overview of the functions in XPRI NS that support Dolby E. The tools that support Dolby E are as follows. • Logging Tool • Import File Tool • Export dialog/Export MXF dialog • Project Explorer • Timeline Editor • Source Viewer • Audio Group Bus Routing Tool • Audio Group Bus Fader

• • • • • •

Chapter

11

Audio Output Tool Record to VTR tool XDCAM Explorer XDCAM Import Tool XDCAM Export Tool Render to Bin

Logging Tool The Logging Tool allows you to import Dolby E stream data from SDI inputs. When importing, you can use the Logging Properties dialog to select whether to automatically detect Dolby E stream channels based on channel status (auto detection), or specify the Dolby E stream channels yourself (manual specification).

Import File Tool You can import MXF files which contain Dolby E.

Export dialog/Export MXF dialog You can export MXF files which contain Dolby E.

Project Explorer If a selected clip includes audio stream tracks, track channel icons appear in the Metadata Window of Project Explorer. You can display more information on audio stream tracks by opening the Clip Properties dialog. When performing Picture Icon Play from Project Explorer, you can also output Dolby E streams from SDI output channels.

Timeline Editor You can place clips that include Dolby E stream channels on a sequence and perform cut editing. When you perform playback from the Master Viewer or Source Viewer, for example, the Dolby E streams are output from the SDI output channels.

Overview (Dolby E)

465

Source Viewer You can use the digitize mode Source Viewer to digitize VTR materials that include Dolby E stream channels and create clips.

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool Dolby E stream outputs can be assigned to PGM outputs.

Audio Group Bus Fader PGM output meters to which Dolby E streams are assigned appear in a different color. Levels cannot be adjusted.

Audio Output Tool Channel and PGM output meters to which Dolby E streams are assigned appear in a different color.

Record to VTR tool Clips and sequences that include channels and PGM outputs for which Dolby E streams are assigned can be recorded to a VTR.

XDCAM Explorer You can view and manage MXF files and PD-EDL files which contain Dolby E.

XDCAM Import Tool You can import MXF files and PD-EDL files which contain Dolby E from an XDCAM device.

XDCAM Export Tool Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

466

You can export MXF files and PD-EDL files which contain Dolby E to an XDCAM device.

Render to Bin You can render clips and sequences that include channels and PGM outputs for which Dolby E streams are assigned, and create Render to Bin clips that include Dolby E stream channels.

Overview (Dolby E)

Logging Tool The Logging Tool allows you to import Dolby E stream data from SDI inputs. When importing, you can use the Logging Properties dialog to select whether to automatically detect Dolby E stream channels based on channel status (auto detection), or specify the Dolby E stream channels yourself (manual specification).

Dolby E stream channel display in Logging Tool When Dolby E stream data is imported with Logging Tool, a rectangular border indicates the pair of Dolby E stream channels in the source track buttons.

Dolby E stream channels

You can turn tracks on and off in the same way as video and audio channels by clicking the source track buttons. As Dolby E stream channels are composed of two channels, the channels will turn on or off as a pair when clicked. When specifying the Dolby E stream channels manually, you can use the context menu to switch between Dolby E stream channels and audio channels.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

To switch between Dolby E stream channels and audio channels Right-click the button for the channel you want to switch to display the context menu, and click [Stream Use]. The channel switches between Dolby E stream channels and audio channels with each click. Depending on the audio channels that are used, the Dolby E stream channels are named as follows. A1 and A2: S1 A3 and A4: S2 A5 and A6: S3 A7 and A8: S4 Note

Dolby E stream channels are not displayed in the Audio Input Tool.

Logging Tool

467

Logging Properties Dialog The import mode for Dolby E stream is set from the Logging Properties dialog. To open the Logging Properties dialog, select [Logging Properties] from the Logging Tool main menu. Select the Advanced tab in the Logging Properties dialog, and set the import mode under Audio Stream Detection.

When you set the import mode to auto detection and the status of a channel input is Non-Audio, the data for that channel is automatically imported as Dolby E stream data, and that channel is assigned as the Dolby E stream channel. When you set the mode to manual specification, specify which channels to assign the Dolby E stream.

a Audio Stream Detection

a Audio Stream Detection Specifies the method for determining audio streams and Dolby E streams. Manual: Allows you to specify Dolby E stream channels individually. You can also specify the channels in Logging Tool. Note Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

Dolby E streams always use a pair channels consisting of an odd number followed by an even number. You cannot specify only one channel (such as [A1]) or a pair of channels consisting of an even number followed by an odd number (such as [A2,A3]). Auto: Determines channels automatically. Channels are automatically assigned as Dolby E stream channels if the status of SDI input signals for those channels are detected as Non-Audio. For details on other setting items, see “Logging Properties Dialog” (page 601).

468

Logging Properties Dialog

Import File Tool/Export Dialog/Export MXF Dialog The Export dialog/Export MXF dialog allows you to export Dolby E stream media files. Exported Dolby E stream media files can be imported using the Import File Tool.

Exporting Dolby E Stream Media Files The process for creating Dolby E stream media files in the Export dialog is the same as that for video and audio files. Select [Audio File (*.dbe)] or [Audio File (*.mxf)] under [Files of Type] in the Export dialog.

Importing Dolby E Stream Media Files The process for using Import File Tool to import Dolby E stream media files that were exported with the Export dialog is the same as that for video and audio files. Select [Audio File (*.dbe)] or [Audio File (*.mxf)] under the [Files of Type] list in the Open File dialog.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

Import File Tool/Export Dialog/Export MXF Dialog

469

Project Explorer If a selected clip includes audio stream tracks, track channel icons appear in the Metadata Window of Project Explorer. To display more information on the audio stream tracks, open the Clip Properties dialog from the Project Explorer context menu. When performing Picture Icon Play from Project Explorer, you can output Dolby E streams from SDI output channels.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

470

Project Explorer

Metadata Window If you select a clip that includes Dolby E stream channels, the Dolby E stream channel names will appear in the track channel icons under the General-1 tab of the Metadata Window.

The following is a display example of a clip that uses channels A7 and A8 for Dolby E streams.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

Project Explorer

471

Clip Properties Dialog

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

You can confirm information on Dolby E stream channels in the Clip Properties dialog.

To open the Clip Properties dialog, display the context menu from the clip that includes the Dolby E stream channel, and then select [Extra Properties].

a Track Select the track type. If you select an audio stream channel here, stream file information is displayed in the following items.

f Sample Rate For Dolby E streams, the sample rate of the encoded audio is not displayed.

b File Size Displays the size of the media file. c File Format Displays the format of the media file. DBE Stream appears for Dolby E streams. d Bit Count Displays the bit length of the encoded data for Dolby E streams. e Channel For Dolby E streams, the channel number of the encoded audio is not displayed.

472

Project Explorer

Timeline Editor You can place clips that include Dolby E stream channels on a sequence and perform cut editing. When you perform playback from the Master Viewer or Source Viewer, for example, the Dolby E streams are output from the SDI output channels.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

Timeline Editor

473

Audio Stream Track

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

474

Dolby E streams are placed on audio stream tracks. They cannot be placed on audio tracks.

menu on the audio stream track and selecting [New Audio Stream Track].

If an audio stream track already exists on a sequence, you can add an audio stream track by displaying the context

Audio stream tracks appear on the timeline as follows.

The stream type is displayed on the timeline. Dolby E streams appear as [Dolby E Stream], while other streams appear as [(Unknown Stream)].

To add an audio stream track to a sequence Select [Add Track] > [Audio Stream Track] from the Timeline Editor main menu. The added track is named “AStrm n” by default. (“n” is a number indicating the creation order.)

To show or hide the stream type, display the context menu on the audio stream track, and select [Audio Data] > [Stream Type]. Although audio stream tracks are tracks used for audio, they lack the following functions when compared to audio tracks. • Adjustment and display functions for clip level and track level • Fader Automation function • Effect placement functions (including cross fade) • Audio monitoring function* • Waveform display function * Dolby E streams are output from SDI outputs. To monitor Dolby E streams, a Dolby E decoder is required.

Timeline Editor

To delete an audio stream track from a sequence Display the context menu on the audio stream track you want to delete, and then select [Delete Audio Stream Track]. Editing audio stream tracks Only cut editing can be performed on audio stream tracks. Note

Do not perform editing that connects Dolby E streams consisting of different channels. The connection points will lack audio after decoding. In addition, do not insert filler. Fade ins and fade outs will occur after decoding.

Source Viewer You can digitize VTR materials that include Dolby E stream channels to create clips by using the Source Viewer (Digitize mode). The process for digitizing materials that include Dolby E stream data is the same as for other materials. The import mode for Dolby E stream is set on the Advanced tab of the Logging Properties dialog. The settings related to creating clips in Source Viewer (digitize mode) are set in the PreEdit Properties dialog.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

In Auto Audio Stream Detection mode, set in the Logging Properties dialog, it is possible that the detection may change between Audio and Dolby E stream channels when digitizing starts. The digitized result and track on the Outer track panel assignment also changes to reflect the detected input. After digitizing starts, however, the digitized result and Outer track panel assignment cannot change in response to change in input detected by the audio stream detection function. Note

To ensure predictable results, we strongly recommend not using tapes that mix Audio and Dolby E data on the same channel. If such tapes are used, the generated file format is fixed when digitizing starts. The Batch Digitize and Back to Creator functions are also supported for clips that contain Dolby E stream data.

Source Viewer

475

Timeline Editor Properties Dialog The Audio Stream tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog allows you to make settings for audio streams.

a [Audio Stream Track is applied when the sequence is made] check box b Default GP Bus setting for new Audio Stream Track

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

a [Audio Stream Track is applied when the sequence is made] check box Selects whether to add an audio stream track when a new sequence is created. When this is checked and you create a new sequence, a single audio stream track is added to the sequence. b Default GP Bus Setting for new Audio Stream Track Specifies the PGM bus to which audio stream tracks are assigned. When you add an audio stream track and another track is not already assigned to the specified PGM bus, the audio stream track will be assigned to that bus. If an existing track is already assigned to that bus, the audio stream track will not be assigned.

476

Timeline Editor Properties Dialog

For details on tabs other than the Audio Stream tab, see “Timeline Editor Properties Dialog” (page 607).

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool Dolby E stream outputs can be assigned to PGM outputs. Dolby E stream outputs utilize two PGM outputs. The four combinations of PGM outputs that you can select from are PGM1/2, PGM3/4, PGM5/6, and PGM7/8. To assign an audio stream track to a pair of PGM outputs, click one of the PGM out positions for the target pair. When one of the target pair is clicked, the other is selected simultaneously.

The busses to which the audio stream is assigned will appear in a different color. To cancel the setting, click one of the specified pair, and the other will also be canceled. Additional audio tracks or audio stream tracks cannot be assigned to output destinations with existing audio stream tracks. The following is a display example of when an audio stream track is assigned to PGM7/8.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool

477

Audio Group Bus Fader The PGM output meter to which a Dolby E stream is assigned appears in blue. Dolby E stream levels cannot be adjusted. The following is a display example of when an Dolby E stream track is assigned to PGM7/8.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

478

Audio Group Bus Fader

Audio Output Tool Channel and PGM output meters for which Dolby E streams are assigned will appear in a different color in the Output Meter tab of the Audio Output Tool. Channels for which Dolby E streams are assigned cannot be selected as monitoring channels in the Monitor tab.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

Audio Output Tool

479

Record to VTR Tool Clips and sequences that include channels and PGM outputs for which Dolby E streams are assigned can be recorded to a VTR. You can turn Dolby E stream outputs on or off as you can with video and audio channels by using the Record to VTR tool. Note

When recording an audio stream at the same time as a video track or audio track, be sure to record in First Edit + Assemble mode (entire sequence is recorded in one operation). Do not select other modes in which recording is executed in parts. Audio stream tracks are recorded one frame ahead of the start point. For example, if the start point of the timecode is “00:00:00:10,” recording for the audio stream track will start at “00:00:00:09.” If you record using a mode other than First Edit + Assemble mode, there will be a 1-frame gap between the audio stream track and the video track or audio track due to the difference in start points.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

480

Record to VTR Tool

XDCAM Explorer If a selected clip includes audio stream tracks, track channel buttons appear in the XDCAM Explorer. During preview, you cannot monitor Dolby E for lowresolution MXF files because they contain an empty Dolby E data field and the XDCAM Explorer does not support SDI output.

Importing Dolby E Stream Media Files by using XDCAM Import Tool The process for using XDCAM Import Tool to import clips, partial clips, EDL files, and sequences that contain Dolby E stream data is the same as that for video and audio files. Note

XDCAM EX and P2 do not support the Dolby E function.

Exporting Dolby E Stream Media Files by using XDCAM Export Tool

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

The XDCAM Export Tool supports export of EDL and PGM sequences containing Dolby E tracks and Dolby E clips. Sequences can be exported even if bit rate of the Dolby E stream is incompatible with the clip setting. When [Export even if bit rate of stream is incompatible] is checked in the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog, the clip will be exported without Dolby E channel even if the bit rate is incompatible. When not checked, an error message appears if the bit rate setting is incompatible.

XDCAM Explorer

481

Render to Bin Dialog You can render clips and sequences that include channels and PGM outputs for which Dolby E streams are assigned, and create Render to Bin clips that include Dolby E stream channels. You can turn Dolby E stream outputs on or off as you can with video and audio channels by using the Render to Bin dialog.

Chapter 11 Dolby E Functions

482

Render to Bin Dialog

Output

Chapter

12

DVD Export Tool Overview The DVD Export tool allows you to record clips and sequences in the project to DVD discs.

To Start the DVD Export Tool To start the DVD Export tool, select clips in the Project Explorer List View pane, and do one of the following. • Click the Project Explorer menu button, and select [Output] > [Export to DVD...]. • Right-click a clip and select [Output] > [Export to DVD...] from the context menu. To load clips into the DVD Export tool when the tool is already started, drag the clips from Project Explorer and drop them in the DVD Export tool.

DVD Export Tool

483

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b Track buttons c Valid list box d Convert list box

e Burn Settings

f Disc Information g Progress bar h Clip list

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the DVD Export tool. Help...: Displays help about the DVD Export tool. Close: Closes the DVD Export tool window. b Track buttons Select tracks to record on the disc. At least one track must be selected. When you click any of these buttons, the color of the letters on the button changes to orange, indicating the button is selected. When you click the button again, it is deselected and its appearance returns to the original appearance.

Chapter 12 Output

484

c Valid list box Selects the export region of the clip or sequence. Entire: Creates an external media file for the entire section. Mark In / Out: Creates an external media file for the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points specified on the timeline. Valid Area: Creates an external media file for the tracks within the sequence that are currently valid. d Convert list box Selects the conversion method used for recording clips to disc (SD to HD, HD to SD). No Convert: Retains clip’s original frame size. Fill: Changes clip’s aspect ratio to 16:9 and fills viewer. Fill To Width: Changes clip’s frame size to fill the width of the viewer. Fill To Height: Changes clip’s frame size to fill the height of the viewer.

DVD Export Tool

i Command button area

e Burn Settings Specifies the disc format, disc name, and burn speed. Make DVD/VCD: Selects the disc format. Disk Name: Specifies the title of the disc. DVD Drive: Selects the path of the option disc drive. Speed: Selects the disc drive burn speed (High, Middle, Low). f Disc Information Displays the disc icon (eject button), disc format, and estimated free space available on the disc. Double-clicking the disc icon ejects the disc from the optical disc drive. g Progress bar Displays the disc recording progress. h Clip List Displays a list of clips targeted for export. The chapters are recorded to disc in the order displayed in the clip list. The Mark In point and Duration for each clip can be entered directly using the numeric keypad. i Command button area Contains the DVD Export tool command buttons. For more information about the DVD Export tool command buttons, see page 491.

DVD Export Tool Command Button Area By default, the buttons in the DVD Export tool command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 493) from the main menu.

Default command button configuration

Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. Icon

Button name

Button function

Add File

Adds *.mpg, *.mpeg, and *.vob files from local hard disk to the clip list.

Add Clip

Adds clips from Project Explorer to the clip list.

Add Sequence

Adds sequences from Project Explorer to the clip list.

Up

Moves the selected items up in the clip list.

Down

Moves the selected items down in the clip list.

Delete

Deletes the selected items from the clip list.

Clear

Deletes all items from the clip list.

Open

Opens and loads *.prj files from local disk into the clip list.

Save

Saves the clip list as a *.prj file on the local hard disk.

Record

Burns the clip list to the disc in the selected optical disc drive.

Chapter 12 Output

DVD Export Tool

485

Recording to Disc XPRI NS allows you to record files, clips, and sequences as external media files to DVD and VCD optical discs.

1

Start the DVD Export Tool. See page 483 for more information about how to start the DVD Export Tool.

2

Select the DVD optical disc drive in the DVD Drive list box.

3

Select the video, audio, and alpha track buttons to record in external media files.

4

Click the Add File, Add Clip, or Add Sequence buttons to add content to the clip list. Material can also be added to the clip list by dragging materials from Project Explorer and dropping them in the clip list.

5

Select the disc format (DVD or VCD). Select other parameters, such as the disc name, burn speed, valid region, and so on, as required.

6

Click the Record button to start writing files to the optical disc. The recording progress is displayed in the progress bar.

7

Double-click the disc icon in the DVD Export tool window to eject the disc when recording is finished.

Chapter 12 Output

486

Recording to Disc

Record to VTR Tool Overview The Record to VTR tool allows you to record clips and sequences in the specified Project Explorer bin to VTR tape.

To Start the Record to VTR Tool To start the Record to VTR tool, select clips in the Project Explorer List View pane, and do one of the following. • Click the Record to VTR button. • Click the Project Explorer menu button, and select [Output] > [Record to VTR...]. • Press the Record to VTR tool focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. For more information about focus hot keys, see “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832). Notes

If the Source Viewer has focus, the currently opened sequence is loaded into the Record to VTR Tool. The Record to VTR tool cannot be started or loaded in the following cases, when the [Inhibit loading multiple clips or unrendered sequence] check box is checked in the Record to VTR Settings dialog. • When multiple clips are selected. • When undigitized clips or unrendered sequences are selected. To load clips into the Record to VTR tool when the tool is already started, drag the clips from Project Explorer and drop them in the Record to VTR tool. Do not perform other operations in Windows while Record to VTR Tool is running. The content recorded with Record to VTR Tool may lack audio if operations that increase the processing load, such as minimizing or maximizing the window, are performed. Chapter 12 Output

Record to VTR Tool

487

Names and Functions of Parts Note

If there is a Jog & Shuttle Control Panel or an Editing Control Panel connected to the XPRI NS system, some Record to VTR tool functions can be accessed from the control panel.

See page 836 and page 842 for more information about the functions assigned to these control panels.

a Menu button b Track buttons

u VTR time

c Clip Name list box

t Status

d Output Duration list box

s Monitor

e Index pictures

r Duration f Convert list box q End point g Record Mode list box

p Start point

o Command button area

h [Check for Media Offline] check box

n Device list box

i Preview button j All Stop button k Record button l Shuttle slider m Progress bar

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Record to VTR tool. Chapter 12 Output

488

See “Record to VTR Tool Main Menu” (page 492) for more information about the main menu.

b Track buttons Select tracks to record on the tape. When you click any of these buttons, the color of the letters on the button changes to orange, indicating the button is selected. When you click the button again, it is deselected and its appearance returns to the original appearance.

Record to VTR Tool

c Clip Name list box Displays a list of the clips loaded in the Record to VTR tool. Notes

• The order of clips in the clip list cannot be changed. • Note that the clip name appears only once in the clip list, even if the same clip is added to the list two or more times. You can load clips that are already loaded in the Record to VTR tool by dragging them to the Record to VTR tool with the Shift key held down.

d Output Duration list box Displays the current clip recording range. Select the range from among the following. Entire: Records the entire clip. This is the default range. Mark In/Out: Records from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point. If the Mark In point or Mark Out point does not exist, records the entire clip. e Index pictures Display the index pictures of the selected clip. When the Output Duration is Entire, a picture of the start point appears on the start side and a picture of the end point appears on the end side. When the Output Duration is Mark In/Out, a picture of the Mark In point appears on the start side and a picture of the Mark Out point appears on the end side. f Convert list box Selects the conversion method used for recording clips to VTR (SD to HD, HD to SD). No Convert: Retains SD clip’s original frame size after Render to Bin. Fill: Changes SD clip’s aspect ratio to 16:9 and fills viewer after Render to Bin. Fill To Width: Changes SD clip’s frame size to fill the width of the viewer. Fill To Height: Changes SD clip’s frame size to fill the height of the viewer. g Record Mode list box Displays the current recording mode. Select the recording mode from among the following.

First Edit + Assemble: Executes an assemble edit after executing a first edit (automatic recording of timecode). If you select First Edit + Assemble, a Record Start Position list box that allows you to select the first edit start point appears, together with a Pre-record Duration edit box that allows you to enter the timecode recording time (default 60 seconds). Select the first edit start point from the following. • From Tape Top: When you press the Record button, the tape is rewound to the top and timecode recording starts from there. • From Current Position: Timecode recording starts from the current position on the tape. Insert Edit: Select this mode to record at any position on the tape. Timecode must be recorded across the entire recording range in advance. Clips are inserted at the specified timecode and recording is executed without erasing the prerecorded timecode. Before executing an insert edit, check to be sure that the tracks to be recorded are turned on. h [Check for Media Offline] check box When this is checked, a check is performed to determine whether clips loaded into the Record to VTR tool contain any media offline sections. A warning dialog appears if the clips contain media offline sections. i Preview button Conducts a preview of the selected clips or sequences.

Note

Notes

If [i.LINK] is selected in the device list, only [Crash Rec] will be available for selection.

• When a preview is conducted with several clips selected in an assemble edit, only the first clip is played. • During previews, video before the start point and after the end point is not output to the VGA monitor.

Crash Rec: Recording starts from the current tape position as soon as you press the Record button, and continues until it reaches the clip end point or the Mark Out point. There is no need for timecode to be recorded on the tape in advance. If there is timecode recorded on the tape, it is erased and replaced with new timecode.

Assemble Edit: Records clips one after the other. Timecode must be recorded on the tape in advance from the preroll point to the Mark In point and for about two seconds after the In point. The timecode recorded during clip recording is continuous with the prerecorded timecode.

k Record button Displays a message box asking you to confirm that the correct reel is loaded. Click the OK button in the message box to start recording using the mode specified in the Record Mode list box. Note

During recording, video before the start point and after the end point is not output to the VGA monitor.

Chapter 12 Output

Notes

• There may be some breakup in the video around the recording start point in Crash Rec mode. • Sequence timecode will not agree completely with the timecode recorded on the tape.

j All Stop button Stops the recording.

l Shuttle slider Allows you to perform variable speed playback. Drag the knob in the forward or reverse direction to start playback. Playback speed increases as the knob approaches the ends of the slider range.

Record to VTR Tool

489

Playback stops and the knob returns to the center position when you stop dragging. By holding the Ctrl key while dragging the knob on the shuttle slider and releasing, you can lock the knob at any position on the slider and enable continuous forward or reverse playback at varied speed. To release the lock, drag the knob again without pressing the Ctrl key, or click one of the command buttons under the Play tab (Rewind, Fast Forward, Play, Still, etc.). Note

Variable speed playback is not supported for players connected via i.LINK. In addition, images in the monitor may not refresh, depending on the playback speed. m Progress bar Indicates the progress of the digitizing and timecode. n Device list box Select the destination device for recording from the dropdown list. You can either [SDI] or [i.LINK]. For SDI devices, the names of the remotely connected video players also appear. The device names of i.LINK devices appear as “Unknown.” Select [Device Properties...] to open the Device Properties Dialog (page 584) for configuring hardware and video I/O settings. Note

Chapter 12 Output

When recording via i.LINK, the following limitations and precautions apply. • You can only select the Crash Rec recording mode from the Record Mode list box. • When overwriting or recording additional clips to previously recorded media, use media that was recorded in the same format as the signals you are about to record. • Remote operations for variable speed playback and eject are not supported. • If you change the configurations on the connected recorder or switch to media of a different recording format, the device (recorder) may not be properly recognized. In such cases, reconnect the device. • For more information about configurations on the recorder, refer to the operating instructions for the connected device. • Recording to HDV devices is not supported. o Command button area Contains the Record to VTR tool command buttons. For more information about the Record to VTR tool command buttons, see page 491.

p Start point Displays the timecode value of record start point on the tape. When Entire is selected in the Output Duration list

490

Record to VTR Tool

box, the start point of the sequence is displayed. When Mark In/Out is selected, the Mark In point is displayed. Clicking in this field to make it active allows you to enter a start point timecode value from the keyboard. q End point Displays the timecode value of record end point on the tape. When Entire is selected in the Output Duration list box, the end point of the sequence is displayed. When Mark In/Out is selected, the Mark Out point is displayed. Clicking in this field to make it active allows you to enter an end point timecode value from the keyboard. r Duration Displays the duration of the selected clip as a timecode value. s Monitor Displays the video of the clips being recorded. t Status Displays VTR operating status and other status information. u VTR time Displays the timecode of the current VTR position.

Record to VTR Tool Command Button Area By default, the buttons in the Record to VTR tool command button area are arranged as shown in the following figure. You can customize the command button area by selecting Customize (page 493) from the main menu.

Default command button configuration

Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. Icon

Button function

Rewind

Rewinds the video tape.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the video tape.

Mark In

Marks the current position as the In point. Move to the point that you want to set as the In point by playing or by using the command buttons, and then click this button to set the In point. If an In point is already set when you click this button, it is reset to the new point. The Out point is calculated from the duration of the clip and set automatically.

Play

Starts play from the current position to the end. To stop play, click this button again or the Stop button.

Mark Out

Marks the current position as the Out point. Move to the point that you want to set as the Out point by playing or by using the command buttons, and then click this button to set the Out point. If an Out point is already set when you click this button, it is reset to the new point. The In point is calculated from the duration of the clip and set automatically.

Clear In Mark

Clears the In point, if it exists.

Clear Out Mark

Clears the Out point, if it exists.

Standby Off

Sets VTR standby to off.

Preview

Conducts a preview.

Go to In

Jumps to the In point, if it exists.

Stop

Stops play at the current position.

Go to Out

Jumps to the Out point, if it exists.

Eject

Ejects the cassette.

Chapter 12 Output

Button name

Note Does not function for players connected via i.LINK. Clear Both Marks

Clears both the In point and the Out point, if they exist. If only one of the points exists, clears the existing point.

Record to VTR Tool

491

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Button function

Step Backward

Moves 1 frame back from the current position.

Step Forward

Moves 1 frame forward from the current position.

Step Backward 10 Moves 10 frames back from the current position. Frames Step Forward 10 Frames

Moves 10 frames forward from the current position.

All Stop

Stops all operations.

Play Reverse

Plays in the reverse direction (from the current position to the start point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Play Forward

Plays in the forward direction (from the current position to the end point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Still

Pauses at the current position.

Edit Mode

Each press of the button selects the next mode in the order Crash Rec(ording) > Assemble Edit > First Edit + Assemble Edit > Insert Edit > Crash Rec.

Jog

Selects jog mode.

Shuttle

Selects shuttle mode.

Toggle Jog/Shuttle Switches between jog and shuttle modes. V1

Select tracks from V1 to V8.

A1 to A8

Select tracks from A1 to A8.

Record to VTR Tool Main Menu Chapter 12 Output

Click the Menu button in the Record to VTR Tool (see page 487) to display the Record to VTR main menu. The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands. Tracks Selects the tracks to record. This command has the following subcommands. Reset: Resets the track selection to the default. V: Selects the video track. A1 to A8: Selects the audio tracks. Clear List Clears all of the clips in the clip list.

492

Record to VTR Tool

Output Duration Selects the clip recording range from the following. Entire: Records the entire clip. This is the default range. Mark In/Out: Records from the In point to the Out point. If the In point or Out point does not exist, records the entire clip. Record Mode Selects the recording mode. This command has the following subcommands. Note

If [i.LINK] is selected in the device list, only [Crash Recording] will be available for selection. Crash Recording: In this mode, recording starts from the current tape position as soon as you press the Record

button, and stops at the clip end point or the Mark Out point. Assemble Edit: In this mode, clips are recorded one after the other. First Edit + Assemble: In this mode, an assemble edit is executed after execution of a first edit (automatic recording of timecode). Insert Edit: In this mode, clips can be recorded at any position on the tape. Record Start Position Selects the first edit start point from the following when you select [First Edit + Assemble] for [Record Mode]. Tape Top: When you press the Record button, the tape is rewound to the top and timecode recording starts from there. Current Position: Timecode recording starts from the current position on the tape. Pre-record Duration Selects the timecode recording time (minutes) when you select [First Edit + Assemble] for [Record Mode]. • 10 • 30 • 60 Record to VTR Settings... Opens the Record to VTR Settings dialog. For more information, see “Record to VTR Settings Dialog” (page 657).

Chapter 12 Output

Customize Opens a customization window. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (see page 570), which allows you to customize command button palettes by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572), which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (see page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about the Record to VTR tool. Minimize Minimizes the Record to VTR tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the Record to VTR tool window.

Record to VTR Tool

493

Note

Recording to Tape XPRI NS provides four recording modes. To record your editing results to tape, select the appropriate recording mode and proceed as described below.

Adjust the length of timecode prerecording as required.

2

Insert the tape from step 1 into the recorder and prepare the recorder for recording.

3

Select the clip or sequence that you want to record from a bin, and start the Record to VTR tool. If the Record to VTR tool is already started, drag a clip or sequence from a bin to the tool window.

Notes

• When recording to a recorder connected via i.LINK (AV/C), only the Crash Rec mode is available for selection. • When recording to an XDCAM disc recorder, use Crash Rec mode or use XDCAM Explorer (page 509) with FAM/FTP connection. Assemble Edit mode, First Edit + Assemble Edit mode, and Insert Edit mode will not function properly. • When recording Dolby E audio stream tracks simultaneously with video or audio tracks, use Crash Rec mode or First Edit + Assemble mode. For more information, see “Record to VTR Tool” (page 480). • Set up the timecode of the VTR as follows: • Timecode reader: Same configuration as the Timecode list in the Hardware Settings tab (page 586) of the Device Properties dialog (LTC is recommended) • Timecode generator: Internally generated timecode • Timecode Run Mode selection: Free

For more information about starting the Record to VTR tool, see page 487.

4

Click the Menu button and select [Record Mode] >[Assemble Edit], or select Assemble Edit from the Record Mode drop-down list.

5

Click the Record button. Recording starts. The recorded timecode is continuous with the prerecorded timecode.

Recording in First Edit + Assemble Mode

1

Insert a tape into the recorder and prepare the recorder for recording.

2

Select the clip or sequence that you want to record from a bin, and start the Record to VTR tool. If the Record to VTR tool is already started, drag a clip or sequence from a bin to the tool window.

Recording in Crash Rec Mode

1

Insert a tape into the recorder and prepare the recorder for recording.

2

Select the clip or sequence that you want to record from a bin, and start the Record to VTR tool. If the Record to VTR tool is already started, drag a clip or sequence from a bin to the tool window.

For more information about starting the Record to VTR tool, see page 487.

3

For more information about starting the Record to VTR tool, see page 487.

Chapter 12 Output

3

Click the Menu button and select [Record Mode] >[Crash Rec], or select Crash Rec from the Record Mode drop-down list.

4

Click the Record button. Recording starts from the current tape position, and stops when it reaches the clip's end point or Mark Out point.

Recording in Assemble Edit Mode

1

494

Prepare a tape with timecode recorded from the preroll point to the Mark In point and for about two seconds after the Mark In point.

Recording to Tape

Click the Menu button and select [Record Mode] >[First Edit + Assemble], or select First Edit + Assemble Edit from the Record Mode drop-down list. A Record Start Position list box appears, so that you can select the recording start position for the first edit, and a Prerecord Duration edit box appears, so that you can enter the timecode recording duration (default 60 seconds).

4

Click the Menu button and select [Record Start Position] >[From Tape Top], or select From Tape Top or From Current Position from the Record Start Position drop-down list.

5

Click the Menu button and select [Pre-record Duration] >[10] / [30] / [60], or enter a duration in the Pre-record Duration edit box.

6

Click the Record button. If you selected From Tape Top as the recording start position, the tape is rewound to the top and recording starts. If you selected From Current Position, recording starts from the current tape position.

Recording in Insert Edit Mode

1

Prepare a tape with timecode recorded across the entire recording range.

2

Insert the tape from step 1 into the recorder and prepare the recorder for recording.

3

Select the clip or sequence that you want to record from a bin, and start the Record to VTR tool. If the Record to VTR tool is already started, drag a clip or sequence from a bin to the tool window. For more information about starting the Record to VTR tool, see page 487.

4

Click the Menu button and select [Record Mode] >[Insert Edit], or select Insert Edit from the Record Mode drop-down list.

5

Turn on the tracks that you want to record.

6

Enter the recording start point timecode in the start point timecode box.

7

Click the Record button. The tape is forwarded to the position specified in step 6, and recording starts.

Note

It is not possible to record just one frame by insert editing.

Chapter 12 Output

Recording to Tape

495

Export Dialog Overview The Export dialog creates video and audio files (external media files) from clips in the project, and exports the files.

To Open the Export Dialog To open the Export dialog, select clips in the Project Explorer List View pane, and do one of the following. • Click the Project Explorer menu button, and select [Output] > [Export...]. • Right click a clip and select [Output] > [Export...] from the context menu. • Press the Export focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. For more information about focus hot keys, see “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832).

Chapter 12 Output

496

Export Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts c New Folder button d Back button e Forward button f Move Up button a Menu button g View button b Save in list box h Open/Close Res List button

i File list

j File Name box k Template l Files of Type list box m Sequential File section n Remain Disk o [Level Conversion]

u Res List

check box

wk Batch stop button wj Clear button z Batch Export button y Delete button x Duplicate button w Update button v Add button t Add to Batch button s Cancel button r Export button q Options button p Optional information

b Save in list box Displays the current save destination folder. You can select another destination folder from the drop-down list. c New Folder button Creates a new folder in the folder selected in the Save in list box.

d Back button Displays the most recently accessed folder. e Forward button After the most recently accessed folder has been displayed with the Back button, returns to the folder that was visible when the Back button was pressed. f Move Up button Displays the next higher folder in the folder tree, relative to the folder currently displayed in the Save in list box.

Chapter 12 Output

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Export dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help... : Displays help about the Export dialog. Close: Closes the Export dialog. Update Timecode Information: Updates the timecode information of clips/sequences in the Export dialog if the clips/sequences were modified after the dialog was opened.

g View button Selects the view mode of the file list. Icon: Displays file names and icons in the file list. List: Displays a list of file names only in the file list. Details: Displays the name, type, date of most recent modification, and size for each file in the file list.

Export Dialog

497

h Open/Close Res List button Opens/closes the Res List pane. i File list Displays a list of the specified Files of Type list box which are contained in the Save in list box. j File Name box Displays the name of the file selected in the file list. You can rename the file by entering a new name (up to 63 characters, up to 255 characters for the full path) in the edit box. k Template Loads the export settings defined in the specified template in the drop-down menu. Export settings in a template can be reloaded for reuse as needed. Enter a name and click the disc icon to save a template. Click the trash icon to remove a template. l Files of Type list box Selects a file type from among the following formats. • Movie files AVI & WAVE (*.avi), AVI (*.avi), Windows Media (*.wmv), Quick Time (*.mov), MXF (*.mxf), mpeg (*.mpg) • Image files/sequential files Targa (*.tga), JPEG (*.jpg), BMP (*.bmp), TIFF (*.tif), PCX (*.pcx) • Audio files WAVE (*.wav), Windows Media (*.wma), MP3 (*.mp3) Notes

Chapter 12 Output

498

• When audio is output, odd-numbered tracks are assigned to L and even-numbered tracks to R. • Windows Media Player 11 must be installed to output Windows Media or MP3 files. • When exporting AVI or MOV files, be sure to name them using alphanumeric characters. • When exporting a clip as an MXF file, the clip is saved using the selected video codec, even if the original clip uses one of the standard options (DVCAM, IMX 30/40/ 50, or MPEG HD 18/25/35/50). To save the clip using the original video codec, export the clip using the Export MXF dialog. • When exporting AVI & WAV files using the DVSD codec, the output format is determined by the [Audio is handled in the AVI] check box. If the check box is checked, the output is ODML Type-2 AVI. If the check box is not checked, the output is ODML Type-1 AVI. • When exporting AVI & WAV files using a codec other than DVSD, the output format is RIFF Type-1 AVI. • When exporting AVI files, the output format is ODML Type-2 AVI. • Progressive scan mode clips are exported in progressive scan mode, even though all internal processing takes

Export Dialog

place in interlaced scan mode. However, progressive scan mode clips that are rendered on the timeline are rendered to interlaced clips. • For output of sequential image files, a folder with the same name as the File Name is created on the current level, and sequentially numbered image files are stored in that folder. • An image file is output for each frame in the clip, with the number of the frame added to the file name. You can specify the starting number and the number of places in the number. Example) File name: Sample, Frames: 560, Format: Targa Sample001.tga, ..., Sample560.tga m Sequential File section When Targa, JPEG, BMP, or TIFF is selected as the file type, specifies whether to export sequential files. If you wish to export sequential files, check the check box and specify the range by selecting from the lists or entering values. n Remain Disk Displays the remaining capacity on the disk. o [Level Conversion] check box Check this check box to perform level conversion when exporting an original image. RGB are converted as follows when it is checked. • Luminance 0% t RGB(0, 0, 0) • Luminance 100% t RGB(255, 255, 255) p Optional information Displays the information set in the Options dialog. q Options button Opens the Export Options dialog. For more information, see “Export Options Dialog” (page 500).

r Export button Creates and exports an external media file from the selected file. s Cancel button Closes the Export dialog without exporting an external media file. t Add to Batch button Adds the clip or sequence, together with export settings, to the Res List. u Res List Displays the list of resources for export. Double click a clip or sequence in the list to display the export settings in the left pane. Right-click a clip or sequence to display

context menu shortcut commands. The following information is displayed for each clip or sequence. • Status • Clip name • Source name • Compression • Mark In • Mark Out • Duration • Track(s) • Valid region • Convert • Target path • Result v Add button Adds the selected clip or sequence in Project Explorer to the Res List. w Update button Updates the selected clip or sequence with the export information specified in the left pane. x Duplicate button Duplicates the selected clip or sequence. y Delete button Deletes the selected clip or sequence. z Batch Export button Exports the clips and sequences in the Res List one at a time, and stores output files at the specified paths. wj Clear button Deletes all clips and sequences from the Res List. wk Batch Stop button Stops the export of the clips and sequences in the Res List.

Chapter 12 Output

Export Dialog

499

Export Options Dialog The Export Options dialog allows you to make detailed settings for the external media files exported by the Export dialog.

a Menu button

To open the Export Options dialog, click the Options button in the Export dialog.

c Convert list box b Track buttons

d Valid Region

e Video options

f Audio options

i Cancel button h OK button g Set Default button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Export Options dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Export Options dialog. Close: Closes the Export Options dialog. This command works in the same way as the Cancel button. b Track buttons Select alpha (clip signals exported to external media files) and tracks V and A1 to A8. At least one track must be selected. The buttons for tracks that contain no clips and tracks that cannot be selected because of the video signal compression method are disabled. Chapter 12 Output

500

c Convert list box Selects the conversion method used for recording clips (SD to HD, HD to SD). No Convert: Retains SD clip’s original frame size after Render to Bin. Fill: Changes SD clip’s aspect ratio to 16:9 and fills viewer after Render to Bin. Fill To Width: Changes SD clip’s frame size to fill the width of the viewer. Fill To Height: Changes SD clip’s frame size to fill the height of the viewer.

Export Dialog

d Valid Region Selects the range from the clip to export to the external media file from the following. Entire: Creates an external media file for the entire clip (default). Mark In/Out: Creates an external media file for the range between the Mark In and Mark Out points specified in the clip. e Video options Specifies the video export options. See “Video Export Options” (page 502). f Audio options Specifies the audio export options. See “Audio Export Options” (page 504). g Set Default button Saves the current settings in the Options dialog as the defaults for files of the selected type. You can save different defaults for the various file types in different projects. h OK button Enables the settings made in the Options dialog and returns to the Export dialog. The settings are reflected in the Optional information section of the Export dialog.

i Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Options dialog and returns to the Export dialog.

Chapter 12 Output

Export Dialog

501

Video Export Options The Video tab of the Export Options Dialog allows you to make settings related to the video for external media files exported by the Export Dialog.

a Codec

g Color

b Frame Aspect Ratio

h Frame Rate

c Resolution

i Scan Mode

d Frame Width

j Data Rate

e Frame Height

k Key Frame Every

f Fixed Aspect Ratio

l Export Frame

m 2 Pass

a Codec Selects the compression method for video signals. The selectable methods vary depend on the selected file type. Uncompressed, JPEG, BMP, Animation, Motion JPEG, Cinepak, and so on. Click the Configuration button to configure the default codec applied for each file type. Note

The Configuration button is disabled in the current version of XPRI NS. b Frame Aspect Ratio Selects the external media file aspect ratio from among the following. The default selection is the aspect ratio of the project. • 4:3 • 16:9 c Resolution Selects the resolution of the external media file. The available resolutions depend on the setting of codec in the Video tab. Chapter 12 Output

502

Note

Export may not be possible for some combinations of codec type and resolution. d Frame Width Enabled when you select Custom size as the Resolution, allowing you to specify a custom frame width (range 1 to 1920). You can enter a value in the edit box or click the spin buttons to increment and decrement the value by 1 pixel.

Export Dialog

e Frame Height Enabled when you select Custom size as the Resolution, allowing you to specify a custom frame height (range 1 to 1080). You can enter a value in the edit box or click the spin buttons to increment and decrement the value by 1 pixel. f Fixed Aspect Ratio Enabled when you select Custom size as the Resolution. Check this check box when you want the aspect ratio of the external media file to be fixed. (This check box is checked by default.) Whenever you change the width or height of the custom size, the other value changes proportionately to preserve a fixed aspect ratio. Removing the check from this check box allows you to adjust the width and height separately, regardless of the aspect ratio. Note

The image in the external media file will be distorted if the aspect ratio of the original file and that of the selected resolution are different. To avoid distortion, check the [Fixed Aspect] check box. g Color Selects the color depth (number of colors or gradations) in the external media file. The selectable items vary depending on the Codec selection. Monochrome, 24 bit Color, 8 bit Grayscale, and so on. h Frame Rate Selects the external media file frame rate (unit: fps). In this version, this is set to the frame rate of the project.

i Scan Mode Selects the output scan mode. • Interlace • Progressive j Data Rate Selects the external media file data transfer rate. (The selectable rates vary depending on the Codec selection.) k Key Frame Every Selects the external media file keyframe rate (unit: frames). Whether this item can be specified depends on the Codec selection. If the Codec selection allows this item to be specified, you can enter a value by clicking the spin buttons or by entering a value between 0 and 30 from the keyboard. l Export Frame When exporting a still image file (the [Sequential File] check box in the Export dialog is not checked), you can specify the frame to export. The following options can be selected. • 1st Field • 2nd Field • Frame Field Invert checkbox: Inverts the field dominance between field 1 and field 2. m 2 Pass Selects two-pass encoding for H.264 codec.

Chapter 12 Output

Export Dialog

503

Audio Export Options The audio export options allow you to make settings related to the audio for external media files exported by the Export Dialog.

a Codec b Bits c Channel Count d Sampling Frequency

a Codec Selects the compression method for audio signals. The available settings depend on the format of the file to be exported. Uncompressed, 24 bit integer, 32 bit floating point, A Law 2:1, and so on. Click the Configuration button to configure the default codec applied for each file type. Note

When AVI is selected for export, only Uncompressed is available for audio Codec. The Configuration button is disabled in the current version of XPRI NS.

Chapter 12 Output

b Bits Selects the number of bits per audio channel in the audio format of the external media file (4/8/16 bits). The available options vary depending on the Codec selection. c Channel Count Selects the number of channels in the audio format of the external media file (Mono or Stereo). d Sampling Frequency Selects the sampling frequency for audio signals. 32 kHz, 44.100 kHz, 48 kHz, and so on. Note

WAVE files can be exported up to PGM2 of the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool. If you want to export PGM3 and

504

Export Dialog

higher, assign to PGM1 and PGM2 in the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool.

Export MXF Dialog Overview The Export MXF dialog creates video and audio files (external media files) from clips in the project, and exports them as MXF format files. Note

• Only high-res MXF files support export with VITC timecode information.

To Open the Export MXF Dialog To open the Export MXF dialog, select clips and/or sequences in the Project Explorer List View pane, and do one of the following. • Click the Project Explorer menu button, and select [Output] > [Export MXF...]. • Right click a clip and select [Output] > [Export MXF...] from the context menu. • Press the Export MXF focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. For more information about focus hot keys, see “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832).

Chapter 12 Output

Export MXF Dialog

505

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b Res List

e Convert c V Format d A Format g Temp Vaults

f Valid Region h Auto rename for the

same name tasks

o Stop button n Execute button m Clear List button l Delete button k Current button j Add Sequence button i Add Clip button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Export MXF dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help... : Displays help about the Export MXF dialog. Close: Closes the Export dialog.

Chapter 12 Output

506

b Res list Displays all the export tasks. Progress: Displays a progress bar during export. File Name: Displays the export MXF file name. Resource Name: Displays the original clip or sequence name (read only). Res Code: Displays the compression codec for clips. This field is blank for sequences. Type: Displays clip or sequence type. Duration: Displays the duration of the export task. Valid Region: Displays the export region of the clip or sequence. Status: Displays the status of proxy only detection, offline media detection, and zero length detection. Format: Displays the original clip compression codec or sequence format.

Export MXF Dialog

c V Format Selects the target export video codec: DVCAM, IMX 30/ 40/50, or MPEG HD 18/25/35/35 EX/50. d A Format Selects the target export audio bit number: 16 bit or 24 bit, depending on the video format selection. e Convert Selects the conversion format: No convert, Fill, Fit to Width, Fit to Height. f Valid Region Selects the export region of the clip or sequence. Entire: Exports the entire section. Mark In / Out: Exports the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points specified on the timeline. Valid Area: Exports only the tracks within the sequence that are currently valid. g Temp Vaults Specifies the storage destination for the MXF file that is created.

h [Auto rename for the same name tasks] check box When this is checked, export tasks with the same name are automatically exported with a numeric suffix added to the file name (_001, _002, and so on). i Add Clip button Opens the Select Clip dialog to add clip items for export. See “Select Clip dialog” (page 531) for a description of the Select Clip dialog settings and command buttons.

j Add Sequence button Opens the Select Sequence dialog to add clip items for export. See “Select Clip dialog” (page 531) for a description of the Select Sequence dialog settings and command buttons.

k Current button Adds the clip or sequence currently open to the export task list. l Delete button Deletes the selected export tasks from the export task list. m Clear List button Deletes all the export tasks from the export task list. n Execute button Starts exporting the clips and sequences in the export task list. A progress bar appears beside each item in the list during export. o Stop button Cancels the export. Notes

Chapter 12 Output

• When exporting a clip, the clip is saved as an MXF file using the original clip video codec, if the video codec is one of the standard options (DVCAM, IMX 30/40/50, or MPEG HD 18/25/35/50). If the original clip uses a different video codec, the clip is saved using the video codec selected in the [V Format] setting. • When exporting a sequence, the sequence is always saved as an MXF file using the video codec selected in the [V Format] setting.

Export MXF Dialog

507

Exporting Clips This section explains the procedure for creating and exporting video and audio files (external media files) from clips. Note

In the Export dialog, you can export a project created in HD format with SD-format size and frame rate. However, the video is resized, and there may be some distortion.

1

Open the Export dialog. For more information about opening the Export dialog, see page 496.

2

Check that the File Name box contains the name of the clip that was selected when the Export dialog opened.

3

Select the format to export from the Files of Type list box.

4

Specify the export destination in the Save in list box.

5

Make detailed settings as required in the Options dialog. For more information about the Options dialog, see page 500.

6

Click the Export button. An external media file is created and exported.

Notes

• When audio is output, odd-numbered tracks are assigned to L and even-numbered tracks to R. • Due to the margin of error in calculations, durations may become shorter when data on audio tracks only are exported and sampling frequency conversions are performed. Chapter 12 Output

508

To export sequential files Clips and sequences are exported as sequential files when you select a still image format in step 3 of the “Exporting Clips” procedure. For output of sequential image files, a folder with the same name as the File Name is created in the current folder, and sequentially numbered image files are stored in that folder. An image file is output for each frame in the clip, with the number of the frame added to the file name. You can specify the starting number and the number of places in the number. Example) File name: Sample, Frames: 560,

Exporting Clips

Format: Targa Sample001.tga, ... , Sample560.tga To change the export settings Make optional settings as required in step 5 of the “Exporting Clips” procedure. Note

Export may not be possible for some combinations of CODEC type and resolution.

Working With XDCAM

XDCAM Explorer Overview XDCAM Explorer displays XDCAM devices as drives. You can view the clips on XDCAM devices and manage those clips here. You can also launch specialized tools for XDCAM tasks: the XDCAM Import Tool, which allows you to import material clips, the Import Timeline Clip Tool, which allows you to re-import MXF on the timeline at higher resolution, and the XDCAM Export Tool, which allows you to export sequences as MXF files. Note

Clips on UDF-formatted SxS memory cards in Sony camcorders (e.g. PMW-500) and Canon XF-series camcorders (e.g. XF105, XF305) cannot be renamed or deleted. See page 521 for more information about the XDCAM Import Tool, see page 525 for more information about Import Timeline Clip Tool, and page 527 for more information about the XDCAM Export Tool.

XDCAM Explorer can handle the following kinds of material clips. • MXF files from XDCAM devices, P2 devices, and Canon XF-series camcorders connected to the network • MXF files from XDCAM devices connected by FAM (File Access Mode) • PD-EDL files About MXF MXF (Material eXchange Format) is a format for sharing and transferring program content and associated metadata over networks. Metadata carries information about the content, such as timecode and essence marks. MXF allows compatible devices to connect to each other and exchange

Chapter

13

files. The use of metadata leads to improved workflows and more efficient content creation practices. The only type of MXF data that can be imported from XDCAM discs is MPEG HD (MPEG-2 MP@HL) CBR 50Mbps, VBR 35Mbps, CBR 25Mbps, VBR 18Mbps. MPEG4 format proxy files are supported. MXF files are input and output at the compression rate of the original material. Note

Refer to the Release Notes for the latest information about supported formats. About PD-EDL PD-EDL (Professional Disc-EDL) is a file format for the Sony XDCAM Professional Disc System. It enables editing of XDCAM clips without changing their contents and playback of the edit result. PD-EDLs are written in XML (eXtensible Markup Language), but they can be handled in the same way as standard EDLs. For example, the PD-EDL files of clips recorded by XDCAM can be used to carry out preliminary offline editing on one system and final online editing on another system. You can import PD-EDL (*.smi) files created by PDZ-1 in the following format. • Professional Disc Rewritable format, Part3 File Format Specifications Version:1.0 PD-EDL • Described with ref element (selection and sync of all video and audio tracks), cut only • Suffix: .smi About FAM FAM (File Access Mode) is a function that allows you to use an i.LINK connection between a computer and an XDCAM device to access MXF files on the XDCAM device. XDCAM discs connected by FAM can be handled like local discs. FAM allows you to directly preview proxy files in subdirectories of XDCAM volumes, and to execute digitizing and logging.

XDCAM Explorer

509

To Start XDCAM Explorer To start XDCAM Explorer, click the XDCAM Explorer tool button in Project Explorer.

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

510

XDCAM Explorer

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button 2 Tool buttons

4 Device list box

3 Disc database

5 Catalog list box Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

6 Disc file list

7 Metadata window

qa Command button area 0 Timecode display and entry section 9 Monitor 8 Track buttons

a Menu button Displays the main menu of XDCAM Explorer. See “XDCAM Explorer Main Menu” (page 517) for more information about the main menu.

b Tool buttons These are the tool buttons of XDCAM Explorer.

• XDCAM EX Database: Devices that record on EX memory cards. • XDCAM UDF Database: Devices that record on UDFformatted SxS memory cards • P2 Database: Devices that record on P2 memory cards. • Canon Database. Devices (XF-series camcorders) that record on CF memory cards. Note

See page 514 for more information about the names and functions of the tool buttons.

All database types support links to virtual media.

c Disc database The disc database displays the connected devices that are supported under separate nodes, called databases. The following nodes can appear, depending on the type of device. • XDCAM Database: Devices that record on XDCAM discs.

When an XDCAM is connected The content of the XDCAM disc to be used for editing is displayed in tree format under “XDCAM Database”. Before you can start editing XDCAM material, the disc must be registered in the disc database. If you check the [Automatically Import from Inserted Discs] check box in the XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog (page 636), a new disc will be automatically registered when it is inserted. To

XDCAM Explorer

511

register a new disc manually, select [Cache Disc] from the main menu. Clip, EDL folders are displayed beneath each disc. Clip folder: Contains clips. EDL folder: Contains PD-EDL files. Sequence folder: Contains sequence data.

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

You can check the contents of the folders in the disc file list. To remove discs from the Tree List View pane, select the disc and press the Delete key. You can also right-click the disc and selecting Delete Disc from the context menu. You can also remove multiple discs simultaneously. To eject an XDCAM disc, right-click the disc to be removed and select Eject from the context menu. If the XDCAM disc is mounted using an FTP connection, the disc cannot be ejected. When an XDCAM EX card device is connected The content of the EX cards to be used for editing and the drive name are displayed in tree format under “XDCAM EX Database”. Clip folders are displayed under each EX card. When a device with UDF-formatted SxS card is connected The content of the SxS cards to be used for editing and the drive name are displayed in tree format under “XDCAM UDF Database”. Only the “Clip” folder is displayed under each SxS card. Before you can start editing clips on UDF-formatted SxS cards, the following conditions must be satisfied. • UDF-formatted cards recorded by camcorders (e.g. PMW-500) must contain the corresponding proxy clips • UDF-formatted SxS cards written using third-party software do not contain the corresponding proxy clips When a Canon XF-series camcorder is connected The content of the cards in Canon XF-series camcorder to be used for editing and the drive name are displayed in tree format under “Canon Database”. Clip folders are displayed under each Canon card. The high-resolution clips are used for previewing, as there are no proxy clips on Canon cards.

When several XDCAM devices are connected to the XPRI NS workstation, select the device you want from the dropdown list. EX card readers and P2 card readers are not displayed in this list. However, the drive name of the EX card reader or P2 card reader appears next to each card displayed under the EX database or P2 database of the disc database. e Catalog list box Specifies the target bin for importing the clip. f Disc file list Displays the content of the folders on the disc that is selected in the disc database. If you select a clip and press the Enter key, the clip is loaded into Source Viewer. • Picture View Mode (page 51) • Text View Mode (page 53) • Picture and Text View Mode (page 55) To change the size of the picture icon

1

Right-click on a blank section of the disc file list or a clip to bring up the context menu.

2

From the context menu, select [Picture Icon Size] and then select [Extra Large], [Large], [Medium], or [Small].

To change clip names You can change the clip names and PD-EDL names of XDCAM clips by using XDCAM Explorer. These changes are also applied to the clips stored on the disc. Note

You cannot change clip names for discs that are not inserted in the XDCAM deck. To enable clip renaming, you must set the connected XDCAM deck to Free Name mode beforehand. For more information about the configuration, refer to the operating instructions for the XDCAM deck.

1

When a P2 card device is connected The content of the P2 cards to be used for editing and the drive name are displayed in tree format under “P2 Database”. Clip folders are displayed under each P2 card. When searching using the Search dialog If you conduct a search using the Search Dialog (page 74), a Search folder is added to the disc database and the search results are saved in the Search folder. d Device list box Selects an XDCAM device to work with. It also displays the free space on the connected device.

512

XDCAM Explorer

Click the name of the clip you want to rename in XDCAM Explorer. The name is highlighted and a box appears around it. You can enter text in this box.

2

Enter a name and confirm it by pressing the Enter key or clicking anywhere outside the name. Notes

• You can enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 non-ASCII characters for clip names and PDL-EDL names. You cannot insert two or more spaces consecutively. The following symbols

cannot be used. “*/:?\| • You cannot rename XDCAM EX or P2 clip names.

Note

The metadata items that can be edited and written to media vary depending on the media type, media file system formatting, and connected device. h Track buttons Select tracks to be imported. Select from V and A1 to A8. By default all of the tracks in the material clip are selected. i Monitor Previews the clip that is selected in the disc file list. (PDEDL and sequence files cannot be previewed.) This allows you to check clip contents before importing clips. You can also set essence marks, and set Mark In and Mark Out points to specify a range to import. The proxy audio and video displayed here is loaded directly from the disc. The timecode at the top of the monitor is timecode recorded in the clip. The position bar at the bottom of the monitor shows the temporal axis of playback for the current file. On the position bar are a playline (a red line), which shows the current playback position, and marks to indicate the Mark In and Mark Out points. If the XDCAM device recorded essence marks in the file, marks appear at the frames that contain the essence marks. Video and audio data to be used for the preview are imported automatically to the hard disk when you load a disc into the XDCAM device and select [Import Disc MetaData] from the main menu. After importing, the video and audio preview can be carried out also when the disc is not loaded in the XDCAM device. Notes

• When an EX card reader or P2 card reader is connected, the files stored on the EX cards or P2 cards are always used for the previews. Preview video and audio data cannot be imported to the hard disk. XDCAM clips are previewed according the to configurations in the XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog (page 636). These configurations are only enabled during FAM connection. • Use the command buttons or keyboard (J, K, and L keys) for operations during preview. Jog/shuttle dial operation is disabled.

j Timecode display and entry section Mark In point: Displays the timecode of the material clip being previewed. Mark In point. You can change the displayed value by clicking this field to activate it and entering a new value from the numeric keypad on the keyboard. Mark Out point: Displays the timecode of the material clip being previewed. Mark Out point. You can change the displayed value by clicking this field to activate it and entering a new value from the numeric keypad on the keyboard. Duration: Displays the timecode of the material clip being previewed. duration. When multiple clips are selected, the timecode of the first clip is displayed, and it cannot be changed. The Mark In point, Mark Out point, and Duration fields display “--:--:-:--” when the corresponding timecode has not been set.

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

g Metadata window Displays the metadata of the clip that is selected in the disc file list. It also displays the free space and capacity of the disc inserted in the XDCAM device. The Title 1, Title 2, Comment, and Description fields can be added to or edited.

• The enabled audio tracks (XDCAM, EX, P2, EDL), excluding Dolby audio tracks, can also be previewed using the Audio Output Tool.

k Command button area Contains the command buttons of XDCAM Explorer. See XDCAM Explorer Command Button Area (page 516) for more information about the command button area.

Mismatch between registered disc database content and disc content Note

This function is only enabled when an XDCAM deck is connected. If essence marks were added, deleted, or comments were added in XDCAM Explorer, or if clips were added to or deleted from a disc in the offline state, the disc database content and the actual disc content will not be matched. In such a case, load the disc again and update the database as follows.

1

Load the disc and right-click on the entry in the XDCAM disc database to bring up the context menu.

2

Select [Update from Local to Disc] or [Update from Disc to Local] from the context menu.

Update from local to disc: Update the XDCAM disc database to reflect the actual content of the disc. Select this if the content of the disc was changed in the offline state, such as by adding or deleting clips. Update from disc to local: Update the disc to reflect the content of the XDCAM disc database. Select this if essence marks were set or deleted in the command area of XDCAM Explorer or if the Comment or Description metadata were edited in the metadata window.

XDCAM Explorer

513

XDCAM Explorer Tool Buttons XDCAM Explorer has the following tool buttons. Note

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

If the window is not wide enough to display all the tool buttons, scroll left and right through the buttons by rolling the mouse wheel while the cursor is on the tool button area, or by clicking the arrow buttons that appear on the left and right ends of the tool button area.

a XDCAM Import Tool b Import Timeline Tool c XDCAM Export Tool d XDCAM Explorer Properties e Search

l Storyboard View Mode k Auto Align Mode j Info View i Picture and Text View Mode h Text View Mode g Picture View Mode f Discs

a XDCAM Import Tool Starts the XDCAM Import Tool (see page 521) b Import Timeline Tool Starts the Import Timeline Clip Tool (see page 525). c XDCAM Export Tool Starts the XDCAM Export Tool (see page 527). d XDCAM Explorer Properties Opens the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog.

Current User Discs: shows discs imported by the current active user. All User Discs: shows discs imported by all users. Current Project Discs: shows discs imported in the currently open project. g Picture View Mode Puts the disc file list into Picture View mode. You can also switch to Picture View mode by selecting [View Mode] > [Picture View] from the context menu. See “Picture View Mode” (page 51) for more information.

See “XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog” (page 636) for more information.

e Search Opens the Search dialog (see page 74). Used to specify search criteria when searching for items.

h Text View Mode Puts the disc file list into Text View mode. You can also switch to Text View mode by selecting [View Mode] > [Text View] from the context menu. See “Text View Mode” (page 53) for more information.

f Discs Shows the discs selected in the drop-down menu in the disc file list.

514

XDCAM Explorer

i Picture and Text View Mode Puts the disc file list into Picture and Text View mode.

You can also switch to Picture and Text View mode by selecting [View Mode] > [Picture and Text View] from the context menu. See “Picture and Text View Mode” (page 55) for more information.

j Info View Shows and hides the metadata window. Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

k Auto Align Mode This is a Picture View mode option. When you move or create items with this button turned on, the items are aligned automatically in the disc file list. (This has the same effect as the [Arrange to the upper left] command in the context menu.) l Storyboard View Mode When the disc file list is in Picture View mode, switches it to Storyboard View mode. In this mode you can also move items, arrange them, and change the display size in the same way. (You cannot use the auto align mode.)

XDCAM Explorer

515

XDCAM Explorer Command Button Area This area contains command buttons for theXDCAM Explorer. Note

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

516

All of the command buttons are disabled and cannot be used when a PD-EDL file sequence is selected or when multiple clips are selected.

Note

The functions of buttons that can be placed in the command button area can also be assigned to control panel buttons and keyboard keys. Default command button configuration

By default the buttons in the XDCAM Explorer command button area are arranged as shown in the figure below. You can customize the command button area by selecting [Customize] (see page 518) from the main menu. Icon

Button name

Button function

Go to In

Jumps to the In point, if it exists. If phantom marks are displayed, jumps to the start phantom mark.

Go to Out

Jumps to the Out point, if it exists. If phantom marks are displayed, jumps to the end phantom mark.

Mark In

Marks an In point. You can click this button during play, or after dragging the playline to the point you want to set as the In point. If an In point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Play

Plays from the current position to the end. Becomes a Stop button during play.

Mark Out

Marks an Out point. You can click this button during play, or after dragging the playline to the point you want to set as the Out point. You can also set an Out point by clicking this button after you enter a timecode value with the numeric keypad. If an Out point is already set when this button is clicked, it is reset to the new point.

Go to Previous Marker

Jumps to the previous mark.

Go to Next Marker

Jumps to the next mark.

Mark List

Opens the Marker List dialog.

Set Essence Mark

Sets an essence mark.

Delete Mark

Deletes a mark.

Play In to Out

Plays from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point. When clicked with the Alt key held down, starts loop play from the Mark In point to the Mark Out point.

Clear Both Marks

Clears both the Mark In and Mark Out points (or the existing point, when only one has been set).

Replace

Places the clip on the sequence in Replace mode.

Splice-In

Places the clip onto the sequence in Splice-In mode.

Overwrite

Places the clip onto the sequence in Overwrite mode.

Digitize

Imports the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points set in the monitor screen.

XDCAM Explorer

Icon

Button name

Button function

Create New Clip

Creates a new clip in Project Explorer using the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points specified in the monitor screen. The duration of the created clip is equal to the length between the Mark In and Mark Out points plus the length of the margins.

Stop

Stops play.

All Stop

Stops all operations. Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

Command buttons available through customization Icon

Button name

Button function

Step Backward

Steps one frame back with each click.

Step Forward

Steps one frame forward with each click.

Step Backward 10 Frames Steps back 10 frames with each click. Step Forward 10 Frames

Steps forward 10 frames with each click.

Play to Out

Plays the clip from the current position to the Out point.

Play Reverse

Plays in the reverse direction (from the current position to the start point).The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When clicked with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Play Forward

Plays in the forward direction (from the current position to the end point).The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When clicked with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/16 times normal speed.

Still

Pauses play at the current position.

Go to Start

Jumps from the playline position to the clip start point.

Go to End

Jumps from the playline position to the clip end point.

Go to Previous Event

Jumps to the previous event.

Go to Next Event

Jumps to the next event.

Clear In Mark

Clears an In point.

Clear Out Mark

Clears an Out point.

Set Duration

Sets the duration.

XDCAM Explorer Main Menu

The main menu contains the following commands and subcommands.

Click the Menu button in XDCAM Explorer to display the XDCAM Explorer main menu.

XDCAM Explorer

517

Cache Disc Loads proxy video and audio from the disc specified to the disc database using the XDCAM Import Tool. This proxy media can be played back on the XDCAM Explorer monitor screen.

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

Import Media File Sends information about clips on the disc selected in the disc database to the Import XDCAM tool. The disc must be loaded in an XDCAM device. If the [Automatically Start Import Tasks] check box in the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog is checked, the clip media file import begins automatically after the transfer finishes. If the check box is cleared, the import must be started manually. Note

The name of the menu item displayed varies with the selected device. For example, [Import Card Media File] for card media or [Import Disc Media File] for disc media, and so on. Delete Disc Deletes the specified disc from the disc database. Export Tool Starts the XDCAM Export Tool (see page 527). Import Tool Starts the XDCAM Import Tool (see page 521). Timeline Clip Upload Starts the Import Timeline Clip Tool (see page 525). Delete Deletes the clip selected in the disc file list. When you select this menu item, a dialog appears for confirmation that you want to delete the clip. Note

Proceed with care, because this operation will delete the clip from the original XDCAM disc. The clip cannot be restored once it has been deleted. Link to Virtual Media Opens the Link to Virtual Media Dialog (see page 519). Import Disc Metadata Loads proxy video and audio from the disc specified to the disc database using the XDCAM Import Tool. This proxy media can be played back on the XDCAM Explorer monitor screen. XDCAM Device Settings Starts the XDCAM Device Settings Dialog (see page 646). Selection Displays the following subcommands for selecting clips. Select All: Selects all clips in the disc file list.

518

XDCAM Explorer

Invert Selection: Deselects all selections in the disc file list, and selects all deselected clips. User Configuration Displays the sets of XDCAM Properties configured in the Configuration dialog. View Displays the following subcommands for selecting the display mode of the disc database. Refresh: Refreshes the information displayed in the disc database. Info View: Shows or hides the area at the bottom of XDCAM Explorer (track buttons, monitor, timecode display and entry, command buttons, and metadata window). Customize Opens a window for customization operations. This command has the following subcommands. Command Buttons...: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570), which allows you to customize command button areas by selecting and rearranging command buttons. Keyboard...: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (page 572) which allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. Control Panel...: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574), which allows you to assign command button functions to the buttons on the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. Help... Displays help about XDCAM Explorer. Maximize The command at this position in the main menu becomes [Maximize] when the window is not maximized. Selecting it maximizes the window. Minimize Minimizes the XDCAM Explorer window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Close Closes the XDCAM Explorer window.

Link to Virtual Media Dialog Overview

To Link to Virtual Media Before linking to virtual media, the overall folder structure and content on storage media must be copied onto different media (such as a local hard disk, removable hard drive, or network drive) using the ordinary Windows copy functions.

1

6

Click the [OK] button to mount the virtual media in XDCAM Explorer.

The content is automatically displayed in the disc database under the node corresponding to the source data type in XDCAM Explorer. Virtual media is distinguished from “real” media by a dotted outline around the icon (for example, for virtual EX media displayed under the XDCAM EX Database node). After mounting virtual media in XDCAM Explorer, the media can be renamed or deleted in the disc database. Deleting or renaming the virtual media does not delete nor rename the Windows folder containing the source content. Clips on virtual media can be previewed and imported just as for clips on the original media, with the added benefit of speed due to the local storage of the content.

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

The Link to Virtual Media dialog allows you to share contents on storage media, providing an advanced way to manage and manipulate clips via the XDCAM Explorer. It links content copied from a device onto other media with XDCAM Explorer, without requiring that the source device be connected. This means content from a source device can be copied onto storage and then linked with XDCAM Explorer at a later time, freeing up the source device for other use as quickly as possible. The virtual media function supports all the content types supported in XDCAM Explorer.

path to the Windows folder is added to the [Link to Virtual Media] window.

Notes

• Writing to virtual media is not supported. Clips cannot be deleted from virtual media, clip metadata cannot be modified, and virtual media cannot be selected as a destination for exporting clips. • Do not rename the Windows folder or add multiple links to the same virtual media.

Create a new folder on the destination media (e.g. hard drive) to receive the content from a source device. Link to virtual media uses the new Windows folder to mount the content, not the top-level folder in the folder structure of the content.

2

Copy the entire folder structure from the source device into the new folder using Windows copy functions. Note that the folder structure on XDCAM discs and on UDF-formatted SxS memory cards does not contain a single, top-level “main” folder. In this case, copy all the folders and data into the new folder.

3

Select [Link to Virtual Media] from the main menu of XDCAM Explorer to open the [Link to Virtual Media] dialog.

4

Click the [Add] button to open the [Select Path] dialog.

5

Browse to select the folder created in step 1, and click the [OK] button. Note that the new Windows folder must be selected, not the top-level folder for the source content. The

Link to Virtual Media Dialog

519

Names and Functions of Parts a Virtual media list

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

c Delete button b Add button

a Virtual media list Displays the list of virtual media linked with XDCAM Explorer. Name: Displays the name of the linked folder in Windows. The folder name is also the default name displayed in the disc database in XDCAM Explorer. Path: Displays the full path of the linked folder in Windows. UNC network paths are not supported. To mount a network resource, map the resource to a network drive in Windows first. Type: Displays the database type for the virtual media. The type is detected automatically from the content in the linked folder. b Add button Opens the [Select Path] dialog to add a folder as virtual media linked to XDCAM Explorer. c Delete button Deletes a linked folder from the list of virtual media. d OK button Mounts the linked folders as virtual media in XDCAM Explorer and closes the [Link to Virtual Media] dialog.

520

Link to Virtual Media Dialog

e Cancel button d OK button

e Cancel button Closes the dialog without registering changes to the linked folders.

XDCAM Import Tool Overview

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

The XDCAM Import Tool is a tool for creating clips by batch import of material clips selected in XDCAM Explorer. To start the XDCAM Import Tool, click the XDCAM Import Tool button in XDCAM Explorer, or select [XDCAM Import Tool] from the menu. Note

High (full) resolution data cannot be imported from XDCAM clips in another project. Copy the target clip before importing.

XDCAM Import Tool

521

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button

2 Import clip list

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

4 Device list box

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the XDCAM Import Tool. The main menu has the following commands. XDCAM Device Setting: Opens the XDCAM Device Setting dialog. Properties: Opens the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. Help: Displays help about the XDCAM Import Tool. Minimize: Minimizes the XDCAM Import Tool window and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Maximize: When the window is not at maximum size, the “Maximize” command is shown and allows maximizing the XDCAM Import Tool window. Close: Closes the XDCAM Import Tool window. b Import clip list Displays a list of clips on the disc that is loaded in the import source device, with information about each of the clips. You can click clips in the list, selecting them, to make them targets of import or deletion operations. In addition, a progress bar is displayed to show the progress of the clip currently being imported. By right-clicking a clip in the import clip list, you can start or stop import operations from the context menu that appears. Start: Imports all the clips displayed in the import clip list from the disc currently specified. Pause: Pauses import for the selected clip. Move Up: Move the selected clip up one row. Move Top: Move the selected clip to the top. Move Down: Move the selected clip down one row.

522

XDCAM Import Tool

3 Operation buttons

Move Bottom: Move the selected clip to the bottom. Delete: Removes the selected clip from the list. You can also use the Delete key to remove clips. Execute One: Starts import for only the selected clip. c Device list box Selects the import source device. It also displays the free space on the connected device. When several XDCAM devices are connected to the XPRI NS workstation, select the device you want from the dropdown list. This setting is disabled during connection to an XDCAM EX card or P2 card. d Operation buttons Execute: Imports all of the clips on the target disc in the import clip list. Stop: Stops an import. Del Disc: Deletes all of the clips on the target disc from the import clip list. Clear: Clears the import clip list. To change the order of import The default order for importing of clips is the same order in which the clips were selected. You can change the order in which the clips are imported by right-clicking a clip in the import clip list and selecting Move Up (move up one), Move Down (move down one), Move Top (move to top), or Move Bottom (move to bottom) from the context menu. The clips are also displayed in Project Explorer in the same imported they are imported.

There are two different modes for accessing material from connected devices using XDCAM Explorer, linking and importing. In addition, there are two methods for importing material, copying and parsing. The differences between the modes are described below.

The link indicator on the icon is removed only if the highresolution and low-resolution media for linked clips have been imported into XPRI NS. The clip link, however, is maintained even after the clip has been imported. Any changes to the imported clip in XPRI NS are reflected back to the linked clip on the original media. Note

The editing efficiency of editing clips on the original media using link mode varies with the device. Import Mode In Import Mode, the clips on the original media are imported into XPRI NS. There are two methods for importing clips. • Copy: In copy import mode, the clips are copied in their entirety as-is in their original format from the source media into XPRI NS. • Parser: In parser import mode, the clips are parsed and wrapped into the AVI+WAV native format of XPRI NS during importing into XPRI NS. Also, it is possible to import a portion of a clip. Parser import mode also has better performance due to the use of the XPRI NS native format. Once material has been imported into XPRI NS, it is not possible to link to the clips on the original media, even if Link mode is selected. The local versions of the clips are always used if available. Once material has been imported, the import file method cannot be changed and the material reimported as a new file.

To Load Clips from XDCAM Explorer You can load clips from devices listed in the XDCAM Explorer window. Do one of the following. • Double click the clip in XDCAM Explorer to load it into to the Source Viewer. • Drag and drop the clip from XDCAM Explorer directly to Project Explorer, Source Viewer, Master Viewer, or the timeline.

When linking to video and audio data on source media Video and audio data linked from media is played back directly from the media (media native format). When both high-resolution clips and low-resolution proxy clips are stored on the media, both the clips are linked to the clips in the timeline. For example, if the user switches to proxy mode display on the timeline after editing the clip, the clip can still be previewed. When there is no corresponding proxy on the media, only the high-resolution MXF clip is linked.

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

Link Mode In Link Mode, the clips on the original media are accessed directly by XPRI NS without importing the clips into XPRI NS. A linked clip can be accessed in its entirety only; it is not possible to link to a portion of a clip. Linked clips can also be subsequently imported, if desired. A special link indicator on the icon for clips is displayed for linked clips in Project Explorer.

• Select [Add to Timeline] or [Load into Source Viewer] from the clip context menu in XDCAM Explorer. The clips are linked to the files on the source media if [Link Mode] is enabled in the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. Conversely, the clips are physically imported from the source media into XPRI NS if [Link Mode] is disabled.

When importing video and audio data to the hard disk Imported clips can be either imported in their original format (copy import mode) or wrapped into the AVI+WAV native format of XPRI NS (parser import mode). The import method is selected by the [File Import] setting in the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. Do one of the following. • Open the clip context menu in XDCAM Explorer, and select [Upload]. Select [Low] for low-resolution proxy, [High] for high-resolution clip, or [High/Low] for both. The resolution options shown depend on the availability of clips in both resolutions on the disc or memory card. For example, memory cards for Canon FX-series camcorders do not contain proxy files. • Click the XDCAM Import Tool button or Import Timeline Tool button in the toolbar, or select from the main menu to use the tools. • Select [Import Media Clips] from the main menu. The menu item displayed varies with the selected device. For example, [Import Card Media File] for card media or [Import Disc Media File] for disc media. • From Project Explorer, open the context menu and select [Upload Clip]. Select [Import Low] for low-resolution proxy, [Import High] for high-resolution clip, or [Import All] for both. The resolution options shown depend on the availability of clips in both resolutions. • If the clip is loaded in the timeline, open the context menu for a clip and select [Import XDCAM Clips] to start the Import Timeline Clip Tool. When importing a partial clip Importing a partial clip is only supported using the Parser import method. Parser import method is selected by the [File Import] setting in the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. Do one of the following.

XDCAM Import Tool

523

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

• In the preview window of XDCAM Explorer, mark In and Out points and then click the [Digitize] button or [Create New Clip] button. • In the Timeline window, mark In and Out points, then open the context menu for a clip on the timeline and select [Import Media Clips], where Media is the type of media database (for example, XDCAM, XDCAM EX, etc,) in the XDCAM Explorer window. If a proxy clip is available on the media, the proxy is also imported with the high-resolution clip. If no corresponding proxy exists for a clip, a proxy can be created. Check the [Create Proxy when no proxy rooted in card] check box in the XDCAM Properties dialog to generate a proxy after the high-resolution clip is imported. When importing clips that span more than one card For example, if a single recorded clip spans three cards (A, B, and C), the same clip is displayed when any one of the cards is inserted. The spanning clip indicator appears in the disc file list of the XDCAM Explorer. A red check mark is displayed if a portion of the clip is missing. The duration of each component clip is indicated by a green dot when the clip is previewed in the XDCAM Explorer monitor window. If only cards A and C are inserted, a black screen will appear for the portion of the clip on the missing card B.

If you import the clip in such cases, a new clip will be created in Project Explorer, but a black screen will appear for the missing sections from card B. If you insert card B and perform import, video and audio will be added to the missing sections of part B. Limitations • There is a 4GB limit on the length of clips on FATformatted cards. There is no limit on the length of clips on UDF-formatted SxS cards. • Canon XF-series cameras support a special recording mode, called interval recording mode. In this mode, long clips are automatically divided based on a predefined interval. There are several intervals that can be set on XF-series cameras. Clips spanning intervals are treated as span clips in XRPI NS. • Do not remove media while import is in progress. If the media is removed, an Offline Media condition is detected. Click a different bin to change window focus or click the Refresh button on the toolbar.

524

XDCAM Import Tool

• If the [Automatically Start Import Tasks] check box is not checked in the General Settings of the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog, you must import the clips manually. • As proxy (low resolution) media cannot be stored on an EX card, only high (full) resolution playback will be possible for EX clips created in the project. • During editing, digitized indicators for clip icons in Project Explorer will be displayed in gray (no media) for both full-resolution media and proxy media. • Material cannot be played back if the media is removed. • You cannot mix native format edited data and high (full) resolution data within a single clip. If a portion of a clip’s high (full) resolution data is imported, the remaining portion becomes media offline. • When rendering a timeline on which a Render To Bin clip is placed, rendering is performed using the Render To Bin clip’s original clip to maintain a high image quality. As a result, a media offline display may occur if an edited clip is used to create the Render To Bin clip. In such cases, import the clip onto the hard disk before using it. • Real-time playback is not guaranteed during editing. In such cases, import the video and audio data to the hard disk. • Information about each sub clip in an XDCAM composite clip is NOT displayed in the Clip Relatives tab of the Metadata window in Project Explorer. • P2 clips can be imported using the native codec or transcoded. When transcoded, the following codec mappings are applied. - DVCPRO (25M) > MPEG IMX 30 - DVCPRO 50 > MPEG IMX50 - DVCPRO 100 > MPEG HD 35M - AVC Intra 50/100 > MPEG HD 50M If a P2 clip is linked by drag & drop or by doubleclicking, a “P2MXF” string is prefixed to the native codec name. If the clip is imported using the XDCAM Explorer menus or buttons, the clip can be imported using the native codec for best picture quality. When [Native Import] is checked in the P2 Settings screen, the media is imported using the native codec. When it is unchecked, the clip is transcoded. The codec used to import the clip is saved as a clip property, and is not changed if the clip is subsequently reimported. Note

When importing a P2 clip using the Import File Tool, select the [Transcode] checkbox to transcode the input file. If the [Transcode] checkbox is not checked, the clip is imported using the native codec.

Import Timeline Clip Tool Overview

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

The Import Timeline Clip Tool allows you to re-import clips on the timeline. For example, when you have placed proxy media only on the timeline, you can re-import only the used portions as full-resolution clips.

To start the Import Timeline Clip Tool Do one of the following. • Click the Import Timeline Tool button in XDCAM Explorer. • Select [Timeline Clip Upload] from the XDCAM Explorer main menu. • Click the XDCAM Import Timeline Clips button in Timeline Editor or Master Viewer. • Right-click the video clip in Timeline Editor, and select [Import XDCAM Clips].

Import Timeline Clip Tool

525

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button 2 Import timeline clip list 3 Settings area Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

5 Stop button 4 Import button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Import Timeline Clip Tool. The main menu has the following commands and subcommands. Help...: Displays help about the Import Timeline Clip Tool. Close: Closes the Import Timeline Clip Tool window. b Import timeline clip list Displays a list of import source clips on the timeline, with information about each of the clips. You can click clips in the list, selecting them, to make them targets of import or deletion operations. In addition, a progress bar is displayed to show the progress of the clip currently being imported. c Settings area Contains settings that allow you to specify what to import. Device list box: Selects the import source device. It also displays the free space on the connected device. When several XDCAM devices are connected to the XPRI NS workstation, select the device you want from the drop-down list. Quality list box: Selects the resolution. You can select High Quality or Low Quality from the list. Mode list box: Selects the range over which clips are imported. Select Clips: The range consists of the clips selected on the timeline.

526

Import Timeline Clip Tool

IN/OUT: The range is the range between the In and Out points on the timeline. ALL: The range is all clips on the timeline. Margin: Specifies margins before the Mark In point and after the Mark Out point. [Imp (Import) Used Portion] check box: When this is checked, only those portions that are in use on the timeline are imported. [Search Sub TL] check box: When this is checked, searches the timeline for sub sequences. This checkbox is displayed only when there are sub sequences on the timeline. Note

You can also specify the length of the margins added before and after the In and Out points of clips. This setting is made in the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. d Import button Sends the import clips specified in the settings area to the XDCAM Import Tool. e Stop button Stops the import.

XDCAM Export Tool Overview

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

The XDCAM Export Tool allows you to create and export MXF format files (see page 509) from project clips and sequences. Sequences and clips can be exported if they meet the following conditions. • Clips: The clips are already digitized. • Sequences: No clips on the timeline are media offline. All sequences and clips are exported with 4-channel audio. On EX devices that do not support 4-channel audio, only the front 2 channels can be previewed. The exporting of clips to UDF-formatted SxS memory cards and Canon XF camcorders is not supported. Note

The following limitations apply to MXF files to be recorded by XDCAM devices. • Playback duration must be 2 seconds or more. • Only high-res MXF files support export with VITC timecode information.

To Start the XDCAM Export Tool The XDCAM Export Tool screen display will vary depending on the destination media selected in the disc database of XDCAM Explorer.

1

Select the export destination. • To export to XDCAM discs, select a disc icon or XDCAM folder in the XDCAM database. • To export to XDCAM EX cards, select a drive or folder in the XDCAM EX database.

2

Click the XDCAM Export Tool button in XDCAM Explorer, or select [XDCAM Export Tool] from the main menu.

Note

• The XDCAM Export Tool cannot be started in the following cases. • When the selected clip has not been digitized. • When the selected clip or sequence has no video tracks. • When import is in progress in the XDCAM Import Tool. • Do not remove media while export is in progress. If the media is removed, an Offline Media condition is detected. Click a different bin to change window focus or click the Refresh button on the toolbar.

XDCAM Export Tool

527

Names and Functions of Parts The following is the display when exporting to XDCAM EX discs.

1 Menu button 2 Tabs Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

4 Device list box

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the XDCAM Export Tool. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the XDCAM Export Tool. Close: Closes the XDCAM Export Tool window. b Tabs Switch between the tabs of the XDCAM Export Tool. There are four tabs. • Clip tab (see page 529) • Combination tab (see page 532) • PD-EDL tab (see page 534) • Sequence tab (see page 536) If an XDCAM EX card is selected as the destination for export, the PD-EDL and Sequence tabs do not appear. c Format list box Selects the bit rate (25M bps/35M bps) for the export file. Appears only when an XDCAM EX card is selected as the destination for export. It does not appear for XDCAM export tasks. d Device list box When multiple XDCAM decks, EX card readers are connected to the XPRI NS workstation, select the destination deck or card reader for export from the list. It also displays the free space on the connected device.

528

3 Format list box

XDCAM Export Tool

Clip Tab The Clip tab allows you to export clips.

a Clip List

b Monitor

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

c Shuttle slider

d Metadata

h Stop button

f Delete button

g Export button

e Add Clip button

a Clip List Displays a list of clips targeted for export. The Mark In point and Duration for each clip can be entered directly using the numeric keypad. A progress bar is also displayed for the for the clip currently being exported. Renaming clips for export You change the names of clips in the clip list. These changes are also applied to the clips stored on the disc. Note

To enable clip renaming, you must set the connected XDCAM deck to Free Name mode beforehand. For more information, refer to the operating instructions for the XDCAM deck.

1

Click the name of the clip you want to rename in the clip list. The name is highlighted and a box appears around it. You can enter text in this box.

2

Enter a name and confirm it by pressing the Enter key or clicking anywhere outside the name.

Note

You can enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 non-ASCII characters for clip names. The following symbols cannot be used. “*/:?\| b Monitor Displays the first frame of the clip selected in the Clip List. c Shuttle slider Drag the knob for variable speed playback in the forward and reverse directions. d Metadata Displays metadata for the clip being previewed. • File Format • Compression (compression format) • Frame Size • Color Depth e Add Clip button Opens the Select Clip dialog (see page 531), so that you can select clips to export. Clips are exported in the same order that they are added to the export list.

XDCAM Export Tool

529

f Delete button Deletes the clip selected in the Clip List. g Export button Starts the export of the clips selected in the Clip List. h Stop button Stops the export. Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

530

XDCAM Export Tool

Select Clip dialog The Select Clip dialog allows you to select clips for export. To open the Select Clip dialog Click the Add Clip button in the Clip tab of the XDCAM Export Tool.

1 Tree pane

3 Clip properties area

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

2 Clip pane

5 Cancel button 4 OK button

a Tree pane Displays a tree structure that allows you to select the bin containing the clip to export. b Clip pane Displays icons for the clips contained in the bin selected in the tree pane. c Clip properties area Displays the properties of the clip selected in the clip pane. • Name • Creation (date and time of creation) • Catalog Name • Keyword • Description d OK button When clicked with a clip selected in the clip pane, registered the selected clip in the Clip tab of the XDCAM Export Tool. e Cancel button Closes the dialog without registering a clip in the Clip tab of the XDCAM Export Tool.

XDCAM Export Tool

531

Combination Tab The Combination tab allows you to export sequences.

a Sequence list

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

g Stop button f Export button e Delete button d Select Sequence button c Current Sequence button b Valid Region

a Sequence list Displays a list of sequences targeted for export, with information about each of the sequences. The Mark In point and Duration for each sequence can be entered directly using the numeric keypad. A progress bar is also displayed for the for the sequence currently being exported.

2

Renaming sequences for export You change the names of sequences in the sequence list. These changes are also applied to the sequences stored on the disc.

You can enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 non-ASCII characters for sequence names. The following symbols cannot be used. “*/:?\|

Note

To enable sequence renaming, you must set the connected XDCAM deck to Free Name mode beforehand. For more information, refer to the operating instructions for the XDCAM deck.

1

532

Click the name of the sequence you want to rename in the sequence list.

XDCAM Export Tool

The name is highlighted and a box appears around it. You can enter text in this box. Enter a name and confirm it by pressing the Enter key or clicking anywhere outside the name.

Note

b Valid Region Select the section to be exported. Entire: Exports the entire sequence. Mark In / Out: Exports the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points specified on the timeline. Valid Area: Exports only the tracks within the sequence that are currently valid.

c Current Sequence button Adds the currently open sequence to the sequence list. d Select Sequence button Opens the Select Program dialog. Select a sequence to export and click OK. e Delete button Deletes the sequence selected in the sequence list. Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

f Export button Starts the export of the sequences selected in the sequence list. g Stop button Stops the export.

XDCAM Export Tool

533

PD-EDL Tab The PD-EDL tab allows you to export sequence information as a PD-EDL file. You can also use it to export only the clips contained in a sequence. This tab does not appear if an XDCAM EX card is selected as the destination for export. Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

a Clip Not In Disc list b PD-EDL In Disc list

g Stop button f Overwrite button e New button d [Export Existed Clip] check box c [Export Used Portion] check box

534

a Clip Not In Disc list Displays the clips that do not exist on the XDCAM device.

e New button Exports the selected sequence as a new PD-EDL file.

b PD-EDL In Disc list Displays clips in a PD-EDL on an XDCAM device. c [Export Used Portion] check box When this check box is checked, only clips that are in use on the timeline are exported. The length of the margins follows the setting made in the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog.

f Overwrite button Exports the sequence, overwriting clips that already exist on the XDCAM device. When you click this button, a dialog for entering a name for the PD-EDL file appears. The name of the selected PD-EDL is pre-entered. If you need to change the name, enter a new name and click the OK button in this dialog.

d [Export Existed Clip] check box When this check box is cleared, clips which already exist on the XDCAM device are not exported. When it is checked, clips are exported as new clips even if they already exist on the XDCAM device.

You can enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 non-ASCII characters for PD-EDL names. The following symbols cannot be used. “*/:?\|

XDCAM Export Tool

Note

g Stop button Stops the export.

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

XDCAM Export Tool

535

Sequence Tab The Sequence tab allows you to export sequence data in XPRI NS format. This tab does not appear if an XDCAM EX card is selected as the destination for export.

• • • • •

Still image clips: α data cannot be saved. CG (Subtitle): Become empty CG clips. CG (Scroll Screen): Become empty CG clips. TitleMotion clips: Become media offline clips. Audio tracks: Limited to 4 channels.

Note Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

When exporting sequences to an XDCAM device, the following limitations apply.

1 Clip Not in Disc list 2 Sequence In Disc list

0 Stop button 9 Overwrite button 8 New button 7 [Export Used Portion] check box 6 [Export CG Clip] check box 5 [Export Sub Sequence Clip] check box 4 [Export Existed Clip] check box 3 [Export Clip] check box

a Clip Not In Disc list Displays the clips that do not exist on the XDCAM device.

becomes media offline. When it is checked, clips are exported along with the sequence information.

b Sequence In Disk list Displays clips in a PD-EDL on an XDCAM device.

d [Export Existed Clip] check box When this check box is cleared, clips which already exist on the XDCAM device are not exported. When it is checked, clips are exported as new clips even if they already exist on the XDCAM device.

c [Export Clip] check box When this check box is cleared, sequence information only is exported. This means that the exported sequence

536

XDCAM Export Tool

e [Export Sub Sequence Clip] check box When this check box is checked, the contained sub sequences are exported when part or all of other sequences are contained in a sequence. When it is cleared, sub sequences are not exported. This means that the sections corresponding to the sub sequences become blank.

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

f [Export CG Clip] check box When this check box is checked, clips that contain alpha information, including TitleMotion, Subtitle CG, and picture clips, are exported to a package file and the corresponding metadata is saved in the sequence structure. If you import a sequence that has been exported without this option on, the content corresponding to the CG clips will display a black screen. Note

The clips are saved as “.pck” package files in the “\General\Pxxxx\” directory. g [Export Used Portion] check box When this check box is checked, only clips that are in use on the timeline are exported. The length of the margins follows the setting made in the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. This box is valid only when the [Export Clip] check box is checked. h New button Exports the selected sequence as a new PD-EDL file. i Overwrite button Exports the sequence, overwriting PD-EDL files that already exist on the XDCAM device. When you click this button, a dialog for entering a name for the sequence appears. The name of the selected sequence is pre-entered. If you need to change the name, enter a new name and click the OK button in this dialog. Note

You can enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 non-ASCII characters for sequence names. The following symbols cannot be used. “*/:?\| j Stop button Stops the export.

XDCAM Export Tool

537

P2 Export Tool Overview

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

The P2 Export Tool allows you to create and export MXF format files (see page 509) from project clips and sequences. Sequences and clips can be exported if they meet the following conditions. • Clips: The clips are already digitized. • Sequences: No clips on the timeline are media offline. Note

The following limitations apply to MXF files to be recorded by P2 devices. • Playback duration must be 2 seconds or more. • File names must be in the ASCII character set. • Clips that consist of audio tracks only cannot be exported. • Dolby E audio tracks are not output.

To Start the P2 Export Tool

1

Select a drive or folder in the P2 database as the export destination.

2

Click the XDCAM Export Tool button in XDCAM Explorer, or select [XDCAM Export Tool] from the main menu.

Note

• The P2 Export Tool cannot be started in the following cases. • When the selected clip has not been digitized. • When the selected clip or sequence has no video tracks. • When importing with XDCAM Import Tool is in progress. • Do not remove P2 cards while export is in progress. If the media is removed, an Offline Media condition is detected. Click a different bin to change window focus or click the Refresh button on the toolbar.

538

P2 Export Tool

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button 2 Tabs

3 Format list box 4 Device list box Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the P2 Export Tool. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the P2 Export Tool. Close: Closes the P2 Export Tool window. b Tabs Switch between the tabs of the P2 Export Tool. There are two tabs. • Clip tab (see page 540) • Combination tab (see page 542) c Format list box Selects the bit rate (DVCPro25, DVCPro50, DV100) for the export file. d Device list box When multiple P2 cards are connected to the XPRI NS workstation, select the destination card for export from the list.

P2 Export Tool

539

Clip Tab The Clip tab allows you to export clips.

a Clip List

b Monitor

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

c Shuttle slider

d Metadata

f Delete button e Add Clip button

g Export button

a Clip List Displays a list of clips targeted for export. The Mark In point and Duration for each clip can be entered directly using the numeric keypad. A progress bar is also displayed for the for the clip currently being exported.

b Monitor Displays the first frame of the clip selected in the Clip List.

Renaming clips for export You change the names of clips in the clip list. These changes are also applied to the clips stored on the disc.

d Metadata Displays metadata for the clip being previewed. • File Format • Compression (compression format) • Frame Size • Color Depth

1

Click the name of the clip you want to rename in the clip list. The name is highlighted and a box appears around it. You can enter text in this box.

2

Enter a name and confirm it by pressing the Enter key or clicking anywhere outside the name.

Note

You can enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 non-ASCII characters for clip names. The following symbols cannot be used. “*/:?\|

540

h Stop button

P2 Export Tool

c Shuttle slider Drag the knob for variable speed playback in the forward and reverse directions.

e Add Clip button Opens the Select Clip dialog (see page 541), so that you can select clips to export. f Delete button Deletes the clip selected in the Clip List. g Export button Starts the export of the clips selected in the Clip List. h Stop button Stops the export.

Select Clip dialog The Select Clip dialog allows you to select clips for export. To open the Select Clip dialog Click the Add Clip button in the Clip tab of the P2 Export Tool.

1 Tree pane

2 Clip pane Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

3 Clip properties area

5 Cancel button 4 OK button

a Tree pane Displays a tree structure that allows you to select the bin containing the clip to export. b Clip pane Displays icons for the clips contained in the bin selected in the tree pane. c Clip properties area Displays the properties of the clip selected in the clip pane. • Name • Creation (date and time of creation) • Catalog Name • Keyword • Description d OK button When clicked with a clip selected in the clip pane, registered the selected clip in the Clip tab of the P2 Export Tool. e Cancel button Closes the dialog without registering a clip in the Clip tab of the P2 Export Tool.

P2 Export Tool

541

Combination Tab The Combination tab allows you to export sequences.

a Sequence list

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

g Stop button f Export button e Delete button d Select Sequence button c Current Sequence button b Valid Region

a Sequence list Displays a list of sequences targeted for export, with information about each of the sequences. The Mark In point and Duration for each sequence can be entered directly using the numeric keypad. A progress bar is also displayed for the for the sequence currently being exported. Renaming sequences for export You change the names of sequences in the sequence list. These changes are also applied to the sequences stored on the disc.

1

Click the name of the sequence you want to rename in the sequence list. The name is highlighted and a box appears around it. You can enter text in this box.

2

542

Enter a name and confirm it by pressing the Enter key or clicking anywhere outside the name.

P2 Export Tool

Note

You can enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 non-ASCII characters for sequence names. The following symbols cannot be used. “*/:?\| b Valid Region Select the section to be exported. Entirely: Exports the entire sequence. Mark In / Out: Exports the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points specified on the timeline. Valid Area: Exports only the tracks within the sequence that are currently valid. c Current Sequence button Adds the currently open sequence to the sequence list. d Select Sequence button Opens the Select Program dialog. Select a sequence to export and click OK.

e Delete button Deletes the sequence selected in the sequence list. f Export button Starts the export of the sequences selected in the sequence list. g Stop button Stops the export. Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

P2 Export Tool

543

XDCAM Archive (XDA) Overview

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

544

XDA is a media asset management system that utilizes virtual disc management for media management from HDD online storage to XDCAM disc offline storage. XPRI supports the exchange of clips and related metadata with XDCAM Archive. You transfer files between to and from XDCAM Archive using a web browser interface. Clips and sequences can be archived to XDCAM Archive, but only clips can be retrieved from XDCAM Archive. Content can be exchanged if it meets the following conditions. • Only clips with video and audio data can be exchanged with XDCAM Archive, even though XDCAM can store other kinds of materials. Audio clips or other types of clip cannot be exchanged. • Only clips with a supported compression format can be imported. The compression format must also be supported in XDCAM Archive, even if the material can be stored in XDCAM Archive as data. Refer to the Release Notes for the latest information about compression formats. • NTSC and PAL standards cannot be mixed when retrieving clips from XDCAM Archive. • Transcoding of MXF clips is not supported when retrieving from XDCAM Archive. • Only High-res clips can be retrieved. Low-res clip retrieval is not supported.

XDCAM Archive (XDA)

Supported Formats Video standard

Bit rate

File format

Transcode (for retrieval)

MPEG2 4:2:2P@ML (MPEG IMX)

720x512

59.94i

30/40/50 Mbps

MXF/AVI

No

720x608

50i

MPEG2 MP@HL Long GOP

1440x1080

59.94i, 50i

35 Mbps

1440x1080

59.94i, 50i

25 Mbps

1440x1080

59.94i, 50i

18 Mbps

1920x1080

59.94i, 50i

35 Mbps

MP4

No

MXF/AVI

No

MXF OP-atom

No

MPEG-TS

Yes

MPEG2 422P@HL Long GOP DVCAM DVCPRO 25 DVCPRO 50 DVCPRO HD

AVCHD

1440x1080

59.94i, 50i

25 Mbps

1920x1080

59.94i, 50i

50 Mbps 25 Mbps

720x480

59.94i

720x576

50i

720x480

59.94i

720x576

50i

720x480

59.94i

720x576

50i

1280x1080 (1920x1080 for display), 8-bit

59.94i

1440x1080 (1920x1080 for display), 8-bit

50i

1920x1080

59.94i, 50i

1440x1080

59.94i, 50i

Setup Configuration The following setup configuration is required to exchange content with XDCAM Archive.

1

Confirm the shared folder setting for exchanging content. The shared folder is automatically created in the following path when XPRI starts. SaveDataNS\Media\From XDA

2

25 Mbps

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

Resolution

50 Mbps 100 Mbps

FX mode, 24 Mbps max

ImportURL=http://xxx.x.x.x:8080/SobeyDCMP/ services/XprinsImport ExportURL=http://xxx.x.x.x:8080/SobeyDCMP/ services/XprinsExport

To Open the Export to XDA Dialog To open the Export to XDA dialog, select clips and/or sequences in Project Explorer, right-click a clip and select [Output] > [Export to XDA...] from the context menu.

Configure the firewall on the client to allow the TCP port for communication between with XDCAM Archive. TCP Port: 9517

3

Modify the following configuration file, replacing “xxx.x.x.x” with the specified IP address for the DCMP server for XDCAM Archive. Sony\XPRINS\sys\XDAExchange.ini [XDAConfig.Init]

XDCAM Archive (XDA)

545

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b Res List Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

e Export f Type

c Video d Audio

g Auto rename for the

same name tasks n Stop button m Execute button l Clear List button k Delete button j Current button i Add Sequence button h Add Clip button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Export to XDA dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help... : Displays help about the Export to XDA dialog. Close: Closes the Export dialog. b Res list Displays all the export tasks. Progress: Displays a progress bar during export. Clip Name: Displays the export MXF clip name. Resource Name: Displays the original clip or sequence name (read only). Res Code: Displays the compression codec for clips. This field is blank for sequences. Type: Displays clip or sequence type. Duration: Displays the duration of the export task. Valid Region: Displays the export region of the clip or sequence. Status: Displays the status of proxy only detection, offline media detection, and zero length detection. Format: Displays the original clip compression codec or sequence format.

546

XDCAM Archive (XDA)

c Video Selects the target export video codec: DVCAM, IMX 30/ 40/50, or MPEG HD 18/25/35/50. d Audio Selects the target export audio bit number: 16 bit or 24 bit, depending on the video format selection. e Export Selects the conversion format: No convert, Fill, Fit to Width, Fit to Height. f Type Selects the export region of the sequence. Entire: Exports the entire section. Mark In / Out: Exports the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points specified on the timeline. Valid Area: Exports only the tracks within the sequence that are currently valid. g [Auto rename for the same name tasks] check box When this is checked, export tasks with the same name are automatically exported with a numeric suffix added to the file name (_001, _002, and so on). This setting is used only

when archiving, not for renaming clips in XDCAM Archive. Clips with the same name are allowed in XDCAM Archive.

2

Enter a user name and password to display the main window.

3

In the Project Explorer, select the clips or sequences for archive.

4

Right-click a selected item and select “Export to XDA” from the context menu to load the items into the [Export to XDA] window.

5

Change the archive settings as desired.

6

Click the [Execute] button.

h Add Clip button Opens the Select Clip dialog to add clip items for export. See “Select Clip dialog” (page 531) for a description of the Select Clip dialog settings and command buttons.

See “Select Clip dialog” (page 531) for a description of the Select Sequence dialog settings and command buttons.

j Current button Adds the clip or sequence currently open to the export task list. k Delete button Deletes the selected export tasks from the export task list. l Clear List button Deletes all the export tasks from the export task list. m Execute button Starts exporting the clips and sequences in the export task list. A progress bar appears beside each item in the list during export.

The clips automatically appear in the “New” column in the Portlet window in XDCAM Archive. Sequences of clips are archived as individual clips.

n Stop button Cancels the export.

Other editing operations cannot be performed during export.

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

i Add Sequence button Opens the Select Sequence dialog to add clip items for export.

Note

Notes

• When exporting a clip, the clip is saved as an MXF file using the original clip video codec, if the video codec is one of the standard options (DVCAM, IMX 30/40/50, or MPEG HD 18/25/35/50). If the original clip uses a different video codec, the clip is saved using the video codec selected in the [Video] setting. • When exporting a sequence, the sequence is always saved as an MXF file using the video codec selected in the [Video] setting.

Archiving Clips to XDCAM Archive You can archive clips or sequences to XDCAM Archive from the Project Explorer. The selected items are exported in the specified format.

1

Launch a web browser on the client, enter the XDCAM Archive server IP address (e.g. http:// 192.168.3.80/) to start an XDCAM Archive session.

Clip metadata is also archived with clips. However, due to differences in the way metadata is handled and displayed, the following changes occur. • Duration, Video Format, and Audio Format may vary. • Clip Type and Reel Name are displayed in the Original Information area. • LTCIn/LTCOut and VITCIn/VITCOut are replaced with values determined within XDCAM Archive and are displayed as the LTC Timecode and VITC Timecode, respectively. • Other metadata items may have different names (e.g. Clip Name is stored as Clip Title, etc.)

XDCAM Archive (XDA)

547

Chapter 13 Working With XDCAM

• Essence marks in clips are saved as clip keyframes in XDCAM Archive. Only the top-layer essence marks on the timeline are archived. Essence mark comments are saved as the keyframe description. • Scene marks in clips are saved as clip scene segments in XDCAM Archive. Overlapping scene marks will be merged into a single scene segment. The first frame in each scene is extracted as the keyframe for the scene. Scene mark comments are saved as the scene segment description. • XDCAM Archive supports a maximum total of 200 keyframes and scene segments. Exceeding this number will result in some loss of metadata information.

Retrieving Clips from XDCAM Archive You can retrieve clips from XDCAM Archive. Partial clips can also be retrieved by defining In and Out points in clips in XDCAM Archive. The selected clip is wrapped as an AVI+WAV file before being retrieved. Only one clip can be retrieved at a time.

1

In XPRI NS, open a project as the destination for the retrieved clip.

2

Launch a web browser on the client, enter the XDCAM Archive server IP address (e.g. http:// 192.168.3.80/) to start an XDCAM Archive session.

3

Enter a user name and password to display the main window.

4

Display the clip in the Content Browser of XDCAM Archive, then click the [Export] button.

The XDCAM Archive Export dialog appears.

5

Select [XPRINS] in the [Export Destination] list. The first time a clip is retrieved, the IP address of XPRI NS must be configured to add it to the [Export Destination] list. To set the IP address, click the [Configure] button to open the [XPRINSConfig] dialog and enter the IP address and account information.

548

XDCAM Archive (XDA)

6

Click the [Send] button to start retrieving the clip. A confirmation dialog appears.

7

Click the [OK] button to continue. The clip retrieval process is displayed in the [My Tasks] window in XDCAM Archive. After retrieval, the clip appears in the first bin of the current project in XPRI. Notes

• You can also retrieve a clip by dragging it from the Search (Advanced Search) window in XDCAM Archive directly into the Project Explorer or Source Viewer. If multiple clips are selected, only the clip that has mouse focus is retrieved. • You can also specify In and Out points for a clip in the Content Browser of XDCAM Archive and then click the [Send to Xpri NS] button to retrieve a partial clip as a new clip. • A project must be open in XPRI NS in order to retrieve a clip. • The retrieved clip is displayed as an Import Clip type. • The Back to Creator function for a retrieved clip is unavailable. • Retrieving a clip more than once will create additional clips after retrieval. Clips are not overwritten. Clip metadata is also retrieved with clips. However, due to differences in the way metadata is handled and displayed, the following changes occur. • Duration, Video Format, and Audio Format may vary. • The LTCIn/LTCOut and VITCIn/VITCOut metadata are not retrieved, but are determined automatically from the clip. • Other metadata items may have different names (e.g. Clip Title is stored as Clip Name, etc.) • Clip keyframes in XDCAM Archive are saved as essence marks using the default color. The keyframe description is saved as the essence mark comment. Note that XDCAM Archive supports 256-character keyframe descriptions whereas XPRI NS supports 255-character essence mark comments. • Clip scene segments in XDCAM Archive are saved as scene marks using the default color. Only top layer scene segments are retrieved. The scene segment description is saved as the scene mark comment.

EDL/AAF

Chapter

14

EDL Overview EDLs (Edit Decision Lists) contain the basic elements of edit sequences, including Mark In and Mark Out points, video tracks, and audio tracks, in the order that they were entered. EDL files can be exported and imported between different editing systems, enabling you to do system independent video editing. For example, you can do preparatory layout work offline on one system, and prepare the final edit online on another system. In previous versions, only reel clips could be created from EDLs. This version can also create import clips. Note

EDL files do not contain the actual media data.

Usable Formats XPRI NS can import and export XDCAM PD-EDL files.

EDL Overview

549

Import EDL Tool Overview Allows you to create sequences and reel clips on the basis of an EDL (Edit Decision List) created on another editing system, and to register them in a bin.

To Start the Import EDL Tool

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

550

To start the Import EDL Tool, do one of the following in the List View pane of Project Explorer. • Select a bin, click the Menu button, and select [Input] >[Import EDL...] from the main menu. • Right click a bin and select [Input] >[Import EDL...] from the context menu. • With a project open, click in an empty part of the List View pane and select [Input] >[Import EDL...].

Import EDL Tool

Names and Functions of Parts 2 New Folder button 3 Back button 4 Forward button 1 Search list box

5 Move Up button

6 View button

qk File Name box

8 Open button

qj File Type list box

9 Cancel button

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

7 File list

qh New Bin Name box qg EDL Title

0 Options button

qf EDL Type list box qd Import Clip Only

qa Multiple EDLs

qs EDL details area

a Search list box In the drop-down list, select the folder where the EDL file is located. b New Folder button Creates a new folder in the folder selected in the Search list box. c Back button Displays the most recently accessed folder.

d Forward button After the most recently accessed folder has been displayed with the Back button, returns to the folder that was visible when the Back button was pressed. e Move Up button Moves up to the next higher folder in the folder tree, relative to the folder in the Search list box. f View button Selects the view mode of the file list.

Import EDL Tool

551

Icon: Displays file names and icons in the file list. List: Displays a list of file names only in the file list. Details: Displays the name, type, date of most recent modification, and size for each file in the file list. g File list Displays a list of the files of the specified type in the Search folder.

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

h Open button Starts the import from the EDL file. A pop-up dialog appears during the import. You can click the Cancel button in the pop-up dialog to abort the import. When the import finishes, a bin is created according to the settings in this dialog, and a sequence and reel clips are stored in the bin. The name of the newly created sequence is the same as the new bin name. Reel clips are given names in the format “Reel name_Edit#”, where “Edit#” is a serial number. i Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Import EDL Tool and exits the tool. j Options... button Opens the Import EDL Options dialog. For more information, see “Import EDL Options Dialog” (page 553).

k Multiple EDLs Does not function in this version. l EDL details area Displays the contents of the imported EDL file (text data only). m Import Clips Only When this check box is checked, only reel clips are registered. (No sequence is created.) n EDL Type list box This item is enabled when an EDL format file is displayed in the File Name box. • BVE • CMX o EDL Title Displays the title of the EDL selected in the File Name box. p New Bin box Enter the name of a new bin (up to 32 characters) to save the sequence and reel clips created by the imported EDL. By default, the title of the EDL or the name selected in the File Name field (without the extension) is used as the name of the new bin.

552

Import EDL Tool

q File Type list box Selects the type of file to display in the file list from among the following. • PD-EDL (*.smi) • BVE-9100 (*.edl) r File Name box Displays the name of the file selected in the file list. You can enter any name from the keyboard. Notes

• EDL files support only ASCII characters (alphanumeric characters). • When the EDL is imported, the edit list is cleaned up automatically on the basis of the physical location of the events (auto cleanup). • Import of the EDL may fail if the EDL is too complicated. • The import may fail if the format specified in the EDL Type list box differs from the format of the actual EDL file. • If the EDL import fails, a dialog appears to inform you of the error location. • When importing PD-EDL files created on an XDCAM device, use XDCAM Explorer.

Import EDL Options Dialog

1 Clip creation

2 EDL tracks to import

4 Cancel button

a Clip creation Specifies the handle length and the clip creation method. Handle length: Specifies the length of the handles (margins) by the number of frames that created clips will have (0 to 999). Clip optimization: Select either of the following. Create a new clip for every edit.: Create a new reel clip for every edit. Combine clips which overlap or are within [XX] frames of each other.: Create reel clips by combining clips which overlap, or combining clips which lie within the specified number of frames of each other.

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

3 OK button

d Cancel button Cancels the settings and closes the Import EDL Options dialog.

b EDL tracks to import Selects the tracks in the sequence created by importing the EDL from among Video and A1 to A8. At least one track must be selected. [Process Audio Patch Notes] check box does not function in this version. Notes

• The check boxes in the EDL tracks to import section specify the video and audio (A1 to A8) tracks to create in the sequence that is created by the EDL import. Regardless of which check boxes are checked, a clip will be created for every clip in the EDL. • When the sequence created by importing the EDL contains audio, all audio tracks (A1 to A8) are selected for reel clips created with audio. The selection of audio tracks for the sequence is not reflected. c OK button Confirms the settings and closes the Import EDL Options dialog.

Import EDL Tool

553

Importing EDL Files This section explains how to import EDL files created on another editing system.

1

Start the Import EDL Tool. For more information about starting the Import EDL Tool, see page 550.

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

2

Select the folder where the EDL file to import is stored from the Search list box.

3

Select the EDL file type from the File Type list box, to display EDL files in the file list.

4

Select the EDL file to import from the file list.

5

Check that the name of the file selected in step 4 is displayed in the File Name box.

6

Select the EDL file format from the EDL Type list box.

7

Confirm the detailed content of the EDL file in the EDL details area as required.

8

Click the Options... button as required to set options in the Import EDL Options dialog.

9

In New Bin Name, specify the name of a bin to store the sequence and reel clips.

10 Click the Open button. Import of the EDL file starts. A bin with the name specified in step 9 is created beneath the project, and a sequence and reel clips are stored in the bin. The name of the registered sequence is the same as the name of the new bin. The names of reel clips are “Reel name_Edit#”. Notes

• If the input EDL contains speed clips, the original clips for the speed clips are imported. Simple speed change and freeze frames are maintained. • The start timecode is retained. However, if there is no clip at the head of the sequence, the timecode is changed to the start of the first clip in the sequence. • Importing the CG track is not supported. • Transitions that overlap the end of the previous clip or the start of the next are not supported.

554

Importing EDL Files

Export EDL Tool Overview The Export EDL Tool allows you to create an EDL (Edit Decision List) from a sequence created with XPRI NS, and export it as a file that can be used on another editing system.

To Start the Export EDL Tool Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

To start the Export EDL Tool, do one of the following in the List View pane of Project Explorer. • Select a sequence, click the Menu button, and select [Output] > [Export EDL...]. • Right click a sequence, and select [Output] > [Export EDL...] from the context menu.

Export EDL Tool

555

Names and Functions of Parts 2 New Folder button 3 Back button 4 Forward button 1 Search list box

5 Move Up button

6 View button

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

7 File list

qj File Name box

8 Save button

qh File Type list box

9 Cancel button

qg EDL Title

0 Options... button

qf Valid Region

qa Print... button

qd Get Sequence button

qs EDL details area

a Save in list box In the drop-down list, select the folder to which the EDL file is exported. b New Folder button Creates a new folder in the folder selected in the Save in list box. c Back button Displays the most recently accessed folder.

556

Export EDL Tool

d Forward button After the most recently accessed folder has been displayed with the Back button, returns to the folder that was visible when the Back button was pressed. e Move Up button Moves up to the next higher folder in the folder tree, relative to the folder in the Save in list box. f View button Selects the view mode of the file list. Icon: Displays file names and icons in the file list.

List: Displays a list of file names only in the file list. Details: Displays the name, type, date of most recent modification, and size for each file in the file list. g File list Displays a list of the files of the specified type in the Save in folder. h Save button Starts export of the EDL. A pop-up dialog appears during the export. You can cancel the export by clicking the Cancel button in the pop-up dialog. When the export finishes, a file of the specified EDL type is created in the specified save location.

j Options... button Opens the Export EDL Options dialog.

Notes

• EDL files support only ASCII characters (alphanumeric characters). If other characters are used for clip names or reel names, convert them into ASCII characters (alphanumeric characters) before export. • Export of the EDL may fail if the EDL is too complicated. • If the EDL export fails, a dialog appears to inform you of the error location.

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

i Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Export EDL Tool and closes the dialog.

q File Name box Specifies the name of the EDL file to export. Enter a new name in the text box, or select an existing file from the file list and use its name. The default file name is the name under which the sequence was selected in Project Explorer. If the sequence name is longer than six characters, the file name is the first six characters only. If any of the first six characters is an illegal character (#, %, ;, /, \, :, *, ?, , | and so on), the file name is “UNTITLED”.

For more information, see “Export EDL Options Dialog” (page 558).

k Print... button Does not function in this version. l EDL details area Displays the contents of the exported EDL file. m Get Sequence button Displays the contents of the exported EDL file in the EDL details area. n Valid Region Specifies how much of the sequence to export. In the dropdown list, select whether to export all of the selected sequence (Entire) or the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points (Mark In/Out). When no Mark In and Mark Out points exist in the sequence, the whole sequence is exported automatically. o EDL Title Specifies the title of the EDL. You can enter any title up to 128 characters long in the edit box. By default, the title is the same as the file name. p File Type list box Selects the type of file to display in the file list from among the following. • PD-EDL (*.smi) • BVE-9100 (*.edl)

Export EDL Tool

557

Export EDL Options Dialog a Tabs

c EDL Settings Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

b Tracks

d Frame Rate Conversion

e Default button

g Close button f Update EDL button

a Tabs Switches between the tabs of the Export EDL Options dialog. • General tab: Selects the tracks and EDL settings. • Pre-read tab: Does not function in this version. • Notes/Optimization: Does not function in this version.

• 24 fps ---> 30 fps (NDF): Does not function in this version.

b Tracks Selects the tracks for export.

f Update EDL Confirms the settings and closes the Export EDL Options dialog.

c EDL Settings Selects the EDL settings. • Format: Only BVE-9100 is supported in the current version. • Sort Mode: A Mode only. • Switcher Type: SMPTE only. d Format Conversion Selects the frame rate conversion. • None

558

Export EDL Tool

e Default Restores the Export EDL Options dialog to the default values.

g Cancel Cancels the settings and closes the Export EDL Options dialog.

Exporting EDL Files This section explains how to export a sequence created in XPRI NS as an EDL file.

1

Start the Export EDL Tool. For more information about starting the Export EDL Tool, see page 555.

Select the folder where you want to save the EDL file from the Save in list box.

3

Select the EDL file type from the File Type list box, to display EDL files in the file list.

4

Check that the name displayed in File Name box is the same as the name of the sequence. As required, you can select a file name from the file list or enter a file name in the edit box.

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

2

To export only the section between the Mark In and Mark Out points Select Mark In/Out under Valid Region.

5

Click the Save button. Export of the EDL file starts. The EDL file created on the basis of the sequence content appears in the EDL details area, and the EDL file is saved in the specified destination.

Notes

• If an output file name is not specified, the name of the first clip is used. • The default timecode format is set to LTC. If the first clip has no LTC, then the exported EDL timecode format is set to FTC. • Only a single video track, set in the Export EDL Options dialog, is exported. The CG track is not supported. • Clip effects are not supported. • Dissolve transitions are maintained, but all other transitions are exported as slide wipe transitions. • The duration of transitions is maintained. All other parameters are set to default values. • All transitions are set to [Start at Cut], regardless of the original setting. However, blank transitions are set to [End at Cut]. • Transitions that overlap the end of the previous clip or the start of the next are not supported.

Exporting EDL Files

559

AAF Overview AAF stands for Advanced Authoring Format, a multimedia file format that enables the exchange of digital media and metadata between applications. AAF facilitates the transfer of editing information between different systems. To import AAF files into XPRI NS Use the Import AAF Tool (page 561). To export AAF files from XPRI NS Use the Export AAF Tool (page 565). Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

560

AAF Overview

Import AAF Tool The Import AAF Tool creates bins in your project containing all of the clips and sequences specified in an imported AAF file. Notes

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

• Only AAF files created by Avid Media/Film Composer will be imported into XPRI NS. • Transition effect information contained in AAF files is reflected in the created sequences, but clip effect information is not reflected. Also, all transitions are converted to dissolves no matter what type of transition they were originally. • 48-kHz 16-bit Wave files embedded in AAF files will import into XPRI NS and will be linked to the imported clips. Other media types will not be imported. • AAF files are not imported if the frame rate is different from the project frame rate. • AAF import supports a maximum of 8 video and 8 audio tracks. • XPRI NS does not support collapse events in AAF files that are imported. • AAF files from other editing applications that contain multicam clips are not supported in the XPRI NS Import AAF Tool.

To Start the Import AAF Tool Select a bin in the Tree View pane of Project Explorer, and then do one of the following. • Select the import destination bin, click the Menu button, and select [Input] >[Import AAF...] from the main menu. • Right click the import destination bin and select [Input] >[Import AAF...] from the context menu. • Select the import destination bin, right click in an empty part of the List View pane, and select [Input] >[Import AAF...] from the context menu.

Import AAF Tool

561

Names and Functions of Parts a Search list box b New Folder button c Back button d Forward button e Move Up button f View button

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

n Open button k Import File Path box j New Bin Name box

m Cancel button l [Incl. Media] check box

i File Type list box h File Name box g File list

562

a Search list box Select the folder containing the AAF file from the dropdown list.

e Move Up button Moves up to the next higher folder in the folder tree, relative to the folder in the Search list box.

b New Folder button Creates a new folder in the folder selected in the Search list box. c Back button Displays the most recently accessed folder.

f View button Selects the view mode of the file list. Icon: Displays file names and icons in the file list. List: Displays a list of file names only in the file list. Details: Displays the name, type, date of most recent modification, and size for each file in the file list.

d Forward button After the most recently accessed folder has been displayed with the Back button, returns to the folder that was visible when the Back button was pressed.

g File list Displays a list of the files in the folder specified in the Search list box which match the type specified in the File Type list box.

Import AAF Tool

h File Name box Displays the name of the file selected in the file list. i File Type list box Specifies the type of file to display in the file list. Select the type from the drop-down list. j New Bin Name box Enter the name of a bin to store the clips and sequences created on the basis of the AAF file. If a bin of that name already exists, a serial number (_00x) is appended to the name. The value of x is incremented each time a new bin is created with the same name.

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

k Import File Path box Specify the path in which the clips for import are stored. To specify a path, click the [... (Select Path)] button and select a folder in the dialog that appears. l [Incl. (Include) Media] check box Check this to import the related audio media when importing the AAF metadata. m Cancel button Closes the Import AAF Tool window. n Open button Imports the AAF file selected in the file list. If the AAF file contains unsupported media, a message appears to inform you that the media will not be imported. Click Yes to import only metadata. Click No to cancel the import. Note that an error message will appear and the import will not be executed if the AAF file frame rate is different from the project frame rate.

Import AAF Tool

563

Importing AAF Files Before starting, open the project into which you want to import the AAF file. (AAF files can only be imported into the currently open project.) Obtain an AAF file, and then proceed as follows.

1

Start the Import AAF Tool.

2

Make the required settings in the Import AAF Tool. See “Import AAF Tool” (page 561) for more information about the settings.

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

564

3

Click the Open button in the Import AAF Tool. The import is executed. A bin with the name specified in the Import AAF Tool is created in the project, and a sequence is or reel clips are stored in the bin.

Importing AAF Files

Export AAF Tool Overview The Export AAF Tool allows you to export sequences as AAF files to a desired destination. Notes

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

• Transition effect information contained in sequences is output to AAF files, but clip effect information is not supported. Also, all transitions are converted to dissolves no matter what type of transition they were originally. • Speed clip information included in a sequence is not output to the AAF file. • AAF export supports a maximum of 8 video and 8 audio tracks.

To Start the Export AAF Tool Do one of the following in the Clip View pane of Project Explorer. • Select a sequence, click the menu button, and select [Output] >[Export AAF...]. • Select a sequence, right click, and select [Output] >[Export AAF...] from the context menu.

Export AAF Tool

565

Names and Functions of Parts a Search list box b New Folder button c Back button d Forward button e Move Up button f View button

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

n Save button k Transcode Video To list box j Export Method list box

m Cancel button l Options button

i File Type list box h File Name box g File list

566

a Search list box Select the folder in which to save the AAF files from the drop-down list.

e Move Up button Moves up to the next higher folder in the folder tree, relative to the folder in the Save in list box.

b New Folder button Creates a new folder in the folder selected in the Save in list box. c Back button Displays the most recently accessed folder.

f View button Selects the view mode of the file list. Icon: Displays file names and icons in the file list. List: Displays a list of file names only in the file list. Details: Displays the name, type, date of most recent modification, and size for each file in the file list.

d Forward button After the most recently accessed folder has been displayed with the Back button, returns to the folder that was visible when the Back button was pressed.

g File list Displays a list of the files in the folder specified in the Save in list box which match the type specified in the File Type list box.

Export AAF Tool

h File Name box Allows you to change the name of the AAF file. i File Type list box Specifies the type of file to display in the file list. Select the type from the drop-down list. j Export Method list box Specifies the export method. Select the method from the drop-down list. k Transcode Video To list box Select the conversion method for the video to be embedded in the AFF file from the drop-down list.

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

l Options button Opens the Export AAF Options Dialog (see page 568). m Cancel button Closes the Export AAF Tool window. n Save button Exports a sequence as an AAF file.

Export AAF Tool

567

Export AAF Options Dialog

a [Use Mark] check box b [Use Enabled Tracks] check box c [Include All Video Tracks in Sequence] check box d [Include All Audio Tracks in Sequence] check box

e Save button

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

a [Use Mark] check box When this is checked, the system exports only the section between the set In and Out points of a selected clip or sequence. When this is not checked, the entire clip or sequence is exported. b [Use Enabled Tracks] check box When this is checked, the system exports only the currently enabled tracks for a selected sequence or clip. When this is not checked, all tracks in the clip or sequence are exported. c [Include ALL Video Tracks in Sequence] check box When this is checked, the system exports all video tracks in the AAF sequence. d [Include ALL Audio Tracks in Sequence] check box When this is checked, the system exports all audio tracks in the AAF sequence. e Save button Applies the options configured, and closes the Export AAF Option dialog. f Cancel button Cancels the options configured, and closes the Export AAF Option dialog.

568

Export AAF Tool

f Cancel button

Exporting AAF Files This section explains how to export a sequence created in XPRI NS as an AAF file. Before starting, open the project that contains the sequence to be exported. (AAF files can only be exported from the currently open project.)

1

Start the Export AAF Tool. See page 565 for more information about how to start the Export AAF Tool.

2

Chapter 14 EDL/AAF

Specify the save destination and a file name, and click the Save button. The export is executed, and an AAF file is saved in the specified location.

Exporting AAF Files

569

Customization

Customization Functions Some of the tools which can be operated with command buttons are customizable. Customization allows you to configure command button areas with the buttons you need, to change the positions of the buttons on the palettes, and to assign command button functions to the keyboard or the control panel. You can save customization results in template files by using the User tab of the “Configuration dialog” (see page 578). You can also load template files created by you or another user into XPRI NS and have the contents reflected instantly in XPRI NS. See “User Setting Management” (page 662) for more information about saving and loading template files.

Command Button Customize window Overview The Command Button Customize window allows you to change command button positions and configurations. To open the Command Button Customize window Do one of the following. • Select [Customize...] >[Command Buttons...] from the main menu of a tool that supports customization. • Press Ctrl + 9 on the keyboard or select [Configuration...] from the taskbar menu to open the Configuration dialog. In the Setting column of the User Tab (page 579) in the Configuration dialog, double click Command Button Customize. • Press the focus hot key which opens the Command Button Customize window. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.)

570

Customization Functions

Chapter

15

See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information about focus hot keys.

Names and functions of parts The figure below shows the Command Button Customize window.

1 Menu button

2 Tool list box

3 Tabs

4 Selection area

5 Position area

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Command Button Customize window. The main menu has following commands. Reset: Resets the settings in the Command Button Customize window to the values they had when the window was opened. Help...: Displays help about the Command Button Customize window. Close: Closes the Command Button Customize window. b Tool list box Displays the current customization target. Select a tool to customize from the drop-down list. c Tabs Select the type of command buttons to display in the selection area. The types are Play, Edit, Special, and General. Play: Buttons used for VTR control, play of hard disk material, trimming, and Mark In/Mark Out operations. Edit: Buttons used for editing. Special: Video Effect Editor buttons and buttons used for special operations.

Chapter 15 Customization

7 OK button

6 Cancel button

General: Buttons that are available in all of the tools. d Selection area Displays the command buttons provided under the current tab for the tool displayed in the Tool list box. You can change the command buttons configuration by dragging buttons from this area to the position area. You can also enlarge the button image size by dragging while holding down the Shift key. e Position area Displays the position of the command buttons that have been added to the tool displayed in the Tool list box. You can rearrange the positions of the buttons by dragging them in this area. You can also enlarge the button image size by dragging while holding down the Shift key. Unneeded command buttons can be deleted by doing one of the following. • Drag the command button out of the position area, and drop it when the inhibit mark appears. • Select the command button and press the Delete key.

Customization Functions

571

f Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Command Button Customize window and closes the window. g OK button Confirms the settings made in the Command Button Customize window and closes the window.

To change the positions and configuration of command buttons Note

When customizing, you can operate on only one button at a time. It is not possible to select several buttons at once. To rearrange buttons in a command button area Select a button in the position area and drag it to the position that you want.

Chapter 15 Customization

To delete unneeded command buttons There are two methods. • In the position area, select the button that you want to delete, drag it, and drop it at a position where the inhibit mark appears. • In the position area, select the button that you want to delete and press the Delete key. To add command buttons to the position area Select a button in the selection area and drag it to the desired position in the position area. You can drag the same button more than once (the same button can be displayed more than once in the position area). If you drag a button to a position where no button is currently displayed, the button is added to the command button area. If you drag it to a position where a button already exists, the dragged button replaces the existing button.

Keyboard Customize window Overview The Keyboard Customize window allows you to assign command button functions to the keyboard. To open the Keyboard Customize window Do one of the following. • Select [Customize] >[Keyboard...] from the main menu of a tool that supports customization. • Press Ctrl + 9 on the keyboard or select [Configuration...] from the taskbar menu to open the Configuration dialog. In the Setting column of the User Tab (page 579) in the Configuration dialog, double click Keyboard Customize. • Press the focus hot key which opens the Keyboard Customize window. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.)

572

Customization Functions

See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information about focus keys.

Names and functions of parts

1 Menu button

2 Tool list box

3 [Notifies when overlapping] check box

4 Tabs

5 Selection area

Chapter 15 Customization

6 Keyboard display

7 Cancel button 8 OK button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Keyboard Customize window. The main menu has following commands. Reset: Resets the settings in the Keyboard Customize window to the values they had when the window was opened. Help...: Displays help about the Keyboard Customize window. Close: Closes the Keyboard Customize window. b Tool list box Displays the current customization target. Select a tool to customize from the drop-down list. By selecting Global Shortcuts, you can customize all customizable tools at the same time. c [Notifies when overlapping] check box This check box applies to customizations made with Global Shortcuts selected in the Tool list box. If the check

box is checked, a message appears to notify you of the overlap whenever you select a key which already has a custom function assignment in an individual tool. d Tabs Select the type of command buttons to display in the selection area. The types are Play, Edit, Special, and General. Play: Buttons used for VTR control, play of hard disk material, and Mark In/Mark Out operations. Edit: Buttons used for editing on the timeline. Special: Video Effect Editor buttons and buttons used for special operations. General: Buttons that are available in all of the tools. e Selection area Displays the command buttons provided under the current tab for the tool displayed in the Tool list box. You can

Customization Functions

573

make keyboard assignments by dragging buttons from this area to the keyboard display area. f Keyboard display Allows you to check the keyboard assignments currently in force for the tool displayed in the Tool list box. Press the Shift key to display the functions assigned to Shift key combinations. You can change key assignments by dragging a function button to a key in the display. The function previously assigned to that key is replaced by the new function. Notes

Chapter 15 Customization

• The [Notifies when overlapping] check box can be checked to display a notification of the overlap when you are customizing with Global Shortcuts selected in the Tool list box and attempt to assign a command button to a part which already has a custom function assignment in an individual tool. Click Yes in the notification message to delete the existing customization and apply the global customization. Click No to keep the existing customization and apply the global customization to other tools. Click Cancel to apply neither of the existing and the global customization. • Custom functions assignments can be made for individual tools, even for keys which have been customized with Global Shortcuts. In this case, the customization for the individual tool takes priority, but the global customization is also saved. The global customization comes back into effect if the local customization in the individual tool is deleted. When a function assigned with Global Shortcuts is enabled in the current individual tool, the button for that tool is displayed in blue on the keyboard display when you select a tool from the Tool list box. g Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Keyboard Customize window and closes the window. h OK button Confirms the settings made in the Keyboard Customize window and closes the window.

To assign command button functions to the keyboard Notes

• Functions cannot be assigned to keys that are grayed out in the keyboard display. • Functions that are normally accessed by clicking a command button while holding down the Alt key or Ctrl key cannot be assigned to the keyboard. • Only one function can be assigned at a time. It is not possible to select several buttons for assignment to the keyboard.

574

Customization Functions

To move function assignments to different keys Select the function that you want to move on the keyboard display and drag it to another key. To delete unneeded function assignments There are two methods. • In the keyboard display, select the function that you want to delete, drag it, and drop it at a position where the inhibit mark appears. • In the keyboard display, select the function that you want to delete and press the Delete key. To assign functions that are not currently displayed on the keyboard Select a button in the selection area and drag it to the desired key in the keyboard display. You can drag the same button more than once (the same function can be assigned to more than one key). If you drag a button to a key with no current assignment, a new assignment is made. If you drag it to a key that already has an assignment, the old assignment is replaced by the new one. To assign functions to Shift key combinations While holding down the Shift key, proceed as described in “To move function assignments to different keys”, “To delete unneeded function assignments”, and “To assign functions that are not currently displayed on the keyboard”.

Control Panel Customize window Overview The Control Panel Customize window allows you to assign command button functions to the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, and the Editing Control Panel. To open the Control Panel Customize window Do one of the following. • Select [Customize] >[Control Panel...] from the main menu of a tool that supports customization. • Press Ctrl + 9 on the keyboard or select [Configuration...] from the taskbar menu to open the Configuration dialog. In the Setting column of the User Tab (see page 579) in the Configuration dialog, double click Control Panel Customize. • Press the focus hot key which opens the Control Panel Customize window. (Requires customization with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize or Control Panel Customize window.) See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information about focus keys.

Names and functions of parts The figure below shows the Control Panel Customize window.

1 Menu button 2 Tool list box

3 [Notifies when overlapping] check box 4 Tabs

5 Selection area

6 Control Panel list box

Chapter 15 Customization

7 Control panel display

8 OK button 9 Cancel button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Control Panel Customize window. The main menu has following commands. Reset: Resets the settings in the Control Panel Customize window to the values they had when the window was opened. Help...: Displays help about the Control Panel Customize window. Close: Closes the Control Panel Customize window. b Tool list box Displays the current customization target. Select a tool to customize from the drop-down list. By selecting Global Shortcuts, you can customize all customizable tools at the same time. c [Notifies when overlapping] check box This check box applies to customizations made with Global Shortcuts selected in the Tool list box. If the check box is checked, a message appears to notify you of the

overlap whenever you select a key which already has a custom function assignment in an individual tool. d Tabs Select the type of command buttons to display in the selection area. The types are Play, Edit, Special, and General. Play: Buttons used for VTR control, play of hard disk material, and Mark In Mark/Out operations. Edit: Buttons used for editing. Special: Video Effect Editor buttons and buttons used for special operations. General: Buttons that are available in most of the tools. e Selection area Displays the command buttons provided for customization under the current tab by the tool displayed in the Tool list box. You can make control panel assignments by dragging buttons from this area to the control panel display area.

Customization Functions

575

f Control Panel list box Allows you to select a control panel. Select the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel, or the Editing Control Panel. g Control panel display Displays the control panel that is currently selected in the Control Panel list box. You can use this display to check the control panel assignments currently in force for the tool displayed in the Tool list box. Functions can be assigned to buttons pressed together with the Shift key or the Ctrl key. To view those functions, press the Shift or Ctrl key on the keyboard. (However, note that Ctrl key combinations can be assigned only for the Editing Control Panel.) You can change the assignments by dragging a function button to a control panel button in the display. The function previously assigned to that control panel button is replaced by the new function. Notes

Chapter 15 Customization

• The [Notifies when overlapping] check box can be checked to display a notification of the overlap when you are customizing with Global Shortcuts selected in the Tool list box and attempt to assign a command button to a part which already has a custom function assignment in an individual tool. Click Yes in the notification message to delete the existing customization and apply the global customization. Click No to apply the global customization and keep the existing customization. Click Cancel to apply neither of the existing and the global customization. • Custom functions assignments can be made for individual tools, even for keys which have been customized with Global Shortcuts. In this case, the customization for the individual tool takes priority, but the global customization is also saved. The global customization comes back into effect if the local customization in the individual tool is deleted. When a function assigned with Global Shortcuts is enabled in the current individual tool, the button for that tool is displayed in blue on the control panel display when you select a tool from the Tool list box. h OK button Confirms the settings made in the Control Panel Customize window and closes the window. i Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Control Panel Customize window and closes the window.

576

Customization Functions

To assign command button functions to control panels Notes

• Functions cannot be assigned to parts that are grayed out in the control panel display. • Only one function can be assigned at a time. It is not possible to select several buttons for assignment to the control panel. To move function assignments to different parts Select the function that you want to move on the control panel display and drag it to another part. To delete unneeded function assignments There are two methods. • In the control panel display, select the function that you want to delete, drag it, and drop it at a position where the inhibit mark appears. • In the control panel display, select the function that you want to delete and press the Delete key. To assign functions that are not currently displayed on the control panel display Select a button in the selection area and drag it to the desired part in the control panel display. You can drag the same button more than once (the same function can be assigned to more than one part). If you drag a button to a part with no current assignment, a new assignment is made. If you drag it to a part that already has an assignment, the old assignment is replaced by the new one. To assign functions to Shift or Ctrl key combinations While holding down the Shift or Ctrl key, proceed as described in “To move function assignments to different parts”, “To delete unneeded function assignments”, and “To assign functions that are not currently displayed on the control panel display”

System Settings

Chapter

16

Overview XPRI NS allows you to make two kinds of system settings. System and project settings: Allow you to set up the XPRI NS system environment and to set the default settings used for creating a new project. These settings are valid for all users. User settings: Allow you to configure the various tools with your preferred settings. These settings are saved for each user, so that they can be loaded when XPRI NS starts. You can also save window layout configurations for each user.

Overview

577

Configuration Dialog Overview The Configuration dialog allows you to open the dialogs that set up the XPRI NS system environment, set the default settings used for creating a new project, and configure the various tools with your preferred settings.

To Open the Configuration Dialog To open the Configuration dialog, do one of the following. • Click the Menu button on the XPRI NS taskbar and select [Configuration...] (see page 40) in the menu that appears. • Press the Configuration focus hot key, which can be assigned with the Global Shortcuts function of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. See “Focus hot key assignment buttons” (page 832) for more information about focus hot keys.

Names and Functions of Parts

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Configuration dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Open: Opens the dialog linked to the icon or item selected in a tab of the Configuration dialog. Import: (User tab only) Loads user settings from a file. This command only appears when the User tab is selected. Export: (User tab only) Saves the settings for all items in the User tab to a file. This command only appears when the User tab is selected. Save All Active Settings As My Defaults: (User tab only) Saves the settings for all valid items in the User tab as individual user defaults (My Defaults). This command only appears when the User tab is selected. Reset All to Factory Settings: (User tab only) Resets the settings for all items in the User tab to factory default settings. This command only appears when the User tab is selected. Reset All to My Defaults: (User tab only) Resets the settings for all items in the User tab to My Defaults settings. This command only appears when the User tab is selected. Help: Displays help about the Configuration dialog. Minimize: Minimizes the Configuration dialog and displays it as a button on the taskbar. Maximize: Maximizes the Configuration dialog. Close: Closes the Configuration dialog.

System Tab Chapter 16 System Settings

a Menu button

System tab User tab Project tab

Double click one of the following icons, depending on what you want to do. Device Properties icon: Allows you to make control and video I/O settings for the VTR used for digitizing and recording. Opens the “Device Properties Dialog” (page 584). System Properties icon: Allows you to view information and make settings for system hardware, and to view

578

Configuration Dialog

information about system software. Opens the System Properties dialog (see page 581). Download Editing Settings icon: Allows you to edit a sequence offline and then upload the edited sequence to a networked database. Opens the Download Editing Settings Dialog (page 591).

User Tab Comment column Setting column

Date column

Use this tab to make user settings for the principal tools in XPRI NS. Settings made in this tab are saved as user configurations. The settings in this tab can also be saved in template files and loaded from files into XPRI NS. The list can be sorted by name in alphabetical order, by comment in alphabetical order, or by date. To sort the list, click the header of one of the columns (Setting, Comment, Date). Each click sorts the list in ascending or descending order. Setting column Displays a list of Properties dialogs for the principal tools. To change the properties of a tool, double click an item in the list, or select an item and choose [Open...] from the main menu or the context menu. Batch Properties: Opens the Batch Properties Dialog (page 621) so that you can save or load settings for the Batch Digitize tool. CG Editor Properties: Opens the CG Editor Properties Dialog (page 628) so that you can save or load settings for the CG Editor.

Configuration Dialog

Chapter 16 System Settings

Check boxes

Command Button Customize: Opens the Command Button Customize window (page 570) so that you can save or load command button template files. Control Panel Customize: Opens the Control Panel Customize window (page 574) so that you can save or load control panel template files. Effect Editor Properties: Opens the Effect Editor Properties Dialog (page 624) so that you can save or load settings for the Effect Editor. Export Settings: Opens the Export Settings Dialog (page 634) so that you can save or load the setting of the Export dialog. FastLogin Properties: Opens the Fast Login Setting dialog to select whether to show the Fast Login window when starting XPRI NS. FTP Location Settings: Opens the XDCAM Device Settings Dialog (see page 646) so that you can set user and password information. General Properties: Opens the General Properties Dialog (page 654), so that you can make settings that are common to the various tools. GUI Properties: Displays the name of the user layout saved in the Comment field. You can rename a layout by editing the comment. User layouts allow you to save the sizes and positions of tool windows in the XPRI NS software. For more information, see “User Layouts” (page 670). Import File Settings: Opens the Import File Settings dialog (see page 632) so that you can save or load settings for the Import File Tool. Keyboard Customize: Opens the Keyboard Customize window (see page 572) so that you can save or load keyboard template files. Logging Properties: Opens the Logging Properties Dialog (page 601) so that you can save or load settings for the Logging Tool. Metadata Window Properties: Opens the Metadata Window Properties Dialog (page 598), so that you can save or load settings for Metadata Window that appears in the information display area of Project Explorer. MXF Custom Export Settings: Opens the Export Options Dialog (page 500) so that you can set the MXF export settings. Pre-Edit Properties: Opens the Pre-Edit Properties Dialog (page 605), so that you can save or load settings related to creating clips in Source Viewer (digitize mode), which is used in linear -like editing. Project Explorer Properties: Opens the Project Explorer Properties Dialog (page 593) so that you can save or load settings for Project Explorer. Record to VTR Settings: Opens Record to Record to VTR Settings Dialog (page 657) so that you can save or load Record to VTR tool settings. Timeline Editor Properties: Opens the Timeline Editor Properties Dialog (page 607) so that you can save or load settings for the Timeline Editor.

579

Voice Over Properties: Opens the Voice Over tab (see page 616) of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog so that you can save settings for the Audio Voice Over Tool. XDCAM Explorer Properties: Opens the XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog (see page 636) so that you can import material from an XDCAM device, and save or load settings that are necessary when exporting clips and sequences to an XDCAM device. You can also add multiple sets of XDCAM Explorer Properties by selecting [Duplicate] from the context menu and modifying the properties. In this case, add text to the Comment field to distinguish between multiple sets. For each item, settings can be saved in files, loaded from files, deleted, and so on. See “User Setting Management” (page 662) for more information about these operations.

Comment column Displays a comment about the corresponding item in the Setting column. Click to enter or change a comment. Comments can be up to 60 characters long. For the GUI Properties item, the Comment column shows the name of the user layout stored. You can rename the user layout by editing the comment. Chapter 16 System Settings

Date column Displays the date when the settings were made or when a file was saved. Check boxes Checks in the check boxes indicate that the corresponding settings are reflected in the environment of the user logged into XPRI NS.

Project Tab

580

Configuration Dialog

Double click the Project Properties icon to open the Project Properties dialog. Project Properties icon: Opens the Project Properties dialog (see page 649), which allows you to check the properties defined when the currently open project was created. The icon must be double clicked to open the dialog.

System Properties Dialog Overview Use this dialog to do the following. • Make and check settings related to the system operating environment. • View information about system software.

To Open the System Properties Dialog To open the System Properties dialog, double click the System Properties icon in the System tab of the Configuration dialog.

Chapter 16 System Settings

System Properties Dialog

581

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b Tabs

c Project Name

d Reel Name

e Format

Chapter 16 System Settings

g Cancel button f OK button

a Menu button Displays the System Properties dialog main menu. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the System Properties dialog. Close: Closes the System Properties dialog. b Tabs Switch among the Hardware tab, and the Software tab. Hardware tab: Displays connection, performance, capacity and other information for the system hardware. Software tab: Displays Editing Software version information and login user names.

582

System Properties Dialog

c Project Name Specifies the default project name. Select whether to add a suffix to the name with the following option buttons. No suffix: Add no suffix to project names. Adds a suffix to the project name: Add a serial suffix (_001, _002, ... ) to projects in the same level. Adds a time and date to the project name: Automatically add a date and time suffix (__). d Reel Name Specifies the default reel name. Check [Adds a suffix to the reel name] to automatically add a serial suffix (_001, _002, ... ) to the same reel name used for multiple reels in common. The maximum length of reel names, including the suffix, is 256 characters.

Manual: If selected, a dialog appears when a disc is inserted. A reel name can then be entered manually. An untitled disc is added if the Cancel button is pressed in the dialog. Automatic: If selected, the default reel name specified above is applied. If the Reel Name text box is empty, a system-defined name, which varies depending on the type of disc, is applied. e Format Specifies default format settings. When the [Applies the default settings when creating a new project] check box is checked, the default settings made in this tab are applied to the parameters in the New Project dialog, and cannot be modified when creating a new project. When the check box is off, the default parameters are applied but can be modified when creating a project. See the description of the Project properties section (page 60) in the Format tab of the New Project dialog for more information about format settings. f OK button Enables the settings made in the System Properties dialog and closes the dialog. g Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the System Properties dialog and closes the dialog. Chapter 16 System Settings

System Properties Dialog

583

Device Properties Dialog Overview The Device Properties dialog makes hardware control settings for SDI devices or i.Link devices, such as VTRs, Sony MSQ-S001 HD and Matrox MXO2 LE codec devices used in the Logging Tool, Batch Digitize Tool, and Record to VTR Tool.

To Open the Device Properties Dialog To open the Device Properties dialog, do one of the following. • Double click the Device Properties icon in the System tab of the Configuration dialog. • Select Device Properties in the device list box of the Logging Tool or Record to VTR tool.

Chapter 16 System Settings

584

Device Properties Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button b Tabs

d OK button c Default button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Device Properties dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Device Properties dialog. Close: Closes the Device Properties dialog. b Tabs Switch among the following tabs. • Hardware Settings tab (see page 586) • Synchronization Offsets tab (see page 588) • Output Settings tab (see page 589) The Hardware Settings tab appears when you open the dialog. If you change settings in the Hardware Settings tab, the changes are applied and the setting items in the other tabs change automatically.

c Default button Resets the settings to their default values.

Chapter 16 System Settings

f Apply button e Cancel button

d OK button Enables the settings made in the Device Properties dialog and closes the dialog. e Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Device Properties dialog and closes the dialog. f Apply button Enables the current settings without closing the Device Properties dialog.

Note

In this version, the Output Settings tab does not appear if the dialog is opened from Logging Tool or from the Device list of Record to VTR Tool.

Device Properties Dialog

585

Hardware Settings tab

a Signal I/O

b VTR Control

a Signal I/O Allows you to make settings for video signal I/O ports. I/O Port: Select the port to configure. The following two options are available. • X1 SDI: SDI port for Sony MSQ-S001 • Matrox SDI: SDI port for Matrox MX02 LE • i.LINK: Workstation i.LINK port Pressing the Default button for this setting does not change the setting. Chapter 16 System Settings

Depending on the port selected, the setting items, appearance, and available options of the Device Properties dialog will vary. Settings configured in the Device Properties dialog are applied and stored individually for each port you select. Video Standard: Select the video signal format. If [i.LINK] is selected for [I/O Port], this setting is disabled, and the settings configured on the connected device are enabled. If [X1 SDI] or [Matrox SDI] is selected for [I/O Port], the video standard will display in SD format when you start the application. However, when you open a project, the video standard for that project will be selected. By changing this setting, you can import video standards that are different from that of a project’s output settings to digitize and create clips. Notes

• The Video Standard setting applies to SDI inputs and outputs. When you change this setting, the settings in the Output Settings tab change accordingly. • Switching the video signal format takes a few seconds. • If you selected a video standard different from that of a project’s output settings, the setting configured here will be discarded when you close the project.

586

Device Properties Dialog

When you open the project again, the configuration will be reset to the project’s output setting format. Sync Type: Select the sync mode for the Sony MSQ-S001 or Matrox MX02 LE. The following two options are available. • REF IN: Synchronizes with the reference video signals input to the REF IN connector of the MSQS001. An error message is displayed if there is a signal standard mismatch between the input signal and the reference signal. • Internal: Ignores the REF IN input signals and synchronizes with the internal reference signals of the Sony MSQ-S001 or Matrox MX02 LE. When the Matrox MXO2 LE is connected, the combo box is grayed out and “Internal” is automatically selected. This is not available if [i.LINK] is selected for [I/O Port]. b VTR Control Allows you to make remote control settings for video players and recorders used for digitizing and recording. The items available for configuration vary depending on the [I/O Port] setting under [Signal I/O]. Control Port: Select which communication port on the workstation to use for remote control. If [i.LINK] is selected for [I/O Port], [i.LINK] is automatically selected for this setting and cannot be changed. If [X1 SDI] or [Matrox SDI] is selected for [I/O Port], select the serial (COM) port on the workstation to perform 9-pin remote control. Timecode: If [X1 SDI] or [Matrox SDI] is selected for [I/ O Port], select [LTC] or [VITC] as the timecode to use for remote control. If [i.LINK] is selected for [I/O Port], [LTC] is automatically selected for this setting and cannot be changed.

Notes

• Use the context menu of the player time display in Logging Tool or Source Viewer (digitize mode), or use the command buttons of either tool to perform timecode and CTL switching. • Configure the timecode reader on the VTR according to the timecode (LTC/VITC) selected for [Timecode]. A discrepancy between the VTR and XPRI NS settings will result in a discrepancy between the timecode display on the VTR and the timecode display in Logging Tool and Record to VTR Tool. In such cases, digitizing or recording form the correct starting position is not possible. • If you select VITC for material that includes LTC and VITC on which differing time information is stored, cue up will fail. In such cases, you may not be able to start digitizing or recording. Select LTC for such material, or use CTL when digitizing. Device Type: Displays the model name of the VTR that is connected to the port selected in [Control Port]. If a VTR is not connected, “Disconnect” is displayed. If operation with XPRI NS has not been tested for a device, an asterisk (*) will appear in front of the model name. If XPRI NS does not recognize the model, “Unknown” is displayed. You can select the device type from the list if it is available. Chapter 16 System Settings

Note

When [i.LINK] is selected for [Control Port] and a VTR is connected, the name of the device appears if it is listed in the Device Type list, otherwise the name “Unknown” is displayed for the device name. Preroll Time: Specify the preroll time used during digitizing and recording to control the VTR that is connected to the port selected in [Control Port]. Update button: Confirms the VTR connection status at the port selected in [Control Port], and updates the [Device Type] display. If the device model is recognized, XPRI NS will use internally stored data to reset the [Preroll Time] setting to the default value for that connected device. This cannot be used if [i.LINK] is selected for [Control Port].

Device Properties Dialog

587

Synchronization Offsets tab Allows you to configure parameters for synchronization offset adjustments during digitizing and recording.

a Capture setup

b Print setup

c Timecode In SDI

a Capture setup Specify in frames the adjustment value for digitizing. b Print setup Specify in frames the adjustment value for recording.

Chapter 16 System Settings

The parameters are applied and stored individually for each port selected in under [Signal I/O] > [I/O Port] in the Hardware Settings tab and format selected under [Video Standard]. Note

The default values for each parameter may change with each new version of XPRI NS. If you updated the software from a previous version, be sure to open this screen, click the Default button, and then click the OK button for each of your HD/SD projects. c Timecode In SDI Specifies the source reference signal for capturing the timecode when switching between live feed and VTR source material. When this is checked, the timecode is recorded from the SDI IN port signal.

588

Device Properties Dialog

Output Settings tab Allows you to make settings for video outputs and monitor display. This does not appear if [i.LINK] is selected for [Signal I/O] > [I/O Port] in the Hardware Settings tab.

a Output b Auto Adapt c Output Timecode d Still Frame Mode

e Safety Border

f Phase button

b Auto Adapt This check box selects whether to automatically convert input video signals to the video standard selected for [Video Standard] in the Hardware Settings tab. This is checked by default. If you uncheck this, select the video standard for output in the [Standard] list box, and select the conversion mode in the [Adapt mode] list box. Uncheck this when you want to convert to a video standard different from that of the project’s output settings for recording to VTR. Notes

• The video signal format setting applies to SDI inputs and outputs. When you change this setting, the setting for [Video Standard] in the Hardware Settings tab changes accordingly. Parameters that apply to the signal format will also appear in the Synchronization Offsets tab. • Switching the video signal format takes a few seconds. • If you selected a video standard different from that of a project’s output settings, the setting configured here will be discarded when you close the project. When you open

the project again, the configuration will be reset to the project’s output setting format. c Output Timecode Selects whether to output the timecode as metadata in the SDI OUT signals. This function is useful for displaying the timecode on remote monitors during playback and seek functions. The following timecodes are output. • HD SDI can output LTC and VITC timecodes • SD SDI can only output LTC timecode • In Source Viewer, clip LTC and VITC are output as LTC and VITC, respectively. If the clip does not have LTC or VITC, then FTC is output to both LTC and VITC. In Master Viewer and Timeline Editor, FTC is output to both LTC and VITC. • There is no DF and NDF information in the SDI output.

Chapter 16 System Settings

a Output This check box turns output on and off. When it is on, the list box selects the output destination. The following options are available. Sony Video-Output Engine: Outputs to SDI OUT for the MSQ-S001 MPEG2 HD Codec PCI Board. Matrox Video-Output Engine: Outputs to SDI A and B for the Matrox MXO2 LE I/O device for editing and H.264 encoding.

d Still Frame Mode Selects whether the odd field, even field, or frame should be used to display still video when playback is stopped and during digital scrubbing. e Safety Border Allows you to configure settings for the safe area display in Source Viewer and Master Viewer. Settings are configured separately for the two safe area types, safe action area and safe title area. Safe title area settings are related to the safe area settings in the CG Editor (page 405) of CG Editor.

Device Properties Dialog

589

[Show Action Safe] check box: Selects whether to display or hide the safe action area. The safe action area is displayed in red. [Show Title Safe] check box: Selects whether to display or hide the safe title area. The safe title area is displayed in green. Note

By clicking the Safe Action Area (page 827) button in Source Viewer or Master Viewer, you can switch between displaying and hiding the safe action area. The safe title area display is not affected. [4:3 Action Safe Mode], [4:3 Title Safe Mode] check boxes: When these are checked, a 4:3 safe area appears when displaying projects with 16:9 aspect ratio. Action Area, Title Area: Specify the size for each safe area. Preview: Displays an image of the safety borders applied to the Preview window. Background: Sets the color for the background of the Preview windows in Source Viewer, Master Viewer, XDCAM Explorer, XDCAM Export Tool, and Import File Tool.

Chapter 16 System Settings

590

f Phase button Displays the Phase Settings dialog for setting values to compensate for delays between the reference signal and the source reference generator. Vertical delay: Compensates for the vertical sync delay. The delay is expressed as a number of lines. Horizontal delay: Compensates for the horizontal sync delay. The delay is expressed as a number of clock units, where 1 clock unit = 0.YYY µs (YYY varies with video standard).

Device Properties Dialog

Download Editing Settings Dialog Overview The Download Editing Settings dialog is used to start download editing, enabling a sequence to be edited offline and then uploaded to a networked database. XPRI NS supports two download editing modes: Simple Download Editing mode and Offline Editing mode. Note

Once download editing has been activated, the current terminal remains in download editing mode.

To Open the Download Editing Settings Dialog To open the Download Editing Settings dialog, double click the Download Editing Settings icon in the System tab of the Configuration dialog.

Chapter 16 System Settings

Download Editing Settings Dialog

591

Names and Functions of Parts a Simple Download Editing Mode

a Simple Download Editing Mode Selects simple download editing mode. In this mode, the sequence and the clips in the sequence are always downloaded and uploaded as new material.

Chapter 16 System Settings

b Offline Editing Mode Selects offline editing mode. In this mode, the sequence and the clips in the sequence are always linked to the original files when they are downloaded and uploaded. In other words, the GUID identifier for the material does not change between the local database and the system database. For more information, see “Download Editing” (page 696). Download Low-res Only: Select to download only lowresolution proxy clips for editing. After uploading the sequence, the sequence edits are applied to the corresponding high-resolution clips in the Sonaps database. Note

If low-resolution clips are not available for download, the high-resolution clips are automatically downloaded. Note

Once download editing has been activated, the current terminal remains in download editing mode.

592

Download Editing Settings Dialog

b Offline Editing Mode

Project Explorer Properties Dialog Overview The Project Explorer Properties dialog makes settings related to Project Explorer (page 43).

To Open the Project Explorer Properties Dialog To open the Project Explorer Properties dialog, do one of the following. • Double click the Project Explorer Properties item in the User tab of the Configuration dialog. • Select [Project Explorer Properties...] (see page 49) in the main menu of Project Explorer.

Chapter 16 System Settings

Project Explorer Properties Dialog

593

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button b Tabs

Chapter 16 System Settings

m Cancel button l OK button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Project Explorer Properties dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Project Explorer Properties dialog. Close: Closes the Project Explorer Properties dialog. b Tabs Switch among the following tabs. • Explorer Properties tab (see page 595) • Other tab (see page 597) c OK button Enables the settings made in the Project Explorer Properties dialog and closes the dialog. d Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Project Explorer Properties dialog and closes the dialog.

594

Project Explorer Properties Dialog

Explorer Properties tab

a Clip Action: Double Click b Clip Action: Double Click + Ctrl Key

c Sequence Action: Double Click d Sequence Action: Double Click + Ctrl Key e Used Clip Indicator

f Tool Tip g Naming Mode

j [Copy Direct-Import Material to Default Vault] check box i [Create Direct-Import to Avi / Wav] check box h [Create sequence when creating project] check box

Note

This action is also taken when you select a clip and press the Enter key. b Clip Action : Double Click + Ctrl Key Select one of the following from the drop-down list. • Load to Source Viewer • Picture Icon Play (start Picture Icon Play) Notes

• This action is also taken when you select a clip and press the Ctrl + Enter keys. • Clips cannot be loaded into the Source Viewer unless the Timeline Editor is running. c Sequence Action : Double Click Select one of the following from the drop-down list. • Load to Master Viewer • Picture Icon Play (start Picture Icon Play)

Note

This action is also taken when you select a sequence and press the Enter key. d Sequence Action : Double Click + Ctrl Key Select one of the following from the drop-down list. • Load to Master Viewer • Picture Icon Play (start Picture Icon Play)

Chapter 16 System Settings

a Clip Action : Double Click Select one of the following from the drop-down list. • Load to Source Viewer • Picture Icon Play (start Picture Icon Play)

Note

This action is also taken when you select a sequence and press the Ctrl + Enter keys. e Used Clip Indicator Specifies whether clip usage should be indicated. For used clips, the clip icon Used/Unused indicator lights in Picture View mode, and “Used” appears in the Used column in Text View mode and Picture and Text View mode. Select from the following. • Indicate used clips in Timeline: Light the indicator or display “Used” for clips used in the currently open sequence. • Indicate used clips for Entire Data Source: “Used” (italic) is displayed for clips used in any sequence of the data source. “Used” is displayed for clips used in the currently open sequence.

Project Explorer Properties Dialog

595

• Do not show used clips: Do not light the indicator or display “Used”. f Tool Tip When you select On, the full name of a clip is displayed in a tool tip (a small pop-up window) whenever you move the mouse pointer over the clip name. g Naming Mode Specifies what the system should do in the Logging Tool, and other tools when you attempt to give a clip a name that already exists (is already used by another clip). • Manual: Display a message warning you that the name is already in use and prompting you to choose another name. • Automatic: Append a serial number to the duplicate name and confirm the name without displaying a message. h [Create sequence when creating project] check box When this is checked, a sequence is automatically created when you create a project. i [Create Direct-Import MXF to Avi / Wav] check box When this is checked and you drag and drop an MXF file from Windows Explorer to Project Explorer (direct import), the imported file is separated into an AVI file and a WAV file. Chapter 16 System Settings

596

j [Copy Direct-Import Material to Default Vault] check box When this is checked and you drag and drop materials from Windows Explorer to Project Explorer (direct import), the imported materials are copied to the Default Vault. MXF files are not separated into AVI and WAV files when imported. This check box is disabled when the [Create Direct-Import MXF to Avi/Wav] check box is checked.

Project Explorer Properties Dialog

Other tab

a Affix Clip Name check box

a Affix Clip Name check box When this is checked, adds an affix to the names of clips. Affix Method: Selects prefix or suffix type of affix. Affix Content: [Reel Name or Source] selects the reel name as the affix for CD, DVD, VTR clips, disc name for XDCAM clips, and sequence name for voice over clips. [Bin Name] selects the bin name as the affix.

Chapter 16 System Settings

Project Explorer Properties Dialog

597

Metadata Window Properties Dialog Overview The Metadata Window Properties dialog makes initial settings for the Metadata Window (page 56).

To Open the Metadata Window Properties Dialog To open the Metadata Window Properties dialog, do one of the following. • Double click the Metadata Window Properties item in the User tab of the Configuration dialog. • Select [Metadata Window Properties...] (see page 49) in the main menu of Project Explorer.

Chapter 16 System Settings

598

Metadata Window Properties Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts b Tab List on the Metadata Window

a Menu button

e OK button d Metadata List on the Right Area of the Metadata Window

Chapter 16 System Settings

f Cancel button

c Metadata List on the Left Area of the Metadata Window

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Metadata Window Properties dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Metadata Window Properties dialog. Close: Closes the Metadata Window Properties dialog.

To rename the tab: Enter the desired name in the Alias of Tab box. To change the tab name font size: Select the desired font size in the Font Size list box. To hide the tab: Check the [Hide] check box.

b Tab List on the Metadata Window Allows you to customize the tab list. Select a tab and then make the following settings. To change the tab display order: Click the up or down arrow button to move the selected tab up or down in the list.

d Metadata List on the Right Area of General Tab Allows you to select the information displayed in the left and right sides of the Metadata Window, and to select the display format. To select the display format: Select the [Image] or [List] option button. Select the [None] option button to hide the item.

c Metadata List on the Left Area of General Tab

Metadata Window Properties Dialog

599

To select the type of data displayed in the metadata list: Select from the Category list. Select All to display all types. To select the items to display: Select an item that you want to display in the Metadata list and click the Add >> button to register that item in the Displayed Metadata list. To remove an item from the Displayed Metadata list, click the [Change Speed] is selected, the speed clip will be created according to the specified speed with the same In point as the original clip. However, the duration will be the same as that of the original clip. When this is not checked, the specified speed will be applied, and the duration will be changed. d Create speed clip in PE when speed change Sets whether to enable the creation of speed clips in Project Explorer when the speed is changed. e Create speed clip between In/Out point with margin When this is checked, sets the length of the speed clip to between the In and Out points duration. When this is not checked, sets the length as the same as that of the original clip. Head and Tail: Sets the default margin when [Create speed clip between In/Out point with margin] is turned on. When on, margin changes from default value of

618

Timeline Editor Properties Dialog

00:00:00:00 to the Head and Tail setting in the Speed Control dialogs.

Other tab The Other tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog allows you to make other settings for the Timeline Editor.

a Mode after Selecting Clips in Composer Mode b Playback Stop Point c Sequence Index Picture d Switch to Composer Mode Automatically e Pop up Message for Operating Limitation f Use Default Settings for Rendering

g Confirmation dialog for Proxy Rendering/ Exporting h Confirmation dialog for Media Offline Rendering/Exporting i Keep CG In/Out Effect Area Length j Delete Mark In and Out points after place a clip to timeline k Auto-Add tracks when sub-sequence place to timeline in versioning mode l Open Storyboard Comment m Hide Timeline when open Storyboard

a Mode after Selecting Clips in Composer Mode list box Select Splice-In or Overwrite as the default mode that is enabled after clips are selected in Composer mode. Clips are placed in the opposite mode with the Shift key held down. b Playback Stop Point Specifies the position on the timeline where the playline moves to when play stops or the End key is pressed. • Timeline End: End of the timeline • Clip End: End point of the last clip on the timeline • Clip End + 1: One frame after the end point of the last clip on the timeline

None: Uses the image at the playline position the first time the sequence is saved. If the playline position is black, uses the first non-black frame. If the sequence is subsequently saved again, the index picture is not updated. In Point: Uses the image at the In point when saving the sequence. If no In point has been specified, uses the image at the playline position. If the In point is modified and the sequence is subsequently saved again, the index picture is automatically updated. Current PL?Uses the image at the playline position when saving the sequence. If the playline position is black, uses the first non-black frame. If the sequence is subsequently saved again, the index picture is updated.

Chapter 16 System Settings

n Keep Clips on Non-target Active Tracks

Note

A Mark Out point beyond the end of the last clip takes precedence over the Playback Stop Point setting when using Play In to Out, Play to Out, or Loop Play modes.

If the sequence is saved without performing any operation on the timeline, the index picture is not updated.

c Sequence Index Picture Selects the image at the specified position as the index picture (icon image displayed in Project Explorer) for the sequence.

d Switch to Composer Mode Automatically When this is checked, the Composer mode is automatically enabled when you click the temporal axis portion of the timeline. The default setting is unchecked.

Note

Timeline Editor Properties Dialog

619

e Pop up Message for Operation Limitation When this is checked and invalid In and Out points (for example, the Out point is located before the In Point) are specified during execution of Overwrite, Splice-In, and other procedures, an error message will appear. When this is not checked, the error message will not appear. f Use Default Settings for Rendering When this is checked and Render To Bin, Export File, Export to MXF, Record to VTR, or export to XDCAM is executed, output is performed with the following default settings, regardless of the timeline settings. • Read/Write for each audio track: ON • Audio Automation button: ON • Monitoring for each video/audio track: ON • Scrub FX: ON

Chapter 16 System Settings

The timeline screen does not change during output. In addition, the settings will return to their original configurations after output. This setting is useful in preventing mistakes such as not outputting video/audio for a portion of the tracks because you forgot that monitoring was disabled. Pop Up Dialog to Ask whether Use Default Setting or Not: This is only enabled when the [Use Default Settings for Rendering] check box is checked. When this is checked, a dialog to confirm whether to use default settings for rendering is displayed. If you select [Yes] in this confirmation dialog, the default settings of [Use Default Settings for Rendering] will be used for rendering. If you select [No], the current timeline settings will be used for rendering. g Confirmation dialog for Proxy Rendering/ Exporting When this is checked and Render to Bin, Export, Export MXF, Record to VTR, or XDCAM Export Tool is executed, a warning dialog appears if sections with only proxy (low resolution) media exist. (Checked by default.) h Confirmation dialog for Media Offline Rendering Exporting When this is checked and Render to Bin, Export, Export MXF, Record to VTR, or XDCAM Export Tool is executed, a warning dialog appears if media offline sections exist. (Checked by default.) Note

A warning dialog does not appear when exporting to a Sonaps server. i Keep CG In/Out Effect Area Length When this is checked, the length of the CG In-effect area and Out-effect area remain unchanged when the source clip is trimmed.

620

Timeline Editor Properties Dialog

j Delete Mark In and Out points after place a clip to timeline When this is checked, the Mark In and Out points in a clip are deleted when the clip is added to the timeline by using the Splice-In/Overwrite button. k Auto-add tracks when sub-sequence place to timeline in versioning mode When this is checked, the additional tracks required for a sub sequence are automatically added to the timeline when the sub sequence is loaded in versioning mode. l Open Storyboard Comment When this is checked, a text comments area is displayed in the lower row of each clip in the Storyboard of the Timeline Editor. A comment of up to 256 characters can be entered. Note

The text comments are not saved when a clip is exported to an XML, AAF, or EDL file. m Hide Timeline when open Storyboard When this is checked, the timeline is not displayed when opening the Storyboard. n Keep Clips on Non-target Active Tracks When this is checked, clips on non-target active tracks are not deleted when a clip is added to the timeline.

Batch Properties Dialog Overview The Batch Properties dialog allows you to make settings for batch digitize operations.

To Open the Batch Properties Dialog To open the Batch Properties dialog, do one of the following. • Double click the Batch Editor Properties item in the User tab of the Configuration dialog. • Select [Batch Properties...] (see page 109) in the menu of the Batch Digitize Tool. • Press Ctrl + 1 with the Batch Digitize Tool active.

Chapter 16 System Settings

Batch Properties Dialog

621

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button

2 Timecode Breaks

4 Digitized Clip

5 Re-digitize

3 Digitize Setting

6 Auto Close

9 Cancel button 8 OK button 7 Default button

Chapter 16 System Settings

a Menu button Opens the main menu of the Batch Properties dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Batch Properties dialog. Close: Closes the Batch Properties dialog.

Project Properties dialog and change the recording destination settings. When you make settings in this section, the settings will apply to all clips (the settings made at the time of logging will be ignored).

b Timecode Breaks Ignore: Ignore and continue digitizing. The original timecode is maintained. Make Sub Clip: When a timecode break is encountered, automatically create a sub clip for the section up to the timecode break, register it in a bin, and continue digitizing. The original timecode is maintained.

See “Project Properties Dialog” (page 649) for more information.

See “Digitizing clips with timecode breaks” (page 102) for more information.

e Re-digitize Selects whether to accept or reject re-digitizing of clips that have already been digitized.

c Digitize Setting Provides drop-down lists so that you can select the recording vaults for video and audio (Video Stream Drive, Audio Stream Drive) and the compression method (Compression). The compression method is fixed as Logged Type, and follows the selections made when the clips were logged. Recording vaults can be selected from vaults designated as data recording destinations in the Project Properties dialog. You can select [Project Properties...] to open the

622

Batch Properties Dialog

d Digitized Clip Selects whether to delete digitized clips from the target clip list (Delete From List) or to leave them in the list (Leave in List).

f Auto Close When this is checked, the Batch Digitize Tool closes as soon as digitizing finishes successfully. g Default button Resets the settings to their default values.

h OK button Enables the settings made in the Batch Properties dialog and closes the dialog. i Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Batch Properties dialog and closes the dialog.

Chapter 16 System Settings

Batch Properties Dialog

623

Effect Editor Properties Dialog Overview The Effect Editor Properties dialog makes initial settings for the Video Effect Editor (page 308).

To Open the Effect Editor Properties Dialog To open the Effect Editor Properties dialog, do one of the following. • Double click the Effect Editor Properties item in the User tab of the Configuration dialog. • Select [Effect Editor Properties...] in the Effect Editor main menu. • Press Ctrl + 1 with the Effect Editor active.

Chapter 16 System Settings

624

Effect Editor Properties Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts 1 Menu button 2 Tabs

3 OK button

4 Cancel button Chapter 16 System Settings

a Menu button Displays the Effect Editor Properties dialog main menu. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Effect Editor Properties dialog. Close: Closes the Effect Editor Properties dialog. b Tabs Switch between the Display tab (see page 626) and the Keyframe tab (see page 627). c OK button Confirms the settings and closes the Effect Editor Properties dialog. d Cancel button Cancels the settings and closes the Effect Editor Properties dialog.

Effect Editor Properties Dialog

625

Display tab Allows you to make settings related to display in the Effect Viewer.

1 Default Effect Editor option buttons 2 Still Frame Mode (Video) option buttons

3 Safe Action Area box

a Default Effect Editor option buttons Selects whether actions such as double clicking should start the Simple Effect Editor or the Full Effect Editor. Full: Full Effect Editor Simple: Simple Effect Editor (default) Chapter 16 System Settings

626

b Still Frame Mode (Video) option buttons Select display of the 1st field, the 2nd field, or the frame when video signals are displayed as still pictures. c Safe Action Area box Specifies the size of the safety area displayed in the Effect Viewer of the Effect Editor.

Effect Editor Properties Dialog

Keyframe tab Allows you to make settings related to keyframes in the Effect Viewer.

1 Initial Keyframe list box 2 Keyframe Mode option buttons 3 Add KF To All Parameters option buttons 4 Keyframe Handling list box 5 Path Type list box 6 Lock Condition option buttons 7 Field/Frame Mode list box

b Keyframe Mode option buttons Set the initial value for the keyframe mode when you drag an effect in the FX folder of FX Explorer and drop it on the timeline. Enable: Set to keyframe mode. Disable: Set to single keyframe mode (default). c Add KF To All Parameters option buttons Selects whether to add to all parameters when a new keyframe is added. On: Add to all parameters. Off: Add to selected parameters only (default). d Keyframe Handling list box Selects the initial value of the Keyframe list box (page 312) in the Effect Editor. Use the drop-down list in this dialog to select the desired value. The default selection is Snap On Frame.

f Lock Condition option buttons For parameters whose rate can be locked, selects whether to turn the lock On or Off. The default setting is On. g Field/Frame Mode list box Specifies whether to use fields or frames when rendering software processed effects. (The default setting is Field.) Frame mode is recommended when effects are applied to video with relatively little movement. (Field mode gives higher quality when effects are applied to material containing movement.) The Field/Frame Mode setting is reflected in effects in the following cases. • When effects are dragged from FX Explorer and dropped on clips on the timeline, the setting is reflected in those effects. • When the Effect Editor is started from an effect pasted to a clip on the timeline, the setting is reflected for that effect. • When the Effect Editor is started from an effect and the Field or Frame mode setting is changed before exiting the Effect Editor, the setting is reflected for that effect. Keyframes can be set for effects in which this setting is reflected.

Chapter 16 System Settings

a Initial Keyframe list box Selects whether to set keyframes when you drag an effect from the FX folder of FX Explorer and drop it on the timeline. Select by choosing from the drop-down list. None: Do not set any keyframes (default). IN/OUT Point: Automatically set initial keyframes for all parameters on the Mark In point frame and the frame next to the Mark Out point.

e Path Type list box Selects the path type. The default selection is Linear. See “Path edit button” (page 315) for more information.

Effect Editor Properties Dialog

627

CG Editor Properties Dialog Overview The CG Editor Properties dialog sets various properties of the CG Editor.

To Open the CG Editor Properties Dialog To open the CG Editor Properties dialog, do one of the following. • Select [CG Editor Properties] in the main menu of the CG Editor. • Press Ctrl + 1 with CG Editor active.

Chapter 16 System Settings

628

CG Editor Properties Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b Tabs

Chapter 16 System Settings

d Cancel button c OK button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the CG Editor Properties dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the CG Editor Properties dialog. Close: Closes the CG Editor Properties dialog.

c OK button Enables the settings made in the CG Editor Properties dialog and closes the dialog. d Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the CG Editor Properties dialog and closes the dialog.

b Tabs Switch between the Display _Edit Tab (see page 630) and the Keyframe Tab (see page 631).

CG Editor Properties Dialog

629

Display _Edit Tab Allows you to make settings related to the display in the CG Editor.

a Safe Action Area box b [4:3 Safe Border Mode] check box c Background Color d Font Sharpness

e Text area

Chapter 16 System Settings

a Safe Action Area box Specifies the size of the safety area displayed in the CG Editor. b [4:3 Safe Border Mode] check box When this is checked, a 4:3 safe area appears when displaying projects with 16:9 aspect ratio. c Background Color Selects the background color of the CG Editor window. d Font Sharpness Selects the display quality of text in the CG Editor window. e Text area Sets the default font face, color, size, position, and text parameters for Art Word, Clock, Scroll Screen, Subtitle, and Text clips in the timeline. Click the lock icon to highlight it to set proportional height and width font size adjustment.

630

CG Editor Properties Dialog

Keyframe Tab Allows you to make settings related to keyframes in the CG Editor.

a Initial Keyframe list box b Keyframe Mode option buttons c Path Type list box d Lock Condition option buttons

a Initial Keyframe list box Selects whether to set keyframes when you create CG clips. Select by choosing from the drop-down list. None: Do not set any keyframes (default). IN/OUT Point: Automatically set initial keyframes for all parameters on the Mark In point frame and the frame that follows the Mark Out point.

Chapter 16 System Settings

b Keyframe Mode option buttons Set the initial setting for the keyframe mode in CG Editor. Enable: Set to keyframe mode (default). Disable: Set to single keyframe mode. c Path Type list box Select the initial path type that is configured when the Path Edit button is pressed. Select by choosing from the dropdown list. The default selection is Linear. d Lock Condition option buttons For parameters whose rate can be locked, selects whether to turn the lock ON or OFF. The default setting is ON.

CG Editor Properties Dialog

631

Import File Settings Dialog Overview The Import File Settings dialog allows you to save and load settings for the Import File tool (see page 116).

To Open the Import File Settings Dialog To open the Import File settings dialog, do one of the following. • Double click the Import File Settings item in the User tab of the Configuration dialog. • Press Ctrl + 1 with the Import File tool active.

Chapter 16 System Settings

632

Import File Settings Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b File Type list box c Audio Input Level

d [Audio Mix Down to Mono] check box e [Limiter] check box f [Compose] check box h [Level Conversion] check box

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Import File Settings dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Import File Settings dialog. Close: Closes the Import File Settings window.

e [Limiter] check box Registers whether limiting of audio peaks that exceed a preset threshold is done for each file type.

b File type list box Selects a file type.

g [Level Conversion] check box Compresses the color range of the import file to that of the video equipment.

c Audio Input Level Registers the audio input level for each file type. d [Audio Mix Down to Mono] check box Registers whether mix down of multiple audio tracks is done for each file type.

Chapter 16 System Settings

j Still Clip Default Duration

f [Compose] check box Copies sequential image files into a single file.

h [DropFrame] list box When DF is selected, enables the drop-frame timecode count. When NDF is selected, enables non-drop-frame timecode count. i Still Clip Default Duration Sets the default duration time of still clips.

Import File Settings Dialog

633

Export Settings Dialog Overview The Export Settings dialog allows you to save and load settings for the Export dialog (see page 496).

To Open the Export Settings Dialog To open the Export File Properties dialog, do one of the following. • Double click the Export Properties item in the User tab of the Configuration dialog. • Press Ctrl + 1 with the Export dialog active.

Chapter 16 System Settings

634

Export Settings Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts

a Menu button

b File name

c Files of Type list box

d [Sequential File] check box e Start No. f [Level Conversion] check box

g Cancel button h OK button i Options button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Export Settings dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Export Settings dialog. Close: Closes the Export Settings window.

c Files of Type list box Selects a file type. d [Sequential File] check box When Targa, JPEG, BMP, or TIFF is selected as the file type, specifies whether to export sequential files. Check the check box to export sequential files. When this is not checked, still image files are exported. e Start No. Specifies the starting number for the suffix (sequence number) that is added to the end of each file name when exporting sequential files. f [Level Conversion] check box Specifies whether color compensation processing is done for each file type. g Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Export Settings dialog and closes the dialog.

i Options button Opens the Options dialog which allows you to make the following settings. • Valid Region: Specifies the clip output range for external media files for each file type. • Frame Aspect Ratio: Specifies the aspect ratio of external media files for each file type. • Resolution: Specifies the resolution of external media files for each file type. • CODEC: Specifies a video signal compression method for each file type. • Color: Specifies the number of colors (gradations) in external media files for each file type. • Frame Rate: Specifies the frame rate in external media files for each file type. • Data Rate: Specifies the data transfer rate for external media files, for each file type. • Quality: Specifies picture quality in external media files for each file type. • Key Frame: Specifies keyframes for external media files for each file type. • CODEC: Specifies an audio signal compression method for each file type. • Sampling Frequency: Specifies the audio sampling frequency for each file type. • Format: Specifies the audio sampling format of external media files for each file type.

Export Settings Dialog

Chapter 16 System Settings

b File name Enter the default file name used during export.

h OK button Enables the settings made in the Export Settings dialog and closes the dialog.

635

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog Overview The XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog allows you to make the settings required to import material from XDCAM devices and to export clips and sequences to XDCAM devices. The appearance of the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog varies depending on the media being configured. The XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog automatically opens displaying the tab for the database type selected in XDCAM Explorer. • XDCAM Tab (see page 640) • XDCAM EX Tab (see page 641) • XDCAM UDF Tab (see page 642) • XDCAM Station Tab (see page 643) • Canon XF Tab (see page 644) • P2 Tab (see page 645)

Chapter 16 System Settings

636

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

To Open the XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

1

Select an XDCAM device icon or XDCAM folder in the XDCAM database.

2

Click the XDCAM Explorer Properties tool button in XDCAM Explorer.

Chapter 16 System Settings

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

637

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b User Setting

c General Settings

d Import Status

e Bin Settings

f Import Method

g Device tabs

h OK button i Cancel button

Chapter 16 System Settings

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. The main menu contains the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. Close: Closes the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. b User Setting Displays the currently active user settings selected in the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog. c General Settings Select or clear the check boxes as necessary. Automatically Show Import Tool: When this is checked, the XDCAM Import Tool appears automatically when you import material. The XDCAM Import Tool is not opened automatically when a clip is imported by drag & drop or by double-clicking. Automatically Start Import Tasks: When this is checked, import of a clip starts automatically when the clip is registered in the XDCAM Import Tool. When this is cleared, import must be started manually. The XDCAM cache settings are ignored when this option is selected. Automatically Delete Complete Import Tasks: When this is checked, registered clips for which import is

638

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

complete are automatically deleted from the XDCAM Import Tool import clip list. When this is not checked, clips for which import is complete will not be deleted from the list but will appear in green text. Prioritize for Importing Proxy / High-Res clips: When this is checked and multiple XDCAM clips are registered in the Import File list, the proxy (low resolution) sections of all of the clips are imported first. The full-resolution (high resolution) sections of all of the clips are imported after import of the proxy sections is complete. You can begin editing clips for which import of the proxy sections are complete using Source Viewer or the timeline. When this is not checked, clips are imported one-byone with the proxy (low resolution) sections of each clip imported before the full-resolution (high resolution) sections. d Import Status Configures import settings. Import Proxy: When this is checked, proxy (low resolution) media is imported when import is executed. Available only for XDCAM and XDCAM UDF clips.

Import High-Res: When this is checked, full-resolution media is imported when import is executed. Available only for XDCAM and XDCAM UDF clips. Replace Proxy Audio with MP3 during High-Res: When this is checked, audio files are created in MP3 format when importing full-resolution (high resolution) media. When this is cleared, audio files are created in WAV format. Import Extended Portion: When this is checked, only sections of the timeline that were extended through trimming operations are imported. Available only when parser import method is selected. Cache Clip Picture with Metadata: When this is checked, index pictures are also imported when metadata is imported. Available only for XDCAM clips. Refresh Icon after Export: When this is checked, index pictures are shown automatically after export. When unchecked, index pictures must be updated manually for each database after export.

g Device tabs Switches the XDCAM Explorer Properties dialog to the properties for the connected device. XDCAM: Specifies the properties for content on XDCAM devices. See XDCAM Tab (page 640). XDCAM EX: Specifies the properties for content on XDCAM EX devices. See XDCAM EX Tab (page 641). XDCAM UDF: Specifies the properties for content on UDF-formatted SxS cards. See XDCAM UDF Tab (page 642). XDCAM Station: Specifies the properties for content on XDCAM Station devices. See XDCAM Station Tab (page 643). Canon XF: Specifies the properties for content on memory cards from Canon XF-series camcorders. See Canon XF Tab (page 644). P2: Specifies the properties for content on memory cards from Panasonic P2 devices. See P2 Tab (page 645). h OK button Applies setting changes, and closes the XDCAM Properties dialog. i Cancel button Cancels setting changes, and closes the XDCAM Properties dialog.

f Import Method Margin: Specifies the length of the margins added before the In point and after the Out point when a clip is imported to the timeline in the Import Timeline Clip Tool with the [Export Used Portion] check box checked in the XDCAM Export Tool. The unit is frames. Available only for parser import method. Default value is 30 [0 to 999]. Distance: When cutting a single source clip or clip on timeline is partial imported to create multiple timeline clips , clips on the source clip that are separated by a number of frames less than the number specified here will be imported as a single full-resolution (high resolution) media clip. The unit is frames. Available only for parser import method. Default value is 1800 [0 to 99999]. File Import: Selects the material import method. Default is [Parser]. This option should be configured based on the device used. • Parser: Parses the content and creates new nativeformat AVI+WAV files in XPRI NS. The entire content or partial content can be imported using parser importing.

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

Chapter 16 System Settings

e Bin Settings Specifies the data storage locations for import and export operations. Set the locations as required. Video Vaults list box: Selects the video stream drive. Leave blank to use the system vaults. Audio Vaults list box: Selects the audio stream drive. Leave blank to use the system vaults. Temp (temporary) Vaults button and box: Specifies the folder to store temporary files generated during XDCAM import.

• Copy: Copies the original files into XPRI NS storage as-is, without parsing. The entire content is copied.

639

XDCAM Tab

a Import Settings

b Export Setting

Chapter 16 System Settings

a Import Settings Specifies the settings for importing clips. FAM Settings: Sets properties for FAM (File Access Mode) connections. • Cache/Direct Access Mode: Selects the method in which proxy (low resolution) video and audio is displayed in the XDCAM Explorer monitor screen. This setting is set to Cache Mode for FTP connections. - Cache Mode: Proxy (low resolution) video and audio that has been imported onto the system hard disk is displayed in the XDCAM Explorer monitor screen. This mode requires some time to import the proxy media, but a particular disc does not have to be loaded in the XDCAM device to preview the media in this mode. Automatically cache from Inserted Discs: When this is checked, clips will be automatically cached if a disc is inserted or XDCAM Explorer is launched. - Direct Access Mode: Proxy (low resolution) video and audio is displayed in the monitor screen by directly accessing the disc loaded in the XDCAM device. Unlike Cache Mode, importing the media onto the hard disk is unnecessary, but a disc that is currently loaded in the XDCAM device must be selected in order to preview. • Automatically Import from Inserted Discs: When this is checked and clips that have not been imported by XDCAM Import Tool exist on multiple discs, import will start automatically when each disc is inserted. Link Mode: Selects whether or not to enable link mode. In link mode, the high and low resolution clips on XDCAM media are managed directly by XPRI NS. Notes

• Link mode is not recommended when using FTP connection.

640

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

• Importing linked clips while editing the clips is not recommended due to device limitations. b Export Setting Specifies the settings for exporting clips. Export Format: Specifies the video codec, audio codec, and compression to use when exporting to a blank disk that has only been formatted. The codec of the existing data is used when data has already been recorded on a disc. Export even if bit rate of stream is incompatible: When this is checked, the clip will be exported without Dolby E channel if the bit rate is incompatible. When not checked, an error message appears if the bit rate setting is incompatible. Convert Settings: Specifies the fill method and aspect ratio when exporting in SD format.

XDCAM EX Tab

a Import Settings

b Export Setting

a Import Settings Specifies the settings for importing clips. Link Mode: Selects whether or not to enable link mode. In link mode, the high and low resolution clips on XDCAM media are managed directly by XPRI NS. Create Proxy when no Proxy clips rooted: When this is checked, a proxy clip is created when a highresolution clip is imported and there is no proxy clip available on the media.

Chapter 16 System Settings

b Export Setting Specifies the settings for exporting clips. Export Format: Specifies the video codec and audio codec to use when exporting to a blank disk that has only been formatted. The codec of the existing data is used when data has already been recorded on a disc. Convert Settings: Specifies the fill method.

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

641

XDCAM UDF Tab

a Import Settings

b Export Setting

a Import Settings Specifies the settings for importing clips. Link Mode: Selects whether or not to enable link mode. In link mode, the high and low resolution clips on XDCAM media are managed directly by XPRI NS. b Export Setting Specifies the settings for exporting clips. Export Format: Specifies the video codec and audio codec to use when exporting to a blank disk that has only been formatted. The codec of the existing data is used when data has already been recorded on a disc. Convert Settings: Specifies the fill method.

Chapter 16 System Settings

642

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

XDCAM Station Tab Note

XDCAM Station is not supported in this version.

a Import Settings

b Export Setting

a Import Settings Specifies the settings for importing clips. Link Mode: Selects whether or not to enable link mode. In link mode, the high and low resolution clips on XDCAM media are managed directly by XPRI NS.

Chapter 16 System Settings

b Export Setting Specifies the settings for exporting clips. Export Format: Specifies the video codec, audio codec, and compression to use when exporting to a blank disk that has only been formatted. The codec of the existing data is used when data has already been recorded on a disc. Export even if bit rate of stream is incompatible: When this is checked, the clip will be exported without Dolby E channel if the bit rate is incompatible. When not checked, an error message appears if the bit rate setting is incompatible. Convert Settings: Specifies the fill method and aspect ratio when exporting in SD format.

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

643

Canon XF Tab

a Import Settings

b Export Setting

a Import Settings Specifies the settings for importing clips. Link Mode: Selects whether or not to enable link mode. In link mode, the high and low resolution clips on XDCAM media are managed directly by XPRI NS. Create Proxy when no Proxy clips rooted: When this is checked, a proxy clip is created when a highresolution clip is imported and there is no proxy clip available on the media.

Chapter 16 System Settings

644

b Export Setting Specifies the settings for exporting clips. Export Format: Specifies the video codec and audio codec to use when exporting to a blank disk that has only been formatted. The codec of the existing data is used when data has already been recorded on a disc. Convert Settings: Specifies the fill method.

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

P2 Tab

a Import Settings

b Export Setting

a Import Settings Specifies the settings for importing clips. Link Mode: Selects whether or not to enable link mode. In link mode, the high and low resolution clips on XDCAM media are managed directly by XPRI NS. Create Proxy when no Proxy clips rooted: When this is checked, a proxy clip is created when a highresolution clip is imported and there is no proxy clip available on the media. Native Import: When this is checked, XPRI NS uses the original codec to parse the P2 clip into AVI+WAV native format. Available only for parser import method. Chapter 16 System Settings

b Export Setting Specifies the settings for exporting clips. Export Format: Specifies the video codec and audio codec to use when exporting to a blank disk that has only been formatted. The codec of the existing data is used when data has already been recorded on a disc. Convert Settings: Specifies the fill method.

XDCAM Explorer Properties Dialog

645

XDCAM Device Settings Dialog Overview The XDCAM Device Settings dialog allows you to specify the IP addresses of XDCAM devices for connection with FTP (File Transfer Protocol) servers. You can connect to these address from XPRI NS to import and export MXF files and other data. Setting the IP addresses of XDCAM devices or FTP servers in this dialog allows you to import and export MXF files from and to those devices. For more information about importing and exporting MXF files, see “XDCAM Explorer” (page 509) and “XDCAM Export Tool” (page 527).

To Open the XDCAM Device Settings Dialog Select [Device Settings...] from the main menu of the XDCAM Import Tool.

Chapter 16 System Settings

646

XDCAM Device Settings Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts 4 Device IP 1 Device

5 Password 6 Audio list box

2 User 3 Local IP list box

7 Device list

qs Exit button

9 Delete button 8 Add button

a Device Specifies the name of the device (XDCAM) to be registered. Enter the device name.

e Password Specifies a password for logging in to the XDCAM device. Enter a password.

b User Specifies a user name for logging in to the XDCAM device. Enter a user name.

f Audio list box Specifies audio tracks to import or export. Open the list and place check marks next to tracks that you want to use.

c Local IP list box Specifies the IP address of the computer on which XPRI NS is installed. If your computer is configured to use multiple IP addresses, select the address you want to use from the list box.

g Device list Displays a list of the registered devices.

d Device IP Specifies a device IP address. Enter an FTP address if you want to connect to the device by FTP.

Chapter 16 System Settings

qa Save button 0 Update button

h Add button Registers the device with the information specified in Device, User, Local IP list box, Device IP, Password, Audio list box. The device appears in the device list. i Delete button Deletes the selected device from the device list.

XDCAM Device Settings Dialog

647

j Update button Updates the device list after device information has been changed. k Save button Saves changes to the device list and closes the dialog. l Exit button Closes the dialog without saving changes to the device list.

Chapter 16 System Settings

648

XDCAM Device Settings Dialog

Project Properties Dialog Overview The Format tab of the Project Properties dialog displays the output video format and other properties which were set when the currently open project was created. This tab also displays the system properties Sampling Frequency and Quantization. Depending on the project type, you can select the compression method from the Compression list. The Media Vaults tab allows you to specify which media vaults will be available to this project. The Stream Defaults tab allows you to specify which of the vaults are the defaults for this project.

To Open the Project Properties Dialog To open the Project Properties dialog, do one of the following. • Open a project and double click the Project Properties item in the Project tab of the Configuration dialog. • Select a project in Project Explorer and select Project Properties... from the context menu.

Chapter 16 System Settings

Project Properties Dialog

649

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button b Tabs

e Apply button d Cancel button c OK button Chapter 16 System Settings

a Menu button Opens the Project Properties dialog main menu. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Project Properties dialog. Close: Closes the Project Properties dialog. b Tabs Switch among the Format tab (page 651), the Media Vaults tab (page 652) and the Stream Defaults tab (page 653). c OK button Enables the settings made in the Project Properties dialog and closes the dialog. d Cancel button Cancels the settings made in the Project Properties dialog and closes the dialog. e Apply button Enables the current settings without closing the Project Properties dialog.

650

Project Properties Dialog

Format tab The Format tab displays the output video format and other properties which were set when the currently open project was created. This tab also displays the system properties

Sampling Frequency and Quantization. Depending on the project type, you can select the compression method from the Compression list.

a Properties

b TimeCode list c Compression list

a Properties Displays the properties of the current project and system. Chapter 16 System Settings

b TimeCode list Select from FTC, LTC, or VITC for the timecode type. c Compression list Selects the compression method. The selectable methods vary depending on the project. SD project: Select from among Uncompressed, MPEG IMX 30, MPEG IMX 40, MPEG IMX 50, and DVCAM 25. HD project: Select from among MPEG HD 18, MPEG HD 25, MPEG HD 35, MPEG HD 50, and HDV.

Project Properties Dialog

651

Media Vaults tab The Media Vaults tab of the Project Properties dialog (see page 649) allows you to define which public system media vaults will be available as project media vaults. a System Media Vaults list

c Project Media Vaults list

b Add >> button

d > button Adds selected system media vaults to the Project Media Vaults list. c Project Media Vaults list Shows the vaults that can be specified for use as the stream vault for this project. d > button. The selected computer is added to the Favorites list.

2

Set the data source in the Default Data Source list box.

3

Click the OK button. The selected computer is registered as the system's data source computer. Note

You can register only one data source computer. To cancel a data source computer designation Select the computer in the Favorites list and click the button. The selected vault is added to the Project Media Vaults list.

3

Repeat step 2 to add an audio vault to the Project Media Vaults list.

4

Click the Stream Defaults tab. The Stream Defaults tab appears.

5

Select vaults in the following list boxes. • Video Stream Vault list box: The video vault selected above. • Audio Stream Vault list box: The audio vault selected above.

To set the Mark In point of the next clip automatically after registering a reel clip Proceed as follows if you want the first frame after the Mark Out point of a logged or digitized clip to become the Mark In point of the next clip.

Click the Media Vaults tab.

6

Click the OK button. The project will use the newly selected video and audio vaults.

Chapter 16 System Settings

Timeline Editor Properties Dialog You can use the Timeline Editor Properties dialog to specify various non-track display options and to make trim, shortcut key, and auto save interval settings. See page 607 for more information about the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Project Properties Dialog The Project Properties dialog allows you to check various properties that were specified when projects were created, and to specify media vaults. See page 649 for more information about the Project Properties dialog.

To check project properties Check the settings in the Format tab of the Project Properties dialog.

To specify media vaults After creating your media vaults, proceed as follows.

Making System and Editing Settings

661

In this case, the system compares the comments for the items. If the comments are the same, a message appears asking if you want to overwrite the settings. Answer by selecting one of the following. • Yes: Overwrite. • No: Do not overwrite. Append the settings for the items selected in the User tab. However, comments are not saved, even if they exist in the Comment column of the User tab. • Yes to all (appears when multiple items are selected). Overwrite the settings for all of the selected items. • Cancel: Cancel the save operation and return to the Save As dialog.

User Setting Management The User tab of the Configuration dialog allows you to save user settings for the principal XPRI NS tools in files, to load settings from files, and to perform operations such as duplicating and deleting user settings. You can also export the settings from a System Editor version of XPRI NS, and then import the user configuration settings into a Standalone version of XPRI NS.

To load user settings from a file You can load user settings from a file and have them reflected instantly in XPRI NS. Proceed as follows.

1

Do one of the following. • Click the Menu button and select [Import] • Right click anywhere in the User tab and select [Import] from the context menu. The Open File dialog opens.

2 Chapter 16 System Settings

The Setting List dialog opens.

3 To save user settings in files Proceed as follows to save the settings of an item in the Setting column to a file. For example, you could select the Project Explorer Properties item and save the settings made in the Project Explorer Properties dialog to a file.

1

Select the desired item in the Setting column of the User tab (multiple selections possible) and select [Export] from the context menu. The Save As dialog opens.

2

Specify a save destination for the file in the Save in box of the Save As dialog, and specify a file name in the File Name box.

3

Click the Save button in the Save As dialog. The settings for the selected item are saved to a file. If the specified save destination file contains the same items as the current selection

662

In the Open File dialog, select the target file and click the Open button.

User Setting Management

In the list box of the Setting List dialog, select the desired setting item (multiple selections possible) and click the Load button. To load the settings to all items, click the All Load button. List box

The selected items are loaded and appear in the User tab.

The selected GUI Properties are saved as the System Default Template.

When loading the same items that were applied before the load In this case, the system compares the comments for the items. If the comments are the same, a message appears asking if you want to overwrite the settings. Answer by selecting one of the following. • Yes: Overwrite. • No: Do not overwrite. Append the settings for the items selected in the Setting List dialog. Serial numbers (_001, _002, ...) are appended to the comments. • Yes to all (appears when multiple items are selected). Overwrite the settings for all of the selected items. • Cancel: Cancel the load operation and close the Setting List dialog.

For more information about Role Type, Administrator, and Power User, see the operating instructions for Net Manager.

To duplicate setting items You can duplicate setting items displayed in the User tab. Right click the desired item and select Duplicate from the context menu.

To delete setting items

To specify GUI Properties user settings as a System Template You can save a set of GUI Properties user settings as a template that is applied to all users, except those with a Role Type of Simple User (System Template). To save a set of user settings as the System Template, you must have a user Role Type of Administrator or Power User.

1

In the User tab, right click the GUI Properties to specify as the System Template.

2

Select [Share to System] from the context menu. The selected GUI Properties are saved as the System Template.

For more information about Role Type, Administrator, Power User, and Simple User, see the operating instructions for Net Manager.

Chapter 16 System Settings

You can delete setting items displayed in the User tab. Select the target item (multiple selections possible) and select [Delete] in the context menu. Notes

• Items cannot be deleted when their check boxes are checked. • It is not possible to delete all items.

To reset all setting items You can reset all of the items in the User tab to the default settings. Click the Menu button and select [Reset All To Factory Settings].

To specify GUI Properties user settings as a System Default Template You can save a set of GUI Properties user settings as a template that is applied to all users (System Default Template). To save a set of user settings as the System Default Template, you must have a user Role Type of Administrator or Power User.

1

In the User tab, right click the GUI Properties to specify as the System Default Template.

2

Select [Save as System Default] from the context menu.

User Setting Management

663

Open File Dialog Opening User Settings Files Overview The Open File dialog opens template files containing user settings for the main tools of XPRI NS.

Chapter 16 System Settings

664

Open File Dialog - Opening User Settings Files

Names and Functions of Parts c New Folder button d Back button e Forward button f Move Up button

a Menu button b Search list box

g View button

h File list

l OK button k Cancel button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Open File dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Open File dialog. Close: Closes the Open File dialog (in the same way as the Cancel button).

e Forward button Moves forward to the next window display.

b Search list box Select the folder containing the desired template by selecting it from the drop-down list.

g View button Selects the view mode of the file list. Icon: Displays file names and icons in the file list. List: Displays a list of file names only in the file list. Details: Displays the name, type, date of most recent modification, and size for each file in the file list.

Note

You cannot specify folders in UNC path syntax. To access a server through a network, configure the server as a network drive. c New Folder button Creates a new folder in the folder displayed in the Save in list. d Back button Moves back to the previous window display.

f Move Up button Moves up one level in the folder hierarchy and displays that folder in the Search list.

Chapter 16 System Settings

i File Name box j File Type list box

h File list Displays all of the files and folders in the current folder which match the type selected in the File Type list. When you click a folder in the list, the name of the Search list changes to the name of that folder and the files and folders which it contains appear in the file list. When you select a file, the name of that file appears in the File Name box. You can open the selected file by double clicking it or

Open File Dialog - Opening User Settings Files

665

by selecting Open from its context menu. You can delete the selected file or folder by pressing the Delete key or by selecting Delete from its context menu. i File Name box Displays the name of the currently selected file from the file list. You can change the name by entering the desired name in the box. The extension of user template files is “.utf”. j File Type list box Selects the type of files to display in the file list. k Cancel button Cancels the file loading operation and closes the Open File dialog. l OK button When there is a file name displayed in the File Name box, loads that file.

Chapter 16 System Settings

666

Open File Dialog - Opening User Settings Files

Save As Dialog - Saving User Settings Files Overview The Save As dialog saves template files containing user settings for the main tools of XPRI NS.

Chapter 16 System Settings

Save As Dialog - Saving User Settings Files

667

Names and Functions of Parts

c New Folder button d Back button e Forward button f Move Up button

a Menu button b Search list box

g View button

h File list

l OK button k Cancel button

Chapter 16 System Settings

i File Name box j File Type list box

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Save As dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Save As dialog. Close: Closes the Save As dialog (in the same way as the Cancel button). b Search list box Select the folder where you want to save the template by selecting it from the drop-down list.

g View button Selects the view mode of the file list. Icon: Displays file names and icons in the file list. List: Displays a list of file names only in the file list. Details: Displays the name, type, date of most recent modification, and size for each file in the file list.

c New Folder button Creates a new folder in the folder displayed in the Save in list.

h File list Displays all of the files and folders in the current folder which match the type selected in the File Type list.

d Back button Moves back to the previous window display.

i File Name box Displays the name of the currently selected file from the file list. You can change the name by entering the desired name in the box. The extension of user template files is “.utf”.

e Forward button Moves forward to the next window display.

668

f Move Up button Moves up one level in the folder hierarchy and displays that folder in the Save in list.

Save As Dialog - Saving User Settings Files

j File Type list box Selects the type of files to display in the file list. k Cancel button Cancels the save operation and closes the Save As dialog. l OK button When there is a file name displayed in the File Name box, saves customizations in a file with that name.

Chapter 16 System Settings

Save As Dialog - Saving User Settings Files

669

User Layouts Use layouts allow you to customize the sizes and positions of system tools to match your work style. This allows you to save layouts for particular tasks and recall them as the situation requires. You can save and recall up to 64 user layouts. The currently loaded user layout is marked by a check mark in the [GUI Properties] item in the User Tab (page 579) of the Configuration dialog. A check also appears beside the name of the current user layout in the list of layouts under the [Layout...] command of the taskbar menu. There also 5 pre-defined layouts (Audio Editing, Basic, Default, Effect Editing, XDCAM Editing). You cannot overwrite a pre-defined layout.

User Layout Operations User layouts are handled as GUI Properties user settings. You can open, copy, import, export, and delete GUI Properties user setting files, and return them to the default settings. To rename a user layout, you can edit the Comment field of the GUI Properties item in the User tab of the Configuration dialog. Chapter 16 System Settings

See “User Setting Management” (page 662) for more information about user setting operations.

To switch between user layouts Use any of the following methods. • Select the name of the layout you want from the list of user layout names under [Layout] (see page 40) in the taskbar menu. • Select the name of the layout you want from the list of user layout names under [Layout...] in the context menu of the desktop. • Press the User Layout Context Menu focus hot key to display the context menu, and select the name of the layout you want.

To save the current user layout Do one of the following. • Select [Save] under [Layout] (see page 40) in the taskbar menu. • Select [Layout] > [Save] from the desktop context menu. • Press the User Layout Context Menu focus hot key and select [Save] from the context menu. The currently loaded layout is saved under its current name, overwriting the previous version.

670

User Layouts

To save the current user layout under a new name Do one of the following to open the Save as... dialog. • Select [Save as...] under [Layout] (see page 40) in the taskbar menu. • Select [Layout] > [Save as...] from the desktop context menu. • Press the User Layout Context Menu focus hot key and select [Save as...] from the context menu.

Enter a layout name in the edit box and click OK to save the layout under a new name.

Default User Layouts XPRI NS has two window layout templates that determine the default layout of tools in the window. >>> Start of List >>>

• Global layout: Source Viewer, Master Viewer, and Timeline Editor predominantly displayed on the left side of the window. • Japanese layout: Source Viewer, Master Viewer, and Timeline Editor predominantly displayed on the right side of the window. [Restore from File...] in the context menu of the selected project group. • Select [Input] >[Restore from File...] in the main menu. • Select [Input] >[Restore from File...] in the context menu of the List View pane. Note

Media files are not saved in backup files. After the restore finishes, you will need to digitize or re-import the clips in the project to recreate the project's media files.

Chapter 17 Backup and Restore

674

Restore from File Dialog

Names and Functions of Parts a Menu button

b File list

e [Clip Info] check box c [Catalog Info] check box

f [Create Bin] check box

d [Clip File] check box

h Cancel button g OK button

a Menu button Displays the main menu of the Restore from File dialog. The main menu has the following commands. Help...: Displays help about the Restore from File dialog. Close: Closes the Restore from File dialog. This command has the same function as the Cancel button.

c [Catalog Info] check box When this is checked, the hierarchy structure of the bin is restored.

Note

If a project of the same name already exists in the data source or project group restore destination, a suffix is added to the project name when the project is restored. h Cancel button Cancels the restore and closes the Restore from File dialog.

d [Clip File] check box When this is checked, media files for clips are also restored.

Chapter 17 Backup and Restore

b File list Displays the folders located on the hard disk of the local computer in tree format. Select a folder to restore from the tree display.

g OK button When clicked, closes the Restore from File dialog and starts the restore. A progress window appears. You can cancel restore by clicking Cancel under the progress bar. When the restore is complete, the restored project appears in the project group.

e [Clip Info] check box When this is checked and you restore a project or sequence, clips will also be restored. f [Create Bin] check box When this is checked, a bin named “Imported Bin” is created, and the data is restored under this bin. This is disabled when restoring projects.

Restore from File Dialog

675

Restoring Backup Files Proceed as follows to restore a project from a backup file. Note

Media files are not saved in backup files. After the restore finishes, you will need to digitize or re-import the clips in the project to recreate the project's media files.

1

In the Tree View pane of Project Explorer, select the project group in which you want to restore the project.

2

Select [Input] >[Restore from File...] from the main menu, from the context menu of the selected data source or project group, or from the context menu of the List View pane. The Restore from File dialog opens.

3

Select the backup file in the file list.

4

Click the OK button. The Restore from File dialog closes, and the restore from the backup file starts. To cancel the restore, click Cancel under the progress bar. When the restore is complete, the restored project appears in the project group. Note

If a project of the same name already exists in restore destination (the selected project group) when you click the OK button, a suffix is added to the project name. Chapter 17 Backup and Restore

676

Restoring Backup Files

Cleaning the Local Database

The monitor allows you to review the content in the file before removing the file.

5

You can change the setting of Temp Path to store different media clips in different locations.

Overview The Clear File Tool is used to perform the following tasks on the local database. • Remove redundant media files • Repair the database and collect orphaned files • Delete work files To open the Clear File Tool, exit the XPRI NS editor and run the “Clear File Tool.exe” executable file from Windows Explorer. C:\\Program Files\Sony\XPRI NS\bin_unrelease\Clear File Tool.exe

Click the Move File button to move the selected files in the File List to the location specified in Temp Path.

To backup or delete the redundant files, use the file management functions in Windows Explorer.

Repairing the Local Database You can repair file references, resource counts, and collect orphaned clips and catalogs.

1

Exit XPRI NS and run the “Clean File Tool.exe” file from Windows Explorer. The Clean File Tool window opens.

Removing Redundant Media Files

2

Click the Repair Database tab.

3

Select the database items to repair.

4

Click the Repair button.

You can remove redundant media clips that are no longer in use from the database using the Clear File Tool. Using the tool, you can search for content, review the content before removal, and then move the content easily and safely. Different media files can be moved to different folders.

1

Exit XPRI NS and run the “Clean File Tool.exe” file from Windows Explorer. The Clear File Tool window opens.

2

Click the Search button.

Deleting System Work Files

The redundant media files are displayed in the File List on the left side of the window.

You can delete work files created by XPRI NS during editing when editing is finished. These files include temporary files, hidden files, index files, and undo/redo list files.

3

Click the Browse button to select a temporary location to store redundant media files.

4

Select a file in the list to view its content in the monitor on the right side of the window.

1

Chapter 17 Backup and Restore

The database issues are repaired and the result is displayed in the log in the window. Orphaned clips and catalogs are automatically moved to the Lostdata folder in the database. Subsequent repair operations create folders called Lostdatannn, where nnn is an incrementing 3-digit number.

Exit XPRI NS and run the “Clean File Tool.exe” file from Windows Explorer. The Clean File Tool window opens.

Cleaning the Local Database

677

2

Click the Delete Junk Files tab.

3

Select the items to delete.

4

Click the Clear button. The files are permanently deleted.

Note

You can also select the [Compulsory delete clips] check box to enable deletion of any file directly from Windows Explorer. This function removes the file protection from media files, and for this reason should only be used with extreme caution when enabled.

Chapter 17 Backup and Restore

678

Cleaning the Local Database

NS-CAT1 Device Software

Chapter

18

Overview XPRI NS supports touch panel operation from a Sony SGPT111 or SGPT112 tablet (SONY Tablet S1) running version 3.2.1 (Release 2) of the AndroidTM operating system. A dedicated app (NS-CAT1 device software) is provided for installation on the tablet which, when the tablet is paired with a PC running XPRI NS, enables editing using multi-touch gestures without the need for legacy hardware controllers and at a fraction of the cost. The only requirement on the PC is Bluetooth support using a Bluetooth adapter.

Overview

679

Names and Functions of Parts a Home button b Mouse/Touch navigation tab c Window name indicator d Connection button e Preferences button

g Focus/Command

f Focus/Command

button bar

button

h Track panel

i Timeline

j Task bar

a Home button Toggles the NS-CAT1 operating mode between Mouse mode and Touch mode. b Mouse/Touch navigation tab Displays the current NS-CAT1 operating mode. Tap either tab to select the corresponding operating mode.

• • • •

SV (Digitize Mode) Audio Input Tool Voice Over Tool Import CD Audio Tool

The window name indicator displays the name of the NSCAT1 device software during startup and when the tablet is not connected to the XPRI NS workstation.

See Operating Modes (page 685).

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

680

c Window name indicator Displays the window that has the current focus in XPRI NS on the PC workstation (from the following list) or “Mouse Mode Window” for windows not in the following list. • Timeline Editor • Trim Viewer • Audio Mixer • Audio Output Tool • Import File Tool • Project Explorer • FX Explorer • Generate SG Clip • XDCAM Explorer • Master Viewer • CG Editor • Source Viewer • Import DVD Tool • Batch Digitize Tool • Logging Tool • Record to VTR

Overview

d Connection button Connects NS-CAT1 to XPRI NS on the PC workstation using Bluetooth. e Preferences button Sets the following preferences for the NS-CAT1 app. Touch Operation: Sets the preferences for touch control gestures. • Jog Sensitivity • Jog Sensitivity Threshold • Jog Inertia Force • Tap Time • Double Tap Time • Flick Sensitivity • Mouse Sensitivity Sound Preferences: Sets the preferences for audio. • Operation Sound Help: Displays the touch gestures used to perform tasks in each of the XPRI NS windows. See “Touch Mode Gestures” (page 686).

About: Displays information about the NS-CAT1 app and buttons for resetting the app. • Version: Displays the version of the NS-CAT1 app. • Restore to application default: Resets the app to the default preferences settings. • Change initialization preset: Selects one of three preset preference settings: Slow, Normal (factory default), and Fast. • Operation environment: Displays the supported operating environments. f Focus/Command button Toggles the display of the focus/command button bar between focus button list mode and command button list mode. g Focus/Command button bar Displays the focus/command buttons, according to the setting of the Focus/Command button. Focus: In focus button list mode, the focus/command button bar displays a static list of focus buttons used for starting the various tools in XPRI NS. See “Focus Button Bar” (page 682). Command: In command button list mode, the focus/ command button bar displays a dynamic list of command buttons for the current tool displayed in XPRI NS. The command buttons have the same function as the command buttons in the various tools in XPRI NS. See “Command Button Bar” (page 682). Note

There are no command buttons displayed during Mouse mode operation. h Track panel Displays the source track panel controller on the left and the master track panel controller on the right. The track panel controllers are identical in operation to the track panel controllers in XPRI NS. The track panel is displayed in Touch mode only. See “Track Panel” (page 685).

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

i Timeline Displays the timeline control area. The following basic editing operations can be performed from the timeline using NS-CAT1. The timeline is displayed in Touch mode only. See “Timeline” (page 686). • Scrubbing the playline • Scrolling or zooming in/out • Rough cut editing using multi-touch gestures. j Task bar Displays the taskbar common to all apps. • Back button • Home button • Recent Apps button

Overview

681

Focus Button Bar In Focus button mode, the buttons in the Focus/Command button bar are arranged as shown in the following figure. The set of focus buttons is static; they do not change.

Command Button Bar In Command button mode, the buttons in the Focus/ Command button bar are arranged as shown in the following figure.

The set of command buttons changes depending on the tool with the current focus in XPRI NS. The command buttons available for each tool, from left to right, are given below.

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

682

Note

No command buttons are displayed in Mouse mode.

NS-CAT1: Play Mark In Mark Out Clear Mark In Clear Mark Out Over Write Splice In Go To Previous Event Go To Next Event TC/CTL CTL Reset

Project Explorer: Cut Copy Paste Delete Switch View Mode Zoom In Zoom Out Import File Tool Generate SG Clip Back to Creator Export MXF Tool

XDCAM Explorer: Cut Copy Paste Delete Switch View Mode Zoom In Zoom Out Find Clip Generate SG Clip Details View Import File Tool

Import File Tool: Play Mark In Mark Out Clear Mark In Clear Mark Out Set Index Picture A/V Switch Go to In Go to Out Logging Digitize

Logging Tool: Play Mark In Mark Out Clear Mark In Clear Mark Out Logging Digitize Go to In Go to Out TC/CTL CTL Reset

SV (Digitize Mode): Play Mark In Mark Out Clear Mark In Clear Mark Out Overwrite Mode Record Splice In Mode Record Go to In Go to Out TC/CTL CTL Reset

Source Viewer: Play Mark In Mark Out Clear Mark In Clear Mark Out Over Write Splice In Go To Previous Event Go To Next Event TL/CTL CTL Reset

Master Viewer: Add Edit Extend Match Frame Add Dissolve Transition Option Trim Mode Freeze Frame Delete Effect Rubber Band Mode Render All Toggle Field Frame

Timeline Editor: Add Edit Extend Match Frame Add Dissolve Transition Option Trim Mode Freeze Frame Delete Effect Rubber Band Mode Render All Toggle Field Frame

Trim Viewer: Mark In Trans Corner Display A Side Trim AB Side Trim B Side Trim Trim Mode Trim 10F Backward Trim 1F Backward Trim 1F Forward Trim 10F Forward Loop Play

FX Explorer: Cut Copy Paste Delete Switch View Mode Zoom In Zoom Out

Audio Mixer: Add Edit Extend Match Frame Add Dissolve Transition Option Trim Mode Freeze Frame Delete Effect Rubber Band Mode Render All Toggle Field Frame

Record to VTR: Play Mark In Mark Out Clear Mark In Clear Mark Out Preview Record Go to In Go to Out Edit Mode All Stop

Overview

Notes

• Only the Source Viewer, SV (Digitize Mode), Master Viewer, Timeline Editor, Trim Viewer, Logging Tool, and Record To VTR can be switched between Touch mode and Mouse mode. All other tools operate in either Touch mode or Mouse mode. • The screen automatically changes between Touch mode and Mouse mode, based on the editing context. In Touch mode, command buttons are displayed. In Mouse mode, the focus buttons are displayed. • After operating the Audio Mixer tool, overwrite/splicein editing, or SV (Digitize Mode) the window of XPRI NS changes to Master Viewer.

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

Overview

683

Operations using NSCAT1 To Start NS-CAT1 and Connect to the PC

1

Tap the NS-CAT1 device software icon on the Apps screen.

• Tap [Connection], and then tap anywhere within the [Connection List] dialog. Tap anywhere outside the [Connection List] dialog to close the dialog. • Click the CAT connection icon in the taskbar of the XPRI NS window on the PC workstation.

To Exit NS-CAT1

1

Tap [Back], [Home], or [Recent Apps] in the taskbar. A confirmation message appears.

2

Tap [OK] to exit.

Troubleshooting The NS-CAT1 window opens in Touch mode.

2

Tap [Connection] in the Action bar on the top of the screen.

The Sony tablet must be paired with the PC workstation running XPRI NS before a connection can be made. The Connection List dialog appears. Each paired device in the dialog displays the connection state, host name and MAC address.

3

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

684

Tap the PC workstation in the dialog to open a connection to the device.

When a connection is successful, the [Connection] button icon is highlighted in the Action bar in NSCAT1, and the CAT connection icon appears in the taskbar of the XPRI NS window on the PC workstation. If a problem occurs during connection, a toast message appears. If a connection is lost during operation, the tablet and PC workstation attempt to recover the connection. Open a new connection if the connection cannot be recovered.

To Disconnect from the PC Do one of the following.

Operations using NS-CAT1

If the app freezes during operation and the tablet is not responsive, reboot the Android OS.

1

Insert the end of a paper clip or similar item into the recess for the reset button of the tablet to reboot the Android OS.

2

Restart the NS-CAT1 device software .

Operating Modes The NS-CAT1 device software operates in two modes. • Touch Mode (page 685) • Mouse Mode (page 688) Notes

• Only the Source Viewer, SV (Digitize Mode), Master Viewer, Timeline Editor, Trim Viewer, Logging Tool, and Record To VTR can be switched between Touch mode and Mouse mode. All other tools operate in either Touch mode or Mouse mode. • The screen automatically changes between Touch mode and Mouse mode, based on the editing context. In Touch mode, the command buttons are displayed. In Mouse mode, the focus buttons are displayed.

Touch Mode Touch mode is the default mode when you launch the app. You use Touch mode to perform rough edits in windows that have focus in XPRI NS on the PC workstation. Track Panel The Track Panel controls the track panel in Timeline Editor of XPRI NS. The display corresponds to the track panel in XPRI NS.

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

Active tracks are shown in blue with the name of the track. Inactive tracks are shown in dark gray with the name of the track. Tracks colored dark gray that have no name indicate tracks that do not exist in the timeline of XPRI NS. The following track panel operations are available, depending on the window that has focus in XPRI NS. • To change the active/inactive status of a track, tap the track. • To change source track patching, touch and hold the track, and then drag it to a new location.

Operating Modes

685

Timeline The timeline is used to perform the following functions. • Scrubbing the playline • Scrolling or zooming in/out • Rough cut editing using multi-touch gestures.

a Scrub/scroll bar

b Track scroll bar

c Touch gesture control area

a Scrub/scroll bar The following scrub/scroll bar operations are available, depending on the window that has focus in XPRI NS. • To scrub the playline, touch the playline and drag it within the bar. • To change the timeline scale, pinch the bar in or out. • To scroll the timeline, touch the bar using two fingers and slide along the bar. b Track scroll bar The following track scroll operations are available, depending on the window that has focus in XPRI NS. • To change the track display scale, pinch the bar in or out. • To scroll the tracks, touch the bar using two fingers and slide along the bar.

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

686

c Touch gesture control area The touch gesture operations available for each window that has focus in XPRI NS are listed in the Help. To display the list of gestures, tap [Preferences] > [Help] in the Action bar. Touch Mode Gestures The following touch gestures are used to operate the NSCAT1 device software . • Switching viewers Function

Gesture

Switch focus to Source Viewer

3-finger flick left

Switch focus to Master Viewer

3-finger flick right

Operating Modes

• Playback/jump controls Function

Gesture

Stop

1-finger tap 2-finger tap 3-finger tap 4-finger tap

Play

1-finger double-tap

Shuttle

1-finger tap, touch, and drag left/right

Jog forward

1-finger flick or drag right

Jog reverse

1-finger flick or drag left

Play forward

2-finger flick right Each flick changes speed: 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x

Play reverse

2-finger flick left Each flick changes speed: -1x, 2x, -4x, -8x, -16x

Step forward

Left 1-finger touch and hold + right 1-finger tap

Step backward

Right 1-finger touch and hold + left 1-finger tap

Go to next event

Left 2-finger touch and hold + right 1-finger tap

Go to previous event

Right 2-finger touch and hold + left 1-finger tap

Step forward 10 frames

Left 1-finger touch and hold + right 2-finger tap

Step backward 10 frames

Right 1-finger touch and hold + left 2-finger tap

Function

Gesture

Function

Gesture

Go to Out

1-finger touch and hold + 1finger flick right

AB-side trim

2-finger drag left/right

A-side detail mode

3-finger flick left

Go to In

1-finger touch and hold + 1finger flick left

B-side detail mode

3-finger flick right

Go to End

2-finger touch and hold + 1finger flick right

Go to Home

2-finger touch and hold + 1finger flick left

Forward 1.5

3-finger touch and hold + 1finger flick right

Rewind 1.5

3-finger touch and hold + 1finger flick left

AB-side detail mode

3-finger flick down

Exit detail mode

3-finger flick up

Detail trim mode allows trimming using 1-finger operation. • Zoom controls Function

Gesture

Timeline zoom in

2-finger pinch in (horizontal scrub bar)

Timeline zoom out

2-finger pinch out (horizontal scrub bar)

Track zoom in

2-finger pinch in (vertical scroll bar)

Track zoom out

2-finger pinch out (vertical scroll bar)

• Edit controls Function

Gesture

Mark clip

2-finger double-tap

Clear In and Out

3-finger double-tap

Mode change

4-finger double-tap

Mark Out

Left 1-finger touch and hold + right 1-finger flick down

Mark In

Right 1-finger touch and hold + left 1-finger flick down

Clear Mark Out

Left 1-finger touch and hold + right 1-finger flick up

Clear Mark In

Right 1-finger touch and hold + left 1-finger flick up

Extract from clip home to current playline

Left 1-finger touch and hold + right 2-finger flick up

Extract from current playline to clip end

Right 1-finger touch and hold + left 2-finger flick up

Lift from clip home to current playline

Left 2-finger touch and hold + right 1-finger flick up

Lift from current playline Right 2-finger touch and hold + to clip end left 1-finger flick up Add edit

Left and right 2-finger touch and hold + middle finger flick down 2-finger flick down

Overwrite

3-finger flick down

Extract

2-finger flick up

Lift

3-finger flick up

Paste

4-finger flick down

Cut

4-finger flick up

Redo

4-finger flick right

Undo

4-finder flick left

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

Splice-in

• Trim edit controls Function

Gesture

A-side trim

Left 1-finger touch and hold + right 1-finger drag left/right

B-side trim

Right-finger touch and hold + left-finger drag left/right

Operating Modes

687

Mouse Mode Mouse mode is used to control XPRI NS using buttons and a trackpad. Buttons are used to enter text and to press

a Command panel

a Command panel Displays the command panels for entering text and pressing arrow keys and effects keys. You can swipe between the input modes or press the left and right arrows to switch between views.

arrow keys and effects keys. The trackpad mimics the mouse trackpad on the PC workstation.

b Trackpad

Arrow-key mode

Ten-key mode

The [Keyboard] key is used to display the keyboard for entering text information. Effects-key mode

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

688

The ten-key mode is the default view after switching to Mouse mode.

The effects-key mode is used to add/delete effects and to set/delete essence marks.

Operating Modes

b Trackpad Mimics the operations of the mouse trackpad on the PC workstation. Two buttons along the bottom represent the left and right mouse buttons. For two-finder gestures, the first finger touch appears as a blue dot and the second finger touch appears as a red dot.

Chapter 18 NS-CAT1 Device Software

Operating Modes

689

Working With Sonaps

Chapter

19

Overview By working with Sonaps servers, you can share material and sequences between several XPRI NS workstations. XPRI NS supports the preview and editing of clips while the clip is being imported in order to speed up editing turnaround. During importing, the clip material is generated and updated every few seconds. Setup options are available in Sonaps for selecting simultaneous transcoding of both high-resolution and low-resolution clips. Note

All file transfer, preview, and editing tasks in XPRI NS and Sonaps are performed using MXF as the native format. However, Sonaps does not support editing while importing for MXF files encoded with the P2 codec. Observe the following when working with Sonaps. • Check to make sure that the XPRI NS workstation is connected to the Sonaps system, and that the Sonaps system is running. • Create projects that use the same output video format as the Sonaps system.

Select [Local DB] when you want to use a database and storage on the local computer. Even if you select Local DB, you can still copy Sonaps data to the local computer and use it there. Select [Sonaps DB] if you want to use a database and storage on a Sonaps server. Even if you select Sonaps DB, you can still copy local data to the Sonaps server and use it there.

Start-up Configurations for Using Sonaps Servers

If you select Local DB

The following start-up configuration screen appears when the XPRI NS Configuration Tool is started from the Windows start menu.

The following settings are required to share data with the Sonaps servers.

1

Click Local Settings. The following screen appears. The Path of Savedata box displays the path to the database that will be used. (The path can be changed.)

690

Overview

Chapter 19 Working With Sonaps

2

Select Add accessible Sonaps Database, Local Configuration, or System Configuration.

3

Add, modify, or delete database information as required.

4

Click OK.

5

Enter your user name and password in the login dialog, and then click OK. XPRI NS starts. When System Configuration is selected in step 2, the Sonaps Material List becomes available. When the Sonaps server is connected to one or more remote servers, those servers appear in the Material List as Remote folders.

When you select Sonaps DB The Sonaps side handles database settings. The login dialog appears when you select Sonaps DB mode in the XPRI NS Configuration Tool and click OK. Enter your user name and password and then click OK to start XPRI NS. When you open a new project, the Sonaps Material List appears together with Project Explorer. When the Sonaps server is connected to one or more remote servers, those servers appear in the Material List as Remote folders.

Overview

691

Operating With Material List

Chapter 19 Working With Sonaps

You can open the Sonaps Material List by selecting [Material List...] from the taskbar menu. You can use the Material List to import material files from the Sonaps material server. These files can be edited directly on the timeline. When a Sonaps server is in a remote location, you can transfer MXF clips or a sequence rendered on a local computer to the Material List via FTP. You can also manage the FTP transfer tasks. Refer to the BZNS-2000/BZNS-700 News System Application User's Guide for more information about the Material List.

To import material files from the Material List You can select one or more material files in the Material List, and drag them to any bin in Project Explorer. The clip type is maintained after transfer to Project Explorer.

692

Type of clip in Material List

Type of clip in Project Explorer

Comment

SDI, VTR (line)

Live clip

XDCAM, EX, P2 SDI and live clips

VTR

Reel clip

Back to Creator supported

XDCAM import

XDCAM clip

Upload supported

P2 import

P2 clip

Upload supported

EX import

XDCAM EX clip

Upload supported

Import file in Material List

Server clip

Import by Common Gateway

Server clip

Render to Bin

Render to Bin clip

Operating With Material List

Back to Creator supported

Type of clip in Material List

Type of clip in Project Explorer

Composite clip

Composite clip

DVD clip

DVD clip

CD clip

CD clip

Other render clips

Server clip

Comment

Back to Creator supported

If a file contains any types of metadata, the metadata is imported together with the clip. You can also search for comments in the metadata of essence marks in the Material List, and then drag the essence marks into Source Viewer or Timeline Editor. • Source Viewer: The corresponding clip is automatically loaded into Source Viewer and the playline moves to the essence mark position, or the first essence mark satisfying the search criteria in the clip if there are multiple essence marks. If there are essence marks for multiple clips in the search result, the first clip is loaded in Source Viewer, and the remaining clips are placed in the clip list. • Timeline Editor: A slice of the corresponding clip is automatically loaded into Timeline Editor and the playline moves to the essence mark position. If multiple essence marks are dragged into Timeline Editor, the slices are loaded in the timeline in the order displayed in Material List. The default slice width is 2n + 1 frames, where n is the [Default Margin for Essence Marks] setting on the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. The slice width can be adjusted on the timeline after loading. Note that the slice may be shorter if the distance between the essence mark and the start/end of the clip is less than the margin. To save clips to folders in the Material List You can specify the Material List as the save destination for clips created with the Logging Tool, Import File Tool, and Import CD Audio Tool, as well as for clips rendered in the Render to Bin dialog. • Open the Bin Selection dialog from Logging Tool, Import File Tool, Import CD Audio Tool, SG Generate Tool, or Audio Voice Over Tool, and select a folder in the Material List. • Open the Bin Selection dialog from the Render To Bin dialog, and select a folder in the Material List. • Store copies of clips: Select [Save As] from the Timeline Editor menu or select [Send to Material List] from the context menus of clips and sequences in Project Explorer, and select a folder in the Material List. • Move clips: Drag and drop clips and sequences from Project Explorer to a folder in the Material List. Clips used within an open sequence can also be moved to another bin.

To edit material in the Material List directly If you select Sonaps DB on start-up, you can display clips by dragging them from the Material List to the Source Viewer. Edit while digitizing is also supported. See page 256 for more information about edit while digitizing.

To work with live logging markers Logging markers in the Material List can be dragged and dropped into the Timeline Editor or the Source Viewer. In Timeline Editor, the slice has the same length as the duration of the logging marker. In Source Viewer, the whole clip is loaded and starts playing from the first frame. Logging markers can be searched and the results displayed in the Material List before loading into XPRI NS.

Specify the clip name, folder name, and comment, and click the OK button. The FTP Management window appears, and the MXF clip(s) are transferred to the Sonaps Material List once the FTP connection is established. See “To manage FTP transfer tasks” (page 693) for more information about the FTP Management window. To render a timeline sequence and transfer it from Project Explorer to the Material List via FTP Select the sequence on the timeline, and select [Render and FTP upload to Sonaps] from the context menu to open the Render and FTP Upload window.

Chapter 19 Working With Sonaps

To edit PD-EDL files in the Material List You can edit PD-EDL files in the Material List. If you drag a PD-EDL file object directly on the timeline, the clips are recreated on the timeline.

Note

In the current version, live logging markers cannot be loaded into the Project Explorer. Any material linked or copied into Project Explorer will lose any logging markers. To render and save sequences to folders in the Material List Select a sequence in Project Explorer, right click to open the context menu, and select [Render to Material List]. This saves the results of rendering to the specified location in the system. Notes

• If you try to save the same sequence again, a dialog that allows you to select whether to overwrite the data or save the data as new material appears. • Render to Material List is not supported in Local DB mode with Sonaps data. • Rendering always creates an interlaced clip, even if there are progressive clips on the timeline. To transfer MXF clips from Project Explorer to the Material List via FTP Select the MXF clip(s) in Project Explorer, right click to open the context menu, and select [FTP upload to Sonaps] to open the FTP Upload window.

Specify the metadata (track, valid area, clip name, folder name, comment), and click the Render button. The FTP Management window appears, and the sequence is rendered and transferred to the Sonaps Material List once the FTP connection is established. See “To manage FTP transfer tasks” (page 693) for more information about the FTP Management window. To manage FTP transfer tasks Open the context menu in Project Explorer or on the timeline, and select [FTP Management] to open the FTP Management window. The status of rendering and transfer tasks is displayed.

Operating With Material List

693

or the XPRI NS connected to the local Sonaps system via LAN.

Chapter 19 Working With Sonaps

To cancel a task, click the Cancel button. To view a history of transfer tasks, click the History button to open the Task History window. The Task History window displays task times and statuses. To restart a canceled or failed task, right click the task and select [Restart] from the context menu. To view detailed information on a task, right click the task and select [Show details] from the context menu. To configure the FTP site Click the Setting button in the FTP Management window to open the Site Management window.

Specify the name, IP address, user account, and password for the FTP site, and click the OK button to connect to the FTP site. If there are no tasks for which uploading is in progress, click the Modify button and change configurations. To download clips when connected to a Sonaps remote site If the full-resolution data for a clip is located on a remote site (i.e., another Sonaps system that is connected to the local Sonaps system via FTP) and is yet to be downloaded, a dialog that allows you to select whether to download the full-resolution data appears when that clip is selected for editing or rendering. Select Yes to start downloading. Note

Material for which full-resolution data has not been downloaded from the remote site cannot be edited on the Field Editor system. To edit such material on the Field Editor system, you must download the full-resolution data from the remote site to the local Sonaps system using the material management terminal in the local Sonaps system

694

Operating With Material List

Operating With Play List You can open the Sonaps Play List and register a sequence in the Sonaps Playlist. The Play List opens if you open a transferred project and select [Play List...] from the taskbar menu. Chapter 19 Working With Sonaps

Refer to the BZNS-2000/BZNS-700 News System Application User's Guide for more information about the Play List.

To register sequences in the Playlist Open a sequence on the timeline, and drag the sequence from the Master Viewer to a Play List event. The sequence is integrated by GateTrans, placed in the OA Material Folder of Material List, and sent to the Playout Server. You can also drag the sequence to an OA folder. You can also select Register to Playout Server from the main menu in Master Viewer. The Registration window appears. On the Target tab, click [Select Event] to send the material to a specific event on the Playlist or click [Select Folder] to send the material to a specific OA folder. For events, you can select to specify the event ID or material ID for displaying the material in the Playlist. For folders, specify the path and material ID. You can also set other parameters in the Setting tab.

Operating With Play List

695

Download Editing

Chapter 19 Working With Sonaps

You can download clips and sequences from Sonaps DB to Local DB for editing, and then upload them back to Sonaps DB. The following two modes are available: • Simple Download Editing Mode In this mode, a sequence and the clips in the sequence are always downloaded and uploaded as new material. • Offline Editing Mode In this mode, a sequence and the clips in the sequence are always linked to the original files when they are downloaded and uploaded. In other words, the GUID identifier for the material does not change between Sonaps DB and Local DB. You can select to download only the low-resolution clips, if available. If low-resolution clips are not available, the high-resolution clips are automatically downloaded even if the [Download Low-res Only] check box is checked. When editing a sequence using only the low-resolution proxy clips, the edits are automatically reflected back into the corresponding high-resolution clips when the sequence is uploaded. To edit a sequence in download editing mode, double click the [Download Editing Settings] icon on the System tab of the XPRI NS Configuration dialog, select a mode in the Download Editing Settings dialog, and click [OK].

The following precautions should be observed when editing in Offline Editing mode. Notes

• When downloading a sequence and its clips to Local DB, a confirmation message appears if an existing sequence or clip with the same GUID is present. • When uploading a sequence to Sonaps DB, a confirmation message appears if an existing sequence with the same GUID is present. However, the clips do not overwrite the original clips in the Sonaps DB if the original clips are still present, in order to prevent an error (for example, if the clips are also used in other sequences). • If new clips (for example, speed clips or subclips) are created from the downloaded clips, the new clips are uploaded as new material in the sequence.

696

Download Editing

• If new clips are created using low-resolution proxy clips downloaded using the [Download Low-res Only] check box, the new clips in the sequence are not recreated using the corresponding high-resolution clips when the sequence is uploaded back to Sonaps DB. The sequence will continue to contain the new low-resolution clips only. • CG objects in a sequence are copied when a sequence and its clips are downloaded to Local DB and uploaded to Sonaps DB. These objects are not deleted if the sequence is deleted from the database. These objects must be deleted manually when no longer required. • Downloading logging clips downloads the metadata without the physical clip file. Note that the file path for a VTR logging clip changes to a local path. For all other types of logging clip, the file path remains unchanged. • The status of clips does not change after download or upload.

Appendixes

Effect List Clip Effects 3D 3D Broken Glass

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

3D Broken Glass

Shape

Divide X

Specifies the number of horizontal divisions.

Divide Y

Specifies the number of vertical divisions.

Transform

Local

World Lighting

Advanced

Lighting

Perspective

Position

Specifies the fall position.

Local Translate

Specifies the position in the local coordinates.

Local Rotate

Specifies the rotation in the local coordinates.

Local Scale

Specifies the scale in the local coordinates.

World Translate

Specifies the position in the world coordinates.

World Rotate

Specifies the rotation in the world coordinates.

Light

Turns Lighting on and off.

Light Direction

Specifies the light source direction.

Diffuse

Specifies the luminance of diffused light.

Ambient

Specifies the luminance of ambient light.

Field Of View

Specifies the angle of the field of view.

Effect List

697

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Shape

Shape

3D Cube

Translate

Divide X

Specifies the number of horizontal divisions.

Divide Y

Specifies the number of vertical divisions.

Interval

Specifies the interval between divisions.

Side

Side Color

Specifies the side color.

Transparency

Specifies the side transparency.

Local

Local Translate

Specifies the position in the local coordinates.

Local Rotate

Specifies the rotation in the local coordinates.

Local Scale

Specifies the scale in the local coordinates.

World Lighting

Perspective

698

Effect List

Lighting

Perspective

World Translate

Specifies the position in the world coordinates.

World Rotate

Specifies the rotation in the world coordinates.

Light

Turns Lighting on and off.

Light Direction

Specifies the light source direction.

Diffuse

Specifies the luminance of diffused light.

Ambient

Specifies the luminance of ambient light.

Field Of View

Specifies the angle of the field of view.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness. Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data Note

Processing becomes unstable and noise may occur if the sides of the cubes overlap. Adjust the parameters to make sure that the sides do not overlap. 3D Spiral

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

3D spiral

Shape

Divide

Specifies the number of divisions.

Start

Specifies the starting angle.

Translate

Local

World Lighting

Perspective

Lighting

Perspective

Step

Specifies the step angle.

Axis

Specifies the angle of the axis of rotation.

Local Translate

Specifies the position in the local coordinates.

Local Rotate

Specifies the rotation in the local coordinates.

Local Scale

Specifies the scale.

World Translate

Specifies the position in the world coordinates.

World Rotate

Specifies the rotation in the world coordinates.

Light

Turns Lighting on and off.

Light Direction

Specifies the light source direction.

Diffuse

Specifies the luminance of diffused light.

Ambient

Specifies the luminance of ambient light.

Field Of View

Specifies the angle of the field of view.

Effect List

699

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

3D Transform

Shape

3D Transform

Transform

Local

World Advanced Drop Shadow

700

Effect List

Filter

Divide

Specifies the number of horizontal divisions.

Interval

Specifies the interval between divisions.

Local Translate

Specifies the position in the local coordinates.

Local Rotate

Specifies the rotation in the local coordinates.

Local Scale

Specifies the scale in the local coordinates.

World Translate

Specifies the position in the world coordinates.

World Rotate

Specifies the rotation in the world coordinates.

Filter

Turns the filter on and off.

Perspective

Field Of View

Specifies the angle of the field of view.

Drop Shadow

Shadow

Turns the shadow on and off.

Distance

Specifies the shadow distance.

Softness

Specifies the amount of softness at the edges.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Color

Specifies the shadow color.

Transparency

Specifies the shadow transparency.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness. Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data Note

The Local Scale Z parameter is fixed at 1.0. DME 3D Transform

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

3D Transform

Pre Transform

Pre Size

Specifies the size.

Skew

Specifies the skew.

Local

Source/Target

Selects the source and target spaces.

Location

Specifies the location.

Spin

Specifies the spin.

Rotation

Specifies the rotation.

Axis Location

Moves the axis of rotation.

Source/Target

Selects the source and target spaces.

Location

Specifies the location.

Spin

Specifies the spin.

Rotation

Specifies the rotation.

Axis Location

Moves the axis.

Filter

Filter

Turns the filter on and off.

Perspective

Perspective

Specifies the angle of the field of view.

Post Transform

Post Size

Specifies the size after the transform.

Post Location

Specifies the location after the transform.

Global

Effect List

701

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data Note

When you move the Plane in the Z-axis minus direction when the X axis or Y axis is set to Perspective, a partial

reversal effect is seen until the screen center point exceeds the minimum value of −5.

Z-Filter

702

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Z-Filter

Z-Filter

Position X

Specifies the position in the X direction

Position Y

Specifies the position in the Y direction

Position Z

Specifies the position in the Z direction

Rotation X

Specifies the rotation in the X direction

Rotation Y

Specifies the rotation in the Y direction

Rotation Z

Specifies the rotation in the Z direction

Type

Specifies the filter type (Blur, Defocus, Glow)

Size

Specifies the filter size.

Focus

Specifies the filter focus.

Effect List

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness. Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Input

Input

Black

Specifies the luminance offset.

White

Specifies the luminance gain.

Saturation

Specifies the saturation.

Hue

Specifies the hue.

Channel Selection

Selects the channel to display the histogram.

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Color filter Color Corrector

Histogram

Histogram

Black Level

Specifies the input black level.

Gamma

Specifies the gamma curve.

White Level

Specifies the input white level.

Safe Black

Prevents black levels from becoming super black.

Safe White

Prevents white levels from becoming super white.

Output Black Level

Specifies the output black level.

Output White Level

Specifies the output white level.

Effect List

703

Plate

Parameter

Description

Color Balance

Color Balance

Area Selection

Specifies the area to adjust the color balance.

H

Specifies the hue.

L

Specifies the luminance.

S

Specifies the saturation.

R

Specifies the red level.

G

Specifies the green level.

B

Specifies the blue level.

Highlight Midtone Level

Specifies the luminance of the border between highlight and midtone.

Midtone Shadow Level

Specifies the luminance of the border between midtone and shadow.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Appendixes

Tab

Area Range

Crop/Border

Mask

Crop/Border

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

704

Effect List

Plate

Parameter

Description

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Color

Color

Color

Selects the color.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Tracking

Tracking

Appendixes

Tab

Color Matte

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

705

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Contrast/Brightness

706

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Contr/Bright

Contr/Brightness

Gain

Specifies the contrast.

Offset

Specifies the brightness.

Clip

Specifies the standard point.

Effect List

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Appendixes

Mask

Softness Mode

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Effect List

707

Gamma Correction

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Gamma

Gamma

Red

Specifies the red gamma correction value.

Green

Specifies the green gamma correction value.

Blue

Specifies the blue gamma correction value.

Red

Specifies the minimum value for red after processing.

Green

Specifies the minimum value for green after processing.

Blue

Specifies the minimum value for blue after processing.

Red

Specifies the maximum value for red after processing.

Green

Specifies the maximum value for green after processing.

Blue

Specifies the maximum value for blue after processing.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Black / White

Black Value

White Value

Crop/Border

708

Effect List

Crop/Border

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Mask2

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Metallize

Metallize

Type

Specifies the metal type.

Phase

Specifies the gloss position.

Smooth

Turns Smooth on and off.

X

Specifies the degree of smoothness in the horizontal direction.

Y

Specifies the degree of smoothness in the vertical direction.

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Appendixes

Mask1

Soft Edge

Metallize

Smooth

Smooth

Effect List

709

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Mask

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Note

The Phase parameter is ignored when the Type parameter

710

Effect List

is Rainbow.

Monochrome

Tab

Parameter

Description

Monochrome

Monochrome

Monochrome

Turns Monochrome on and off.

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Mask

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General

Transparency

Appendixes

Plate

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Effect List

711

Appendixes

712

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Negative

Negative

Negative

Turns Negative on and off.

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Negative

Effect List

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Appendixes

Mask1

Soft Edge

Posterize

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Posterize

Steps

Red

Specifies the number of red steps.

Green

Specifies the number of green steps.

Blue

Specifies the number of blue steps.

Effect List

713

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Mask

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

714

Effect List

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

RGB Balance

Tab

Plate

RGB Balance

RGB Balance

Mask

Crop/Border

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General

Transparency

Description

Red-Cyan

Specifies Red-Cyan.

Green-Magenta

Specifies Green-Magenta.

Blue-Yellow

Specifies Blue-Yellow.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Appendixes

Crop/Border

Parameter

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Effect List

715

Appendixes

716

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Data

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Secondary Color Corrector

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

6 Vector

6 Vector

NEW

Selects the mode for creation of a new color conversion vector. (When the Viewer is clicked, a vector centered around that color is generated.)

DEL

Deletes the selected vector.

ADD

Selects the mode for expansion of the color conversion range for the selected vector. (When the Viewer is clicked, the range expands to include the clicked color.)

SUB

Selects the mode for reduction of the color conversion range for the selected vector. (When the Viewer is clicked, the range is reduced to exclude the clicked color.)

Center HUE

Specifies the center Hue of the conversion source for the selected vector.

HUE Range

Specifies the Hue range of the conversion source for the selected vector.

Sat

Specifies the minimum saturation of the selected vector.

HUE Softness

Softens the edges at the Hue range for the selected vector.

Sat Softness

Softens the edges at the Saturation range for the selected vector.

Target Color HUE

Specifies the center hue after conversion for the selected vector.

Target Color Sat

Specifies the center saturation after conversion for the selected vector.

Target Color Lumi

Specifies the center luminance after conversion for the selected vector.

Invert

Inverts the color range of the conversion source for the selected vector.

Edge Adj. Right

Expands or reduces the converted region at the right of the screen for the selected vector.

Edge Adj. Left

Expands or reduces the converted region at the left of the screen for the selected vector.

Effect List

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Appendixes

Mask

Softness Mode

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1-8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1-8

Tracking data.

Effect List

717

Saturate Level

Tab

Plate

Saturate Level

Saturate Level

Appendixes

Mask

Red

Specifies the red saturation level. Specifies the green saturation level.

Blue

Specifies the blue saturation level.

Red

Specifies the value of saturated red.

Green

Specifies the value of saturated green.

Blue

Specifies the value of saturated blue.

Solarized Color

Solarized Color

Specifies the color after saturation.

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

718

Effect List

Description

Green Saturate Value

Crop/Border

Parameter

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Plate

Parameter

Description

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Sepia

Sepia

Type

Specifies the type.

Color

Specifies the faded color.

Level

Specifies the degree of fading (valid only when Type is Matte Mix)

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Tracking

Tracking

Appendixes

Tab

Sepia

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Effect List

719

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Auto Balance

Auto Balance

Auto Balance

Adjusts color balance automatically.

Semi-Auto Balance

Specifies the reference color for white and black levels, and adjusts color balance automatically.

White Level

Specifies the white level.

Black Level

Specifies the black level.

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

White Balance

720

Effect List

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Gamma

Gamma

Red

Specifies the red gamma value.

Green

Specifies the green gamma value.

Blue

Specifies the blue gamma value.

Crop/Border

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General

Transparency

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Effect List

Appendixes

Mask

Crop/Border

721

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Appendixes

Data

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Keying Advanced Chroma Key

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Chroma Key

Key Adjust

Auto Start

Turns the parameter autochange on and off.

On/Off

Turns the chromakey on and off.

Clip

Adjusts the chromakey reference level.

Gain

Adjusts the chromakey gain.

Hue

Adjusts the Hue of the specified part of foreground for chromakey.

Fine Adj

Key Position Y Balance

Col Cncl

Color Cancel

Cancel Key Col Cncl2

722

Effect List

Angle

Adjusts the angle of chromakey window.

Filter

Selects the type of filter coefficient

Saturation Crop

Adjusts the crop of chromakey window.

Density

Adjusts the density of chromakey.

Invert

Inverts the chromakey.

Left Position

Moves the left edge of chromakey.

Right Position

Moves the right edge of chromakey.

On/Off

Turns the Y Balance parameter on and off.

Clip

Adjusts the Luminance range.

Gain

Adjusts the Luminance gain.

Luminance

Adjusts the offset of Luminance.

On/Off

Turns the color cancel on and off.

Luminance

Adjusts the Luminance level of the cancel color

Saturation

Adjusts the saturation level of the cancel color

Hue

Adjusts the Hue level of the cancel color

Filter

Selects the type of filter coefficient

Clip

Adjusts the color cancel key reference level

Gain

Adjusts the color cancel key gain

Left Position

Moves the left edge of the color cancel key.

Right Position

Moves the right edge of the color cancel key.

Y Balance MIx

Mixture

Adjusts the ration in which Y balance is added to the color cancel key.

Vector Window

Saturation Crop

Adjusts the crop of color cancel key window.

Angle

Adjusts the angle of color cancel key window.

Key Position

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

FG Video

Foreground Video Adjust

Video Gain

Adjusts the overall gain of video signal

Y Gain

Adjusts the Y signal gain

C Gain

Adjusts the C signal gain

Mask

Mask

Mask2

Adjusts the Hue offset amount. Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1-8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1-8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Key Blur

Key Crop

Bounds

Adjusts the crop amount of the alpha channel.

Key Blur

Softness

Adjusts the amount of softness of the alpha channel.

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Appendixes

Mask1

Hue Mask

Key Blur

Effect List

723

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1-8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1-8

Tracking data.

Luminance To Key

724

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Alpha Select

Alpha Select

Alpha Select

Selects the output of the alpha channel.

Invert

Inverts the gradation of the alpha channel and outputs it.

Effect List

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Mask2

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Keyer

Keyer

White Threshold

Specifies the white threshold.

Black Threshold

Specifies the black threshold.

Invert

Inverts the key gradations.

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Appendixes

Mask1

Soft Edge

Luminancekey

Effect List

725

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Transparency

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Transparency

726

Effect List

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Mask2

Mask3

Tracking

Tracking

Data

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Effect List

Appendixes

Mask1

Soft Edge

727

Sparkle Broken Glass

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Broken Glass

Shape

Translate

Specifies the amount of split block movement.

Random Translate

Specifies the degree of randomness in the movement.

Block

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Specifies effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies shape aspect ratio.

Width

Specifies the width of the split blocks.

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Spiral

Specifies the angle between blocks.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Data

728

Rotate

Effect List

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Broken Rings

Tab

Plate

Broken Rings

Shape

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Description

Pattern

Specifies the shape pattern.

Translate

Specifies the amount of split block movement.

Random Translate

Specifies the degree of randomness in the movement.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Width

Specifies the width of the split blocks.

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Spiral

Specifies the angle between blocks.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

Effect List

Appendixes

Block

Parameter

729

Character Trail

Tab

Plate

Character Trail

Character Trail

Appendixes

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Description

Expand

Specifies the degree of expansion.

Position

Specifies the position of expansion.

Rotate

Specifies effect rotation.

Angle

Specifies the angle of the trail.

Wave Pattern

Specifies the pattern of the trail.

Amplitude

Specifies the amplitude of the trail.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency of the trail.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Density

Specifies the degree to which pixels are erased.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

730

Parameter

Effect List

Lens

Tab

Plate

Lens

Shape

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Description

Pattern

Specifies the shape pattern.

Area

Specifies the size of the lens.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Appendixes

Lens

Parameter

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Curvature

Specifies the curvature of the lens.

Magnify

Specifies the magnification ratio of the lens.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Melt

Melt

Amplitude

Specifies the melt amplitude.

Position

Specifies the melt position.

Melt

Transparency

Rotate

Specifies effect rotation.

Slant

Specifies the slant.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Erase Position

Specifies the position where erasure starts.

Density

Specifies the degree to which pixels are erased.

Effect List

731

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Noise

Noise

Amplitude

Specifies the amplitude of noise.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Interpolation

Specifies the type of interpolation.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mirror

Mirror

Mirror

Crop/Border

732

Effect List

Crop/Border

Center X

Specifies the mirror position in the X direction.

Center Y

Specifies the mirror position in the Y direction.

Angle

Specifies the mirror angle.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Mask2

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Panorama Lens

X

Curvature

Specifies the X direction curvature of the lens.

Magnify

Specifies the magnification ratio of the lens.

Y

Curvature

Specifies the Y direction curvature of the lens.

Shape

Center

Specifies the center point of the effect.

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Appendixes

Mask1

Soft Edge

Panorama Lens

Effect List

733

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pixel

Shape

Pixel

Crop/Border

General

734

Effect List

Crop/Border

Transparency

Pattern

Specifies the shape pattern.

Translate

Specifies the amount of pixel movement.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Spiral

Specifies the amount of pixel rotation.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Density

Specifies the degree to which pixels are erased.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking. Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Rectangle Lens

X

Area

Specifies the size of the lens in the X direction.

Appendixes

Use Same Setting

Rectangle Lens

Y

Shape Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Curvature

Specifies the curvature of the lens.

Magnify

Specifies the magnification ratio of the lens.

Area

Specifies the size of the lens in the Y direction.

Curvature

Specifies the curvature of the lens.

Magnify

Specifies the magnification ratio of the lens.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Data

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Effect List

735

Rings

Plate

Parameter

Rings

Shape

Pattern

Specifies the shape pattern.

Translate

Specifies the amount of split block movement.

Random Translate

Specifies the degree of randomness in the movement.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Width

Specifies the width of the split blocks.

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Spiral

Specifies the angle between blocks.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Appendixes

Tab

Block

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

736

Description

Effect List

Ripple

Tab

Plate

Ripple

Radius

Noise

Radius

Angle

Shape

Crop/Border

General

Shape

Crop/Border

Transparency

Description

Pattern

Specifies the wave pattern.

Amplitude

Specifies the amplitude of the waves in the ripple direction.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Pattern

Specifies the wave pattern.

Amplitude

Specifies the circumferential amplitude of the wave.

Frequency

Specifies the wave frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Amplitude

Specifies the radial amplitude of the noise.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Interpolation

Specifies the type of interpolation.

Amplitude

Specifies the circumferential amplitude of the noise.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Interpolation

Specifies the type of interpolation.

Ripple Type

Specifies the ripple type.

Pattern

Specifies the shape pattern.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Effect List

Appendixes

Angle

Parameter

737

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Appendixes

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Split Slide

X

Translate

Specifies the amount of division block movement in the X direction.

Random Translate

Specifies the degree of randomness in the movement.

Width

Specifies the width of the division blocks.

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Translate

Specifies the amount of division block movement in the Y direction.

Split Slide

Y

Shape Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Specifies the degree of randomness in the movement.

Width

Specifies the width of the division blocks.

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center point of the effect.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

738

Random Translate

Effect List

Swirl

Tab

Plate

Swirl

Shape

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Description

Pattern

Specifies the shape pattern.

Translate

Specifies the amount of pulling in.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Angle

Specifies the amount of rotation of the swirl.

Area

Specifies the range of the swirl.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Appendixes

Spiral

Parameter

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tilt Slide

Shape

Translate

Specifies the amount of split block movement.

Random Translate

Specifies the degree of randomness in the movement.

Tilt Slide

Block

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Width

Specifies the width of the split blocks.

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Angle

Specifies the movement angle of the split blocks.

Divide

Specifies the number of directions.

Effect List

739

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Wave

X

Wave

Y

Noise

X

Y

Shape

740

Effect List

Shape

Wave Pattern

Specifies the wave pattern.

Amplitude

Specifies the wave amplitude in the X direction.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Wave Pattern

Specifies the wave pattern.

Amplitude

Specifies the wave amplitude in the Y direction.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Amplitude

Specifies the amplitude of noise in the X direction.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Interpolation

Specifies the type of interpolation.

Amplitude

Specifies the amplitude of noise in the Y direction.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Interpolation

Specifies the type of interpolation.

Wave Type

Specifies the wave type.

Noise Shape

Specifies the type of noise shape.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness. Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Appendixes

Softness Mode

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Bevel Edge

Geometry

Type

Specifies the type of bevel expression.

Depth

Specifies the bevel depth.

Smoothness X

Specifies the smoothness of horizontal bevel.

Smoothness Y

Specifies the smoothness of vertical bevel.

Light Angle

Specifies the light source direction.

Highlight

Specifies the highlight color.

Shadow

Specifies the shadow color.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Video effects Bevel Edge

Color Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

741

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Blur

Blur

X

Specifies the degree of blur in the horizontal direction.

Y

Specifies the degree of blur in the vertical direction.

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Blur

742

Effect List

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Appendixes

Mask

Softness Mode

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Effect List

743

Bumpy Glass

Plate

Parameter

Description

Bumpy Glass

Bumpy Glass

Amplitude X

Specifies the amplitude of horizontal modulation.

Amplitude Y

Specifies the amplitude of vertical modulation.

Cycle X

Specifies the horizontal cycle.

Cycle Y

Specifies the vertical cycle.

Phase

Specifies the phase. Temporally converting into keyframe provides a shimmering or wavelike effect.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Appendixes

Tab

Crop/Border

Mask

Crop/Border

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

744

Effect List

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Plate

Parameter

Description

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tracking

Tracking

Data

Appendixes

Tab

Crop

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

Defocus

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Defocus

Defocus

X

Specifies the amount of defocus in the horizontal direction.

Y

Specifies the amount of defocus in the vertical direction.

Effect List

745

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Mask

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

746

Effect List

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Drop Shadow

Tab

Plate

Drop Shadow

Drop Shadow

Mask

Crop/Border

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

Description

Distance

Specifies the shadow distance.

Light Angle

Specifies the light angle.

Softness

Specifies the amount of softness at the edges.

Color

Specifies the shadow color.

Appendixes

Crop/Border

Parameter

Transparency

Specifies the shadow transparency.

Luminance

Specifies the shadow gray scale.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Effect List

747

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Emboss

Geometry

Depth

Specifies the depth of embossing.

Smoothness X

Specifies the smoothness of horizontal embossing.

Smoothness Y

Specifies the smoothness of vertical embossing.

Tracking

Tracking

Appendixes

Emboss

Color Crop/Border

748

Effect List

Crop/Border

Light Angle

Specifies the light source direction.

Highlight

Specifies the highlight color.

Shadow

Specifies the shadow color.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Appendixes

Mask1

Soft Edge

Fantasy

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Fantasy

Fantasy

White Threshold

Specifies the white threshold.

Black Threshold

Specifies the black threshold.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Blur X

Specifies the level of blur in X direction.

Blur Y

Specifies the level of blur in Y direction.

Effect List

749

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Mask

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

750

Effect List

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Flag

Tab

Plate

Flag

Flag

Inner Border Parameters

Outer Border Parameters

Shadow Parameters

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Description

Process

Specifies the flag waving process.

Speed

Specifies the speed of flag waving.

Intensity

Specifies the intensity of flag waving.

Frame Curvature

Specifies the curvature of flag edges.

Softness

Specifies the softness of flag edges.

Cut Left

Specifies the position of the left edge of the flag.

Cut Top

Specifies the position of the top edge of the flag.

Cut Right

Specifies the position of the right edge of the flag.

Cut Bottom

Specifies the position of the bottom edge of the flag.

Border Style

Specifies the style of the inner border.

Border Color

Specifies the color of the inner border.

Invert

Inverts the color of the inner border.

Border Width

Specifies the width of the inner border.

Border Softness

Specifies the softness of the inner border.

Parallel Gradient Direction

Specifies the orientation of the gradient.

Radial Center X

Specifies the center position on the X axis.

Radial Center Y

Specifies the center position on the Y axis.

Border Style

Specifies the style of the outer border.

Border Color

Specifies the color of the outer border.

Invert

Inverts the color of the outer border.

Border Width

Specifies the width of the outer border.

Border Softness

Specifies the softness of the outer border.

Parallel Gradient Direction

Specifies the orientation of the gradient.

Radial Center X

Specifies the center position on the X axis.

Radial Center Y

Specifies the center position on the Y axis.

Shadow Color

Specifies the color of shadows.

Shadow Distance

Specifies the length of shadows.

Shadow Direction

Specifies the orientation of shadows.

Shadow Softness

Specifies the softness of shadows.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Clip Parameters

Parameter

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

751

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

752

Effect List

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Flicker

Tab

Plate

Wave

Wave

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Description

Wave Type

Specifies the wave shape (sine, square, exponential).

Frequency

Specifies the frequency of flicker.

Amplitude: Red

Specifies the red amplitude value.

Amplitude: Green

Specifies the green amplitude value.

Amplitude: Blue

Specifies the blue amplitude value.

Amplitude: Alpha

Specifies the alpha amplitude value.

Phase: Red

Specifies the red phase value.

Phase: Green

Specifies the green phase value.

Phase: Blue

Specifies the blue phase value.

Phase: Alpha

Specifies the alpha phase value.

Brightness

Specifies the brightness of random flicker.

Color

Specifies the color level of random flicker.

Appendixes

Random

Parameter

Alpha

Specifies the alpha level of random flicker.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency of random flicker.

Seed

Specifies the random seed value.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

753

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

754

Effect List

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Four Corner Pin

Plate

Parameter

Description

Four Corner Positions

Four Corner Positions

Top Left Point X

Specifies the top left point X-coordinate.

Top Left Point Y

Specifies the top left point Y-coordinate.

Top Right Point X

Specifies the top right point X-coordinate.

Top Right Point Y

Specifies the top right point Y-coordinate.

Appendixes

Tab

Bottom Left Point X

Specifies the bottom left point X-coordinate.

Bottom Left Point Y

Specifies the bottom left point Y-coordinate.

Bottom Right Point X

Specifies the bottom right point X-coordinate.

Bottom Right Point Y

Specifies the bottom right point Y-coordinate.

Four Corner Border

Softness

Specifies the corner softness.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Data

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Frame Size Conversion

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Frame Size Conv.

Frame Size Conv.

Scale

Specifies the vertical and horizontal scale of enlargement or reduction.

Position

Specifies the vertical and horizontal position.

Fill the margin with black

Fill white blank areas with black.

Parameter

Description

Gaussian Blur

Tab

Plate

Gaussian Blur

Gaussian Blur

X

Specifies the degree of blur in the horizontal direction.

Y

Specifies the degree of blur in the vertical direction.

Effect List

755

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Mask

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

756

Effect List

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Glint

Plate

Parameter

Description

Glint

Glint

Horizontal and Vertical: Horizontal

Specifies the horizontal glint level.

Horizontal and Vertical: Vertical

Specifies the vertical glint level.

Diagonal: Diag1

Specifies the 135-degree diagonal glint level.

Diagonal: Diag2

Specifies the 45-degree diagonal glint level.

Diagonal: Rotation

Specifies the rotation angle of the diagonals.

Color Size: Red

Specifies the red-channel glint level.

Color Size: Green

Specifies the green-channel glint level.

Color Size: Blue

Specifies the blue-channel glint level.

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Appendixes

Tab

Color Size: Brightness

Specifies the brightness glint level.

Softness

Specifies the softness of glint edges.

Threshold

Specifies the source area of glint.

Source Capacity

Specifies the blend level with the original image.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

757

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

758

Effect List

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Glow

Plate

Parameter

Description

Glow

Glow

Expanse

Specifies the reference brightness used to determine the extent of glow.

Inclines

Specifies the glow brightness.

Shape Softness

Specifies the softness of glow shapes.

Edge Softness

Specifies the softness of glow perimeters.

Detail

Specifies the foreground detail of the key, if Glow from Key is on.

Blend

Specifies the blend of original image and glow effect image.

Glow Foot

Specifies the minimum threshold for glow.

Noise

Specifies level of noise added to the key.

Edge Color Level

Specifies the color density of glow perimeters.

Edge Color

Specifies the color of glow perimeters.

Glow from Key

Specifies to glow the key.

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

Appendixes

Tab

759

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

760

Effect List

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Ground Glass

Plate

Parameter

Ground Glass

Ground Glass

Pattern

Selects the ground glass pattern.

Ground Glass X

Specifies the glass level in X direction.

Ground Glass Y

Specifies the glass level in Y direction.

Glass Position X

Specifies the position of glass center in X direction.

Glass Position Y

Specifies the position of glass center in Y direction.

Glass Scale X

Specifies the size of glass in X direction.

Glass Scale Y

Specifies the size of glass in Y direction.

Light Angle

Specifies the angle of incident light.

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Description

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

Appendixes

Tab

761

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

762

Effect List

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Lighting

Plate

Parameter

Description

Lighting

Lighting

Type

Specifies the type of lighting.

Radius

Specifies the range of the lighting.

Position X

Specifies the start position of the lighting in X direction.

Position Y

Specifies the start position of the lighting in Y direction.

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Soft edge

Specifies the width of soft edges.

Color

Specifies the color of lighting.

Angle

Specifies the angle of lighting.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the aspect ratio of the shape.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

Appendixes

Tab

763

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

764

Effect List

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Lightning

Plate

Parameter

Description

Lightning

Lightning

Root Position X

Specifies the start position in X direction.

Root Position Y

Specifies the start position in Y direction.

Direction

Specifies the angle of travel.

Halo Color

Specifies the color of halo.

Halo Radius

Specifies the radius of halo.

Flash Speed

Specifies the speed of travel.

Flash Interval

Specifies the duration of lightning flash.

Resolution

Specifies the size of the lightning branch.

Distortion

Specifies the distortion of the lightning branch.

Branch

Specifies the number of branches.

Diminish

Specifies the lifecycle of the lightning branch.

Width

Specifies the width of lightning.

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Appendixes

Tab

Branch Width

Specifies the width of the lightning branch.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Mosaic

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mosaic

Mosaic

Mosaic Scale

Specifies the width and height of the mosaic.

Offset

Specifies the position of mosaic cells.

Effect List

765

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Appendixes

Mask

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

766

Effect List

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Motion Blur

Tab

Plate

Motion Blur

Motion Blur

Mask

Crop/Border

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General

Transparency

Description

Type

Specifies the type of motion blur.

Center X

Specifies the center of motion blur in X direction.

Center Y

Specifies the center of motion blur in Y direction.

Size

Specifies the size of motion blur.

Rotation

Specifies the angle of rotation of motion blur.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Effect List

Appendixes

Crop/Border

Parameter

767

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Appendixes

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

MultiView

MultiView

MultiView X

Selects the number of images in X direction.

MultiView Y

Selects the number of images in Y direction.

Position X

Specifies the center position in X direction.

Position Y

Specifies the center position in Y direction.

Inner Softness

Specifies the softness of the inner border.

Inner Color

Specifies the color of the inner border.

Outer Softness

Specifies the softness of the outer border.

Outer Color

Specifies the color of the outer border.

Stretch Left

Specifies the left-edge stretch level of each view.

Stretch Top

Specifies the top-edge stretch level of each view.

Stretch Right

Specifies the right-edge stretch level of each view.

Stretch Bottom

Specifies the bottom-edge stretch level of each view.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

MultiView

Crop/Border

General

768

Effect List

Crop/Border

Transparency

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking. Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Old Film

Edge

Frame Shape

Specifies the corner shape.

Frame Limit

Specifies the frame size based on the frame shape.

Frame Sharpness

Specifies the sharpness of frame edges.

Red Gain

Specifies the red gain value.

Green Gain

Specifies the green gain value.

Blue Gain

Specifies the blue gain value.

Saturation

Specifies the color saturation value.

Noise Point

Specifies the density of the noise point.

Color

Turns the noise color on and off.

Appendixes

Use Same Setting

Old Film

Color

Noise

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Noise Block

Specifies the number and size of noise blocks.

Noise Line

Specifies the line number and position of random noise.

Dither

Specifies the random dither level.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

769

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

770

Effect List

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

P in P

Plate

Parameter

Description

Foreground

Scale/Position

Scale

Specifies the horizontal and vertical minification ratio.

Position

Specifies the horizontal and vertical position.

Filter

Filter

Turns the filter on and off.

Border

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Drop Shadow

Trail Background

Background

Appendixes

Tab

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Drop Shadow

Turns the shadow on and off.

Distance

Specifies the shadow distance.

Light Angle

Specifies the light angle.

Shadow Color

Specifies the shadow color.

Transparency

Specifies the shadow transparency.

Softness

Specifies the amount of softness of the shadow.

Decay Type

Specifies the type of decay.

Decay Time

Specifies the decay time.

Type

Specifies the background type (None, Self, Mono, Sepia).

Sepia Color

Specifies the color used for sepia.

Density

Specifies the background density.

Crop

Crop

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data Note

The Sepia Color parameter is ignored when the background type parameter is other than Sepia. Positioning

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Positioning

Positioning

Position

Specifies the vertical and horizontal position.

Scale

Specifies the vertical and horizontal scale of enlargement or reduction.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

General

Transparency

Effect List

771

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under witch data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

Rays

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Rays

Rays

Length

Specifies the ray length.

Brightness

Specifies the ray brightness level.

Softness

Specifies the ray softness level.

Color

Specifies the ray color.

Edge

Turns the ray edge on and off.

Center X

Specifies the rays start point in X direction.

Center Y

Specifies the rays start point in Y direction.

Crop/Border

772

Effect List

Crop/Border

Threshold

Specifies the source area of rays.

Source Opacity

Specifies the blend level with the original image.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Effect List

Appendixes

Mask1

Soft Edge

773

Relief

Tab

Plate

Relief

Geometry

Appendixes

Color

Crop/Border

Mask

Crop/Border

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

774

Effect List

Parameter

Description

Depth

Specifies the relief depth.

Smoothness X

Specifies the smoothness of horizontal relief.

Smoothness Y

Specifies the smoothness of vertical relief.

Light Angle

Specifies the light source direction.

Material

Specifies the material color.

Highlight

Specifies the highlight color.

Shadow

Specifies the shadow color.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Plate

Parameter

Description

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Scaling

Scaling

Scale X

Specifies the horizontal magnification ratio.

Scale Y

Specifies the vertical magnification ratio.

Interpolate Type

Specifies the interpolation type.

Input Offset

Specifies the origin of the input picture. Converted to origin point of output picture.

Output Offset

Specifies the origin of the output picture.

Tracking

Tracking

Appendixes

Tab

Scaling

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

775

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

776

Effect List

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns the border alpha information processing on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Shaker

Tab

Plate

Shake

Global

X Shake

Y Shake

Z Shake

Tilt Shake

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Description

Amplitude

Specifies the shaker wave amplitude.

Frequency

Specifies the shaker wave frequency.

Phase

Specifies the shaker wave phase.

Z Dist

Specifies the shaking adjustment in the Z direction.

Seed

Specifies the random shaking seed.

Wrap X

Specifies the border in the X direction (Wrap, Mirror, Clamp, Border).

Wrap Y

Specifies the border in the Y direction (Wrap, Mirror, Clamp, Border).

Rand Amp

Specifies the random shaking amplitude.

Rand Freq

Specifies the random shaking frequency.

Wave Amp

Specifies the shaker wave amplitude.

Wave Freq

Specifies the shaker wave frequency.

Phase

Specifies the shaker wave phase.

Rand Amp

Specifies the random shaking amplitude.

Rand Freq

Specifies the random shaking frequency.

Wave Amp

Specifies the shaker wave amplitude.

Wave Freq

Specifies the shaker wave frequency.

Phase

Specifies the shaker wave phase.

Rand Amp

Specifies the random shaking amplitude.

Rand Freq

Specifies the random shaking frequency.

Wave Amp

Specifies the shaker wave amplitude.

Wave Freq

Specifies the shaker wave frequency.

Phase

Specifies the shaker wave phase.

Rand Amp

Specifies the random shaking amplitude.

Rand Freq

Specifies the random shaking frequency.

Wave Amp

Specifies the shaker wave amplitude.

Wave Freq

Specifies the shaker wave frequency.

Phase

Specifies the shaker wave phase.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

Appendixes

Detail

Parameter

777

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Note

The shaken video image will have slightly different X and Y dimensions after processing. A border is added to the image to maintain correct size and aspect ratio. Appendixes

Shape Crop

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Shape

Shape

Pattern

Specifies the pattern.

Invert

Inverts the pattern.

Size

Specifies the size.

Size related with Center

Adjusts the size according to changes in the effect position.

Rotate

Specifies the rotation angle.

Center

Specifies the offset.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the aspect ratio of the shape.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Inner Softness

Specifies the width of the inner soft edge.

Border

Decoration

Fringe

Spiral

Specifies the color of the inner side.

Outer Softness

Specifies the width of the outer soft edge.

Outer Color

Specifies the color of the outer side.

Fringe Number

Specifies the number of fringes.

Fringe Value

Specifies the size of the fringes.

Fringe Offset

Specifies the position where fringes are added.

Spiral Number

Specifies the number of spirals.

Spiral Value

Specifies the size of the spirals.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Data

778

Inner Color

Effect List

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Sharp

Tab

Parameter

Sharp

Sharp

Sharp

Specifies the image sharpness.

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Mask

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General

Transparency

Description

Appendixes

Plate

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Effect List

779

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Appendixes

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Side Panel

Side Panel

Type

Specifies the type of side panel.

Side Panel

Blur Parameters

Color Parameters

Range Parameters

Soft Parameters

Crop/Border

780

Effect List

Crop/Border

Blur Type

Specifies the type of blur.

Size X

Specifies the size of blur in X direction.

Size Y

Specifies the size of blur in Y direction.

Color Effect

Specifies the color effect.

Gradual Color

Specifies the gradient color.

Invert

Inverts the color gradient.

Gradient Direction

Specifies the direction of gradient.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Level

Specifies the level of mixing.

Vertical Left

Specifies the vertical range on the left.

Vertical Right

Specifies the vertical range on the right.

Horizontal Top

Specifies the horizontal range on the top.

Horizontal Bottom

Specifies the horizontal range on the bottom.

Vertical Soft Left

Specifies the softness of the left range.

Vertical Soft Right

Specifies the softness of the right range.

Horizontal Soft Top

Specifies the softness of the top range.

Horizontal Soft Bottom

Specifies the softness of the bottom range.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Appendixes

Mask1

Soft Edge

Strobe

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Strobe

Strobe

Freeze

Selects the images on which to apply the effect.

Interval

Specifies the strobe interval.

Fade Time

Specifies the duration before color change.

Effect List

781

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Advanced

Advanced

Fade Pattern

Specifies the fade pattern.

Flash Level

Specifies the flash intensity.

Fade Level

Specifies the fade level.

Fade Color

Specifies the fade color.

Fade Color Transparency

Specifies the transparency level of the fade color.

Blend Level

Specifies the level of color blending.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Crop/Border

Mask

Crop/Border

Mask

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General

Transparency

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Note

The Strobe Effect can be applied only to the Overall-Effect area, and cannot be applied to sub sequences.

782

Effect List

Trail

Plate

Parameter

Description

Trail

Trail

Density

Specifies the degree to which traces disappear.

Distance

Specifies the trace distance.

Angle

Specifies the trace angle.

Dust

Specifies the degree of dust.

Appendixes

Tab

Rainbow

Specifies the degree of rainbow color.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mosaic

Mosaic

Mosaic Scale X

Specifies the scale of the mosaic in X direction.

Mosaic Scale Y

Specifies the scale of the mosaic in Y direction.

Offset X

Specifies the offset position of the mosaic in X direction.

Offset Y

Specifies the offset position of the mosaic in Y direction.

Triangle Mosaic

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Effect List

783

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mask

Mask

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Type

Specifies the basic mask type.

Invert

Inverts the range.

Appendixes

Mask1

Mask2

Mask3

General Tracking

Transparency Tracking

Data

784

Effect List

Soft Edge

Specifies the width of soft edges at mask edges.

Border Width

Specifies the width of borders at mask edges.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Key

Turns border processing of alpha information on and off.

Surface Color: On/Off

Turns the mask surface color function on and off.

Surface Color: Color

Specifies the mask surface color.

Surface Color: Transparency

Specifies the mask surface color transparency.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Mask

Turns the mask on and off.

Shape

Specifies the mask shape.

Center

Specifies the center point.

Size

Specifies the size.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Video Stabilization

Tab

Plate

Video Stabilization Command

Crop/Border

General

Smoothness

Crop/Border

Transparency

Description

Mass Motion Detection

Specifies the stabilization detection mode (Camera Motion, Object Motion).

Analyze

Starts the motion detection analysis function.

Border Area

Specifies the border type to add to the stabilized image (Wrap, Mirror, Clamp, Border).

Scale Mode

Specifies the automatic scaling mode for the stabilized image (No Scale, Fixed Scale, Dynamic Scale).

Scale

Specifies the manual scale factor.

Object Motion Smoothness: Translation

Specifies the object translation detection precision.

Object Motion Smoothness: Scale

Specifies the object scale detection precision.

Object Motion Smoothness: Rotation

Specifies the object rotation detection precision.

Camera Motion Smoothness: Translation

Specifies the camera translation detection precision.

Camera Motion Smoothness: Scale

Specifies the camera scale detection precision.

Camera Motion Smoothness: Rotation

Specifies the camera rotation detection precision.

Crop/Border

Turns Crop and Border on and off.

Bounds

Specifies the cropping range.

Softness

Specifies the crop edge softness.

Softness Mode

Specifies the softness mode.

Round Crop

Turns on and off the function which rounds the crop outline and softens the borders.

Invert

Inverts the cropping range.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Border Density

Specifies the border density.

Border Inner Softness

Specifies the inner edge softness of the border.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Area

Specifies the range over which transparency is adjusted.

Appendixes

Smoothness

Parameter

Note

The stabilized video image will have slightly different X and Y dimensions after processing. A border is added to the image to maintain correct size and aspect ratio. The scale mode is used to maintain the largest possible image.

Effect List

785

Wipes Barn Wipe

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Offset

Specifies the degree of wipe application.

Edge

Modify

Multiple

Divide

Slant

Specifies the wipe slant.

Center

Specifies the center position.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Offset

Specifies the degree of wipe application.

Box Wipe

Edge

786

Effect List

Slant

Specifies the wipe slant.

Center

Specifies the center position.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Modify

Multiple

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Divide

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Data

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Appendixes

General

Fan-shaped Wipe

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Offset

Specifies the degree of wipe application.

Center

Specifies the center position.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Edge

Modify

Multiple

Divide

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

Effect List

787

Matrix Wipe

Tab

Plate

Pattern

Pattern

Appendixes

Edge

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Offset

Specifies the degree of wipe application.

Tile Size

Specifies the tile size.

Matrix Sequence

Specifies the matrix sequence.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Data

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Multi-Axis Rotary Wipe

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Offset

Specifies the degree of wipe application.

Center

Specifies the center position.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Edge

Modify

Multiple

Divide General

788

Effect List

Transparency

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking. Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Appendixes

Use Same Setting

Revolving Wipe

Edge

Modify

Multiple

Divide

Invert

Inverts the rotation direction.

Offset

Specifies the degree of wipe application.

Center

Specifies the center position.

Parallel

Specifies the shape of the cross part.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

Effect List

789

Shape Wipe

Tab

Plate

Pattern

Pattern

Appendixes

Edge

Decoration

Fringe

Spiral Modify

Multiple

Divide

Description

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Invert

Inverts the wipe shape.

Offset

Specifies the degree of wipe application.

Rotate

Specifies the rotation.

Center

Specifies the center position.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the aspect ratio of the wipe shape.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Fringe Number

Specifies the number of fringes.

Fringe Value

Specifies the fringe size.

Fringe Offset

Specifies the fringe position.

Spiral Number

Specifies the number of spirals.

Spiral Value

Specifies the spiral size.

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Overlap

The wipe shape overlaps neighboring blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

790

Parameter

Effect List

Slide Wipe

Tab

Plate

Pattern

Pattern

Modify

Multiple

Divide

Description

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Offset

Specifies the degree of wipe application.

Slant

Specifies the wipe slant.

Center

Specifies the center position.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Appendixes

Edge

Parameter

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

General

Transparency

Transparency

Specifies the degree of transparency.

Tracking

Tracking

Analyze

Specifies the button which starts tracking and the tracking range.

Data

Specifies the number of tracking points and the number under which data is saved.

Background

Specifies background image tracking.

Use Same Setting

Specifies the same settings for all tracking points.

Tracker 1 - 8

Specifies tracking conditions.

Data 1 - 8

Tracking data.

Data

Effect List

791

Transition Effects Dissolve Dissolve

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Dissolve

Mix

Type

Specifies the dissolve type (Mix, Non-Additive Mix, Super Mix, Subtraction, Sandstorm)

Subtraction Control

Specifies the level for Subtraction type mix.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Transition

Transition

3D 3D Broken Glass

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

3D Broken Glass

Shape

Divide X

Specifies the number of horizontal divisions.

Divide Y

Specifies the number of vertical divisions.

Direction

Specifies the direction from which to start breaking.

Rotate

Specifies the rotation direction on vertical axis.

Light

Specifies lighting on and off.

Lighting

792

Lighting

Light Direction

Specifies the light source direction.

Diffuse

Specifies the intensity of diffused light.

Ambient

Specifies the intensity of ambient light.

Advanced

Perspective

Field Of View

Specifies the angle of the field of view.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Effect List

3D Cube

Tab

Plate

Shape

Shape

Perspective

Transition

Description

Divide X

Specifies the number of horizontal divisions.

Divide Y

Specifies the number of vertical divisions.

Interval

Specifies the interval of splitting.

Direction

Specifies the direction from which the background appears.

Rotate

Specifies the rotation direction.

Side

Side Color

Specifies the side color.

Transparency

Specifies the side transparency.

Lighting

Light

Turns Lighting on and off.

Light Direction

Specifies the light source direction.

Diffuse

Specifies the color of diffused light.

Ambient

Specifies the color of ambient light.

Perspective

Field Of View

Specifies the field of view.

Background Color

Background Color

Specifies the background color.

Transparency

Specifies the background transparency.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Transition

Appendixes

Lighting

Parameter

Note

Processing becomes unstable and noise may occur if the sides of the cubes overlap. Adjust the parameters to make sure that the sides do not overlap. 3D Explosion

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

3D Explosion

Shape

Divide X

Specifies the number of horizontal divisions.

Divide Y

Specifies the number of vertical divisions.

Direction

Specifies the fly out start point.

Center

Specifies the center position.

Light

Turns Lighting on and off.

Light Direction

Specifies the light source direction.

Diffuse

Specifies the color of diffused light.

Ambient

Specifies the color of ambient light.

Lighting

Lighting

Advanced

Perspective

Field Of View

Specifies the field of view.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Effect List

793

3D Compress

Tab

Plate

Shape

Shape

Appendixes

Lighting

Lighting

Parameter

Description

Divide X

Specifies the number of horizontal divisions.

Divide Y

Specifies the number of vertical divisions.

Rotate

Specifies the rotation.

Light

Turns Lighting on and off.

Light Direction

Specifies the light source direction.

Diffuse

Specifies the color of diffused light.

Ambient

Specifies the color of ambient light.

Advanced

Perspective

Field Of View

Specifies the field of view.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

3D Spiral

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Shape

Shape

Divide

Specifies the number of divisions.

Interval

Specifies the rotation angle step.

Direction

Specifies the direction from which to start rotation.

Rotate

Specifies the rotation direction.

Light

Turns Lighting on and off.

Light Direction

Specifies the light source direction.

Diffuse

Specifies the color of diffused light.

Ambient

Specifies the color of ambient light.

Perspective

Field Of View

Specifies the field of view.

Background Color

Background Color

Specifies the background color.

Transparency

Specifies the background transparency.

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Lighting

Advanced

Transition

794

Effect List

Lighting

3D Transform

Tab

Plate

Shape

Shape

Advanced

Lighting

Perspective Background Color

Description

Divide X

Specifies the number of horizontal divisions.

Divide Y

Specifies the number of vertical divisions.

Interval

Specifies the interval of splitting.

Direction

Specifies the direction from which the background appears.

Rotate

Specifies the rotation direction.

Light

Turns Lighting on and off.

Light Direction

Specifies the light source direction.

Diffuse

Specifies the luminance of diffused light.

Ambient

Specifies the luminance of ambient light.

Field Of View

Specifies the field of view.

Background Color

Specifies the background color.

Transparency

Specifies the background transparency.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Plate

Parameter

Description

Geometry

Geometry

Pattern

Specifies the rotation pattern (Horizontal, Vertical)

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Transition

Transition

Appendixes

Lighting

Parameter

Page Rotation

Tab

Sparkle Broken Glass

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Broken Glass

Shape

Rotate

Specifies the shape rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the shape.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Block

Width

Specifies the width of the split blocks.

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Spiral

Specifies the angle between blocks.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Effect List

795

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Broken Rings

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Broken Rings

Shape

Pattern

Specifies the shape pattern.

Block

Transition

Transition

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Width

Specifies the width of the split blocks.

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Spiral

Specifies the angle between blocks.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Character Trail

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Character Trail

Character Trail

Direction

Specifies the direction of expansion.

Angle

Specifies the angle of the trail.

Wave Pattern

Specifies the pattern of the trail.

Amplitude

Specifies the amplitude of the trail.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency of the trail.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Transition

Transition

Melt

796

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Melt

Melt

Amplitude

Specifies the melt amplitude.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency.

Phase

Specifies the phase.

Interpolation

Specifies the type of Interpolation.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Effect List

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Rings

Plate

Parameter

Description

Rings

Shape

Pattern

Specifies the shape pattern.

Block

Transition

Transition

Appendixes

Tab

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Width

Specifies the width of the split blocks.

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Spiral

Specifies the angle between blocks.

Random Pixel

Specifies the degree of randomness in pixel location.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Split Slide

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Split Slide

Shape

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Width

Specifies the width of the split blocks.

Block

Transition

Transition

Random Width

Specifies the degree of randomness in the block width.

Random Translation

Specifies the degree of randomness in the movement.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Parameter

Description

Swirl

Tab

Plate

Swirl

Shape

Spiral

Pattern

Specifies the shape pattern.

Rotate

Specifies the effect rotation.

Center

Specifies the center of the effect.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the shape aspect ratio.

Angle

Specifies the amount of rotation of the swirl.

Area

Specifies the range of the swirl.

Effect List

797

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Video Effect Barn Slide Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Slide

Type

Type

Specifies the slide type.

Slant

Specifies the slant of the slide.

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Transition

Transition

Compress

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Compress

Type

Type

Specifies the compress type.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Parameter

Description

Dip To Color

Tab

Plate

Dip to Color

Dip to Color

Dip Color

Selects the dip color.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Fade From Color

798

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Fade from Color

Fade from Color

Fade Color

Selects the fade from color.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Effect List

Fade Color

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Fade Color

Fade Color

Selects the fade to color.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Appendixes

Fade Color

Glow

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Glow

Glow

Expanse

Specifies the reference brightness used to determine the extent of glow.

Inclines

Specifies the glow brightness.

Shape Softness

Specifies the softness of glow shapes.

Edge Softness

Specifies the softness of glow perimeters.

Detail

Specifies the foreground level of the key, if Glow from Key is on.

Blend

Specifies the blend of original image and glow effect image.

Glow Foot

Specifies the minimum threshold for glow.

Noise

Specifies level of noise added to the key.

Transition

Transition

Edge Color Level

Specifies the color density of glow perimeters.

Edge Color

Specifies the color of glow perimeters.

Glow from Key

Specifies to glow the key.

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Note

This cannot be used in transitions to filler.

Effect List

799

Glow In/Out

Plate

Parameter

Description

Glow

Glow

Type

Specifies the in-effect area or out-effect area.

Expanse

Specifies the reference brightness used to determine the extent of glow.

Inclines

Specifies the glow brightness.

Shape Softness

Specifies the softness of glow shapes.

Edge Softness

Specifies the softness of glow perimeters.

Detail

Specifies the foreground level of the key, if Glow from Key is on.

Blend

Specifies the blend of original image and glow effect image.

Glow Foot

Specifies the minimum threshold for glow.

Noise

Specifies level of noise added to the key.

Edge Color Level

Specifies the color density of glow perimeters.

Edge Color

Specifies the color of glow perimeters.

Appendixes

Tab

Transition

Transition

Glow from Key

Specifies to glow the key.

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Revolving Slide

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Slide

Type

Type

Specifies the slide type.

Rotate

Specifies the rotation direction.

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Transition

Transition

Revolving Split Slide

800

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Slide

Type

Type

Specifies the slide type.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Effect List

Slide

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Type

Type

Specifies the slide type.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Appendixes

Slide

Stream

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Stream

Type

Type

Specifies the stream type.

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the degree of transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Effect List

801

Wipes Amoeba Wipe

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Geometry

Geometry

Phase

Specifies the phase. Movement can also be assigned by a keyframe.

Bump Density

Specifies the bump density.

Slant

Specifies the slant.

Height

Specifies the bump height.

Lighting

Transition

Transition

Soft Edge

Softens the edges.

Random Seed

Specifies the random seed number.

Brightness

Specifies the strength of the light.

Light Angle

Specifies the light angle.

Highlight Color

Specifies the highlight color.

Shadow Color

Specifies the shadow color.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Parameter

Description

Barn Wipe

Tab

Plate

Pattern

Pattern Edge

Modify

Multiple

Divide Transition

802

Effect List

Transition

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Slant

Specifies the wipe slant.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Box Wipe

Tab

Plate

Pattern

Pattern

Modify

Multiple

Divide Transition

Transition

Description

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Slant

Specifies the wipe slant.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Appendixes

Edge

Parameter

Double Page Roll

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Geometry

Roll

Angle: First

Specifies the first page roll angle.

Angle: Second

Specifies the second page roll angle.

Radius

Specifies the page roll radius.

Split Pattern

Specifies the split pattern (Horizontal, Vertical)

Step Pattern

Specifies the step pattern (Same, One by one, Gradient)

Light Angle (Phi)

Specifies the light angle (φ).

Light Angle (Theta)

Specifies the light angle (θ).

Lighting

Common

Front

Rear

Rear

Transition

Rear

Transition

Diffuse Light Ratio

Specifies the ratio of diffuse light to ambient light.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the front side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the front side.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the reverse side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the reverse side.

Use Foreground

Specifies whether to use the reverse side as foreground or background.

Matte Ratio

Specifies the ratio of the matte color.

Matte Color

Specifies the color of the matte color.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Effect List

803

Double Page Turn

Tab

Plate

Geometry

Roll

Appendixes

Lighting

Common

Front

Rear

Rear

Transition

Rear

Transition

Parameter

Description

Angle: First

Specifies the first page roll angle.

Angle: Second

Specifies the second page roll angle.

Radius

Specifies the page roll radius.

Split Pattern

Specifies the split pattern (Horizontal, Vertical)

Step Pattern

Specifies the step pattern (Same, One by one, Gradient)

Light Angle (Phi)

Specifies the light angle (φ).

Light Angle (Theta)

Specifies the light angle (θ).

Diffuse Light Ratio

Specifies the ratio of diffuse light to ambient light.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the front side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the front side.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the reverse side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the reverse side.

Use Foreground

Specifies whether to use the reverse side as foreground or background.

Matte Ratio

Specifies the ratio of the matte color.

Matte Color

Specifies the color of the matte color.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Fan-shaped Wipe

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Edge

Modify

Transition

804

Effect List

Multiple

Soft Edge

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Matrix Wipe

Tab

Plate

Pattern

Pattern

Transition

Transition

Description

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Tile Size

Specifies the tile size.

Matrix Sequence

Specifies the matrix sequence.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Appendixes

Edge

Parameter

Multi-Axis Rotary Wipe

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Edge

Soft Edge

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Modify

Multiple

Divide Transition

Transition

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Effect List

805

Page Roll

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Geometry

Roll

Angle

Specifies the page roll angle.

Radius

Specifies the page roll radius.

Light Angle (Phi)

Specifies the light angle (φ).

Light Angle (Theta)

Specifies the light angle (θ).

Lighting

Common

Front

Rear

Rear

Transition

Rear

Transition

Description

Diffuse Light Ratio

Specifies the ratio of diffuse light to ambient light.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the front side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the front side.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the reverse side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the reverse side.

Use Foreground

Specifies whether to use the reverse side as foreground or background.

Matte Ratio

Specifies the ratio of the matte color.

Matte Color

Specifies the color of the matte color.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Parameter

Description

Page Turn

Tab

Plate

Geometry

Turn

Lighting

Common

Front

Rear

Rear

Transition

806

Effect List

Rear

Transition

Angle

Specifies the page roll angle.

Radius

Specifies the page roll radius.

Light Angle (Phi)

Specifies the light angle (φ).

Light Angle (Theta)

Specifies the light angle (θ).

Diffuse Light Ratio

Specifies the ratio of diffuse light to ambient light.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the front side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the front side.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the reverse side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the reverse side.

Use Foreground

Specifies whether to use the reverse side as foreground or background.

Matte Ratio

Specifies the ratio of the matte color.

Matte Color

Specifies the color of the matte color.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Push

Plate

Parameter

Description

Push

Push

Type

Specifies the type of push wipe.

First Softness

Specifies the softness of image before wipe.

First Color

Specifies the color of softness before wipe.

Second Softness

Specifies the softness of image after wipe.

Transition

Transition

Second Color

Specifies the color of softness after wipe.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Appendixes

Tab

Quadruple Page Roll

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Geometry

Roll

Angle: Bottom Left

Specifies the bottom left page roll angle.

Angle: Top Left

Specifies the top left page roll angle.

Angle: Bottom Right

Specifies the bottom right page roll angle.

Angle: Top Right

Specifies the top right page roll angle.

Radius

Specifies the page roll radius.

Split Pattern

Specifies the split pattern (Horizontal, Vertical)

Step Pattern

Specifies the step pattern (Same, One by one, Gradient)

Group Pattern

Specifies the group pattern (Nothing, Gap 1, Gap 2)

Light Angle (Phi)

Specifies the light angle (φ).

Light Angle (Theta)

Specifies the light angle (θ).

Diffuse Light Ratio

Specifies the ratio of diffuse light to ambient light.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the front side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the front side.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the reverse side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the reverse side.

Use Foreground

Specifies whether to use the reverse side as foreground or background.

Matte Ratio

Specifies the ratio of the matte color.

Matte Color

Specifies the color of the matte color.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Lighting

Common

Front

Rear

Rear

Transition

Rear

Transition

Effect List

807

Quadruple Page Turn

Plate

Parameter

Geometry

Roll

Angle: Bottom Left

Specifies the bottom left page roll angle.

Angle: Top Left

Specifies the top left page roll angle.

Angle: Bottom Right

Specifies the bottom right page roll angle.

Angle: Top Right

Specifies the top right page roll angle.

Radius

Specifies the page roll radius.

Split Pattern

Specifies the split pattern (Horizontal, Vertical)

Step Pattern

Specifies the step pattern (Same, One by one, Gradient)

Group Pattern

Specifies the group pattern (Nothing, Gap 1, Gap 2)

Appendixes

Tab

Lighting

Common

Front

Rear

Rear

Transition

Rear

Transition

Description

Light Angle (Phi)

Specifies the light angle (φ).

Light Angle (Theta)

Specifies the light angle (θ).

Diffuse Light Ratio

Specifies the ratio of diffuse light to ambient light.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the front side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the front side.

Highlight

Specifies the strength of the mirror surface reflected light on the reverse side.

Smoothness

Specifies the smoothness of the reverse side.

Use Foreground

Specifies whether to use the reverse side as foreground or background.

Matte Ratio

Specifies the ratio of the matte color.

Matte Color

Specifies the color of the matte color.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Revolving Wipe

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Invert

Inverts the rotation direction.

Parallel

Specifies the shape of the cross part.

Soft Edge

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Edge

Modify

Multiple

Divide

808

Effect List

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Ripple Wipe

Plate

Parameter

Description

Geometry

Geometry

Ripple Width

Specifies the ripple width.

Num of Waves

Specifies the number of waves.

Amplitude

Specifies the amplitude of the waves.

Ellipticity

Specifies the ellipticity of the ripple.

Center

Specifies the center point of the ripple.

Lighting Transition

Lighting Transition

Appendixes

Tab

Distortion

Specifies the distortion of the picture by the ripple.

Brightness

Specifies the strength of the light.

Light Angle

Specifies the light angle.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Shape Wipe

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Rotate

Specifies the rotation.

Center

Specifies the center point of the shape.

Shape Aspect Ratio

Specifies the aspect ratio of the wipe shape.

Soft Edge

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Fringe Number

Specifies the number of fringes.

Fringe Value

Specifies the fringe size.

Fringe Offset

Specifies the fringe position.

Spiral Number

Specifies the number of spirals.

Edge

Decoration

Fringe

Spiral Modify

Multiple

Divide

Spiral Value

Specifies the spiral size.

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Overlap

The wipe shape overlaps neighboring blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

Effect List

809

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Transition

Transition

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

Slide Wipe

Appendixes

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Selects the wipe pattern.

Slant

Specifies the wipe slant.

Soft Width

Specifies the soft width.

Border Width

Specifies the border width.

Border Color

Specifies the border color.

Edge

Modify

Multiple

Divide Transition

810

Effect List

Transition

Multiple Type

Specifies the multiple type.

Flip

Flips the blocks.

Multiple Number X

Specifies the number of horizontal blocks.

Multiple Number Y

Specifies the number of vertical blocks.

Divide Type

Specifies the divide type.

Divide Width

Specifies the divide width.

Transition

Specifies the transition progress.

Reverse

Sets the transition direction to “reverse.”

CG Effects CG Explode

Plate

Parameter

Description

Progress

Progress

Progress

Specifies the explosion lifecycle.

Crack Level

Specifies the number of pieces.

Explode Radius

Specifies the radius of the explosion.

Random Direction

Turns random direction control on/off.

Appendixes

Tab

CG Flag

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Phase

Phase

Phase

Specifies the phase of flag waving.

Wave Number

Specifies the number of waves.

Wave Height

Specifies the wave height.

Slant Angle

Specifies the angle of slant of the flag.

Flicker

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Flicker

Flicker

Flicker Frequency

Specifies the frequency of flickering.

Effect List

811

Fire Text

Tab

Plate

Process

Process

Parameter

Description

Appendixes

Process

Specifies the degree of fire.

Fire Speed

Specifies the speed of the fire.

Flame Dither

Specifies the flame density.

Fire Density

Specifies the fire behavior.

Fire Height

Specifies the maximum height of the fire.

Flame Ratio

Specifies the ratio between big flames and tiny flames.

Big Flame Height

Specifies the height of big flames.

Tiny Flame Height

Specifies the height of tiny flames.

Wind Direction

Specifies the wind direction.

Wave Frequency

Specifies the wave frequency.

Wave Height

Specifies the wave height.

Wave Speed

Specifies the wave speed.

Blend Amount

Specifies the level of blending with the background image.

Add Original CG

Turns the display of the original CG on/off.

Fire Color

Specifies the color of the fire.

Flame Inner Color

Specifies the inner color of the flames.

Flame Outer Color

Specifies the outer color of the flames.

Mode Light

812

Tab

Plate

Parameter

Description

Mode Light

Mode Light

Template

Specifies the mode type.

Progress

Specifies the template progress.

Softness

Specifies the softness level.

Effect List

Soft Bias

Specifies the softness center and border shift.

Light Color

Specifies the color of the light.

Template Count X

Specifies the template count in X direction.

Template Count Y

Specifies the template count in Y direction.

Text Effect

Tab

Plate

Progress

Progress

Parameter

Description Specifices the lifecycle of text particles. Specifies the speed of fading of text particles.

Particle Size

Specifies the size of text particles.

Particle Height

Specifies the height of text particles.

Appendixes

Progress Particle Speed

Particle Spread

Specifies the distance of spreading of text particles.

Particle Shape

Specifies the shape of text particles.

Amount of Text

Specifies the number of text particles.

Parameter

Description

Volume Length

Specifies the length of light.

Horizontal Quality

Specifies the light quality in X direction.

Vertical Quality

Specifies the light quality in Y direction.

X

Specifies the level of light in X direction.

Y

Specifies the level of light in X direction.

Volume Light

Tab Volume Length

Plate

Light Source Distance

Specifies the distance between light source and object.

Foot Color

Specifies the color of the foot light.

Tail Color

Specifies the color of the tail light.

Effect List

813

Command Button List Command Buttons Under the Play Tab The Play tabs in the Command Button Customize window, the Keyboard Customize window and the Control Panel Appendixes

Icon

Customize window contain the following command buttons depending on the selected tool.

Button name

Function

Play

Starts play from the current position to the end.

Rewind

Rewinds the video tape or the track.

Fast Forward

Fast forwards the video tape or the track.

Rewind 1.5

Starts play in the reverse direction from the current position to the start at 1.5-times speed.

Forward 1.5

Starts play in the forward direction from the current position to the end at 1.5-times speed.

Stop

Stops play.

Step Backward

Moves 1 frame back.

Step Forward

Moves 1 frame forward.

Step Backward 10 Frames

Moves 10 frames back.

Step Forward 10 Frames

Moves 10 frames forward.

Play In to Out

Plays from the In point to the Out point. When clicked with the Alt key held down, starts loop play from the In point to the Out point.

Play to Out

Plays the clip from the current position to the Out point.

Play Reverse

Plays in the reverse direction (from the current position to the start point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/ 16 times normal speed. Note Sound becomes discontinuous above 4 times normal speed.

814

Command Button List

Icon

Button name

Function

Play Forward

Plays in the forward direction (from the current position to the end point). The playback speed increases with each click, up to 64 times normal speed. When this button is pressed with the Alt key held down, the playback speed becomes slower with each click, down to 1/ 16 times normal speed.

Still

Pauses at the current position.

Go to Start

Jumps from the playline position to the clip start point. In the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor, jumps to the start point of the sequence. In the Import CD Audio Tool, jumps to the start of the current track.

Go to End

Jumps from the playline position to the clip end point. In the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor, jumps to the end point of the sequence (or to the end point + 1 frame, when the playline is already at the end point). In the Import CD Audio Tool, jumps to the start of the next track.

Go to Previous Event

Moves to the previous event.

Go to Next Event

Moves to the next event.

Go to In

Jumps to the In point, if it exists. Otherwise, if phantom marks are shown, jumps to the start phantom mark.

Go to Out

Jumps to the Out point, if it exists. Otherwise, if phantom marks are shown, jumps to the end phantom mark.

Go to Previous Marker

Moves to the previous mark.

Go to Next Marker

Moves to the next mark.

Previous Keyframe

Moves to the previous keyframe.

Next Keyframe

Moves to the next keyframe.

Previous Transition

Moves to the previous transition.

Next Transition

Moves to the next transition.

Previous Clip

Moves to the previous clip.

Next Clip

Moves to the next clip.

Previous FX

Moves to the previous effect.

Next FX

Moves to the next effect.

Command Button List

Appendixes

Note Sound becomes discontinuous above 4 times normal speed.

815

Icon

Appendixes

Button name

Function

Loop Play

Performs loop play.

Preview

Conducts a preview.

Record

Starts recording.

All Stop

Stops all operations.

All Cancel

It stops all operations. If it is used to stop digitizing, the results of the digitizing are discarded.

Eject

Ejects the tape. Note Does not function for players connected via i.LINK.

816

Command Button List

Standby Off

Sets VTR standby to off.

Preroll Play (3 seconds)

Moves the focus to the Master Viewer and starts play from 3 seconds before the playline. When there is an In point in the clip, starts play from 3 seconds before the In point.

Preroll Play (5 seconds)

Moves the focus to the Master Viewer and starts play from 5 seconds before the playline. When there is an In point in the clip, starts play from 5 seconds before the In point.

Preroll Review (3 seconds)

Moves the focus to the Master Viewer and starts play from 3 seconds before the cut point closest to and in advance of the playline on the active tracks.

Preroll Review (5 seconds)

Moves the focus to the Master Viewer and starts play from 5 seconds before the cut point closest to and in advance of the playline on the active tracks.

Preroll Review from Transition (3 seconds)

Moves the focus to the Master Viewer and starts play from 3 seconds before the cut point transition closest to and in advance of the playline on the active tracks. (Or before the effect start point if a transition effect is applied to the cut point.)

Preroll Review from Transition (5 seconds)

Moves the focus to the Master Viewer and starts play from 5 seconds before the cut point transition closest to and in advance of the playline on the active tracks. (Or before the effect start point if a transition effect is applied to the cut point.)

Command Buttons Under the Edit Tab The Edit tabs in the Command Button Customize window, the Keyboard Customize window and the Control Panel Icon

Customize window contain the following command buttons depending on the selected tool. Function

Mark In

Marks an In point.

Mark Out

Marks an Out point.

Clear In Mark

Clears the In point.

Clear Out Mark

Clears the Out point.

Clear Both Marks

Clears both the In and Out points (or the existing point, when only one has been set).

Mark Clip

Sets an In point at the start point of the clip at the playline position, and an Out point at the end point of the clip. In the Timeline Editor, the area marked with In and Out points depends on the track selection and content. • Clips are selected: Marks the start and the end of the selected clips. • No clips are selected: Marks the start and the end of clips on active tracks, or the filler on active tracks if no clip is present. • All tracks are inactive: No marking occurs.

Mark In (Sub)

Marks an In point for a sub clip.

Mark Out (Sub)

Marks an Out point for a sub clip.

Clear In Mark (Sub)

Clears the In point for a sub clip.

Clear Out Mark (Sub)

Clears the Out point for a sub clip.

Clear Both Marks (Sub)

Clears both the In and Out points for a sub clip.

Set Duration

Sets the duration.

Set Index Picture

Sets the frame as an index picture.

Mark List

Opens the Marker List dialog.

Set Essence Mark

Sets an essence mark.

Delete Mark

Deletes a mark.

Splice-In

Places the clip on the sequence in Splice-In mode. When used in the Source Viewer (digitize mode), digitizing is performed and the digitized clip is placed in Splice-In mode.

Overwrite

Places the clip on the sequence in Overwrite mode. When used in the Source Viewer (digitize mode), digitizing is performed and the digitized clip is placed in Overwrite mode.

Appendixes

Button name

Command Button List

817

Icon

Appendixes

Button name

Function

Replace

Places the clip on the sequence in Replace mode.

Don’t Send to Timeline

Creates a clip, but does not place it on the timeline.

Overwrite Mode Record

Performs linear-like editing and adds the results to a sequence in Overwrite mode.

Splice-In Mode Record

Performs linear-like editing and adds the results to a sequence in Splice-In mode.

Normal Digitize

Executes digitizing in the Logging Tool, but does not send the results to the Timeline Editor. (The Logging Tool output mode changes to No Output).

Composer Mode

Selects the normal editing mode. Allows you to scrub the playline.

Segment (Extract/Splice-In) Mode

Selects Extract/Splice-In mode as the editing mode for moving and deleting clips on the timeline.

Segment (Lift/Overwrite) Mode

Selects Lift/Overwrite mode as the editing mode for moving and deleting clips on the timeline.

Trim Mode

Selects the editing mode in which you can trim clips. Starts the Trim Viewer.

Rubber Band Mode

Puts the Timeline Editor into rubber band mode so that you can adjust track fader levels.

Track Level Copy

Binds rubber bands to tracks, so that rubber band fader levels are also copied when clips are copied.

Edit Mode

• When used in Timeline Editor: Switches the Timeline Editor edit mode. • When used in the Record to VTR tool: Switches the recording mode.

Nesting

Pastes a sequence into another sequence in nesting mode.

Versioning

Pastes a sequence into another sequence in versioning mode.

Focus

Expands the timeline to a pre-defined size.

Save

Saves the Timeline Editor sequence (shortcut key: Ctrl + S).

Extract

Deletes any selected section on the timeline, and shifts the following clips on the timeline to the left to fill the resulting gap.

Lift

Deletes any selected section on the timeline, and fills the resulting gap with filler.

Copy to Clipboard

Temporarily copies timeline clips and effects so that you can paste them to other locations (the copy targets are specified in the same way as for lift and extract). Note It is not possible to copy effects only with this operation. To copy effects only, use the [Copy Effect] command in the main menu of the Timeline Editor.

818

Command Button List

Icon

Function

Add Edit

Adds a cut point at the clip on the active tracks at the playline position. When cut points are added during play (forward, reverse, fast, slow, shuttle, jog, etc.), the cut points are indicated by the slice numbers on the timeline only. Play does not stop when adding cut points. The display of cut points in clips on the active tracks is not refreshed until play is stopped. Also, any effects added to clips that are cut during play are placed on the rightmost section only. Cuts added during play are grouped into a single undo/redo action. The default setting is to continue playback when adding cut points. You can change this setting so that playback stops when adding cut points in order to refresh tracks immediately. This is especially useful when using the K keyboard button when adding cut points. To change the default setting, modify the following registry. HKEY_CURRENT_USER¥Software¥Sony¥1 Entry name: 39 (DWORD Value) Value = 0 (add edit will not stop playing during playback). Default. Value = 1 (add edit will stop playing during playback)

Trim 1 Frame Back

Moves the trim point 1 frame back.

Trim 1 Frame Forward

Moves the trim point 1 frame forward.

Trim 10 Frames Back

Moves the trim point 10 frames back.

Trim 10 Frames Forward

Moves the trim point 10 frames forward.

Extend

Executes a dual trim (AB-side trim) up to a previously set Mark In point or Mark Out point.

Appendixes

Button name

See “Dual Trim (AB-Side Trim)” (page 216) for more information about the dual trim. Freeze Frame

In the clip under the playline, converts the range from the playline to the final frame into a still image (a speed clip with a speed of 0%). The image shows the frame at the playline position. Shift-click to open the Freeze Frame dialog to change the destination bin for saving the freeze frame clip. Right-click the button to display the context menu to select the freeze frame creation method.

Copy to SV

Copies to the Source Viewer.

Cut to SV

Cuts to the Source Viewer.

Paste from SV

Pastes from the Source Viewer.

Render To Bin

Performs a render to bin.

Render All

In the range between the start point and end point of a sequence, renders the sections that cannot be played in real time.

Render In-Out

In the range between the In point and Out point of a sequence, renders the sections that cannot be played in real time.

Command Button List

819

Icon

Appendixes

Button name

Function

Render Whole (Both)

Starts rendering both the video and audio clips of an entire sequence. (Same function as the [Render]>[Render Whole]>[Both] command in the Timeline Editor main menu.)

Render Whole (Video)

Starts rendering the video clips of an entire sequence. (Same function as the [Render]>[Render Whole]>[Video] command in the Timeline Editor main menu.)

Render Whole (Audio)

Starts rendering the audio clips of an entire sequence. (Same function as the [Render]>[Render Whole]>[Audio] command in the Timeline Editor main menu.)

Add Dissolve

Opens the Transitions Options dialog. A dissolve (cross-fade for audio) is applied according to the settings made in this dialog to the transition closest to the playline on the active tracks. If you enter a numeric value in the scratchpad from the numeric keypad on the keyboard before clicking this button, the Transition Options dialog opens with that value set as the duration. You can apply dissolves without opening the Transitions Options dialog by clearing the [Enable Transition Option dialog] check box in the Edit tab of the Timeline Editor Properties dialog. You can also use the same tab to set the default alignment of transition effects. Note You can adjust the parameters of an existing dissolve effect by right clicking the effect and selecting [Options] in the context menu to open the Transition Options dialog. See “Transition Options Dialog” (page 302) for more information. See “Edit tab” (page 610) for more information.

Head Dissolve

Inserts a dissolve transition on all active tracks. If the playline is over a clip, the transition is inserted between the clip head and the playline. If the playline is over a gap on the timeline, the transition is inserted between the tail of the clip to the left of the playline and the playline position.

Tail Dissolve

Inserts a dissolve transition on all active tracks. If the playline is over a clip, the transition is inserted between the playline and the clip tail. If the playline is over a gap on the timeline, the transition is inserted between the playline position and the head of the clip to the right of the playline.

FX1 to FX9

Paste the effects assigned to FX1 to FX9.

Delete Effect

Deletes the effect.

Render Effect

Renders the effect at the trim point so that you can preview it.

Open FX

Starts the Effect Editor.

Transition Options

Opens the Transition Options dialog.

Stop

Stops recording.

Set Keyframe

Creates a keyframe.

Delete Keyframe

Deletes a keyframe.

...

820

Command Button List

Icon

Function

Cut Keyframe

Cuts a keyframe and pastes it to the clipboard.

Copy Keyframe

Copies the parameter settings of the selected keyframe to the clipboard.

Paste Keyframe

Pastes a copied keyframe.

Add Keyframe to All

Generates or updates keyframes for all parameters.

Revert Direction

Inverts the keyframe direction.

CG

Starts the CG Editor. Click the CG button to display a list of effects, and select an effect type. The effect is placed on the timeline and CG Editor starts. Alternatively, shift-click the CG button and select an effect type. The Add Title dialog appears where you can specify a title and track. The effect is then placed on the timeline and the CG Editor starts.

Import Image

Imports image file(s) directly into individual CG clips on the timeline. The images are placed consecutively. Shift-click Import Image to open the Add Title dialog to specify the edit mode and clip duration.

Add Key Frame

Adds audio keyframes to the timeline when audio automation is enabled.

Still Picture

Digitizes a still picture and creates a clip. Still clips are TGAformat clips with default name NewPicture_New Sequence_nnn, where nnn increments.

Extract from Clip Top to Current Playline

Deletes the section between the start point of the clip on which the playline is positioned and the current playline position on the active tracks, and shifts the following clips on the timeline to fill the resulting gap. The duration of the tracks becomes shorter.

Appendixes

Button name

Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be extracted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for extraction. Extract from Current Playline to Clip End

Deletes the section between the current playline position on the active tracks and the end point of the clip on which the playline is positioned, and shifts the following clips on the timeline to fill the resulting gap. The duration of the tracks becomes shorter. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be extracted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for extraction.

Lift from Clip Top to Current Playline

Deletes the section between the start point of the clip on which the playline is positioned and the current playline position on the active tracks, and fills the resulting gap with filler (black on the video track and silence on audio tracks). The duration of the tracks does not change. Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be lifted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for lifting.

Command Button List

821

Icon

Function

Lift from Current Playline to Clip End

Deletes the section between the current playline position on the active tracks and the end point of the clip on which the playline is positioned, and fills the resulting gap with filler (black on the video track and silence on audio tracks). The duration of the tracks does not change.

Appendixes

Note If the start and end points of the active clips to be lifted from multiple tracks do not match, the uppermost track will be used as the basis for lifting.

...

822

Button name

Command Button List

Collapse

Collapses the active, unlocked tracks in the timeline into a single collapse clip. Video and audio tracks are collapsed separately.

Camera 1 to Camera 9

Selects the camera angle in the Multiple Camera Editor.

2 View

Selects 2 camera angle display in Multiple Camera Editor.

4 View

Selects 4 camera angle display in Multiple Camera Editor.

9 View

Selects 9 camera angle display in Multiple Camera Editor.

Left Output

Switches the multiple camera display between the left and right monitor panes.

Record

Starts recording.

Cut at PL

Cuts the camera angle duration with focus at the playline into two portions.

Grouping

When inactive, temporarily releases the grouping of clips on the timeline, allowing the individual clips to be edited independently. When active, the grouping of clips is restored.

Scene In

Marks the beginning of a scene.

Scene Out

Marks the end of a scene.

Create Scene Section Sub Clip

Creates a sub clip in Project Explorer containing the selected scene(s) in the Source Viewer. The clip name is appended with the “_Sub” string.

Add Scene Section to Timeline

Adds the selected scene(s) in the Source Viewer to the timeline in Splice-in mode. You can also add selected scene(s) from the Source Viewer Marker List in Overwrite mode by dragging them to the timeline.

Trim Trans on Both Sides

Trims both sides of a transition effect.

Move Space

Moves the selected clip, all clips with the same head timecode, and all clips to the right of the selected clip head timecode as a single group in the timeline.

Drag and Copy

Allows you to drag and drop selected clips on the timeline, copying the clips instead of moving them.

Auto White Balance

Automatically adjusts the white balance of the selected clips. The image at the playline position is used as the reference for adjusting the white balance of the selected clips.

Icon

Function

Keep Track Status Mode

When enabled, keeps the active/inactive state of tracks when clips are moved on the timeline.

Animation

Create Animation objects.

Art Word

Create Art Word objects.

Circle

Create Circle objects.

Clock

Create Clock objects.

Curve

Create Curve objects.

Image

Create Image objects.

Material

Create Material objects.

Polygon

Create Polygon objects.

Scroll Text

Create Scroll Text objects.

Text

Create Text objects.

Subtitle

Create Subtitle objects.

Snap

Enables snap mode on the timeline. In snap mode, the playline and clips snap to the slice cut points, In/Out points, essence marks, and start/end points. Operations using the Alt, Ctrl, and Alt + Ctrl keys are valid even when snap mode is enabled.

Appendixes

Button name

Command Button List

823

Command Buttons Under the Special Tab The Special tabs in the Command Button Customize window, the Keyboard Customize window and the Control Icon

Panel Customize window contain the following command buttons depending on the selected tool.

Appendixes

Button name

Function

Jog

Selects jog mode.

Shuttle

Selects shuttle mode.

DMC

Selects DMC mode.

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Switches between jog and shuttle modes.

Analog Scrub Mode

Selects the analog scrub mode.

Alpha

Selects the alpha channel.

CG1 to CG8

Selects tracks from CG1 to CG8.

V1 to V8

Select tracks from V1 to V8.

A1 to A12

Select tracks from A1 to A12.

K1 to K8

Select tracks from K1 to K8.

Logging

Starts logging.

Digitize

Starts digitizing.

Make Sub Clip

Creates a sub clip.

Video Input Tool

Starts the Tecnical Monitor.

Audio Input Tool

Starts the Audio Input Tool.

CTL Reset

When the Logging Tool or Source Viewer (digitize mode) is active, performs a CTL reset on the player connected to the selected port (switches to CTL on the player if a type of time data other than CTL is selected). When the Source Viewer (normal mode) or Master Viewer is active, resets the CTL time display of the playline.

824

Command Button List

Icon

Button name

Function

TC/CTL

When the Logging Tool or Source Viewer (digitize mode) is active, switches timecode used for VTR control between CTL and LTC. When the Source Viewer (normal mode) or Master Viewer is active, switches the playline time display between TC and CTL. Creates a new clip in the selected bin in Project Explorer.

Back To Creator

Sends the selected clip back to the tool that created it for reediting.

Send to Source Viewer

Loads a clip into the Source Viewer.

Zoom In

When used in Project Explorer, selects the next largest clip icon size in Project Explorer Picture View mode (does not switch when Extra Largest is selected). (shortcut key: Ctrl + +).

Appendixes

Create New Clip

When used in Timeline Editor, Master Viewer, Source Viewer, Effect Editor, or Speed Control dialog, zooms in on the timeline (Shortcut key: Ctrl + +). Zoom Out

When used in Project Explorer, selects the next smallest clip icon size in Project Explorer Picture View mode (does not switch when Small is selected). (Shortcut key: Ctrl + -). When used in Timeline Editor, Master Viewer, Source Viewer, Effect Editor, or Speed Control dialog, zooms out from the timeline (shortcut key: Ctrl + -).

Show Entire

Displays the whole timeline when used in Timeline Editor, Effect Editor, Speed Control dialog (shortcut key: Ctrl + 0).

Switch View Mode

Switches the view mode in Project Explorer (shortcut key: Ctrl + >).

Details View

Displays the details window.

Command Button Palette

Displays the command button palette.

Monitor Select

Selects the monitor to display on the video monitor of the Trim Viewer.

Speed Control

Creates a speed clip.

Change speed from clip head to PL

Changes the speed of a clip by moving the clip head to the current playline position. If the playline is over a clip, the clip duration is shortened. If the playline is over a gap on the timeline, the clip to the right of the playline is lengthened. The clip to change must be on the topmost active track. It is recommended that other tracks be temporarily disabled.

Change speed from clip tail to PL

Changes the speed of a clip by moving the clip tail to the current playline position. If the playline is over a clip, the clip duration is shortened. If the playline is over a gap on the timeline, the clip to the left of the playline is lengthened. The clip to change must be on the topmost active track. It is recommended that other tracks be temporarily disabled.

A Side Trim

Sets the trim mode to A-side Single Trim.

B Side Trim

Sets the trim mode to B-side Single Trim.

Command Button List

825

Icon

Appendixes

Button name

Function

AB Side Trim

Sets the trim mode to Dual (AB-side) Trim.

Toggle AB/A/B-side Trim

Switches the trim mode.

Transition Corner Display

Puts the Trim Viewer into 6-monitor display mode.

Match Frame

When the Source Viewer is active and has a speed clip loaded, loads the original clip of the speed clip into the Source Viewer. The Source Viewer playline moves to the specified frame. An In point and an Out point are added if not set previously in the Source Viewer. When the Master Viewer or Timeline Editor is active, loads the clip corresponding to a specified timeline frame into the Source Viewer. The Source Viewer playline moves to the specified frame. An In point and an Out point are added if not set previously in the Source Viewer.

826

Command Button List

Match TC

Searches the clip currently loaded in the Source Viewer for a frame with the same timecode as the timecode of a specified frame on the timeline, moves the playline to that frame, sets an In point, and cues up the frame in the Source Viewer in Digitize mode. If the duration of the clip in the Source Viewer is longer than the playline to clip tail duration in the timeline, it also adds an Out point.

Solo Reset

Turns the Solo function off for all tracks.

Scrub (w/Fx) Mode

Selects the scrub mode with effects.

Toggle F1/F2

Switches between field 1 display, field 2 display, and off.

Toggle Field/Frame

Switches between field display, frame 1, and frame 2 display.

Audio Waveform/Video picture switch

Switches between audio waveform display and video image display on the monitor.

Previous Reverse Match Frame

Searches the timeline back from the playline position for any frame of a clip loaded into the Source Viewer.

Next Reverse Match Frame

Searches the timeline forward from the playline position for any frame of a clip loaded into the Source Viewer.

List Reverse Match

Searches the sequence for any frame of a clip loaded into the Source Viewer.

Flash Frame Detection

Searches the sequence for clips and filler based on a user defined duration.

FG Monitor

Displays the foreground picture in the Effect Viewer.

BG Monitor

Displays the background picture in the Effect Viewer.

FG & BG Monitor

Displays a composite picture consisting of the foreground and background pictures in the Effect Viewer.

Key Monitor

Displays the foreground picture key in the Effect Viewer.

Toggle Video/Key Monitor

Switches between the foreground picture and the foreground picture key.

Icon

Function

All Tracks Monitor

Sets Effect Viewer display to the output of all tracks (same output as the Master Viewer).

Safe Action Area

Displays a box showing the safe action area on the Effect Viewer, Source Manager or Master Viewer screen.

Grid

Displays a grid on the Effect Viewer screen.

Move Canvas

Allows you to scroll the frame by dragging on the Effect Viewer screen.

Go to Previous Tab

Moves to the previous tab.

Go to Next Tab

Moves to the next tab.

Go to Previous Plate

Moves to the previous plate.

Go to Next Plate

Moves to the next plate.

Go to Previous Sub Plate

Moves to the previous sub plate.

Go to Next Sub Plate

Moves to the next sub plate.

Go to Previous Parameter

Moves to the previous parameter.

Go to Next Parameter

Moves to the next parameter.

Go to nth parameter

Moves to the nth parameter.

Color Pick

Selects a color.

Zebra

When turned on, displays a zebra pattern over parts of the picture where the luminance level exceeds 100% (this function is disabled when the viewer display is in key monitor mode).

Split View

Sets the Viewer to Split view.

Source

Selects Source Axis Mode (DME 3D Transform).

Target

Selects Target Axis Mode (DME 3D Transform).

Audio Automation Enable

Enables and disables the audio rubber band function for all tracks on the timeline.

Toggle Timeline View

Toggles the Timeline Editor between display of the timeline and display of the storyboard.

Scene Detect

Analyzes the content of the clip loaded in the Source Viewer, and adds essence marks to points where scene changes are detected.

Command Button List

Appendixes

Button name

827

Icon

Appendixes

Button name

Function

Restore to Original Picture

Cancels zoom adjustments in the Effect Viewer and returns the frame to original size.

TC Switch

Switches between Source Viewer timecode display modes in the following order: FTC, LTC, VITC, and CTL.

Render to Server

Performs a render of the sequences or clip to specified server storage.

Proxy Only Detection

Searches the timeline for sections that contain only proxy (low resolution) media.

Media Offline Detection

Searches the timeline for media offline clips.

Duplicate Detection

Searches the timeline for clips and frames which are used twice or more.

Viewer Operation Mode

Adjusts the parameter with focus (Position, Size, Rotate, Crop, Rect, or Mask) when viewing video in the Effect Viewer.

Zoom Adjustment

Allows you to zoom in and out by dragging on the Effect Viewer screen. Right-clicking the zoom button displays a context menu with preset zoom settings.

Go to Previous Uncorrected Event

Jumps to the first clip before the playline which does not have an advanced color correction effect mark.

Go to Next Uncorrected Event

Jumps to the first clip after the playline which does not have an advanced color correction effect mark.

Solo CCR

Deletes the advanced color correction effect at the playline.

Safe Color Settings

Opens the Safe Color Settings dialog. Note This button is disabled in the current version of XPRI NS.

828

Command Button List

Advanced Color Corrector

Displays the Advanced Color Corrector.

Waveform Magnify

Zooms in the waveform display.

Waveform Minify

Zooms out the waveform display.

Snap

Enables snap mode on the timeline. In snap mode, the playline and clips snap to the slice cut points, In/Out points, essence marks, and start/end points.

Gang

Synchronizes the display in the Source Viewer and Master Viewer monitors to the current playline positions in both viewers. The display synchronization is canceled if Match Frame or Match TC is used.

Motion

Puts the CG monitor into keyframe setting mode.

Format Brush

Copies a format.

Color Palette

Opens the Color Selection dialog.

Select

Puts the CG monitor into object selection mode.

Icon

Button name

Function

Merge

When Refresh is On: Changes made to the clip or sequence in Sonaps or external XPRI are automatically reflected in Source Viewer. The Mark In and Mark Out points in Source Viewer are retained, but other marks (essence marks, scene marks, etc.) are merged.

Refresh

Appendixes

When Refresh is Off and Merge is On: Changes made to the clip or sequence in Sonaps or external XPRI are not automatically reflected in Source Viewer. Changes are reflected in Source Viewer using the Ctrl + R keyboard shortcut. The changes are merged after the clip/sequence is unloaded from Source Viewer. When Refresh is Off and Merge is On: Changes made to the clip or sequence in Sonaps or external XPRI are not automatically reflected in Source Viewer. Changes are reflected in Source Viewer using the Ctrl + R keyboard shortcut. The Source Viewer changes are saved when the clip/sequence is unloaded.

Command Button List

829

Command Buttons Under the General Tab The General tabs in the Command Button Customize window, the Keyboard Customize window and the Control Panel Customize window contain the following command buttons depending on the selected tool.

When Global Shortcuts is selected in the Tool list box, you can assign tool window focus functions to hot keys on the keyboard and control panels. For more information about hot keys, see Focus hot key assignment buttons (page 832).

Appendixes

830

Icon

Command Button List

Button name

Function

Help

Starts the Online Help.

Restore All Default

Restores default values.

Properties

Displays the Properties dialog for the window with the focus.

Find Clip

Makes a search for clips.

Escape

Same function as the Esc key.

Tab

Same function as the Tab key.

Back Tab

Same function as the Shift + Tab key.

Shift

Same function as the Shift key.

Ctrl

Same function as the Ctrl key.

Alt

Same function as the Alt key.

Enter

Same function as the Enter key.

Up Arrow a)

Same function as the up arrow key.

Down Arrow a)

Same function as the down arrow key.

Left Arrow a)

Same function as the left arrow key.

Right Arrow a)

Same function as the right arrow key.

Space

Same function as the space key.

Backspace

Same function as the Backspace key.

Delete

Same function as the Delete key.

Home

Same function as the Home key.

End

Same function as the End key.

Icon

Function

Page Up

Same function as the Page Up key.

Page Down

Same function as the Page Down key.

Caps Lock

Same function as the Caps Lock key.

Num Lock

Same function as the Num Lock key.

Scroll Lock

Same function as the Scroll Lock key.

+

Same function as the + key on the NumPad.

-

Same function as the - key on the NumPad.

F/TC

Switches between frame and timecode. Same function as the asterisk (*) key on the NumPad.

00

Enters 00 on the NumPad.

0 to 9

Same function as the 0 to 9 keys on the NumPad.

Main Menu

Opens the main menu.

Window Close

Closes the window with the focus.

Taskbar Menu

Opens the taskbar menu.

Reset Effect

Resets effect parameters and key frames to their defaults.

Undo

Undoes the last operation. (You can undo up to 64 operations, in order from the most recent.)

Redo

Redoes an undone operation. (You can redo up to 64 operations, in order from the most recent.)

Cut

Cut

Copy

Copy

Paste

Paste

Appendixes

Button name

...

a) Cannot be assigned to the keyboard.

Command Button List

831

Focus hot key assignment buttons The following command buttons can be used to select functions to assign to the keyboard and control panels when Global Shortcuts is selected in the Tool list box of the Keyboard Customize window or the Control Panel Customize window. Icon Appendixes

832

Command Button List

Focus hot key assignments allow you to start tools from the keyboard and control panels, and to activate (give the focus to) tools that are already running.

Button name

Function

Project Explorer

Activates Project Explorer. If Project Explorer is not running, starts it.

Material List

Activates the Material List. If the Material List is not running, starts it.

Play List

Activates the Play List. If the Play List is not running, starts it.

Logging Tool

Activates the Logging Tool. If the Logging Tool is not running, starts it.

i.LINK

• If Logging Tool and Timeline Editor are not running, this starts Logging Tool and selects i.LINK inputs. • If Timeline Editor is running but Logging Tool is not, this starts Source Viewer (digitize mode) and selects i.LINK inputs. • If Source Viewer is running, this activates Source Viewer and enables digitize mode, and selects i.LINK inputs. • If Logging Tool is running, this activates Logging Tool and selects i.LINK inputs. • If any other tool that uses input devices is running, an error occurs.

Batch Digitize Tool

Activates the Batch Digitize tool. If the Batch Digitize tool is not running, and Project Explorer is active, the Batch Digitize tool starts as follows, depending on which items are selected in Project Explorer. When clips are selected: The Batch Digitize tool starts to digitize the selected clips. When a bin is selected: The Batch Digitize tool starts to digitize all of the clips in the selected bin. If nothing is selected, or anything else is selected, a warning tone sounds and the Batch Digitize tool does not start.

Timeline Editor

Activates the Timeline Editor. If the Timeline Editor is not running, and Project Explorer is active with a sequence selected, starts the Timeline Editor and opens the selected sequence. If several clips and sequences are selected, opens the last of the selected sequences.

Source Viewer

Activates the Source Viewer. If the Source Viewer is not running, starts it.

Master Viewer

Activates the Master Viewer. If the Master Viewer is not running, starts it.

Record to VTR

Activates the Record to VTR tool. If the Timeline Editor is active, the selected sequence on the timeline is loaded to the Record to VTR tool.

Generate SG Clip Tool

Activates the Generate SG Clip tool. If the Generate SG Clip tool is not running, starts it.

Import File Tool

Activates the Import File tool. If the Import File tool is not running, starts it.

Import CD Audio Tool

Activates the Import CD Audio Tool. If the Import CD Audio Tool is not running, starts it.

Icon

Function

TitleMotion

Starts TitleMotion.

Export File Tool

Activates the Export dialog. If the Export dialog is not open, and a clip is selected in an active Project Explorer, opens the Export dialog.

Export MXF Tool

Activates Export MXF Tool. If Export MXF Tool is not running, starts it.

MXF Batch Tool

Activates Export MXF dialog. If Export MXF dialog is not open, starts it.

Audio Output Tool

Activates the Audio Output Tool. If the Audio Output Tool is not running, starts it.

Audio Mixer

Activates the Audio Mixer. If the Audio Mixer is not running, and the Timeline Editor is active, starts the Audio Mixer. If the Timeline Editor is not active, a warning tone sounds and the Audio Mixer does not start.

Audio Group Bus Routing Tool

Activates the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool. If the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool is not running, and the Timeline Editor is active, starts the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool. If the Timeline Editor is not active, a warning tone sounds and the Audio Group Bus Routing Tool does not start.

Audio Group Bus Fader Tool

Activates the Audio Group Bus Fader. If the Audio Group Bus Fader is not running, and the Timeline Editor is active, starts the Audio Group Bus Fader. If the Timeline Editor is not active, a warning tone sounds and the Audio Group Bus Fader does not start.

Voice Over Tool

Activates the Audio Voice Over Tool. If the Audio Voice Over Tool is not running, and the Timeline Editor is active, starts the Audio Voice Over Tool. If the Timeline Editor is not active, a warning tone sounds and the Audio Voice Over Tool does not start.

Prompter

Activates the Prompter. If the Prompter is not open, opens it.

FX Explorer

Activates FX Explorer. If several FX Explorer windows are open, activates the most recently active window first, and then cyclically activates other windows in the order in which they were registered on the taskbar. If no FX Explorer window is open, and the Timeline Editor is active, starts FX Explorer. If the Timeline Editor is not active, a warning tone sounds and FX Explorer does not start.

FX Editor

Activates the Effect Editor. If the Effect Editor is not running, starts it.

Timecode Window

Activates the Timecode window. If the Timecode window is not open, opens it.

Configuration

Activates the Configuration dialog. If the Configuration dialog is not open, opens it.

Command Button Customize

Opens the Command Button Customize window.

Keyboard Customize

Opens the Keyboard Customize window.

Control Panel Customize

Opens the Control Panel Customize window.

Command Button List

Appendixes

Button name

833

Icon

Function

User Layout Context Menu

Opens the user layout context menu.

X1

• If Logging Tool and Timeline Editor are not running, this starts Logging Tool and selects SDI inputs for the Sony MSQ-S001. • If Timeline Editor is running but Logging Tool is not, this starts Source Viewer (digitize mode) and selects SDI inputs for the Sony MSQ-S001. • If Source Viewer is running, this activates Source Viewer and enables digitize mode, and selects SDI inputs for the Sony MSQ-S001. • If Logging Tool is running, this activates Logging Tool and selects SDI inputs for the Sony MSQ-S001. • If any other tool that uses input devices is running, an error occurs.

Reset CG object

Resets CG object parameters and keyframes to the same state as when they were first set.

ACCR Mode

Starts Advanced Color Corrector mode in Timeline Editor.

Exit ACCR Mode

Exits Advanced Color Corrector mode in Timeline Editor.

XDCAM Export Tool

Activates XDCAM Export Tool. If XDCAM Export Tool is not running, starts it.

XDCAM Explorer

Activates XDCAM Explorer. If XDCAM Explorer is not running, starts it.

XDCAM Import Timeline Clips

Starts the Import Timeline Clip Tool.

Appendixes

Button name

834

Command Button List

Functions Available on the Control Panels DMW-C1 Media Bar Control Panel

1

2

3

Appendixes

You can use the Media Bar Control Panel to execute Technical Monitor, Audio Equalizer, Audio Mixer, Full Effect Editor, and Simple Effect Editor functions.

4

5

6

7

8

A B

Button/knob

Audio Equalizer

Button A

Turns EQ button on and off.

Audio Mixer

Button B Knob 1 (gray)

Knob 6 (blue) Knob 7 (green)

GAIN knob in the HIGH adjustment section

Knob 3 (orange) Knob 4 (red) Knob 5 (purple)

The first 8 parameters in the currently selected plate (indicated by knob marks) The last 8 parameters in the currently selected plate (indicated by knob marks)

FREQ knob in the LOW adjustment section The knobs adjust the audio levels of GAIN knob in the LOW adjustment section the tracks with the FREQ knob in the MID adjustment section corresponding numbers. GAIN knob in the MID adjustment section Adjustments apply to the clips at the Q knob in the MID adjustment section playline position. FREQ knob in the HIGH adjustment section

Knob 2 (yellow)

Full Effect Editor/Simple Effect Editor

Adjusts assigned parameters (indicated by knob marks). Rotate clockwise to reduce the parameter setting. Rotate counter-clockwise to increase the parameter setting.

Knob 8 (light green)

Functions Available on the Control Panels

835

DMW-C2 Jog & Shuttle Control Panel

Appendixes

You can use the Jog & Shuttle Control Panel to execute the functions of the Logging Tool, Source Viewer, Master Viewer, Trim Viewer, Full Effect Editor, Simple Effect Editor, Record to VTR tool, and so on. The buttons have different functions depending on whether they are pressed alone or pressed together with the Left button or the Shift key.

F3

F2

F1

Note

The following tables show the default function assignments. These assignments can be changed in the Control Panel Customize window.

D C

F5

F4

F6

JOG SHUTTLE

E

DMC

F

B

A

G

Right button Left button

Global Shortcuts

Button Function

Button Function

Pressed with Left button Clear Both Marks

Left

Shift key

B

Go to Mark Out

Right

Ctrl key

C

Mark In

Clear Mark In

D

Mark Out

Clear Mark Out

E

Logging

Digitize

F

Technical Monitor

Audio Input Tool

G

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

DMC

Left

Shift key

Right

Digitize

Logging Tool Button Function Pressed alone

836

Pressed alone

Pressed with Left button

F2

Source track button V1

F3

Source track button A1

Source track button A5

F4

Source track button A2

Source track button A6

F5

Source track button A3

Source track button A7

F6

Source track button A4

Source track button A8

>

Play

x

Stop

>

Fast Forward

A

Go to Mark In

Standby off

Eject

Functions Available on the Control Panels

Digitize

Source Viewer (Normal mode) Button Function Pressed alone

Pressed with Left button

F1

Go to Start

Source track button V2

F2

Go to Previous Event

Source track button V1

F3

Go to Mark In

Source track button A1

F4

Go to Mark Out

Source track button A2

Button Function

Button Function Pressed with Left button

Pressed alone

Pressed with Left button

F5

Go to Next Event

Source track button A3

F6

Go to End

Source track button A4

F6

Go to End

Track button A4

<

Play Reverse

<

Play Reverse

>

Play Forward

Play In to Out

>

Play Forward

Play In to Out

x

Stop

Focus

x

Step Forward

Step Forward 10 Frames

>>

Step Forward

Step Forward 10 Frames

A

Trim Mode

Add Dissolve

A

Trim Mode

Add Dissolve

B

Monitor Select

Clear Both Marks

B

Monitor Select

Clear Both Marks

C

Mark In

Clear Mark In

C

Mark In

Clear Mark In

D

Mark Out

Clear Mark Out

D

Mark Out

Clear Mark Out

E

Overwrite

Lift

E

Overwrite

Lift

F

Splice-In

Extract

F

Splice-In

Extract

G

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

G

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Left

Shift key

Left

Shift key

Right

Stop

Right

Stop

Appendixes

Pressed alone

Stop

Stop

Multiple Camera Editor Source Viewer (Digitize Mode) Button Function Button Pressed alone >

Play

x

Stop

> A

Go to Mark In

B

Pressed with Left button

Pressed alone F1

Camera 1

F2

Camera 2

Rewind

F3

Camera 3

Fast Forward

F4

Camera 4

Eject

F6

Left Output

Go to Mark Out

Clear Both Marks

<

Play

C

Mark In

Clear Mark In

>

Record

D

Mark Out

Clear Mark Out

x

Stop

E

Overwrite Mode Record Splice-In Mode Record

>

Fast Forward

Standby off

Left Right

All Stop

All Cancel

Master Viewer/Timeline Editor Button Function

A

Cut at Playline

B

2 View

C

Mark In

D

Mark Out

E

Overwrite

F

Splice-In

G

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Pressed alone

Pressed with Left button

F1

Go to Start

Track button V2

Left

Shift key

F2

Go to Previous Event

Track button V1

Right

Stop

F3

Go to Mark In

Track button A1

F4

Go to Mark Out

Track button A2

F5

Go to Next Event

Track button A3

Pressed with Left button

4 View

Functions Available on the Control Panels

837

Trim Viewer Button Function Pressed alone F1

Pressed with Left button Track button V2

Appendixes

F2

Go to Previous Transition

Track button V1

F3

Go to Mark In

Track button A1

F4

Go to Mark Out

Track button A2

F5

Go to Next Transition

Track button A3

F6

Track button A4

Pressed with Left button

C

Mark In

Clear Mark In

D

Mark Out

Clear Mark Out

E

Create New Clip

Digitize

Right

Digitize

Digitize

Import CD Audio Tool Button Function >

Play

x

Stop

>

Fast Forward

Left

Shift key

Right

Ctrl key

<

Play Reverse

>

Still

Loop Play

x

Play Forward

Focus

>

Trim 1 Frame Forward

Trim 10 Frames Forward

A

Composer Mode

Add Dissolve

B

Monitor Select

C

A Side Trim

D

AB Side Trim

E

B Side Trim

>

Play

F

Transition Corner Display

x

Stop

>

Fast Forward

Left

Shift key

Right

Stop

Pressed alone

Stop

Button Function >

Play

x

Stop

Left

Shift key

Right

Ctrl key

Eject

E

Digitize

G

Toggle Jog/Shuttle

Left

Shift key

Right

Digitize

Pressed alone

Pressed with Left button

>

Play

x

Stop



Play Forward

A

Set keyframe

x

Stop

B

Copy keyframe

>

>>

Pressed with Left button

Full Effect Editor/Simple Effect Editor

XDCAM Explorer Button Pressed alone

Batch Digitize tool Button Function

Import File tool

838

Button Pressed alone

Clear Both Marks

Functions Available on the Control Panels

Pressed with Left button

Cut keyframe

Button Function

Button Function Pressed alone Right

Pressed alone

Pressed with Left button

F6

Track button A4

Track button A8

>

Play

x

Stop



Play

Right

Stop

x

Stop

>

Step Forward

A

Delete Keyframe

B

Set Keyframe

C

Mark In

D

Mark Out

Left

Shift key

Right

Stop

Appendixes

>> Button Function

Stop

Render to Bin dialog Button Function Pressed alone

Pressed with Left button

F2

Track button V1

F3

Track button A1

Track button A5

F4

Track button A2

Track button A6

F5

Track button A3

Track button A7

F6

Track button A4

Track button A8

Left

Shift key

Right

Ctrl key

Record to VTR tool Button Function Pressed alone

Pressed with Left button

F2

Track button V1

F3

Track button A1

Track button A5

F4

Track button A2

Track button A6

F5

Track button A3

Track button A7

Functions Available on the Control Panels

839

DMW-C3 Audio Control Panel You can use the Audio Control Panel to execute audio tool functions.

FUNCTION OVER

Function buttons 1 to 8

OVER indicator MONITOR LEVEL

DATA

MUTE

Muting buttons 1 to 8 Appendixes

1

3

2

5

4

6

7

DATA indicator

8

MASTER

MONITOR LEVEL knob 10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

0

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

10

MINI

MAX

MONITOR SOLO RESET

MONO

Channel faders 1 to 8

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

15

-10

-10

-10

-10

-10

-10

-10

-10

20

-30

-30

-30

-30

-30

-30

-30

-30

30

1-4 5-8

L 1/5

MONO button SOLO RESET button

BANK

R

BANK button

2/6 -40

-40

-40

-40

-40

-40

-40

-40

40

-45

-45

-45

-45

-45

-45

-45

-45

45

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

3/7

Monitor channel selection buttons

4/5

MASTER fader

Parts

When Master Viewer is active

When Source Viewer is active

Function buttons 1 to 8 Turns the Audio Mixer EQ (with FUNCTION button button on and off. on)

When Logging Tool is active

Audio Output Tool Monitor tab

Turns the Audio Input Tool EQ button on and off.

Function buttons 1 to 8 Select the track page (with FUNCTION button assigned to channel faders off) 1 to 8 (tracks 1 to 8 when function button 1 is on, tracks 9 to 16 when function button 2 is on,... tracks 41 to 48 when function button 6 is on). Muting buttons 1 to 8 (with MUTING button on)

Turns the Audio Mixer MUTING button on and off.

Turns the Clip Audio Control Tool MUTING button on and off.

Muting buttons 1 to 8 (with MUTING button off)

Turns the Audio Mixer SOLO button on and off.

Turns the Clip Audio Control Tool SOLO button on and off.

Turns the Logging Tool source track buttons on and off.

Channel faders 1 to 8

Audio Mixer track faders (tracks 1 to 8, 9 to 16, 17 to 24, 25 to 32, 33 to 40, 41 to 48)

Audio faders 1 to 8 for preview and digitizing (Splice-in, Overwrite), with Clip Audio Control Tool open or not.

Audio faders 1 to 8 for preview and digitizing (Splice-in, Overwrite), with Audio Input Tool open or not.

OVER indicator

Lights when there is a signal level overflow on any of the audio group busses.

DATA indicator

Lights when there is output to any of the audio group busses.

MONITOR LEVEL knob Adjusts the volume of the headphones connected to the Audio Control Panel. MONO button

840

Functions Available on the Control Panels

Turns MONO check box on and off.

When Master Viewer is active

When Source Viewer is active

SOLO RESET buttons

Lights when any of the Audio Mixer track SOLO buttons is on. Pressing this button while it is lit resets (cancels) the solo function for all tracks.

Lights when any of the Clip Audio Control Tool channel SOLO buttons is on. Pressing this button while it is lit resets (cancels) the solo function for all channels.

When Logging Tool is active

Audio Output Tool Monitor tab

BANK button

Monitor Bank section

Monitor channel selection buttons

Monitor channel section

MASTER fader

Appendixes

Parts

Audio Group Bus Fader PGM bus fader 1 (default: fixed as PGM bus fader 1)

Functions Available on the Control Panels

841

DMW-C5 Editing Control Panel

Appendixes

XPRI NS provides a user interface that can be operated in the same manner as a linear editor. Command button functions are assigned to the controls of the DMW-C5. Although limitations apply, they can generally be used regardless of which tool is active. Some buttons have multiple functions. These are selected by pressing the button alone or by pressing it together with the Shift button or the Ctrl button.

Note

The shortcuts listed here for the individual tools include only default shortcuts that are not part of the Global Shortcut set.

Numeric keypad/FX pattern section ESC/TAB/NUM LOCK buttons Timecode section Function button section Track section Timeline editing section Master/source section

Play control section Mark section SHIFT/ALL STOP/OVER WRITE/REVIEW buttons Position section

842

Functions Available on the Control Panels

Global Shortcuts Numeric keypad/FX pattern section Use the following buttons with Num Lock function on. Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

Function when pressed with Ctrl key

1

1

FX1

Properties

2 to 9

2 to 9

FX2 to FX9

-

0

Add Dissolve

Main Menu

00

00

Speed Control

Close Window

DEL

Delete

Delete Effect

Taskbar Menu

ALT

Alt

-

-

-

-

-

Zoom out

+

+

-

Zoom in

CTRL

Ctrl

-

-

ENTER

Enter

-

-

Appendixes

0

ESC/TAB/NUM LOCK buttons Button name

Function

ESC

Esc

TAB

Tab

NUM LOCK

Num Lock

Timecode section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

Function when pressed with Ctrl key

TC/CTL

TC/CTL

F/TC

TCR

CTL RESET CTL Reset

-

-

SET DUR

Set Duration

-

-

TRANS TIME

Transition Options

-

-

Function button section F3 to F6 buttons: No functions set Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

F1

Help

-

F2

Monitor Select

-

F7

User Layout

-

F8

FX Explorer

-

F9

Project Explorer

-

F10

Batch Digitize Tool

-

F11

Audio Mixer

Audio Voice Over Tool

F12

Record to VTR Tool

-

Track section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

A1 to A4

Track Buttons A1 to A4

Track Buttons A5 to A8

Functions Available on the Control Panels

843

Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

V1

Track Button V1

Track Button V3

V2

Track Button V2

Track Button V4

DSK

CG1

CG2

EDIT MODE Edit Mode

-

Timeline editing section Appendixes

Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift Function when pressed with Ctrl key key

MATCH FRAME

Match Frame

Reverse Match List

Match TC

EXTRCT

Extract

Lift

-

EXTND

Extend

-

-

ADD EDIT

Add Edit

-

-

UNDO

Undo

Redo

-

CUT

Cut

Copy

-

PASTE

Paste

-

Toggle AB/A/B Side Trim

TRIM

Trim Mode

-

-

Master/source section Button name

Function

P1

X1

SRC

Source Viewer

MASTER

Master Viewer

Position section FS button: No function set. Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift Function when pressed with Ctrl key key

BS

Backspace

-

-

GO TO IN

Go to In

Go to Out

-

PREV EVENT

Previous Event

Home

-

R

Up Arrow

-

Page Up

NEXT EVENT

Next Event

End

-

T

Left Arrow

-

-

r

Down Arrow

-

Page Down

t

Right Arrow

-

-

SHIFT/ALL STOP/OVER WRITE/REVIEW buttons

844

Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift Function when pressed with Ctrl key key

SHIFT

Shift

-

-

ALL STOP

All Stop

All Cancel

-

OVER WRITE

Overwrite

Splice-In

Record

REVIEW

Preroll Review (3 seconds)

-

-

Functions Available on the Control Panels

Mark section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

MARK IN

Mark In

Clear In Mark

MARK OUT

Mark Out

Clear Out Mark

MARK CLIP

Mark Clip

Clear Both Marks

Play control section Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift Function when pressed with Ctrl key key

PLAY

Play

Standby off

STILL

Still

Eject

REW

Play Reverse

Rewind 1.5

FF

Play Forward

Forward 1.5

SHTL

Shuttle

Stop

JOG

Jog

Analog Scrub mode

DMC

DMC

-

Appendixes

Button name

Logging Tool Mark section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

MARK CLIP

Logging

-

Play control section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

REW

Rewind

-

FF

Fast Forward

-

SHIFT/ALL STOP/OVER WRITE/REVIEW buttons Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

OVER WRITE

Overwrite mode Record

Splice-in mode Record

Batch Digitize Tool Play control section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

REW

Rewind

-

FF

Fast Forward

-

Functions Available on the Control Panels

845

Import File Tool Position section

Appendixes

Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

PREV EVENT

-

Go to Start

NEXT EVENT

-

Go to End

Source Viewer SHIFT/ALL STOP/OVER WRITE/REVIEW buttons Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

REVIEW

Play In to Out

-

Source Viewer (Digitize Mode) Play control section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

REW

Rewind

-

FF

Fast Forward

-

SHIFT/ALL STOP/OVER WRITE/REVIEW buttons Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

OVER WRITE

Overwrite mode Record

Splice-in mode Record

Multiple Camera Editor Numeric keypad/FX pattern section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

1 to 9

Camera 1 to Camera 9 select

FX2 to FX9

Function button section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

F2

Save

-

Timeline editing section

846

Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

MATCH FRAME

Nesting

Versioning

ADD EDIT

Cut at PL

-

Functions Available on the Control Panels

Master/source section Button name

Function

P1

2 View

P2

4 View

SRC

9 View

MASTER

Left Output

Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

MARK CLIP

Record

-

Appendixes

Mark section

SHIFT/ALL STOP/OVER WRITE/REVIEW buttons Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

ALL STOP

Auto White Balance

-

Trim Viewer Play control section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

PLAY

Loop Play

-

Position section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

PREV EVENT

Previous Transition

-

NEXT EVENT

Next Transition

-

SHIFT/ALL STOP/OVER WRITE/REVIEW buttons Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

REVIEW

Loop Play

-

Video Effect Editor Position section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

FS

Set Keyframe

-

PREV EVENT

Previous Keyframe

-

NEXT EVENT

Next Keyframe

-

Functions Available on the Control Panels

847

Numeric keypad/FX pattern section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

DEL

-

Delete Keyframe

Audio Effect Editor Position section Appendixes

Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

FS

Set Keyframe

-

PREV EVENT

Previous Keyframe

-

NEXT EVENT

Next Keyframe

-

Numeric keypad/FX pattern section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

DEL

-

Delete Keyframe

Import CD Audio Tool Position section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

PREV EVENT

-

Go to Start

NEXT EVENT

-

Go to End

Record to VTR Tool Play control section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

REW

Rewind

-

FF

Fast Forward

-

SHIFT/ALL STOP/OVER WRITE/REVIEW buttons Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

REVIEW

Preview

-

Voice Over Tool SHIFT/ALL STOP/OVER WRITE/REVIEW buttons

848

Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

REVIEW

Preview

-

OVER WRITE

Record

-

Functions Available on the Control Panels

Detailed Speed Control dialog Position section Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

PREV EVENT

-

Go to Start

NEXT EVENT

-

Go to End Appendixes

Button name

XDCAM Explorer Play control section Button name

Function when pressed alone

Function when pressed with Shift key

SHTL

Stop

-

Functions Available on the Control Panels

849

Functions Available on the Keyboard

Function Pressed alone

Pressed with Shift key

Appendixes

[

Delete Keyframe

]

Set Keyframe

\

Add Dissolve

A

Go to Previous Event

S

Go to Next Event

D

Clear In Mark

F

Clear Out Mark

Note

G

Clear Both Marks

The shortcuts listed here for the individual tools include only default shortcuts that are not part of the Global Shortcut set.

H

Focus

J

Play Reverse

K

Still

L

Play Forward

;

Trim Mode

’

FX Explorer

Z

Lift

X

Extract

Cut to SV

Some tools have functions that are available on the keyboard. Different functions may be selected depending on whether a key is pressed alone or pressed together with the Shift key.

Global Shortcuts Key

Function Pressed alone

850

Key

Pressed with Shift key

F4

Project Explorer

C

Copy to Clipboard

Copy to SV

F5

Logging Tool

V

Splice-In

Paste from SV

F6

Batch Digitize tool

B

Overwrite

F7

Timeline Editor

N

F8

Record to VTR tool

M

Trim 10 Frames Back

1

Step Backward 10 Frames

,

Trim 1 Frame Back

2

Step Forward 10 Frames

.

Trim 1 Frame Forward

/

Trim 10 Frames Forward

Space

Stop

3

Step Backward

4

Step Forward

5

Play

6

Play In to Out

7

Track button V2

Track button V4

8

Track button V1

Track button V3

9

Track button A1

Track button A5

0

Track button A2

Track button A6

-

Track button A3

Track button A7

=

Track button A4

Track button A8

Q

Go to Mark In

W

Go to Mark Out

E, I

Mark In

R, O

Mark Out

T

Set Duration

Y

Segment (Extract/ Splice-In) mode

U

Segment (Lift/ Overwrite) mode

P

Add Edit

Functions Available on the Keyboard

Digitize

Stop

Note

Mark Clip

When the Add Edit function is set to stop playback at each edit point, the K key stops playback.

Logging Tool Key

Function Pressed alone

P

Mark In (Sub)

[

Mark Out (Sub)

]

Make Sub Clip

A

Rewind

S

Fast Forward

N

Logging

Pressed with Shift key

Batch Digitize Tool Button Function Pressed alone A

Rewind

S

Fast Forward

Pressed with Shift key

N

Logging

Pressed with Shift key

Source Viewer Key

Pressed Alone

N

A

Rewind

S

Fast Forward

V

Splice-in mode Record

B

Overwrite mode Record

Space

All Stop

[

AB Side Trim

]

B Side Trim

A

Previous Transition

S

Next Transition

Key

Pressed Alone

Pressed with Shift key

A

Previous Keyframe

S

Next Keyframe

Pressed with Shift key

Source Viewer (Digitize Mode) Pressed Alone

Pressed with Shift key

Audio Effect Editor Render All

Key

A Side Trim

Appendixes

Pressed Alone

Pressed Alone

P

Video Effect Editor

Import File Tool Key

Key

Pressed with Shift key

Key

Pressed Alone

Pressed with Shift key

A

Previous Keyframe

S

Next Keyframe

CG Editor Key

Pressed Alone

Pressed with Shift key

A

Previous Keyframe

S

Next Keyframe

Advanced Color Corrector

Multiple Camera Editor Pressed Alone

5

Loop Play

Pressed with Shift key

Key

Pressed Alone

6

Play In to Out

F9

2 View

=

Monitor Select

F10

4 View

Q

F11

9 View

Go to Previous Uncorrected Event

F12

Left Output

W

Go to Next Uncorrected Event

0 to 9

Camera angle select

]

Split View

\

Delete Effect

H

Focus

C

Pressed with Num Lock key

Key

Timecode display for cueup of each camera angle

Cut at Playline

-

Note

The function of the numeric keys 0 to 9 depends on the view mode selection (2-view, 4-view, or 9-view).

Trim Viewer Key

Pressed Alone

5

Loop Play

Pressed with Shift key

Import CD Audio Tool Key

Pressed Alone

A

Go to Start

S

Go to End

J

Rewind

K

Still

Pressed with Shift key

Functions Available on the Keyboard

851

Key

Pressed Alone

L

Fast Forward

N

Logging

Pressed with Shift key

Record to VTR Tool Appendixes

Key

Pressed Alone

A

Rewind

S

Fast Forward

N

Preview

Pressed with Shift key

Record

Voice Over Tool

852

Key

Pressed Alone

Pressed with Shift key

M

Set Essence Mark

-

Functions Available on the Keyboard

Master Viewer/Timeline Editor (full default listing) Key

Functions in modes other than trim modes

Functions in trim modes (for Timeline Editor only)

Pressed alone

Pressed alone

1

Step Backward 10 Frames

2

Step Forward 10 Frame

3

Step Backward

Step Backward 10 Frames

4

Step Forward

Step Forward 10 Frames

5

Play

6

Play In to Out

7

Track button V2

Track button V4

Track button V2

Track button V4

8

Track button V1

Track button V3

Track button V1

Track button V3

9

Track button A1

Track button A5

Track button A1

Track button A5

0

Track button A2

Track button A6

Track button A2

Track button A6

-

Track button A3

Track button A7

Track button A3

Track button A7

=

Track button A4

Track button A8

Track button A4

Track button A8

Q

Go to In

Go to In

W

Go to Out

Go to Out

E, I

Mark In

Mark In

R, O

Mark Out

T

Set Duration

Y

Segment (Extract/Splice-In) mode

Segment (Extract/Splice-In) mode

U

Segment (Lift/Overwrite) mode

Segment (Lift/Overwrite) mode

P

Add Edit

A-side Single Trim

[

Mark Clip

AB-side Trim

Pressed with Shift key

Mark Clip

Set Duration (transition)

B-side Single Trim Add Dissolve

Add Dissolve

A

Previous Event

Previous Transition

S

Next Event

Next Transition

D

Clear In Mark

F

Clear Out Mark

G

Clear Both Marks

H

Focus

J

Play Reverse

K

Still

L

Play Forward

;

Trim Mode

Trim Mode

’

FX Explorer

FX Explorer

Z

Lift

X

Extract

C

Copy to Clipboard

V

Splice-In

B

Overwrite

N

Appendixes

Loop Play

] \

Pressed with Shift key

Focus Rewind 1.5

Play Reverse Still

Forward 1.5

Render All

Play Forward

Render Effect

Functions Available on the Keyboard

853

Key

Functions in modes other than trim modes

Functions in trim modes (for Timeline Editor only)

Pressed alone

Pressed alone

M

Trim 10 Frames Back

Trim 10 Frames Back

,

Trim 1 Frame Back

Trim 1 Frame Back

.

Trim 1 Frame Forward

Trim 1 Frame Forward

/

Trim 10 Frames Forward

Trim 10 Frames Forward

Space

All Stop

Stop

Appendixes

Record to VTR Tool Key

Function Pressed alone

854

Pressed with Shift key

A

Rewind

S

Fast Forward

N

Preview

Functions Available on the Keyboard

Pressed with Shift key

Record

Stop

Pressed with Shift key

Stop

Shortcut Keys Global Operation

Function

Tools

Ctrl + W

Close the window.

Tools

F1

Open the Online Help file.

Tools

Click mouse wheel

Activate/Deactivate shuttle mode (shuttle by rolling the mouse wheel)

Tools

Right-click textbox

Display context menu to copy, cut, and paste text.

Timecode input box

Click and enter timecode value (through numeric keypad)

Enter a timecode value.

Timecode input box

Backspace

Delete 1 digit of inputs.

Timecode input box

Esc

Cancel input.

Timecode input box

Del

Delete input.

Timecode input box

“.” (numeric keypad)

Enter “00”.

Timecode input box

“*” (numeric keypad)

Change the input numerical display (timecode/ frame).

Configuration

Ctrl + 9

Open the Configuration dialog.

Tools

Ctrl + Windows

Open the taskbar menu.

Tools and dialogs with main menus

Alt + Windows

Open the main menu.

Tools/dialogs which have the detail setting dialog or Properties dialog

Ctrl + 1

Open the detail setting dialog or Properties dialog.

Timeline

• Drag left or right arrow of horizontal scroll bar. • Ctrl + right-click drag in the timecode area.

Zoom in/out

Timeline

• Drag in the horizontal scroll bar. • Ctrl + right-click drag left or right arrow of horizontal scroll bar.

Move position in the timeline

Timeline

Double-click horizontal scroll bar.

Switches the horizontal scroll bar between current mode and full-size mode.

Shortcut Keys

Appendixes

Operation area/condition

855

Project Explorer

Appendixes

Operation area/condition

Operation

Function

Tree View pane/List View pane

F2

Rename items.

Tree View pane/List View pane

Del

Put the selected item/clip into the Trash.

Tree View pane/List View pane

Ctrl + Del

Empty the Trash.

Tree View pane/List View pane

Ctrl + C

Copy.

Tree View pane/List View pane

Ctrl + X

Cut (to move items to another location).

Tree View pane/List View pane

Ctrl + V

Paste.

Tree View pane

Ctrl + B

Create a new bin.

Tree View pane

Ctrl + E

Create a sequence in the selected bin.

Tree View pane

Ctrl + drag and drop item

Copy the clip.

List View pane

Ctrl + click a selected clip

Cancel the selection.

List View pane

Ctrl + click multiple clips

Select multiple items.

List View pane

Select a first clip and Shift + click a last clip

Select multiple items.

List View pane

Ctrl + A

Select all clips.

List View pane

Double click a clip or Ctrl + double click a Send to the Source Viewer (depending on the clip action specified in the Project Explorer Properties dialog).

List View pane

Ctrl + double click a clip or double click a Start picture icon play (depending on the action clip specified in the Project Explorer Properties dialog).

List View pane

Alt + drag

Snap the clip head to a cut point, Mark In and Mark Out points, or the playline when a clip is dragged from a bin to the timeline.

List View pane

Ctrl + Alt + drag

Snap the clip tail to a cut point, Mark In and Mark Out points, or the playline when a clip is dragged from a bin to the timeline.

List View pane

Shift + drag

Change the clip record mode when a clip is dragged from a bin to the timeline.

List View pane

R or r

Move the clip selection.

List View pane

Ctrl + Shift + B

Delete the media files of the selected clip or clips.

Normal

Ctrl + L

Open the Logging Tool to create reel clips.

Normal

Ctrl + Z

Undo/Redo.

Normal (not text entry or picture icon play)

Ctrl + F

Open the Search dialog.

Normal (not text entry or picture icon play)

Ctrl + +

In Picture View mode, increase the size of clip icons by 1 step.

Normal (not text entry or picture icon play)

Ctrl + -

In Picture View mode, decreases the size of clip icons by 1 step.

Normal (not text entry or picture icon play)

Ctrl + >

Switch between the three View modes.

Picture icon play

T /t

1 frame back or 1 frame forward.

Picture icon play

Shift + T /t

10 frames back or 10 frames forward.

Picture icon play

Home

Go to start point.

Picture icon play

End

Go to end point.

When a clip is selected

Enter

Same as double click.

Tool button area (Project Explorer) Roll mouse wheel

856

Shortcut Keys

Scroll left and right through the tool button area.

Source Viewer/Master Viewer Operation

Function

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Home

Go to the start point.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

End

Go to the end point.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

T or t

Move 1 frame back or move 1 frame forward.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Shift + T or t

Move 10 frames back or move 10 frames forward.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Alt + Goto Previous Event or Goto Next Event

See the section about the “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) in the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Alt + Ctrl + Goto Previous Event or Goto Next Event

See the section about the “Shortcut Key tab” (page 615) in the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Alt + Play In to Out

Loop-play between the Mark In and Mark Out points.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Alt + Play Forward, K + L

Slow play in the forward direction. Repeated presses reduce the speed down to a minimum of 1/16 times normal speed.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Alt + Play Reverse, K + J

Slow play in the reverse direction. Repeated presses reduce the speed down to a minimum of 1/16 times normal speed.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Enter numeric + Enter

Go to the timecode value specified.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Enter numeric + Set Duration

Set the timecode value for duration.

Source Viewer (Digitize mode)

Ctrl + 1

Opens the Pre-Edit Properties dialog.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Ctrl + A

Select all tracks.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Ctrl + Shift + A

Deselect all tracks.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Ctrl + +

Zoom in on the timeline scale.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Ctrl + -

Zoom out on the timeline scale.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Ctrl + right-click + drag up and down

Zoom in or zoom out on the timeline.

Source Viewer, Master Viewer

Ctrl + R

Refresh the clip or sequence in Source Viewer when another networked tool is editing the same content.

Master Viewer

Ctrl + S

Save sequence.

Master Viewer

Ctrl + Z

Undo an editing operation on the timeline.

Master Viewer

Ctrl + Y

Redo an undone editing operation on the timeline.

Shortcut Keys

Appendixes

Operation area/condition

857

Timeline Editor

Appendixes

858

Operation area/condition

Operation

Function

Timeline

Home

Go to the start point.

Timeline

End

Go to the end point.

Timeline

R or r

Move 5 frames forward or move 5 frames back.

Timeline

Shift + T or t

Move 10 frames back or move 10 frames forward.

Timeline

Alt + add transition effect

Reverse of the action when the Transition Options Dialog (page 302) check box is checked in the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Timeline

Drag with the right button depressed to draw a lasso around track panels

Inverts track selections.

Timeline

Ctrl + drag and drop a track panel

Copy view setup data of the track.

Timeline

Alt + drag and drop a track panel

Exchange tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + C

Copy the selected clips to the clipboard.

Timeline

Ctrl + X

Cut (to move clips to another location).

Timeline

Ctrl + V

Paste from the clip board.

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + C

Copy the selected effects.

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + X

Cut effects (to move to another location).

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + V

Paste effects.

Timeline

Delete

Delete the selected clips.

Timeline

Ctrl + D

Duplicate a sequence and rendered media file.

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + S

Create a sub sequence.

Timeline

Ctrl + +

Zoom in on the timeline scale.

Timeline

Ctrl + -

Zoom out on the timeline scale.

Timeline

Ctrl + L

Double the current height of all tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + K

Halve the current height of all tracks.

Timeline

Alt + click/scrub a track

Snap to the In point of clips on active tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + click/scrub a track

Snap to the In and Out points of clips on active tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + Alt + click/scrub a track

Snap to the Out point of clips on active tracks.

Timeline

Alt + drag the playline

Snap to clip start point.

Timeline

Ctrl + Alt + drag the playline

Snap to clip end point.

Timeline

Shift + drag the playline

Switch between scrubbing with effect and scrubbing without effect.

Timeline

Drag from the slice part to draw a lasso Select the clips enclosed with the lasso. around clips in the right direction. The lasso can start from anywhere on the timeline if you drag with the right mouse button held down.

Timeline

Drag from the slice part to draw a lasso Slip trim the clips enclosed with the lasso. around clips in the left direction. The lasso can start from anywhere on the timeline if you drag with the right mouse button held down.

Timeline

Drag from the slice part to draw a lasso Trim the transitions enclosed with the lasso. around transitions. The lasso can start from anywhere on the timeline if you drag with the right mouse button held down.

Shortcut Keys

Operation area/condition

Operation

Function

Timeline

Focus on Timeline Editor, then Ctrl + D

Duplicate the currently open sequence. The duplicated sequence is opened automatically.

Ctrl + Shift + T

Track lock tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + U

Unlock track-locked tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + T

Sync lock tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + U

Unlock sync-locked tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + R

Zoom in on the waveform display.

Timeline

Ctrl + r

Zoom out of the waveform display.

Timeline

Ctrl + right-click + drag up and down

Zoom in or zoom out on the timeline.

Command button area

Roll mouse wheel

Scroll left and right through the command button area.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Alt + drag and drop a selected segment

Move the selected segment to a snap point (cut point, transition start point, transition end point).

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Ctrl + click clips

Select multiple clips.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Alt + Trim key a)

Slip trim.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Alt + rotate the mouse wheel

Slip trim.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Ctrl + Alt + Trim key a)

Slide trim.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Ctrl + Alt + rotate the mouse wheel

Slide trim.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Trim amount entered in scratchpad + Alt + Trim key b)

Slip trim by specified amount.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Clip start point entered in scratchpad + Alt + 1 frame or 10 frames forward trim key b)

Slip trim toward clip start point.

Composer Mode

Ctrl + drag the playline

Snap to start or end point of clip where scrubbing started.

Composer Mode

Alt + Trim key a)

B-side trim.

Composer Mode

Alt + rotate the mouse wheel

B-side trim.

Composer Mode

Ctrl + Alt + Trim key a)

A-side trim.

Composer Mode

Ctrl + Alt + rotate the mouse wheel

A-side trim.

Composer Mode

Shift + rotate the mouse wheel

AB-side trim.

Composer Mode

Trim amount entered in scratchpad + Alt + trim key a)

Trim B-side by the specified amount.

Composer Mode

Trim amount entered in scratchpad + Ctrl Trim A-side by the specified amount. + Alt + Trim key a)

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Ctrl + C

Copy the selected keyframes to the clipboard.

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Ctrl + X

Cut (to move keyframes to another location).

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Ctrl + V

Paste from the clip board at the playline position.

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Shift + click additional keyframes

Select multiple keyframes.

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Shift + drag to draw a lasso around keyframes

Select multiple keyframes.

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Ctrl + drag and drop keyframes

Copy and paste the keyframes.

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Alt + drag and drop keyframes

Cut and paste the keyframes.

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Shift + drag and drop keyframes

Restrict the adjustment to the vertical or horizontal direction.

Shortcut Keys

Appendixes

Timeline

859

Appendixes

Operation area/condition

Operation

Function

Trim Viewer

Ctrl + click a desired transition point

Add a trim handle.

Trim Viewer

Enter trim amounts + Enter

Adjust trim amounts by numeric values.

Trim Viewer

Enter value + set duration

Set the timecode value as transition time.

Trim Viewer

Ctrl + scrub

Trim 1 frame at a time.

Trim Viewer

Alt + scrub

Trim in snap mode. The trim point snaps to cut points on other tracks.

Trim Viewer

Shift + scrub

Insert filler.

Trim Viewer

Esc

Exit the Trim Viewer.

Trim Viewer

T

1 frame back trim

Trim Viewer

t

1 frame forward trim

Trim Viewer

Ctrl + drag the clip

Make fine adjustments to the clip.

Trim Viewer

Alt + drag the clip

Snap the clip to the head frame.

Trim Viewer

Ctrl + Alt + drag the clip

Snap the clip to the tail frame.

FX Properties

Click effects in FX Properties and Ctrl + drag and drop to clips on the Timeline.

Copy 1 or multiple effects in FX Properties to clips on the Timeline.

FX Properties

Click effects in FX Properties and Shift + drag and drop to highlighted clips on the Timeline.

Copy 1 or multiple effects in FX Properties to highlighted multiple clips on the Timeline.

FX Properties

Click effects in FX Properties and Alt + drag and drop to clips on the Timeline.

Move 1 or multiple effects in FX Properties to clips on the Timeline.

a) Trim 10 Frames Back button, Trim 1 Frame Back button, Trim 1 Frame Forward button, Trim 10 Frames Forward button, or the corresponding key (command button, shortcut key, or control panel button). b) Command button, shortcut key, or control panel button.

860

Shortcut Keys

Multiple Camera Editor Operation

Function

Timeline

Home

Go to the start point.

Timeline

End

Go to the end point.

Timeline

R or r

Move 5 frames forward or move 5 frames back.

Timeline

Shift + T or t

Move 10 frames back or move 10 frames forward.

Timeline

Alt + add transition effect

Reverse of the action when the Transition Options Dialog (page 302) check box is checked in the Timeline Editor Properties dialog.

Timeline

Drag with the right button depressed to draw a lasso around track panels

Inverts track selections.

Timeline

Ctrl + drag and drop a track panel

Copy view setup data of the track.

Timeline

Alt + drag and drop a track panel

Exchange tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + C

Copy the selected clips to the clipboard.

Timeline

Ctrl + X

Cut (to move clips to another location).

Timeline

Ctrl + V

Paste from the clip board.

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + C

Copy the selected effects.

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + X

Cut effects (to move to another location).

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + V

Paste effects.

Timeline

Delete

Delete the selected clips.

Timeline

Ctrl + D

Duplicate a sequence and rendered media file.

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + S

Create a sub sequence.

Timeline

Ctrl + +

Zoom in on the timeline scale.

Timeline

Ctrl + -

Zoom out on the timeline scale.

Timeline

Ctrl + L

Double the current height of all tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + K

Halve the current height of all tracks.

Timeline

Alt + click/scrub a track

Snap to the In point of clips on active tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + click/scrub a track

Snap to the In and Out points of clips on active tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + Alt + click/scrub a track

Snap to the Out point of clips on active tracks.

Timeline

Alt + drag the playline

Snap to clip start point.

Timeline

Ctrl + Alt + drag the playline

Snap to clip end point.

Timeline

Shift + drag the playline

Switch between scrubbing with effect and scrubbing without effect.

Timeline

Drag from the slice part to draw a lasso Select the clips enclosed with the lasso. around clips in the right direction. The lasso can start from anywhere on the timeline if you drag with the right mouse button held down.

Timeline

Drag from the slice part to draw a lasso Trim the transitions enclosed with the lasso. around transitions. The lasso can start from anywhere on the timeline if you drag with the right mouse button held down.

Timeline

Focus on Timeline Editor, then Ctrl + D

Duplicate the currently open sequence. The duplicated sequence is opened automatically.

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + T

Track lock tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + Shift + U

Unlock track-locked tracks.

Shortcut Keys

Appendixes

Operation area/condition

861

Appendixes

862

Operation area/condition

Operation

Function

Timeline

Ctrl + T

Sync lock tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + U

Unlock sync-locked tracks.

Timeline

Ctrl + right-click + drag up and down

Zoom in or zoom out on the timeline.

Command button area

Roll mouse wheel

Scroll left and right through the command button area.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Alt + drag and drop a selected segment

Move the selected segment to a snap point (cut point, transition start point, transition end point).

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Ctrl + click clips

Select multiple clips.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Alt + rotate the mouse wheel

Slip trim.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Ctrl + Alt + rotate the mouse wheel

Slide trim.

Segment Mode (Lift/Overwrite, Extract/Splice-In)

Clip start point entered in scratchpad + Alt + 1 frame or 10 frames forward trim key b)

Slip trim toward clip start point.

Composer Mode

Ctrl + drag the playline

Snap to start or end point of clip where scrubbing started.

Composer Mode

Alt + rotate the mouse wheel

B-side trim.

Composer Mode

Ctrl + Alt + rotate the mouse wheel

A-side trim.

Composer Mode

Shift + rotate the mouse wheel

AB-side trim.

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Ctrl + C

Copy the selected keyframes to the clipboard.

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Ctrl + X

Cut (to move keyframes to another location).

Audio Rubber Band Mode

Ctrl + V

Paste from the clip board at the playline position.

Shortcut Keys

Effect Tools Tool

Operation area/ condition

Function

Effect Editor Plate in the Parameter display section/track names on the Effect timeline

Tab

Select parameters.

Effect Editor Media Bar Control Panel

Ctrl + rotate a knob

Make fine adjustments to values (by 1/5 the normal amount).

Effect Editor Tracking

Ctrl + click a track point

Display pictures without expanding.

Effect Editor Effect Editor play

T or t

Move 1 frame back or move 1 frame forward.

Effect Editor Effect Editor play

Enter a value + Enter

Moves to the position specified by entering a value.

Effect Editor Timeline

Alt + click

Snaps playline to keyframes, Mark In, and Mark Out points

Effect Editor Timeline

Alt + drag keyframe

Snaps the playline and keyframe to the previous/ next keyframe in the timeline (cannot jump keyframes).

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Alt + Shift + drag keyframe

Snaps the playline and keyframe to a keyframe, Mark In and Mark Out point, or effect head or effect tail in the timeline.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Ctrl + click additional keyframes

Select multiple keyframes.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Ctrl + A

Select all keyframes.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Ctrl + Shift + A

Deselect all keyframes.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Drag with the right button held down to draw a lasso around keyframes

Select keyframes.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Alt + Keyframe Mode Button

Keyframe mode of all parameters is changed, and the parameter value is copied.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Ctrl + Alt + Keyframe Mode Button Keyframe mode of all parameters is changed, and the parameter value is not copied.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Ctrl + C

Copy keyframe.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Ctrl + X

Cut keyframe.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Ctrl + V

Paste keyframe.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Delete

Delete keyframe.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Ctrl + Y

Redo.

Effect Editor Keyframe operation

Ctrl + Z

Undo.

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Shift + S

Selection tool.

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Shift + P

Pen tool.

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Shift + C

Corner tool.

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Shift + R

Rectangle tool.

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Shift + E

Ellipse tool.

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Shift + M

Move tool.

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Shift + Z

Resize tool.

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Ctrl + A

Selects curves containing selected points, or selects all curves if no points are selected.

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Ctrl + t

Move selection right

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Ctrl + T

Move selection left

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Ctrl + R

Move selection up

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Ctrl + r

Move selection down

Effect Editor Rotospline mask tools

Delete

Deletes selected points or curves.

Shortcut Keys

Appendixes

Operation

863

Appendixes

864

Tool

Operation area/ condition

Operation

FX Explorer

Effect View Pane (User Drag and drop user effect from Fx Apply duration and alignment of one or more user effect) Explorer to Timeline Editor effects to one or more clips in the Timeline Editor.

FX Explorer

Effect View Pane (User Alt + Drag and drop user effect effect) from Fx Explorer to Timeline Editor

Use settings in Timeline Editor Properties dialog as default settings.

FX Explorer

Effect View Pane

Select all effects in bin.

Ctrl + A

Function

FX Explorer

Effect View Pane

Ctrl + C

Copy.

FX Explorer

Effect View Pane

Ctrl + X

Cut.

FX Explorer

Effect View Pane

Ctrl + V

Paste.

FX Explorer

Effect View Pane

Ctrl + Z

Undo/redo.

FX Explorer

Effect View Pane

Delete

Put in Trash.

FX Explorer

Tool button area

Roll mouse wheel

Scroll left and right through the tool button area.

Shortcut Keys

Other Tools Tool

Operation area/ condition

Logging Tool

Operation

Function

Ctrl + Shift + U

Temporarily bypasses adjustment processing for audio that has been adjusted with the Audio Input Tool.

Ctrl + I

Open the Technical Monitor.

Logging Tool

Ctrl + U

Open the Audio Input Tool.

Logging Tool

Ctrl + B

Open the Bin Selection dialog.

Ctrl + drag and release shuttle knob

Lock knob in released position, and enable play back in desired speed.

Batch Digitize Target clip list

Ctrl + A

Select all clips.

Batch Digitize Target clip list

R/r

Select the next clip up or down.

Logging Tool

Shuttle slider

Batch Digitize Target clip list (with one Home or more clips selected)

Select the first clip.

Batch Digitize Target clip list (with one End or more clips selected)

Select the last clip.

Batch Digitize Target clip list (with one Page Up/Page Down or more clips selected)

Scroll the display section up and down if it has a vertical scrollbar.

Batch Digitize Target clip list

Ctrl + click additional clip

Select multiple clips.

Batch Digitize Target clip list

Top clip click + Shift + end clip click

Select multiple clips.

Batch Digitize Shuttle slider

Ctrl + drag and release shuttle knob

Lock knob in released position, and enable play back in desired speed.

Import File

Alt + Play In to Out

Loop-play between the In and Out points.

Timecode Window

Ctrl + N

Add timecode.

Detailed Speed Control

Ctrl + +

Zoom in on the scale of Detailed Speed Control dialog.

Detailed Speed Control

Ctrl + -

Zoom out on the scale of Detailed Speed Control dialog.

Detailed Speed Control

Ctrl + 0

Show the entire range.

Audio tools

Shift + make adjustments of audio Operate on pairs of tracks that may be handled as level stereo, such as tracks 1 and 2, or tracks 3 and 4, as you operate on one of the tracks.

Audio tools

Esc

Return to the previous adjustments if the Esc key is pressed during adjustments.

Ctrl + drag the slider knob

Make fine adjustments to value.

Audio Voice Over Tool

Ctrl + B

Open the Bin Selection dialog.

Record to VTR

Shift + drag and drop a clip from Project Explorer to the Record to VTR tool

Load clips that are already loaded in the Record to VTR tool.

Audio Mixer

Command button

Audio level adjustments of a clip

Record to VTR

Shuttle slider

Ctrl + drag and release shuttle knob

Lock knob in released position, and enable play back in desired speed.

Customize tools

Command button

Shift + drag the button in the position area

Enlarge the button.

Customize tools

Keyboard/Control Panel

Shift + arrange the button

Assign functions to Shift key combinations.

Shortcut Keys

Appendixes

Logging Tool

865

Appendixes

866

Tool

Operation area/ condition

Operation

Function

Customize tools

Keyboard/Control Panel (DMW-C5 only)

Ctrl + arrange the button

Assign functions to Ctrl key combinations.

Customize tools

Keyboard/Control Panel

Shift

Display functions assigned to Shift key combinations.

Customize tools

Keyboard/Control Panel (DMW-C5 only)

Ctrl

Display functions assigned to Ctrl key combinations.

Configuration

Properties

Ctrl + O

Open each properties.

Configuration

User tab

Ctrl + S

Save all.

Shortcut Keys

Glossary

Add Edit The addition of a cut point between contiguous frames of a clip on the timeline. Processed like a normal transition in editing. Called a match frame edit when the frames are contiguous. The unneeded portion can be deleted. Alpha channel Data that expresses transparency in images and video. For example, alpha channel data is added to title clips according to the shapes of the characters in the title. This data can be used to superimpose the titles over video. Aspect ratio 1. Video aspect ratio: The ratio of video width to height. Nearly all TV screens are currently 4:3, i.e. four units in width 4 to units in height 3. But there is a growing movement toward a widescreen aspect ratio of 16:9. 2. Pixel aspect ratio: The aspect ratio of the area of a picture described by one pixel. Audio Mix Down Mixing of a number of audio tracks into a smaller number of tracks, normally either two tracks (stereo) or one track (monaural). This is commonly done to save tracks for multi-track coders which support only a limited number of tracks. Auto save Automatic saving of work at a predetermined interval. AUX An auxiliary track. In video systems, a channel for connecting external audio and video devices.

Batch digitizing Processing to automatically digitize multiple video or audio files on a reel and save them to hard disks. Logging data for the files to be digitized must be specified in advance. Bit Binary digit. The smallest unit of data in a digital system. A bit is a single one or zero which can express on/off, white/black, and so on. It is possible to define 4 levels with 2 bits, and 8 levels with 3 bits. In video, 8 bits are used to define 256 grayscale gradations.

composite video makes it unsuitable for high-quality chroma keys. Also called blue back, because blue is normally used as the key color. CODEC Compression-decompression. A device or process compresses video signals after digitizing or capture, allowing storage requirements to be reduced. Color bar Standard color test signal in which bars of color are displayed, often accompanied by audio test tones.

Black burst 1.The synchronization signal sent at the start of every line in a color video picture (PAL only). Color information reference frequency for color television signals. 2.A video signal which contains all of the elements of a video signal except luminance and color difference elements. Black burst is typically used as a reference signal to synchronize audio and video sampling.

Component video The normal interpretation of a component video signal is one in which the luminance and chrominance remain as separate components, such as analog components in MII and Betacam VTRs, and digital components Y, BY, R-Y(Y, Cr, Cb) in ITU-R 601. RGB is also a component signal. Component video signals retain maximum luminance and chrominance bandwidth.

Brightness The brightness of a color, which determines how bright or dark it appears.

Composite video Luminance and chrominance are combined along with the timing reference “sync” information using one of the coding standards (NTSC, PAL or SECAM) to make composite video. The process, which is an analog form of video compression, restricts the bandwidths (image detail) of components. In the composite result, color is literally added to the monochrome (luminance) information using a visually acceptable technique. As our eyes have far more resolving power for luminance than for color, the color sharpness (bandwidth) of the coded single is reduced to far below that of the luminance. This provides a good solution for transmission but it becomes difficult, if not impossible, to accurately reverse the process (decode) into pure luminance and

B-Y A color difference signal in component video. The blue signal (B) minus the luminance value (Y). Byte Typically a byte consists of 8 bits, which allows 256 discrete values (for luminance, color, etc.). Chroma key Effect in which one video signal overlays another, the areas of overlay being defined by a specific range of color, or chrominance, on the foreground signal. For this to work reliably, the chrominance must have sufficient resolution, or bandwidth. The limited bandwidth of encoded

Appendixes

A/B-roll Editing method that switches between scenes recorded on different source tapes using transitions such as wipe and dissolve.

Glossary

867

chrominance, which limits its use in post production.

Appendixes

Compression Processing to lower the bandwidth or transmission speed of video. The broadcast transmission standards PAL, NTSC, and SECAM are compression systems for analog video. In digital systems, compression works by analyzing the data and discarding redundancies and repetitions. This technology was developed mainly for digital broadcasting, but it is also used to process digital video on PCs, and reduce the amount of capacity needed by digital VTRs. Contrast The range from the brightest area of an image or video frame to the darkest area. High contrast means that there is a wide range of brightness values. Low contrast means that the range is limited. Control panel An external operation panel used to control hardware or software, providing the same functionality as a GUI. Cross fade Audio transition in which the outgoing sound gradually becomes weaker while the incoming sound becomes stronger. CTL Abbreviation of Capstan Tracking Logic. Sync pulses are recorded on an independent track of the video tape for each frame. These pulses are used to control tape transport. Code generated from the pulses is called CTL or control track code. CTL code does not contain time data as such, so it cannot be considered equivalent to LTC or VITC timecode. However, time can be computed by a tape counter that counts the individual pulses. Almost all of the counters in consumer video equipment work according to this principle. Drop-frame/Non-drop frame Types of SMPTE timecode designed to bring NTSC video into accordance

868

Glossary

with real time. Since color video actually runs at 29.97 frames per second, not 30 frames per second, timecode for two frames is dropped each minute in drop-frame timecode, except for one time every 10 minutes. Non-drop frame timecode does not perform this compensation. Dupe (duplicate) Duplicated portions of clips used on the timeline. EDL Edit Decision List. A file containing information about all of the editing decisions in a project. Many editing controllers generate EDLs automatically during editing, which can be used to reproduce the edited video. A common procedure is to generate an EDL while making a preliminary edit on a low-cost offline system, copy the EDL to a floppy disk or other media, and transfer it to a high-end online editing system for final editing. This is cost effective because it reduces the amount of time that must be spent on the expensive high-end system. Essence marks Marks which identify specific frames in recorded material, for example highlight scenes in a sports recording. There are several predefined types, and new types can be defined as arbitrary strings of characters. Essence marks facilitate editing of recorded material. EQ See Equalizer. Equalizer Audio effect used to selectively vary the gain of an audio file by frequency. Extract To extract a specified segment from a track and fill the resulting gap by moving subsequent segments forward. The duration of the total sequence is shortened. FAM Abbreviation of the XDCAM File Access Mode. A function that allows XDCAM devices to be accessed from

computers over an i.LINK (IEEE1394) connection. Field In an interlaced-scanning format, a television signal frame consists of a field of even scan lines or a field of odd scan lines captured or displayed at different times. A field is 50Hz in PAL, 59.94 Hz in drop-frame NTSC, and 60 Hz in nondrop frame NTSC. There are 312.5 scanning lines in a PAL field, and 262.5 scanning lines in an NTSC field. Frame A television picture composed of two fields. PAL has 25 frames per second. NTSC has about 30 frames per second in non-drop frame mode and 29.97 frames per second in dropframe mode. FX Abbreviation of Effect. Gain 1. The measured volume of the white part of video. 2. Audio level, i.e. volume. Genlock A state in which devices are locked to a signal output by a sync generator. Genlock allows multiple devices to operate in synchronization. Gigabyte One billion bytes (actually 1.073,741,823 bytes). Unit to express the capacity of hard disks and storage devices. Hue The difference between colors. The color model used in video and computer screens expresses all colors by varying the ratio of red, green, and blue. Hz Hertz. Frequency measurement unit. 1 Hz is equivalent to 1 cycle per second. Incoming frame The first frame of the clip after a transition.

Jog/Shuttle Jog control advances or reverses in units of one frame. Shuttle control moves forward or back in proportion to the amount of movement by the control. JPEG A standard for non-reversible compression of still images, jointly standardized by the ISO and ITU-T (formerly CCITT). Key (key signal) See “Alpha channel”. Keyframe A set of parameters defining the state of a clip at a specific point, used to trace variations in the parameters. The system interpolates all frames between keyframes, so that the parameters vary smoothly. Kilobyte 1,000 bytes (actually 1,024 bytes). Lift An editing operation that deletes a selected segment from a track and fills resulting gap with black video and silent audio. The duration of the sequence does not change. LTC Abbreviation of Longitudinal Timecode. Timecode recorded on a longitudinal track and the tape and read by a fixed head. This timecode can be easily read when the tape is running in the forward or reverse direction, but cannot be read during still picture play. VITC timecode is used in place of LTC in such cases. See also VITC. Luminance The component of a video signal that includes information about its

brightness. Often called Y, as in YUV, YIQ, and Y/Cr/Cb. In color television systems, the luminance signal is extracted from the RGB signals of cameras and telecines on the basis of the formula Y=0.3R+ 0.6G + 0.1B. Luminance key A key signal generated by separating a specific gray value from the Y component and applying an appropriate clip and gain. Typically used to superimpose lettering on the video. Mask 1. Data used to limit the range of application of an effect within a frame. 2. See “Alpha channel”. Media file A file containing media data for video, audio, titles, still images, and so on. Megabyte One million bytes (actually 1,048,576 bytes). Unit to express the capacity of computer memory and storage devices. MPEG Standards for compression and decompression of digital video and audio, defined by the Motion Pictures Expert Group of the ISO. The basic technique is to record only the differences between the second frame and the first frame, between the third frame and the second frame, and so on. For this reason, compression efficiency declines when there is a great deal of motion in the picture. MXF Abbreviation of Material Exchange Format. A format for sharing and transferring program content and associated metadata over networks. MXF allows compatible devices to connect to each other and exchange files, and the use of metadata leads to improved workflows and more efficient content creation practices.

NTSC Abbreviation of National Television Systems Committee. The organization that developed the NTSC M analog television standard currently in use in the U.S., Canada, and Japan (M is the 525/60 lines/ fields standard). Now generally used to refer to that standard. The bandwidth of the NTSC standard is 4.2 MHz for the luminance signal, 1.3 MHz for color channel I, and 0.4 MHz for color channel Q. NTSC processes 30 frames and 60 fields of signals per second at 60 Hz with 525 scanning lines. The refresh rate is 15.75 kHz, and the color sub-carrier frequency is 3.58 MHz.

Appendixes

Interlaced A video processing technique in which even lines (2,4,6,8...) and odd lines (1,3,5,7...) are treated as separate fields. In PAL, there are 50 field variations per second. Two fields are combined to form a complete frame. This technique doubles the apparent refresh rate, reducing the flicker between frames.

Offline editing Preliminary or rough editing, usually done on a low-cost editing system using videocassette work tapes. A final editing must be performed in a high-quality system after offline editing. The result of offline editing is an EDL file that contains all of the editing information and that can be processed by both offline and online editing systems. Offline editing allows editors to make the necessary decisions before proceeding to the more expensive and demanding online edit. See also Online editing. Online editing The final stage in editing carried out, at a professional video editing facility, at the highest resolution of program image quality. Because image quality is higher, the cost per hour is higher than for offline editing. Careful preparations on an offline editing system allow online editing to be completed quickly, for cost savings. Outgoing frame The last frame of the clip before a transition. Overwrite Editing method in which materials or clips that are added to the timeline or moved on the timeline overwrite the materials or clips at the specified position.

Glossary

869

Appendixes

PAL Abbreviation of Phase Alternating Line. The television broadcast standard throughout most of Europe and in may other locations around the world. In almost all cases, a 626/50 lines/fields system is used. This standard developed from the NTSC standard, but allows the color burst phase to alternate with every line, which compensates for phase errors that can arise on the transmission path, causing color imbalance. In the PAL-I system, the bandwidth is normally 5.5 MHz for luminance signals and 1.3 MHz for the U and V color signals. PD-EDL (Professional DiscEDL) A file format for playback and editing of material recorded with the Sony XDCAM Professional Disk System. PD-EDL files are described in XML (eXtensible Markup Language), but they can be handled in the same way as normal EDL files. The format is sometimes abbreviated as SMI or SMIL, from the file extension (.SMI). Playline A line showing the current position in a clip on the timeline and in other tools. Preroll In VTRs, the time required to achieve stable tape transport after reception of a tape transport command, or the operation of playing the tape to achieve stable transport. To play a tape from the current time point to another point, the VTR must operate at the optimum speed. The VTR rewinds the tape to a point a few seconds in advance of the anticipated preview or recording point, and prerolls the tape so that will achieve the optimum speed when it reaches the edit point. Progressive Non-interlaced scanning, used in computer displays. Since no lines are skipped, finer detail can be displayed than in interlaced scanning.

870

Glossary

Render All Command to render to an entire sequence, from the start point to the end point. Only the portions which cannot be played in real time are rendered. This command creates media files for each rendered portion. Pasting to another timeline is possible, but video cannot be monitored.

Saturation A value expressing the strength of a color difference signal. Saturation determines the strength of colors in a video signal. The saturation level can be adjusted with the color editor.

Render Whole Command to render to an entire sequence, from the start point to the end point. All portions are rendered, including those which the portions which can be played in real time. This command creates 1 media file. Pasting to another timeline is possible, and the video can be monitored.

Segment A group of one or more clips. Clips can be on several tracks, and the segment range can be cut inside clips.

RGB Abbreviation for the red, green and blue signals. The three colors of receptors in cameras, and the three color difference signals assigned to the primary colors in electronic video transmitters. Unlike composite video signals, RGB signals can be controlled individually by color channel. Therefore the resolution of an RGB monitor is higher than that of a composite monitor. RS-232 A short-range serial data communications standard. RS-422 A medium-range (typically up to about 300 m) serial data communications standard. Data is sent using an ECL signal on two twisted pairs for bi-directional operation. The full specification includes 9-pin D-sub connectors and optional additional signal lines. The RS-422 standard is widely used for control lines to VTRs, mixers, and other devices in production and postproduction environments. R-Y A color difference signal in component video. The red signal (R) minus the luminance value (Y).

Scrub To move the playline left and right while dragging.

Sequence A group of clips arranged on the timeline. In addition to video and audio data, includes information such as the position on the timeline (EDL data in the wide sense), and information about whether the clips are rendered or not. SDI Abbreviation of Serial Digital Interface, standardized as SMPTE 259M. This interface enables the transmission of an uncompressed digital component stream. It is based on a 270-Mbit/s transfer rate. SDI is a 10-bit, scrambled, polarity independent interface, with common scrambling for both component ITUR 601 and composite digital video and four channels of (embedded) digital audio. It uses the standard 75ohm BNC connector and the coaxial cable commonly used for analog video, and can transmit the signal over 200 meters, depending on cable type. SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers. An professional organization for the broadcasting, video, and television industries in the United States, with individual and corporate members. Has international branches and many internal committees that make recommendations to the ITU-R and ANSI. Splice Editing method in which materials or clips that are added to the timeline or

moved on the timeline are inserted between the materials or clips at the specified position. Sub clip A clip that shares the same media files with an original clip. Creating a new sub clip does not require a large amount of disk capacity.

Sync break State in which synchronization is lost. See also Sync. Sync lock Function which prevents sync break when clips are trimmed, specified for tracks whose sync is to be maintained. TIFF Tagged Image File Format. A tagbased system developed by Aldus. Timecode Time data recorded on video tape to define the timing of individual frames. Timedata is read from video tape on the video player and displayed. It is normally displayed in units of hours, minutes, seconds, and frames (00:00:00:00). There are two types of timecode, VITC and LTC, recorded on different tracks of the video tape. Timecode enables highprecision video editing, allowing specific positions (i.e. Mark In and Mark Out points) to be cued up precisely. Tone A standard audio test signal, often recorded with color bars at the start of video tape. Track panel Panel where display settings are made for timeline tracks (master tracks), with functions for making patches between clips and master tracks.

Trim An operation to adjust the transition sections of a clip on the timeline. VITC Abbreviation of Vertical Interval Timecode. A format for digital timecode inserted into the vertical blanking interval of television signals. This type of timecode can be read by tape heads whenever a picture is being displayed. It can be read during jog transport and still picture playback, but not during fast forward or rewind. Combining VITC with LTC allows timecode to be read at all times. See also LTC. WAV A waveform audio file format (*.wav). The standard audio file format of the Windows operating system. See also AIFF. Waveform The electronic pattern of a video signal. Used to adjust setup and gain by means of color bars and other standard signals. XML Abbreviation of eXtensible Markup Language. A markup language for describing the structure of documents and data. Markup languages describe structure by embedding special strings called tags in the body of the text. XML allows users to define their own tags, which can used to describe other markup languages. For this reason, XML is often referred to as a metalanguage.

signal is sampled at 13.5 MHz, and the two color difference signals are sampled alternately at 6.75 MHz at the same time as the luminance signal. Cr is the digital version of the component R-Y signal, and Cb is the digital version of the B-Y signal. Y, R-Y, B-Y The analog luminance signal (Y) and color difference signals (R-Y and BY). Y provides purely luminance information, and the two color difference signals together provide color information. Color information is the difference between luminance and red, and the difference between luminance and blue. These signals are extracted from the original RGB source (camera or telecine). The Y, R-Y, and B-Y signals are the basis for many television systems. For example, the 3 signals were digitized in ITU-R 601 as 4:2:2 component digital signals. In the PAL and NTSC systems, these 3 signals are used to generate the final composite signal.

Appendixes

Sync Synchronization between tracks. When a clip is placed on the timeline, all of its tracks are in sync. However, when a clip is placed at separate locations, there is no sync relationship between the locations.

Transition A changeover at the end of one segment and the start of another. In video editing, the simplest type of transition is a cut, in which the last frame of the first segment is immediately followed by the first frame of the second segment.

Y/C A television transmission system that uses 2 separate signals to send luminance data (Y) and color data (C). Picture quality is higher when composite signals or CVBS signals are transmitted. YUV Component signals used in color television transmission. There are 3 separate signals for luminance and color data. YUV signals are composed of 1 luminance signal and 2 color difference signals. Therefore, picture quality is higher than that of composite video or S-video. YUV is often used at television stations and professional studios that use Betacam video equipment.

Y, Cr, Cb Digital luminance and color difference signals specified for ITUR 601 coding. The Y luminance

Glossary

871

Index A

Index

872

AAF overview 560 AAF files exporting 569 importing 564 Add Title dialog 403 Administrators group 23 Advanced Chromakey 353 Advanced Color Correction 366 After Color Corrections 377 applying color correction results to related events 377 Color Match Control 376 Curves Group 375 HSL Group 372 playing Advanced Color Corrector events in real time 378 Secondary Group 376 source clip relationship function 377 Advanced Color Corrector 366 Color Corrector Viewers 369 main menu 372 names and functions of parts 367 After Effect 295 Audio Equalizer names and functions of parts 430 operations 433 Audio Group Bus Fader names and functions of parts 451 PGM bus fader operation section 451 Audio Group Bus Routing Tool names and functions of parts 448 Audio Input Tool channel display section 425 names and functions of parts 425 operations 428 Audio level 428 meter display 428 reset to 0 dB 428 wave pipe display 426 Audio Mixer names and functions of parts 435 operations 441 track display section 435 Audio monitor meter display 455 Audio Output Tool Monitor tab 454 names and functions of parts 454 Output Meter tab 455

Index

Audio rubber band 284, 441 Audio tools 424 Audio track routing to the PGM busses 441 solo function 441 Audio Voice Over Tool names and functions of parts 458, 463 operations 460

B Backup to Folder dialog names and functions of parts 672 Basic editing operations 34 Batch digitizing of multiple clips 110 Batch Properties dialog names and functions of parts 622 Bin(s) 45, 298 copying 65 creating 65 moving 66 putting into the trash 66 retrieving from the trash 66

C CD audio clip 26, 63, 140 CG Clips 403 CG Editor 403 CG Editor Properties dialog 628 Display tab 630 Keyframe tab 631 CG Templates 420 Chromakey 353 Clip Audio Control Tool names and functions of parts 443 Clip Composite dialog 199 Clip effects 697 Clip icon 27 Picture Icon Play 71 Clip type icon 27 Clip(s) copying 69 creating 63 effects 697 exporting 508 information held by all clips 25 moving 70 name 25, 27 renaming 67 retrieving from the trash 66, 70 selecting 68 types 25

Color correction 355 Color Corrector Properties Dialog 371 color labeling items 71 Color matte clip creating 115 Command button list 814 Edit tab 817 General tab 830 Play tab 814 Special tab 824 Common window control 29 Composite clips 273 Control Panel functions 835 DMW-C1 Media Bar Control Panel 835 DMW-C2 Jog & Shuttle Control Panel 836 DMW-C3 Audio Control Panel 840 DMW-C5 Editing Control Panel 842 Customization 570 window layouts 30

D Data source 24 Device Properties dialog 584 Hardware Settings tab 586 Output Settings tab 589 Synchronization Offsets tab 588 Digitizing digitized indicators 27 margins 603 Dupe (duplicate) 868 Duplicate clips and frames 290 Duration 25 DVD exporting 483 importing 128 DVD Export Tool names and functions of parts 484 DVD video clips 26, 140 DX Plug-Ins 379

E Edit points setting 243 Edit while digitizing 256 Editing operations linear-like editing 258 overwrite editing 247 replace editing 252

Export EDL Tool names and functions of parts 556 Export Settings dialog 634 names and functions of parts 635 Exporting changing the settings 508 clips 508 EDL 559 sequential files 508

F FAM 509 Flash frames 290 Focus hot key assignment buttons 832 Folder(s) 298 FTC 25 Full Effect Editor 311, 383 FX Explorer names and functions of parts 297 FX Properties dialog 306

moving 70 putting into the trash 70 renaming 67 retrieving from the trash 70 selecting 64, 68

K Key track 253 Keyboard functions 850 Keyframe 303, 316, 321, 388, 392 applying to clips on the Timeline 303 audio rubber band 284 operations 321, 392

L

HD-format project 44

Labeling, color 71 Linear-like editing 258 List View pane 45 display mode 51 operations 68 Picture and Text View mode 55 Picture View mode 51 Text View mode 53 Logging Properties dialog 601 margins 603 names and functions of parts 602 Logging Tool names and functions of parts 84 Logging/digitizing 82

I

M

G General Properties dialog names and functions of parts 655 Generate SG Clip tool names and functions of parts 112

H

Import CD Audio Tool names and functions of parts Import clip 25, 63, 139 Import DVD Tool 128 names and functions of parts Import EDL Tool names and functions of parts 562 Import File Settings dialog names and functions of parts Import File tool names and functions of parts Imported audio adjustment 139 Imported image adjustment 139 Importing CD audio clip 140 clips 25, 139, 554 DVDs 128 EDL 554 Index picture 25, 27 Information display area 45 Metadata Window 56 Item copying 69

133

129 551,

633 117

Index

sequence 243 splice-in editing 250 Editing tools 142 EDL 549 exporting 559 importing 554 usable formats 549 Effect applying to clips on the timeline 302 changing parameter settings 318, 390 editing 318, 390 list 697 preview 318, 390 saving into bins 300 timeline 316, 388 View pane 297 Viewer 313, 318, 385 Effect Editor basic operations 318, 390 chromakey 353 Effect timeline 316, 388 Effect Viewer 313, 318, 385 keyframe 321, 392 names and functions of parts 309, 312, 380, 384 parameter display section 314, 386 Effect Editor Properties dialog 624 Display tab 626 Keyframe tab 627 Effect tools 296 Effect Viewer 313, 385 splitting screen into two panes 318 End point 25 Equalizer setting 433 Equalizing 433 equalizer curve 433 Essence marks 868 EX clip 26 Export AAF Tool names and fnctions of parts 566 Export dialog bits 504 channel count 504 CODEC 502, 504 color 502 data rate 503 frame aspect ratio 502 frame rate 502 names and functions of parts 497, 506 resolution 502 sampling frequency 504

Margin(s) 25 changing 661 digitizing 603 Mark In point 25 Mark Out point 25 Marker List 227 names and functions of parts 228 Master Viewer names and functions of parts 161 Match TC 165, 826 Media offline clip 291 Media playback mode 39 Metadata Metadata Window 56 Metadata Window Properties dialog 598 Mixing down audio tracks 288 Motion tracking 338 example operating procedures 339 methods 338 Tracking plate settings 349 using tracking data 350 Multi Camera recording mode 211

Index

873

Multiple Camera Editor 201 names and functions of parts 202 timeline 204 MXF 509 MXF clip 26, 63

N New Project dialog Format tab 60 Media Vaults tab 61 names and functions of parts 59 Stream Defaults tab 62 NS-CAT mobile application 679

O Index

Operating system group 23 Output track data 25

P P2 Export Tool names and functions of parts 539 Parameter display section 314, 386 PD-EDL 870 Picture and Text View mode 55 Picture Icon Play 71 Picture View mode 300 Power Users group 23 Pre-Edit Properties dialog 605 Project 25, 82 checking project properties 661 moving 66 Project Explorer names and functions of parts 44 operations 64, 68 response to double clicks 660 Project Explorer Properties dialog 593 Project group 44 creating 64 Project Properties dialog 649 Format tab 651 Media Vaults tab 652 names and functions of parts 650 Stream Defaults tab 653 proxy only media 292

Q Quick trim 280 AB-side trimming 280 A-side trimming 280 B-side trimming 281 in Composer mode 280 in Segment mode 281 slide trimming 281 slip trimming 281 trim amount 280

874

Index

R Real-time slow motion 231 Record to VTR Settings dialog 657 Record to VTR tool assemble edit 493 crash recording 492 first edit + assemble 493 insert edit 493 names and functions of parts 484, 488 Recording to disc 486 Recording to tape 494 in assemble edit mode 494 in crash rec mode 494 in first edit + assemble mode 494 in insert edit mode 495 Reel 97 creating 97, 99 deleting 97 renaming 97 selecting 97 Reel clip 25, 63 after registering 661 Reel database dialog 93 Reel Information dialog 96 Renaming 67 Render To Bin clip 26 Render To Bin dialog mixing down audio tracks 288 names and functions of parts 225 Rendering Render (menu item) 191 render indicators 172 transitions 279 Restore from File dialog names and functions of parts 675 Reverse match frame 289 Rotospline masks 331 importing and exporting keyframes 336 operating procedure 331 parameters 332 tracks 335

S Scroll Speed Dialog 418 SD-format project 44 Search bin 67 item 79 narrowing down 79 using the first letter 67 Search dialog Detail tab 77 General tab 76 Names and functions of parts 75

Search Result folder 45, 74 Secondary Color Corrector 355 Sequence 26, 63 Sequence cut, copy, and paste operations 255 Sequence Settings dialog names and functions of parts 196 Sequence Template Settings dialog 197 Sequence-in-sequence function 253 SG clip 26, 63 creating 114 Shortcut key 855 Simple Effect Editor 308, 379 Sony tablet S1 679 Source Viewer digitize mode 146 names and functions of parts 145 normal mode 145 Speed clip creating 270 Speed Control dialog Basic dialog 232 Detailed dialog 235 Simple dialogs 231 Start point 25 Status indicator 27 Still images 271 Storyboard 174 editing 265 Sub clip(s) creating 99 creating automatically with timecode breaks 102 timecode 87 Sync lock 179 System settings 577 System Properties dialog 581 names and functions of parts 582

T Taskbar menu 40 names and functions of parts 39 Technical Monitor names and functions of parts 104 Timecode Window 229 displayable values 229 selection menu 229 Timeline 175 audio rubber band 284 Head (menu item) 193 key track 178, 253 Multiple Camera Editor 204 Sync Break (menu item) 193 Tail (menu item) 193

User setting management 662 Configuration List dialog 36

V Vault 24 Media Vaults tab 652 Video playback media mode 39 Voice Disguise function 401 Voice over clip 26 Auto dissolve 616 VST Plug-Ins 379

W Window converting to tab 32 size 30 Working with Sonaps 690 Working with XDCAM 81, 509

Index

track fader level 284 Timeline Editor names and functions of parts 172 rendering 172 Timeline Editor Properties dialog 607 Audio Scrub tab 613 Display tab 609 Edit tab 610 Saving tab 617, 618 Shortcut Key tab 615 Trim tab 612 Voice Over tab 616 Timeline searching 289 Timeline Settings dialog names and functions of parts 195, 200 TitleMotion 423 TitleMotion clip 26, 63 Total clip length 25 Track lock 179 Track panel 177 mapping 178 patching tracks 178 Track patching 178, 254 Transition adding, deleting, and adjusting effects 278 adjusting start and end points 277 effects 792 operating on transition effects 307 previewing 279 Transition Settings dialog 210 Trash 44, 298 emptying 67 putting into 66, 70 retrieving from 66, 70 Tree View pane (of FX Explorer) 297 operations 298 Tree View pane (of Project Explorer) 44 Trim modes selecting 216 Trim Viewer names and functions of parts 213 Trimming 212 Trimming operations extend function 277 inserting filler 277 on-the-fly trimming 279

X XDCAM clip 26 XDCAM Explorer names and functions of parts 511 XDCAM Export Tool names and functions of parts 528 XDCAM Import Tool 521 XML 871 XPRI NS Editing Software 22 starting 34 XPRI NS Proxy 23

U Up/Down Convert Tuning Tool 198 User environment 36 User layouts 670 customization 30 GUI Properties 579

Index

875

The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual. Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation.

NS-N2100/N1000P (WW) 3-106-020-12(1)

Sony Corporation © 2007